The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutDDW-2024-004232 For the Construction of the Cottonwoods Connection District Project No.: SA021 Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 Technical Specifications January 4, 2024 OWNER Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy 3430 East Danish Road Cottonwood Heights, Utah 84093 ENGINEER Hazen and Sawyer 10619 South Jordan Gateway, Suite 130 South Jordan, UT 84095 1/3/2024 Bids will be received at the Utah Public Procurement Place until 12:00 pm on February 5, 2024 (https://bids.sciquest.com/apps/Router/PublicEvent?CustomerOrg=StateOfUtah ). Volume 2 of 4: Divisions 26 – 43 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -1 COTTONWOODS CONNECTION PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Volume 1 – Divisions 00 through 13 Volume 2 – Divisions 26 through 46 Section DIVISION 00 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 00030 Notice Inviting Bids 00040 List of Prequalified General Contractors 00100 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid 00310 Bid Schedule 00320 Bid Bond 00330 Information Required of Bidder CONTRACTUAL DOCUMENTS 00500 Agreement 00510 Preselection Contract Assignment 00610 Performance Bond 00620 Payment Bond 00630 Notice of Award 00631 Notice to Proceed 00632 Application for Payment 00633 Change Order Form 00634 Notice of Substantial Completion 00635 Certificate of Final Completion 00636 Consent of Surety for Final Payment 00637 Affidavit of Payment 00638 Chlorine Risk Management Requirements CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00700 General Conditions Article 1 – Definitions Article 2 – Preliminary Matters Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse Article 4 – Availability of Lands; Physical Conditions; Reference Points Article 5 – Bonds and Insurance Article 6 – Contractor's Responsibilities Article 7 – Other Work Article 8 – Owner's Responsibilities Article 9 – Engineer's Status During Construction Article 10 – Changes in the Work Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -2 Article 11 – Change of Contract Price Article 12 – Change of Contract Time Article 13 – Warranty and Guarantee; Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work Article 14 – Payments to Contractor, Liquidated Damages and Completion Article 15 – Suspension of Work and Termination Article 16 – Notice Article 17 – Subcontract Limitations Article 18 – Patents and Copyrights TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 20 00 Measurement and Payment 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 29 73 Schedule of Values 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures 01 31 13 Coordination 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 32 00 Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 35 10 Pipe Loading Restrictions 01 35 20 Confined Space Entry Plan 01 42 00 References 01 43 33 Manufacturer’s Field Services 01 45 16.13 Contractor Quality Control 01 45 23 Testing Services Furnished by Contractor 01 45 33 Special Inspections 01 50 00 Permits 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 01 52 00 Construction Facilities 01 55 00 Contractor Access and Parking 01 55 50 Traffic Control 01 55 58 Temporary Pavement Markings 01 57 00 Temporary Controls 01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 01 57 40 Temporary Pumping Systems 01 57 52 Dewatering and Flow Diversion for Streamwork 01 58 00 Utility Relocation Requirements 01 61 00 Product Requirements and Options 01 65 00 Product Delivery Requirements 01 66 00 Product Storage and Protection Requirements 01 71 23 Field Engineering 01 71 33 Protection of Work and Property Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -3 DIVISION 01 (continued) 01 73 00 Execution of Work 01 73 23 Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management 01 75 00 Checkout and Startup Procedures 01 77 19 Closeout Requirements 01 78 23 Operations and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents DIVISION 02 02 41 00 Site Demolition DIVISION 03 03 11 00 Concrete Formwork 03 15 00 Concrete Accessories 03 15 16 Joints in Concrete 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel 03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishes 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 40 00 Precast Concrete 03 60 00 Grout DIVISION 05 05 05 13 Galvanizing 05 05 23 Metal Fastening 05 10 00 Metal Materials 05 12 00 Structural Steel 05 13 00 Stainless Steel 05 14 00 Structural Aluminum 05 50 00 Metal Fabrication 05 51 33 Ladders 05 52 00 Guards and Railings 05 53 00 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors 05 55 00 Steel Treads and Nosings DIVISION 07 07 13 50 Waterproofing 07 21 00 Building Insulation 07 90 00 Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking DIVISION 09 09 90 00 Painting 09 90 10 Pipeline Coatings and Linings 09 97 00 Special Coating Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -4 DIVISION 13 13 34 23.26 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers DIVISION 26 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 19 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 60 Low Voltage Electric Motors 26 09 16 Electric Controls and Relays 26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 42 00 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection 26 42 10 Galvanic Cathodic Protection 26 43 13 Surge Protective Devices 26 50 00 Lighting DIVISION 31 31 00 01 Earthwork 31 05 16 Aggregate Materials 31 05 19 Geotextiles 31 10 00 Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation 31 23 19 Dewatering 31 23 24 Flowable Fill 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfill 31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 31 42 00 Gravity Retaining Walls DIVISION 32 32 10 00 Paving and Surfacing 32 11 00 Surface Restoration 32 31 13 Steel Fencing 32 90 00 Final Grading and Landscaping DIVISION 33 33 05 39.23 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 05 61 Utility Structures 33 71 19 Underground Electrical DIVISION 40 40 05 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 05 Piping General Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -5 DIVISION 40 (continued) 40 05 07 Pipe Supports 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 19.05 Earthquake Resistant Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 24.23 Steel Pipe for Water Service 40 05 31 PVC, CPVC Pipe 40 05 33 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe 40 05 41 Piping Expansion Compensation 40 05 51 Valves, General 40 05 57 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators 40 05 61 Gate Valves 40 05 62 Eccentric Plug Valve 40 05 63 Ball Valves 40 05 33 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe 40 05 64.10 Double Eccentric Butterfly Valves 40 06 65.23 Check Valves 40 05 78 Air Valves for Water Service 40 05 97 Piping and Equipment Identification Systems 40 06 20 Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedule 40 61 13 Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 15 Process Control System Submittals 40 61 21 Process Control System Testing 40 61 21.71 Factory Witness Test 40 61 21.72 Field Testing 40 61 21.73 Final Acceptance Test 40 61 23 Signal Coordination Requirements 40 61 24 Quality Assurance 40 61 26 Process Control System Training 40 61 90 Schedules and Control Descriptions, General 40 61 91 Process Control System Instrument List 40 61 93 Process Control System Input/Output List 40 61 96 Process Control Descriptions 40 62 00 Computer System Hardware and Ancillaries 40 63 43 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) 40 66 00 Network and Communication Equipment 40 66 33 Fiber Optic System 40 67 00 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Systems 40 68 00.13 Process Control Software (Modify Existing) 40 70 00 Instrumentation For Process Systems 40 71 13.13 Inline Magnetic Flow Meters 40 71 79.16 Flow Switches 40 72 76.26 Level Switches (Floats) 40 73 13 Pressure and Differential Pressure Gauges 40 73 20 Pressure Transmitters 40 74 63 Temperature Transmitters Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -6 DIVISION 40 (continued) 40 75 13 ph-ORP Analyzers 40 75 16 Conductivity Analyzers 40 75 53 Turbidity Analyzers 40 77 26.26 Intrusion Switch – Magnetic 40 78 00 Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 59 Power Supplies 40 79 00 Miscellaneous Instruments, Valves, and Fittings DIVISION 43 43 23 31.33 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump DIVISION 46 46 00 00 Equipment General Provisions VOLUME 3: DRAWINGS VOLUME 4: STEEL PIPE PRE-SELECTION PACKAGE APPENDIX A: GEOTECHNICAL REPORT “Geotechnical/Geological Study – Cottonwoods Connection” dated November 29, 2023 Prepared by Gerhart Cole and Delve Underground (GC Project Number 22-1491) APPENDIX B: APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS Approved Shop Drawings for welded steel pipe for CC-1 Pipeline Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Electrical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 00-1 SECTION 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for, or incidental, to the furnishing and installation of all electrical work as shown on the Drawings, and as specified in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and completely coordinate with the work of other trades involved in the general construction. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation shall be furnished and installed as part of this work. The Contractor shall obtain approved Shop Drawings showing wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, roughing-in and hook up details for all equipment and comply therewith. All electrical work shall be complete and left in operating condition in accordance with the intent of the Drawings and the Specifications for the electrical work. B. Reference Section 40 61 13  Process Control System General Provisions and General Requirements in Division 01 for scope of work details as they relate to the Division 40 Instrumentation and Control System Subcontractor. C. The electrical scope of work for this project primarily includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Coordinate with serving electrical utility for new 200A, 480VAC, 3 phase, 4 wire electrical service for SLAR/CC-1 Connection Vault. 2. Furnish and install power panelboards, lighting panelboards, dry-type transformers, and other low voltage electrical power distribution equipment. 3. Furnish and install all aboveground raceway systems including conduit, fittings, boxes, supports, and other pertinent components. 4. Furnish and install all underground raceway systems including conduit, fittings, manholes, handholes and other pertinent components. 5. Furnish and install all low and medium voltage wire and cable resulting in a complete and operable electrical system. 6. Furnish and install new lighting systems and wiring devices. 7. Other electrical work as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. 02 1 5 2 3 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Electrical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 00-2 D. All material and equipment must be the product of an established, reputable, and approved manufacturer; must be new and of first-class construction; must be designed and guaranteed to perform the service required; and must bear the label of approval of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., where such approval is available for the product of the listed manufacturer as approved by the Engineer. E. When a specified or indicated item has been superseded or is no longer available, the manufacturer's latest equivalent type or model of material or equipment as approved by the Engineer shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Where the Contractor's selection of equipment of specified manufacturers or additionally approved manufacturers requires changes or additions to the system design, the Contractor shall be responsible in all respects for the modifications to all system designs, subject to approval of the Engineer. The Contractor's bid shall include all costs for all work of the Contract for all trades made necessary by such changes, additions or modifications or resulting from any approved substitution. G. Furnish and install all stands, racks, brackets, supports, and similar equipment required to properly serve the equipment which is furnished under this Contract, or equipment otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. H. All electrical components and systems (e.g., conduit and other raceways, freestanding equipment, etc.) and their anchorage, including electrical equipment foundations, shall be designed to resist the controlling load combination of gravity loads, operational forces, wind forces, seismic forces, thermal loads, and any other applicable forces required in accordance with the governing Building Code and Section 01 73 23 – Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components. Seismic design shall be in accordance with ASCE 7 Chapter 13 unless the nonstructural component meets the criteria to be exempt. 1.2 EQUIPMENT LOCATION A. The Drawings show the general location of feeders, transformers, outlets, conduits, and circuit arrangements. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all of the details involved. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and shall arrange such work accordingly; furnishing such fittings, junction boxes, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. The Contractor shall refer to the entire Drawing set to verify openings, special surfaces, and location of other equipment, or other special equipment prior to roughing-in for panels, switches, and other outlets. The Contractor shall verify all equipment dimensions to ensure that proposed equipment will fit properly in spaces indicated. B. Where outlets are shown near identified equipment furnished by this or other Contractors, it is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings that the outlet be located at the equipment to be served. The Contractor shall coordinate the location of these Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Electrical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 00-3 outlets to be near the final location of the equipment served whether placed correctly or incorrectly on the Drawings. 1.3 LOCAL CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall examine the site and become familiar with conditions affecting the work. The Contractor shall investigate, determine, and verify locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near the site, and shall determine such locations in conjunction with all public and/or private utility companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction. All costs, both temporary and permanent to connect all utilities, shall be included in the Bid. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling and coordinating with the local utility for temporary and permanent services. B. In addition, the Contractor shall relocate all duct banks, lighting fixtures, receptacles, switches, boxes, and other electrical equipment as necessary to facilitate the Work included in this project. Costs for such work shall be included in the Bid. C. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating all electric utility equipment installations with the serving electric utility. The Contractor shall furnish and install all electric utility equipment required by the electric utility to be installed by the Contractor whether specifically shown on the Drawings or not. D. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following electrical utility equipment as a minimum: 1. Concrete transformer pads constructed as instructed by the electric utility. 2. Primary and or secondary ductbank and manholes 3. Metering equipment cabinets and/or bases 4. Conduit and wire required from metering cabinet to metering current transformers and potential transformers. 5. Secondary conductors 6. Secondary terminations E. The electric utility will furnish and install the following equipment: 1. Primary conductors and terminations 2. Utility Transformers F. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring all electric utility equipment and construction installed by the Contractor is furnished and installed in accordance with the electric utility’s design specifications and requirements. The Contractor is fully responsible for coordinating all required work with the electric utility. Any additional required electric Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Electrical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 00-4 utility construction or equipment not specified herein or shown on the Drawings shall be supplied by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. G. The serving electrical utility is: Mitchell Lindsay Rocky Mountain Power 801-576-6103 mitchell.lindsay@pacifcorp.com 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures and the requirements of the individual Specification Sections, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 3. Spare Parts List 4. Proposed Testing Methods and Reports of Certified Shop Tests 5. Reports of Certified Field Tests 6. Manufacturer’s Representative’s Certification B. Submittals shall be sufficiently complete in detail to enable the Engineer to determine compliance with Contract requirements. C. Submittals will be approved only to the extent of the information shown. Approval of an item of equipment shall not be construed to mean approval for components of that item for which the Contractor has provided no information. D. Some individual electrical specification sections may require a Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter to be submitted. If the CD&E letter is required and shop drawings are submitted without the letter, the submittal will be rejected. The letter shall include all comments, deviations and exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by the Contractor AND Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. This letter shall include a copy of this specification section. In the left margin beside each and every paragraph/item, a letter "C", "D", or "E" shall be typed or written in. The letter "C" shall be for full compliance with the requirement. The letter "D" shall be for a deviation from the requirement. The letter "E" shall be for taking exception to a requirement. Any requirements with the letter "D" or "E" beside them shall be provided with a full typewritten explanation of the deviation/exception. Handwritten explanation of the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Electrical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 00-5 deviations/exceptions is not acceptable. The CD&E letter shall also address deviations, and exceptions taken to each Drawing related to this Specification Section. E. Submit design for all nonstructural electrical components and systems and their anchorage in accordance with the governing Building Code and Section 01 73 23 – Anchorage and Bracing of Non-Structural Components. 1.5 APPLICABLE CODES AND REQUIREMENTS A. Conformance 1. Unless otherwise noted, all work, equipment and materials furnished shall conform with the latest available version of the existing rules, requirements and specifications of the following: a. Insurance Rating Organization having jurisdiction b. The serving electrical utility company c. The currently adopted edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) d. The National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) e. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) f. The Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) g. The American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) h. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) i. The requirements of the Occupational Safety Hazards Act (OSHA) j. The National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Standard of Installation k. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) l. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) m. All other applicable Federal, State/Commonwealth and local laws and/or ordinances. 2. All material and equipment shall bear the inspection labels of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., if the material and equipment is of the class inspected by said laboratories. B. Nonconformance Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Electrical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 00-6 1. Any paragraph of requirements in these Specifications, or Drawings, deviating from the rules, requirements and Specifications of the above organizations shall be invalid and their (the above organizations) requirements shall hold precedent thereto. The Contractor shall be held responsible for adherence to all rules, requirements and specifications as set forth above. Any additional work or material necessary for adherence will not be allowed as an extra, but shall be included in the Bid. Ignorance of any rule, requirement, or Specification shall not be allowed as an excuse for nonconformity. Acceptance by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from the expense involved for the correction of any errors which may exist in the drawings submitted or in the satisfactory operation of any equipment. C. Certification 1. Where applicable, upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain certificate(s) of inspection and approval from the inspection organization having jurisdiction and shall deliver same to the Engineer and the Owner. 1.6 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor shall reference the General Conditions and Section 01 11 00  Summary of Work. 1.7 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER A. The Contractor shall reference the General Conditions and Section 01 51 00  Temporary Utilities. 1.8 TESTS A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall perform tests for operation, load (Phase) balance, overloads, and short circuits. Tests shall be made with and to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer. B. The Contractor shall perform all field tests and shall provide all labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing and shall pay for electric power required for the tests. All defective material and workmanship disclosed shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that all circuits and devices are in good operating condition. Test shall be such that each item of control equipment will function not less than five (5) times. C. Refer to each individual specification section for detailed test requirements. D. The Contractor shall complete the installation and field testing of the electrical installation at least two (2) weeks prior to the start-up and testing of any equipment served by that electrical equipment. During the period between the completion of electrical installation and the start-up and testing of all other equipment, the Contractor shall make all components of the Work available as it is completed for their use in performing Preliminary and Final Field Tests. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Electrical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 00-7 E. Before each test commences, the Contractor shall submit a detailed test procedure, and also provide test engineer resume, personnel and scheduling information for the approval by the Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish detailed test procedures for any electrical equipment required as part of the field tests of other systems. 1.9 INFRARED INSPECTION A. Just prior to the final acceptance of a piece of equipment, the Contractor shall perform an infrared inspection to locate and correct all heating problems associated with electrical equipment terminations. The infrared inspection shall be performed by a third party, independent testing agency, not the Electrical Contractor. B. Equipment located in hazardous areas shall be excluded from infrared testing requirements since the equipment in those areas is not intended to be operated while the enclosure is open. The infrared inspection shall apply to all new equipment and existing equipment in non-hazardous areas that is in any way modified under this Contract. All heating problems detected with new equipment furnished and installed under the Scope of this Contract shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All problems detected with portions of existing equipment modified under this Contract shall also be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Any issues detected with portions of existing equipment that were not modified under this Contract are not the responsibility of the Contractor. Despite the Contractor not being held responsible for these problems, the Contractor shall report them to the Owner and Engineer immediately for resolution. D. The infrared inspection report shall include both digital and IR pictures positioned side by side. Both the digital and IR pictures shall be clear and high quality. Fuzzy, grainy, or poorly illuminated pictures are not acceptable. The IR picture shall be provided with a temperature scale beside it, and an indication of the hot spot temperature in each picture. Reports shall be furnished in a 3-ring binder, with all pages printed in full color, with equipment assemblies separated by tabs. 1.10 SCHEDULES AND FACILITY OPERATIONS A. Since the equipment testing required herein shall require that certain pieces of equipment be taken out of service, all testing procedures and schedules must be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval one (1) month prior to any work beginning. When testing has been scheduled, the Engineer must be notified 48 hours prior to any work to allow time for load switching and/or alternation of equipment. In addition, all testing that requires temporary shutdown of facility equipment must be coordinated with the Owner/Engineer so as not to affect proper facility operations. B. At the end of the workday, all equipment shall be back in place and ready for immediate use should a facility emergency arise. In addition, should an emergency condition occur Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Electrical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 00-8 during testing, at the request of the Owner, the equipment shall be placed back in service immediately and turned over to Owner personnel. C. In the event of accidental shutdown of Owner equipment, the Contractor shall notify Owner personnel immediately to allow for an orderly restart of affected equipment. D. Maintaining the operation of these facilities during the duration of the construction period is essential and required. The Contractor shall furnish and install temporary equipment as required to maintain facility operation. Reference Section 01 14 00 – Coordination with Owner’s Operations for construction sequencing and specific operational constraint information. 1.11 MATERIALS HANDLING A. Materials arriving on the job site shall be stored in such a manner as to keep material free of rust and dirt and so as to keep material properly aligned and true to shape. Rusty, dirty, or misaligned material will be rejected. Electrical conduit shall be stored to provide protection from the weather and accidental damage. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be stored on even supports and in locations not subject to direct sun rays or excessive heat. Cables shall be sealed, stored, and handled carefully to avoid damage to the outer covering or insulation and damage from moisture and weather. Adequate protection shall be required at all times for electrical equipment and accessories until installed and accepted. Materials damaged during shipment, storage, installation, or testing shall be replaced or repaired in a manner meeting with the approval of the Engineer. If space heaters are provided in a piece of electrical equipment, they shall be temporarily connected to a power source during storage. The Contractor shall store equipment and materials in accordance with Section 01 55 00  Contractor Access and Parking. 1.12 WARRANTIES A. Unless otherwise specified in an individual specification section, all electrical equipment and electrical construction materials shall be provided with a warranty in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00  Equipment General Provisions and the General Conditions. 1.13 TRAINING A. Unless otherwise specified in an individual specification section, all training for electrical equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00  Equipment General Provisions. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, the materials to be provided under this Specification shall be the products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of all such items and Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Electrical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 00-9 shall be the manufacturer's latest design. The products shall conform to the applicable standards of UL and NEMA, unless specified otherwise. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards are not recognized. Equipment designed, manufactured, and labeled in compliance with IEC standards is not acceptable. B. All items of the same type or ratings shall be identical. This shall be further understood to include products with the accessories indicated. C. All equipment and materials shall be new, unless indicated or specified otherwise. D. The Contractor shall submit proof if requested by the Engineer that the materials, appliances, equipment, or devices that are provided under this Contract meet the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., in regard to fire and casualty hazards. The label of or listing by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., will be accepted as conforming to this requirement. 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Unless specifically noted otherwise, any reference in the Specifications or on the Drawings to any article, service, product, material, fixture, or item of equipment by name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing the type, function, and standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in such cases may use any article, device, product, material, fixture, or item of equipment which in the judgment of the Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 2.3 CONCRETE A. The Contractor shall furnish all concrete required for the installation of all electrical work, Concrete shall be Class A unless otherwise specified. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall meet the appropriate requirements of Division 03 of the Specifications. B. The Contractor shall provide concrete equipment pads for all free-standing electrical apparatus and equipment located on new or existing floors or slabs. The Contractor shall provide all necessary anchor bolts, channel iron sills, and other materials as required. The exact location and dimensions shall be coordinated for each piece of equipment well in advance of the scheduled placing of these pads. Equipment pads shall be 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and shall conform to standard detail for equipment pads shown on the Contract Drawings. Equipment pads shall not have more than 3” excess concrete beyond the edges of the equipment. C. The Contractor shall provide concrete foundations for all free-standing electrical apparatus and equipment located outdoors or where floors or slabs do not exist and/or are not or provided by others under this Contract. The Contractor shall provide all necessary anchor bolts, channel iron sills, and other materials as required. The location and dimensions shall be coordinated for each piece of equipment well in advance of the scheduled placing of the foundations. Equipment foundations shall be constructed as detailed on the Drawings or if not detailed on the Drawings shall be 6 inches thick Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Electrical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 00-10 minimum reinforced with #4 bars at 12-inch centers each way placed mid-depth. Concrete shall extend 6 inches minimum beyond the extreme of the equipment base and be placed on a compacted stone bed (#57 stone or ABC) 6 inches thick minimum. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Coordination 1. The Work shall be coordinated between all trades to avoid delays and unnecessary cutting, channeling and drilling. Sleeves shall be placed in concrete for passage of conduit wherever possible. B. Damage 1. The Contractor shall perform all chasing, channeling, drilling and patching necessary to the proper execution of this Contract. Any damage to the building, structure, or any equipment shall be repaired by qualified mechanics of the trades involved at the Contractor's expense. If, in the Engineer's judgment, the repair of damaged equipment would not be satisfactory, then the Contractor shall replace damaged equipment at the Contractor’s expense. C. Existing Equipment 1. Provide a suitable cover or plug for openings created in existing equipment as the result of work under this Contract. For example, provide round plugs in equipment enclosures where the removal of a conduit creates a hole and the enclosure. Covers and plugs shall maintain the NEMA rating of the equipment enclosure. Covers and plugs shall be watertight when installed in equipment located outdoors. 3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation and backfill required for the installation of all electrical work. All excavation and backfilling shall be in complete accordance with the applicable requirements of Division 31. 3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Wherever dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, come into contact, the Contractor shall isolate these metals as required with neoprene washers, nine (9) mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-1 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, connect, test, and place in satisfactory operating condition, all low voltage wire and cable indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein and/or required for proper operation. The work of connecting cables to equipment and devices shall be considered a part of this Section. All appurtenances required for the installation of wire and cable systems shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. B. The scope of this Section does not include internal wiring factory installed by electrical equipment manufacturers. C. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements and Section 26 05 33.16 – Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Low voltage wire, cable, and appurtenances shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) a. UL 13 – Standard for Power-Limited Circuit Cables b. UL 44 – Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables c. UL 83 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables d. UL 1277 – Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members e. UL 1581 – Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords f. UL 1685 – Standard for Vertical-Tray Fire-Propagation and Smoke-Release Test for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables g. UL 2556 – Wire and Cable Test Methods 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM B3 – Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-2 b. ASTM B8 – Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft c. ASTM B33 – Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes d. ASTM D69 – Standard Test Methods for Friction Tapes e. ASTM D4388 – Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes 3. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) a. ICEA S-58-679 – Standard for Control, Instrumentation and Thermocouple Extension Conductor Identification b. ICEA T-29-250 – Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests with Theoretical Heat Input Rate of 210,000 B.T.U./Hour 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) a. IEEE 1202 – Standard for Flame Testing of Cables 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the wire and cable manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Reports of Field Tests B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed material's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible Submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets for the following: a. Wire and cable Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-3 b. Power and control wire terminations c. Instrumentation cable terminations d. Shielded VFD cable terminations e. Pulling lubricant. 2. Cable pulling calculations (if required). 3. Wiring identification methods and materials. D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these specifications are being met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. 1.05 CABLE PULLING CALCULATIONS A. Prior to the installation of the wire and cable specified herein, the Contractor shall submit cable pulling calculations for Engineer review and approval when all of the following are true: 1. The amount of cable to be installed will be greater than 200 linear feet between pull points. 2. The installation will have one or more bends. 3. The wire and cable is size #1/0 AWG and larger. B. Cable pulling calculations shall be performed by a currently registered Professional Engineer in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located and shall define pulling tension and sidewall loading (sidewall bearing pressure values). PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The wire and cable to be furnished and installed for this project shall be the product of manufacturers who have been in the business of manufacturing wire and cable for a minimum of ten (10) years. Wire and cable shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. Only one (1) manufacturer for each wire and cable type shall be permitted. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-4 2.02 POWER AND CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE A. Power wire for and control wire shall less than #8AWG shall consist of insulated copper conductors with a nylon (or equivalent) outer jacket. Conductor insulation shall be rated 90°C for dry locations, 75°C for wet locations, and 600V. Insulated conductors shall be UL 83 Listed as NEC Type THHN/THWN. B. Power wire equal or larger than #8AWG shall have crosslinked polyethlene jacket, rated for 90°C for dry and wet locations and rated for 600/1000V. Conductors shall be UL44 Listed as NEC Type XHHW-2. C. Unless specified otherwise herein, conductors shall be stranded copper per ASTM B-8 and B-3, with Class B or C stranding contingent upon the size. Power conductors for lighting and receptacle branch circuits shall be solid copper per ASTM B-3. D. Power conductor size shall be no smaller than No. 12 AWG and Control conductor size shall be no smaller than No. 14 AWG. E. Multi-conductor cable assemblies shall include a grounding conductor and an overall PVC jacket. The jacket shall be PVC and resistant to abrasion, sunlight, and flame in accordance with UL 1277. Multi-conductor cable assemblies shall be UL 1277 Listed as NEC Type TC (Power and Control Tray Cable). F. Power wire and cable shall be as manufactured by the Okonite Company, the Southwire Company, General Cable, Encore Wire, or equal. 2.03 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE A. For single-analog signal applications, instrumentation cable shall consist of a single, twisted pair or triad of individually insulated and jacketed copper conductors with an overall cable shield and jacket. Conductor insulation shall be rated 90°C in both wet and dry locations, and 600V. The jacket shall be PVC and resistant to abrasion, sunlight, and flame in accordance with UL 1277. Cable shall be UL 1277 Listed as NEC Type TC (Power and Control Tray Cable). B. For multiple-analog signal applications, instrumentation cable shall consist of multiple, twisted pairs or triads (i.e. groups) of individually insulated and jacketed copper conductors with individual pair/triad shields (i.e. group shields) and an overall cable shield and jacket. Conductor insulation shall be rated 90°C in both wet and dry locations, and 600V. The jacket shall be PVC and resistant to abrasion, sunlight, and flame in accordance with UL 1277. Cable shall be UL 1277 Listed as NEC Type TC (Power and Control Tray Cable). C. Cable and group shields shall consist of overlapped aluminum/polyester tape/foil providing 100% coverage. Instrumentation cables shall include an overall copper shield drain wire. Cables containing multiple twisted pairs or triads shall also include group shield drain wires. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-5 D. Conductors, including drain wires, shall be tin or alloy coated (if available), soft, annealed copper, stranded per ASTM B-8, with Class B stranding unless otherwise specified. E. Instrumentation signal conductor size shall be no smaller than No. 16 AWG. F. Instrumentation cable shall be Okoseal-N Type P-OS (for single pair or triad applications) or Okoseal-N Type SP-OS (for multiple pair or triad applications) as manufactured by the Okonite Company, Belden equivalent, Southwire Company equivalent, or equal. 2.04 OTHER CABLES A. Category 6 UTP communication cables and fiber optic cables shall be as specified in Specification Section 40 66 00 – Network and Communication Equipment. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-6 2.05 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Conductors shall be identified using a color-coding method. Color coding for individual power, control, lighting, and receptacle conductors shall be as follows: 1. 480/277V AC Power a. Phase A – BROWN b. Phase B – ORANGE c. Phase C – YELLOW d. Neutral – GREY 2. 120/208V or 120/240V AC Power a. Phase A – BLACK b. Phase B – RED c. Phase C – BLUE d. Neutral – WHITE 3. DC Power a. Positive Lead – RED b. Negative Lead - BLACK 4. DC Control a. All wiring – BLUE 5. 120 VAC Control a. 120 VAC control wire shall be RED except for a wire entering a motor control center compartment, motor controller, or control panel which is an interlock. This interlock conductor shall be color coded YELLOW. For the purposes of this Section, an interlock is defined as any wiring that brings voltage into the above-mentioned equipment from a source outside that equipment. 6. 24 VAC Control a. All wiring - ORANGE 7. Equipment Grounding Conductor Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-7 a. All wiring - GREEN B. Individual conductors No. 2 AWG and smaller shall have factory color coded insulation. It is acceptable for individual conductors larger than No.2 AWG to be provided with factory color coded insulation as well, but it is not required. Individual conductors larger than No.2 AWG that are not provided with factory color coded insulation shall be identified by the use of colored tape in accordance with the requirements listed in Part 3 herein. Insulation colors and tape colors shall be in accordance with the color-coding requirements listed above. C. Conductors that are part of multi-conductor cable assemblies shall have black insulation. The conductor number shall be printed on each conductor’s insulation in accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 4. Each conductor No.2 AWG and smaller within the cable assembly shall also be identified with a heat shrink tag with color coded background. Each conductor larger than No.2 AWG within the cable assembly shall also be identified by the use of colored tape. Heat shrink tags and colored tape shall be in accordance with the requirements listed in Part 3 herein. Tape color and heat shrink tag background color shall be in accordance with the color-coding requirements listed above. 2.06 CABLE PULLING LUBRICANTS A. Cable pulling lubricants shall be non-hardening type and approved for use on the type of cable installed. Lubricant shall be Yellow #77 Plus by Ideal, Cable Gel by Greenlee, Poly-Gel by Gardner Bender, or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. General 1. All wire and cable furnished under this Contract, including wire and cable furnished under other Divisions, shall be installed in raceways (e.g., conduit) unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Wire and cable shall be installed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. Unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings, wire and cable shall be installed in separate raceways according to wiring type. For example, power wiring shall not be combined with control wiring, and control wiring shall not be combined with instrumentation wiring. 3. Wire shall be furnished and installed as single conductor cables, with limited exceptions. Multi-conductor cable assemblies shall only be installed where indicated on the Drawings, required by the NEC, or after obtaining written permission from the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-8 4. Where instrumentation cables are installed in control panels, motor controllers, and other locations, the Contractor shall arrange wiring to provide maximum clearance between these cables and other conductors. Instrumentation cables shall not be installed in same bundle with conductors of other circuits. 5. Instrumentation cable shielding shall be continuous and shall be grounded at one point only. B. Splices 1. Splices shall not be allowed in power or control wire and cable unless approved in writing by the Engineer. If unique field conditions exist or pulling calculations indicate that splices may be required, the Contractor shall submit a detailed request indicating why splices are required to the Engineer. The Engineer shall be under no obligation to grant such request. 2. Splicing materials shall be barrel type butt splice connectors and heat shrink tubing as manufactured by 3M, Ideal, or equal. The use of screw-on wire connectors (wire nuts) shall only be permitted for lighting and receptacle circuits. 3. No splicing of instrumentation cable is permitted. C. Wire and Cable Sizes 1. The sizes of wire and cable shall be as indicated on the Drawings, or if not shown, as approved by the Engineer. If required due to field routing, the size of conductors and respective conduit shall be increased so that the voltage drop measured from source to load does not exceed 2-1/2%. D. Additional Conductor Identification 1. In addition to the color-coding identification requirements specified in Part 2 herein, individual conductors shall be provided with heat shrinkable identification tags. Identification tags for individual conductors shall have a white background where the conductor insulation is colored. Identification tags for individual conductors shall have a colored background where the conductor insulation is black. Background color shall match that of the taping provided on the individual black conductors. 2. Multi-conductor cables shall be provided with heat shrinkable identification tags in accordance with Part 2 herein. 3. All wiring shall be identified at each point of termination. This includes but is not limited to identification at the source, load, and in any intermediate junction boxes where a termination is made. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner and Engineer to come to an agreement regarding a wire identification system prior to installation of any wiring. Wire numbers shall not be duplicated. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-9 4. Wire identification shall be by means of a heat shrinkable sleeve with appropriately colored background and black text. Wire sizes #14 AWG through #10 AWG shall have a minimum text size of 7 points. Wire sizes #8 AWG and larger shall have a minimum text size of 10 points. Sleeves shall be of appropriate length to fit the required text. The use of handwritten text for wire identification shall not be permitted. 5. Sleeves shall be suitable for the size of wire on which they are installed. Sleeves shall not be heat-shrunk onto control cables. Tags shall remain loose on cable to promote easier identification. For all other applications, sleeves shall be tightly affixed to the wire and shall not move. Sleeves shall be heat shrunk onto wiring with a heat gun approved for the application. Sleeves shall not be heated by any means which employs the use of an open flame. The Contractor shall take special care to ensure that the wiring insulation is not damaged during the heating process. 6. Sleeves shall be installed prior to the completion of the wiring terminations and shall be oriented so that they can be easily read. 7. Sleeves shall be polyolefin as manufactured by Brady, Seton, Panduit, or equal. 8. Wire identification in manholes, handholes, pull boxes, and other accessible components in the raceway system where the wiring is continuous (no terminations are made) shall be accomplished by means of a tag installed around the bundled group of individual conductors or around the outer conductor jacket of a multi-conductor cable. Identification shall utilize a FROM-TO system. Each group of conductors shall consist of all of the individual conductors in a single conduit or duct. The tag shall have text that identifies the bundle in accordance with the ‘FROM’ and ‘TO’ column for that particular conduit number in the conduit and wire schedule. Minimum text size shall be 10 point. The tag shall be affixed to the wire bundle by the use of nylon wire ties and shall be made of polyethylene as manufactured by Brady, Seton, Panduit, or equal. 9. Where colored tape is used to identify cables, it shall be wrapped around the cable with a 25% overlap and shall cover at least 2 inches of the cable. E. Wiring Supplies 1. Rubber insulating tape shall be in accordance with ASTM D4388. Friction tape shall be in accordance with ASTM D69. F. Training of Cable in Manholes, Handholes, and Vaults 1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and material required to train cables around cable vaults, manholes, and handholes. Sufficient length of cable shall be provided in each handhole, manhole, and vault so that the cable can be trained and racked in an approved manner. In training or racking, the radius of bend of any cable shall Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-10 be not less than the manufacturer's recommendation. The training shall be done in such a manner as to minimize chaffing. 2. Instrumentation cable shall be racked and bundled separate from AC wiring to maintain the required separation as follows: a. 18 inches for 480/277 VAC wiring b. 12 inches for 208/120 VAC wiring c. 6 inches for 24 VAC wiring G. Conductor Terminations 1. Where wires are terminated at equipment which requires lugs, connections shall be made by solderless mechanical lug, crimp type ferrule, or irreversible compression type lugs. Reference individual equipment Specification Sections as applicable for additional termination requirements. 2. Where enclosure sizes and sizes of terminals at limit switches, solenoid valves, float switches, pressure switches, temperature switches, and other devices make terminations impractical due to the size of the field wiring, the Contractor shall terminate field wiring in an adjacent junction box per the requirements of Section 26 05 33.16 – Boxes for Electrical Systems, complete with terminal strips. Contractor shall install the smaller wiring from the device to the junction box in a conduit, using the terminal strip as the means for joining the two different wire sizes. Splicing of wires in lieu of using terminal strips is not acceptable. 3. The cables shall be terminated in accordance with the cable and/or termination product manufacturer's instructions for the particular type of cable. 4. Shielded VFD cables shall be terminated with kits required by or recommended by the approved shielded VFD cable manufacturer. Termination kits shall be installed in strict accordance with the shielded VFD cable manufacturer’s and termination kit manufacturer’s instructions. 5. All spare conductors shall be terminated on terminal blocks mounted within equipment or junction boxes. Unless otherwise noted, coiling up of spare conductors within enclosure is not acceptable. H. Pulling Temperature 1. Cable shall not be installed when the temperature of the jacket is such that damage will occur due to low temperature embrittlement. When cable will be pulled with an ambient temperature of 40°F or less within a three (3) day period prior to pulling, the cable reels shall be stored three (3) days prior to pulling in a protected storage area with an ambient temperature of 55°F or more. Cable pulling shall be completed during the workday for which the cable is removed from the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-11 protected storage. Any cable reels with wire remaining on them shall be returned to storage at the completion of the workday. 3.02 TESTING A. All testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: 1. Shop Test a. Wires and cables shall be tested in accordance with the applicable ICEA Standards. Wire and cable shall be physically and electrically tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s standards. 2. Field Tests a. After installation, all wires and cables shall be tested for continuity. Testing for continuity shall be “test light” or “buzzer” style. b. After installation, wires and cables shall be tested for insulation resistance levels between conductors of the same circuit and between conductor and ground as follows: 1) For #8 AWG and larger 600V wire and cable, apply 1,000 VDC from a Megohmmeter for one (1) minute. Resistance shall be no less than 100 Megohms. 2) Instrumentation signal cable shall be tested from conductor to conductor, conductor to shield, and conductor to ground using a Simpson No. 260 volt-ohmmeter or approved equal. The resistance value shall be 200 Megohms or greater. 3) Insulation resistance testing is not required for power and control cables smaller than #8 AWG. c. Wires and cables shall be tested after required terminations are made, but before being connected to any equipment. d. If tests reveal defects or deficiencies, the Contractor shall make the necessary repairs or shall replace the cable as directed by the Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner. All conductors of a multi-phase circuit shall be replaced if one conductor fails the required testing. If part of a multi- set (parallel conductors per phase) circuit fails testing, only the set containing failure shall be replaced. e. All tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor who shall supply all testing equipment. Test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-12 Exhibit A Test Data – Megohms Test No. ____ Date:Company: Time:Location: Circuit:Circuit Length: Aerial:Duct:Buried:No. of Conductors Size:AWG MCM Shield: Insulation Material:Insulation Thickness:Voltage Rating:Age: Type: ______ Pothead ______ Terminal Location: Indoors ______ Outdoors ______ Number and Type of Joints: Recent Operating History: Manufacturer: State if Potheads or Terminals were grounded during test: List associated equipment included in test: Miscellaneous Information: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 19-13 Exhibit A Test Data – Megohms Test No. ____ Part Tested:Test Performed: ___________ Hours/Days: ___________ After Shutdown: ___________ Grounding Time:Dry Bulb Temperature: ___________ Wet Bulb Temperature: ___________ Test Voltage:Equipment Temperature: ___________ How Obtained: ___________ Relative Humidity: ___________ Absolute Humidity: ___________ Dew Point: ___________ Megohmmeter: Serial Number: __________ Range: ___________ Voltage: __________ Calibration Date: ___________ Test Connections To Line To Earth To Ground To Line To Earth To Ground To Line To Earth To Ground Test Connections To Line To Earth To Ground To Line To Earth To Ground To Line To Earth To Ground 1/4 Minute 5 Minutes 1/2 Minute 6 Minutes 3/4 Minute 7 Minutes 1 Minute 8 Minutes 2 Minutes 9 Minutes 3 Minutes 10 Minutes 4 Minutes 10/1 Minute Ratio Remarks: END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 26-1 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install grounding systems complete in accordance with the minimum requirements established by Article 250 of the NEC. Article 250 of the NEC shall be considered a minimum requirement for compliance with this Specification. B. Grounding of all instrumentation and control systems shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the manufacturer/system requirements and IEEE 1100. Conflicts shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Engineer. C. In addition to the NEC requirements, building structural steel columns [and metallic chemical storage tanks] shall be permanently and effectively grounded: D. Reference Section 26 05 00  Basic Electrical Requirements 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Equipment and materials covered under this Section shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. UL 467 – Grounding and Bonding Equipment 2. IEEE 81 – Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System. 3. IEEE 1100 – Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Reports of certified field tests. B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 12 1 9 2 2 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 26-2 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets. 2. Drawings and written description of how the Contractor intends to furnish and install the grounding system. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by these specifications shall be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 GROUND RODS AND GRID A. Ground rods shall be rolled to a commercially round shape from a welded copper-clad steel manufactured by the molten-welding process or by the electro-formed process (molecularly bonded). They shall have an ultimate tensile strength of 75,000 pounds per square inch (psi) and an elastic limit of 49,000 psi. The rods shall be not less than 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length; and the proportion of copper shall be uniform throughout the length of the rod. The copper shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.010 inch at any point on the rod. Ground rods shall be UL 467 listed. The ground rods shall be manufactured by Erico Products, Blackburn, or equal. B. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways and neutral conductors of wiring systems shall be grounded. C. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment and shall be extended to the ground grid surrounding the structure. The ground grid shall also be connected to the point of entrance of the metallic water service. Connection to the water pipe shall be made by a suitable ground clamp or lug connection to a plugged tee. If flanged pipes are encountered, connection shall be made with the lug bolted to the street side of the flanged connection. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 26-3 D. Where ground fault protection is employed, care shall be taken so that the connection of the ground and neutral does not interfere with the correct operation of the ground fault protection system. 2.03 FITTINGS A. Grounding connections to equipment shall be bolted. Cable end connections shall be made by non-reversible hydraulic crimp. Split bolt type connectors are not acceptable. Fittings shall be UL 467 listed. 2.04 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. An insulated equipment grounding conductor, which shall be separate from the electrical system grounded (neutral) conductor, shall be furnished and installed for all circuits. Insulation shall be of the same type as the ungrounded conductors in the raceway and shall be green in color. Equipment grounding conductors shall be furnished and installed in all conduits. Use of conduits as the NEC required equipment grounding conductor is not acceptable. 2.05 EQUIPMENT GROUNDS A. Equipment grounds shall be solid and continuous from a connection at earth to all distribution panelboards. Ground connections at panelboards, outlets, equipment, and apparatus shall be made in an approved and permanent manner. B. For all control panels, disconnect switches, and other electrical enclosures, equipment grounds and bonding jumpers shall be terminated individually on a ground bar or mechanical lugs. No wire nuts will be permitted. 2.06 GROUND BARS A. Ground bars shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings and where required in the Specifications. Ground bars shall be tin-plated copper, ¼-inch thick (minimum) with hole pairs spaced for NEMA 2-hole cable termination lugs. The number of hole pairs shall be as required for the number of cables terminated, plus four (4) spares (minimum). Ground bars shall be provided with insulated mounting hardware. 2.07 EXOTHERMIC WELDS A. All exothermic welding shall be completed per welding kit manufacturer's instructions. Exothermic welds shall be CadWeld by Erico or ThermoWeld. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 26-4 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Metal surfaces where grounding connections are to be made shall be clean and dry. Steel surfaces shall be ground or filed to remove all scale, rust, grease, and dirt. Copper and galvanized steel shall be cleaned with emery cloth to remove oxide before making connections. B. Ground Grid 1. A main ground grid shall be provided for each structure and interconnecting structure grids consisting of driven ground rods as shown on the Drawings. Ground rods shall be driven straight down into the earth, or if objects are encountered, at an angle to avoid the obstruction. 2. The ground rods shall be interconnected by the use of copper cable sized as shown on the Drawings. The interconnecting cables shall be connected to ground rods by hydraulic crimp or exothermic weld where buried, and removable bolted clamp where shown to be installed in test wells. The grounding cables shall be installed after the excavations for the building have been completed and prior to the pouring of concrete for the footings, mats, etc. Copper "pigtails" shall be connected to the ground grid and shall enter the buildings and structure from the outside and shall be connected to steel structures, and equipment as described in this Section and as required to provide a complete grounding system. The copper pigtails shall be hydraulically crimped or exothermically welded to the ground grid and connected to building reinforcement steel by hydraulic crimp. 3. Grounding conductors shall be continuous between points of connection; splices shall not be permitted. 4. Where conductors are exposed and subject to damage from personnel, traffic, etc., conductors shall be installed in metal raceway. The raceway shall be bonded to the grounding system. 5. Where subsurface conditions do not permit use of driven ground rods to obtain proper ground resistance, rods shall be installed in a trench or plate electrodes shall be provided, as applicable and necessary to obtain proper values of resistance. 6. Buried hydraulic crimp connections, exothermic welds, and ground ring shall not be backfilled until inspected by Engineer. C. Raceways 1. Conduit which enters equipment such as switchgear, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, variable frequency drives, instrument and control Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 26-5 panels, and similar equipment shall be bonded to the ground bus or ground lug, where provided, and as otherwise required by the NEC. 3.02 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: 1. Witnessed Shop Tests a. None required. 2. Field Tests a. Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 01, and NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications, latest edition. b. Fall of potential tests shall be performed on the ground grid per IEEE81 recommendations by a third party, independent testing firm. A fall of potential plot shall be submitted at the conclusion of testing for Engineer review. Documentation indicating the location of the rod and grounding system as well as the resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made shall be submitted. Testing shall show that the ground grid has 5 ohms resistance or less. Due to soil conditions and/or unforeseen field conditions, ground resistances greater than 5 ohms may be acceptable if specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. Ground resistance measurements shall be made in normally dry weather not less than 48 hours after rainfall and with the ground grid under test isolated from other grounds. c. Continuity tests for the grounding electrode conductor shall be performed. Test will be accepted when a resistance of less than 1 ohm is shown for this conductor. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 29-1 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install structural supports for mounting and installing all conduit, electrical equipment, lighting, alarm systems, instrumentation, and communications equipment furnished under this Contract. B. Equipment shall be installed strictly in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer and best practices of the trade resulting in a complete, operable, and safe installation. The Contractor shall obtain written installation manuals from the equipment manufacturer prior to installation. C. Support design for all nonstructural electrical components (e.g., conduit and other raceways, freestanding equipment, etc.) shall be provided in accordance with the governing Building Code and Section 01 73 23 – Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components. D. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Equipment and materials covered under this Section shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. ASTM A240 – Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 4. ASTM A276 – Standard Specification for Steel Bars and Shapes 5. ASTM B783 – Standard Specification for Materials for Ferrous Powder Metallurgy Structural Parts Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 29-2 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop drawings 2. Structural support calculations and designs in accordance with the governing Building Code and Section 01 73 23 – Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets. 2. Complete assembly, layout, installation, and foundation drawings with clearly marked dimensions. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Support channel shall be 1-5/8” by 1-5/8” minimum, with 12 gage material thickness. B. Support channel, support channel fittings, and threaded rod shall be furnished with the following material of construction: Area Designation Material of Construction Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 29-3 All Areas Type 304 Stainless Steel C. Fastening hardware (bolts, nuts, washers, and screws) shall be furnished with the following material of construction, dependent upon the designation of the area in which they are to be installed. Area designations are indicated on the Drawings. Area Designation Material of Construction All Areas Type 304 Stainless Steel PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Concrete or Masonry Inserts 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installation of all anchor bolts, masonry inserts, and similar devices required for installation of equipment furnished under this Contract. 2. If a time delay for the arrival of any special inserts or equipment drawings, etc. occurs, the Contractor may, if permitted by the Engineer, make arrangements for providing approved recesses and openings in the concrete or masonry and, upon subsequent installation, the Contractor shall be responsible for filling in such recesses and openings. Any additional costs that may be incurred by this procedure shall be borne by the Contractor. 3. The Contractor shall furnish leveling channels for all switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, and similar floor mounted equipment. The leveling channels shall be provided for embedment in the equipment housekeeping pads. Coordination of the installation of these channels with the concrete pad is essential and required. Pad height shall be as required to maintain concrete coverage of the reinforcement bars while not causing associated equipment to exceed the maximum mounting height requirements of the NEC. B. Support Fastening and Locations 1. All equipment fastenings to columns, steel beams, and trusses shall be by beam clamps or welded. No holes shall be drilled in the steel. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications, guards/handrails shall not be utilized as supports for electrical equipment, devices, or appurtenances. Guards/handrails shall not be cut, drilled, or otherwise modified in order to accommodate electrical supports without written approval from the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 29-4 3. All holes made in reflected ceilings for support rods, conduits, and other equipment shall be made adjacent to ceiling grid bars where possible, to facilitate removal of ceiling panels. 4. Support channel shall be provided wherever required for the support of starters, switches, panels, and miscellaneous equipment. 5. All equipment, devices, and raceways that are installed on the dry side of a water bearing wall shall not be installed directly onto the wall. Support channel shall be used to allow ventilation air to pass behind the equipment, devices, or raceway. 6. All supports shall be rigidly bolted together and braced to make a substantial supporting framework. Where possible, control equipment shall be grouped together and mounted on a single framework. 7. Actual designs for supporting framework should take the nature of a picture frame of support channels and bracket with a plate for mounting the components. The Contractor is responsible for the design of supporting structure; Contractor shall submit design details to the Engineer for acceptance before proceeding with the fabrication. 8. Wherever dissimilar metals come into contact, the Contractor shall isolate these metals as required with neoprene washers, nine (9) mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets. 9. For all installations where fiberglass supporting materials are required, the Contractor shall submit structural calculations and the details of the proposed system of support. Structural calculations shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. 10. For the following installations where conduits are provided with a support system suspended from the above or attached to a vertical structure, the Contractor shall submit structural calculations and details of the proposed system of support. Structural calculations shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. a. A quantity of twelve (12) or more conduits trade size 1” and smaller are proposed for a conduit support rack. b. A quantity of eight (8) or more conduits trade sizes 1 ½” to 2 1/2” are proposed for a conduit support rack. c. A quantity of four (4) or more conduits trade sizes 3” and larger are proposed for a conduit support rack. 11. Single conduits installed exposed along walls and ceilings shall be secured to the wall or ceiling with a one-hole conduit clamp and clamp-back. Where multiple Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 29-5 conduits are installed exposed together, support channel and conduit clamps shall be used. C. Equipment, boxes, and enclosures which are factory-constructed with integral mounting provisions (such as brackets., mounting feet, bolt holes, etc.) shall be installed/supported utilizing those mounting provisions. Equipment, boxes and enclosures shall not be field- modified by any means which compromises the UL listing or NEMA rating of the enclosure/assembly. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-1 SECTION 26 05 33.13 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install conduits and conduit fittings to complete the installation of all electrically operated equipment as specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, and as required. B. Requirements for conduit clamps, support systems, and anchoring are not included in this Section. Reference Section 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems, for these requirements. C. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conduits and conduit fittings shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI B1.20.1 – Pipe Threads, General Purpose b. ANSI C80.1 – Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit c. ANSI C80.6 - Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC) d. ANSI FB 1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) a. UL 1 – Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit b. UL 6 – Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel c. UL 6A – Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel d. UL 360 – Standard for Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit e. UL 467 – Grounding and Bonding Equipment f. UL 514B – Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings 12 1 9 2 2 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-2 g. UL 651 – Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Conduit and Fittings h. UL 1479 – Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Fire Stops i. UL 1660 – Liquid-tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) a. NEMA FB 2.40 – Installation Guidelines for Expansion and Expansion/Deflection Fittings b. NEMA RV-3 – Application and Installation Guidelines for Flexible and Liquid- tight Flexible Metal and Nonmetallic Conduits c. NEMA TC-2 – Electrical PVC Conduit d. NEMA TC-3 – PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 4. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) a. NECA 1 – Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 5. Others a. ACI-318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete b. Aluminum Association – Aluminum and It’s Alloys 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-3 1. Product data sheets for conduits and fittings. 2. Conduit identification methods and materials. 3. Evidence of training for all personnel that will install PVC coated rigid metal conduit. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Conduits are categorized by the circuit type of the wiring to be installed inside. Conduits are defined as follows: 1. Power Conduits – Conduits that carry AC or DC power wiring from a source to a load. Conduits that carry lighting and receptacle wiring. 2. Control Conduits – Conduits that carry AC or DC discrete control wiring between devices and/or equipment. Conduits that carry fiber optic cables between devices and/or equipment. 3. Instrumentation Conduits – Conduits that carry AC or DC analog signal wiring between devices and/or equipment. Conduits that carry Category 5e or Category 6 unshielded twisted-pair cables. B. Conduit categories are indicated on the Drawings by the leading letter of the conduit tag. Conduit tag leading letters are defined as follows: 1. P – Power Conduit 2. C – Control Conduit 3. I – Instrumentation Conduit PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Conduit and conduit fitting products are specified in the text that follows this article. Reference Part 3 herein for the application, uses and installation requirements of these conduits and conduit fittings. B. All metallic conduit fittings shall be UL 514B and UL 467 Listed and constructed in accordance with ANSI FB 1. C. Where threading is specified herein for conduit fitting connections, the fittings shall be manufactured to accept conduit that is threaded to ANSI B1.20.1 requirements. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-4 D. Conduit expansion fittings for all conduit materials of construction shall be capable of 4 inches of movement along the axis of the conduit for trade sizes 2 inches or less. Expansion fittings shall be capable of 8 inches of movement along the axis of the conduit for trade sizes greater than 2 inches. E. Conduit deflection fittings for all conduit materials of construction shall be provided with a flexible neoprene outer jacket that permits up to ¾ inch of expansion/contraction along the axis of the conduit as well as up to ¾ inch of parallel misalignment between the conduit axes. Outer jacket shall be secured to the conduit hubs by stainless steel clamps. F. Conduit seals shall either be Listed and labeled for 40% fill, or conduit reducing fittings and a trade size larger conduit seal shall be provided to achieve 25% or less fill within the seal. Percentage fill calculation shall be based on the conductors to be installed. Conduit seals shall be provided with breathers and/or drains where required by the NEC. G. Conduit insulating bushings shall be constructed of plastic and shall have internal threading. H. Additional conduit and conduit fitting requirements are specified in the articles that follow based on the specific conduit material of construction to be used. 2.02 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL (RGS) CONDUIT , INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC), AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS A. Conduit 1. Conduit shall be hot dip galvanized on the inside and outside and made of heavy wall high strength ductile steel. Conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with a. RGS: ANSI C80.1 and shall be UL 6 Listed. b. IMC: ANSI C80.6 and shall be UL 1242 Listed 2. Conduit shall be provided with factory-cut 3/4 inch per foot tapered threads at each end in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1. Threads shall be cut prior to galvanizing to ensure corrosion protection adequately protects the threads. Conduit shall be provided with a matching coupling on one end and a color -coded thread protector on the other. B. Conduit Bodies for use with RGS and IMC 1. Conduit bodies shall be constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy which is coated with an acrylic paint finish. Conduit bodies shall have integral threaded conduit hubs. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-5 2. Conduit bodies for all other areas shall be provided with covers that are affixed in place by stainless steel screws which thread directly into the conduit body. Covers that utilize wedge nuts or any other method of attachment to the conduit body are not acceptable. Covers shall be constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy which is coated with an acrylic paint finish. Covers shall be provided with matching gasket. C. Conduit Couplings, Nipples, and Unions for use with RGS and IMC 1. Couplings and nipples shall be threaded and shall be constructed of hot dipped galvanized steel. Split-type couplings that use compression to connect conduits are not acceptable. 2. Unions shall be threaded, rain-tight, and constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy which is coated with an acrylic paint finish. D. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings for use with RGS and IMC 1. Conduit expansion fittings and conduit deflection fittings shall be constructed of bronze or an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy. Expansion and deflection fittings shall have threaded conduit connections. 2. Expansion fittings shall have an integral bonding jumper and deflection fittings shall have an external bonding jumper. E. Conduit Seals for use with RGS and IMC 1. Conduit seals shall be constructed of an electro -galvanized malleable iron alloy which is coated with an acrylic paint finish. Conduit seals shall have threaded conduit connections. F. Conduit Termination Fittings for use with RGS and IMC 1. Conduit hubs shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall have threaded connections to the conduit and enclosure . Hubs shall have a plastic insulated throat and shall be watertight when assembled to an enclosure. 2. Conduit locknuts shall be constructed of zinc plated steel. Locknuts shall have internal threading. Locknuts with integral gasket or seal are not acceptable. Locknuts shall have integral bonding screw where required for proper bonding. 3. Conduit bonding bushings shall be constructed of zinc plated malleable iron . Bonding bushings shall have a threaded conduit connection. Bonding bushing shall be provided with properly sized set screw for connecting bonding conductor and an integral plastic insulator rated for 150 degrees C located in the throat. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-6 2.03 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS A. Conduit 1. Conduit shall be Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) construction, manufactured in accordance with NEMA TC-2, UL 651 Listed, and suitable for conductors with 90 degree C insulation. B. Conduit Bodies for use with Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 1. Conduit bodies shall be constructed of PVC. Conduit hubs shall be integral to the conduit body and shall be smooth inside to accept a glued conduit connection. 2. Conduit body shall be provided with cover that is affixed in place by stainless steel screws which thread directly into the conduit body. Covers that utilize wedge nuts or any other method of attachment to the conduit body are not acceptable. Covers shall be provided with matching gasket. C. Conduit Couplings and Unions for use with Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 1. Conduit couplings and unions shall be constructed of PVC and shall be smooth inside to accept a glued conduit connection. D. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings for use with Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 1. Conduit expansion fittings and conduit deflection fittings shall be constructed of PVC and shall be smooth inside to accept a glued conduit connection. E. Conduit Termination Fittings for use with Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 1. Conduit hubs shall be constructed of PVC and shall be smooth inside to accept a glued conduit connection. Hubs shall have external threads and an accompanying PVC locknut, and shall be watertight when assembled to an enclosure. 2. Conduit locknuts shall be constructed of zinc plated steel. Locknuts shall have internal threading. Locknuts constructed of PVC and locknuts with integral gasket or seal are not acceptable. 3. Conduit end bells shall be constructed of PVC and shall be smooth inside to accept a glued conduit connection. End bell shall have a smooth inner surface that curves outward towards the edge of the fitting. 2.04 LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS A. Conduit 1. Conduit shall be manufactured using a single strip of hot dip galvanized high strength steel alloy, helically formed into a continuously interlocked flexible metal Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-7 conduit. Trade size 1-1/4 inch and smaller conduits shall be provided with an integrally woven copper bonding strip. 2. Conduit shall be covered with an outside PVC jacket that is UV resistant, moisture - proof, and oil-proof. Conduit shall be UL 360 Listed. Conduits shall be Listed for and marked with maximum temperature ratings as follows: a. 105 degrees C dry, 60 degrees C wet for all conduit installed against or within 2 inches of equipment capable of having a surface temperature of 80 degrees C or greater (e.g. blowers, incinerators, etc) b. 80 degrees C dry, 60 degrees C wet for all other locations B. Conduit Termination Fittings for use with LFMC 1. Conduit termination fittings shall be constructed of either 304 stainless steel or an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy which is coated on the exterior with a 40 mil (minimum) PVC jacket and coated on the interior with a 2 mil (minimum) layer of urethane. PVC coated fittings shall have a sealing sleeve constructed of PVC which covers the connection to conduit. 2. Termination fittings shall have a threaded end with matching locknut and sealing ring for termination to equipment and shall have an integral external bonding lug where required for proper bonding . Termination fittings shall have a plastic insulated throat and shall be watertight when assembled to the conduit and equipment. 2.05 CONDUIT BENDS A. Rigid conduit bends, both factory-fabricated and field-fabricated, shall meet the same requirements listed in the articles above for the respective conduit type and material of construction. B. Conduit bend radii for standard radius bends shall be no less than as follows: Trade Size (inches) 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6 Min. Radius (inches) 4-1/2 5-3/4 7-1/4 8-1/4 9-1/2 10-1/2 13 15 16 24 30 C. Conduit bend radii for long radius bends shall be no less than as follows: Trade Size (inches) 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6 Min. Radius (inches) N/A 12 18 24 30 30 36 36 48 48 60 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-8 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS A. Conduit Periphery Sealing 1. The sealing of the exterior surface of conduits to prevent water and/or air from passing around the conduit periphery from one space to another (where required) shall be through the use of one of the following: a. A conduit sleeve and pressure bushing sealing system. Acceptable products are FSK by OZ-GEDNEY, Link-Seal by Crouse-Hinds, or Engineer approved equal. 1) Hardware for seals shall be 316 Stainless Steel. B. Primer and Cement 1. Nonmetallic conduit shall be cleaned with primer and connected to fittings with the manufacturer’s recommended cement that is labeled Low VOC. C. Galvanizing Compounds 1. Galvanizing compounds for field application shall be the cold -applied type, containing no less than 93% pure zinc. D. Conduit Interior Sealing 1. For all conduits that have cables inside, the sealing of the inside of the conduits against water ingress shall be achieved through the use of one of the following: a. Two-part expanding polyurethane foam sealing compound, dispensed from a single tube which mixes the two parts as it is injected into the conduit. Expanding foam shall be compatible with the conduit material of construction as well as the outer jacket of the cables in the conduit. Acceptable products are Q-Pak 2000 by Chemque, FST by American Polywater Corporation, or Hydra-seal S-60 by Duraline. b. Inflatable bag that provides seal around cables and around inside diameter of conduit. Provide appropriate quantity of additional fittings for applications with three or more cables in the conduit to be sealed. Acceptable products are Rayflate by Raychem, or Engineer approved equal. This sealing method is only applicable to conduits trade size 2 inch and larger. c. Neoprene sealing ring provided with the required quantity and diameter of holes to accommodate the cables in each conduit. Sealing ring shall be compressed by two stainless steel pressure plates. Acceptable products are type CSB by OZ-GEDNEY, or Engineer approved equal. This sealing method is only applicable to metallic conduits containing 4 or less cables. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-9 2. The use of aerosol-based expanding foam sealants or any other method of sealing against water ingress not listed above is not acceptable. 3. For conduits identified as spares, the sealing of the inside of the conduit against water ingress shall be achieved by using appropriately sized rubber expanding- style conduit plugs. Plugs that are held in place only by friction are not acceptable. E. Pull Rope 1. Pull ropes for empty and/or spare conduits shall be woven polyester, ½-inch wide, with a minimum tensile strength of 1250 lbs. 2. Pull ropes for the Contractors use in installing conductors shall be the size and strength required for the pull and shall be made of a non -metallic material. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All conduit and associated fittings and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with NECA 1. B. Minimum trade size for all rigid conduits shall be 3/4 inch in exposed applications and 1 inch in embedded applications. Conduits installed within ductbanks shall be allowed to be increased in size to trade size 2 inch, at the Contractor’s option, to accommodate the saddle size of the ductbank spacers. However, no combining of circuits shall be allowed in the larger conduits. C. Minimum trade size for flexible conduits (where specifically allo wed herein) shall be 1/2 inch in all applications. D. Conduit routing and/or homeruns within structures is not shown on the Drawings. Conduits shall be installed concealed wherever practical and within the limitations specified herein. All other conduits not capable of being installed concealed shall be installed exposed. E. Empty and/or spare conduits shall be provided with pull ropes which have no less than 12 inches of slack at each end. F. Nonmetallic conduits for installations requiring less than a factory length of conduit shall be field cut to the required length. The cut shall be made square, cleaned of debris, and primer shall be applied to ready each joint for fusing. Conduits shall then be fused together with the conduit manufacturer’s approved cement compound. G. Metallic conduits for installations requiring less than a factory length of conduit shall be field cut to the required length. The cut shall be made square, be cleaned of all debris Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-10 and be de-burred, then threaded. Conduit threading performed in the field shall be ¾ inch per foot tapered threads in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1. H. Conduits shall be protected from moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction. Install dust-tight and water-tight conduit fittings on the ends of all conduits immediately after installation and do not remove until conductors are installed. I. Conduits shall be installed to provide no less than 12 inches clearance from pipes that have the potential to impart heat upon the conduit. Such pipes include, but are not limited to, hot water pipes, steam pipes, exhaust pipes, and blower air pipes. Clearance shall be maintained whether conduit is installed in parallel or in crossing of pipes. J. Where non-metallic instrumentation conduits are installed exposed, the following clearances to other conduit types shall be maintained: 1. Instrumentation conduits installed parallel to conduits with conductors energized at 480V or above shall be 18 inches. 2. Instrumentation conduits installed parallel to conduits with conductors energized at 240V and below shall be 12 inches. 3. Instrumentation conduits installed at right angles to conductors energized at 480V and below shall be 6 inches. 4. Instrumentation conduits installed at right angles to conductors energized at voltages above 480V shall be 12 inches. K. Where conduit fittings do not include an integral insulated bushing, an insulated bushing shall be installed at all conduit termination points. L. In no case shall conduit be supported or fastened to another pipe or be installed in a manner that would prevent the removal of other pipe s for repairs. Spring steel fasteners may only be used to affix conduits containing lighting branch circuits within EMT conduits to structural steel members. M. All field fabricated threads for RGS and IMC shall be thoroughly coated with two coats of galvanizing compound, allowing at least two minutes to elapse between coats for proper drying. 3.02 CONCEALED AND EMBEDDED CONDUITS A. Conduits are permitted to be installed concealed and/or embedded with the following requirements: 1. Conduits shall not be installed horizontally when concealed within CMU walls, only vertical installation is acceptable. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-11 2. Conduits installed embedded within concrete floors or walls shall be located so as not to affect the designed structural strength of the floor or wall. Embedded conduits shall be installed in accordance with Standard Detail S-03-0403 and ACI- 318. 3. Where conduit bends emerge from concrete embedment, none of the curved portion of the bend shall be visible. Only the straight portion of the bend shall be visible. The straight portion shall emerge perpendicular to the embedment (i.e. neatly oriented 90-degrees to floor/slab/grade). Conduits that emerge in a non- perpendicular orientation are not acceptable. 4. Where multiple conduits emerge from concrete embedment or from concealment below a concrete floor, ample clear space shall be provided between conduits to allow for the appropriate and required conduit termination fittings to be installed. 5. Conduits installed embedded within concrete encasement of any kind shall be installed such that conduit couplings for parallel conduits are staggered so that they are not side by side. 3.03 CONDUIT USES AND APPLICATIONS A. Rigid Conduit 1. Rigid conduit shall be furnished and installed in the materials of construction as follows: Rigid Conduit Conduit Category by Wiring / Circuit Type Installation Area Designation / Scenario Power and Control Instrumentation Exposed in indoor wet process areas Rigid galvanized steel conduit Same as Power and Control Exposed in indoor dry process areas Intermediate Metal Conduit Same as Power and Control Exposed in indoor dry non-process areas Intermediate Metal Conduit Same as Power and Control Exposed in outdoor areas Rigid galvanized steel conduit Same as Power and Control Concealed within underground direct- bury or concrete-encased duct banks Schedule 40 rigid non- metallic PVC conduit Same as Power and Control Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-12 Rigid Conduit Conduit Category by Wiring / Circuit Type Installation Area Designation / Scenario Power and Control Instrumentation Concealed within concrete walls Schedule 40 rigid non- metallic PVC conduit Same as Power and Control 2. The tables for the materials of construction for rigid conduits are intended to exhaustively cover all possible scenarios and installation areas under this Contract. However, if a scenario or installation area is found that is not explicitly governed by these tables, it shall be assumed for bid purposes that the conduit material of construction is to be rigid galvanized steel. This discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer (in writing) immediately for resolution. B. Conduit Bends 1. All conduit bends shall be the same material of construction as the rigid conduit listed in the tables above, with the following exceptions: a. All 90-degree bends or combinations of adjacent bends that form a 90 - degree bend where concealed within concrete or below a concrete slab shall be rigid galvanized steel. 2. Field fabricated bends of metallic conduit shall be made with a bending machine and shall have no kinks. Field fabricated standard radius and long radius bends shall have minimum bending radii in accordance with the associated tables in Part 2 herein. 3. Field bending of non-metallic conduits is not acceptable, factory fabricated bends shall be used. 4. Long radius bends shall be furnished and installed for the following specific applications, all other bends shall be standard radius: a. All conduits containing fiber optic cable. b. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings. C. Flexible Conduit 1. Flexible conduit shall only be installed for the limited applications specified herein. Flexible conduit shall not be installed in any other application without written authorization from the Engineer. Acceptable applications are as follows: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-13 a. Connections to motors and engine-generator sets (and similar vibrating equipment) b. Connections to solenoid valves and limit switches c. Connections to lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceilings d. Connections to lighting transformers and combination power units e. Connections to pre-fabricated equipment skids f. Connections to HVAC equipment g. Connections to instrument transmitters and elements h. Where specifically indicated in the Standard Details 2. Flexible conduit length shall be limited to three (3) feet, maximum. Flexible conduit shall not be installed buried or embedded within any material. 3. Unless otherwise specified herein, flexible conduits shall be installed in accordance with the Installation Guidelines published within NEMA RV-3. 4. Flexible conduit for non-hazardous areas shall be furnished and installed in the materials of construction as follows: Flexible Conduit Conduit Category by Wiring / Circuit Type Installation Area Designation / Scenario Power and Control Instrumentation All areas Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit Same as Power and Control 3.04 CONDUIT FITTING USES AND APPLICATIONS A. General 1. Conduit fittings shall be furnished and installed in the materials of construction as indicated in Part 2, herein. Conduit fitting materials of construction are dependent on the material of construction used for the associated conduit. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-14 2. Conduit fittings shall be provided in the trade size and configuration required to suit the application. B. Conduit Bodies 1. Conduit bodies shall be installed where wire pulling points are desired or required, or where changes in conduit direction or breaking around beams is required. 2. Where conduit bodies larger than trade size 2 inches are intended to be used as a pull-through fitting during wire installation, oversized or elongated conduit bodies shall be used. Oversized or elongated conduit bodies shall not be required if the conduit body is intended to be used as a pull-out point during wire installation. C. Conduit Nipples and Unions 1. Conduits with running threads shall not be used in place of 3 -piece couplings (unions) or close nipples. After installation of a conduit fitting of any kind, there shall be no more than ¼ inch of exposed threads visible. Factory fabricated all- thread nipples may be used between adjacent enclosures, however, the same restriction applies regarding the length of exposed threads that are visible. D. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings 1. Conduit expansion fittings shall be installed where required by the NEC and where indicated on the Drawings. Expansion fittings shall also be installed for exposed straight metallic conduit runs of more than 75 feet, in both indoor and outdoor locations. Expansion fittings for runs of non -metallic conduit shall be installed in accordance with the NEC. 2. Conduit deflection fittings shall be installed where requ ired by the NEC and where conduits are installed (exposed and concealed) across structural expansion joints. 3. Unless otherwise specified herein, conduit expansion and deflection fittings shall be installed in accordance with the Installation Guidelines published within NEMA FB 2.40. E. Conduit Termination Fittings 1. Where conduits terminate at enclosures with a NEMA 4, 4X, or 3R rating and the enclosure does not have integral conduit hubs, an appropriately sized watertight conduit hub shall be installed to maintain the integrity of the enclosure. The use of locknuts with integral gasket in lieu of watertight conduit hubs is not acceptable. 2. Where conduits terminate at enclosures that do not require conduit hubs, a two- locknut system shall be used to secure the conduit to the enclosure. One locknut shall be installed on the outside of the enclosure, and the other inside, drawn tight against the enclosure wall. The locknut on the interior of the enclosure shall be the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-15 type with integral bonding lug, or a conduit bonding bushing may be used in place of the interior locknut. 3. Conduits shall not be installed such that conduit fittings penetrate the top of any enclosure located outdoors, except in cases where specifically required by the serving electric utility. Conduits which serve outdoor equipment or an enclosure from above shall instead be routed into the side of the enclosure at the bottom. The conduit termination fitting shall be provided with a conduit drain to divert moisture from the raceway away from the enclosure. 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS A. Conduit Periphery Sealing 1. All conduit penetrations through exterior walls shall be sealed around the periphery using the appropriate products specified in Part 2 herein to prevent air and/or water entry into the structure. 2. All conduit penetrations through interior walls and floors shall be sealed through the use of conduit sleeves and non-shrink grout as specified in Part 2 herein. B. Conduit Interior Sealing 1. All conduits (including spares) entering a structure below grade shall be sealed on the interior of the conduit against water ingress. Sealing shall be at an accessible location in the conduit system located within the building structure and shall be via one of the methods specified in Part 2 herein. If conduit sealing cannot be achieved at an accessible location within the building structure, sealing shall be placed in the conduits in the nearest manhole or handhole outside the structure. 2. Conduit interior sealing shall not be installed until conductors inside are tested and test results are deemed acceptable by the Engineer. Conduit interior sealing shall be installed prior to energization of the conductors inside. 3.06 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION A. The identification system for the conduits furnished and installed under this Contract shall match the existing identification system used at the project location. 3.07 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Exposed conduits shall be identified at the source, load, and all intermediate components of the raceway system. Examples of intermediate components include but are not limited to junction boxes, pull boxes, and disconnect switches. Identification shall be by means of an adhesive label with the following requirements: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-16 1. Labels shall consist of an orange background with black text. Text for the label shall be the conduit number as indicated in the conduit and wire schedules. 2. In addition, at the source end of the conduit, a second line of text shall be included to indicate the load equipment name. This second line shall consist of the word “TO:” and the text in the ‘TO’ column of the conduit and wire. At the load end of the conduit, a second line of text shall be included to indicate the source equipment name. This second line shall consist of the word “FROM:” and the text in the ‘FROM’ column of the conduit and wire schedule. This requirement applies only to the source and load ends of the conduit, and not anywhere in between. 3. For conduits trade sizes 3/4 inch through 1-1/2 inch, the text shall be a minimum 18-point font. For conduits trade size 2 inch and larger, the text shall be a minimum 24-point font. 4. Label height shall be 3/4 inch minimum, and length shall be as required to fit required text. The label shall be installed such that the text is parallel with the axis of the conduit. The label shall be oriented such that the text can be read without the use of any special tools or removal of equipment. 5. Labels shall be installed after each conduit is installed and, if applicable, after painting. Labels shall be printed in the field via the use of a portable label printing system using thermal transfer technology. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. 6. Labels shall be made of perman ent vinyl with adhesive backing. Labels made of any other material are not acceptable. B. Conduits that are not exposed but installed beneath free standing equipment enclosures shall be identified by means of a plastic tag with the following requirements: 1. The tag shall be made of white Tyvek material, and have an orange label with black text, as described above, adhered to it. Text for the label shall be the conduit number as indicated in the conduit and wire schedules. 2. The tag shall be affixed to the conduit by means of a nylon cable tie. The tag shall be of suitable dimensions to achieve a minimum text size of 18 points. C. Conduits for lighting and receptacle circuits shall not require identification. D. Any problems or conflicts with meeting the requirements above shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer for a decision. 3.08 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conduit for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.13-17 1. All conduit installed below grade or concrete encased shall be tested to ensure continuity and the absence of obstructions by pulling through each conduit a swab followed by a mandrel 85% of the conduit inside diameter. After testing, all conduits shall be capped after installation of a suitable pulling rope. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-00 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Boxes for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.16-1 SECTION 26 05 33.16 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The scope of work under this Section includes furnishing and installing all pull boxes, junction boxes, and outlet boxes. B. Requirements for other boxes and enclosures are not included in this Section. Reference each specific equipment Section for requirements related to that equipment’s respective enclosure. C. Reference Section 26 05 00  Basic Electrical Requirements and Section 26 05 33.13  Conduit for Electrical Systems. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Boxes shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. UL 514A – Metallic Outlet Boxes 2. UL 514C – Standard for Non-metallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes, and Covers 3. UL 50 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations 4. UL 50E – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations 5. NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer(s) and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 02 1 5 2 3 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-00 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Boxes for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.16-2 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete or illegible Submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets for boxes, terminal strips, and all accessories 2. Overall bill of material for all boxes included under this Contract to summarize exactly what is being submitted for review. Bill of material shall at a minimum show each box type (i.e. pull, junction, or outlet), quantity, material of construction, dimensions, and proposed installation location. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. B. As-built drawings showing dimensions, internal box layout, terminal strip information, and terminal strip identification information shall be provided for all junction boxes. As- built drawings are not required for pull boxes or outlet boxes. 1.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Each pull and junction box shall be identified with the box name as indicated on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. A nameplate shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on each box. Nameplates shall be as specified in Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. General Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-00 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Boxes for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.16-3 1. All pull and junction boxes shall be UL listed and labeled. 2. Pull and junction boxes shall not be provided with eccentric or concentric knockouts. 3. Pull and junction boxes mounted embedded in concrete shall be UL listed for embedment. 4. Where metallic boxes are used, they shall be of all welded construction. Tack welded boxes are not acceptable. B. Pull Boxes 1. Metallic pull boxes shall be provided with a matching gasketed cover. For covers with dimensions of less than 12 inches by 12 inches, the cover shall be held in place by stainless steel machine screws. Other screw types are not acceptable. For covers with dimensions 12 inches by 12 inches and larger, the cover shall be hinged and held in place by 1/4-turn style latches. Latch mechanism shall be all stainless steel. Hinge pins shall be removable. 2. Non-metallic pull boxes shall be provided with a matching gasketed cover. The cover shall be hinged and held in place by quick-release (e.g., “flip”) latches. Latch material of construction shall match the box material and include stainless steel hasps. For covers with dimensions 24 inches by 24 inches and larger, a 3-point latching mechanism with external pad-lockable handle may be substituted. Latch mechanism and handle shall be all stainless steel. Hinge pins shall be removable. 3. Pull boxes shall not have any wire terminations inside, other than those for grounding/bonding. A ground bar shall be provided with the necessary number of screw type terminals. Twenty (20) percent of the total amount of terminals otherwise required for the pull box (minimum of two) shall be provided as spare terminations. Boxes requiring any other wire terminations shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the requirements for junction boxes herein. 4. Pull boxes shall be 6 inches wide by 6 inches tall by 4 inches deep, minimum. For applications requiring larger boxes, the box shall be sized in accordance with the fill requirements and dimensional requirements of the NEC. 5. Barriers shall be provided in pull boxes to isolate conductors of different voltages, types, and functions. Barrier material of construction shall match that of the box. Isolation shall be provided between the following groups: a. Power wiring b. AC control wiring c. DC control wiring Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-00 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Boxes for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.16-4 d. Instrumentation wiring C. Junction Boxes 1. Metallic junction boxes shall be provided with a matching gasketed cover. For covers with dimensions of less than 12 inches by 12 inches, the cover shall be held in place by stainless steel machine screws. Other screw types are not acceptable. For covers with dimensions 12 inches by 12 inches and larger, the cover shall be hinged and held in place by 1/4-turn style latches. Latch mechanism shall be all stainless steel. Hinge pins shall be removable. 2. Barriers shall be provided in junction boxes to isolate conductors and terminal blocks of different voltages, types, and functions. Barrier material of construction shall match that of the box. Isolation shall be provided between the following groups: a. Power wiring b. AC control wiring c. DC control wiring d. Instrumentation wiring 3. Junction boxes used for lighting and receptacle circuits only shall be allowed to have screw-on (wire nut) type connectors for wire terminations/junctions. 4. Junction boxes for all uses other than lighting and receptacle circuits shall be provided with terminal strips, consisting of the necessary number of screw type terminals. Current carrying parts of the terminal blocks shall be of ample capacity to carry the full load current of the circuits connected, with a 10A minimum capacity. Terminal strips shall be rated for the voltage of the circuits connected. A separate ground bar shall be provided with the necessary number of screw type terminals. Twenty (20) percent of the total amount of terminals otherwise required for the junction box (minimum of two) shall be provided as spare terminations. When barriers are provided within the box, separate terminal strips shall be provided in each barrier area. Terminals shall be lettered and/or numbered to conform to the wiring labeling scheme in place on the project. 5. Junction boxes shall be 6 inches wide by 6 inches tall by 4 inches deep, minimum. For applications requiring larger boxes, the box shall be sized in accordance with the fill requirements and dimensional requirements of the NEC. Terminal blocks (including spare terminals) shall be considered when sizing the junction box. D. Enclosure Types and Materials 1. Pull and junction boxes shall be furnished with the following enclosure type and material of construction: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-00 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Boxes for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.16-5 Area Designation Enclosure Type and Material All Areas NEMA 4X, Type 304 Stainless Steel 2.03 OUTLET BOXES A. General 1. Outlet boxes shall be provided with a trim appropriate for the wiring device installed inside. Reference Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices for outlet box trim requirements. An appropriate outlet box trim is required to achieve the NEMA rating of the outlet boxes as specified herein. B. Surface Mount Outlet Boxes 1. Outlet boxes shall be the deep type, no less than 2.5 inches deep. 2. Outlet boxes shall be provided in single or multi-gang configuration as required, sized in accordance with the requirements of the NEC. 3. Outlet boxes shall be furnished with the following enclosure type and material of construction, dependent upon the designation of the area in which they are to be installed. Area designations are indicated on the Drawings. Area Designation Enclosure Type and Material All Areas NEMA 4X, Cast Aluminum 4. Outlet boxes shall be provided with integral threaded conduit hubs mounted external to the box. Boxes with threaded conduit hubs mounted internal to the box or as a part of the box wall are not acceptable. C. Flush Mount Outlet Boxes 1. Outlet boxes shall be no less than 2-1/8 inches deep, and 4-11/16 inches square. Boxes shall be UL listed and labeled. Pre-punched single diameter conduit knockouts are acceptable; however, concentric and eccentric knockouts are not acceptable. 2. Outlet boxes mounted flush in CMU walls shall be made of galvanized, tack welded steel, and suitable for installation in masonry walls. Sectional type boxes are not acceptable for this application. 3. Outlet boxes mounted flush in gypsum walls shall be made of galvanized pressed steel. Tack welded boxes are not acceptable for this application. Sectional type boxes are not acceptable for this application. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-00 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Boxes for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.16-6 4. Outlet boxes mounted cast into concrete shall be concrete tight and made of galvanized steel or PVC. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Pull and Junction Boxes 1. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be solidly attached to structural members prior to installation of conduit and set true and plumb. Boxes shall not be supported by their associated conduits. 2. Wooden plugs are not permitted for securing boxes to concrete. Appropriately rated anchors specifically suited for use in concrete shall be used. 3. Box penetrations for conduits shall be made with a punch tool, and penetrations shall be of the size required for the conduit entry and/or hub. Oversized penetrations in boxes are not acceptable. 4. Watertight conduit hubs shall be provided for boxes where a NEMA 4X enclosure rating is specified. Reference Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduit for Electrical Systems for conduit hub requirements. 5. Pull and junction boxes may be installed flush mounted in gypsum, concrete or CMU walls where appropriate provided that covers are easily removed or opened. 6. Pull and junction boxes shall be provided in the enclosure type and material of construction required for the area in which it is installed. Reference the requirements in Part 2 herein, and the area designations indicated on the Drawings. B. Outlet Boxes 1. Outlet boxes shall be solidly attached to structural members prior to installation of conduit and set true and plumb. Boxes shall not be supported by their associated conduits. 2. Wooden plugs are not permitted for securing boxes to concrete. Appropriately rated anchors specifically suited for use in concrete shall be used. 3. Flush mounted outlet boxes shall be arranged and located so that tile and grout lines fit closely around the boxes, and so placed that the cover or device plate shall fit flush to the finished wall surface. 4. Outlet boxes shall be flush mounted in finished areas and other areas where practical. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-00 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Boxes for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 33.16-7 5. Depending on the type of wiring device to be installed in the outlet box, mounting heights from the finished floor or finished grade (as applicable) to the center of the box shall be as follows, unless otherwise specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, or required by the Americans with Disability Act (ADA): a. Light switches and wall mounted occupancy sensors, 48 inches b. Receptacles in indoor dry process/non-process areas, 16 inches c. Receptacles in indoor wet process areas and all indoor chemical storage/transfer areas, 42 inches in open areas, or 6 inches (minimum) above adjacent surfaces (e.g., countertops, tables, etc.) where applicable. d. Receptacles in outdoor locations, 26 inches e. Ceiling mounted occupancy sensors, as indicated on the Drawings 6. Outlet boxes shall be provided in the material of construction required for the area in which it is installed. Reference the requirements in Part 2 herein, and the area designations indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Identification for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 53-1 SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. All electrical equipment shall be properly identified in accordance with these Specifications and the Contract Drawings. All electrical equipment shall be identified in the manner described, or in an equally approved manner. B. The types of electrical identification specified in this Section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Operational instructions and warnings. 2. Danger signs. 3. Equipment/system identification signs. 4. Nameplates. 1.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. The Contractor shall coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in the electrical identification work with the corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering, and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of the electrical systems and equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit shop drawings. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 02 2 8 2 3 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Identification for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 53-2 1. Product data sheets. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The material covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard material of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Material shall be fabricated, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be engraved, high pressure plastic laminate, Choose an item. lettering. B. Nameplates shall be attached to NEMA 4X enclosures utilizing UL-recognized mounting kits designed to maintain the overall UL Type rating of the enclosure. Mounting kit fasteners shall be stainless steel Type AHK10324X as manufactured by Hoffman, or equal. 2.03 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Conduit identification shall be as specified in Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduit for Electrical Systems. 2.04 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION A. Field installed wire and cable identification shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Conductors and Cable and Section 26 05 13 – Medium Voltage Cables. B. A plastic laminate nameplate shall be provided at each panelboard, motor control center, switchgear assembly, and switchboard assembly. This nameplate shall be used to clearly convey the conductor identification means used at that piece of equipment (i.e., Phase A=Brown, Phase B=Orange, C = Yellow). C. Wiring identification for factory installed wiring in equipment enclosures shall be as specified in the respective Section. 2.05 BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Pull, junction and device box identification shall be as specified in Section 26 05 33.16 – Boxes for Electrical Systems. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Identification for Electrical Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 05 53-3 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be attached to the equipment enclosures with (2) two stainless steel sheet metal screws for nameplates up to 2-inches wide. For nameplates over 2-inches wide, four (4) stainless steel sheet metal screws shall be used, one (1) in each corner of the nameplate. The utilization of adhesives is not permitted. 3.02 OPERATIONAL IDENTIFICATION AND WARNINGS A. Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of the electrical systems and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction, or warnings on switches, outlets, and other controls, devices, and covers or electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for the intended purposes. Signs shall be attached as specified above for nameplates. 3.03 POWER SOURCE IDENTIFICATION A. After installation of all field equipment (i.e., valves, motors, fans, unit heaters, instruments, etc.) install nameplates at each power termination for the field equipment. Nameplate data shall include equipment designation (tag number), power source (MCC number, panelboard, etc.), circuit number, conduit number from schedule and voltage/phase. B. Contractor to coordinate with the Engineer and the Owner regarding exact nameplate placement during construction. C. Nameplates shall be as specified herein. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Electric Motors Cottonwoods Connection Page 06 05 60-1 SECTION 26 05 60 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for furnishing, installing, connecting, testing and placing into satisfactory operation all low voltage electric motors as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All motors required for this Contract shall comply with this Section unless otherwise noted. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Motors and related accessories shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) a. IEEE 112 – Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators B. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) a. NEMA MG 1 – Motors and Generators C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) a. UL 547 – Standard for Safety Thermal Protectors for Motors b. UL 1004-1 – Standard for Rotating Electrical Machines c. UL 1004-3 – Standard for Thermally Protected Motors 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Motors shall be designed to accelerate and drive the connected equipment under all normal operating conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings. B. Motors shall be designed to output 100 percent of nameplate horsepower under continuous duty service without exceeding the temperature rise specified herein when controlled by the actual drives furnished. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Electric Motors Cottonwoods Connection Page 06 05 60-2 C. Unless otherwise specified, electric motors shall be furnished with service factors in accordance with NEMA MG-1 as follows: Type of Motor Service Factor Non-inverter Duty 1.15 D. Design selection with respect to the driven machine shall be such that the requirements do not exceed 85 percent of the motors' maximum rating modified by service factor, ambient temperature, enclosure, altitude and electrical service. The electrical service conditions shall be assumed to be 10 percent undervoltage, 5 percent underfrequency, and 3 percent voltage unbalance. Altitude shall be assumed to be the project site elevation plus 10 percent. Ambient temperature shall be assumed to be 95 degrees F in exterior locations, 104 degrees F (40 degrees C) in interior locations, and 122 degrees F (50 degrees C) within housings or enclosures; except where higher temperatures may be encountered within or on individual items of equipment. The applicable paragraphs of NEMA MG-1 shall be used in making the design selection. E. Terminal boxes shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the required quantity and size of conduits. Gasketed terminal boxes shall be furnished with all splashproof and totally enclosed motors. NEMA ratings of the terminal boxes shall be suited for the application. Terminal boxes shall be sized to accommodate accessory equipment such as motor differential current transformers, where required. F. Terminal boxes for horizontal motors shall be located on the lefthand side when viewing the motor from the drive shaft end and shall be so designed that conduit entrance can be made from above, below, or either side of the terminal box. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: A. Shop Drawings. a. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. b. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. c. Individual shop drawings for electric motors shall be submitted in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Electric Motors Cottonwoods Connection Page 06 05 60-3 and Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures, unless submitted as a part of the shop drawings for the driven equipment. d. Shop drawings for electric motors shall include motor data sheets, dimensioned drawings, wiring diagrams for devices such as space heaters, temperature devices, and shaft grounding rings. Shop drawings shall identify electric characteristics and design, mechanical construction, manufacturer's name, type and pertinent specifications for the use intended, along with the name of the equipment to be driven. For motors rated 50 horsepower or greater, submittal of motor data for acceptance shall include, as a minimum, the following: 1) Manufacturers type and frame designation 2) Horsepower rating 3) Time rating (per NEMA Standards) 4) Ambient temperature rating 5) Motor winding insulation system designation 6) RPM at rated load 7) Frequency 8) Number of phases 9) Rated-load amperes 10) Voltage 11) Code letter (starting KVA per horsepower) 12) Design letter for integral horsepower induction motors (per NEMA standards) 13) Service factor 14) Temperature rise at full load and at service factor load 15) Efficiency at ¼, ½, ¾, and full load 16) Power factor at ¼, ½, ¾ and full load 17) Motors outline, dimensions and weight 18) Motor winding insulation system description Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Electric Motors Cottonwoods Connection Page 06 05 60-4 19) Horsepower required by connected machine at specified conditions (load curves) shall be supplied for all compressors, propeller and positive displacement pumps. 20) The foregoing data shall also be verified after manufacture and shall be included with the information to be furnished in the operation and maintenance manuals specified. e. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. B. Spare Parts List. a. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. B. East submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. Electric motors shall be manufactured by Baldor/Reliance Electric Company; Nidec Motors; Toshiba Industrial and Power Systems, Inc.; Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.; General Electric Company; or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Motors be built in accordance with the latest standards of NEMA, including, but not limited to MG-1 and MG-2, IEEE, ANSI and to the requirements specified herein. B. Type a. Unless otherwise noted, motors specified herein shall be polyphase squirrel cage, NEMA Design B, or single phase capacitor or repulsion start induction motors. Special equipment requiring a motor drive with unusual characteristics Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Electric Motors Cottonwoods Connection Page 06 05 60-5 shall be equipped with a definite purpose motor to meet the necessary requirements. b. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all motors 1/2 horsepower or larger shall be three- phase, 60 Hertz, NEMA Design B, squirrel cage induction motors designed for operation at 480 volts or greater as specified herein or shown on the Drawings. c. Unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specification for the driven equipment, or as required by the dynamic characteristics of the load as determined by the manufacturer of the machine to be driven, all polyphase squirrel cage motors shall be designed to withstand the starting voltage shown on the Drawings and shall have torque and locked rotor current characteristics as specified for NEMA Design B motors. d. All 2 horsepower and smaller shall have windings encapsulated with a flexible epoxy compound, or insulated with a flexible epoxy compound, or insulated with the manufacturer's premium quality system which shall be subject to acceptance by the Engineer. e. Unless otherwise noted, all motors smaller than 1/2 horsepower shall be standard singlephase capacitor start or repulsion start induction type designed for operation on 120 volts or 208 volts, 60 Hz alternating current. The motor shall deliver rated load without exceeding a 80 degrees C temperature rise while operating in a 40 degrees C ambient temperature. Small fan motors less than 1/4 HP may be splitphase or shaded pole type. Shaded pole motors rated more than 1/4 horsepower are not acceptable. Fractional horsepower motors shall be completely equipped with all necessary auxiliary components for starting and labeled as "Thermally Protected". Insulation shall be Class B, except that submersible motors shall have epoxy encapsulation. Unless otherwise noted, the motors shall be totally enclosed. Small fan motors may be of the open type where they are suitably protected from moisture dripping and lint accumulation. Motors shall be provided with sealed ball bearings lubricated for 10 years of normal use. C. Rating a. Each motor shall develop ample torque for its required service through its acceleration range and throughout its rated load range. The rating of the motors offered shall in no case be less than the horsepower shown on the Drawings or elsewhere specified. It should be noted that the motor sizes indicated on the Drawings or as otherwise specified herein, are motor sizes required to operate the specific equipment which is specified. Higher rated motor sizes may be determined from the actual equipment submitted, approved, purchased, and installed. Protective devices, motor starters, disconnect switches, and other necessary equipment shall be furnished and installed for the actual motor sizes required at no additional cost. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Electric Motors Cottonwoods Connection Page 06 05 60-6 b. Motor ratings shall be based on continuous operation. The maximum temperature rise for open and drip proof type motors shall not exceed 90 degrees C, and for totally enclosed type motors shall not exceed 80 degrees C. D. Motor Winding Insulation a. Insulation shall be as specified for each particular type or class of motor. The insulation system shall provide a high dielectric strength, long life covering for the windings which may be required to operate in a continually damp, corrosive, and/or chemically contaminated environment. The insulation shall be resistant to attack by moisture, acids, alkalies, abrasives, and mechanical and thermal shock. Leads shall be sealed with a non-wicking, non-hydroscopic insulation material. b. Motor insulation resistance may be checked at any time after delivery to the job site or during the warranty period. Encapsulated motor stators may be subjected to insulation testing while completely submerged in water. Any motor not meeting the requirements specified herein will be rejected and shall be promptly replaced at no cost to the Owner. c. Torque and locked rotor current characteristics for three phase motors shall be NEMA Design B. E. Nameplates a. The motor manufacturer's nameplate shall be engraved, embossed, or stamped on a stainless steel sheet and fastened to the motor frame with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. Printed or laser-etched nameplates are not acceptable. b. Nameplates shall include as a minimum, Items 1 through 14 as listed in Article 1.04 D in addition to that required by NEMA standards. The nameplate shall be positioned so as to be readily visible for inspection as installed in the facility. F. Construction a. Frames, mounting means, and shafts shall meet NEMA Standards for the horsepower, RPM, and enclosure selected. Enclosures shall be selected according to the degree of mechanical protection required and shall not be of aluminum construction. All motors shall have a manufacturer's standard shop machinery finish, consisting of a rust-resisting priming coat of zinc chromate and a finish coat of alkyd machinery enamel. Reference Section 09 90 00  Painting. b. Motors shall have cast iron frames and a heavy gauge steel terminal box, with neoprene gaskets between the frame and the box and between the box and its cover. A grounding lug(s) shall be provided inside the terminal box. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Electric Motors Cottonwoods Connection Page 06 05 60-7 c. Motors weighing more than 50 pounds shall be equipped with at least one lifting eye. All lifting hardware shall be corrosion resistant. d. When located outdoors, or elsewhere if specified, motors shall be totally enclosed, nonventilated (TENV) or totally enclosed, fancooled (TEFC) machines, unless otherwise noted. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with two (2) 1/4 inch drain holes drilled through the bottom of the frame, which allows complete drainage of the frame. Where specified, TEFC motors controlled by a variable frequency drive shall be provided with a separately powered cooling fan motor that runs at 60HZ to ensure proper cooling of the motor at low speeds. Cooling fan motor shall be suitable for 120VAC, single phase operation. Vertically oriented motors located outdoors shall be provided with a drip cover over the fan end to prevent accumulation of precipitation. e. Unless otherwise specified, motors rated 100 horsepower or greater located outdoors, in unheated structures, in below grade areas, or as otherwise indicated, shall be furnished with space heaters and embedded motor winding high temperature switches with leads brought out of the motor terminal box. Space heaters shall be suitable for 120VAC operation and for a maximum surface temperature of less than 200 degrees C. Space heaters shall be of sufficient wattage to maintain the internal temperature of the motor at approximately 10 degrees C above the ambient temperature when the motor is not running. i. Embedded motor winding temperature switches shall operate at temperatures well below the temperature rating of the motor winding insulation system. Motor winding temperature switches are not required where other temperature monitoring devices (e.g. RTD's) are required. f. Unless otherwise specified in the equipment specifications, motors rated 200HP or greater that are controlled by a VFD shall be furnished with resistance thermal detectors (RTD’s) embedded in the stator windings, two per phase. RTD’s shall be pre-wired to terminal blocks located in a separate terminal box as specified herein. g. Unless otherwise specified in the equipment specifications, motors rated less than 200HP that are controlled by a VFD shall be furnished with motor winding high temperature switches embedded in the stator windings with the leads brought out to the motor terminal box. h. If so specified and when located in indoor areas which are heated and weatherproof, motors shall be open dripproof machines. Ventilation openings shall be arranged to prevent the entrance of drops of liquid or solid particles at any angle from zero to 15 degrees downward from vertical. i. Unless otherwise specified, or required, motors rated less than 200 horsepower shall be furnished with bearings of the grease lubricated, antifriction ball type Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Electric Motors Cottonwoods Connection Page 06 05 60-8 with conveniently located grease fittings and drain plugs. A means of preventing bearings from becoming over-greased shall be provided. Bearings shall have a minimum B10 life of 20,000 hours. j. Rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Rotor windings shall be onepiece cast aluminum. Where applicable, rotors shall be constructed with integral fins. k. All motors shall be provided with factory-installed one-hole terminations (ring terminals) on the ends of all motor leads. Terminations shall be identified for use with cables that have stranding other than Class B and shall be the irreversible compression type. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Motors shall be properly protected from weather hazards. Motors shall not be allowed to be wrapped tightly in plastic while outdoors. Motors delivered to the site which will not be put in service for a time in excess of 30 calendar days, whether in storage or installed, shall have the shafts rotated a minimum of five (5) rotations every 30 days. B. Motors provided with space heaters shall have temporary power applied to the heaters no later than 30 calendar days after delivery to the site until permanent power can be applied to the heaters. C. Motors that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have not been properly protected shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative. Any required electrical corrections for testing shall be made at the Contractor's expense prior to acceptance and/or use. D. All motors shall operate without any undue noise or vibration and shall show no signs of phase unbalance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Motors shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.03 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: A. Field Tests a. Field tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 26 05 00  Basic Electrical Requirements. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low Voltage Electric Motors Cottonwoods Connection Page 06 05 60-9 b. All electric motors furnished for this project one (1) horsepower or larger shall have the information required in the following tabulation completed. See Exhibit "A" on following page. c. All field testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Electric Controls and Relays Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 09 16-1 SECTION 26 09 16 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in satisfactory operation all electric controls and relays as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. B. Electrical control and relay systems shall be assembled using NEMA rated components. Components designed and built to International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards are not recognized. Equipment designed, manufactured and labeled in compliance with IEC standards is not acceptable. C. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements and Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Products specified herein shall be in conformance with or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 2. UL 508A – Standard for Industrial Control Panels 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Spare Parts List B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. 08 1 6 2 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Electric Controls and Relays Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 09 16-2 C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets. D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. 1.05 SPARE PARTS A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. In addition to the manufacturer recommended spare parts, the following spare parts shall be provided for the local control stations: 1. One (1) contact block of each type furnished on the project 2. One (1) indicating light lens of each color furnished on the project 3. One (1) LED lamp of each color furnished on the project B. The spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long term storage, bearing labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are intended. C. Spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such spare parts until completion of the work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner. D. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal, shall indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable. E. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same part number. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL COMPONENTS A. Manufacturers 1. Control components shall be manufactured by Eaton, The Square D Company, General Electric, Allen-Bradley, Siemens Energy and Automation, or Engineer approved equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Electric Controls and Relays Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 09 16-3 B. Pilot Devices 1. General a. All pilot devices shall be provided with a legend plate. Legend plates shall have a white background and black lettering and indicate the function of the respective pilot device. The text shown on the Drawings or indicated in the specifications shall be used as the basis for legend plate engraving (e.g., HAND-OFF-AUTO, RUN, EMERGENCY STOP, etc.). b. All pilot devices shall be selected and properly installed to maintain the NEMA 250 rating of the enclosure in which they are installed. All pilot devices shall be UL 508 Listed. c. All pilot devices shall be 30.5mm in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 22mm devices are not acceptable. d. Pilot devices for all electrical equipment under this Contract shall be of the same type and manufacturer unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Pushbuttons a. Pushbuttons shall be non-illuminated, black in color, and have momentary style operation unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Pushbuttons shall have the quantity of normally closed and/or normally open contacts as indicated on the Drawings and as required. In addition to the required contacts, one (1) spare normally open and one (1) spare normally closed contact shall be installed at each pushbutton. Contacts shall be rated for 5A at 250VAC/DC (minimum), but no less than required for the application. c. Pushbuttons shall be provided with a full guard around the perimeter of the button. Where a lockout style pushbutton is specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide a padlockable guard. 3. Selector Switches a. Selector switches shall be non-illuminated, black in color, and have the number of maintained positions as indicated on the Drawings and as required. Handles shall be the extended type that provide a greater surface area for operation. b. Selector switches shall have the quantity of normally closed and/or normally open contacts as indicated on the Drawings and as required. In addition to the required contacts, one (1) spare normally open and one (1) spare normally closed contact shall be installed at each selector switch. Contacts Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Electric Controls and Relays Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 09 16-4 shall be rated for 5A at 250VAC/DC (minimum), but no less than required for the application. c. Where indicated in the Drawings or Specifications, provide spring return positions. d. Selector switches shall be provided with an indexing component that fits into the keyed portion of the cutout for the device and prevents the switch from spinning when operated. 4. Indicating Lights a. Indicating lights shall be LED type, with the proper voltage rating to suit the application, and push-to-test feature. b. Indicating light lens colors shall be as required in equipment specifications and/or as indicated on the Drawings. If lens colors are not indicated, the following colors shall be used: Color Designation Red "Run", "On", “Open” Green "Off", “Closed” Amber "Alarm", "Fail" White “Control Power On” 5. Emergency Stop and Tagline Switches a. Emergency stop switches shall be non-illuminated, red in color, with a minimum 35mm diameter mushroom head. Once activated, switch shall maintain its position and require a manual pull to release/reset. b. Tagline switches shall have a plunger that activates upon tension from the associated safety cable. Once activated, switch shall maintain its position and require a manual release/reset. c. Emergency stop and tagline switches shall have the quantity of normally closed and/or normally open contacts as indicated on the Drawings and as required. In addition to the required contacts, one (1) spare normally open and one (1) spare normally closed contact shall be installed at each switch. Contacts shall be rated for 5A at 250VAC/DC (minimum), but no less than required for the application. C. Relays and Timers 1. General Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Electric Controls and Relays Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 09 16-5 a. Relays and timers shall be furnished with an integral pilot light for positive indication of coil energization. b. Relays and timers shall have tubular pin style terminals with matching 11-pin DIN rail mount socket. Spade or blade style terminals are not acceptable. c. Relays and timers for all electrical equipment under this Contract shall be of the same type and manufacturer unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Control and Pilot Relays a. Relays shall have a clear or translucent housing that allows the contacts to be visually inspected without disassembly. b. Relays shall have coil voltage as required to suit the application and/or as indicated on the Drawings. c. Relays shall be provided with contacts rated for 10A (resistive), minimum, at 120/240 VAC and 28 VDC. Relays shall have 3-pole, double-throw (3PDT) contact arrangement. 3. Time Delay Relays a. Timers delay relays shall utilize electronic timing technology. Mechanical timing devices are not acceptable. b. Relays shall have coil voltage as required to suit the application and/or as indicated on the Drawings. c. Relays shall be provided with contacts rated for 10A (resistive), minimum, at 120/240 VAC and 28 VDC. Relays shall have double-pole double-throw (DPDT) contact arrangement. d. Time delay ranges shall be as indicated on the Drawings and/or as required to suit the application. Timing range shall be adjustable from the front of the relay. On delay and off delay timer configurations shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings and/or as required to suit the application. 4. Elapsed Time Meters a. Elapsed time meters shall be non-resettable type with no less than a 4 digit display. Coil voltage shall be as required to suit the application and/or as indicated on the Drawings. D. Control Terminal Blocks Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Electric Controls and Relays Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 09 16-6 1. Control terminal blocks shall be assembled on non-current carrying galvanized steel DIN mounting rails securely bolted to the enclosure or subpanel. Terminals shall be tubular screw type with pressure plate that will accommodate wire size range of #22 – #8 AWG. 2. Control terminal blocks shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts and 20A. Separate terminal strips shall be provided for each type of control used (i.e. 120VAC vs. 24VDC). Quantity of terminals shall be provided as required to suit the application. In addition, there shall be a sufficient quantity of terminals for the termination of all spare conductors. 3. Terminals shall be marked with a permanent, continuous marking strip, with each terminal numbered. One side of each terminal shall be reserved exclusively for incoming field conductors. Common connections and jumpers required for internal wiring shall not be made on the field side of the terminal. 2.02 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS A. Local control stations shall be furnished and installed complete with pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, and other devices as indicated on the Drawings. B. Specific devices installed in local control stations shall be provided in accordance with the requirements specified elsewhere in this Section. C. Local control stations shall be furnished with the following enclosure type and material of construction, dependent upon the designation of the area in which they are to be installed. Area Designation Enclosure Type and Material All Areas NEMA 4X, Type 304 Stainless Steel D. Non-metallic enclosures shall be provided with threaded integral conduit hubs. Conduit hubs shall be external to the enclosure. E. Local control stations shall be UL-508 Listed. F. Provide a nameplate on each local control station in accordance with Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. The name and/or number of the equipment associated with each control station shall be engraved on the nameplate, followed by the words “LOCAL CONTROL STATION”. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Electric Controls and Relays Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 09 16-7 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Local control stations shall be provided in the enclosure type and material of construction required for the area in which it is installed. Reference the requirements in Part 2 herein, and the area designations indicated on the Drawings. B. All control components shall be mounted in a manner that will permit servicing, adjustment, testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving, or removing any other component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be mounted on removable plates and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting shall be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is required otherwise by the manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration. Component's mounting shall be oriented in accordance with the component manufacturer's and industries' standard practices. C. Pilot devices shall be properly bonded to the equipment enclosure door where they are installed. If proper bonding cannot be achieved through the locknuts that affix the device in place, a green colored bonding screw shall be provided on the pilot device. The device shall be bonded to the equipment enclosure with an insulated green bonding conductor. D. Local control station covers shall be bonded to the local control station enclosure with an insulated green bonding conductor. E. Wiring to devices at each local control station shall be provided with enough slack to permit the local control station cover to be removed and pulled at least 6 inches away from the enclosure. F. Terminal strips, relays, timers, and similar devices shall not be installed on the rear of the panel/cabinet doors. Terminal strips, relays, timers, and similar devices shall not be installed on the side walls of panel/cabinet interiors without written permission from the Engineer. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low-Voltage Transformers Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 22 00-1 SECTION 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and test transformers for power and lighting distribution systems as specified herein, as indicated on the Drawings, and as required to complete the electrical installations. B. All equipment specified in this Section shall be furnished by the transformer manufacturer who shall be responsible for the suitability and compatibility of all included equipment. C. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements and Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Transformers shall conform to all applicable Federal, UL, and NEMA standards. Materials and components shall be new and conform to grades, qualities and standards as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Transformers shall comply with the following standards: 1. UL 1561 – Dry Type General Purpose and Power Transformers 2. U.S. Department of Energy 2016 Efficiency 3. National Electrical Code 4. NEMA ST-20 – Dry Type Transformers for General Applications 5. ANSI/IEEE C57 – Standard General Requirements for Dry Type Distribution and Power Transformers 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 03 2 2 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low-Voltage Transformers Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 22 00-2 3. Spare Parts List. 4. Reports of Certified Shop Field Tests. B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein, and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets. 2. Drawings showing clearly marked dimensions and weight for each transformer. 3. Sample equipment nameplate diagram. D. The submittal information shall reflect the specific equipment identification number as indicated on the Drawings (e.g. TX-LP-BB). E. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items that the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. B. Spare parts lists, included with the Shop Drawing submittal, shall indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low-Voltage Transformers Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 22 00-3 C. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same parts number. 1.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Each transformer shall be identified with the equipment item number indicated on the Contract Drawings and the accepted Shop Drawings. A nameplate shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on each transformer. Nameplates shall be as specified in Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. Dry type distribution transformers shall be Energy Star compliant and manufactured by the Square D Company, ABB, Eaton, or Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc. 2.02 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Furnish and install single-phase and three-phase general purpose, dry-type transformers, as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. The transformers shall be 60 Hz, self-cooled, quiet-design insulated of the two-winding type. B. The transformers shall be UL 1561 Listed. C. The primary windings shall be rated 480 VAC for use on 3-phase systems and connected delta unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. KVA ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. Furnish transformers with two 2-1/2% primary taps above, and four 2-1/2% primary taps below rated voltage for transformers 15 KVA and above, and two 2-1/2% primary taps above, and two 2-1/2% primary taps below rated voltage for transformers less than 15 kVA. All taps shall be full capacity rated. D. The ratings of the secondary windings shall be as indicated on the Drawings. E. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated KVA, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI/IEEE C57.96. This performance shall be obtainable without exceeding 80 degrees Celsius average temperature rise by resistance or 180 degrees Celsius hot spot temperature rise in a 40 degrees Celsius maximum ambient and 30 degrees Celsius average ambient. The maximum coil hot spot temperature shall not exceed 220 degrees Celsius. All insulating materials shall be flame retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low-Voltage Transformers Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 22 00-4 Standard Test Method D 635. All insulating materials shall be in accordance with NEMA ST 20 Standard for a 220 degrees Celsius UL component recognized insulation system. F. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound copper construction and shall be impregnated with non-hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. G. All cores are to be constructed of high grade, non-aging, grain-oriented silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current loses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point. The core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed with structural steel angles. The completed core and coil shall then be bolted to the base by means of vibration-absorbing mounts to minimize sound transmission. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil assembly and the enclosure. H. All transformers shall be equipped with a wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large enough to allow convenient wiring. The maximum temperature of the enclosure shall not exceed 90 degrees Celsius. Transformers shall be furnished with lugs of the size and quantity required and suitable for termination of the field wiring. I. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI standards. J. Transformers shall have core and coil assemblies mounted on rubber isolation pads to minimize the sound levels. Transformers shall not exceed the sound levels listed in NEMA ST-20. K. The enclosure shall be made of heavy gauge steel and shall be degreased, cleaned, primed, and finished with a baked weather-resistant enamel using the manufacturer’s standard painting process. Color shall be ANSI 61. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The transformers shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. B. Conduit routed to and from the transformer shall be arranged for easy removal of the transformer access covers. C. Where transformers 50 kVA and smaller are shown to be wall mounted, a transformer manufacturer supplied wall mounting kit shall be used. The lowest point of the wall mounting bracket shall be no lower than 7’-0” above the finished floor. Field fabricated mounting hardware is not acceptable unless reviewed and approved in writing by the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Low-Voltage Transformers Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 22 00-5 D. Prior to final completion of the work, all metal surfaces of the equipment shall be cleaned thoroughly, and all scratches and abrasions shall be retouched with the same lacquer as used for shop finishing coats. 3.02 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: 1. Certified Shop Tests a. The transformers shall be given routine factory tests in accordance with the requirements of the ANSI and NEMA standards. Temperature rises may be certified from basic design. b. As a minimum, the following tests shall be made on all transformers: 1) Ratio tests on the rated voltage connection and on all tap connections. 2) Polarity and phase-relation tests on the rated voltage connection. 3) Applied potential tests. 4) Induced potential tests. 5) No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 2. Field Tests a. Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 01, and NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications, latest edition. b. Insulation between windings shall be tested by 1000 VDC Megaohmeter for one (1) minute. Resistance value shall be no less than 100 Megaohms. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Panelboards Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 24 16-1 SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install panelboards of voltage and current ratings as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. Panelboards shall be furnished with circuit breaker ratings, number of breakers, number of poles and locations conforming to the panelboard schedules on the Drawings. B. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements; Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems; and Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protective Devices 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Panelboards shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. Underwriters Laboratories a. UL 50 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations b. UL 67 – Standard for Panelboards c. UL 489 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures d. UL 943 – Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters 2. NEMA PB1 – Panelboards 3. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Standard 407 – Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Spare Parts List. 10 0 8 2 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Panelboards Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 24 16-2 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4. Reports of Field Tests. B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets. 2. Complete assembly, layout, and installation drawings with clearly marked dimensions for each panelboard. 3. Complete panelboard schedules indicating circuit designations as shown on the Drawings for each panelboard. 4. The submittal information shall reflect the specific equipment identification number as indicated on the Drawings. 1.05 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. The manuals shall include: 1. Instruction books and/or leaflets. 2. Recommended spare parts list. 3. Final as-built construction drawings included in the shop drawings incorporating all changes made in the manufacturing process and during field installation. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. For each panelboard, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner all spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. All spaces in the panelboards shall be furnished with a spare breaker as indicated in the panelboard schedules shown on the Drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Panelboards Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 24 16-3 B. Spare parts lists shall indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable. C. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size shall have the same parts number. 1.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Each panelboard shall be identified with the identification name/number indicated on the Drawings. A nameplate shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on each panelboard. Nameplates shall be as specified in Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 PANELBOARDS A. General 1. Panelboards shall be dead-front type with automatic trip-free, non-adjustable, thermal-overload, branch circuit breakers. Panelboards shall be of the configuration and rating as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. Panelboards shall be UL 67 Listed and shall be constructed to NEMA PB1 standards. Panelboards shall be service entrance rated where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Panelboards shall be equipped with a main breaker or main lugs complete with branch circuit breakers, as indicated on the Drawings. The panelboards shall be suitable for flush or surface mounting. 3. Panelboards shall be fully rated and shall have a minimum short circuit rating of 22,000 amperes symmetrical for units rated 240VAC and below, and 65,000 amperes symmetrical for units rated above 240VAC, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 4. Panelboards shall be Eaton Pow-R-Line Series, the Square D Company equivalent, the ABB equivalent, or Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc. equivalent. B. Enclosures Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Panelboards Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 24 16-4 1. Enclosures shall be UL 50 listed and have a NEMA rating as indicated on the Drawings. An Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. inspection label shall appear on the interior of the cabinet. Enclosures designated as NEMA 4X shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. Enclosures with all other NEMA ratings shall be constructed of No. 12 U.S.S. code gauge galvanized steel, painted ANSI #61 light gray. The enclosure shall have wiring gutters on sides and shall be at least 5-3/4 inches deep. 2. The door shall be fastened to the enclosure with concealed hinges and shall be equipped with flush-type catches and locks. The Contractor shall equip cabinet doors exceeding 40 inches in height with vertical bolt three-point locking mechanism. All locks shall be keyed alike. The panelboard trim shall have a removable hinge assembly, in addition to the door hinge, that allows work inside the enclosure without the need to remove the trim. 3. The panelboard shall be provided with an information label. The information label shall include the panelboard designation, voltage, phase, wires, and bus rating. C. Bus Work 1. Main bus bars shall be of ample size so that a current density of not more than 1000 amperes per square inch of cross section will be attained. This current density shall be based on the application of the full load connected to the panel plus approximately 25% of the full load for spare capacity. The main bus shall be full capacity as based on the preceding for the entire length of the panel so as to provide full flexibility of circuit arrangement. Bus shall be sized in accordance with UL standards to limit the temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees C above a maximum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. 2. Solid neutral bus bars are required, and neutral bus ampacity shall be the same as the main bus bars unless otherwise noted. Ratings shall be in accordance with applicable standards. 3. A separate ground bus shall be provided with lugs for termination of equipment grounding conductors. 4. Branch bus work shall be rated to match the maximum branch circuit breaker which may be installed in the standard space. 5. All bus shall be tin-plated copper and shall extend the entire useable length of the panelboard, including spaces. D. Circuit Breakers 1. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on, molded-case type and UL 489 Listed. All circuit breakers shall have quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanism for manual as Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Panelboards Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 24 16-5 well as automatic operation. Tandem or half-size circuit breakers are not acceptable. 2. Where indicated on the Drawings, or where required by Code, circuit breakers shall be equipped with integrally mounted ground fault interrupters complete with "TEST" push button and shall be of a type which fit standard panelboard spaces for the breaker continuous current rating required. Ground fault circuit interrupter style circuit breakers shall be UL 943 Listed. Circuit breakers used for lighting circuit switching shall be approved for the purpose and shall be marked "SWD". Where required by Article 440 of the NEC, circuit breakers installed for air conditioning units shall be HACR type. 3. Circuit breaker voltage ratings shall meet or exceed the panelboard voltage indicated on the Drawings. The number of poles and trip ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Where a trip rating is not indicated on the Drawings, provide a 20A circuit breaker. Circuit breakers for panelboards rated 240VAC and below shall have an interrupting rating at 240 VAC that matches the panelboard short circuit rating. Circuit breakers for panelboards rated above 240VAC shall have an interrupting rating at 480 VAC that matches the panelboard short circuit rating. 4. Main circuit breakers shall be individually mounted. Branch mounted circuit breakers are not acceptable unless specifically indicated on the Drawings. Coordinate top or bottom mounting of main circuit breaker with incoming conduit location. 5. Where indicated on the Drawings, branch circuit breakers shall be provided with a padlockable hasp or handle padlock attachment for padlocking in the off position as required to meet the NEC requirement for disconnecting means and/or OSHA lock-out/tagout standard. Locking hardware shall remain in place even when the padlock is removed. Branch circuit breakers shall be provided with a similar lock-on device where indicated on the Drawings. E. Directories 1. Approved directories with noncombustible plastic cover, and with typewritten designations of each branch circuit, shall be furnished and installed in each panelboard. The Contractor shall maintain in each panel, during the duration of the Contract, a handwritten directory clearly indicating the circuit breakers in service. This directory shall be updated as work progresses, and final, typewritten directories, as specified above, shall be installed at the end of the project. Designations and circuit locations shall conform to the panelboard schedules on the Drawings, except as otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Panelboards Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 24 16-6 2.03 COMBINATION POWER UNITS A. Combination power units shall be installed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. The unit shall be a combination of a transformer and a lighting panelboard. Transformer rating, primary circuit breaker rating, secondary circuit breaker rating, and panelboard bus rating shall be as indicated on the Drawings. The transformer and panelboard shall meet the requirements for these products as specified herein and elsewhere in these Specifications. B. Combination power units shall have all copper windings and terminations. The transformer shall have 80°C temperature rise and be epoxy resin encapsulated. C. The combination power unit shall be a Mini-Power Zone as manufactured by the Square D Company, a Mini-Power Center as manufactured by Eaton, Servicecenter as manufactured by ABB, or Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc. equivalent. 2.04 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Surge protective devices (SPD) shall be provided integral to the panelboard. See Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protective Devices for SPD requirements. B. Integral SPDs shall be installed within the panelboard enclosure in a location that allows the required quantity and rating of branch circuit breakers to be installed. Reducing the quantity of branch circuit breakers to less than that required by the panel schedules is not acceptable. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Panelboards and combination power units shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer, and as required by NECA 407. B. Panelboards shall be set true and plumb in locations as shown on the Drawings. The top of panelboard enclosure shall not exceed six (6) feet above finished floor elevation. C. Enclosures shall not be fastened to concrete or masonry surfaces with wooden plugs. Appropriate cadmium plated or galvanized steel bolts shall be used with expansion shields or other metallic type concrete insert for mounting on concrete or solid masonry walls. Cadmium plated or galvanized steel toggle bolts shall be used for mounting on concrete block or other hollow masonry walls. Bolt diameter shall be as required considering the size and weight of the completed panelboard and enclosure to provide adequate structural support. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Panelboards Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 24 16-7 D. The Contractor shall not use factory furnished knockouts with surface mounted back boxes. The Contractor shall punch or drill required openings during installation and shall equip flush mounted back boxes with manufacturer's standard pattern of knockouts. E. The Contractor shall install cabinets (and other enclosure products) in plumb with the building construction. Flush mounted enclosures shall be installed so that the trim will rest against the surrounding surface material and around the entire perimeter of the enclosure. F. To extent possible, bus loads in all panelboards shall be balanced between phases to within a tolerance of one (1) KVA. Convenience receptacles shall be distributed evenly among all phase buses as much as practical. G. Prior to final completion of the work, all metal surfaces of the equipment shall be cleaned thoroughly, and all scratches and abrasions shall be retouched with the same lacquer as used for shop finishing coats. 3.02 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: 1. Field Tests a. Prior to termination of any conductors to the circuit breakers, all bus work and circuit breakers shall be tested from phase to phase and phase to ground with a 1000 VDC megaohmeter for 1 minute in accordance with NECA 407. Resistance values shall be recorded and shall not be less than 100 megohms. b. Prior to terminating any wires to the circuit breakers, the resistance of the connection between the bus work and each circuit breaker shall be tested through the use of a low-resistance ohmmeter. Record the resistance values for each circuit breaker. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS –Project No.: SA061 Wiring Devices Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 27 26-1 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all switches and receptacles as shown on the Drawings. B. All switches and receptacles shall be furnished and installed in outlet boxes. Reference Section 26 05 33.16 – Boxes for Electrical Systems for outlet box requirements. C. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements and Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Conductors and Cables. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Wiring devices shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. UL 20 – General Use Snap Switches 2. UL 498 – Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles 3. UL 943 – Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit shop drawings. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets. 10 2 2 1 8 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS –Project No.: SA061 Wiring Devices Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 27 26-2 1.05 SPARE PARTS A. The Contractor shall furnish 10% (minimum of 1) spare of each receptacle, switch, and plug furnished and installed for this project. B. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal, shall indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable. C. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size shall have the same parts number. 1.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Each switch and receptacle shall be identified with the equipment item number, manufacturer's name or trademark, and such other information as the manufacturer may consider necessary, or as specified, for complete identification. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. The Contractor shall use the products of a single manufacturer for each type of wiring device. C. The Contractor shall use the products of a single manufacturer for all device plates. Plate variations are allowed for the following devices: 1. Where the selected plate manufacturer does not manufacture a suitable finish plate. 2. Where non-standard plates are required, specified, or shown. D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring devices and device plates. E. Provide specification grade devices manufactured by Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Leviton, Hubbell, Pass & Seymour, or Engineer approved equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS –Project No.: SA061 Wiring Devices Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 27 26-3 2.02 WIRING DEVICES A. Wall switches shall be rated for the current required to suit the application, but not less than 20A. Double pole, three-way, and four-way switches shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings, and as required. Switches shall be rated for 120-277VAC and shall be UL 20 Listed. B. Convenience receptacles shall be rated for 20A at 125VAC and shall be UL 498 Listed. Receptacles shall be weather resistant where installed in wet or damp locations. C. All wiring devices shall be approved for use with stranded conductors, if stranded conductors are to be used with the device. Reference Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Conductors and Cable for conductor requirements 2.03 DEVICE PLATES A. Device plates shall be Appleton Type FSK, Crouse-Hinds #DS185, or equal for wall switches. Device plates for receptacles shall be “in-use” style. “In-use” weatherproof covers shall be rugged, minimum 3 ¼” depth, die-cast aluminum as manufactured by Thomas & Betts "Red Dot," Intermatic International, Inc., or equal. 2.04 PLUGS A. The Contractor shall furnish suitable plugs with equipment furnished under the respective Specification Section. Plugs shall be black rubber or plastic. For waterproof receptacles, the plugs shall be similar in construction to the receptacles and shall be encased in corrosion resistant yellow housing provided with clamping nuts and stuffing gland cable outlets. 2.05 PROCESS INSTRUMENTS A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a local disconnect switch at each process instrument (e.g., level transmitter, flow transmitter, analytical instrument etc.,) to disconnect the power supply to the instrument. The device shall be a NSSC series manual motor starting switch without overload protection as manufactured by Crouse- Hinds, Appleton equivalent, or equal. For hazardous locations, the device shall be UL 1203 Listed. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Where more than one (1) switch occurs at one (1) location, gang plates shall be used. B. All device plates shall be set true and plumb and shall fit tightly against the finished wall surfaces and outlet boxes. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS –Project No.: SA061 Wiring Devices Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 27 26-4 C. Wiring device box (outlet box) mounting heights shall be as specified in Section 26 05 33.16 – Boxes for Electrical Systems. D. When indicated height would place any of the equipment at an unsuitable location such as at a molding or break in wall finish, the Contractor shall bring it to the attention of the Engineer for a decision. E. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles shall be furnished and installed in locations where indicated on the Drawings, and as required by the NEC. F. All receptacles shall have a self-adhesive label installed on the top at the respective device plate that indicates which panel and which circuit number the receptacle is supplied from. Labels shall have a white background and black lettering in 14-point font. 3.02 CIRCUITING A. Convenience receptacles shall be grouped on circuits separate from the lighting circuits. A maximum of eight (8) convenience receptacles are permitted per 20A, 120V circuit, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-1 SECTION 26 42 00 IMPRESSED CURRENT CATHODIC PROTECTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A. It is the intent that all new buried metallic piping will be welded or bonded for electrical continuity and receive cathodic protection by means of impressed current (Section 26 42 00) or galvanic cathodic protection systems (Section 26 42 10). B. This Section covers the work necessary to furnish all equipment, labor, and materials to construct a fully operational impressed current, deep well anode groundbed system, and new electrical equipment (rectifier, junction box, disconnect, and remote monitor), as shown on the Drawings and specified herein, complete. C. This Section covers the work necessary to furnish all equipment, labor, and materials to install cathodic protection test stations and electrical isolation as shown on the Drawings and specified herein, complete. D. Ancillary work to be completed by the CONTRACTOR includes leveling of site as needed for equipment access, removal and disposal of drill cuttings per state regulations, construction of reinforced concrete equipment pad, general site cleanup, and connecting electrical equipment E. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to determine the best construction method for the site conditions and to meet the project requirements. The OWNER shall not be liable for any additional costs the CONTRACTOR may incur associated with constructing the surface anode groundbed specified. F. Electrical isolation testing to assure cathodically protected piping is electrically isolated from steel reinforcement/rebar, electrical grounding, and other structures not intended to be part of the cathodic protection system. 1.02 PROJECT REFERENCES: A. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to confirm the information provided and conduct an independent investigation of subsurface soil conditions in the area. 1.03 STANDARDS: A. The following standards are included by reference: 1. AMPP / NACE International a. NACE SP-0169 b. NACE SP-0177 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-2 1.04 SUBMITTALS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION: A. Submittals prior to construction shall be made in accordance with project requirements and as follows: 1. Project Controls a. Project Schedule b. Containment Plan c. Overall System Wiring Diagram: Identify location of connections, label marking, wire size, color, and products. d. Procedures and equipment to be utilized for electrical logging of deep anode groundbeds. e. Traffic Control Plan, if applicable. f. Job site safety plan. 2. Product Data catalog cuts for the following items, if applicable: a. Anodes and Lead Wires b. Anode Header Cable c. Anode Centralizers d. Coke Breeze e. Anode Junction Box f. Rectifier g. Remote Monitor h. Stationary Copper-Copper Sulfate Reference Cell i. Stand Pipe j. Slotted Vent Pipe k. Reference Electrode l. Test Stations 3. Quality Assurance Submittals a. Corrosion Control Person-In-Charge credentials, minimum AMPP Cathodic Protection Technologist (CP3). b. Driller’s experience statement. Include name of individual(s) who will operate the drilling equipment and a copy of current driller’s license. c. Field test and inspection reports. d. Driller: Experience installing a minimum of five deep anode groundbeds within the last 5 years. e. Provide description of at least five similar, impressed current cathodic protection with anode deep well) jobs completed by the Cathodic Protection CONTRACTOR and Well Driller in the past five years. f. A copy of the Driller’s logs used for deep anode installations. B. Manufacturer information shall be submitted for all cathodic protection system equipment to be used and shall include manufacturer's name, Model No., and rated electrical capacity of equipment, installation instructions, and detailed descriptions of the construction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOLLOWING CONSTRUCTION: A. Submittals following construction shall include the following items: 1. Material Submittals 2. AMPP / NACE Cathodic Protection Credentials Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-3 3. Subcontractor Submittals 4. Current Driller’s License 5. Driller’s Start Card/Well Permit 6. Copies of any type of permit required during the work period 7. Daily work reports including daily safety meeting documentation 8. Completed job hazard analysis form 9. Job site safety plan 10. Well logs, consistent with State requirements must be kept and submitted to the OWNER. Information that must be included in the log are date, depth, and thickness of all formations penetrated, tools used, depth to water in water bearing zones, and cause for any delays. 11. Documentation of any disposed material 12. Photos of the work site o Prior to commencement of work o During the work phase including drilling/digging and installation of anodes o At completion of work and site has been restored to original condition 13. Copy of all testing performed by contractor with accompanying photos 14. Detailed construction as-built drawing 15. Photographs with a detailed diagram of all pertinent information including the location of (example included): o Rectifier and power pole o Ground bed (deep well or surface) o Header cable o Junction Boxes o Other pipeline(s) or utilities close by (within 100’) o GPS Coordinates 1.06 DEFINITIONS: A. Electrically Continuous Pipeline: A pipeline which has a linear electrical resistance equal to or less than the sum of the resistance of the pipe plus the maximum allowable bond resistance for each joint as specified in this section. B. Electrical Isolation: Condition of being electrically isolated from other metallic structures (including, but not limited to, piping, reinforcement, casings) and the environment as defined in NACE SP-0169. C. Ferrous Metal Pipe: Ferrous metal pipe shall be defined as any pipe made of steel or iron alloys and pipe containing steel or iron as a principle structural material, except ASTM C361 reinforced concrete pipe. D. Foreign-Owned: Any buried pipe or cable not specifically owned or operated by the OWNER. E. Active column: Active column of a deep anode groundbed shall be that portion of the groundbed which discharges current, and shall consist of the anodes and coke breeze. F. Inactive column: Inactive column of a deep anode groundbed shall be that portion of the groundbed which does not discharge current, and shall consist of the Bentonite fill, casing, and grout or concrete seal which is above the active column. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-4 G. Lead, Lead Wire, Joint Bond, Pipe Bond Wire, Cable: Insulated copper conductor; the same as wire. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Licensed State of Utah Well Driller: Qualifications and Relevant Work Experience on at least three (3) deep well cathodic protection projects in the last five years. B. CONTRACTOR Qualifications and Work Experience: Minimum of three (3) successfully completed deep well cathodic protection systems in the past three years. C. Contractor’s Corrosion Control Person-In-Charge. 1. Provide the services of an AMPP / NACE International Cathodic Protection Technologist (CP3). The Corrosion Control Person-In-Charge must have overseen the installation of a minimum of five (5) cathodic protection systems in the past 5 years. The Corrosion Control Person-In-Charge shall provide field observation, start-up, and testing services during the installation of the deep anode groundbed and installation of other cathodic protection system components. 2. The Corrosion Control Person-In-Charge shall be on site during the installation of the anodes in the groundbed and will be required to: a. Oversee installation of the deep anode groundbed. b. Verify proper operation of the deep anode groundbed and anode junction box. c. Determine compliance with these Specifications. d. Provide cathodic protection testing as specified. e. Resolve field problems. f. Submit a field report documenting the cathodic protection system installation and daily reports. D. The ENGINEER or their representative has full authority to stop work for non- conformance with these specifications. E. Perform work only in the presence of the ENGINEER or their representative unless the ENGINEER or their representative grants prior approval to perform such work in their absence. Approval to perform work in the ENGINEER’s or their representative’s absence is limited to the current day unless specifically noted to extend beyond the completion of the workday. F. Inspection by the ENGINEER or their representative, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the work, shall not be construed to relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility to perform the work in accordance with these specifications. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-5 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. Products of other manufacturers will be considered at the discretion of the ENGINEER. B. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the product of one manufacturer to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. 2.02 MATERIAL SUPPLIERS: A. Alternate suppliers will be considered, subject to approval of the ENGINEER. Address given is that of the general office; contact these offices for information regarding the location of their representative nearest the project site. 1. MESA Products, Tulsa, OK 2. Farwest Corrosion Control, Gardena, CA 3. Corrpro, Inc., Houston, TX 2.03 RECTIFIER: A. Rectifier shall be air-cooled, with solid state constant current control. The rectifier shall be designed to operate continuously at full rated output at an ambient temperature of 45 degrees C with an ac input of 208 volts, three phase, 60-Hz. The rectifier shall be capable of operation at 110 percent of rated input without damage to the rectifier components. B. The rectifying elements shall be a full wave bridge, silicon diode stack. The rectifier stack shall be protected from over voltage surge with selenium surge plates and over current with current-limiting devices. Lightning protection devices shall be provided on the ac input and dc output of rectifier. The stack shall provide a minimum continuous D.C. voltage and current output as shown on the Drawings. Output shall be controlled with a minimum of 24 evenly divided transformer tap settings. C. Supply the rectifier with separate D.C. voltage and current meters and external panel mounted shunt in series with the ammeter. The meters shall be accurate to within 2 percent of the actual voltage and current output and shall be either d'Arsonval jeweled movement or digital electronic meters. Meters shall be tested and calibrated at the factory. Meters will be tested in the field for accuracy. Inaccurate meters shall be replaced by the manufacturer. D. Transformer, AC circuit breaker, rectifier stacks, constant current control circuit boards, lightning arresters, DC output meters, and all wiring connections shall be housed in an 11 -gauge, steel, hot-dipped galvanized cabinet suitable for pole mounting. The cabinet shall be provided with hinge doors on the front and both sides or the front and one side with tip-out rack assembly. Cabinet shall be provided with hasp for padlocking and shall be sealed to protect the interior components from weather, vandalism, and nest building insects. E. Rectifier shall be manufactured to include remote monitoring equipment connections Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-6 and internal mercury relay switch for current interruption as specified, this section. Remote monitoring provisions included with rectifier shall include: 1. Mercury relay switch with current capacity of 120 percent of the rated DC output, minimum, and input switching voltage of 10 to 14 volts DC, 500 mA maximum, or as specified for remote monitoring equipment this section. 2. Terminal strips with individual terminals for pipe test wire, reference electrodes, and power supply to remote monitoring equipment. 3. Power terminals shall be 2-ampere, minimum, 12 to 24-volt AC, supply power for remote monitoring unit, as specified this section. 4. AC power to remote monitoring unit shall be protected with an independent overload circuit breaker. F. Remote monitoring connection terminals shall be provided by the rectifier manufacturer with enclosed terminal block mounted on the panel board for connection of remote monitoring equipment. Terminal block shall have all rectifier connections completed and terminated with engraved identification or approved equivalent for the following connections: 1. DC Volts, Positive 2. DC Volts, Negative 3. DC Shunt Millivolts, Positive 4. DC Shunt Millivolts, Negative 5. Pipe Potential, Positive 6. Pipe Potential, Negative 7. Relay Switch, Positive, 10 to 14 volts DC 8. Relay Switch, Negative, 10 to 14 volts DC 9. Power Terminal #1, 10 to 25 volts AC 10. AC Detect, Positive 11. AC Detect, Negative G. Supply rectifier with integrated 115 VAC convenience outlet developed from the input voltage. H. Supply rectifier with an operation and maintenance manual that includes an electrical schematic of the rectifier, parts list with replacement part numbers, and troubleshooting procedures. Provide two complete sets of spare fuses packaged in a sealed, waterproof bag in each rectifier. Other spares parts to be provided shall include: 1. 1 ea. AC. Input lightning arrester 2. 1 ea. DC. Output lightning arrester I. Rectifier will be labeled with the Manufacturers equipment tag. No vendor or distributor tags will be accepted. J. Rectifier manufacturer shall be Universal Rectifiers, Inc., Rosenburg, Texas. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-7 2.04 RECTIFIER REMOTE MONITORING EQUIPMENT: A. Provide Mobiltex CorTalk RMU3-cellular/satellite remote monitoring unit (RMU), manufactured by Mobiltex with applicable wiring kits, relays, and heatsinks. B. CONTRACTOR shall verify whether cellular or satellite communications is required for the site in order to provide consistent and reliable communications. C. Supply one RMU and provide all mounting hardware needed for external mounting as required. D. RMU shall have interruption capabilities compatible with the relay supplied with new rectifier. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate RMU supply power and relay electrical requirements with the new rectifier manufacturer. E. RMU shall provide channels to monitor the following values: 1. Rectifier output voltage, ±150 volts DC range 2. Rectifier output amperage, ±150 millivolts DC range 3. Pipe to Soil Potential 1, ±10 volts DC range 4. Pipe to Soil Potential 2, ±10 volts DC range 5. AC voltage detection 6. Control of interrupter relay switching using GPS time for cycle synchronization. 2.05 DEEP ANODE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS: A. IMPRESSED CURRENT ANODE 1. Impressed current anodes for deep well groundbeds shall be Solid Rod Graphite Anodes, treated with phenolic resin, and have center tapped anode wire connections. 2. Graphite Rod Anode Specifications: a. Size 4 x 80 in b. Untreated Weight: 65 lb. c. Resin Treated Weight: 72 lb. d. Surface Area 7.0 ft² e. Treatment: Phenolic resin f. Center Connected g. Epoxy Cap Seal 3. Lead Wire: a. Lead wire connections in graphite rod anodes shall be made with an alloyed lead ferrule soldered to a tinned stranded copper conductor. b. The connection shall withstand a minimum pull-out strength of 300 lbs. with a wire connection resistance under 0.004 ohm. Replace wire connections that have a resistance of 0.004 ohms or greater. c. Submit test records that include the following information: (1) Anode number. (2) Anode wire length. (3) Resistance value of connection. (4) Test equipment. (5) Test method. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-8 d. No. 8 AWG stranded copper with insulation as specified under WIRE, this section. Connection of lead wire to the anode shall be by the manufacturer's standard center tapped connection. The anode connection shall be stronger than the wire. e. Each lead wire shall be ordered with a minimum of 50 feet of extra length to enable field positioning of anodes and above ground anode junction box. f. Anode Lead Wire Make: (1) Single-conductor, No. 8 AWG stranded copper. (2) 20-mil thick cross-linked HALAR primary insulation and 65 mil HMWPE outer insulation. (3) Acceptable anode wire is Permarad, as manufactured by Raychem Corp., Menlo Park, CA, or equal. (4) Furnish with sufficient length to extend splice-free from the anode connection to the anode junction box terminals. 4. Packaging: Lead wire shall be supplied on wooden spools and bound in such a manner as necessary to protect the insulation from damage during shipment. Anodes shall be protected from breakage. Damaged anodes or lead wire will be cause for replacement of the lead wire and anode. Splices are not permitted. 5. Wire Labels: Label the end of each anode lead wire with the anode number and wire length stamped onto the brass tags. Number anodes sequentially from bottom to top. B. ANODE CENTRALIZERS: 1. Metal or plastic assemblies that can be securely attached to the anodes to center them in the drilled hole. 2. No sharp edges or bolts will be permitted on the centralizers. 3. Centralizers shall not block the hole or impair installation of the anode, anode wires, or coke breeze. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Mesa Products, Model CEN-40 b. Farwest Corrosion Control, Model CENTRA-2 C. INACTIVE ZONE WELL SEAL: 1. Powdered Natural Sodium Bentonite Grout for bottom load pumping to seal well inactive zone D. COKE BREEZE FOR DEEP ANODE: 1. Coke breeze shall be lubricated calcined petroleum of the following composition: Volatile Matter 0.7 to 1.8 percent Ash 1.3 percent maximum Sulfur 1.9 percent maximum Fixed Carbon 95.0 percent minimum Particle Size 100 percent less than 16-mesh Density 74 pounds per cubic foot, minimum Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-9 2. Acceptable coke breeze shall be Loresco SC-3 as manufactured by Loresco International, Hattiesburg, MS. E. CASING SANITARY SEAL AND FILL MATERIAL: 1. General a. All well materials and sealing materials for wells shall conform to the State of Utah water well regulations. 2. Sanitary Seal (annulus area between the surface casing and soil): a. Cement Grout: (1) Mix shall be equal parts by weight of sand and cement with not more than 6 gallons of clean water (per 94-pound bag of cement). (2) Quick setting cement, retardants to setting, and other additives, including hydrated lime (up to 10 percent of the volume of cement), and bentonite (up to 5 percent) to make the mix more fluid and/or to reduce shrinkage, may be used. b. Bentonite Slurry: (1) Mixture of bentonite and water in a ratio of not less than 8 pounds of bentonite or expansive clay per gallon of water. (2) Slurry shall not be less than 50 percent expansive clay with the grain size of the remainder to be not greater than coarse sand. (3) Bentonite shall be commercially produced product specifically designed for well sealing. Acceptable products are Aquaguard, Quick-Grout, Plug-Gel, Shur-Gel, Enviro-Plug, or equivalent material. c. Bentonite Chips: (1) Bentonite shall be commercially produced product specifically designed for well sealing. (2) Size: -3/8” +1/4” (3) Bulk Density: 68 lb./ft3 (4) Moisture Content: 15% ± 2 (5) Permeability: 1 x 10-9 cm/sec (6) Acceptable products are Aquaguard, Quick-Grout, Plug-Gel, Shur-Gel, EnviroPlug, or equivalent material. F. SURFACE CASING: 1. PVC well casing, conforming to ASTM F-480, Schedule 40 or as required by State water well drilling regulations. Surface casing shall be installed to the depth shown on the drawings or to the minimum depth required by the State of Utah, whichever is greater. G. SURFACE CASING COVER: 1. Schedule 40 PVC cap for PVC Surface Casing 2. 20” outer diameter cover ring x 12” inner diameter x 10” deep cast iron hatch Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-10 H. STAND PIPE: 1. Use a 1-1/4-inch diameter steel standpipe with threaded connections capable of supporting the entire anode string during hole loading. 2. Equip the standpipe with a six-inch diameter, ¼-inch thick steel end plate. Make vertical slots (2-inch x ¼-inch) in a staggered pattern around the circumference on the lower 30 inches to facilitate pumping coke breeze through the standpipe. Alternatively, the CONTRACTOR can elect to use a Tee type fitting at the end of the standpipe to distribute the coke breeze slurry. 3. After the loading operation is complete, remove the standpipe located above the coke breeze column from the hole. Use a reverse threaded connection or non- welded joint connection for this purpose. I. VENT PIPE: 1. Active Column Vent a. Loresco “Allvent,” 1-inch diameter, solvent welded joints, slotted PVC vent pipe as manufactured by Cathodic Protection Equipment Company, Hattiesburg, MS. b. Slotted vent pipe shall be installed in the active anode column area and extend 15 feet into the inactive column. 2. Inactive Column Vent a. Inactive column vent pipe shall be 1-inch, schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded joints. 3. Surface Vent a. PVC, 1-inch diameter with 180-degree gooseneck at the top. b. PVC cap, 1-inch, with a quantity of ten 3/16-inch holes 2.06 ANODE JUNCTION BOX: A. Terminal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 12-gauge steel with minimum inside dimensions of 24 inches by 18 inches by 6 inches deep or as required to house and terminate the specified number of anodes lead wires. Hinged door to be provided with padlock hasp and one-piece oil-resistant gasket mounted inside the door to form oil tight and dust free seal. B. Hardware: Secure door with stainless steel latches and hinges. Screw or bolt mounted or secured doors will not be acceptable. C. Coating for Box: Hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. D. Terminals and Connectors: Furnish a separate panel board, buss bar, and terminal strip or terminal block connectors, and necessary fasteners for connecting the anode lead terminals to the rectifier positive lead. Provide separate terminal for each anode lead. Quantity of anodes shall be 20 or as shown on the Drawings. E. Shunts: Holloway Type RS, 0.01 ohm. F. Equipment Tags: Provide each junction box with original manufacturer’s equipment tag that identifies the original equipment manufacturer, model number, serial Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-11 number, and any applicable electrical ratings. Equipment tags with vendor or distributor name will not be acceptable. G. Manufacturer: Anode junction box shall be Universal Model ATB or ATB-S as manufactured by Universal Rectifiers Inc., Rosenberg, TX. 2.07 CATHODIC PROTECTION TEST STATIONS: A. Flush Mounted: 1. Test Box: Concrete body cast with a cast iron ring, with a minimum weight of 55 pounds and minimum dimensions of 8 inch inside diameter and 12 inches long. Furnish extensions as required to penetrate concrete surfaces by 4 inches minimum. Furnish with a 12 pound cast iron lid with the letters "TS" or words "Test Station" cast into the lid. 2. Manufacturer and Products: Brooks; Models 1RT or equal. 3. Flush Mount Test Station Terminal Board: a. Test boards for terminating pipeline test leads and other test leads inside test boxes: Plastic or glass reinforced 6-inch by 10-inch by 1/4 inch thick laminate. b. Furnish terminal block with five stainless steel studs, washers, and lock washers. c. Shop fabricated as shown on the Drawings with engrave labels on terminal board. B. Post Mounted (hot-dipped Galvanized Steel Post): 1. Test Station Head: Type A, T, I, and F: Testox series 700 or 1000 series test head. 2. Terminal Block: Plastic with minimum seven terminals. Terminal heads shall have special heads to keep them from turning or shall be easily accessible from both sides of the terminal block without requiring its removal. Terminal studs, washers, and nuts shall be stainless steel. 3. Mounting Post: 3 inch diameter by 6 foot long hot-dipped galvanized steel post. 4. Mounting Hardware: Conduit, straps, and hardware for mounting test station to the post as specified under CONDUIT, LOCKNUTS, AND STRAPS. 5. Manufacturers and Products: Testox 700 and 1000 series test station as manufactured by Gerome Manufacturing, Uniontown, PA. C. STATIONARY REFERENCE ELECTRODES: 1. Prepackaged Copper-Copper Sulfate Reference Electrodes: 2. Material: High impact ABS, ceramic with Moisture Retention Membrane. 3. Dimensions: 1.5” by 10.5” or 1” by 8”. 4. Wire: Minimum 14 AWG stranded copper wire with yellow, 600-volt TW, THWN, or THHN insulation. The wire shall be attached to the electrode and insulated with the manufacturer's standard connection. Connection shall be stronger than the wire. 5. Packaging: Furnish electrode packaged in a plastic or heavy paper bag of sufficient thickness to protect the electrode, backfill, and cloth bag during normal shipping and handling. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-12 6. Manufacturers: a. Borin Manufacturing, Stelth 2 Series b. MC Miller, IonX Permanent Reference Electrode 2.08 CONDUIT, LOCKNUTS, AND STRAPS: A. Exposed Conduit: 1. Rigid conduit shall be galvanized steel. 2. Fittings, junction boxes, pull boxes, and outlet bodies shall be hot-dipped galvanized iron. 3. Buried surfaces of metallic conduit shall be coated with two layers of corrosion protection tape. 4. Locknuts, two-hole straps, and other miscellaneous hardware shall be galvanized steel. Galvanized items shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. B. Buried Conduit: 1. Conduit shall be rigid PVC. 2. Locknuts, two-hole straps, and other miscellaneous hardware shall be galvanized steel. Galvanized items shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 3. Conduit Bushings shall be threaded plastic or plastic coated galvanized steel fittings. 4. Flexible conduit: a. Flexible conduit for ac power from the entrance switch to the rectifier shall be PVC coated, waterproof flexible conduit. 5. Conduit Seal: a. Foam duct sealant shall be a two-part urethane foam with 98% closed cell content. b. The foam duct sealant shall have a compressive strength of 300 pounds (ASTM D1691) and shall have a tensile strength of 250 pounds (ASTM D1623). c. The foam duct sealant shall have a flexural strength of 450 pounds (ASTM D790), and shall withstand temperatures from -20° F to 200° F. d. The foam duct sealant shall be chemically resistant to gasoline, oils, dilute acids, and bases. e. The product shall foam and react in five to ten minutes at 70° F. f. When installed, the sealant shall be capable of holding 10 psi water pressure continuously (equivalent of 22 feet water-head pressure) 2.09 WIRE: A. Anode Header Wire (Anode Junction Box to Rectifier): 1. No. 4 AWG wire from the rectifier to the anode junction box shall be single- conductor, stranded copper wire with 600-volt, high molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation. 2. Furnish with sufficient length to extend splice-free from the anode junction box to the rectifier positive terminal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-13 3. Identify Anode Header Cable with red tape to clearly distinguish wire from Pipeline Negative Wire. B. Pipeline Negative Wire: 1. No. 4 AWG wire from the rectifier to the pipelines shall be single-conductor, stranded copper wire with 600-volt, high molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation. 2. Furnish with sufficient length to extend splice-free from the pipelines to the rectifier negative terminal. 3. Identify Pipeline Negative Wire with white tape to clearly distinguish wire from Anode Header Cable. C. Test Station Wires: 1. General: Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 3-80, WC 5-73, and WC 7-88. 2. Single-conductor, No. 10 AWG stranded copper with 600-volt TW, THWN, or THHN insulation. 3. Galvanic Anode Header Wire: Single-conductor, No. 8 AWG, stranded copper with 600-volt HMWPE insulation. 4. Insulation Color/Identification: Wire insulation color shall indicate the function of each wire and shall be as follows: a. Anodes/Header Cable: Black b. Pipelines: White c. Stationary Reference Cell: Yellow d. Foreign Pipeline: Red (gas), Blue (water) e. Insulated Joints: Green (insulated side), White (protected side) 2.10 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Disconnect switches shall be visible blade type, non-fusible, heavy-duty class in NEMA 3R enclosures for outdoor installations. Electrical rating of switches shall be 110 percent of the circuit ratings, minimum. 2.11 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Furnish indicating type circuit breakers providing ON/OFF and TRIPPED positions of the operating handle. Furnish bolt-on thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break circuit breakers which are non-interchangeable in accordance with the NEC. Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single-pole spaces. Do not use single- pole circuit breakers with handle ties where multipole circuit breakers are indicated. Use multipole circuit breakers designed so that an overload on one-pole automatically causes all poles to open. Provide circuit breakers meeting requirements of UL and NEMA AB 1. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-14 2.12 THERMITE WELD MATERIALS: A. General: 1. Thermite weld materials consist of wire sleeves, welders, and weld cartridges according to the weld manufacturer's recommendations for each wire size and pipe or fitting size and material. 2. Welding materials and equipment shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Interchanging materials of different manufacturers is not acceptable. B. Molds: Graphite. Ceramic "One Shot" molds are not acceptable. C. Adapter Sleeves: 1. For No. 12 AWG or smaller and No. 2 AWG wires. 2. Prefabricated factory sleeve joint bonds or bond wires with formed sleeves made in the field are acceptable. Attach field-formed joint bonds sleeves with the appropriate size and type of hammer die furnished by the thermite weld manufacturer. 3. Extend wire conductor 1/8 inch beyond the end of the adapter sleeve. D. Cartridges: 1. Steel: 32 grams, maximum. 2. Cast and Ductile Iron: 45 grams, maximum, XF-19 alloy E. Welders and Cartridges: For attaching copper wire to pipe material: Pipe Material Weld Type Cartridge Size, Max. NO. 4 AWG WIRE & SMALLER Steel HA, VS, HC 25 gm Ductile or Cast Iron HB, VH, HE 32 gm WIRE JOINT BONDS Steel FS 32 gm Ductile or Cast Iron FC 45 gm F. Welding Materials Manufacturers: 1. Erico Products Inc. (Cadweld), Cleveland, OH. 2. Continental Industries, Inc. (Thermo-Weld), Tulsa, OK. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-15 2.13 COATING REPAIR MATERIAL FOR PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. General: 1. Spot repair damage at thermite weld connections on coated steel pipe with fast cure epoxy coating or petrolatum wax tape. 2. Where connections to bare pipe are made, thermite welds shall be coated to protect the weld from corrosion. B. Epoxy Coating: 1. 100 percent solids, fast curing epoxy suitable for submerged or buried conditions. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Protal 7125 (low temperature), 7200, or Protal 7300, Denso North American, Houston, TX. b. TC 7010, Tapecoat, Evanston, IL. c. 3M; ScotchKote 323. d. Aquata-poxy, American Chemical Corp., East Lake, OH. e. “Or-equal.” C. Wax Tape Coating : 1. Buried thermite welds shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C217. 2. Do not use wax tape coating systems on vault piping, atmospherically exposed piping and appurtenances, or where subject to UV exposures. 1. All components of the wax tape coating system shall be from a single manufacturer as manufactured by Denso North American, Trenton, or equal. 2.14 CONCRETE: A. Mix: 1. Cement: ASTM C150-89, type II with minimum cement content of 564 pounds per cubic yard. 2. Coarse Aggregate Size: 3/4 inches 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days with maximum water- cement ratio of 0.45. B. Air Entrainment: 1. ASTM C260, nontoxic after 30 days and containing no chlorides. 2. Not less than 5 percent entrained air at the project site. 2.15 ANCILLARY MATERIALS: A. Test Station Wire Terminations: One-piece, tin-plated crimp-on ring tongue connector: 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy Co. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-16 b. Thomas and Betts. B. Shunts: Shunts shall be 0.01-ohm Holloway Type RS. C. Compression Connectors: 1. For in-line, tap, and multi-splice, furnish "C" taps made of conductive wrought copper, sized to fit the wires being spliced. 2. Provide crimp tool and dies as recommended by the manufacturer for the wire and connector size. 3. Manufacturer and Product: a. Burndy; Type YC. b. “Or-equal.” D. Electrical Tape: 1. Linerless rubber high-voltage splicing tape and vinyl electrical tape suitable for moist and wet environments. 2. Manufacturer and Product: 3M Products; Scotch 130C and Scotch 88. 2.16 INSULATING JOINTS: A. General: Insulating joints shall be dielectric unions, flanges, or couplings. The complete assembly shall have an ANSI rating equal to or higher than that of the joint and pipeline. All materials shall be resistant for the intended exposure, operating temperatures, and products in the pipeline. B. Insulating Flanges: 1. Complete assembly shall have an ANSI rating of 150 pounds, minimum, or equal to or higher than that of the joint and pipeline. 2. Gasket materials shall be resistant to intended chemical exposure, operating temperatures, and pressures in the pipeline. 3. Gaskets: Full-face Type E with O-ring seal. 4. Insulating Sleeves: Full-length fiberglass reinforced epoxy (NEMA G 10 grade). 5. Insulating Washers: Fiberglass reinforced epoxy (NEMA G 10 grade).] 6. Steel Washers: Plated, hot-rolled steel, 1/8 inch thick. a. Provide two washers per bolt for flange diameters equal to or less than 36- inch diameter. b. Provide four washers bolt for flange diameters larger than 36-inch diameter. 7. Manufacturers: a. GPT, Denver, CO. b. Central Plastics Co., Shawnee, OK. c. Advance Products and Systems, Scott, LA d. Approved Equal. 8. Insulating Unions: O-ring sealed with molded and bonded insulating bushing to union body. a. Manufacturer: (1) Central Plastics Co., Shawnee, OK. (2) Or approved equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-17 2.10 DC BLOCKERS – POLARIZATION CELL REPLACEMENT (PCR): A. DC isolation devices shall be solid-state electronic devices capable of passing AC current while blocking DC current. B. Device shall have electrical rating of 3.7kA fault current at 30 cycles and 45 amperes steady state AC current, minimum or as specified by ENGINEER. C. Device shall have DC blocking capabilities of -3 volts (pipe) to +1 volt (vault, ground) D. Solid-State decoupling device with the following ratings: 60-Hz Current Short Duration, 3 Cycles 5,000 amps ac-rms Symmetrical 60-Hz Current Steady-State, 65 °C Ambient 40 amps ac-rms Symmetrical Lightning Surge Current 100,000 amperes DC Current Leakage Driving Voltage of 1 V DC 65 °C Less than 0.1 milliamp Ambient Operating Temperature Minus 40 °F to Plus 150 °F E. Provide polarization cell in manufacturers standard enclosure Dairyland Electric Industries, Model PCR 3.7kA. F. Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard, as approved by ENGINEER. 2.17 JOINT BONDS: A. Ductile or Cast Iron Pipe: 1. Single-conductor, stranded copper wire with 600-volt THHN or HMWPE insulation. Supply joint bonds complete with a formed copper sleeve on each end of the wire. 2. No. 2 AWG wires, 18 inches long. B. Flexible Coupling, Flanged Coupling Adapter, and Other Non-standard Joints: 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: No. 2 AWG wires, 24 inches long, THHN or HMWPE insulation, with two 12-inch long THHN insulated No. 12 AWG wire pigtails, as manufactured by Erico Products Inc. (Cadweld), Cleveland, OH. 2. Steel Pipe: Solid copper strap, 1-1/4-inch wide by 1/16-inch thick, equivalent to 1/0 AWG wire, with five punched holes for thermite welding to the coupling and pipe. Strap bond shall be fabricated for the length of the coupling with sufficient additional length for 1 inch of joint movement. Weld bonds to pipe with the thermite weld mold recommended by the bond manufacturer. Strap bond shall be as manufactured by Erico Products, Continental Industries, or approved equal. C. Insulated Flexible Coupling Joints: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-18 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: No. 8 AWG THHN or HMWPE wire, 18-inch long, with one 12-inch long THHN insulated No. 12 AWG wire pigtail. 2. Steel Pipe: Solid copper strap, 1-1/4-inch wide by 1/16-inch thick, equivalent to 1/0 AWG wire, with four punched holes for thermite welding to the coupling and pipe. Strap bond shall be fabricated for the length of the coupling with sufficient additional length for 1 inch of joint movement. Weld bonds to pipe with the thermite weld mold recommended by the bond manufacturer. Strap bond shall be as manufactured by Erico Products, Continental Industries, or approved equal. 2.18 OTHER MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Rectifier and Anode Junction Box Supports: 1. Material: a. Hot-dipped Galvanized 4" SQ. BY 1/4" Thick Steel Tube Posts. b. Posts shall be Filled with Concrete and Rounded Off Top With Grout Plug. 2. Coating: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153. B. Equipment Guard / Bollards: 1. Material: Steel, 6-inch diameter Schedule 40 pipe, as shown on Drawings. 2. Posts shall be Filled with Concrete and Rounded Off Top With Grout Plug. 3. Coating: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. The installation of the facilities specified herein and described shall conform to the latest applicable rules as set forth herein and on the Drawings. The workmanship shall be of the highest grade and shall be in strict accordance with material manufacturer's instructions. Equipment or materials damaged in shipment or in the course of installation shall be replaced. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the anode beds, rectifiers, generator, wires, conduits, and associated items. If departures from the Drawings are deemed necessary by the CONTRACTOR, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review as soon as practical, but not later than 30 days before installation. B. The CONTRACTOR shall examine all Drawings and coordinate work to avoid conflicts, errors, delays, and unnecessary interference with the construction of the facilities and to avoid duplication of the work such as excavation, filling, etc. In the event of any conflicts in the Specifications, the ENGINEER shall be consulted. 3.02 STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Store all anodes off the ground and keep them dry at all times. Protect against weather, condensation, and mechanical damage. B. Immediately remove from the project site all damaged anodes. Anodes shall not be lifted or held by the lead wire. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-19 C. Anode backfill material that has become wet will not be acceptable. 3.03 DEEP ANODE GROUNDBED INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. The new anode deep well shall be connected to the positive terminal of the new rectifier. Drilling, electrical logging of hole, lowering of anodes, coke breeze placement, and backfilling shall be done in a continuous operation and shall be observed by the ENGINEER. 2. CONTRACTOR shall be a certified water well driller in current standing in the State of Utah and shall obtain all drilling permits, submit notification of work, and submit drilling logs in accordance with state regulations. 3. Driller will be solely responsible for all aspects of the drilling and well construction until the well completion. 4. Drilling of the groundbed shall be in accordance with the methods and procedures of the best recognized drilling practices and shall comply with the rules and regulations of the State, County, City, or other governing bodies having jurisdiction. 5. Deep anode groundbed holes shall be sealed as specified herein or as required by well drilling regulations. The most stringent requirements shall apply. 6. Take necessary precautions to avoid entrance of foreign matter, movement of soil strata, or collapsing of the hole during the progress of the work. Should movement of soil strata or collapse of the drilled hole interfere with proper completion of the ground bed, recover the wires and anode strings if necessary and ream or re-drill the well. 7. The driller shall maintain a log describing the depth and type of formations encountered during drilling. Copies of the log shall be submitted to the ENGINEER and appropriate authorities. 8. Wells not completed in accordance with the State of Utah well regulations and these specifications will be subject to rejection and replacement at the CONTRACTOR’s sole expense. B. Drilling: 1. Coordinate the actual location of the ground bed in the field with the ENGINEER before drilling begins. Verify and locate all buried utilities prior to beginning drilling operations. 2. CONTRACTOR shall collect and store all drilling fluids, water, muds, and spoils in a manner to avoid any releases. The storage vessel will be selected by the CONTRACTOR to be compatible with the drilling method and volume of materials generated by the CONTRACTOR’s selected drilling method. All water, drilling muds, and spoils must be contained and collected. Release of water, drilling muds, and spoils is not allowed and the CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs to contain and store, and for any penalties, cleanup costs, or fines, if released. 3. CONTRACTOR’s containment system shall prevent mud from entering storm drains, gutters, streams, or leaving the project site. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-20 4. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cleaning all spills and overflows and, if necessary, will clean storm drains and manholes impacted by uncontained drilling fluids. 5. Excavation of a temporary mud pit on the project site will not be permitted. 6. CONTRACTOR shall transport and dispose of all drilling fluids and cuttings to an approved disposal location. 7. Spillage or leakage of oil or hydraulic fluids shall be contained and controlled by the Driller. All oil contamination on the drilling site resulting from drilling equipment shall be contained, cleaned up, and properly disposed off the project site. 8. Construct the well and set casing round, straight, and plumb. 9. Set surface casing prior to completion of the first 100 feet of the well. Casing, other than surface casing, shall not be installed or left in the well unless in the driller’s estimation it is necessary for successful completion of the well. Plastic surface casing shall not extend into the active column. 10. If steel casing is installed into the active column, it shall be cut 100 feet below the surface and the top portion jacked up to provide a 25 foot, minimum, separation between the upper casing and the top of the active column. Complete cutting of the steel casing before the anodes are installed. Jacking operations may be completed before or after installation of the anode assembly at the CONTRACTOR's option. 11. Over drill the well to compensate for sloughing or heaving during anode installation. C. Electrical Logging: 1. Flush the hole and electrically log the hole in the presence of the ENGINEER to determine the soil characteristic along the length of the well. 2. Electrical Logging Method: make a resistance to earth reading as the first anode is lowered into the hole. The first anode shall be electrically isolated from the steel standpipe to facilitate testing. Test using suitable meters, connections to a low resistance ground, and a method to measure the down hole wire length or provide footage identification markings on the wire. 3. Record resistance readings and depth from the surface continuously or at 5-foot increments for the entire hole depth. Note depth of groundwater at time of electrical logging. D. Lowering of Anodes: 1. Anode installation to be observed by the ENGINEER. 2. Install anodes and coke breeze the same day as the completion of the drilling and electrical logging. If loading is delayed more than 8 hours after drilling is completed or if loading cannot be completed before sunset or end of working hours, whichever comes first, the drill stem and bit should be reinserted and run back to the bottom of the hole with sufficient rotation and circulation to ensure that the drilled hole is prepared for anode installation. 3. If the hole is drilled with mud, the hole shall be flushed out with clean water in a continuous process before or after the anodes are lowered, at the CONTRACTOR’s option, until the return fluid is sufficiently clear to allow proper settlement of the coke. The ENGINEER shall inspect the return fluid before coke breeze pumping will be permitted to begin. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-21 4. Attach anode centralizers to each of the anodes prior to lowering. 5. Prepare to load the groundbed by assembling the various components and attach them to the steel standpipe. Securely attach anodes to the standpipe using steel banding material or appropriately sized steel hose clamps. Care shall be taken to ensure that the anodes are not damaged during this process and that the anodes are secured in such a way that they do not move. Secure the vent pipe and anode lead wires to the standpipe using a minimum of five wraps of vinyl electrical tape. Carefully lower the standpipe, with the anode string attached, into the hole. Securely attach each successive anode and other down-hole materials to the standpipe as it is lowered into the hole. Add additional joints of standpipe to the top of the string to accommodate all anodes. Ensure that the weight of the anode string is born by the standpipe and not the vent pipe or anode lead wires. 6. Provide sufficient slack in the anode wires to prevent damage during the anode and coke breeze installation. 7. The bottom of the vent pipe shall be capped and each joint of pipe solvent welded in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. CONTRACTOR shall prevent foreign matter from entering the vent pipe during anode installation and grout sealing placement. The CONTRACTOR shall clear any blockage of the vent pipe. Failure to clear the vent pipe will result in rejection of the ground bed. Vent pipe shall be permitted to flow water during coke breeze pumping to flush any mud and cuttings from the vent. 8. Prior to installation, any damage to anodes or cut, gouged, or scraped wire insulation will result in rejection of the anode and lead wire. CONTRACTOR shall implement means to protect the anode lead wires during and following anode installation. 9. Fit the standpipe with a reverse-threaded coupling assembly above the top anode so the sections of standpipe above the top anode can be retrieved from the hole after the complete anode string is lowered into the hole and secured. Other methods of standpipe retrieval from the inactive column shall be preapproved by ENGINEER. E. Backfilling of Anode Hole: 1. Top-loading the coke breeze, by pouring coke breeze into the hole will not be permitted. 2. Keep hole full of water during installation of the coke breeze. 3. Prepare coke breeze slurry with potable water in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations. 4. Using the standpipe as a pump pipe, begin pumping coke breeze at a steady, continuous rate. Mix and pump coke breeze and water in a continuous operation until the hole is filled to the correct level. Do not stop pumping until all coke breeze has been pumped into the hole. 5. Throughout coke breeze pumping, displaced water and mud shall be collected and stored for disposal. Discharge of mud and water into the storm drains or public right-of-way, or roadways will not be allowed. CONTRACTOR will be responsible to determine and provide the storage capacity required. Should the water and mud storage capacity be inadequate for the project, work will be terminated until adequate capacity is provided. Loss of materials or collapse of the hole due to termination of the loading operation will be at the CONTRACTOR’s sole expense. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-22 6. Care shall be taken during pumping of the coke breeze to avoid coke breeze bridging or collapse of the hole. If the hole collapses or coke breeze bridges, the CONTRACTOR shall take necessary steps to resolve the problem at CONTRACTOR sole expense. 7. Restrain anodes from settling during and following coke breeze installation for 12 hours, minimum, for coke breeze settlement and compaction. Maintain anode restraint until all anode settlement stops. 8. After the coke breeze is installed and has settled for 12 hours the ENGINEER shall measure the depth to the top of the coke breeze column. If required, additional coke breeze shall be added by pumping or top loading to the specified elevation. 9. When the coke breeze has properly settled and has been placed to the proper depth, fill the inactive column with the bentonite grout sealing material to within 4 feet of ground surface. Use native material to fill the remainder of the hole to grade. 10. At all times during the progress of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall protect the groundbed in such a manner as to effectively prevent tampering or entrance of foreign matter. F. Placement of Casing Seals: 1. Sanitary Casing Seal: a. Install sanitary seal between casing and soil. b. The ENGINEER shall review the method of seal placement. If the seal is placed below ground water elevation, no method will be permitted that does not force the sealing material from the bottom of the annular space to the surface. c. The seal placement shall be done continuously and in a manner that will ensure the entire filling of the annular space in one operation. d. Place casing sanitary seal by tremie pipe if hole is greater than 25 feet or groundwater is present within the hole. e. No drilling operations will be permitted until the neat cement or grout has cured. Curing time for portland cement, Type I or II, is a minimum of 72 hours and for Type III a minimum of 36 hours. Addition of an accelerator will be permitted subject to written approval from the State Water Engineer. 2. Casing Seal: a. After the coke breeze settlement is completed, anode settlement is stopped, and all wires have been terminated, the casing shall be filled with the specified sealing material. b. Placement of the sealing material will be with tremie pipe only for slurry type seals. Inserting of the tremie pipe shall be performed in a manner that will not damage the wire insulation. c. Granular sealing materials may be top loaded but shall be loaded at a rate that will not result in bridging of the seal material. G. Anode Wire Terminations: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall cut a smooth hole in the side of the casing for routing wires to the anode junction box. The penetration of the casing shall be watertight. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-23 2. Anode wires shall be installed in conduit from the ground bed to the anode junction box. 3. The completed electrical conduit shall be watertight. 4. Seal both ends of the conduit from the ground bed with urethane foam to prevent ground bed gases from entering the junction box. 5. Anode lead shall be terminated in numerical order in correspondence to anode depth. 6. Anode header cable from anode junction box shall be terminated to the rectifier positive terminal. Install a new two-barrel lug on rectifier positive terminal stud to serve as a connection for new anode header cables. H. Groundbed and Vent Pipe Termination: 1. Connect the surface pipe directly to the plastic vent pipe with a solvent welded by threaded connection adapter. 2. Terminated vent pipe as shown on the Drawings. 3. After all wire terminations and vent pipe connections are completed, complete filling of the inactive column with the specified sealing material. 4. Plumb and support vent pipe during seal placement and while the seal sets or compacts. I. Cleanup: 1. The drilling site shall be kept neat and orderly under all circumstances. 2. All excess equipment and cuttings shall be removed daily when required by the prevailing conditions at the drilling site. The CONTRACTOR shall remove all mud, waste products, and tailings from the project site and dispose of it at an approved disposal site. 3. The project sites shall be restored to a condition equivalent to their original condition before construction started and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. Damage to sidewalks, curbs, roads, and driveways shall be restored to original condition or better. 3.04 RECTIFIER INSTALLATION: A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the rectifier mounting hardware, conduit run and connection to designated breaker, AC power wiring from the breaker panel box to the rectifier, and all AC and DC electrical hardware necessary for the rectifier installation and operation. B. The rectifier installation and location shall be as shown on the Drawings, except when the Drawings and local or State electrical codes are contradictory. In such cases, local or State electrical codes shall prevail. C. DC leads from the anode and pipe to the rectifier shall be No. 4 AWG wire with the specified insulation. Lead wires in conduit shall be buried a minimum of 36 inches below finished grade. All leads shall be free of splices, except where shown. Insulation on all anode, structure, and rectifier leads shall be free of cut or abraded areas. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-24 D. Provide the ENGINEER with 10 working days prior notice of the completion of the rectifier and groundbed installation to allow scheduling of the required energizing and testing procedure. 3.05 REMOTE MONITORING UNIT (RMU) INSTALLATION: A. Provide all conductors and electrical hardware necessary for installation of the remote monitoring unit including stationary reference electrodes, GPS receiver, and lead wires connected to pipelines. B. Locate GPS antennae in area where a reliable and consistent signal connection can be maintained. Route antennae wire inside rigid galvanized steel conduit when GPS receiver is located away from the rectifier unit. C. Remote monitoring unit to be installed at rectifier as shown on Drawings. D. Contractor shall be responsible for registering equipment with manufacturer and establishing account in the Owners name. 3.06 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL: A. Complete excavations and trenching regardless of the type, nature, or condition of materials encountered, and as required to accomplish specified construction to lines and grades shown. B. Take care to avoid damage to existing structures and utilities during excavating and trenching process. CONTRACTOR may modify location, where approved by the ENGINEER, to minimize possible damage to existing structures. Trench shall be of uniform depth and width, level, smooth, and free of sharp objects. C. Scrape top soil to the side first so upon backfilling the top soil can be returned as the topmost layer of soil. D. Slope, shore, or brace excavations and trenches in accordance with OSHA regulations as necessary to prevent caving during excavation in unstable material, or to protect adjacent structures, property, workers, and the public. E. Backfill trench with excavated backfill materials, unless otherwise specified. Compaction requirements shall be as specified for the pipeline or to 90 percent compaction, whichever is more stringent. Backfill within 5 feet of roadways, paved areas, or other traffic areas shall be compacted to 95 percent. F. Do not use backfill material of frozen or consolidated debris. Leave the trench with the excess backfill material neatly mounded not more than 4 inches above the existing ground level for the entire width of the trench. 3.07 CONDUITS: A. Secure conduits entering cabinets, junction boxes, or terminal boxes with double locknuts, one on the outside and one on the inside. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-25 B. Install conduit parallel or horizontal, and plumb to slabs. All changes in direction shall be at 90 degrees using either radius bends or outlet boxes. Conduit crossings shall be perpendicular to the other conduit or pipe. C. Install insulated bushings and insulated throat connectors on the ends of rigid metallic conduit. D. Use watertight couplings and connections. Install and equip boxes and fittings to prevent water from entering the conduit or box. Seal unused openings. 3.08 EQUIPMENT GUARD INSTALLATION: A. Install hot dipped galvanized steel guard/bollards around equipment as shown on Drawings or as directed by ENGINEER. 3.09 ANODE JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION: A. Install anode junction box and install conduit on anode lead cables into junction box, extending below grade, 18-inches, minimum. B. Connect the rectifier positive lead and anode wires to the junction box terminals with the shunts, bus bars, and appropriate fasteners. C. Maintain sufficient slack to keep the wire from being unduly stressed, damaged, or broken during backfill. 3.10 WIRE CONNECTIONS: A. Thermite Weld: 1. Use thermite weld method for electrical connection of copper wire to steel, ductile, and cast iron surfaces. Observe proper safety precautions, welding procedures, thermite weld material selection, and surface preparation recommended by the welder manufacturer. Assure that the pipe or fitting wall thickness is of sufficient thickness that the thermite weld process will not damage the integrity of the pipe or fitting wall or protective lining. 2. After the weld connection has cooled, remove slag, visually inspect, and physically test wire connection by tapping with a hammer; remove and replace any defective connections. 3. On pipe and fittings with dielectric linings, make the weld connection on the shop tab provided or on a thick metal section to minimize damage to the lining and coating. After the weld is made, coat the weld with coating repair material. 4. Coat each completed wire connection as specified, this section. 5. If the lining is damaged by welding, repair in accordance with the lining applicator's recommendations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-26 3.11 CONCRETE: A. CONTRACTOR shall finish all concrete work to a smooth trowelled finish with radius edges. B. All forms shall be removed from concrete work prior to final acceptance and removed from the project site. 3.12 INSULATED JOINTS: A. Install insulated joints to electrically isolate the pipeline from vault piping, electrically grounded facilities, and where shown on the Drawings. B. Align and install insulating joints according to the manufacturer's recommendations to avoid damaging insulating materials. C. After assembly of insulated flanges, prepare cement-mortar surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and apply a 20-mil minimum thickness of EPA potable water approved, 100 percent solids water or air curing epoxy coating to the interior of the pipeline. Apply coating for a minimum of two pipe diameter lengths from the insulating flange in both directions. Apply and cure coating in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply coating where it will interfere with operation of pipeline valves or other pipeline assemblies. D. The CONTRACTOR shall test each insulated joint for electrical insulation as specified this section. Defective insulating joints shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at his sole expense. All damaged or defective insulation parts shall be replaced. 3.13 TEST STATION INSTALLATION: A. Location, type, and style of test stations shall be as shown on the Schedules on Drawings. Final field location shall be determined based on actual site conditions and as approved by the ENGINEER. B. Locate test stations where shown on the Schedules on Drawings. 1. Install test stations as appropriate at 1,000-foot intervals or less. 2. Install Type F test stations where any ferrous metal pipe crosses a foreign owned pipeline under cathodic protection C. Wires to foreign-owned pipelines will be attached by pipeline owner, unless permission is granted to Contractor in writing by owner of foreign pipeline. Coordinate this Work with owner of foreign pipeline before pipe is excavated. D. Attach all test wires to the pipe by the thermite weld method unless approved otherwise. E. The wires from the test stations shall be buried a minimum of 36 inches below finished grade. Provide 12-inch loop in wires at pipe and beneath test station to prevent them from being stressed or broken during backfilling operations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-27 F. Test wires within paved roadways and with less than 36 inches of ground cover shall be installed in rigid PVC-coated steel conduit, except when located under concrete floor slabs. G. Make wire connections to test station terminals with crimp-on ring tongue terminals, except where solid wire is specified. H. Wire Labels: 1. Install labels on conductors in test stations. 2. Position markers in boxes so they do not interfere with operation and maintenance. 3.14 PIPE JOINT BONDING: A. To form an electrically continuous pipeline and associated appurtenances, the joints of all buried steel pipe, including vault and manhole piping and all fittings, and including all restrained joints, shall be electrically bonded, except joints specified to be threaded, welded, or insulated. B. Install two joint bond assemblies at each steel pipe joint that requires bonding. C. Electrical connection of all wires to pipe and fittings shall be by the thermite weld process. 3.15 WIRE INSULATION REPAIR: A. Splicing of wire will not be permitted except where specifically shown on Drawings and approved by the ENGINEER. B. Splices or damage to the wire insulation shall be required by spirally wrapping with two coats of high-voltage rubber splicing tap and two layers of vinyl electrical tape. C. Make wire splices with suitable sized compression connectors or mechanically secure and solder with rosin cored 50/50 solder. 3.16 SOLID STATE DECOUPLING DEVICES A. Provide solid state decoupling devices for isolating joints as shown on Drawings. Mount decoupling devices to wall adjacent to pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s standards, as approved by Engineer, and where indicated on the Drawings. 3.17 TESTS AND INSPECTION: A. General: 1. Functional testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR’s Cathodic Protection Technologist, in the presence of the ENGINEER to demonstrate that the completed cathodic protection station is fully operational. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-28 2. Verify continuity of new cables associated with cathodic protection components and test stations following installation. B. Electrical Continuity Testing: 1. General: a. Furnish all necessary equipment and materials and make all electrical connections to the pipe as required to test continuity of bonded joints. b. Conduct a continuity test on all buried joints that are required to be bonded. Test the electrical continuity of joint bonds after the bonds are installed but before backfilling of the pipe. c. The CONTRACTOR shall test completed joint bonds for electrical continuity using digital low resistance ohmmeter or by the Calculated Resistance Test Method at the CONTRACTOR's option. The equipment and test procedures for the two methods are described herein. 2. Digital Low Resistance Ohmmeter Method: a. Equipment and Materials: (1) One Biddle Model 247001 digital low resistance ohmmeter or equal. (2) One set of duplex helical current and potential handspikes, Biddle Model No. 241001, cable length as required. b. Test Procedure: Measure the resistance of joint bonds with the low resistance ohmmeter in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Use the helical handspikes to contact the pipe on each side of the joint, without touching the thermite weld or the bond. The contact area shall be cleaned to bright metal by filing or grinding and without any surface rusting or oxidation. Record the measured joint bond resistance on the test form described herein. Repair any damaged pipe coating in accordance with WIRE CONNECTIONS, this section. 3. Joint Bond Acceptance: a. Joint bond resistance shall be less than or equal to the maximum allowable bond resistance values shown in Table 1. Table 1 Joint Type Max. Allowable Resistance (Ohms) One Bond/Joint Two Bonds/Joint Three Bonds/Joint No. 2 AWG wire Bonds 0.000325 0.000162 0.000081 Flexible Coupling 0.000425 0.000212 0.000115 b. The CONTRACTOR shall replace any joint bond that exceeds the allowable resistance. Replacement joint bonds shall be retested for compliance with the specified bond resistance. c. Any defective joint bond discovered during energizing and testing shall be located, excavated, repaired, and backfilled by the CONTRACTOR. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-29 4. Test Records: Records shall be made of each bonded pipeline during the test and submitted to the ENGINEER. These records shall include: a. Description and location of the pipeline tested. b. Starting location and direction of test. c. Date of test. d. Joint type. e. Test current and voltage drop across each joint and calculated bond resistance (Calculated Resistance Method only). f. Measured joint bond resistance (Digital Low Resistance Ohmmeter method only). C. Electrical Isolation Testing: 1. Pipe penetrations shall be tested for electrical isolation from rebar and wire ties before, during, and after pouring concrete. Electrical shorts shall be mitigated prior to pouring concrete. Testing shall be performed again after concrete is poured. Electrical isolation shall be verified and if electrical isolation cannot be achieved, Contractor shall propose alternatives to resolve the problem, including installation of impressed current system at the Contractor’s cost. 2. Acceptable electrical isolation test methods include one or more of the following tests that provided conclusive information confirming electrical isolation: a. 4-Point Electrical Resistance Testing b. Pipe-To-Rebar Potential Difference Measurements c. Current Applied Testing 3. CONTRACTOR shall conduct additional electrical isolation tests as required to assure the pipe is not electrically shorted by contact with concrete reinforcement or other equipment. D. Insulated Joint Testing: 1. Test each insulating joint after assembly with a GAS Electronics Model 601 insulator tester or equivalent instrument in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Conduct test before burial and coating of buried insulating flanges. 2. CONTRACTOR to replace damaged or defective insulation parts identified during testing. 3. Electrical Isolation is defined as a condition of being electrically isolated from other metallic structures (including, but not limited to, other piping, concrete reinforcement, casings, and other structures not intended to be cathodically protected) and the environment as defined in NACE Standard Practice SP0169. 4. ENGINEER shall conduct additional insulating joint tests as required to assure that insulating flanges are not electrically shorted by other equipment or incidental contact with concrete reinforcement or other equipment during energizing and testing. E. Cathodic Protection System Energizing and Testing: 1. Initial Survey: Conduct an initial potential survey at all test stations and measure the baseline (native) pipe-to-soil potential before energizing the rectifier. Record GPS coordinates for each test station. 2. Functional Testing: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 00-30 a. Perform functional testing in presence of ENGINEER. b. When construction of each cathodic protection station(s) is completed, notify ENGINEER that installation is ready to be turned ON. c. Conduct operating test of rectifier, induvial anodes, test stations, remote monitoring unit, and all other associated equipment to demonstrate equipment is installed correctly and operating properly. 3. Rectifier Meters: Field test meters for accuracy; replace inaccurate meters. 4. Energizing and Testing: a. General: (1) Upon successful completion of functional testing, energize rectifiers at low current output and increase current output as required. Complete additional testing and adjustment to provide cathodic protection at all test points in accordance with NACE SP0169. (2) Record baseline potentials at all test stations. (3) Interrupt all cathodic protection rectifiers and obtain ON and OFF potentials at all test stations. b. Initial Testing and Adjustment: (1) Adjust cathodic protection system to achieve polarized (instant OFF) pipe-to-soil potentials in the range of -850 millivolts to -1150 millivolts with reference to a copper-copper sulfate reference electrode (CSE). (2) Test all insulated joints and points with dielectric isolation for proper function. Troubleshoot any defects found and report necessary corrections to ENGINEER. (3) Conduct stray current interference testing on other nearby pipelines and structures that are not connected to the cathodic protection system. Measure pipe-to-soil potential with current interruption in process. Report any significant interference identified and provide recommendations for mitigation. (4) Measure and record individual anode current at anode junction box. c. Final Testing, Adjustment, and Report: (1) At least 30 days, but not more than 60 days, after completion of initial testing and adjustment, repeat all tests and make final adjustments to the rectifiers. (2) After approval of test data, provide final test report with all data and narrative describing construction, testing and adjustment. (3) All test data shall be submitted in electronic file compatible with Microsoft Excel for Office, most recent version. The data shall be organized in tabular form with location descriptions and GPS coordinates. (4) Witness of Testing and System Adjustment: ENGINEER may witness any or all testing and adjustment. Provide at least 7 days’ advance notice of work. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-1 SECTION 26 42 10 GALVANIC CATHODIC PROTECTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. It is the intent that all new buried metallic piping will be welded or bonded for electrical continuity and receive corrosion protection by means of impressed current (Section 26 42 00) or galvanic cathodic protection systems (Section 26 42 10). B. This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install a bonded dielectric coating, galvanic cathodic protection, and joint bonding for electrical continuity on all ancillary metallic piping and appurtenances, not specified to receive impressed current cathodic protection as shown on the Drawings and specified herein, complete. C. The quantity and location of the specified galvanic anodes and associated cathodic protection installations are provided on the Drawings. Anode material has been selected based on the soil conditions of the installation location. D. Galvanic anode installations include anodes directly connected to the pipe/appurtenance and anodes connected to the pipe through Type A test stations. E. Electrical isolation testing to assure cathodically protected piping is electrically isolated from steel reinforcement/rebar, electrical grounding, and other structures not intended to be part of the cathodic protection system. 1.2 STANDARDS: A. The following standards are included by reference: 1. AMPP/NACE International a. NACE SP-0169 b. NACE SP-0177 1.3 DEFINITIONS: A. Ferrous Metal Pipe: Pipe made of steel or iron, or pipe containing steel or iron as a principal structural material, except reinforced concrete pipe. B. Foreign-Owned: Buried pipe or cable not specifically owned or operated by the OWNER. C. Lead, Lead Wire, Joint Bonds, Pipe Connecting Wires, Cable: Insulated copper conductor; the same as wire. D. Electrically Continuous Pipeline: A pipeline which has a linear electrical resistance equal to or less than the sum of the resistance of the pipe plus the maximum allowable bond resistance for each joint as specified in this section. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-2 E. Electrical Isolation: Condition of being electrically isolated from other metallic structures (including, but not limited to, piping, reinforcement, casings) and the environment as defined in NACE SP-0169. 1.4 REFERENCES: A. AMPP / National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) International. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Catalog cuts, laboratory report, and other information for products proposed for use. B. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Manufacturers' Certificates of Compliance. 2. Field Test Reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: A. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the product of one manufacturer to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. B. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. Products of other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with the General Conditions. C. Materials and workmanship as specified in this section shall be installed concurrently with pipe installation. Coordinate all work specified herein with related sections. 2.2 SUPPLIERS: A. Alternate suppliers will be considered, subject to approval of the ENGINEER. Location provided is that of the general office; contact these offices for information regarding the location of their representative nearest the project site. 1. MESA Products, Tulsa, OK 1. Farwest Corrosion Control, Gardena, CA 2. Corrpro, Inc., Houston, TX 2.3 GALVANIC ANODES: A. High-Potential Magnesium Alloy (Prepackaged-Backfill Supplied): 1. Composition: a. Aluminum: 0.01 percent maximum. b. Manganese: 0.5 to 1.3 percent. c. Zinc: 0. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-3 d. Silicon: 0. e. Copper: 0.02 percent maximum. f. Nickel: 0.001 percent maximum. g. Iron: 0.03 percent maximum. h. Total Others: 0.05 percent each or 0.3 percent maximum, total. i. Magnesium: Remainder. 2. Dimensions: a. Bare Weight: 60 pounds or As shown on the Drawings. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Dow; Galvomag. b. Amax; Maxmag. c. Approved equal. B. Backfill: 1. Composition: a. Ground Hydrated Gypsum: 75 percent. b. Powdered Wyoming Bentonite: 20 percent. c. Anhydrous Sodium Sulfate: 5 percent. 2. Grain Size: 100 percent passing through a 20-mesh screen and 50 percent retained by a 100-mesh screen. 3. Mixture: Thoroughly mixed and firmly packaged around the galvanic anode within the cloth bag or cardboard tube by means of adequate vibration. 4. The quantity of backfill shall be sufficient to cover surfaces of the anode to a depth of 1 inch. 2.4 CATHODIC PROTECTION TEST STATIONS: A. Flush Mounted: 1. Test Box: Concrete body cast with a cast iron ring, with a minimum weight of 55 pounds and minimum dimensions of 8 inch inside diameter and 12 inches long. Furnish extensions as required to penetrate concrete surfaces by 4 inches minimum. Furnish with a 12 pound cast iron lid with the letters "TS" or words "Test Station" cast into the lid. 2. Manufacturer and Products: Brooks; Models 1RT or equal. 3. Flush Mount Test Station Terminal Board: a. Test boards for terminating pipeline test leads and other test leads inside test boxes: Plastic or glass reinforced 6-inch by 10-inch by 1/4 inch thick laminate. b. Furnish terminal block with five stainless steel studs, washers, and lock washers. c. Shop fabricated as shown on the Drawings with engrave labels on terminal board. B. Post Mounted (hot-dipped Galvanized Steel Post): 1. Test Station Head: Type A, T, I, and F: Testox series 700 or 1000 series test head. 2. Terminal Block: Plastic with minimum seven terminals. Terminal heads shall have special heads to keep them from turning or shall be easily accessible from both Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-4 sides of the terminal block without requiring its removal. Terminal studs, washers, and nuts shall be stainless steel. 3. Mounting Post: 3 inch diameter by 6 foot long hot-dipped galvanized steel post. 4. Mounting Hardware: Conduit, straps, and hardware for mounting test station to the post as specified under CONDUIT, LOCKNUTS, AND STRAPS. 5. Manufacturers and Products: Testox 700 and 1000 series test station as manufactured by Gerome Manufacturing, Uniontown, PA. C. Test Station Wires: 1. General: Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 3-80, WC 5-73, and WC 7-88. 2. Single-conductor, No. 10 AWG stranded copper with 600-volt TW, THWN, or THHN insulation. 3. Galvanic Anode Header Wire: Single-conductor, No. 8 AWG, stranded copper with 600-volt HMWPE insulation. 4. Insulation Color/Identification: Wire insulation color shall indicate the function of each wire and shall be as follows: a. Anodes/Header Cable: Black b. Pipelines: White c. Stationary Reference Cell: Yellow d. Foreign Pipeline: Red (gas), Blue (water) e. Insulated Joints: Green (insulated side), White (protected side) D. Stationary Reference Electrodes: 1. Prepackaged Copper-Copper Sulfate Reference Electrodes: 2. Material: High impact ABS, ceramic with Moisture Retention Membrane. 3. Dimensions: 1.5” by 10.5” or 1” by 8”. 4. Wire: Minimum 14 AWG stranded copper wire with yellow, 600-volt TW, THWN, or THHN insulation. The wire shall be attached to the electrode and insulated with the manufacturer's standard connection. Connection shall be stronger than the wire. 5. Packaging: Furnish electrode packaged in a plastic or heavy paper bag of sufficient thickness to protect the electrode, backfill, and cloth bag during normal shipping and handling. 6. Manufacturers: a. Borin Manufacturing, Stelth 2 Series b. MC Miller, IonX Permanent Reference Electrode 2.5 JOINT BONDS: A. Ductile or Cast Iron Pipe: 1. Single-conductor, stranded copper wire with 600-volt HMWPE or THHN insulation. Supply joint bonds complete with a formed copper sleeve on each end of the wire. 2. No. 2 AWG wires, 18 inches long. B. Flexible Coupling, Flanged Coupling Adapter, and Other Non-standard Joints: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-5 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: No. 2 AWG wires, 24 inches long, HMWPE or THHN insulation, with two 12-inch long THHN insulated No. 12 AWG wire pigtails, as manufactured by Erico Products Inc. (Cadweld), Cleveland, OH. 2. Steel Pipe: Solid copper strap, 1-1/4-inch wide by 1/16-inch thick, equivalent to 1/0 AWG wire, with five punched holes for thermite welding to the coupling and pipe. Strap bond shall be fabricated for the length of the coupling with sufficient additional length for 1 inch of joint movement. Weld bonds to pipe with the thermite weld mold recommended by the bond manufacturer. Strap bond shall be as manufactured by Erico Products, Continental Industries, or approved equal. C. Insulated Flexible Coupling Joints: 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: No. 8 AWG HMWPE or THHN wire, 18-inch long, with one 12-inch long THHN insulated No. 12 AWG wire pigtail. 2. Steel Pipe: Solid copper strap, 1-1/4-inch wide by 1/16-inch thick, equivalent to 1/0 AWG wire, with four punched holes for thermite welding to the coupling and pipe. Strap bond shall be fabricated for the length of the coupling with sufficient additional length for 1 inch of joint movement. Weld bonds to pipe with the thermite weld mold recommended by the bond manufacturer. Strap bond shall be as manufactured by Erico Products, Continental Industries, or approved equal. 2.6 THERMITE WELD MATERIALS: A. General: 1. Thermite weld materials consist of wire sleeves, welders, and weld cartridges according to the weld manufacturer's recommendations for each wire size and pipe or fitting size and material. 2. Welding materials and equipment shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Interchanging materials of different manufacturers is not acceptable. B. Molds: Graphite. C. Adapter Sleeves: 1. For No. 12 AWG and No. 2 AWG wires. 2. Prefabricated factory sleeve joint bonds or bond wires with formed sleeves made in the field are acceptable. Attach field-formed joint bonds sleeves with the appropriate size and type of hammer die furnished by the thermite weld manufacturer. 3. Extend wire conductor 1/8 inch beyond the end of the adapter sleeve. D. Cartridges: 1. Steel: 32 grams, maximum. 2. Cast and Ductile Iron: 32 grams, maximum, XF-19 Alloy, specifically for use on cast iron and ductile iron. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-6 E. Welders and Cartridges: For attaching copper wire to pipe material: Pipe Material Weld Type Cartridge Size, Max. No. 4 AWG Wire & Smaller Steel HA, VS, HC 25 gm Ductile or Cast Iron HB, VH, HE 32 gm Wire Joint Bonds Steel FS 32 gm Ductile or Cast Iron FC 45 gm F. Welding Materials Manufacturers: 1. Erico Products Inc. (Cadweld), Cleveland, OH. 2. Continental Industries, Inc. (Thermo-Weld), Tulsa, OK. 2.7 COATING REPAIR MATERIAL FOR PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. General: 1. Complete coating repairs in accordance with recommendations of the pipe or fitting manufacturer. 2. Coat steel pipe with epoxy coating repair as specified. 3. Coat thermite weld connections to ductile or cast iron pipe with fast cure epoxy OR petrolatum wax tape. B. Epoxy Coating: 1. 100 percent solids, fast curing epoxy suitable for submerged or buried conditions. 2. Acceptable products and manufacturers or equal: a. Protal 7125 (low temperature), 7200, or Protal 7300, Denso North American, Houston, TX. b. TC 7010, Tapecoat, Evanston, IL. c. 3M; ScotchKote 323. d. Aquata-poxy, American Chemical Corp., East Lake, OH. e. “Or-equal.” C. Wax Tape Coating : 1. Buried thermite welds shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C217. 2. Do not use wax tape coating systems on vault piping, atmospherically exposed piping and appurtenances, or where subject to UV exposures. 3. All components of the wax tape coating system shall be from a single manufacturer as manufactured by Denso North American, Trenton, or equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-7 2.8 COATING MATERIAL FOR METALLIC PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. General: 1. Polyethylene encasement or wrap of metallic fittings is not an acceptable alternative to the specified dielectric coating systems. 2. All metallic fittings, valves, and metallic hardware (nuts, bolts, etc.) associated with non-metallic pipe construction shall be dielectrically coated with a bonded coating. 3. Prepare surface of items to be coated in accordance with coating manufacturer’s requirements and as specified herein. B. Dielectric Coating Systems for Metallic Pipe, Fittings, and Appurtenances: 1. Wax Tape Coating System a. Metallic piping, fittings, and appurtenances shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C217. b. Apply coating system to all buried metallic pipe appurtenances, including joints, fittings, bolts, and irregularly shaped surfaces. c. Do not use wax tape coating systems on vault piping, atmospherically exposed piping and appurtenances, or where subject to UV exposures. d. Provide wax tape coating system filler material to fill and smooth all irregular surfaces, such that no tenting or voids remain under the applied wax tape. e. Use sand backfill to protect wax coating from damage. f. Coating System: (1) Surface Preparation: As required by coating manufacturer. Remove all dirt and debris from pipe surface. Pipe surface shall be completely dry before application of wax tape components. (2) Primer: petroleum or petrolatum wax. (3) Filler Material: petroleum or petrolatum wax sealer/filler with closed cell plastic filler. (4) Inner Tape: Petroleum or petrolatum wax impregnated fabric, 6-inch width maximum, 40 mils thick. (5) Protective Outerwrap (for burial in native soil, not required for sand backfill). (a) Provide fiber mesh fabric outerwrap over wax tape resin coated, woven fiber-mesh fabric that is .005 inches. Protect coating from damage and use sand backfill to protect wax coating from damage. g. All components of the wax tape coating system shall be from a single manufacturer as manufactured by Denso North American, Trenton, or equal. 2. Epoxy Coating System a. Fusion Bonded Epoxy (1) Prepare surface and apply coating in accordance with C213 and coating manufacturer’s guidelines. (2) Apply minimum dry film thickness of 12 mils. b. Polyamide Epoxy (1) Prepare surface as required by coating manufacturer and apply coating in accordance with C210 and coating manufacturer’s guidelines. (2) Apply minimum of two coats at a total minimum dry film thickness of 12 mils. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-8 2.9 INSULATING JOINTS: A. General: Insulating joints shall be dielectric unions, flanges, or couplings. The complete assembly shall have an ANSI rating equal to or higher than that of the joint and pipeline. All materials shall be resistant for the intended exposure, operating temperatures, and products in the pipeline. B. Insulating Flanges: 1. Complete assembly shall have an ANSI rating of 150 pounds, minimum, or equal to or higher than that of the joint and pipeline. 2. Gasket materials shall be resistant to intended chemical exposure, operating temperatures, and pressures in the pipeline. 3. Gaskets: Full-face Type E with O-ring seal. 4. Insulating Sleeves: Full-length fiberglass reinforced epoxy (NEMA G 10 grade). 5. Insulating Washers: Fiberglass reinforced epoxy (NEMA G 10 grade).] 6. Steel Washers: Plated, hot-rolled steel, 1/8 inch thick. a. Provide two washers per bolt for flange diameters equal to or less than 36-inch diameter. b. Provide four washers bolt for flange diameters larger than 36-inch diameter. 7. Manufacturers: a. GPT, Denver, CO. b. Central Plastics Co., Shawnee, OK. c. Advance Products and Systems, Scott, LA d. Approved Equal. 8. Insulating Unions: O-ring sealed with molded and bonded insulating bushing to union body. a. Manufacturer: (1) Central Plastics Co., Shawnee, OK. (2) Or approved equal. 2.10 DC BLOCKERS – POLARIZATION CELL REPLACEMENT (PCR): A. DC isolation devices shall be solid-state electronic devices capable of passing AC current while blocking DC current. B. Device shall have electrical rating of 3.7kA fault current at 30 cycles and 45 amperes steady state AC current, minimum or as specified by ENGINEER. C. Device shall have DC blocking capabilities of -3 volts (pipe) to +1 volt (vault, ground) D. Solid-State decoupling device with the following ratings: 60-Hz Current Short Duration, 3 Cycles 5,000 amps ac-rms Symmetrical 60-Hz Current Steady-State, 65 °C Ambient 40 amps ac-rms Symmetrical Lightning Surge Current 100,000 amperes DC Current Leakage Less than 0.1 milliamp Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-9 Driving Voltage of 1 V DC 65 °C Ambient Operating Temperature Minus 40 °F to Plus 150 °F E. Provide polarization cell in manufacturers standard enclosure Dairyland Electric Industries, Model PCR 3.7kA. F. Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard, as approved by ENGINEER. 2.11 ANCILLARY MATERIALS: A. Wire Connectors: One-piece, tin-plated crimp-on ring tongue connector as manufactured by Burndy Co. or Thomas and Betts. B. Compression Connectors: 1. For in-line, tap, and multi-splice, furnish "C" taps made of conductive wrought copper, sized to fit the wires being spliced. 2. Provide crimp tool and dies as recommended by the manufacturer for the wire and connector size. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Burndy; Type YC, or equal. C. Electrical Tape: 1. Linerless rubber high-voltage splicing tape and vinyl electrical tape suitable for moist and wet environments. 2. Use Scotch 130 C and Scotch 88 as manufactured by 3M Products. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A. The CONTRACTOR shall examine all Drawings and coordinate work to avoid conflicts, errors, delays, and unnecessary interference with the construction of the facilities and to avoid duplication of the work such as excavation, filling, etc. In the event of any conflicts in the Specifications, the ENGINEER shall be consulted. B. Install galvanic anodes for cathodic protection of metallic pipe and appurtenances where shown on the Drawings. C. Installation of anodes to be performed in conjunction with pipeline trenching and as specified in other sections. D. All materials and equipment associated with joint bonding, cathodic protection, and coatings, as shown and specified herein, shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR. Any changes in design or method of installation of an item as specified shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-10 E. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the installation of the specified items with the General Contractor or other subcontractors on the project such that installation of the items herein specified can be completed concurrently with pipeline installation. Items not installed before backfilling of the pipe shall be installed at the CONTRACTOR's sole expense. F. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the codes or manufacturer's instructions, the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings shall prevail. Where a larger size or better grade of material or a higher standard of workmanship is required, the most stringent requirement shall apply. 3.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Store all packaged anodes, anode backfill, and associated materials off the ground and keep them dry at all times. B. Protect materials against weather, condensation, and mechanical damage. Immediately remove from site all damaged anodes. C. Anode backfill material that has become wet will not be acceptable. 3.3 GALVANIC ANODE INSTALLATION: A. General: Install galvanic anodes as shown on the Drawings. B. Provide a minimum anode spacing of 2 feet from other unprotected pipelines, thrust blocks, or structures. Anode depth shall be at or below the pipe depth, and not less than 4 feet below the finished grade. C. After installing, flood each anode with a minimum of 10 gallons of water. D. Thoroughly compact backfill around each anode to a point 1 foot above the anode. 3.4 PIPE JOINT BONDING: A. To form an electrically continuous pipeline and associated appurtenances, the joints of all buried steel and iron pipe, vault and manhole piping, fittings, and restrained joints shall be provided with joint bonds as specified herein, except joints specified to be threaded, welded, or insulated. B. Mechanical pipe connections are not considered to provide electrical continuity and require joint bonds. All metallic components associated with appurtenances and fittings, including follower rings and retainer glands shall be electrically bonded to the piping system. C. Minimum of two joint bonds required at each joint requiring bonding. Quantity of joint bonds for fittings and appurtenances shall be as shown on the Drawings. D. Electrical connection of all wires to pipe and fittings shall be by the thermite weld process. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-11 E. Each bonded joint shall be tested as specified under ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY TESTING, this section. 3.5 TEST STATION INSTALLATION: A. Location, type, and style of test stations shall be as shown on the Schedules on Drawings. Final field location shall be determined based on actual site conditions and as approved by the ENGINEER. B. Locate test stations where shown on the Schedules on Drawings. 1. Install test stations as appropriate at 1,000-foot intervals or less. 2. Install Type F test stations where any ferrous metal pipe crosses a foreign owned pipeline under cathodic protection C. Wires to foreign-owned pipelines will be attached by pipeline owner, unless permission is granted to Contractor in writing by owner of foreign pipeline. Coordinate this Work with owner of foreign pipeline before pipe is excavated. D. Attach all test wires to the pipe by the thermite weld method unless approved otherwise. E. The wires from the test stations shall be buried a minimum of 36 inches below finished grade. Provide 12-inch loop in wires at pipe and beneath test station to prevent them from being stressed or broken during backfilling operations. F. Test wires within paved roadways and with less than 36 inches of ground cover shall be installed in rigid PVC-coated steel conduit, except when located under concrete floor slabs. G. Make wire connections to test station terminals with crimp-on ring tongue terminals, except where solid wire is specified. H. Wire Labels: 1. Install labels on conductors in test stations. 2. Position markers in boxes so they do not interfere with operation and maintenance. 3.6 WIRE CONNECTIONS: A. Thermite Weld: 1. Use thermite weld method for electrical connection of copper wire to steel, ductile, and cast iron surfaces. Observe proper safety precautions, welding procedures, thermite weld material selection, and surface preparation recommended by the welder manufacturer. Assure that the pipe or fitting wall thickness is of sufficient thickness that the thermite weld process will not damage the integrity of the pipe or fitting wall or protective lining. 2. After the weld connection has cooled, remove slag, visually inspect, and physically test wire connection by tapping with a hammer; remove and replace any defective connections. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-12 3. On pipe and fittings with dielectric linings, make the weld connection on the shop tab provided or on a thick metal section to minimize damage to the lining and coating. After the weld is made, coat the weld with coating repair material. 4. Coat each completed wire connection as specified, this section. 5. If the lining is damaged by welding, repair in accordance with the lining applicator's recommendations. 3.6 WIRE INSULATION REPAIR: A. Splicing of wire will not be permitted except where specifically shown on the drawings and approved by the ENGINEER. B. Splices or damage to the wire insulation shall be required by spirally wrapping with two coats of high-voltage rubber splicing tap and two layers of vinyl electrical tape. C. Make wire splices with suitable sized compression connectors or mechanically secure and solder with rosin cored 50/50 solder. 3.7 INSULATED JOINTS: A. Install insulated joints to electrically isolate the pipeline from vault piping, electrically grounded facilities, and where shown on the Drawings. B. Align and install insulating joints according to the manufacturer's recommendations to avoid damaging insulating materials. C. After assembly of insulated flanges, prepare cement-mortar surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and apply a 20-mil minimum thickness of EPA potable water approved, 100 percent solids water or air curing epoxy coating to the interior of the pipeline. Apply coating for a minimum of two pipe diameter lengths from the insulating flange in both directions. Apply and cure coating in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply coating where it will interfere with operation of pipeline valves or other pipeline assemblies. D. The CONTRACTOR shall test each insulated joint for electrical insulation as specified this section. Defective insulating joints shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at his sole expense. All damaged or defective insulation parts shall be replaced. 3.8 SOLID STATE DECOUPLING DEVICES A. Provide solid state decoupling devices for isolating joints as shown on Drawings. Mount decoupling devices to wall adjacent to pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s standards, as approved by Engineer, and where indicated on the Drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-13 3.8 TESTS AND INSPECTION: A. General: 1. Functional testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR’s Corrosion Control Person In-Charge as specified in Section 26 42 00 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection, in the presence of the ENGINEER to demonstrate that the completed cathodic protection test stations are fully operational. 2. Verify continuity of new cables associated with cathodic protection components and test stations following installation. B. Electrical Continuity Testing: 1. General: a. Furnish all necessary equipment and materials and make all electrical connections to the pipe as required to test continuity of bonded joints. b. Conduct a continuity test on all buried joints that are required to be bonded. Test the electrical continuity of joint bonds after the bonds are installed but before backfilling of the pipe. c. The CONTRACTOR shall test completed joint bonds for electrical continuity using digital low resistance ohmmeter or by the Calculated Resistance Test Method at the CONTRACTOR's option. The equipment and test procedures for the two methods are described herein. 2. Digital Low Resistance Ohmmeter Method: a. Equipment and Materials: (1) One Biddle Model 247001 digital low resistance ohmmeter or equal. (2) One set of duplex helical current and potential handspikes, Biddle Model No. 241001, cable length as required. b. Test Procedure: Measure the resistance of joint bonds with the low resistance ohmmeter in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Use the helical handspikes to contact the pipe on each side of the joint, without touching the thermite weld or the bond. The contact area shall be cleaned to bright metal by filing or grinding and without any surface rusting or oxidation. Record the measured joint bond resistance on the test form described herein. Repair any damaged pipe coating in accordance with WIRE CONNECTIONS, this section. 3. Joint Bond Acceptance: a. Joint bond resistance shall be less than or equal to the maximum allowable bond resistance values shown in Table 1. Table 1 Joint Type Max. Allowable Resistance (Ohms) One Bond/Joint Two Bonds/Joint Three Bonds/Joint No. 2 AWG wire Bonds 0.000325 0.000162 0.000081 Flexible Coupling 0.000425 0.000212 0.000115 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-14 b. The CONTRACTOR shall replace any joint bond that exceeds the allowable resistance. Replacement joint bonds shall be retested for compliance with the specified bond resistance. c. Any defective joint bond discovered during energizing and testing shall be located, excavated, repaired, and backfilled by the CONTRACTOR. 4. Test Records: Records shall be made of each bonded pipeline during the test and submitted to the ENGINEER. These records shall include: a. Description and location of the pipeline tested. b. Starting location and direction of test. c. Date of test. d. Joint type. e. Test current and voltage drop across each joint and calculated bond resistance (Calculated Resistance Method only). f. Measured joint bond resistance (Digital Low Resistance Ohmmeter method only). C. Electrical Isolation Testing: 1. Pipe penetrations shall be tested for electrical isolation from rebar and wire ties before, during, and after pouring concrete. Electrical shorts shall be mitigated prior to pouring concrete. Testing shall be performed again after concrete is poured. Electrical isolation shall be verified and if electrical isolation cannot be achieved, Contractor shall propose alternatives to resolve the problem, including installation of impressed current system at the Contractor’s cost. 2. Acceptable electrical isolation test methods include one or more of the following tests that provided conclusive information confirming electrical isolation: a. 4-Point Electrical Resistance Testing b. Pipe-To-Rebar Potential Difference Measurements c. Current Applied Testing 3. CONTRACTOR shall conduct additional electrical isolation tests as required to assure the pipe is not electrically shorted by contact with concrete reinforcement or other equipment. D. Insulated Joint Testing: 1. Test each insulating joint after assembly with a GAS Electronics Model 601 insulator tester or equivalent instrument in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Conduct test before burial and coating of buried insulating flanges. 2. CONTRACTOR to replace damaged or defective insulation parts identified during testing. 3. Electrical Isolation is defined as a condition of being electrically isolated from other metallic structures (including, but not limited to, other piping, concrete reinforcement, casings, and other structures not intended to be cathodically protected) and the environment as defined in NACE Standard Practice SP0169. 4. CONTRACTOR shall conduct additional insulating joint tests as required to assure that insulating flanges are not electrically shorted by other equipment or incidental contact with concrete reinforcement or other equipment during energizing and testing. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 11/16/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanic Cathodic Protection Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 42 10-15 E. Cathodic Protection System Energizing and Testing: 1. Initial Survey: Conduct an initial potential survey at all test stations and measure the baseline (native) pipe-to-soil potential before connecting the anodes. Record GPS coordinates for each test station. 2. Functional Testing: a. Perform functional testing in presence of ENGINEER. b. When construction of each cathodic protection station(s) is completed, notify ENGINEER that anodes are ready to be connected. 3. Energizing and Testing: a. General: (1) Upon successful completion of functional testing, connect the galvanic anodes to the pipe through the shunt inside the test stations. Complete additional testing and adjustment to provide cathodic protection at all test points in accordance with NACE SP0169. (2) Record baseline potentials at all test stations. (3) Record ON and OFF potentials at all test stations by temporarily disconnecting the galvanic anodes from the pipe at the test station being evaluated. (4) Measure and record galvanic anode current at each test station. 4. Final Testing, Adjustment, and Report: a. After approval of test data, provide final test report with all data and narrative describing construction, testing and adjustment. b. All test data shall be submitted in electronic file compatible with Microsoft Excel for Office, most recent version. The data shall be organized in tabular form with location descriptions and GPS coordinates. c. Witness of Testing and System Adjustment: ENGINEER may witness any or all testing and adjustment. Provide at least 7 days advance notice of work. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Surge Protective Devices Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 43 13-1 SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and place in satisfactory operation, the surge protective devices (SPD) as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. B. Reference Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Conductors and Cables, and Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The surge protective device shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) a. UL1449, latest edition: Surge Protective Devices b. UL1283, latest edition: Electromagnetic Interference Filters B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 1. C62.41.1: 2002 Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits 2. C62.41.2: 2002 Recommend Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low Voltage (100V and Less) AC Power Circuits. 3. C62.45: 2002 IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 4. C62.62: 2000 IEEE Standard Test Specifications for Surge Protective Devices for Low Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 12 1 9 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Surge Protective Devices Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 43 13-2 3. Spare Parts List 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for re-submittal. C. Drawings submitted by the manufacturer shall be complete and documented to provide the Owner with operations and maintenance capabilities. D. Shop drawings for each SPD shall include but not be limited to: 1. A Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter. If the shop drawings are submitted without this CD&E letter, the submittal will be rejected. The letter shall include all comments, deviations and exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by the Contractor AND Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. This letter shall include a copy of this Specification Section. In the left margin beside each and every paragraph/item, a letter "C", "D", or "E" shall be typed or written in. The letter "C" shall be for full compliance with the requirement. The letter "D" shall be for a deviation from the requirement. The letter "E" shall be for taking exception to a requirement. Any requirements with the letter "D" or "E" beside them shall be provided with a full typewritten explanation of the deviation/exception. Handwritten explanation of the deviations/exceptions is not acceptable. The CD&E letter shall also address deviations, and exceptions taken to each Drawing related to this Specification Section. 2. Product Data Sheets. 3. Detailed drawings showing weights and dimensions. 4. Wiring diagrams showing field connections. 5. Proof that all products provided under this Section are UL listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories to UL1449, latest Edition. This proof shall be a copy of the data listed under the UL File Number for the manufacturer, which may be obtained from the UL Online Certification Directory. No other means of proving compliance (such as manufacturer data sheets, marketing material, etc) will be considered acceptable. 6. Proof of Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR), Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) for all modes, Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV), Nominal Discharge Current (In), and device listing Type shall be submitted using the same means as described in the paragraph above. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Surge Protective Devices Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 43 13-3 7. Proof that all products provided under this Section are UL listed and labeled by UL to UL 1283, latest Edition. This proof shall be a copy of the data listed under the UL File Number for the manufacturer, which may be obtained from the UL Online Certification Directory. No other means of proving compliance (such as manufacturer data sheets, marketing material, etc) will be considered acceptable. 8. Manufacturer’s Warranty Information E. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "Soft Cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the Contractor intends to provide are to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) spare field replacement module of each rating provided under this Contract. C. The spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long term storage, bearing labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are intended. D. Spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such spare parts until completion of the Work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner. E. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal shall indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable. F. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same part number. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All SPDs, associated hardware, and supporting components shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, under normal use and in accordance Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Surge Protective Devices Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 43 13-4 with the instructions provided, for a period of five (5) years after acceptance of the equipment by the Owner. B. Any component or subassembly contained within the surge protection system that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the warranty period, shall be replaced by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The SPD units shall be UL 1449 Listed and must bear the UL mark. Units that are “manufactured in accordance with” UL 1449 or tested by other testing agencies “in accordance with” UL 1449 are not acceptable and will be rejected. B. Type II SPD units shall be UL 1283 Listed and must bear the UL mark. Units that are “manufactured in accordance with” UL 1283 or tested by other testing agencies “in accordance with” UL 1283 are not acceptable and will be rejected. Further, SPD units using UL 1283 capacitors but not tested to UL 1283 will be rejected. 2.02 PRODUCTS A. Type I surge protective devices (SPD) shall be furnished and installed when shown without upstream overcurrent protection on the Drawings. Type II SPDs shall be provided in all other locations. Type II SPDs shall not require the use of a specific upstream overcurrent device. SPDs shall be provided in the location and quantity as shown on the Drawings. B. Each SPD shall be rated for the voltage and configuration of the equipment to which it is connected. C. Each Type II SPD shall have UL 1283 EMI/RFI filtering with minimum attenuation of - 50dB at 100kHz. D. The short circuit current rating of each SPD shall match or exceed the rating of the equipment to which it is connected. The Contractor shall reference the Drawings for short circuit current rating of each piece of equipment. E. Each SPD system shall provide surge protection in all possible modes. Surge protection shall be as follows: System Configuration Modes of Protection Number of Modes 3-Phase Wye L-N, L-G, N-G 7 3-Phase Delta L-L, L-G 6 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Surge Protective Devices Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 43 13-5 System Configuration Modes of Protection Number of Modes 3-Phase Impedance Grounded L-L, L-G 6 Single-Phase L-N, L-G, N-G 3 F. Each SPD shall have a Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) of at least 115% of the nominal voltage of the equipment to which it is connected. G. The Nominal Discharge Current (In) of each SPD shall be 20kA. Peak surge current ratings shall not be used as a basis for applying the SPD to the system. H. The Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) of each SPD shall not exceed the following: System Voltage L-N L-G L-L N-G 208Y/120 800V 800V 1200V 800V 480Y/277 1200V 1200V 1800V 1200V 480 DELTA N/A 1800V 1800V N/A 240 DELTA N/A 1200V 1200V N/A 120/240 800V 800V 1200V 800V I. The surge current rating for each SPD shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Surge current ratings are indicated on single line diagrams and in panel schedules. Surge current rating indicated is on a per phase basis. J. Each SPD shall be provided with the following accessories: 1. Each individual module shall feature an LED indicating the individual module has all surge protection devices active. If any single component is taken off-line, the LED shall turn off and another LED shall illuminate, providing individual module as well as total system status indication. 2. Surge counter and audible alarm with reset/silence switch. 3. One set of Form C (SPDT) dry contacts rated for at least 5A at 120VAC. K. SPDs which are indicated to be installed integral within the equipment that they protect shall be fabricated by the same manufacturer as the equipment that they serve. SPDs which are indicated to be installed externally mounted from the equipment that they serve shall be manufactured by Eaton, Schneider, Sola, ABB, or equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Surge Protective Devices Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 43 13-6 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The SPD units shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. SPDs which are indicated to be integral with the equipment that they protect shall be installed within the enclosure for that equipment. C. Prior to energizing, the following shall be performed for each SPD: 1. Verify that the SPD unit voltage and configuration is suitable for the system to which it is connected. 2. Verify that any Neutral to Ground bonding jumpers are installed as required. 3.02 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: 1. Shop Tests a. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this Section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA, ANSI, and UL standards. b. All surge protective devices, subassemblies, and components shall be 100% tested and certified by the manufacturer to meet their published performance parameters. 2. Field Tests a. None required. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Lighting Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 50 00-1 SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all lighting fixtures, labor, and material, in accordance with the preceding Specifications, the requirements of this Section, and as shown on the Drawings. B. Lighting shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of the Illuminating Engineering Society. C. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements and Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The equipment specified herein shall comply with the following codes and standards, where applicable. 1. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. UL 924 – Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment b. UL 916 – Standard for Energy Management Equipment c. UL 1598 – Luminaires 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. ANSI C62.41 – Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits 3. National Electrical Code (NEC), latest adopted edition. B. Where equipment herein is specified as being Listed to a particular UL standard, that equipment shall be tested for compliance with the UL standard by either UL itself, Factory Mutual (FM), or the Canadian Standards Association (CSA). Testing to UL standards by any other testing agencies is not acceptable. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Lighting Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 50 00-2 1. Shop Drawings 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 3. Spare Parts Lists B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal without review. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets. 2. Catalog cuts for each fixture type showing performance and construction details of standard fixtures, and complete working drawings showing all proposed construction details of special or modified standard fixtures. 3. Photometric curves. 4. LED data including efficiency (Efficacy lumens/watt) information. 5. LED Driver information 6. Catalog data including applicable coefficients of utilization tables, isolux chart of illumination on a horizontal plane, beam efficiency, horizontal and vertical beam spread, and beam lumens. 7. Manufacturer’s warranty information 8. System (entire fixture assembly) efficiency data. D. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance for all fixtures before fixtures and poles are manufactured. Substitutions will be permitted only if acceptable to the Engineer. E. Manufacturer's model/series and description in the fixture schedule on the Contract Documents establishes a level of quality, style, finish, etc. The use of a model/series describing the various types of fixtures shall be used as a guide only and does not exclude all the required accessories or hardware that may be required for a complete installation. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Lighting Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 50 00-3 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. The following additional spare parts shall be furnished: 1. A minimum of one (1) LED driver for every ten (10) drivers (of the same type) installed. B. The spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long term storage, bearing labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are intended. C. Spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such spare parts until completion of the work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner. D. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal, shall indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable. E. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same parts number. 1.07 LIGHTING CONTROLS A. The lighting systems shall be controlled as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. 1.08 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer's warranty shall in no event be for a period of less than five (5) years from date of delivery of fixtures to the project site and shall include repair labor, travel expense necessary for repairs at the jobsite, shipping costs, expendables used during the course of repair, or complete replacement of the failed lighting unit. B. Warranty for LED fixtures shall be provided for the entire fixture and shall include all parts and accessories. Warranty for non-LED fixtures shall be provided for the entire fixture and shall include all parts and accessories except the replaceable lamp. Submittals received without written warranties as specified shall be rejected in their entirety. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Lighting Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 50 00-4 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. The fixture schedule indicates the basis-of-design manufacturer(s) for each fixture type. The Contractor shall submit photometric calculations for each space and/or area where the Contractor wishes to use an equivalent fixture in accordance with Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements. Fixtures will be approved or denied as equivalent on a per-fixture and/or per-space/area basis. 2.02 FIXTURES A. All lighting fixtures shall be furnished complete with all fittings and hardware necessary for a complete installation. Lighting fixtures shall have all accessories, characteristics, and functionality as specified. B. Fixture leads shall be as required by NEC. Fixtures shall be grounded by the equipment grounding conductor in the conduit. C. All glassware shall be high quality, homogeneous in texture, uniform in quality, free from defects, of uniform thickness throughout, and properly annealed. Edges shall be well rounded and free from chips or rough edges. D. Emergency and exit fixtures shall be UL 924 listed and have a minimum 90 minutes battery back-up. E. Fixtures specified to be damp or wet locations rated shall be UL 1598 listed. F. Fixtures shall be as specified in the fixture schedule on the Drawings. 2.03 LED DRIVERS A. Drivers shall have a voltage range of 347-480V or 120-277 (as detailed in the fixture schedule) +/- 10% at a frequency 60Hz. B. All drivers shall be designed to a power factor >90% with a total harmonic distortion THD <20% at full load. C. Case temperature shall be rated for -40°C through +80°C. D. Drivers shall have overheat protection, self-limited short circuit protection and overload protected. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Lighting Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 50 00-5 E. Drivers shall be furnished with a fused primary. F. Drivers shall have an output current ripple <30% G. Drivers shall be manufactured by Advance, Universal or equal. H. Drivers shall be UL Listed for damp location, UL1012, UL935, ROHS. I. Drivers shall meet FCC 47 Sub Part 15. J. All drivers shall be provided with ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C (10kV/5kA) surge protection. 2.04 LEDS A. Luminaires provided with LED technology shall utilize high brightness LEDs with a group binning code of P and/or Q. B. Color Temperature: as specified in fixture schedule. C. Junction point shall be designed and manufactured to allow adequate heat dissipation. D. LEDs shall be rated for 50,000 hours of life, minimum (based on IESNA L70). PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures shall be located symmetrically with building lines as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall furnish and install the lighting fixtures to allow "convenient" access for maintenance. The Contractor shall install fixtures at mounting heights indicated on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. In areas with exposed ducts and/or piping, installation of lighting fixtures shall be adapted to field conditions as determined by the Engineer. Where fixtures are shown in locations on the Drawings where maintenance would be difficult, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer for direction. B. The Contractor shall provide and install all inserts, conduit, structural supports as required, lamps, ballasts, poles, wiring, and any other items required for a complete system. Contractor shall properly adjust and test, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the entire lighting system. The Contractor shall provide pigtails and flexible conduit connected to an outlet box where necessary or required resulting in a neat and complete installation. C. The Contractor shall protect all fixtures at all times from damage, dirt, dust, and the like. Upon completion of work, and after the building area is broom clean, all fixtures shall be made clean and free of dust and all other foreign matter both on visible surfaces, and on Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Lighting Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 50 00-6 surfaces that affect the lighting performance of the fixture including diffusers, lenses, louvers, reflectors, and lamps. Before final acceptance, all fixtures with lamps shall be re-lamped. D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all pendant trapezes and pendant stem hangers with durable swivel or equivalent trapeze hanger permitting normal fixture motion and self-alignment. Fixture pendants shall be Appleton Type UNJ ball type flexible hanger at the fixture and supports from an Appleton JBLX junction box with JBLX hub cover, or equal. Pendant lengths shall be adequate and adjusted to provide uniformity of installation heights above the reference datum. Stems shall be one-piece, with matching canopies and fittings. E. All wiring/cables associated with lighting equipment shall be installed in conduits or other raceways as specified. Installing wiring/cables exposed is not acceptable, unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. F. The Contractor shall furnish and install recessed fixtures with a separate junction box concealed and located as to be accessible when fixture is removed. G. The Contractor shall furnish and install all boxes for lighting fixtures such that the box is not the sole support of the fixture. The boxes shall be offset to allow maintenance such that access to wiring within the box can be attained without having to consider supporting (holding) the fixture. H. All lighting fixtures, when installed, shall be set true and be free of light leaks, warps, dents, and other irregularities. All hangers, cables, supports, channels, and brackets of all kinds for safely erecting this equipment in place, shall be furnished and erected in place by the Contractor. I. The Contractor shall support each fixture securely. The Contractor shall not secure fixtures to the work of other trades, unless specified or noted otherwise, and shall not support fixtures from plaster. The Contractor shall furnish and install all members and supports as required to fasten and suspend fixtures from the structure. J. In all mechanical equipment areas, the Contractor shall install lighting fixtures after all piping and equipment therein has been installed. Exact locations for such fixtures may be determined by the Engineer on the site during the course of the work. K. All fixtures that require physical adjustment shall be so adjusted in accordance with the directions of the Engineer. The Contractor shall also adjust angular direction of fixtures and/or lamps, as directed. L. No special tools shall be required for re-lamping of fixtures. All optical control surfaces such as lenses and reflectors shall be safely and securely attached to fixtures and shall be easily and quickly removed and replaced for cleaning without the use of special tools. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Lighting Cottonwoods Connection Page 26 50 00-7 3.02 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: 1. Certified Shop Tests a. The lighting fixtures shall be given routine factory tests in accordance with the requirement of ANSI, NEMA and Underwriters Laboratories standards. 2. Field Tests a. Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 01, and NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications, latest edition. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-1 SECTION 31 00 01 EARTHWORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete all work associated with excavation (including off-site borrow excavation), fill and backfill placement and compaction, constructing embankments, dewatering, construction of drainage layers, installing foundation and backfill aggregate, placing filter and separation fabrics, stockpiling topsoil and any excess suitable material, designing, installing, maintaining and removing excavation support systems, disposing of all excess and unsuitable materials, providing erosion and sedimentation control, encasing utility conduits, site grading, preparation of pavement and structure subgrades, and other related and incidental work as required to complete the work shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All excavations shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Drawings or established by the Engineer. C. The Contractor shall conduct the construction activities in such a manner that erosion of disturbed areas and off-site sedimentation be minimized. D. Earthwork performed under this Contract shall be done in conformance with these specifications. Items and activities not addressed herein shall be subject to the limitations of the latest editions of the Utah Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. If there is a conflict between this specification and the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, the more conservative of the two shall take precedent. E. Erosion and Sediment Control shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 25 00 of these specifications. F. Coordination and payment for testing of soil materials and compaction by an independent Materials Testing Consultant shall be the responsibility of the Owner, as specified in Specification Section 01 45 23 – Testing Services Furnished by Contractor. G. All fill materials (soil, aggregate, topsoil, etc.) imported to the site and onsite materials to be reused as fill, backfill, or embankment shall be subjected to the testing requirements contained in Part 3.0 of this Section. The Owner shall retain a Materials Testing Consultant who shall perform all testing. The test results shall be used to determine if a material meets the requirements included herein. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary samples for laboratory testing and shall provide assistance and cooperation during field tests. The Contractor shall plan their operations to allow adequate time for laboratory tests and to permit taking of field density tests during compaction. 09 2 2 2 0 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-2 H. Any costs for re-testing required as a result of failure to meet compaction requirements shall be borne solely by the Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 45 23 – Testing Services Furnished by Contractor C. Section 31 10 00 – Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation D. Section 31 23 33 – Trenching and Backfill E. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control F. Section 32 90 00 – Final Grading and Landscaping 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced Specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. Utah Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. ASTM C 127 – Standard Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate. b. ASTM C 136 – Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. c. ASTM D 698 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) d. ASTM D 1140 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Amount of Material Finer than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Soils by Washing e. ASTM D 1556 – Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand Cone Method. f. ASTM D 1557 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/lb3 (2,700 kN- m/m3)). Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-3 g. ASTM D 1883 – Standard Test Method for California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of Laboratory-Compacted Soils. h. ASTM D 2216 – Test for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass. i. ASTM D 2487 – Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). j. ASTM D 4253 – Standard Test Method for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. k. ASTM D 4318 – Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. l. ASTM D 6913 - Standard Test Methods for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis m. ASTM D 6938 – Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Evidence the Contractor has a minimum of five (5) years of experience performing excavation and backfill similar in scope to the work for this project. 2. Name and location of all material suppliers. 3. Certificate of compliance with the standards specified herein for each source of each material. 4. List of disposal sites for waste and unsuitable materials and all required permits for use of those sites. 5. Plans and cross sections of open cut excavations showing side slopes and limits of the excavation at grade. 6. Procedures for dewatering proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to any earthwork operations. 7. Samples of synthetic filter fabric and reinforced plastic membrane with manufacturer's certificates or catalog cuts stating the mechanical and physical properties. Samples shall be at least one (1) foot wide and four (4) feet long taken across the roll with the warp direction appropriately marked. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-4 8. A representative sample of the on-site or off-site source of each class of fill material weighing approximately 50 lbs. The sample shall be delivered to a location designated by the Engineer. 9. Construction drawings and structural calculations for any types of excavation support required. Drawings and calculations shall be sealed by a currently registered Professional Engineer in the State of Utah. 10. Submit excavation support installer qualifications with installation history. 11. Monitoring plan and pre-construction condition inspection and documentation of all adjacent structures, utilities, and roadways near proposed installation of excavation support systems and near areas where dewatering is required to facilitate construction. 12. The Contractor shall be required to submit plans of open cut excavation for review by the Engineer before approval is given to proceed. 13. Contractor shall also submit a monitoring plan developed by the excavation support design engineer. 14. All required permits and a list of disposal sites for unsuitable materials within thirty (30) consecutive days after Notice to Proceed. If the disposal site is located on private property, the submittal shall also include written permission from the owner of record. 15. Except where borrow is to be obtained from a commercial source, a borrow source development, use, and reclamation plan jointly developed by the Contractor and the property owner prior to engaging in any land disturbing activity on the proposed source (other than material sampling that may be necessary). The Contractor's plan shall address the following a. Drainage: The source shall be graded to drain such that no water will collect or stand and a functioning drainage system shall be provided. If drainage is not practical, and the source is to serve as a pond, the minimum average depth below the water table shall be 4 feet or the source graded so as to create wetlands as appropriate, or as agreed to with the property owner b. Slopes: The source shall be dressed and shaped in a continuous manner to contours which are comparable to and blend in with the adjacent topography, but in no case will slopes steeper than 3:1 be permitted. c. Erosion Control: Except where borrow is to be obtained from a commercial source, the Contractor and the property owner shall jointly submit a Borrow Source Development, Use, and Erosion Control Plan to the appropriate State or Local permitting authority for approval and provide evidence of such to the Engineer for their approval prior to engaging in any land disturbing Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-5 activity on the proposed source other than material sampling that may be necessary. 1.05 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS A. Information on subsurface conditions is referenced under Division 01, General Requirements. B. Attention is directed to the possible location of water pipes, sanitary pipes, storm drains, and other utilities located in the area of proposed excavation. In the event excavation activities disrupt service, the Contractor shall perform all repairs at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall contact Blue Stakes of Utah at bluestakes.org or by calling 811 to request underground utility location mark-out at least three (3) working days, not including the day the request is called in, but no more than ten (10) working days prior to the beginning of excavation. The Contractor shall also contact and request utility location mark-out from buried utility owners with utilities on the project site that are not participants of Blue Stake of Utah, including private utility lines. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Soil and rock material shall be excavated, transported, placed, and stored in a manner so as to prevent contamination, segregation and excessive wetting. Materials which have become contaminated or segregated will not be permitted in the performance of the work and shall be removed from the site. 2.02 FILL MATERIALS A. The contractor shall be responsible for providing fill materials meeting the gradation requirements included herein. B. All fill materials shall be free of organic material, environmental contaminants, snow, ice, frozen soil, or other unsuitable material. C. Bedding material installed above and below the water table shall meet the requirements of the UDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. D. Below-grade walls shall be backfilled with Select Fill. E. When the excavated material from required excavations meets the requirements of Select Fill or Common Fill, but is replaced with off-site borrow material for the Contractor’s convenience, the costs associated with such work and material shall be borne by the Contractor. F. Where excavated material does not meet requirements for Select Fill or Common Fill, the Contractor shall furnish off-site borrow material meeting the specified requirements Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-6 herein. Determination of whether the borrow material will be paid for as an extra cost will be made based on the contract documents. G. Contractor may stockpile excavated material to be used as Select Fill, Common Fill, Drainage Fill or Topsoil on site in areas designated in the Contract Documents. Soil materials may be stockpiled as necessary to sort, segregate, test, and transfer the materials. Excess material and materials considered unsuitable for reuse by the Engineer shall be removed from the site for off-site disposal. No stockpiling of excavated material is allowed in a manner or location that would permit erosion and its subsequent sedimentation offsite. 2.03 SELECT FILL A. Select fill shall be used where shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Select fill shall not include particles or lumps larger than 3 inches. C. Select fill used as backfill against walls shall not contain any rock larger than 1½ -inches. D. Select fill shall consist of non-plastic materials classifying as GW, GW-GM, GP, SW, SW-SM, SP-SM, or SP per ASTM D-2487. Select fill shall be free of organic material, environmental contaminants, snow, ice, frozen soil, or other unsuitable material. E. Open-graded and dense-graded UDOT aggregates meeting the gradation requirements above may be used as Select Fill. F. Select Fill to be used as pavement subbase material shall be UDOT Untreated Base Course G. Select Fill shall be placed in 8-inch-thick lifts. H. Select Fill shall be compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density obtainable by ASTM D 698 and does not contain unsuitable material. I. Select Fill shall be compacted at a moisture content within 20 percent of the optimum moisture content of the fill material in accordance with the ASTM D 698, Standard Proctor. J. All materials used as Select Fill are subject to approval by the Engineer. 2.04 DRAINAGE FILL A. Drainage Fill shall be used where shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Drainage Fill shall consist of AASHTO No. 57 aggregate. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-7 2.05 COMMON FILL A. Common Fill shall be used where shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Common Fill shall consist of non-organic on-site soils classifying as CH, MH, CL, ML, SC, SM, SP, SW, GC, GM, GP, or GW according to ASTM D 2487. C. Common Fill shall be placed in 8-inch-thick loose lifts. D. Common Fill shall be compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density obtainable by ASTM D 698 and does not contain unsuitable material. E. Common Fill shall be compacted at a moisture content within 20 percent of the optimum moisture content of the fill material in accordance with the ASTM D 698, Standard Proctor. F. All material used as common fill is subject to approval by the Engineer. If there is insufficient suitable material onsite, import whatever additional material is required which conforms to the specifications, at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Select Fill may be used as Common Fill, subject to approval by the Engineer. Select fill may be used as Common Fill at no change in the Contract Price. 2.06 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil shall be friable and loamy (loam, sandy loam, silt loam, sandy clay loam, clay loam). It shall be free of debris, trash, stumps, rocks, roots, and noxious weeds, and shall give evidence of being able to support health vegetation. It shall contain no substance potentially toxic to plant growth. All topsoil shall be tested by a recognized laboratory for the following criteria: Organic matter content shall not be less than 1.5% by weight. pH range shall be from 6.0 -7.5. If pH is less than 6.0, lime shall be added in accordance with test results or in accordance with the recommendations of the vegetative establishment practice being used. Soluble salts shall not exceed 500 ppm. If additional topsoil is needed, it must meet the standards stated above. 2.07 GEOTEXTILES A. The Contractor shall provide geotextiles as indicated on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. The materials and placement shall be as indicated under Section 31 05 19 - Geotextiles. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Stripping Of Topsoil Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-8 1. In all areas to be excavated, filled, or paved, the topsoil shall be stripped to its full depth. 2. Topsoil may be stockpiled for subsequent reuse on site at locations shown on the Contract Drawings or designated by the Owner or Engineer. Topsoil shall be kept separated from other excavated materials and shall be piled free of roots and other undesirable materials. Topsoil shall not be stored in areas where it will interfere with surface drainage or with the conservation of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. No stockpile shall be placed within 50-feet of a pond, stream, wetland, or stormwater inlet. B. Excavation 1. All material excavated, regardless of its nature or composition, shall be classified as UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION. Excavation shall include the removal of all soil, rock, weathered rock, rocks of all types, boulders, conduits, pipe, all other obstacles encountered, and all other obstacles shown to be removed within the limits of excavation shown on the Contract Drawings or specified herein. The cost of excavation shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid Price and no additional payment will be made for the removal of obstacles encountered within the excavation limits shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 2. Where blasting is necessary to perform the required excavations, blasting shall be performed as stipulated in Section 31 23 16 – Excavation by Blasting. 3. All suitable material removed in the excavation shall be used as far as practicable in the formation of embankments, subgrades, and shoulders, and at such other places as may be indicated on the Drawings or indicated by the Engineer. No excavation shall be wasted except as may be permitted by the Engineer. Refer to the drawings for specific location and placement of suitable excavated materials in the formation of embankments, backfill, and structural and roadway foundations. THE ENGINEER AND/OR MATERIALS TESTING CONSULTANT WILL DESIGNATE MATERIALS THAT ARE UNSUITABLE. The Contractor shall furnish off-site disposal areas for the unsuitable material. Where suitable materials containing excessive moisture are encountered above grade in cuts, the Contractor shall construct above grade ditch drains prior to the excavation of the cut material when in the opinion of the Engineer and/or materials testing consultant such measures are necessary to provide proper construction. 4. All excavations shall be made in the dry and in such a manner and to such widths as will give ample room for properly constructing and inspecting the structures and/or piping they are to contain and for such excavation support, pumping and drainage as may be required. Excavation shall be made in accordance with the grades and details shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-9 5. Excavation slopes shall be flat enough to avoid slides that will cause disturbance of the subgrade or damage of adjacent areas. Excavation requirements and slopes shall be as indicated in the Drawings. 6. The Contractor shall intercept and collect surface runoff both at the top and bottom of cut slopes. The intersection of slopes with natural ground surfaces, including the beginning and ending of cut slopes, shall be uniformly rounded as shown on the Drawings or as may be indicated by the Engineer. Concurrent with the excavation of cuts the Contractor shall construct intercepting berm ditches or earth berms along and on top of the cut slopes at locations shown on the Drawings or designated by the Engineer. All slopes shall be finished to reasonably uniform surfaces acceptable for seeding and mulching operations. No rock or boulders shall be left in place which protrude more than 1 foot within the typical section cut slope lines, and all rock cuts shall be cleaned of loose and overhanging material. All protruding roots and other objectionable vegetation shall be removed from slopes. 7. It is the intent of these Specifications that all structures shall bear on an aggregate base, crushed stone or screened gravel bedding placed to the thickness shown on the Drawings, specified in these Specifications, or not less than 6-inches. Bedding for piping shall be as specified in 31 23 33, Trenching and Backfill, or as shown on the Drawings. 8. The bottom of all excavations for structures and pipes shall be examined by the Engineer and/or materials testing consultant for bearing value and the presence of unsuitable material. If, in the opinion of the Engineer and/or materials testing consultant, additional excavation is required due to the low bearing value of the subgrade material, or if the in place soils are soft, yielding, pumping or wet, the Contractor shall remove such material to the required width and depth and replace it with thoroughly compacted select fill, and/or crushed stone or screened gravel as indicated by the Engineer. Payment for such additional work ordered by the Engineer shall be made as an extra by a Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 01. No payment will be made for subgrade disturbance caused by inadequate dewatering or improper construction methods. 9. All cuts shall be brought to the grade and cross section shown on the Drawings, or established by the Engineer, prior to final inspection and acceptance by the Engineer. 10. Slides and over-breaks which occur due to negligence, carelessness or improper construction techniques on the part of the Contractor shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor as indicated by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. If grading operations are suspended for any reason whatsoever, partially completed cut and fill slopes shall be brought to the required slope and the work of seeding and mulching or other required erosion and sedimentation control operations shall be performed. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-10 11. Where the excavation exposes sludge, sludge contaminated soil or other odorous materials, the Contractor shall cover such material at the end of each workday with a minimum of 6 inches and a maximum of 24-inches of Common fill. The work shall be an odor abatement measure and the material shall be placed to the depth deemed satisfactory by the Engineer for this purpose. C. Excavation Support 1. The Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain such excavation support which may be required to provide safe working conditions and support sides of excavation or to protect structures, pipes, and utilities from possible. The Contractor shall be exclusively responsible for maintaining safe working conditions and structure integrity without overstressing or damaging existing structures, pipes, and utilities resulting from the Contractor temporarily placing, moving, or removing loads on or adjacent to existing structures, pipes, and utilities. If the Engineer is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, the Engineer may order additional supports put in at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the adequacy of all supports used and for all damage resulting from failure of support system or from placing, maintaining and removing the support system. 2. The selection of and design of any proposed excavation support systems is exclusively the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall submit drawings and calculations to the Engineer on the proposed systems sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the in the State of Utah. 3. The excavation support system shall be installed by a specialized contactor with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience installing the type of excavation support system proposed. 4. The Contractor shall exercise caution in the installation and removal of supports to ensure no excessive or unusual loadings or vibrations are transmitted to any new or existing structure. The Contractor shall promptly repair at their expense any and all damage that can be reasonably attributed to installation or removal of excavation support system. 5. Contractor shall monitor movement and vibration in the excavation support systems as well as movement and vibration at adjacent structures, utilities and roadways near excavation supports. Contractor shall submit a monitoring plan developed by the excavation support design engineer. All pre-construction condition assessment and documentation of adjacent structures on-site and off- site shall be performed by the Contractor. If any sign of distress such as cracking or movement occurs in any adjacent structure, utility or roadway during installation of supports, subsequent excavation, service period of supports, subsequent backfill and construction, or removal of supports, Engineer shall be notified immediately. The Contractor shall be exclusively responsible for repair of any Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-11 damage to any roadway, structure, utility, pipes, etc. both on-site and off-site, as a result of their operations. 6. All excavation supports shall be removed upon completion of the work except as indicated herein. The Engineer may permit supports to be left in place at the request and expense of the Contractor. The Engineer may order certain supports left permanently in place in addition to that required by the Contract. The cost of the materials so ordered left in place, less a reasonable amount for the eliminated expense of the removal work omitted, will be paid as an extra by a Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 01. Vibrations of new and existing structures shall be considered when the Contractor decides whether to remove excavation supports or leave them in place. Any excavation supports left in place shall be cut off at least two (2) feet below the finished ground surface or as directed by the Engineer. D. Protection Of Subgrade 1. To minimize the disturbance of bearing materials and provide a firm foundation, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements: a. Use of heavy rubber tired construction equipment shall not be permitted on the final subgrade unless it can be demonstrated that drawdown of groundwater throughout the entire area of the structure is at least 3 feet below the bottom of the excavation (subgrade). Even then, the use of such equipment shall be prohibited should subgrade disturbance result from concentrated wheel loads. b. Subgrade soils disturbed through the operations of the Contractor shall be excavated and replaced with compacted select fill or crushed stone at the Contractor's expense as indicated by the Engineer. c. The Contractor shall provide positive protection against penetration of frost into materials below the bearing level during work in winter months. This protection can consist of a temporary blanket of straw or salt hay covered with a plastic membrane or other acceptable means. E. Proof-Rolling 1. The subgrade of all structures and all areas that will support pavements or select fill shall be proof-rolled. After stripping of topsoil, excavation to subgrade and prior to placement of fills, the exposed subgrade shall be carefully inspected by probing and testing as needed. Any topsoil or other organic material still in place, frozen, wet, soft, or loose soil, and other undesirable materials shall be removed. The exposed subgrade shall be proof-rolled with a heavily loaded tandem-wheeled dump truck to check for pockets of soft material hidden beneath a thin crust of better soil. Any unsuitable materials thus exposed shall be removed and replaced with an approved compacted material, as directed by the Materials Consultant. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-12 F. DEWATERING 1. The Contractor shall do all dewatering as required for the completion of the work. Procedures for dewatering proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to any earthwork operations. 2. All water removed by dewatering operations shall be disposed of in accordance with the Utah Water Quality Act. 3. The dewatering system shall be of sufficient size and capacity as required to control groundwater or seepage to permit proper excavation operations, embankment construction and reconstruction, subgrade preparation, and to allow concrete to be placed in a dry condition. The system shall include a sump system or other equipment, appurtenances and other related earthwork necessary for the required control of water. The Contractor shall drawdown groundwater to at least 2 feet below the bottom of excavations (subgrade), over the entire excavation area, at all times in order to maintain a dry and undisturbed condition. 4. The Contractor shall control, by acceptable means, all water regardless of source. Water shall be controlled, and its disposal provided for at each berm, structure, etc. The entire periphery of the excavation areas shall be ditched and diked to prevent water from entering the excavation. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for disposal of the water and shall provide all necessary means at no additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper design, installation, proper operation, maintenance, and any failure of any component of the system. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair without cost to the Owner, any damage to work in place and the excavation, including damage to the bottom due to heave and including removal of material and pumping out of the excavated area. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages to any other area or structure caused by their failure to maintain and operate the dewatering system proposed and installed by the Contractor. 6. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair, without cost to the Owner, any damage to work in place and nearby structures, roadways, and utilities which can be reasonably attributed to dewatering operations. This includes settlement of structures, roadways, and utilities due to dewatering of soils supporting the structures, roadways, and utilities. 7. The Contractor shall take all the steps that they consider necessary to familiarize himself with the surface and subsurface site conditions, and shall obtain the data that is required to analyze the water and soil environment at the site and to assure that the materials used for the dewatering systems will not erode, deteriorate, or clog to the extent that the dewatering systems will not perform properly during the period of dewatering. Copies of logs of borings and laboratory test results are Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-13 available to the Contractor. This data is furnished for information only, and it is expressly understood that the Owner and Engineer will not be held responsible for any interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. 8. Prior to the execution of the work, the Contractor, Owner and Engineer shall jointly survey the condition of adjoining structures. Photographs and records shall be made of any prior settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and the like, that may become the subject of possible damage claims. G. FILL or EMBANKMENTS 1. Contractor shall perform the construction of fill or embankments in such a manner that cut and fill slopes will be completed to final slopes and grade in a continuous operation. The operation of removing excavation material from any cut and the placement of embankment in any fill shall be a continuous operation to completion unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. 2. Subgrades upon which fill or embankments are to be constructed shall be stripped of topsoil, organic material, rubbish and other extraneous materials. After stripping and prior to placing fill or embankment material, the Contractor shall compact the top 12 inches of in place soil as specified under COMPACTION. 3. Any soft or unsuitable materials revealed before or during placement fill or embankment placement shall be removed as indicated by the Engineer and/or materials testing consultant and replaced with select fill and compacted as required. 4. Fill subgrades on which fill or embankment is to be placed, shall be scarified or stepped in a manner which will permit bonding of the embankment with the existing surface. The fill or embankment soils shall be as specified under Part 2 - Products, and shall be deposited and spread in successive, uniform, approximately horizontal layers. The loose thickness of each lift shall not exceed the thickness for each fill type noted in COMPACTION. 5. Hauling shall be distributed over the full width of the embankment, and in no case will deep ruts be allowed to form during the construction of the embankment. Fill or embankment subgrades shall be properly drained at all times and kept free of flowing or ponding water, snow, ice and frozen soils. Saturated soils, snow, ice, or frozen soils shall be removed as recommended by the Engineer. 6. Each layer of the embankment shall be thoroughly compacted to the density specified under COMPACTION. 7. The embankment or fill material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content before rolling to obtain the prescribed compaction. Moisture conditions and manipulation of the fill or embankment material, when necessary, shall be performed to maintain a uniform moisture content throughout the layer. Should the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-14 material be too wet or too dry to permit proper compaction, earthwork operations shall be delayed until the material is adequately moisture conditioned. Samples of all fill or embankment materials for testing, both before and after placement and compaction, will be taken at frequent intervals. From these tests, corrections, adjustments, and modifications of methods, materials, and moisture content will be made to construct the embankment. 8. Where fill or embankments materials are to be placed and compacted on sloped subgrades steeper than 4:1 shall be benched. Benches shall be at least 6-feet wide. 9. When rock and other embankment material are excavated at approximately the same time, the rock shall be incorporated into the outer portions of the embankments and the other material which meets the requirements for select fill shall be incorporated into the formation of the embankments. Stones or fragmentary rock larger than 4 inches in their greatest dimension will not be allowed within the top 6 inches of the final grade. Stones, fragmentary rock, or boulders larger than 12 inches in their greatest dimension will not be allowed in any portions of embankments and shall be disposed of by the Contractor as indicated by the Engineer. When rock fragments or stone are used in embankments, the material shall be brought up in layers as specified or directed and every effort shall be exerted to fill the voids with finer material to form a dense, compact mass which meets the densities specified for embankment compaction. H. BACKFILLING 1. All structures and pipes shall be backfilled with the type of materials shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Fill placed as structure or utility backfill shall be deposited in successive, uniform, approximately horizontal lifts. The thickness of each lift shall not exceed the requirements of Paragraph 3.09, COMPACTION. 2. Each lift of fill placed backfill shall be thoroughly compacted to the density specified for each type of fill included in Paragraph 3.09, COMPACTION. 3. Where excavation support is used, the Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to prevent loss of support beneath and adjacent to pipes and existing structures when supports are removed. If significant volumes of soil cannot be prevented from clinging to the extracted supports, the voids shall be continuously backfilled as rapidly as possible. The Contractor shall thereafter limit the depth below subgrade that supports will be installed in similar soil conditions or employ other appropriate means to prevent loss of support. 4. Backfill against concrete or masonry structure shall not be performed until the Work has been reviewed and backfilling permitted. Backfill against walls shall also be deferred until the structural slab for floors above the top fill line have been placed and attained design strength or earlier at the discretion of the Engineer. Partial backfilling against adequately braced wall may be considered by the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-15 Engineer on an individual situation basis. Where walls are to be waterproofed, all Work shall be completed and membrane materials dried or cured according to the manufacturer’s instructions before backfilling. 5. Backfill against tanks and other structures which are to retain liquids shall not be performed until leakage tests are completed and accepted by the Engineer in accordance with the Section entitled “Water Tightness Testing”. I. COMPACTION 1. The Contractor shall compact embankments, backfill, crushed stone, aggregate base, and in place subgrade in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The densities specified herein refer to percentages of maximum density as determined by the noted test methods. Compaction of materials on the project shall be in accordance with the following schedule: 2. Compaction Requirements a. Vibratory equipment shall not be used with 25 feet of any existing structure. Density % Standard Proctor (D 698) Density % Mod. Proctor (D 1557) Max. Lift Thickness as Compacted Inches Embankments Beneath Structures, Roadways, and Sidewalks* 98 92 8 Common Fill Areas 95 90 8 Backfill Around Structures 95 90 8 Backfill in Pipe Trenches 95 90 8 Crushed Stone Beneath Structures ****12 Select Sand 98 92 8 Aggregate Base Course (ABC) Beneath Structures, Roadways, and Sidewalks ****8 Crushed Stone Backfill ****12 Crushed Stone Pipe Bedding ****12 In Place Subgrade Beneath Structures, Roadways, and Sidewalks 98 92 Top 12-inches * Embankments beneath structures shall be considered to include a zone 10 feet out from the foundation of the structure extending down to the natural ground on a 45 slope. ** The aggregate shall be compacted to a degree acceptable to the Engineer by use of a vibratory compactor and/or crawler tractor. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-16 b. Within 25 feet of any existing structure, non-vibratory compaction equipment such as a drum roller with a maximum weight of 4 tons should be used. Within 5 feet of any existing structure, a walk behind vibratory sled or roller shall be used. 3. Field density tests will be made by the Materials Testing Consultant to determine if the specified densities have been achieved, and these tests shall be the basis for accepting or rejecting the compaction. In-place density tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 1557, or ASTM D 6938. The Engineer, in conjunction with the Materials Testing Consultant, will be the judge as to which test method will be the most appropriate. Failure to achieve the specified densities shall require the Contractor to recompact the material or remove it as required. The Contractor shall, if necessary, increase the compactive effort by increasing the number of passes, using heavier or more suitable compaction equipment, or by reducing the thickness of the layers. The Contractor shall adjust the moisture contents of the soils to bring them within the optimum range by drying them or adding water as required. 4. Testing will be performed as frequently as deemed necessary by the Engineer and/or Materials Testing Consultant. As a minimum, one in place density test shall be performed for each 1000 cubic yards of embankment placed and 500 cubic yards of backfill placed or one test performed each day for either or as directed by the Engineer or recommended by Material Testing Consultant. J. Vibration Monitoring 1. Vibration monitoring shall be performed at nearby structures when compaction work is ongoing. A single monitoring point using vibration monitoring equipment capable of detecting velocities of 0.1 inch/second or less and survey measurements shall be used for vibration monitoring at each of the nearest structures. An elevation measurement on nearby structures shall be taken before compaction work starts, and then at least twice a day during the work with one reading taken at the conclusion of the day’s operations. Elevation measurements shall be recorded to an accuracy of 0.005 foot. If at any time the Contractor detects settlement or heave of 0.005-feet or more, or vibration levels of 1.0 inch/second or more, the vibratory compaction shall be stopped immediately, and the Engineer notified. K. REMOVAL OF EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIALS 1. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of off-site all excess and unsuitable materials. Within thirty (30) consecutive days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review all required permits and a list of disposal sites for the unsuitable materials. If the disposal site is located on private property, the submittal shall also include written permission from the owner of record. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-17 2. All excess and unsuitable materials shall be disposed of in locations and under conditions that comply with federal, state/commonwealth and local laws and regulations. 3. The Contractor shall obtain an off-site disposal area prior to beginning demolition or excavation operations. 4. All excess and unsuitable materials shall be hauled in trucks of sufficient capacity and tight construction to prevent spillage. Trucks shall be covered to prevent the propagation of dust. 5. When all excess and unsuitable material disposal operations are completed, the Contractor shall leave the disposal sites in a condition acceptable to the Owner and Owner(s) of the disposal site(s). L. BORROW EXCAVATION 1. Description a. The work covered by this section consists of the excavation of approved material from borrow sources and the hauling and utilization of such material as required on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. It shall also include the removing, stockpiling, and replacement of topsoil on the borrow source; the satisfactory disposition of material from the borrow source which is not suitable for use; and the satisfactory restoration of the borrow source and haul roads to an acceptable condition upon completion of the work. b. Borrow excavation shall not be used before all available suitable unclassified excavation has been used for backfilling and incorporated into the embankments. 2. Coordination with Seeding Operations a. The Contractor shall coordinate the work covered by this section with the construction of embankments and area fill so the requirements of Section 32 90 00 – Final Grading and Landscaping are met. 3. Borrow Materials a. All material shall meet the requirements of Section 2 for Select Fill or shall meet the requirements of Common Fill and classify as SM or coarser according to ASTM D 2487. 4. Construction Methods a. General Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-18 1) The surface of the borrow area shall be thoroughly cleared and grubbed and cleaned of all unsuitable material including all organics, topsoil, etc., before beginning the excavation. Disposal of material resulting from clearing and grubbing shall be in accordance with Section 31 10 00 – Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation. 2) Each borrow operation shall not be allowed to accumulate exposed, erodible slope area in excess of 1 acre at any one given time without the Contractor's beginning permanent seeding and mulching of the borrow source or other erosion control measures as may be approved by the Engineer. 3) The topsoil shall be removed and stockpiled at locations that will not interfere with the borrow operations and that meet the approval of the Engineer. Temporary erosion control measures shall be installed as necessary to prevent the erosion of the stockpile material. Once all borrow material has been removed from the source or portion thereof, the stockpiled topsoil shall be spread uniformly over the source. 4) Where it is necessary to haul borrow material over existing roads, the Contractor shall use all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the existing roads. The Contractor shall also conduct hauling operations in such a manner as to not interfere with the normal flow of traffic and shall always keep the traffic lanes free from spillage. b. Owner Furnished Sources 1) Where borrow sources are furnished by the Owner the location of such sources will be as designated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 2) The Owner will furnish the necessary haul road right-of-way at locations designated by the Engineer. All haul roads required shall be built, maintained, and when directed by the Engineer, obliterated, at no cost to the Owner. 3) The borrow sources shall be left in a neat and presentable condition after use. All slopes shall be smoothed, rounded, and constructed not steeper than 3:1. The source shall be graded to drain such that no water will collect or stand, and a functioning drainage system shall be provided. 4) All sources shall be seeded and mulched in accordance with Section 32 90 00 – Final Grading and Landscaping. c. Contractor Furnished Sources Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Earthwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 00 01-19 1) The approval of borrow sources furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the following conditions: a) The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring the right to take the material and any rights of access that may be necessary; for locating and developing the source; and any clearing and grubbing and drainage ditches necessary. b) Such right shall be in writing and shall include an agreement with the Owner that the borrow source may be dressed, shaped, seeded, mulched, and drained as required by these Specifications after all borrow has been removed. c) The Contractor and the property owner shall jointly submit a borrow source development, use, and reclamation plan to the Engineer, as described in Paragraph 1.05, for approval prior to engaging in any land disturbing activity on the proposed source other than material sampling that may be necessary. d. Maintenance 1) During construction and until final acceptance the Contractor shall use any methods approved by the Engineer which are necessary to maintain the work covered by this Section so that the work will not contribute to excessive soil erosion. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Aggregate Materials Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 05 16-1 SECTION 31 05 16 AGGREGATE MATERIALS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials required to complete all work associated with the installation of aggregate material beneath foundations, as backfill and as roadway subgrades and other related and incidental work as required to complete the work shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 42 00 – References C. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork D. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control E. Section 32 10 00 – Paving and Surfacing F. Section 33 41 13 – Foundation Drainage Systems G. Section 32 90 00 – Final Grading and Landscaping 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. Utah Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. 2. ASTM C 127 – Test for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate. 3. ASTM C 136 – Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 4. ASTM C 535 – Test for Resistance to Degradation of Large Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 08 2 9 0 5 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Aggregate Materials Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 05 16-2 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS – NOT USED 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Materials gradation and certification. 2. ASTM C127, ASTM C136, and ASTM C535 test results PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CRUSHED STONE, SCREENED GRAVEL AND AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (ABC) A. Crushed stone or screened gravel shall meet the requirements of Aggregate Standard Size No. 57 or No. 67 as defined by UDOT Standard Specifications. B. ABC shall meet the requirements of ABC as defined by UDOT Standard Specifications. 2.02 SELECT SAND A. Select sand shall meet the requirements of Sections 1005 and 1014 of the UDOT Standard Specifications for materials and gradation. The size used shall be Standard Size No. 2S or 2MS as listed and defined in Table 1005-2, "Aggregate Gradation", of the UDOT Standard Specifications. 2.03 RIP RAP A. Rip rap shall be durable, well graded rock, having a minimum D50 size of 24 inches. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 3.02 INSTALLATION A. CRUSHED STONE, SCREENED GRAVEL AND AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (ABC) 1. Contractor shall install crushed stone, screened gravel and ABC in accordance with the UDOT Standard Specifications and as shown on the Drawings and indicated in the Contract Documents. a. Unless otherwise stated herein or shown on the Drawings, all mat foundations (bottom slabs) for the proposed structures shall have a blanket of crushed stone or ABC 6-inches thick minimum placed directly beneath the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Aggregate Materials Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 05 16-3 proposed mat. The blanket shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the extremities of the mat. b. For subgrade preparation at structures and structural fill, the foundation material shall be ABC where specifically specified on Drawings, otherwise, crushed stone or screened gravel shall be used. c. For ground under drains, pipe bedding, and drainage layers beneath structures the coarse aggregate shall meet the requirements of aggregate standard Size No. 57 or No. 67, as defined by UDOT Standard Specifications. B. SELECT SAND 1. Contractor shall install select sand in accordance with the UDOT Standard Specifications and as shown on the Drawings and indicated in the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Geotextiles Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 05 19-1 SECTION 31 05 19 GEOTEXTILES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all Geotextiles, including all necessary and incidental items, as detailed or required for the Contractor to complete the installation in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications. B. For the location of each type of Geotextile see the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A.ASTM Standards 1. ASTM D4491 - Water permeability of Geotextiles by permittivity. D-4873 Identification, Storage and Handling of Geotextiles. 2. ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles 3. ASTM D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles 4. ASTM D5261 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of Geotextiles 5. ASTM D6241 - Standard Test Method for Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles and Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50-mm Probe B. AASHTO Standards 1. AASHTO M 288-06 (2011) Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to shipping to the site, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two copies of a mill certificate or affidavit signed by a legally authorized official of the Manufacturer for each type of Geotextile. The Supplier shall also submit three Geotextile samples of each product, 1 yard square each, seamed and unseamed as appropriate, with the mill certificate for each Geotextile type supplied. The mill certificate or affidavit shall attest that the Geotextile meets the chemical, physical and manufacturing requirements stated in the specifications. The samples shall be labeled with the manufacturer's lot number, machine direction, date of sampling, project number, specifications, manufacturer and product name. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Geotextiles Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 05 19-2 B. The Engineer shall be furnished copies of the delivery tickets or other acceptable receipts as evidence for materials received that will be incorporated into construction. PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Filter Geotextile shall be a minimum 6-ounce per square yard (nominal) nonwoven needle punched synthetic fabric consisting of staple or continuous filament polyester or polypropylene manufactured in a manner accepted by the Engineer and the Owner. The Geotextiles shall be inert and unaffected by long-term exposure to chemicals or liquids with a pH range from 3 to 10. The Geotextiles shall have a minimum threshold water head of 0.25-inches in the "as received" condition. 1. Filter Geotextile shall have a Survivability Class of Class 1 or 2 in accordance with AASHTO M288, unless otherwise specified herein. B. Cushion Geotextile shall be a minimum 16-ounce per square yard nonwoven needle punched synthetic fabric consisting of continuous filament or staple polyester or polypropylene manufactured in a manner accepted by the Engineer and the Owner. The Geotextiles shall be inert and unaffected by long-term exposure to chemicals or liquids with a pH range from 3 to 10. 1. Cushion Geotextile shall have a Survivability Class of Class 1 in accordance with AASHTO M288. C. Type I Separator Geotextile shall be a minimum 8-ounce per square yard (nominal) nonwoven needle punched synthetic fabric consisting of staple or continuous filament polyester or polypropylene manufactured in a manner accepted by the Engineer and the Owner. The Geotextiles shall be inert and unaffected by long term exposure to chemicals or liquids with a pH range from 3 to 10. 1. Type I Separator Geotextile shall have a Survivability Class of Class 1 or 2 in accordance with AASHTO M288, unless otherwise specified herein. D. Type II Separator Geotextile shall be a woven slit film or monofilament synthetic fabric consisting of polyester or polypropylene in a manner approved by the Engineer. Geotextile shall be treated to resist degradation due to exposure to ultraviolet light. 1. Type II Separator Geotextile shall have a Survivability Class of Class 1 in accordance with AASHTO M288, unless otherwise specified herein. E. All Geotextiles shall conform to the properties listed using the test methods listed in Table 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for timely submittals of all confirmation test data for Geotextiles. 03 1 5 1 3 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Geotextiles Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 05 19-3 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. During all periods of shipment and storage, all Geotextiles shall be protected from direct sunlight, temperature greater than 140F water, mud, dirt, dust, and debris. B. To the extent possible, the Geotextile shall be maintained wrapped in heavy-duty protective covering until use. Geotextile delivered to the project site without protective covering shall be rejected. After the protective covering has been removed, the Geotextile shall not be left uncovered for longer than fourteen (14) days, under any circumstances. C. The Owner shall approve the shipping and delivery schedule prior to shipment. The Owner shall designate the on-site storage area for the Geotextiles. Unloading and storage of Geotextiles shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. D. Geotextiles that are damaged during shipping or storage shall be rejected and replaced at Contractor expense. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Geotextiles shall be placed to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. At the time of installation, the Geotextile shall be rejected by the Engineer if it has defects, rips, holes, flaws, evidence of deterioration, or other damage. B. It is the intent of these Specifications that Geotextiles used to protect natural drainage media be placed the same day as the drainage media to prevent soil, sediment or windblown soils to make contact with the drainage media. C. The Geotextiles shall be placed smooth and free of excessive wrinkles. Geotextiles shall conform to and be in contact with the approved subgrade. D. When the Geotextiles are placed on slopes, the upslope fabric portion shall be lapped such that it is the upper or exposed Geotextile. E. Geotextiles shall be temporarily secured in a manner accepted by the Engineer prior to placement of overlying materials. F. In the absence of specific requirements shown on the Drawings, the following shall be used for overlaps of adjacent rolls of Geotextile: Geotextile Type / Application Overlap of Adjacent Rolls(1) (Inches) Transverse End Overlap (Inches) Filter Geotextile 6 min 12 min Cushion Geotextile 12 min 12 min Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Geotextiles Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 05 19-4 Separator - Roadway Applications 12 min 24 min Separator - Slope Protection 18 min 24 min Separator Geotextile 12 min 18 min (1) Overlaps may be reduced if adjacent panels are sewn or heat bonded where approved by the Engineer. G. Any Geotextile that is torn or punctured shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The repair shall consist of a patch of the same type of Geotextile placed over the failed areas and shall overlap the existing Geotextile a minimum of 12-inches from any point of the rupture. H. Any Geotextile that is subjected to excessive sediment buildup on its surface during construction shall be replaced by the Contractor prior to placement of overlying material. Table 1: Minimum Required Geotextile Properties* Geotextile Property Filter Geotextile Cushion Geotextile Type I Separator Geotextile Type II Separator Geotextile Geotextile Construction Nonwoven Needle punched Nonwoven Needle punched Nonwoven Needle punched Woven Ultraviolet Resistance, (500 hrs.) ASTM D7238, Average % Strength Retention 70 70 70 70 Grab Tensile Strength (lbs.), ASTM D4632 120 340 160 315 Grab Tensile elongation (%) ASTM D4632 50 50 50 15 Trapezoid Tear Strength (lbs) ASTM D4533 50 155 60 120 Apparent Opening Size (AOS), (mm), ASTM D4751 0.212 N/A 0.212 0.425 Permittivity at 50 mm constant head (sec-1), ASTM D4491 0.5 N/A 1.5 0.1 CBR Puncture Strength, ASTM D6241 (lb)340 1100 410 900 * MINIMUM AVERAGE ROLL VALUE (MARV) 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. At the option of the Engineer representative samples of Geotextiles shall be obtained and tested by the Engineer to assure that the material properties conform to these Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Geotextiles Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 05 19-5 Specifications. Conformance testing shall be conducted by the Engineer and paid for by the Owner. B. Conformance testing shall be completed at a minimum frequency of one sample per 100,000 square feet of Geotextile delivered to the project site. Sampling and testing shall be as directed by the Engineer. C. Conformance testing of the Geotextiles shall include but not be limited to the following properties: 1. Mass Per Unit Area (ASTM D5261) 2. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D4632) 3. Trapezoidal Tear (ASTM D4533) 4. Puncture Resistance (ASTM D6241) D. The Engineer may add to, remove or revise the test methods used for determination of conformance properties to allow for use of improved methods. E. All Geotextile conformance test data shall meet or exceed requirements outlined in Table 1 of these Specifications for the particular category of Geotextile prior to installation. Any materials that do not conform to these requirements shall be retested or rejected at the direction of the Engineer. F. Each roll of Geotextile will be visually inspected by the Engineer or his representative. The Engineer reserves the right to sample and test at any time and reject, if necessary, any material based on visual inspection or verification tests. G. A Geotextile that is rejected shall be removed from the project site and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Sampling and conformance testing of the Geotextile supplied as replacement for rejected material shall be performed by the Engineer at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 10 00-1 SECTION 31 10 00 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND SITE PREPARATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Includes all labor, material, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of any additions, modifications, or alterations to existing building(s) and new construction work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Principal items of work include: 1. Notifying all authorities owning utility lines running to or on the property. Protecting and maintaining all utility lines to remain and capping those that are not required in accordance with instructions of the Utility Companies, and all other authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Clearing the site within the Contract Limit Lines, including removal of grass, brush, shrubs, trees, loose debris and other encumbrances except for trees marked to remain. 3. Boxing and protecting all trees, shrubs, lawns and the like within areas to be preserved. Relocating trees and shrubs, so indicated on the Drawings, to designated areas. 4. Repairing all injury to trees, shrubs, and other plants caused by site preparation operations shall be repaired immediately. Work shall be done by qualified personnel in accordance with standard horticultural practice and as approved by the Engineer. 5. Removing topsoil to its full depth from designated areas and stockpiling on site where directed by the Engineer for future use. 6. Disposing from the site all debris resulting from work under this Section. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork C. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control 08 2 9 0 5 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 10 00-2 PART 2 – EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. STREET AND ROAD BLOCKAGE 1. Closing of streets and roads during progress of the work shall be in compliance with the requirements of the Owner and other authorities having jurisdiction. Access shall be provided to all facilities remaining in operation. B. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 1. All work shall be performed in such a manner to protect all personnel, workmen, pedestrians and adjacent property and structures from possible injury and damage. 2. All conduits, wires, cables and appurtenances above or below ground shall be protected from damage. 3. Provide warning and barrier fence where shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. C. CLEARING OF SITE 1. Before removal of topsoil, and start of excavation and grading operations, the areas within the clearing limits shall be cleared and grubbed. 2. Clearing shall consist of cutting, removal, and satisfactory disposal of all trees, fallen timber, brush, bushes, rubbish, sanitary landfill material, fencing, and other perishable and objectionable material within the areas to be excavated or other designated areas. Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall survey the entire Contract site and shall prepare a plan which defines the areas to be cleared and grubbed, trees to be pruned, extent of tree pruning, and/or areas which are to be cleared but not grubbed. This plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Should it become necessary to remove a tree, bush, brush or other plants adjacent to the area to be excavated, the Contractor shall do so only after permission has been granted by the Engineer. 3. Excavation resulting from the removal of trees, roots and the like shall be filled with suitable material, as approved by the Engineer, and thoroughly compacted per the requirements contained in Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork. 4. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the Contractor shall clear and grub a strip at least 15-ft. wide along all permanent fence lines installed under this Contract. 5. In temporary construction easement locations, only those trees and shrubs shall be removed which are in actual interference with excavation or grading work under this Contract, and removal shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. However, Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 10 00-3 the Engineer reserves the right to order additional trees and shrubs removed at no additional cost to the Owner, if such, in his opinion, are too close to the work to be maintained or have become damaged due to the Contractor's operations. D. STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING EXISTING TOPSOIL 1. Erosion and sedimentation control measures shall be installed as per the Federal, State or Locally approved Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan for the project and Specification Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control before any stripping and stockpiling of topsoil can occur. 2. Existing topsoil and sod on the site within areas designated on the Drawings shall be stripped to whatever depth it may occur and stored in locations directed by the Engineer. 3. The topsoil shall be free of stones, roots, brush, rubbish, or other unsuitable materials before stockpiling the topsoil. 4. Care shall be taken not to contaminate the stockpiled topsoil with any unsuitable materials. E. GRUBBING 1. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all stumps, roots, logs, sticks and other perishable materials to a depth of at least 6-inches below ground surfaces. 2. Large stumps located in areas to be excavated may be removed during grading operations, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL 1. All debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing work shall be disposed of by the Contractor as part of the work of this Contract. Material designated by the Engineer to be salvaged shall be stored on the construction site as directed by the Engineer for reuse in this Project or removal by others. 2. Burning of any debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing work will not be permitted at the site. 2.03 INSTALLATION A. WARNING AND BARRIER FENCE Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 10 00-4 1. The fence shall be made of a visible, lightweight, flexible, high strength polyethylene material. The fence shall be Guardian Visual Barrier as manufactured by TEMAX, or equal. 2. Physical Properties Fence Color International Orange Roll Size 4' x 100' Roll weight 9 lbs. Mesh opening 1-3/4" x 1-3/4" Posts ASTM Designation: ASTM 702 Length: 6 feet long (T-Type) Weight: 1.25 #/Foot (min) Area of Anchor Plate: 14 Sq. In. 3. Drive posts 18 inches into ground every 8'. Wrap fence material around first terminal post allowing overlap of one material opening. Use metal tie wire or plastic tie wrap to fasten material to itself at top, middle and bottom. At final post, cut with utility knife or scissors at a point halfway across an opening. Wrap around and tie at final post in the same way as the first post. 4. Use tie wire or tie wrap at intermediate posts and splices as well. Thread ties around a vertical member of the fence material and the post and bind tightly against the post. For the most secure fastening, tie at top, middle and bottom. Overlap splices a minimum of four fence openings, tie as above, fastening both edges of the fence material splice overlap. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 19-1 SECTION 31 23 19 DEWATERING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment, perform all work necessary to lower and control the groundwater levels and hydrostatic pressures to permit all excavations and construction to be performed in dry conditions. The work shall include the following: 1. Testing, operation, maintenance, supervision, rewatering, and final dismantling and removal from the site of the dewatering system. 2. The cost of any replacement or rehabilitation of the subgrade or structures damaged due to dewatering system failures or Contractor negligence. 3. Compliance with all regulations relating to this work. 4. The diversion, collection, and removal of all ice, snow and surface runoff from the work areas, and removal of groundwater from new excavations to permit construction in the dry. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Requirements of related work are included in Division 01 and Division 02 of these Specifications. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications, all work herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the following documents to the extent that the provisions therein are not in conflict with the requirements of this Section. 1. ASTM D1556 – Density of soil in place by the Sand Cone Method. 2. ASTM D2167 – Density of soil in place by the Rubber Balloon Method. 3. Bureau of Reclamation – Groundwater Manual Sediment Test by Imhoff Cone 1.04 DESIGN A. The dewatering system shall be capable of relieving all hydrostatic pressure against the height of the excavation walls and of lowering the hydrostatic level below the bottom of the base slab a minimum of four (4) feet in the work areas both prior to excavation, and during excavation and construction. 01 1 1 2 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 19-2 B. The dewatering system shall be segmented so that if the operation of any one segment is disrupted, the remaining segment plus activated redundant components are capable of maintaining the groundwater at the stated levels. C. Provide, operate and maintain all ditches, berms, site grading, sumps and pumping facilities to divert, collect and remove all surface water from work areas. All collected water shall be discharged into the outfall pipe. D. Provide pipe and pumps of sufficient size and quantity to be able to flood the excavation within 12 hours in an emergency situation. Restoration of the working area shall be carried out by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Carry the dewatering system discharge through pipes out of the area of the excavation into the outfall junction manhole shown on the Drawings. Provide meters to measure the discharge flow. F. Place a portion of the header and discharge system underground to provide vehicle crossings or access to existing structure as required. G. Provide a standby dewatering system that meets the following requirements: 1. Provide 100 percent standby power. 2. Provide a 15 percent minimum increase in the number of wells and related equipment required to operate the dewatering system installed and ready to operate. 3. Provide a minimum of three separate power units for the standby power system and one installed auxiliary unit for each individually powered pump. 4. Provide separate discharge lines from each well or common lines with valves such that any well or wells that malfunction or are damaged can be isolated form the others. 5. The systems shall be laid out and designed in such a way that portions of the system may be isolated for routine maintenance or repair in case of accidental damage without affecting the normal operation of the system. H. Provide sufficient fuel to maintain a five day supply on site for fuel power systems. I. Provide observation wells to determine compliance with dewatering requirements as indicated on the Drawings, Shop Drawings, and the Engineer. J. Designate certain observation wells as emergency observation wells. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 19-3 1. Name of dewatering subcontractor, if applicable. 2. Shop Drawings indicating the following: a. Plans showing the methods and location of dewatering and discharge including a sufficient number of detailed sections to clearly illustrate the scope of work. b. Relationship of the dewatering system, observation wells, and discharge line to existing buildings, other structures, utilities, streets and new construction. c. Utility locations. d. Drawings shall bear the seal and signature of the qualified Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Utah. e. List of materials and equipment to be used. f. A sample of all well record forms to be maintained during construction. 3. Detailed description of the sequence of dewatering operations 4. Dewatering well installation records indicating an identification number, location, dimensions, and installation procedures and materials. 5. Observation well installation records indicating an identification number, location, dimensions, and installation procedures and materials. 6. Emergency observation plan to be put into operation during failure of the dewatering system 7. Monthly Dewatering System Monitoring Reports containing the following data on approved forms: a. For observation wells, daily piezometric levels shall be identified by date, time, well number and system (subsystem if multiple pumps are used) pumping rate. Piezometric levels shall be noted in feet of drawdown and groundwater elevation. b. For dewatering wells, suspended material test results shall be identified by date, time, well number, well pumping rate (if monitored) and system (subsystem if multiple pumps are used) pumping rate. c. Installation records for new wells. 8. Schedule and records of all maintenance tests for primary and standby dewatering systems including the following: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 19-4 a. Maintenance tests and water quality tests for suspended matter at the discharge point including date, time of day, elapsed times of tests procedures, components tested, suspended particles, resultant observations and well readings. b. Daily discharge rates. c. Installation and removal of wells. d. General observations of the system such as equipment running times, and failures. 9. Dewatering well removal records 10. Observation well removal records 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the arrangement, location, and depths of the dewatering system necessary to accomplish the work described herein. B. Dewatering shall prevent the loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick conditions or softening of the foundation strata while maintaining stability of the sides and bottom of the excavation and providing dry conditions for construction operations. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials, especially the well screen, shall be carefully chosen to be compatible with the environment to prevent erosion, deterioration, and clogging. B. Surging of the natural formation to form a "gravel pack" is strictly prohibited. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Become familiar with the surface and subsurface site conditions. B. Obtain the data required to analyze the water and soil environment at the site in order to assure that the materials used for the dewatering systems will not erode, deteriorate, clog or otherwise hinder the system's performance during the period of the dewatering. C. Prior to the execution of the work, the Contractor, Owner and Engineer shall jointly survey the condition of adjoining structures. Photographs and records shall be made of Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 19-5 any prior settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and the like, that may become the subject of possible damage claims. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the dewatering system from the existing ground surface or from the bottom of an excavation which is located above the natural groundwater level. B. Observation wells shall consist of a standpipe or riser of minimum 1.0-inch inside diameter and a minimum three (3) foot long well-point screen or slotted PVC section at the bottom. Observation wells shall be installed as follows: 1. Employ the jetting method for all observation wells except those within ten feet of existing structures, piping or utilities. 2. Employ Case Boring Techniques for all observation wells within ten feet of existing structures, piping, or utilities and backfill the annulus between the well point or riser and the natural soil with a free flowing granular material similar to Ottawa Sand. C. DEWATERING PROCEDURE 1. Following dewatering system installation and testing and prior to excavation, place the dewatering system into operation and lower the water level. 2. Schedule the dewatering work to coordinate with all the other related work such as excavation support systems, excavation, placing of concrete walls and slabs, and any other operations by other Contractors that might be affected by this work. 3. Test the standby dewatering system with the following procedures: a. Shut off the primary power source and demonstrate that the standby power can be activated prior to the groundwater level rising to within one (1) foot of the bottom of base slab elevation and that the standby power source is adequate to draw the groundwater level back down to the Contractor's design depth or to the minimum required depths. b. Shut off one segment of the system and show that redundant components can be activated prior to the groundwater level rising to within one (1) foot of the bottom of base slab elevation and that the system is adequate to draw the groundwater level back down to the Contractor's design depth or to the minimum required depths. c. If the dewatering system fails to meet either performance requirement, the Contractor shall draw the groundwater level to a greater depth, add wells, or modify the system such that it will be in conformance with these requirements when retested. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 19-6 D. Operate the dewatering system continuously twenty-four (24) hours per day, seven (7) days per week until all structures have been satisfactorily constructed, including placement of fill materials, and no longer require dewatering. E. REWATERING AND REMOVAL OF DEWATERING SYSTEM 1. Obtain written approval from the Owner and Engineer prior to beginning rewatering operations. 2. Provide an adequate weight of fill to prevent buoyancy. 3. Pump water into the excavation such that the water level inside the excavation is always at a higher level than the rising groundwater on the outside until the groundwater level has reached its static level. 4. Remove all dewatering wells, buried and surface piping, cables, pump foundations, structural supports and all other support facilities. 5. Backfill as specified in Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork, all trenches and excavations below final grades or in fill areas. 6. Provide documentation of dewatering and observation well removal including the date of removal, well number, location, procedures, and materials used. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Measure the piezometric water levels to the nearest one-tenth foot in all observation wells and submit the readings daily. B. Measure the concentration of suspended material in the discharge water of each well once every two days. Wells which exceed the acceptable level of solids concentration shall be replaced. C. Test the performance of the standby system and all components by demonstrating that the system is operational at least every two weeks. D. Test the observation wells every two weeks by adding and removing water from the risers to demonstrate their proper functioning. E. Observation wells that become inoperable shall be immediately replaced while construction is halted if the Engineer determines that the observation well is critical. F. Remove and add riser pipe of each observation well located within the excavation as construction progresses until the well conflicts with the structure. When the conflict occurs, abandon the observation well, fill it with grout, and cut the riser off at grade. G. In the event of a dewatering system failure, take the following steps: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 19-7 1. Conduct in situ density tests conforming to ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167 immediately above an at the structure founding grades. 2. Remove all soils that show unacceptable density and replace them with compacted fill as indicated in Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork. 3. Test the repaired soils as required by the Owner and Engineer to verify that they have been returned to their original in situ state or better. 4. Repair or replace damaged structures. 3.04 TESTING A. All tests and inspections require the witnessing and written approval of the Owner and Engineer. B. Provide safe access for the Owner and Engineer to perform testing and inspection. C. The Owner and Engineer will provide oral and written notice to the Contractor for all tests and inspections that do not meet approval. D. Dewatering Well Test 1. Pump each well individually at its maximum or design flow and take a water sample using the following procedures: a. Obtain samples from stopcocks located along the discharge lines at points of high turbulence or between 4 and 8 o'clock on the perimeter of straight sections of pipe. b. Flush the stopcock for a few seconds before taking a sample. c. Take a 1 liter sample with the stopcock fully open. 2. Test the sample following the Sediment Test by Imhoff Cone for two to three minutes and measure the volume of settled materials to the nearest 0.01 milliliters (0.01 milliliters = 10 ppm). 3. All wells shall be evaluated as follows: a. Wells producing 10 ppm or less shall be accepted. b. Wells producing between 10 and 20 ppm may be accepted by the Engineer based on the evaluation of average ppm for all wells, ppm of adjacent wells, and total quantity of water which is actually pumped to dewater the excavation. c. Well producing more than 20 ppm shall be abandoned and backfilled. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 19-8 E. Observation Well Test 1. Test observation wells by adding or removing water from the riser to demonstrate their proper functioning. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Flowable Fill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 24-1 SECTION 31 23 24 FLOWABLE FILL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials and services, including pumping equipment and application, necessary for the manufacture, transportation and placement of all cementitious flowable fill as shown on the Contract Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer, except for the work specifically included under other items. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Division 03 - Concrete 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01, the Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Certifications of specification compliance for all sources of each material 3. Manufacturer’s data on all admixtures 4. Mix design and trial mix test results 5. Aggregate gradation 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a testing laboratory, with the qualifications required by Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete, and experienced in the design and testing of flowable fill materials and mixes, to perform material evaluation tests and to design mixes for flowable fill. A trial mix shall be performed to verify the flowable fill mix design. The trial mix shall also report slump, air content, yield, cement content, and dry unit weight per ASTM C143 and ASTM D6023. PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.01 CEMENTITIOUS FLOWABLE FILL A. Flowable fill (controlled low strength material) shall be a uniform mixture of sand, Type II Portland cement, fly ash, admixtures and water. The mix design shall produce a flowable Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Flowable Fill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 24-2 material with little or no bleed water, which produces a minimum compressive strength of 50 psi and maximum compressive strength of 100 psi at 56 days. The cured material shall be excavatable and have a maximum dry weight of 100 pounds per cubic foot. Slump of mix at the point of application shall be 7-inches to 10-inches. B. Admixtures specifically designed for flowable fill shall be used to improve flowability, reduce unit weight, control strength development, reduce settlement and reduce bleed water. Admixtures shall be Mastercell 25 by BASF Construction Chemicals; Darafill by Grace Construction Products; or approved equal. Cement and all other materials shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Fine Aggregate (Sand) shall consist of natural or manufactured siliceous sand, clean and free from deleterious substances, and graded within the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 3/8"100 No. 4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100 No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 10 to 30 No. 100*2 to 10 *For manufactured sand, the percent passing the No. 100 Sieve may be increased up to 20%. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Placement of Flowable Fill 1. Flowable fill shall be batched and premixed by an approved producer, dispensed from ready-mix trucks, and placed by approved methods and equipment. 2. Flowable fill shall be placed as needed to completely fill the space to receive it with no trapped air pockets or other voids. Positive means of allowing the air to escape shall be provided where necessary and after approval of the Engineer. Where placed against, around and inside existing structures, lift heights shall be limited so as not to overload the structure. The Engineer shall approve lift heights and procedures. Specific procedures and methods shall be included in the Contractor’s shop drawing submittals. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Flowable Fill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 24-3 3. Where flowable fill is placed around piping and other elements subject to floating within the fill space, positive means shall be taken to provide temporary balancing loads to prevent uplift or fill lift heights shall be limited to prevent uplift. 4. Application of loads or placement of other fill materials or concrete on top of flowable fill shall not occur until the flowable fill surface is determined to be suitable for loading per ASTM D6024 subject to the approval of the Engineer. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Trenching and Backfill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 33-1 SECTION 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, materials, and installation and compaction of trench backfill materials as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. B. All excavations shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Drawings or established by the Engineer. C. Erosion and Sediment Control shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 25 00 of these specifications. D. All backfill materials imported to the site and onsite materials to be reused as backfill shall be subjected to the testing requirements contained in Part 3.0 of this Section. The Owner shall retain a Materials Testing Consultant who shall perform all testing. The test results shall be used to determine if a material meets the requirements included herein. Furnish all necessary samples for laboratory testing and shall provide assistance and cooperation during field tests. The Contractor shall plan their operations to allow adequate time for laboratory tests and to permit taking of field density tests during compaction. E. Any costs for re-testing required as a result of failure to meet compaction requirements shall be borne solely by the Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 45 23 – Testing Services Furnished by Contractor C. Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete D. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork E. Section 31 05 19 – Geotextiles F. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Trenching and Backfill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 33-2 referenced Specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. Utah Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. ASTM C 127 – Standard Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate. b. ASTM C 136 – Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. c. ASTM C535 – Test for Resistance to Degradation of Large Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. d. ASTM D422 – Particle Size Analysis of Soils. e. ASTM D423 – Test for Liquid Limit of Soils. f. ASTM D424 – Test for Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils. g. ASTM D 698 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) h. ASTM D 1140 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Amount of Material Finer than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Soils by Washing i. ASTM D 1556 – Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand Cone Method. j. ASTM D 1557 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/lb3 (2,700 kN- m/m3)). k. ASTM D 1883 – Standard Test Method for California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of Laboratory-Compacted Soils. l. ASTM D2049 – Test Method for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils. m. ASTM D2167 – Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. n. ASTM D 2216 – Test for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Trenching and Backfill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 33-3 o. ASTM D 2487 – Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). p. ASTM D 4253 – Standard Test Method for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. q. ASTM D 4318 – Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. r. ASTM D 6913 - Standard Test Methods for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis s. ASTM D 6938 – Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature for marking tapes. 2. Catalog and manufacturer’s data sheets for compaction equipment. 3. Certified Gradation Analysis: Submit not less than 30 days prior to delivery for imported materials or anticipated use of excavated materials, except for trench stabilization material that will be submitted prior to material delivery to Site. 4. Sand Slurry and Sand Cement Slurry: Certified mix design and compressive strength test results (as applicable) include material types and weight per cubic yard for each component of mix. 5. Proposed bedding, haunching, and initial and intermediate backfill materials with sieve analyses and Sand Equivalent (SE) test results. 6. Marking Tape: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature. 7. Construction drawings and structural calculations for any types of excavation support required. Drawings and calculations shall be sealed by a currently registered Professional Engineer in the State of Utah. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MARKING TAPE A. Inert polyethylene with minimum thickness of 0.035-inches. B. Width: 12 inches Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Trenching and Backfill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 33-4 C. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 4-inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length with “CAUTION: WATER”. D. Jointing Clips: Tin or nickel coated furnished by tape manufacturer. E. Color: Blue. 2.02 BEDDING, HAUNCHING, AND INITIAL BACKFILL (PIPE ZONE) A. Material shall consist of well-graded clean sand or native material, with 100 percent passing the No. 4 sieve and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, as determined in accordance with ASTM D1140. B. Material shall be unfrozen, friable, and free of clay balls, organic material, and any other deleterious substances. C. Material shall have a minimum SE of 30 (SE30). D. If conditions prevent the bedding and haunching material from forming a firm and stable base, then ¾-inch rock shall be used for bedding and haunching, as approved by the Engineer. E. CLSM is to be used for pipe zone material where shown on plans. 2.03 TRENCH (INTERMEDIATE) BACKFILL A. Trench backfill can only be used with prior written approval from the Engineer, after review of sieve analysis and SE test results. B. Trench backfill material shall have a minimum SE of 30 with 100 percent passing a 1.5- inch sieve and less than 5 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. 2.04 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL A. Granular Backfill: 1. Clean gravel or crushed rock, reasonably well-graded from coarse to fine. 2. Maximum Particle Size: 3/4-inch. 2.05 SAND A. As specified for BEDDING, HAUNCHING, AND INITIAL BACKFILL. Native material is not an acceptable substitute. 2.06 EARTH FILL BACKFILL A. As specified in Section 31 00 01, Earthwork. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Trenching and Backfill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 33-5 2.07 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM) A. Mixture of Portland cement, fly ash, aggregate, water, and admixtures that produce a material of controlled density and a low compressive strength. B. Materials 1. Cement: Conforming to ASTM C150, Type II or III with total alkali content not more than 0.8 percent. 2. Water: Clean, potable water. 3. Fly Ash: Mix Design used for Trench Backfill: Class C in conformance with ASTM C618. 4. Aggregate Materials: Densely graded rock conforming to the following gradation: Sieve Size Percentage Passing 1”100 NO. 8 50-100 NO. 200 0-5 5. Air Entrainment: 15% to 30% 6. Maximum compressive strength = 100psi @ 28 days 2.08 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT A. Class B concrete as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.09 FILTER FABRIC A. As specified in 31 05 19, Geotextiles. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform gradation analysis in accordance with ASTM C136 for: 1. Bedding, Haunching and Initial Backfill 2. Trench (Intermediate) Backfill 3. Sand B. Certify Laboratory Performance of Mix Designs: 1. Sand Cement Slurry Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Trenching and Backfill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 33-6 2. Concrete PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCH PREPARATION A. Water Control: 1. As specified in Section 31 00 01, Earthwork. 2. Remove water in a manner that minimizes soil erosion from trench sides and bottom. 3. Provide continuous water control until trench backfill is complete. B. Remove foreign material and backfill contaminated with foreign material that falls into trench. 3.02 TRENCH BOTTOM A. Firm Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed material, and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth. Allow space for bedding material as shown in design details. B. Soft Subgrade: If subgrade is encountered that may require removal to prevent pipe settlement, notify Engineer. Engineer will determine depth of over excavation and use of Trench Stabilization Material, if any required. 3.03 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. Rebuild trench bottom with trench stabilization material and filter fabric as shown in design details. B. Place material over full width of trench in 6-inch lifts to required grade, providing allowance for bedding thickness. C. Compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding support for bedding material prior to placing succeeding lifts. 3.04 BEDDING A. Furnish imported Bedding, Haunching, and Initial Backfill material as specified herein. B. Bedding shall extend from the bottom of the excavated trench, or top of Trench Stabilization material to the bottom of the pipe. C. Place over full width of prepared trench bottom in two equal lifts when required depth exceeds 8 inches. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Trenching and Backfill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 33-7 D. Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface. E. Check grade and correct irregularities in material. Loosen top 1 to 2 inches of compacted material with rake or by other means to provide a cushion before laying each section of pipe or conduit. F. Install to form continuous and uniform support except at bell holes or minor disturbances resulting from removal of lifting tackle. G. Bell or Coupling Holes: Excavate bedding at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of joint and to provide uniform bearing along barrel of pipe or conduit. Pipe shall not bear on bells, couplings, or joints. 3.05 HAUNCHING AND INITIAL BACKFILL (PIPE ZONE) A. Pipe Zone extends from the top of the Bedding to 12-inches above the top of the pipe. B. Backfill around the pipe and to the upper limit of pipe zone shall consist of Bedding, Haunching, and Initial backfill as specified herein. C. Restrain pipe as necessary to prevent their movement during backfill operations. Method used to restrain pipe, if required, shall not damage pipe or fittings in any way and shall allow clearance from trench walls as required by design details. D. Place material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of pipe, and if applicable, between pipes and conduit installed in the same trench. The first lift shall be less than or equal to 1/2 pipe diameter. E. Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld tamping bars supplemented by “walking in” and slicing material under haunches with a shovel, taking care not to damage pipe bagging, to ensure voids are completely filled before placing each succeeding lift. F. Concrete Encasement 1. Provide a plastic bod breaker around the pipe, isolating the pipe from contact with the slurry. 2. Reinforcing steel shall be placed and tied prior to placement of concrete. 3. Discharge from truck mounted drum type mixer into trench. Distance of fall from mixer truck to trench shall not exceed 5 feet. 4. Place in lifts as necessary to prevent uplift (floatation) of new and existing facilities and in accordance with Section 31 00 01, Earthwork. 5. Do not place Trench Backfill until surface water of concrete is absorbed and the slurry is firm and stable. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Trenching and Backfill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 33-8 6. Compaction of Trench Backfill or road section materials shall not begin until concrete has set and can provide a firm and stable base for the compaction method used. G. CLSM Backfill 1. Discharge from truck mounted drum type mixer into trench. Distance of fall from mixer truck to trench shall not exceed 5 feet. 2. Place in lifts as necessary to prevent uplift (floatation) of new and existing facilities. 3. Do not place Trench Backfill until surface water of slurry is absorbed and the slurry is firm and stable. 4. Compaction of Trench Backfill or road section materials shall not begin until slurry backfill has set and can provide a firm and stable base for the compaction method used. 3.06 MARKING TAPE INSTALLATION A. Continuously install marking tape along centerline of buried piping and conduit at a depth of 18 inches below the surface as shown on Drawings. 3.07 TRENCH (INTERMEDIATE) BACKFILL A. Backfill above the pipe zone shall extend to the bottom of the required road structural section. B. Compaction as specified in Section 31 00 01, Earthwork. C. Adjust moisture content as necessary to obtain specified compaction. D. Do not allow backfill to free fall into trench or allow heavy, sharp pieces of material to be placed as backfill until after at least 2 feet of backfill has been provided over top of pipe. E. Do not use power driven impact type compactors for compaction until at least 2 feet of backfill is placed over top of pipe. F. Backfill to grade with proper allowances for topsoil, crushed rock surfacing, and pavement thicknesses, wherever applicable. G. Backfill around structures with same class backfill as specified for adjacent trench, unless otherwise shown or specified. H. Place in lifts not exceeding thickness of 6 inches. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Trenching and Backfill Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 23 33-9 3.08 MAINTENANCE OF TRENCH BACKFILL A. In paved areas, after each section of trench is backfilled, provide temporary asphalt concrete, thickness of which shall match existing asphalt or provide anchored trench plates. On arterial streets, the trench plates shall be recessed such that it is even with the adjacent surface and provides a smooth transition from the existing street surface across the trench plate. B. In paved areas, a maximum of 30 feet of open trench is acceptable at the end of each working day, provided trench plates are installed as specified herein. 3.09 SETTLEMENT OF BACKFILL A. Settlement of trench backfill, or of fill, will be considered a result of defective compaction of trench backfill. Contractor will be responsible for removal, replacement, and recompacting of backfill and replacement of pavement at no cost to the Owner. 3.10 TESTING A. As specified in Section 31 00 01, Earthwork. B. Testing responsibility as specified in Section 01 45 23, Testing Services Furnished by Contractor. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-1 SECTION 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor is responsible for implementing Best Management Practices (BMPs) to prevent and minimize erosion and resultant sedimentation in all cleared and grubbed areas during and after construction. This item covers the work necessary for the installation of structures and measures for the prevention of soil erosion and control of sedimentation. The Contractor shall furnish all material, labor and equipment necessary for the proper installation, maintenance, inspection, monitoring, reporting, and removal (where applicable) of erosion prevention and sediment control measures and, if applicable, to cause compliance with all local permits and the State of Utah Statewide Construction General Permit and Utah Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (UPDES) Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) to discharge stormwater under the National Pollution Discharge Elimination System for Construction Activities (NPDES) for any land disturbance or construction activity of one (1) acre or more under this section. Contractor shall be responsible for preparing a SWPPP for the project. B. Any land disturbance as the result of modifications to a site’s drainage features or topography requires protection from erosion and sedimentation. C. All excavations shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Contract Drawings or established by the Engineer. D. It is the intent of this Specification that the Contractor conducts the construction activities in such a manner that erosion of disturbed areas and offsite sedimentation be absolutely minimized. E. All work under this Contract shall be done in conformance with and subject to the limitations of the General Permit for Discharges from Construction Activities (UPDES Permit Number UTRC00000) and Cottonwood Heights City Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). F. The angle of graded slopes and fills shall be no greater than the angle that can be retained by vegetative cover or other adequate erosion -control devices or structures. G. Due to the nature of the work required by this Contract, it is anticipated that the location and nature of the erosion and sediment control devices will be adjusted on several occasions to reflect the current phase of construction. The construction schedule adopted by the Contractor will impact the placement and need for specific devices required for the control of erosion. The Contractor shall develop and implement such additional techniques as may be required to minimize erosion and off -site sedimentation. The location and extent of erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be revised at Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-2 each phase of construction that results in a change in either the quantity or direction of surface runoff from constructed areas. All deviations from the erosion and sedimentation control provisions shown on the Contract Drawings shall have the prior acceptance of the Engineer and shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner. H. Erosion and sedimentation controls applicable to this project shall be as specified herein and as detailed in the Cottonwood Heights City Storm Water Management Plan. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 31 10 00 – Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation C. Section 31 23 19 – Dewatering D. Section 31 00 10 – Earthwork E. Section 31 05 19 – Geotextiles F. Section 32 11 00 – Surface Restoration G. Section 32 90 00 – Final Grading and Landscaping 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these specifications, all work hereunder shall conform to the applicable requirements of the referenced portions of the following documents, to the extent that the requirements therein are not in con flict with the provisions of this Section. 1. Utah Pollutant Discharge Elimination System - General Permit for Storm Water Discharges from Construction Activities 2. Cottonwood Heights City Storm Water Management Plan 2020 -2025, or latest edition B. See Specification Section 01 42 00 – References. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to the start of the work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a SWPPP for implementing the temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures in accordance with the Utah Statewide Construction General Permit. Construction work shall not commence until the schedule of work and the methods of operations have been reviewed and approved. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-3 B. The Contractor shall perform inspections of erosion and sedimentation control measures and stormwater discharge outfalls and prepare inspection reports as described in Part 3 of this Section. Copies of the inspection reports shall be submitted to the Engin eer on a monthly basis. C. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions Division 1 and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Name and location of all material suppliers. 2. Certificate of compliance with the standards specified above for each source of each material. 3. List of disposal sites for waste and unsuitable materials and evidence of all required permits for use of those sites. 1.05 WARRANTY A. All restoration and re-vegetation work shall be subject to the one -year guarantee period of the Contract as specified in the General Conditions. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Land disturbance activities are not authorized to begin until after all required erosion and sediment control permits are obtained from the United States, the State of Utah, and local authorities, as necessary. Contractor is the Primary Permittee and Operator under the provisions of the Utah Statewide Construction General Permit. As such, the Contractor will be required to sign certain certifications as described in the NPDES Permit and provide a SWPPP prepared by a Utah Registered SWPPP Writer (RSW) or other “qualified” preparer, as defined by the Utah Statewide Construction General Permit. Contractor shall comply with requirements specified in the Contract Documents, on the approved Erosion Control Plan, and by the Engineer. Contractor shall also comply with all other laws, rules, regulations, ordinances and requirements concerning soil erosion and sediment control established in the United States, the State of Utah and local authorities as applicable. The following documents and the documents referenced therein define the regulatory requirements for this Section. 1. Utah Statewide Construction General Permit to discharge stormwater under the NPDES permit for Construction Activities governs land disturbance or construction activities of one (1) acre or more. On applicable sites, Contractor is responsible for complying with terms and conditions of this permit. 2. Contractor shall follow Practices and Standards of the Cottonwood Heights City Storm Water Management Plan, latest edition. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-4 B. During the period beginning on the effective date of the permit and lasting until expiration, the Permittee is authorized to discharge stormwater associated with construction activity including clearing, grading and excavation activities resulting in the disturbance of land and related support activities. Such discharges shall be controlled, limited, and monitored as specified below. 1. The Contractor, as Primary Permittee and Operator under the provisions of the NPDES Permit, shall submit a plan for compliance with the Owner-provided approved erosion and sedimentation control plan to the Engineer for approval. Plans must include designation of where 7 and 14-day ground stabilization requirements and where basins which comply with surface -withdrawal requirements of the NPDES permit, if applicable, are located. Land disturbing activity shall not commence until the plan is approved by the En gineer. Maintain an up-to-date copy of the approved plan on the site. 2. Implement the approved plan. Deviation from the plan is allowed only to correct emergency situations of sediment discharge offsite or when minor modifications are made to improve performance of the measures and the approval authority has been notified. Note allowed deviations on the plan maintained on the site. 3. Manage onsite activities such that no adverse impacts to water quality occur from site activities or allowed discharges. The following activities, and others on a site- specific basis, require oversight throughout the construction and development process to assure that all water quality standards are protected. a. Equipment Operation and Maintenance: Equipment utilized during the construction activity on a site must be operated and maintained in such a manner as to prevent the potential or actual pollution of the surface or ground waters of the State. Fuels, lubrica nts, coolants, and hydraulic fluids, or any other petroleum products, shall not be discharged onto the ground or into surface waters. Spent fluids shall be disposed of in a manner so as not to enter the waters, surface, or ground, of the State and in accordance with applicable state and federal disposal regulations. Any spilled fluids shall be cleaned up to the extent practicable and disposed of in a manner so as not to allow their entry into the waters, surface, or ground, of the State. b. Material Handling: Herbicide, pesticide, and fertilizer usage during the construction activity shall be consistent with the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act and shall be in accordance with label restrictions. c. Building Material Waste Handling: All wastes composed of building materials shall be disposed of in accordance with Utah Statewide Construction General Permit. In particular, the following guidelines shall be followed: 1) No paint or liquid wastes in streams or storm drains. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-5 2) Dedicated area for demolition, construction, and other wastes must be located a minimum of 50’ from storm drains and streams unless no reasonable alternatives are available. 3) Earthen-material stockpiles must be located a minimum of 50’ from storm drains and streams unless no reasonable alternatives are available. 4) Concrete materials onsite, including excess concrete, must be controlled to avoid contact with surface waters, wetlands, or buffers. (Note that discharges from onsite concrete plants may require coverage under a separate NPDES permit). d. Litter and Sanitary Waste: The Permittee shall control the management and disposal of litter and sanitary waste from the site. C. Violations and Fines 1. Contractor shall be responsible for reimbursing the Owner for any fines incurred as a result of violations to Utah Statewide Construction General Permit, the NPDES General Permit for Stormwater Discharges on Construction Sites, and any applicable delegated local program’s sediment control regulations until construction activities are complete and the project is accepted by the Owner. These include fines levied by State of Utah and delegated local programs. 2. If violations result in the issuance of a Notice of Violation, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Notice within the specified time period for compliance. Failure to comply could result in the assessment of a penalty for each day of the continuing violation, beginning with the date of the violation. 3. Violations may result in civil and/or criminal penalties which include fines and imprisonment. PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials for use in erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be in accordance with the Cottonwood Heights City Storm Water Management Plan and the AASHTO Construction Stormwater Field Guide . B. All erosion and sediment control b id prices shall include all excavation, grading, maintenance, legal sediment disposal, permits and all other work and appurtenances necessary to design, install and maintain the sediment and erosion control measures as detailed herein and in accordance with the Cottonwood Heights City Storm Water Management Plan and the AASHTO Construction Stormwater Field Guide. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-6 2.02 SILT FENCE A. Silt (or sediment) fence shall be constructed as shown on the Contract Drawings, at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. Silt fences shall be installed below small, disturbed areas that are less than ¼ acre, 100-feet of silt fence per 10,000 square feet of disturbed soil area . Silt fence shall not be installed across streams, ditches, or waterways or other areas of concentrated flows. Posts for silt fence shall be installed a maximum of 8 feet apart with at least 18 inches in the ground. If not possible to achieve depth, secure post to prevent overturning. B. Silt fence shall be a woven geotextile filter fabric made specifically for sediment control. Filter fabric shall not rot when buried and shall resist attack from soil chemicals, alkalines and acids in the pH range from 2 to 13 and shall resist damage due to prolonged ultraviolet exposure. Filter fabric shall be C-50NW as manufactured by Contech Earth Stabilization Solutions, GT 142 as manufactured by SKAPS Industries, Soiltex ST 120N as manufactured by Geo-Synthetics, Inc., or approved equal. The cost of silt fence shall include the materials, excavation, backfill, aggregate, etc. and all maintenance and restoration activities required. C. Silt fence shall be stable for the 10-year peak storm runoff. Fabric shall meet the following specifications: Temporary Silt Fence Material Property Requirements Test Material Units Supported1 Silt Fence Un-Supported1 Silt Fence Type of Value Grab Strength ASTM D 4632 N (lbs) Machine Direction 400 550 MARV (90) (90) x-Machine Direction 400 450 MARV (90) (90) Permittivity2 ASTM D 4491 sec-1 0.05 0.05 MARV Apparent Opening Size 2 ASTM D 4751 mm 0.60 0.60 Max. ARV3 (US Sieve #) (30) (30) Ultraviolet Stability ASTM D 4355 % Retained Strength 70% after 500 hours exposure 70% after 500 hours exposure Typical Notes: 1 Silt Fence support shall consist of 14 gage steel wire with a mesh spacing of 150 mm (6 inches), or prefabricated polymer mesh of equivalent strength. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-7 2 These default values are based on empirical evidence with a variety of sediment. For environmentally sensitive areas, a review of previous experience and/or site or regionally specific geotextile tests in accordance with Test Method D 5141 should be performed by the agency to confirm suitability of these requirements. 3 As measured in accordance with Test Method D 4632. D. The synthetic filter fabric shall consist of at least 95% by weight of polyolefins or polyester, certified by the manufacturer. E. The posts for silt fences shall be 1.33 lb/linear feet steel with a minimum length of 5 feet; posts shall have projections to facilitate fastening of the fabric. F. For reinforcement of standard strength filter fabric use wire fence with a minimum 14 gauge and a maximum mesh spacing of 6 inches. G. Remove sediment before deposit reaches ½ of the height of the silt fence. 2.03 STONE FOR EROSION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall place stone for erosion control as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. The stone for erosion control shall consist of field stone or rough un-hewn quarry stone. The stone shall be sound, tough, dense, and resistant to the action of air and water. The stone for erosion control shall be 2” to 4” course aggregate unless otherwise noted or approved . B. Stone for erosion control shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. The cost for stone for erosion control shall include furnishing, weighing, stockpiling, re-handling, placing and maintaining stone; disposal of any stone not incorporated into the project if directed by the Engineer; and any other incidentals necessary to complete the work. 2.04 RIP RAP A. The Contractor shall place rip rap as shown on the Contract Drawings . The stone for rip rap shall consist of field stone or rough un -hewn quarry stone. The rip rap shall be sound, tough, dense, and resistant to the action of air and water. Neither the width nor thickness of individual stones shall be less than one third their length. B. Rip rap shall be designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with Part 3.0 of this Section. The cost for rip rap shall include furnishing, weighing, stockpiling, rehandling, placing, and maintaining rip rap; disposal of any rip rap not incorporated into the project if directed by the Engineer; and any other incidentals necessary to complete the work. 2.05 ROLLED EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS (RECP) A. RECPs, including Turf Reinforcement Mat (TRM), shall be installed as shown on the Contract Drawings, at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. RECPs should be utilized to aid stabilization of slopes greater than 2:1 and with more than 10 feet of vertical relief. RECPs should also be used when mulch cannot be Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-8 adequately tacked and where immediate ground cover is required to prevent erosion damage. Examples of RECPs are blankets, nets, and matting. B. RECPs shall be designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with Part 3.0 of this Section. The cost for RECPs shall include all excavation, grading, and materials, and all maintenance activities. C. RECPs shall be used to aid in permanent stabilization of vegetated channels where runoff velocity will exceed 2 feet/second on bare earth during the 2 -year rainfall event that produces peak runoff. D. Typically, nets shall be used in conjunction with mulch; the use of mulch is typically not required with excelsior, woven straw blankets and coir blankets. E. The recommended anchoring devices are 12-inch minimum length wooden stakes, 11- gauge staples that are at least 6 inches long by 1 inch wide, or rigid, biodegradable stakes of a minimum of 6 inches in length. If Manufacturer’s recommendations are more stringent, they shall supersede. F. The minimum bare soil shear stress values for specific RECPs are as follows: 1. Straw with net temporary RECP shall be North American Green S150, American Excelsior Co. Curlex I, Contech SFB1, or equal with a minimum bare soil shear stress value of 1.5 lb/ft2. 2. Curled wood or coconut fiber RECP shall be American Excelsior Curlex II, North American Green C125, Contech EFB4 or equal matting with a minimum bare soil shear stress value of 2.0 lb/ft2. 3. Synthetic Turf Reinforcement Mat (TRM) shall be Enkamat 7020 as manufactured by Colbond Geosynthetics, Synthetic Industries Landlock Erosion Mat TRM 1060, TH8 as manufactured by TC Mirafi, or equal matting with a minimum long -term vegetated shear stress value of 5.0 lb/ft2. 2.06 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT DIVERSIONS A. Temporary diversions shall be constructed as shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. Permanent diversions shall be constructed as shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. Temporary diversions shall be constructed adjacent to disturbed areas to collect surface runoff from disturbed areas and direct the runoff to sediment basins or to divert non -sediment laden runoff away from undisturbed areas and/or sediment basins. All temporary diversions transporting sediment -laden runoff shall terminate in a sediment trapping device. Permanent diversions should be planned as a part of initial site development and should be coordinated with temporary diversions. All temporary and permanent diversions shall be stabilized with vegetation or other means within 7 days of installation. Permanent diversions shall be used to divert Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-9 water to locations where it can be used or released without erosion or flood damage. Dimensions shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Temporary diversions shall be designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with Part 3.0 of this Section, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, until the site has been stabilized. The cost of temporary and permanent diversions shall include the excavation, grading, materials, etc. and all maintenance and restoration activities required. 2.07 TEMPORARY SLOPE DRAINS A. Temporary slope drains shall be constructed as shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer. Temporary slope drains are used to convey concentrated runoff down the face of a slope without causing erosion and are generally used in conjunction with temporary diversions. The pipe shall be heavy-duty flexible material such as non-perforated, corrugated plastic pipe or specially designed flexible tubing. B. Temporary slope drains shall be maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer until the site has been stabilized. The cost of the temporary slope drains shall include the piping, earthwork, stone for erosion control, and all maintenance activities required. 2.08 TEMPORARY GRAVEL CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES/EXITS A. Temporary gravel construction entrances/exits shall be located at points where vehicles enter and leave a construction site and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. B. Temporary gravel construction entrances/exits shall be constructed with a minimum 6- inch layer of 2 – 3 inch washed stone placed over a stable foundation and shall be a minimum of 100 feet in length and 25 feet in width. Geotextile fabric shall be used under stone as shown on the Contract Drawings. C. Temporary gravel construction entrances/exits shall be maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section to the satisfaction of the Engineer, until the site has been stabilized. The cost of temporary gravel construction entrances/exits shall include the materials and all maintenance activities required, including additional tire washing as may be necessary. 2.09 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT STABILIZATION OF DISTURBED AREAS A. Temporary and permanent stabilization of disturbed areas will be provided at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. The Contractor shall provide ground cover adequate to restrain erosion on disturbed areas that will be left un -worked for periods exceeding 7 to 14 days, as noted in Section 1.01 of this specification. B. Seed mixtures and sod shall be selected based on site location and seasonal recommendations outlined in Section 32 90 00, Final Grading and Landscaping. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-10 C. Temporary soil stabilizer shall consist of an especially prepared highly concentrated powder which, when mixed with water, forms a thick liquid such as "Enviroseal 2001" by Enviroseal Corporation, "Terra Control" by Quattro Environmental, Inc., or "CHEM - CRETE ECO-110” by International CHEM-CRETE Corporation, and having no growth or germination inhibiting factors. The agent shall be used for hydroseeding grass seed in combination with other approved amendments resulting in a highly viscous slurry which, when sprayed directly on the soil, forms a gelatinous crust. D. Temporary and permanent stabilization of disturbed areas shall be achieved in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. The cost of temporary and permanent stabilization of disturbed areas shall include all grading, excavation and materials as well as all reseeding and other maintenance activities required until stabilization is achieved. 2.10 CHECK DAMS AND CHECK DAMS WITH WEIRS A. Check dams and check dams with weirs shall be constructed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. B. Check dams and check dams with weirs shall not be constructed in an intermittent or perennial stream. The drainage area for any one check dam or check dam with weir shall be limited to ½ acre. C. Dimensions shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. Check dams shall be constructed of stone or riprap with filter fabric, fiber filtration tubes, or sediment logs, as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Check dams with weirs shall be constructed of stone or riprap with filter fabric. Material specifications for stone, riprap, fiber filtration tubes, and sediment logs appear herein. If Manufacturer’s recommendations are more stringent, they shall supersede. Filter fabric shall be Type II Separator Geotextile, as specified in Section 31 05 19 – Geotextiles. D. Check dams shall be designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with Part 3.0 of this Section. The cost of check dams and check dams with weirs shall include all excavation, grading and materials as well as all maintenance activities required. 2.11 INLET EROSION CONTROL MEASURES A. Yard, curb, and other Inlet Erosion Control Measures shall be constructed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. Inlet erosion control measures shall be used to prevent or limit the introduction of sediment to storm drain systems and allow early use of the of the storm drainage system. Maximum drainage areas for inlet erosion control measures vary from 1 acre for excavated drop inlet protection, hardware & cloth gravel inlet protection, and block and gravel inlet protection to more than 5 acres for rock pipe inlet protection. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-11 B. Materials for Inlet Erosion Control Measures consist of silt fence, riprap, stone (gravel), rigid plastic barriers, and sediment filter bags . Riprap and stone for erosion control shall be as specified herein. C. Inlet Erosion Control Measures shall be designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. The cost of inlet erosion control measures shall include all excavation, grading and materials as well as all maintenance activities required. 2.12 FIBER ROLLS A. Fiber rolls shall be installed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings, at other locations indicated by the Engineer, and as specified herein. B. Fiber rolls shall consist of composite wood fibers and man -made fibers, with or without performance-enhancing polymers, encased with cylindrical tubes composed of a heavy- duty, knitted, high density polyethylene mesh. The photodegradable mesh shall be oriented in a diamond or hexagonal pattern and shall move freely at all knitted yarn intersections. C. Sediment logs shall consist of natural fibers (wood, coconut, etc.) inside heavy duty knitted cylindrical tubing. D. Fiber rolls shall be designed, installed, and maintained as specified herein. If Manufacturer’s recommendations are more stringent, they shall supersede. The cost of fiber rolls shall include all excavation, grading and materials as well as all maintenance activities required. 2.13 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT CHANNELS A. Temporary and permanent channels shall be installed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer. Temporary and permanent channels shall be used to convey concentrated runoff without damage from erosion, deposition or flooding. B. Temporary and permanent channels shall be designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. The cost of all temporary and permanent channels shall include all excavation, grading and materials as well as all maintenance activities required. 2.14 TEMPORARY SEDIMENT TRAPS, SEDIMENT BASINS, AND SKIMMER SEDIMENT BASINS A. Temporary sediment traps shall be constructed as shown on the Contract Drawings, at the termination of all temporary diversions diverting sediment laden runoff, and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. These temporary measures shall not be constructed within an intermittent or perennial stream and shall be installed prior to any land disturbance activities within the drainage area. Temporary sediment Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-12 traps shall be constructed by excavating the appropriate size rectangular basin and constructing a rock-fill dam on the discharge end. Where specific elevations are not indicated on the Contract Drawings, Contractor shall maintain basins at the depths shown below working grades. B. Sediment basins shall be installed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. Skimmer sediment basins shall be installed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. Sediment basins and skimmer sediment basins shall be used where drainage areas are too large for temporary sediment traps. Outlet structures must withdraw from basin surface unless drainage area is less than 1 acre. They shall retain sediment on the site and prevent off site sediment in waterways, and they shall not be located in intermittent or perennial streams. Sediment basins and skimmer sediment basins shall be installed prior to any land disturbance activities within the drainage area. C. Porous baffles shall be installed in temporary sediment traps, sediment basins, and skimmer sediment basins as shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. Porous baffles are used to reduce the velocity and turbulence of the water flowing through the structure and to facilitate the settling of sediment in the water before discharge. They effectively spread the flow across the entire width of a structure. D. Material used for porous baffles shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Typical materials include silt fence, coir erosion blanket, coir mesh, and tree protection fence. Other materials may be used as noted on the Contract Drawings and indicated by the Engineer. E. The structure life for temporary sediment traps shall be limited to 2 years. Temporary sediment traps shall be spaced to limit the maximum tributary drainage area to 5 acres. The basin life of sediment basins and skimmer sediment basins shall be limited to 3 years unless they are designed as permanent structures. The drainage area for sediment basins and skimmer sediment basins shall be limited to 100 acres. F. The principal spillway for sediment basins shall consist of a riser and barrel. Ensure that the pipe is capable of withstanding the maximum expected load without yielding, buckling, or cracking. The basin should be provided with a skimmer or flashboard riser to dewater the basin from the water surface. The emergency spillway shall be constructed in undisturbed soil. The principal spillway outlet and emergency spillway shall be stabilized as shown on the Contract Drawings. Materials shall be as noted on the Contract Drawings. G. The principal spillway for skimmer sediment basins shall consist of a skimmer which dewaters the basin from the top of the water surface at a controlled rate. A dewatering rate of 24 to 72 hours is required. The skimmer outlet pipe shall be capable of withstanding the maximum expected load without yielding, buckling, or cracking. The emergency spillway shall be constructed in undisturbed soil whenever possible and shall Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-13 be lined with impermeable geotextile fabric in accordance with Section 02274 – Geotextiles. The principal spillway outlet and emergency spillway shall be stabilized as shown on the Contract Drawings. H. Temporary sediment traps shall be designed, constructed and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, until the sediment producing areas have been permanently stabilized. The cost of the temporary sediment traps shall include the excavation, grading, fill, baffles, stone for erosion control, washed stone, geotextile, etc. and all maintenance activities required. I. Sediment basins shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. Skimmer sediment basins shall be designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. The cost of sediment basins and skimmer sediment basins shall include all excavation, grading and materials as well as all maintenance activities required. J. Porous baffles shall be designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. The cost of porous baffles shall include all excavation, grading and materials as well as all maintenance activities required. 2.15 OUTLET STABILIZATION STRUCTURE A. Outlet stabilization structures shall be constructed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. These structures shall be used where the discharge velocity of the upstream water conveyance structure exceeds the permissible velocity of the receiving channel or disposal area. B. Structures shall be sized for a capacity equivalent to a 10 -year, peak runoff or design discharge of the water conveyance structure, whichever is greater. Riprap materials shall be as specified on the Contract Drawings. Filter fabric shall be Type II Separator Geotextile, as specified in Section 31 11 00 – Geotextiles. C. Outlet stabilization structures shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. The cost of outlet stabilization structures shall include all excavation, grading and materials as well as all maintenance activities required. 2.16 FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM A. Flexible growth medium shall be applied at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings, at other locations indicated by the Engineer, and as specified herein. B. Flexible growth medium is a spray-on flexible blanket that controls soil erosion and accelerates seed germination for establishment of vegetation. It is made of wood fibers, man-made fibers, and additives that are applied wet to the prepared surface. The flexible growth medium may be mixed with seed and fertilizer prior to application. Seed and Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-14 fertilizer rates shall comply with applicable stabilization of disturbed area requirements of this Section. C. Flexible growth medium shall not be used in areas of concentrated flow unless installed in conjunction with a RECP or TRM. D. Flexible growth medium shall be installed and maintained in accordance with Part 3 .0 of this Section. If Manufacturer’s recommendations are more stringent, they shall supersede. The cost of flexible growth medium shall include all materials as well as all maintenance activities required. 2.17 TREE PROTECTION FENCE A. Tree protection fence shall be installed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein. B. Tree protection fence shall be used to protect trees and their root zones during construction. Tree protection fence shall be brightly colored, UV-resistant poly barricade fabric. Signs designating the area as protected shall be installed on all sides of the fence. Wording and spacing of the signage shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings. C. Tree protection fence shall be installed and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. The cost of tree protection fence shall include all materials as well as all maintenance activities required. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All installation and maintenance shall be conducted in accordance with this specification , the Cottonwood Heights City SWPPP, and the AASHTO Construction Stormwater Field Guide. In the event of a discrepancy, the more stringent requirements shall take precedence. B. If applicable, all requirements of the NPDES Permit shall be followed. In the event of a discrepancy between this specification and the NPDES Permit requirements, the more stringent requirements shall take precedence. C. If possible, erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be established prior to clearing operations in a given area. Where such practice is not feasible, the erosion and sedimentation control device(s) shall be established concurrent with the clearing operations or immediately following completion of the clearing operations. D. The Contractor shall furnish the labor, materials and equipment required for routine maintenance of all erosion and sedimentation control devices. At a minimum, maintenance shall be scheduled as required for a particular device to maintain the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-15 removal efficiency and intent of the device. Maintenance shall include but not be limited to 1) the removal and satisfactory, legal disposal of accumulated sediment from traps or silt barriers and 2) replacement of filter fabrics used for silt fences and s tone impaired by sediment in stone filters, gravel construction entrances, etc. Maintenance as noted in items 1) and 2) above shall be performed as required, and at least once every three (3) months for the duration of construction activities. Sediment rem oved from erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be disposed of in locations that will not result in off - site sedimentation as acceptable to the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. If no suitable on-site locations are available, all such sediment will be legally disposed of off site, at no additional cost to the Owner. E. All storm sewer piping shall be blocked at the end of every working day until the inlet is constructed above grade. F. All streets around the construction area shall be scraped as necessary to prevent accumulation of dirt and debris. G. The Contractor shall provide adequate means to prevent any sediment from entering any storm drains, curb inlets (curb inlet filter box), ditches, streams, or bodies of water downstream of any area disturbed by construction. Excavation materials shall be pl aced upstream of any trench or other excavation to prevent sedimentation of offsite areas. Silt fence will be provided, at no additional cost to the Owner, around excavation materials if deemed necessary by the Engineer. In areas where a natural buffer are a exists between the work area and the closest stream or water course, this area shall not be disturbed. H. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to place any additional sediment and erosion control devices at other locations not shown on the Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. SILT FENCE 1. Silt fence shall be erected at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer . Silt fence shall be erected and maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer until a vegetative ground cover has been established. Replacement of the filter fabric and its associated appurtenances, if required by the Engineer, will be at the Contractor's expense. 2. Silt fence shall not be installed across streams, ditches, waterways, or other areas of concentrated flow. Silt fence shall be placed at least 6 feet beyond the toe of slope of any embankment or stockpile area to allow space for ponding and maintenance access. 3. Dig a trench approximately 6 inches deep and 6 inches wide and place the fabric in the bottom of the excavated ditch or use the slicing method to insert the fabric into a cut sliced in the ground with a disc. Ensure that the height of the sediment fence does not exceed 24 inches above the ground surfa ce. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-16 4. Install posts 4 feet apart in critical areas and 6 feet apart on standard applications when extra strength filter fabric is used. When wire mesh support is used, posts shall be installed a maximum of 6 feet apart. Install posts minimum 18 inches deep on the downstream side of the silt fence, as close as possible to the fabric. 5. Joints should be avoided along the fencing. When joints are necessary, securely fasten the filter cloth only at a support post with 4 feet minimum overlap to the next post. 6. Compaction is vitally important for effective results. Compact the soil immediately next to the silt fence fabric with the front wheel of the tractor, skid steer or roller exerting at least 60 pounds per square inch. Compact the upstream side first and then each side twice for a total of 4 trips. 7. Stabilized outlets for silt fence shall be provided at locations shown on the Contract Drawings. The outlet section shall have a maximum width of 4 feet. The height of silt fence at the outlet shall be a maximum of 1 foot. A 5-foot x 5-foot (minimum) apron of #57 washed stone shall be provided on the downstream side of the silt fence outlet. 8. Silt fence shall be erected around all catch basins which are located downstream from any construction work unless other inlet protection is specified. Should any catch basins be indicated to be relocated or modified, silt fence shall be utilized until work is completed on the catch basins. Upon completion of the modification, the area shall be rough graded, as shown on the Contract Drawings, until the end of the project, at which time final grading shall occur. 9. Inspect silt fence at least once a week and after each rainfall event. Make any required repairs immediately. 10. Should the fabric of any silt fence collapse, tear, decompose or become ineffective, replace it promptly. All fabric shall be replaced after the first 6 months of construction activity and every 6 months thereafter until construction activities are complete, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 11. Remove sediment deposits as necessary to provide adequate storage volume for the next rain and to reduce pressure on the fence. Take care to avoid undermining the fence during cleanout. 12. Remove all fencing materials and unstable sediment deposits and bring the area to grade and stabilize it after the contributing drainage area has been properly stabilized. Removal of any silt fence shall be permitted only with the prior approval of the Engineer or the local governing agency. B. STONE FOR EROSION CONTROL Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-17 1. Stone for erosion control shall be dumped and placed in such manner that the larger rock fragments are uniformly distributed throughout the rock mass and the smaller fragments fill the voids between the larger fragments. Rearranging of individual stones by equipment or by hand shall only be required to the extent necessary to secure the results specified above, to protect structures from damage when rock material is placed against the structures, or to protect the underlyi ng Separator Geotextile from damage during installation. 2. Inspect at least weekly and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than 1 inch of rain per 24-hour period. Remove accumulated sediment and replace stone impaired by sediment as necessary. C. RIPRAP 1. Riprap shall be graded so that the smaller stones are uniformly distributed through the mass. The Contractor may place the stone by mechanical methods, augmented by hand placing where necessary or ordered by the Engineer. The placed riprap shall form a properly graded, dense, neat layer of stone. The placed riprap shall have a minimum depth of 24 inches unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. Type II Separator Geotextile, as specified in Section 31 05 19 – Geotextiles, shall be used under all riprap unless otherwise noted. 2. Inspect periodically for scour or dislodged stones. Control of weed and brush growth may be needed. D. ROLLED EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS (RECP) 1. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to place RECPs in permanent channels or on slopes at other locations in addition to those shown on the Contract Drawings. If Manufacturer’s instructions are more stringent, they shall supersede. 2. The Contractor shall place the RECPs where directed immediately after the channel or slope has been properly graded and, if applicable, prepared, fertilized, and seeded. 3. Grade the surface of the installation area so that the ground is smooth and loose. Remove all large rocks, debris, etc. to ensure that good contact between the RECP and the ground is maintained so that no erosion occurs beneath the RECP. Terminal anchor trenches are required at RECP ends and intermittent trenches must be constructed across channels at 25 -foot intervals. Terminal anchor trenches should be a minimum of 12 inches in depth and 6 inches in width, while intermittent trenches should be a minimum of 6 inches deep and 6 inches wide. Take care to maintain direct contact between the soil and the RECP. 4. For slope installation, place RECP 2-3 feet over top of slope and into an approximately 12 inch deep by 6 -inch wide excavated end trench. Using staples, stakes, or pins, anchor the RECP at 1-foot intervals along the bottom of the trench, Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-18 backfill, and compact. Along the slope, pin the RECP in a 3-foot center-to-center pattern; provide a minimum 3-inch overlap for adjacent rolls. 5. For channel installations, excavate 12 inch deep by 6 -inch wide terminal trenches across the upper and lower end of the lined channel. Anchor the RECP at a minimum of 25-foot intervals utilizing either two rows of anchors or 6 -inch by 6-inch cross trenches. Bury outside RECP edges in longitudinal trenches 6 inches deep and wide along the channel edges. Pin the RECP in at 1-foot intervals along the bottom of terminal trenches, backfill, and compact. Overlap adjacent rolls a minimum of 3 inches and pin at 1 -foot intervals. Place the first RECP at the downstream end of the channel and unroll upstream. When starting installation of a new roll, begin in a trench or shingle -lap ends of rolls a minimum of 1 foot with upstream RECP on top to prevent uplifting. 6. Staples, stakes, and pins shall be driven so that the top is flush with the ground. 7. During the establishment period, check RECPs at least weekly and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than 1 inch of rain per 24-hour period. Immediately make repairs. Good contact with the ground must be maintained. Monitor and repair the RECP as necessary until ground cover is established. E. TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT DIVERSIONS 1. The Contractor shall provide temporary and permanent diversions at all locations noted on the Contract Drawings and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer. 2. Remove and properly dispose of all trees, debris, etc. Fill and compact all ditches, swales, etc. that will be crossed to natural ground level or above. 3. Excavate, shape, and stabilize diversions as shown on the Contract Drawings and described herein. Unless otherwise noted, provide vegetative stabilization immediately after installation of permanent diversions. Temporary diversions that are to serve longer than 7 working days shall be seeded and mulched as soon as they are constructed to preserve dike height and reduce maintenance. Seed and mulch disturbed areas draining into the diversions within 14 calendar days of completing any phase of grading. 4. For temporary diversions, ensure that the top of the dike is not lower at any point than the design elevation plus the specified settlement. Provide sufficient room around temporary diversions to permit machine re-grading and cleanout. Vegetate the ridge of temporary diversions immediately after construction unless they will remain in place less than 7 working days. 5. Provide outlet protection adequate to accept flow from diversion plus any other contributing runoff. Sediment-laden runoff shall be routed through a sediment - trapping device. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-19 6. Inspect temporary diversions once a week and after every rainfall event. Immediately remove sediment from the flow area and repair the diversion ridge. Carefully check outlets and make timely repairs as needed. When the area protected is permanently stabilized, remove the ridge and the channel to blend with the natural ground level and appropriately stabilize it. Inspect permanent diversions weekly and after every rainfall event during construction operations until permanent vegetation is established. After vegetation is established, inspect after major storms. Immediately remove any debris and make repairs as needed in a timely manner. Maintain healthy vegetation at all times. F. TEMPORARY SLOPE DRAINS 1. The Contractor shall provide temporary slope drains with inlet and outlet protection and associated diversion channels at all locations noted on the Contract Drawings, and at other locations as may be directed by the Engineer. 2. Place slope drains on undisturbed soil or well compacted fill. Slightly slope the section of pipe under the dike toward its outlet. Hand-tamp the soil under and around the entrance section in lifts not to exceed 6 inches. 3. Ensure that all slope drain connections are watertight. Ensure that all fill material is well-compacted. Securely fasten the exposed section of the drain with grommets or stakes spaced no more than 10 feet apart. Extend the drain beyond the toe of the slope and provide outlet protection. 4. Immediately stabilize all disturbed areas following construction. 5. Inspect the temporary slope drain, inlet, and outlet protection, and supporting diversions weekly and after every rainfall event and promptly make any necessary repairs. When the protected area has been permanently stabilized, temporary measures may be removed, materials disposed of properly, and all disturbed areas stabilized appropriately. G. TEMPORARY GRAVEL CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES/EXITS 1. The Contractor shall provide temporary gravel construction entrances/exits at all locations noted on the Contract Drawings and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer. 2. Maintain the gravel pad in a condition to prevent mud or sediment from leaving the construction site. This may require periodic topdressing with 2 – 3 inch stone. Inspect each construction entrance at least weekly and a fter each rainfall event and replace stone impaired by sediment as necessary. Immediately remove all objectionable materials spilled, washed, or tracked onto public roadways. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-20 3. If, despite the use of a gravel construction entrance/exit, most of the mud and sediment are not removed from vehicle tires, tire washing may be necessary. If necessary, this shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner. H. TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT STABILIZATION OF DISTURBED AREAS 1. The Contractor shall temporarily stabilize disturbed areas that will not be brought to final grade within 14 calendar days unless as noted in Paragraph 1.01 F. of this Section. Temporary seeding shall be applied on areas that include diversions, dams, temporary sediment basins, temporary road banks and topsoil stockpiles. Areas to be stabilized with permanent vegetation must be seeded or planted within 14 working days after final grade is reached unless temporary stabilization is applied. Temporary seeding provides protection for no more than 1 year, after which permanent stabilization should be initiated. 2. Complete grading before preparing seedbeds and install all necessary erosion control measures. Minimize steep slopes. If soils become compacted during grading, loosen to a depth of 6 -8 inches. 3. Reseed and mulch temporary seeding areas where seedling emergence is poor, or where erosion occurs, as soon as possible. Do not mow. Protect from traffic as much as possible. 4. Refer to the Section 32 90 00, Final Grading and Landscaping for additional information and specifications regarding seedbed requirements, plant selection, seeding and mulching for temporary seeding applications. 5. The operation of equipment is restricted on slopes steeper than 3:1. Provisions for vegetation establishment can be made during final grading. Vegetation chosen for these sites must not require mowing or other intensive maintenance. Good mulching practices are critical for protecting against erosion on steep slopes. 6. Generally, a stand of vegetation cannot be determined to be fully established until soil cover has been maintained for one full year from planting. Inspect seeded areas for failure and make necessary repairs and reseedings within the same season, if possible. 7. Reseeding – If a stand has inadequate cover, re -evaluate choice of plant materials and quantities of lime and fertilizer. Re -establish the stand after seedbed preparation or over-seed the stand. Consider seeding temporary, annual species if the time of year is not appropriate for permanent seeding. 8. If vegetation fails to grow, soil must be tested to determine if acidity or nutrient imbalance is responsible. 9. Fertilization - On the typical disturbed site, full establishment usually requires re - fertilization in the second growing season. Fine turf requires annual maintenance Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-21 fertilization. Use soil tests if possible or follow the guidelines given for the specific seeding mixture. 10. Refer to the Section 32 90 00, Final Grading and Landscaping for additional information and specifications regarding seedbed requirements, plant selection, seeding, mulching for permanent seeding applications, soil preparation, sod selection, installation, and maintenance for sodding. 11. Inspect all seeded areas weekly and after heavy rains until permanent cover is established. Inspect within 6 weeks of planting to see if stands are adequate. Fertilize, reseed and mulch damaged and sparse areas immediately. I. CHECK DAMS AND CHECK DAMS WITH WEIRS 1. The Contractor shall provide check dams or check dams with weirs at all locations noted on the Contract Drawings and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer. 2. Stone shall be placed on a filter fabric foundation. Center stone shall be at least 9 inches below natural ground level and stone shall extend 1.5 feet beyond ditch bank. 3. For check dams with weirs, provide an apron with a length 3 times the height of the dam and a width a minimum of 4 feet. A 12-inch layer (minimum) of sediment control stone shall be placed on the upstream side of the dam. Excavate sediment storage area to the dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings. 4. Fiber filtration tubes and sediment logs may be specified for use as check dams. These measures shall be installed according to instructions included herein. If Manufacturer’s recommendations are more stringent, they shall supersede. 5. Spacing shall be such that the elevation of the top of the lower dam is the same as the toe elevation of the upper dam. 6. Check dams and check dams with weirs shall be inspected at least weekly and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than 1 inch of rain per 24-hour period. Sediment, limbs, and other debris shall be cleared from the channel. Repairs shall be made immediately. J. INLET EROSION CONTROL MEASURES 1. The Contractor shall provide inlet erosion control measures at all locations noted on the Contract Drawings, and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer. 2. Excavated drop inlet protection drainage area is limited to 1 acre. The minimum volume of excavated area around the drop inlet is 1800 ft 3/acre disturbed. Minimum depth of the excavated area shall be 1 foot and maximum depth shall be Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-22 2 feet as measured from the crest of the inlet structure. Weep holes shall be protected by gravel. Inspect the excavated basin at least weekly and after every storm event until the contributing drainage area has been permanently stabilized. Remove sediment when the storage volume has been reduced by one -half. 3. Block and gravel inlet protection drainage area shall be limited to 1 acre unless site conditions allow for frequent removal of accumulated sediment. The height of the block barrier shall be no more than 12 inches and no less than 24 inches. On the bottom row, place some of the blocks on their side to allow for dewatering. Place wire mesh over all block openings to hold gravel in place. Lateral support may be provided by placement of 2 x 4 wood studs through block openings. Place gravel 2 inches below the top of the block barrier. The top elevation of the structure must be at least 6 inches below the ground elevation downslope from the inlet to ensure that all stormwater flows over the structure and enters the storm drain instead of bypassing the structure. Block and gravel inlet protection shall not be used near the edge of fill material and shall not divert water away from the storm drain. Inspect at least weekly and after every storm event until the contributing drainage area has been permanently stabilized . Remove sediment as necessary to provide adequate storage volume for subsequent rains. Replace stone as needed. 4. Rock pipe inlet protection may be used at pipes with a maximum diameter of 36 inches. It shall not be installed in intermittent or perennial streams. The minimum crest width of the riprap berm shall be 3 feet, with a minimum bottom width of 11 feet and minimum height of 2 feet. The top of the riprap shall be 1 foot lower than the shoulder of the embankment or diversions. The outside face of the riprap should be covered with a 12-inch thick layer of #5 or #57 washed stone. The sediment storage area should be excavated upstream of the rock pipe inlet protection, with a minimum depth of 18 inches below grade. The rock pipe inlet protection shall be inspected at least weekly and after any storm event of greater than 1 inch of rain per 24-hour period. Repairs shall be made immediately. Remove sediment when the volume of the sediment storage area has been decreased by one-half and replace the contaminated part of the gravel facing. K. FIBER ROLLS 1. Fiber rolls and sediment logs shall be placed along slopes to function as slope breaks and to minimize sediment transport and in diversions/channels to serve as check dams. The Contractor shall provide fiber rolls at all locations noted on the Contract Drawings, and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer . 2. Fiber rolls and sediment logs shall be installed to maintain contact with the soil surface. Install prior to seeding. May be installed before or after installation of RECPs. 3. Anchor the upstream/upslope side of the fiber rolls using wire staples or approved devices at 1-foot intervals. Drive wooden stakes through downstream/downslope Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-23 side of the fiber rolls at 2-foot intervals. Take care not to compress the fiber rolls. Backfill and compact loose soil against the upstream/upslope side. Overlap adjacent fiber rolls ends by a minimum of 1 foot. 4. For channel installation, construct anchor trench 3 inches deep by fiber roll diameter and place loose soil against upstream side of fiber roll. For channel gradients of 2%, install trenches on 25-foot intervals. Decrease interval distance with steeper channel gradients or more highly erosive soils. 5. Any sediment accumulation at the base of the fiber roll must be removed when it reaches one-third of the height of the tube. Fiber roll may need to be removed if fully loaded with captured sediment for maximum product performance. Fiber rolls are to be left in place or removed from the site as directed by the Engineer. 6. Sediment logs do not require installation trenches. Wood stakes shall be placed at least every 2 feet along the length of the sediment log. Stakes shall only penetrate the netting around the log. They shall not be driven through the center of the log. Sediment logs are to be left in place or removed from the site as directed by the Engineer. 7. The fiber rolls and sediment logs shall be inspected at least weekly and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than 1 inch of rain per 24-hour period. Look for signs of flow undercutting the logs. Re-anchor and replace as necessary. L. TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT CHANNELS 1. The Contractor shall provide temporary and/or permanent channels at all locations noted on the Contract Drawings, and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer. 2. Remove all trees, brush, stumps, etc. from the channel area and dispose of properly. 3. Excavate the channel to the dimensions shown on the plans, over -excavating to allow for liner thickness. Remove and properly dispose of all excess soil so that surface water may enter the channel freely. 4. Armor the channel as specified on the Contract Drawings. If the specified channel lining requires an establishment period, protect the channel with mulch or a temporary liner sufficient to withstand anticipated velocities during this period. 5. During the establishment period, inspect channels weekly and after every rainfall. After lining has been fully established, inspect channels after any storm event of greater than 1 inch of rain per 24-hour period. Immediately make repairs. 6. Perform all channel construction to keep erosion and water pollution to a minimum. Immediately upon completion of the channel, vegetate all disturbed areas or Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-24 otherwise protect them against soil erosion. Where channel construction will take longer than 7 days, stabilize channels by reaches. 7. Inspect the channel outlet and all road crossings for bank stability and evidence of piping or scour holes. Give special attention to outlets and points where concentrated flow enters the channel. 8. Maintain all vegetation adjacent to and in the channel in a healthy, vigorous condition to protect the area from erosion. 9. Remove all significant sediment accumulations to maintain the designed carrying capacity. M. TEMPORARY SEDIMENT TRAPS, SEDIMENT BASINS, AND SKIMMER SEDIMENT BASINS 1. The Contractor shall provide these structures at all locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer. 2. Care shall be taken to ensure that proper site preparation operations are conducted prior to trap or basin construction. Clear, grub and strip embankment location. 3. A cut-off trench shall be excavated along the center line of the earth fill embankment for sediment basins and skimmer sediment basins. Keep the trench dry during backfilling and compaction operations. 4. Fill material shall be free of roots, woody vegetation, rocks, and other objectionable materials. Fill shall be placed in 6 to 8-inch layers and compacted. Construct the embankment to an elevation 10 percent (minimum of 6 inches) higher than the design height to allow for settling. 5. Inlets to the sediment traps and basins shall be constructed to prevent erosion. Use diversions to divert sediment-laden water to the upper end of the basin. 6. Shape the sediment trap or basin to the specified dimensions. 7. Following construction of the embankment, clear the sediment trap or basin area below the crest elevation of the spillway to facilitate sediment cleanout. Provide access for cleanout of accumulated sediment. 8. Spillway/outlet configuration shall be constructed as specified below. 9. Temporary sediment trap a. Construct riprap outlet in embankment. Use filter fabric or a keyway cutoff trench between the riprap and the soil to protect it from piping. The outlet weir must be level and constructed to grade to assure design capacity. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-25 Ensure that the stone spillway outlet extends downstream past the toe of the embankment until the outlet velocity is acceptable for the receiving stream. b. Provide emergency bypass in natural, stable areas, located so that flow will not damage the embankment. 10. Sediment basin a. Securely attach the riser to the barrel or barrel stub to make a watertight structural connection. Secure all barrel connections with approved watertight assemblies. Install anti-seep collar(s) as noted on the Contract Drawings. Ensure that the pipe stays in firm contact with its foundation when compacting fill around the pipe. Do not use pervious material as backfill around the pipe. Anchor the riser to prevent floatation. Install trash guard to prevent the riser and barrel from becoming clogged. b. Install basin dewatering mechanism as noted on the Contract Drawings. c. Install outlet protection as specified at principal spillway outlet. Install the emergency spillway in undisturbed soil and provide stabilization as specified. 11. Skimmer sediment basin a. Excavate a shallow pit under the skimmer or provide a low support of stone or timber under the skimmer to prevent the skimming device from settling into the mud. b. Place the barrel on a firm, smooth foundation of impervious soil. Do not use pervious material to backfill around the pipe. Ensure that the barrel stays in firm contact with its foundation when compacting fill around the pipe. c. Assemble the skimmer following the Manufacturer’s instructions, or as designed. d. Lay the assembled skimmer on the bottom of the basin with the flexible joint at the inlet of the barrel pipe. Attach the flexible joint to the barrel pipe and position the skimmer over the excavated pit or support. Attach a rope to the skimmer and anchor it to the side of the basin so that the skimmer may be pulled to the side for maintenance. e. Install the spillway in undisturbed soil to the greatest extent possible and line with laminated plastic or impermeable geotextile fabric. Anchor the edges of the fabric in a trench with staples or pins. Install outlet protection as specified at the principal spillway outlet. 12. Install porous baffles in temporary sediment traps, sediment basins, and skimmer sediment basins as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. The Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-26 Contractor shall provide porous baffles at all locations noted on the Contract Drawings, and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer . a. Care shall be taken when installing porous baffles, so they perform as designed. Baffle material shall be secured at the bottom and sides of sediment trap or basin. Fabric shall not be spliced but a continuous piece shall be used across the trap or basin. b. Install at least three rows of baffles between the inlet and outlet discharge point. Sediment traps and basins less than 20 feet in length may use 2 baffles. c. Posts or sawhorses shall be installed across the width of the sediment trap or basin unless an alternate baffle configuration is shown on the Contract Drawings. Steel posts shall be driven to a depth of 24 inches, spaced a maximum of 4 feet apart. Baffle weirs shall be installed at locations and according to details on the Contract Drawings. Except in locations of baffle weirs, the top of the fabric shall be 6 inches higher than the invert of the spillway and 2 inches lower than the top of the berms. 13. Sediment traps and basins shall be constructed so that the area disturbed and resulting erosion is minimized. The emergency spillway, embankment, and all other disturbed areas above the crest of the principal spillway are to be stabilized immediately after construction. 14. Sediment traps and basins may attract children and should be considered dangerous. Steep side slopes should be avoided and fences with warning signs may be necessary if trespassing is likely. 15. Inspect temporary sediment traps, sediment basins, and skimmer sediment basins once a week and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than ½ inch of rain per 24-hour period. Repairs shall be made immediately. a. Sediment, limbs, and other debris shall be cleared, and the trap or basin shall be restored to its original dimensions when it accumulates to one -half the design depth or more frequently as directed by the Engineer. Sediment material removed from traps and basins shall be disposed of by the Contractor in locations that will not result in off -site sedimentation as acceptable to the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. If no suitable on-site locations are available, all such sediment will be legally disposed of off site, at no additional cost to the Owner. b. The embankment, spillways and outlet shall be checked for erosion damage and the embankment shall be checked for piping and settlement. Immediately fill any settlement of the embankment to slightly above design grade. Any riprap displaced from the spillway must be replaced immediately. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-27 Replace contaminated gravel facing of riprap outlets as necessary. Inspect vegetation. Reseed and re-mulch as necessary. c. Baffles, fabric, and skimmer shall be inspected for damage. Repairs shall be made immediately. Re-anchor baffles if water is flowing under or around them. d. Debris shall be removed from the skimmer to prevent clogging. Special precautions shall be taken in winter to prevent the skimmer from plugging with ice. N. OUTLET STABILIZATION STRUCTURE 1. The Contractor shall ensure the subgrade, riprap and gravel filter conforms to the grading limits shown on the plans. 2. Riprap shall be installed in accordance with the specifications contained herein , with filter fabric placed under the riprap. 3. The apron shall be constructed on zero grade with no overfill. Ensure the apron is properly aligned with the receiving stream. 4. All disturbed areas shall be stabilized with vegetation immediately after construction. 5. Outlet stabilization structures shall be inspected at least weekly and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than ½ inch of rain per 24 -hour period to see if any erosion around or below the riprap has taken place or if stones have been dislodged. Repairs shall be made immediately. O. FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM 1. Flexible growth medium shall be applied and maintained in accordance with the requirements detailed herein. If Manufacturer’s recommendations are more stringent, they shall supersede. 2. Grade area according to the Contract Drawings and prepare seedbed in accordance with this Section and Section 32 90 00 – Final Grading and Landscaping. 3. Apply flexible growth medium at rate noted on the Contract Drawings. Application may be made either in conjunction with application of seed and fertilizer or following application of seed and fertilizer. Slope interruption devices are recommended when slope lengths exceed 100 feet. Traffic shall be kept off treated areas. 4. Areas treated with flexible growth medium shall be inspected at least weekly and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than ½ inch of rain per 24 -hour Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-28 period until vegetation is established. Reapply in areas where seedling emergence is poor. P. TREE PROTECTION FENCE 1. Install tree protection fence around all designated tree protection areas prior to clearing, deliveries, and other construction activities onsite. Post signs designating area as protected on all sides of the fencing. 2. Inspect tree protection fence weekly. Repair and replace as needed. Q. REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY SEDIMENT CONTROL STRUCTURES 1. At such time that temporary erosion and sediment control structures are no longer required under this item, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of its intent and schedule for the removal of the temporary structures. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval in writing prior to removal. Once the Contractor has received such written approval from the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove, as approved, the temporary structures and all sediments accumulated at the removed structure shall be returned upgrade and stabilized so they do not re -erode. In areas where temporary control structures are removed, the site shall be left in a condition that will restore original drainage. Such areas shall be evenly graded and seeded as specified in Section 32 90 00 – Final Grading and Landscaping. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall designate an Authorized Representative to perform inspections and maintenance as described herein. Contractor shall perform regular inspections and maintain records as follows: 1. Inspections shall be performed, at a minimum, once every seven calendar days and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than ½ inch of rain per 24 - hour period. 2. A rain gauge shall be maintained in good working order on the site and all rainfall amounts recorded throughout the duration of construction activities. 3. Inspection reports must be available on -site during business hours unless a site- specific exemption is approved. 4. Inspection records must be kept for 3 years following completion of construction and be available upon request. B. During inspections, the following will be observed, and appropriate maintenance activities shall be performed: 1. The conformance to specifications and current condition of all erosion and sediment control structures. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-29 2. The effectiveness and operational success of all erosion and sediment control measures. 3. The presence of sediments or other pollutants in storm water runoff at all runoff discharge points. 4. The presence of sediments or other pollutants in receiving waters. 5. Evidence of off-site tracking at all locations where vehicles enter or exit the site. 6. Evidence of impacts to water quality due to site activities pertaining to equipment operation and maintenance, material handling, and material storage and construction laydown areas exposed to precipitation. C. Immediate action shall be taken to repair/maintain erosion and sediment control measures that are not performing as designed. The State reserves the right to stop all construction activities not related to these measures until such deficiencies are repaire d. D. In areas that have undergone final stabilization, inspections and, if necessary, maintenance by Contractor will occur at least once per month for the duration of the contract or project, whichever is longer. E. Monitoring: The Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of the Inspections and Maintenance Procedures as included in the approved erosion and sediment control plan. The implementation must comply with guidelines as set forth in the General Permit for Discharges from Construction Activities, as well as those of any local regulatory authorities. Minimum monitoring requirements are as follows: 1. A rain gauge shall be maintained in good working order on the site. 2. A written record of the daily rainfall amounts shall be retained. (Note: if no rainfall occurred the Contractor must record “zero”). 3. The control measures shall be inspected to ensure that they are operating correctly. Inspection records must be maintained for each inspection event and for each measure. All erosion and sedimentation control measures must be inspected by the Contractor at least once every seven calendar days and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than ½ inch of rain per 24 -hour period unless otherwise noted herein. Some measures require inspection following each rainfall event. 4. Once land disturbance has begun on the site, stormwater runoff discharge outfalls shall be inspected by observation for erosion, sedimentation, and other stormwater discharge characteristics such as clarity, floating solids, and oil sheens. Inspections of the outfalls shall be made at least once every seven calendar days and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than ½ inch of rain per 24 -hour period. Inspection records must be maintained for each inspection event and for each discharge location. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-30 5. If any visible sedimentation is leaving the site or entering waters of the State, corrective action shall be taken immediately to control the discharge of sediments. Where visible deposition of sediment has occurred in surface waters or wetlands, the Contractor must verbally contact the Engineer and the Division of Water Quality within 24 hours of becoming aware of the deposition. Written notification shall be made to the Engineer and the Division of Water Quality within 5 days of becoming aware of the deposition. F. Reporting: The Contractor must keep a record of inspections onsite with a copy of the approved erosion and sediment control plan. Inspection records shall be made available to the permitting authority upon request. Copies of inspection records shall be sent to the Engineer on a monthly basis. The records must provide the details of each inspection including observations and corrective actions taken as described below. The required rainfall and monitoring observations shall be recorded on an “Inspection Record” form or a similar inspection form that is inclusive of all the elements contained in the Division’s form. 1. Control Measure Inspections: Inspection records must include at a minimum: 1) identification of the measures inspected, 2) date and time of the inspection, 3) name of the person performing the inspection, 4) indication of whether the measures were operating properly, 5) description of maintenance needs for the measure, 6) corrective actions taken and 7) date of actions taken. 2. Stormwater Discharge Inspections: Inspection records must include at a minimum: 1) identification of the discharge outfall inspected, 2) date and time of the inspection, 3) name of the person performing the inspection, 4) evidence of indicators of stormwat er pollution such as oil sheen, floating or suspended solids or discoloration, 5) indication of visible sediment leaving the site, 6) actions taken to correct/prevent sedimentation and 7) date of actions taken. 3. Visible Sedimentation Found Outside the Site Limits: Inspection records must include 1) an explanation as to the actions taken to control future releases, 2) actions taken to clean up or stabilize the sediment that has left the site limits and 3) the date of actions taken. 4. Visible Sedimentation Found in Streams or Wetlands: All inspections should include evaluation of streams or wetlands onsite or offsite (where accessible) to determine if visible sedimentation has occurred. 5. Visible Stream Turbidity: If the discharge from a site results in visible stream turbidity, inspection records must record that evidence and actions taken to reduce sediment contributions. G. Sites discharging to streams named on the State of Utah’s 303(d) list as impaired for sediment-related causes may be required to perform additional monitoring, inspections, or application of more stringent management practices if it is determined that the additional requirements are needed to assure compliance with the federal or state Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 25 00-31 impaired-waters conditions. Inspection records must be maintained for each inspection event and for each discharge location. If a discharge covered by this permit enters a stream segment that is listed on the Impaired Stream List for sediment -related causes, and a Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) has been prepared for those pollutants, the Permittee must implement measures to ensure that the discharge of pollutants from the site is consistent with the assumptions and meets the requirements of the approved TMDL. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Gravity Retaining Walls Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 42 00-1 SECTION 31 42 00 GRAVITY RETAINING WALLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INLCUDES A. General requirements regarding gravity retaining walls on District lands and interest in lands. 1.02 GENERAL A. Except for District purposes, gravity retaining walls shall not be permitted on District lands. B. Gravity retaining walls should be considered by staff on a case -by-case basis and in compliance with District Policies & Procedures Chapter 16, Section 7.4.a.iii and this standard specification. C. City, county, and other jurisdictional authorities should be considered with the application of this section. Where such authorities maintain ordinances, codes, or guidelines related to gravity retaining wall, the stricter of said ordinances, codes, or gui delines and this section governs. D. Gravity retaining walls should only be considered for landscaping purposes (i.e., tiering of sloped property) and not used to provide stability for structures (e.g., homes, swimming pools, courts, sheds, garages), either consequential or intentional. E. Allowance of gravity retaining walls is contingent on constructability of these features. The District and property owner must have access to reasonably construct and deconstruct the wall without risk of damage to nearby structures. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GRAVITY RETAINING WALLS A. Definition. 1. Gravity Retaining wall is defined as interlocking blocks without reinforcement or foundation, generally set on a level course and filled with angular gravel. B. Height. 1. The height of the gravity retaining wall shall be measured from the bottom of the lowest block to the highest point of the wall. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Gravity Retaining Walls Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 42 00-2 2. Permitted elevation varies by topography, distance from District facilities, and local codes and ordinances. Generally, gravity retaining walls should be less than six feet tall. 3. Walls horizontally closer than two times the lower wall height should be considered a single wall. 4. The maximum gradient within the separation distance should be 4H:1V. C. Block. 1. Verti-Block standard block or Equal. Standard block measures 4 feet by 2 feet on the face and 3 feet deep and weighs 1,760 pounds. 2. Gravel infill as per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. A gravel or sand leveling course is permitted. 4. Block bury depth shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations. 5. Footings and foundations are not permitted. D. Drainage. 1. Grade drainage surfaces away from wall and District facilities. 2. Drainage piping and related materials shall be installed within the bottom cavity or leveling pad or behind the block as per manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Backfill. 1. Backfill shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Geotextile filters may be used. 3. Geogrid mesh or similar products for slope stabilization and earth retention should not be used. F. Design. 1. Design of gravity retaining wall shall be submitted to District for review and comment prior to seeking approval from other agencies. 2. Design drawings shall be stamped by an engineer licensed in the State of Utah. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Gravity Retaining Walls Cottonwoods Connection Page 31 42 00-3 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. District requires on-site inspection during construction of all gravity retaining walls. B. A minimum 48 business hours’ notice shall be provided to the District prior to construction. C. Inspection occurs only during business hours. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Materials shall be installed as per manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Leveling course shall be rock or sand. Concrete is not permitted. 3.03 AGREEMENT A. An agreement is required prior to construction. Agreement shall include the following provisions: 1. Remove District liability if walls are removed or damaged. 2. Property owner is responsible to re -establish, repair, or replace walls, grading, landscaping, and other supported uses. District has no obligation to restore. In the event property owner wishes to restore landscape wall it shall be to original approved plans. 3. Under no condition shall the property owner remove walls without an adequate plan for proper slope stability which shall be approved in writing by the District prior to construction. 4. Property owner is responsible for additional costs related to operation, maintenance, repair or replacement of District facilities resulting from the gravity retaining wall. B. The agreement shall include the appropriate engineer -stamped drawings pertaining to the wall and require strict compliance with those drawings. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 32 10 00 PAVING AND SURFACING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials and perform all operations in connection with the construction of asphalt concrete pavement, asphalt concrete overlay, reinforced concrete pavement, gravel roads, concrete curb and gutter, repair and reconstruction of existing asphalt concrete pavement, repair of existing gravel roads, and pavement markings complete as specified herein and as detailed on the Drawings. B. All new roads including the replacement of portions of the existing roads shall be to the limits, grades, thicknesses and types as shown on the Drawings. Patches for pipe crossings and areas damaged during the construction work shall be asphalt and/or gravel, depending upon the material encountered, unless otherwise indicated. C. CC-1 East work: all work and materials shall be in accordance with UDOT Section 02741S, attached to the end of this section. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete C. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel D. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Utah Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. B. Utah Chapter American Public Works Association. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SELECT FILL A. The Contractor shall place select fill as necessary to complete the embankments, shoulders, subgrade foundation and replacement for removed unsuitable material in accordance with Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Cottonwoods Connection Paving and Surfacing Page 32 10 00-1 2.02 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (ABC) A. All work, including materials, associated with Aggregate Base Course shall be in accordance with UDOT Section 02721, Untreated Base Course. 2.03 ASPHALT BINDER FOR PLANT MIX A. All work, including materials, associated with asphalt binder shall be in accordance with UDOT Section 02745, Asphalt Material. 2.04 ASPHALT PAVEMENTS A. All work (excluding CC-1 East), including materials, associated with asphalt pavement shall be in accordance with UDOT Section 02741, Asphalt Mix. 1. For CC-1 East, all work, including materials, associated with asphalt pavement shall be in accordance with UDOT Section 02741S, attached at the end of this section. B. The job mix formulas shall be delivered to the Engineer at least two (2) weeks prior to beginning paving operations. 2.05 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. All work, including materials associated with rigid concrete pavement shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Class A concrete shall be used. Placement shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete and UDOT Section 02752, Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. 2.06 CONCRETE PAVEMENT REINFORCING A. Reinforcing, if specified, shall be as shown on the Structural Drawings and as specified under Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel. 2.07 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS A. Concrete shall be Class B in accordance with the requirements of Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete, except that concrete shall be air-entrained to provide an air content of 6% ± 1.5%. B. Premolded expansion joint filler for expansion joints shall conform to ASTM D 1751 and shall be 1/2-inch thick, minimum. 2.08 ASPHALT TACK COAT A. All work, including materials, associated with asphalt tack coat shall be in accordance with UDOT Section 02748, Prime Coat / Tack Coat. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Cottonwoods Connection Paving and Surfacing Page 32 10 00-2 2.09 SLURRY SEAL A. All work, including materials associated with slurry seal shall be in accordance with APWA Section 32 01 13, Slurry Seal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EMBANKMENT A. The embankment shall be constructed in accordance with Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork. 3.02 SUBGRADE A. The subgrade, where shown on the Drawings, shall be aggregate stabilized by the addition and mixing of coarse aggregate with the top 3-inches of subgrade. Aggregate stabilization shall be applied to the subgrade at a rate of 300-pounds per square yard. Following the application of stabilizer aggregate, the subgrade shall be formed true to crown and grade and shall be compacted with a minimum of four (4) passes of a 15-ton vibratory roller to conform to the maximum densities determined by AASHTO T99 Standard Specifications. 3.03 BASE COURSE A. The finished base course of all paving shall be ABC and shall be of the thickness shown on the Drawings, formed true to crown and grade. Gravel roads, including repair to existing gravel roads shall be ABC and shall be of the thicknesses shown on the Drawings, formed true to crown and grade. No fill material except new ABC shall be placed on top of existing gravel. 3.04 ASPHALT BASE COURSE A. Asphalt Concrete Base (or Intermediate) Course shall meet the placement and compaction requirements of UDOT Section 02721 and be placed in lifts with a maximum thickness of 6-inches. Thicknesses shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.05 ASPHALT SURFACE COURSE A. Prior to placement of the asphalt surface course, the base/intermediate course shall be inspected for damage or defects and repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface of the base/intermediate course shall be approved by the Engineer. B. The asphalt tack coat shall be applied to the surface of the approved base/binder course as described in UDOT Section 02748, Prime Coat / Tack Coat. Equipment for applying the tack coat shall be power-oriented pressure spraying or distributing equipment suitable for the materials to be applied and approved by the Engineer. C. The Asphalt Surface Course shall meet the requirements of UDOT Section 02787, Bonded Wearing Course, for placement and compaction. Thicknesses shall be as shown on the Drawings. 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Cottonwoods Connection Paving and Surfacing Page 32 10 00-3 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 3.06 ASPHALT PAVEMENT COMPACTION A. Asphalt pavement compaction (excluding CC-1 East) shall be performed as per UDOT Section 02741, Asphalt Mix. 1. Asphalt pavement compaction for CC-1 East work, shall be performed as per UDOT Section 02741S, attached to the end of this section. B. Contractor shall provide Quality Control (QC) for proper asphalt concrete pavement placement and compaction using equipment in good working order which has been properly calibrated at the start of each round of testing. Quality Assurance (QA) of paving operations will be performed by an independent third-party representative hired by Owner. C. Immediately after the asphalt mixture has been spread, struck off and surface and edge irregularities adjusted, thoroughly and uniformly compact the pavement. Compact the mix to the required degree of compaction for the type of mixture being placed, as noted in UDOT Section 02741 and Asphalt Mix and 02741S. 3.07 ASPHALT DENSITY ACCEPTANCE A. The Engineer will evaluate the asphalt pavement for density acceptance after the asphalt mix has been placed and compacted using the Contractor's QC test results, the Owner’s QA test results (including verification samples) and by observation of the Contractor's density QC process conducted in accordance with UDOT Section 02741, Asphalt Mix. 1. CC-1 East Asphalt Pavement: Asphalt density acceptance requirements and density QC process shall be conducted in accordance with UDOT Section 02741S. B. Minimum density requirements for all mixes will be as specified in UDOT Section 02741, Asphalt Mix. Core sample shall be obtained and tested by the Owner’s representative at the same frequency and location as the Contractor’s QC testing, if possible, and densities will be determined by use of the requirements as outlined in UDOT Section 02741, Asphalt Mix. 1. CC-1 East Density Requirements: minimum density requirements for mixes will be specified in UDOT Section 02741S. C. A failing lot for density acceptance purposes is defined as a lot for which the average of all test sections, and portions thereof, fails to meet the minimum specification requirement. A lot will consist of one day’s production of a given mix, for each layer of asphalt concrete placed. If additional density sampling and testing, beyond the minimum requirement, is performed and additional test sections are thereby created, then all test results shall be included in the lot average. 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Cottonwoods Connection Paving and Surfacing Page 32 10 00-4 D. Any lot or portion of a lot deemed obviously unacceptable by the Owner or Engineer will be rejected for use in the work. If the Engineer determines that a given lot of mix does not meet the minimum specification requirements, but the work is reasonably acceptable, the lot will be accepted at a reduced pay factor in accordance with the following formula. The reduced pay factor will apply only to the contractor’s schedule of values. Reduced Pay Factor = 100+ [(Actual Density – Specified Density) x 30] 2 Where: Actual Density = the lot average density, not to exceed 2.0% of the specified density Specified Density = the density in Table 3-1 or as specified in the contract Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 3.08 ASPHALT CONRETE PAVEMENT PHASING A. Contractor shall be responsible for phasing the placement of asphalt concrete pavement sections and courses to account for individual construction activities, the construction traffic volume, and vehicle loading expected throughout construction activities. The placement of asphalt concrete pavement shall also be phased so the aggregate base course, once installed, is not exposed to freeze/thaw cycles. 3.09 RIGID PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE A. The subgrade and base course beneath Portland cement concrete pavement shall be prepared in accordance with the applicable Sections of these Specifications and referenced Standard Specifications, except that the Contractor shall use an approved automatically controlled fine grading machine to produce final subgrade and base surfaces meeting the lines, grades, and cross sections (thicknesses) shown on the Drawings or established by the Engineer. B. The surface of the base shall be damp at the time the concrete is placed. The Contractor shall sprinkle the base when necessary to provide a damp surface. The Contractor shall satisfactorily correct all soft areas in the subgrade or base prior to placing concrete. C. Hauling over the base course shall not be allowed except where specifically permitted by and in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer may allow equipment dumping concrete to operate on the base to the extent and under the conditions the Engineer deems necessary to facilitate placing and spreading the concrete. D. Installation of the rigid concrete pavement shall be in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and Division 03 - Concrete. The rigid concrete pavement shall cure a minimum of ten (10) calendar days and until the concrete has attained a minimum flexural strength of 550 psi as indicated by flexural strength testing. The Contractor shall coordinate and pay for all flexural strength testing with a minimum of four (4) 6-inch by 6-inch by 20-inch beams for every fifty (50) cubic yards of pavement concrete installed. 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Cottonwoods Connection Paving and Surfacing Page 32 10 00-5 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 E. Transverse and longitudinal joints shall be spaced at intervals as shown on the Drawings and installed as per UDOT requirements. Transverse contraction joints shall be formed by an approved joint insert. Longitudinal joints shall be formed by allowing the paver to deposit the mixture adjacent to the joint to such depth that maximum compaction can be obtained along the joint. Pinch the joint by rolling immediately behind the paver. Expansion joints shall be placed when the pavement abuts a structure using 1 inch expansion joint material (filler) and sealant as specified herein. 3.10 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND SIDEWALK A. The expansion joint filler for concrete curb and gutters shall be cut to conform with the cross section of the curb. Expansion joints shall be spaced at intervals of not more than 50 feet. Formed control joints shall be installed at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. (Expansion joints can placed at intervals of 45 feet and control joints at 15 feet if curb and gutter is machine placed.) Depth of joint shall be 1/3 the thickness. Curved forms shall be used where radii are indicated; straight segments shall not be permitted. Upon removal of the forms, exposed curb faces shall be immediately rubbed down to a smooth and uniform surface. No plastering shall be permitted. B. Concrete sidewalks shall include contraction joints between each panel of sidewalk and when sidewalk width exceeds 6-feet, longitudinal contractions joints shall be placed as required. Additionally, ½" expansion joints and sealer shall be placed at a maximum spacing of 50-feet of sidewalk. ½" expansion joint material and sealer shall also be where sidewalks abut and rigid structure or curb and gutter. 3.11 UNDERGROUND UTILITY LINES A. Where an underground utility line is beneath the new roadway, the backfilling shall be carried out with special care, and the final consolidation shall be accomplished by a vibratory roller. Construction of the roadway over the trench shall be deferred as long as practicable. 3.12 JUNCTION WITH OTHER PAVING A. Where new asphalt pavement abuts existing asphalt pavement, the existing pavement shall be cut back to insure obtaining the specified compaction of the new pavement courses and interlocking adjoining courses. Existing subbase courses shall be cut back from the subgrade level of the new pavement on a one-on-one slope into the existing pavement, and the asphalt courses of the existing pavement shall be removed for an additional 6-inches back from the slope. The edge of the existing asphalt courses shall be saw cut straight and true. The faces between new and existing asphalt courses shall receive an application of tack coat. B. Where new rigid concrete pavement abuts existing rigid concrete or asphalt paving, the existing paving shall be saw cut straight and true. An expansion joint of a 1/2-inch minimum thickness with filler material and sealant shall be placed between the new concrete pavement and the existing rigid concrete or asphalt paving. 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Cottonwoods Connection Paving and Surfacing Page 32 10 00-6 3.13 ASPHALT OVERLAY A. Where asphalt is proposed to be placed over an existing asphalt or rigid concrete surface, the surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by power brooming and a tack coat shall be applied in accordance with UDOT Section 02748, Prime Coat / Tack Coat, prior to installing the overlay. The overlay shall be applied in accordance with these Specifications and the Standard Details shown on the Drawings. 3.14 SLURRY SEAL A. Slurry Seal shall meet the requirements of APWA Section 32 01 13, Slurry Seal, for preparation, placement, after application, and repair. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Cottonwoods Connection Paving and Surfacing Page 32 10 00-7 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 32 10 00 - ATTACHMENT 1 UDOT SR-190 Specification 2741S - Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 1 of 20 April 23, 2023 SPECIAL PROVISION PROJECT # F-0190(29)2 PIN # 19232 SECTION 02741S HIGHLY MODIFIED HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMHMA) Delete Section 02741 and replace with the following: PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. A surface course of one or more layers of HMA comprised of aggregate, asphalt binder, hydrated lime, and other additives. B. Option to incorporate Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) materials into HMA pavement. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01456: Materials Dispute Resolution B. Section 02701: Pavement Smoothness May C. Section 02742S: Project Specific Surfacing Requirements D. Section 02745: Asphalt Material E. Section 02746: Hydrated Lime F. Section 02748: Prime Coat/Tack Coat 1.3 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 323: Superpave Volumetric Mix Design B. AASHTO R 35: Superpave Volumetric Design for Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA) C.$$6+7270DWHULDOV)LQHU7KDQȝP (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. D. AASHTO T 19: Bulk Density (“Unit Weight”) and Voids in Aggregate PROJECT #F-0190(29)20190(29)2 PIN #19232 Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 2 of 20 E. AASHTO T 27: Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates F. AASHTO T 89: Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils G. AASHTO T 90: Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils H. AASHTO T 96: Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine I. AASHTO T 104: Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate J. AASHTO T 112: Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregate K. AASHTO T 176: Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test L. AASHTO T 195: Determining Degree of Particle Coating of Asphalt Mixtures M. AASHTO T 209: Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) N. AASHTO T 255: Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying O. AASHTO T 304: Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate P. AASHTO T 305: Determination of Draindown Characteristics in Uncompacted Asphalt Mixtures Q. AASHTO T 335: Determining the Percentage of Fracture in Coarse Aggregate R. UDOT Materials Manual of Instruction S. UDOT Minimum Sampling and Testing Requirements T. UDOT Quality Management Plans Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 3 of 20 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Longitudinal Joint – Any new asphalt lift abutting an existing paving lift. This includes joints created by echelon paving and new asphalt placed against a milled asphalt edge. B. Lot – The number of tons of HMA placed in a Production Day. C. Minor Target Change – A change from the verified mix design gradation target on a maximum of two sieves with the following limitations. 1. The maximum change from the verified target gradation on the No. 8 or any coarser sieve is limited to 3 percent passing per sieve. 2. The maximum change from the verified target gradation on the No. 16 or No. 50 sieves is 2 percent passing per sieve. 3. The maximum change from the verified target gradation on the No. 200 sieve is 0.5 percent passing. 4. No target change may violate the mix design requirements in this section. D. Overband – an 8 inch protective asphalt coating sealing the longitudinal joint of final riding surface, as proposed by the contractor and approved by the Engineer E. Production Day – A 24 hour period in which HMA is being placed. F. RAP – Recycled Asphalt Pavement. Crushed or milled asphalt materials that have been removed from pavements. G. Thin Overlay Pavement – New HMA design thickness less than 2 inches. H. Lane-Leveling – Variable depth paving to correct minor rutting and longitudinal variations in the roadway. Depth varies from the maximum aggregate size to the depth needed to correct variations. I. Profile leveling - Variable depth paving to correct minor profile variations in the roadway. Depth varies from the maximum aggregate size to the depth needed to correct variations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Mix design for approval at least 10 working days before paving according to UDOT Materials Manual of Instruction Section 960. B. Changes in job mix design 1. Submit a written request for any proposed change in the job-mix design Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 4 of 20 a. Allow at least 12 hours for approval before incorporating a minor target change into production. b. Allow at least six working days for verification and approval of any other change. 2. Include documentation supporting correlation between suggested target changes and mix design volumetric requirements. a. Acceptable documentation may include Department or Contractor testing data. 3. Submit samples according to the UDOT Materials Manual of Instruction 960 for a volumetric mix design verification for anything other than approved minor target changes. C. Corrective action plan for approval according to this Section, Article 3.3, paragraph C2 and Article 3.4, paragraph A4b. D. Refer to this Section, Article 3.4 for laboratory correlation submittals. E. Mat joint layout plan to the Engineer for review at least 10 calendar days before placement. 1.6 ACCEPTANCE A. Acceptance sampling and testing of material is according to UDOT Minimum Sampling and Testing Requirements. B. Gradation and asphalt binder content 1. The Engineer evaluates a lot on the test results of four or more samples, except when only three samples can be taken for the production day. 2. Evaluate the lot using the number of tests “n” in Table 3. 3. The Engineer informs the Contractor of the time and place of sampling not more than 15 minutes before sampling. 4. Increase sample sizes to accommodate validation or third-party testing as required. C. Density and Thickness 1. Obtain cores from the mat within two contract days after the pavement is placed and per UDOT Materials Manual of Instruction Section 984. a. The Engineer marks coring location for in-place mat density cores. b. Move transversely to a point 1 ft from the edge of the pavement for in-place mat density if the random location for coring falls within 1 ft of the edge of the overall pavement section (outer part of shoulders). Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 5 of 20 c. Fill core holes with HMA, SMA or high AC content cold mix and compact in thin lifts within 24 hours or before returning to traffic, whichever is less. d. The Department witnesses the coring operation, takes possession of the cores immediately, and begins testing the cores within 24 hours for density acceptance. 2. Density Requirements a. The target for in-place density for the mat is 96.0 for the top three inches of the core, percent of Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity. b. For information only, cut the core in half and report the density for the bottom three inches. c. Take a minimum of 10 cores randomly spaced. 3. Thickness Requirements are based only on mat cores. The thickness requirement may be waived when matching up to existing pavement, curb and gutter for Pavement in or next to intersections. a. The Department accepts a lot for thickness when: 1) The average thickness is not more than ½ inch greater or ¼ inch less than the total design thickness specified. 2) No individual sublot shows a deficient thickness of PRUHWKDQǪ inch. b. Excess Thickness – The Engineer may allow excess thickness to remain in place or may order its removal. 1) The Department pays for 50 percent of the mix for material in excess of the +½ inch tolerance when excess thickness is allowed to remain in place. c. Deficient Thickness – Place additional material where lots or sublots are deficient in thickness. 1) The Department pays for material necessary to reach specified thickness. 2) The Department pays for 50 percent of the mix for additional material over specified thickness necessary to achieve minimum lift thickness. 3) Minimum compacted lift is 3 times the nominal maximum aggregate size. d. Thickness tolerances established above do not apply to leveling courses. 1) Check final surfaces in staged construction. e. Check thickness regularly with a depth probe during placement and take corrective action as necessary. Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 6 of 20 D. The Department applies one Incentive/Disincentive for the lowest dollar value for Gradation/Asphalt Content, one Incentive/Disincentive for In- Place Mat Density, and one Incentive/Disincentive for Longitudinal Joint Density. The Engineer computes Incentives/Disincentives as follows for each lot 1. Compute incentive/disincentive for Gradation/Asphalt Binder and In-place Mat Density and Longitudinal Joint Density according to Table 1. 2. Base the incentive/disincentive on Percent within Limit (PT) computation using Tables 2, 3, and 4. 3. Use lowest single value combined for gradation (each of the sieves) and asphalt binder content for calculating the gradation/asphalt binder content incentive/disincentive. 4. Use Tables 2, 3, and 4 to determine PT for in-place Mat Density and Longitudinal Joint Density. 5. Meet PT of 88 or greater for in-place mat density or the Department does not pay incentives on gradation/asphalt binder content except for lane-leveling material. 6. The Department pays or assesses the longitudinal joint density incentive/disincentive per ton of HMA placed adjacent to, and on the hot side of the longitudinal joint for each lift: a. The incentive/disincentive will be calculated from the average of the core densities taken from all abutting joints if the HMA mat has a longitudinal joint on more than one side. E. The Department applies incentive/disincentive for smoothness according to Section 02701. 1. Refer to Section 02701 for smoothness requirements. F. The Department rejects lots: 1. If the PT for any individual gradation measurement is less than 52 percent as shown in Table 1. 2. If the PT for asphalt binder content or mat density measurement is less than 60 percent as shown in Table 1. 3. The Engineer may accept a reject lot. Refer to Section 01456. a. A price reduction of 35 percent of the pay item or $20 per ton, whichever is greater, will be assessed. b. The lot will not be eligible for any incentive. G. The Engineer may elect to accept material on visual inspection according to the MS&TR. 1. Incentives/Disincentives are not applied to material accepted visually. Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 7 of 20 2. The Engineer reserves the option of conducting any acceptance tests necessary to determine that the material and workmanship meets the project requirements. H. Meet production control requirements of Table 9. 1. Material placed within the Cease Production Limit in Table 9 is not eligible for incentives. Table 1 Incentive/Disincentive for Asphalt Binder Content, and Mat Density PT Based on Min. Four Samples Incentive/Disincentive (Dollars/Ton) >99 96-99 92-95 88-91 84-87 80-83 76-79 72-75 68-71 64-67 60-63 <60 2.00 1.50 1.00 0.00 -0.26 -0.60 -0.93 -1.27 -1.60 -1.93 -2.27 Reject Incentive/Disincentive for Gradation PT Based on Min. Four Samples Incentive/Disincentive (Dollars/Ton) >99 96-99 92-95 88-91 84-87 80-83 76-79 72-75 68-71 64-67 60-63 56-59 52-55 <52 2.00 1.50 1.00 0.00 -0.26 -0.60 -0.93 -1.27 -1.60 -1.93 -2.27 -5.00 -10.00 Reject Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 8 of 20 Table 2 Upper and Lower Limit Determination Parameter UL and LL ǪLQFKVLHYHIRUòLQFK+0$ 1RVLHYHIRUǪLQFK+0$ Target Value r 6.0% No. 8 sieve Target Value r 5.0% No.50 sieve Target Value r 3.0% No. 200 sieve Target Value r 2.0% Asphalt Binder Content Target Value r 0.35% 6.0% minimum 6.2% minimum on Bridge Decks Mat Density Lower Limit Target Value - 2.0% Upper Limit Target Value + 3.0% Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 9 of 20 Table 3 Use the appropriate “number of tests” column and round down to the nearest value. Quality Index Values (QU or QL) for Estimating Percent Within Limits PU or PL n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=10 n=12 n=15 n=20 100 1.16 1.50 1.75 1.91 2.06 2.15 2.29 2.35 2.47 2.56 99 1.16 1.47 1.68 1.79 1.89 1.95 2.04 2.09 2.14 2.19 98 1.15 1.44 1.61 1.70 1.77 1.80 1.86 1.89 1.93 1.97 97 1.15 1.41 1.55 1.62 1.67 1.69 1.74 1.77 1.80 1.82 96 1.15 1.38 1.49 1.55 1.59 1.61 1.64 1.66 1.69 1.70 95 1.14 1.35 1.45 1.49 1.52 1.54 1.56 1.57 1.59 1.61 94 1.13 1.32 1.40 1.44 1.46 1.47 1.49 1.50 1.51 1.53 93 1.12 1.29 1.36 1.38 1.40 1.41 1.43 1.43 1.44 1.46 92 1.11 1.26 1.31 1.33 1.35 1.36 1.37 1.37 1.38 1.39 91 1.10 1.23 1.27 1.29 1.30 1.31 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.33 90 1.09 1.20 1.23 1.24 1.25 1.25 1.26 1.26 1.27 1.27 89 1.08 1.17 1.20 1.21 1.21 1.21 1.21 1.21 1.22 1.22 88 1.07 1.14 1.16 1.17 1.17 1.17 1.17 1.17 1.17 1.17 87 1.06 1.11 1.12. 1.12 1.12 1.13 1.13 1.13 1.13 1.13 86 1.05 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 85 1.03 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 84 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.01 1.01 1.01 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 83 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 82 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 81 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.88 80 0.94 0.90 0.88 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 79 0.92 0.87 0.85 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.81 78 0.89 0.84 0.82 0.81 0.80 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.78 0.78 77 0.87 0.81 0.79 .0.78 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.75 0.75 0.75 76 0.84 0.78 0.76 0.75 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 75 0.82 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.68 74 0.79 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.67 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.65 73 0.77 0.69 0.67 0.65 0.64 0.64 0.62 0.62 0.62 0.62 72 0.74 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.61 0.61 0.60 0.59 0.59 0.59 71 0.71 0.63 0.60 0.59 0.58 0.58 0.57 0.56 0.56 0.56 70 0.68 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.54 0.54 0.54 0.53 69 0.65 0.57 0.55 0.54 0.53 0.52 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.50 68 0.62 0.54 0.52 0.51 0.50 0.50 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.48 67 0.59 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.45 0.45 66 0.56 0.48 0.46 0.45 0.44 0.44 0.43 0.42 0.42 0.42 65 0.53 0.45 0.43 0.42 0.41 0.41 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.39 64 0.49 0.42 0.40 0.39 0.38 0.38 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 63 0.46 0.39 0.37 0.36 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.34 0.34 0.34 62 0.43 0.36 0.34 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.32 0.31 0.31 0.31 61 0.39 0.33 0.31 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.29 0.29 0.29 0.28 60 0.36 0.30 0.28 0.27 0.26 0.26 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 59 0.32 0.27 0.25 0.25 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.23 0.23 0.23 Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 10 of 20 Table 3 Continued PU/PL n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=10 n=12 n=15 n=20 58 0.29 0.24 0.23 0.22 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.20 57 0.25 0.21 0.20 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 56 0.22 0.18 0.17 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.15 0.15 55 0.18 0.15 0.14 0.14 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 54 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 53 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 52 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 51 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Table 4 Definitions, Abbreviations, and Formulas for Acceptance Term Explanation Target Value (TV) The target values for gradation and asphalt binder content are given in the Contractor’s volumetric mix design. See this Section, article 1.6 for density target values. Average (AVE) The sum of the lot’s test results for a measured characteristic divided by the number of test results–the arithmetic mean. Standard Deviations (s) The square root of the value formed by summing the squared difference between the individual test results of a measured characteristic and AVE, divided by the number of test results minus one. Upper Limit (UL) The value above the TV of each measured characteristic that defines the upper limit of acceptable production. (Table 2) Lower Limit (LL) The value below the TV of each measured characteristic that defines the lower limit of acceptable production (Table 2) Upper Quality Index (QU) QU = (UL - AVE)/s Lower Quality Index (QL) QL = (AVE - LL)/s Percentage of Lot Within UL (PU) Determined by entering Table 3 with QU. Percentage of Lot Within LL (PL) Determined by entering Table 3 with QL. Total Percentage of Lot Within UL and LL (PT) PT = (PU + PL) – 100 Incentive/Disincentive Determined by entering Table 1 with PT or PL. Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 11 of 20 1.7 DISPUTE RESOLUTION A. Refer to Section 01456 when disputing the validity of the Department’s acceptance tests. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ASPHALT BINDER A. Project Specific Surfacing Requirements – Refer to Section 02742S. B. Asphalt Material – Refer to Section 02745 and Quality Management Plan 509: Asphalt Binder. C. Use a minimum asphalt binder content of 6.0%, and for bridge decks a minimum of 6.2%. 2.2 AGGREGATE A. Crusher produced virgin aggregate material consisting of crushed stone, gravel, or slag. B. Refer to Table 5 to determine the suitability of the aggregate. 1. Coarse aggregates a. Retained on No. 4 sieve. AASHTO T 27 2. Fine aggregates a. Clean, hard grained, and angular b. Passing the No. 4 sieve. AASHTO T 27 Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 12 of 20 Table 5 Aggregate Properties – HMA Test Method Test No. 75 Design Gyrations and Greater Less Than 75 Design Gyrations One Fractured Face AASHTO T 335 95% minimum 90% minimum Two Fractured Faces AASHTO T 335 90% minimum 90% minimum Fine Aggregate Angularity AASHTO T 304 45 minimum 45 minimum Flakiness Index UDOT MOI 933 (Based on 3/8 inch sieve and above) 17% maximum 17% maximum L.A. Wear AASHTO T 96 35% maximum 40% maximum Sand Equivalent AASHTO T 176 (Pre-wet method) 60 minimum 45 minimum Plasticity Index AASHTO T 89 and T 90 0 0 Unit Weight AASHTO T 19 minimum 75 lb/cu ft minimum 75 lb/cu ft Soundness (sodium sulfate) AASHTO T 104 16% maximum loss with five cycles 16% maximum loss with five cycles Clay Lumps and Friable Particles AASHTO T 112 2% maximum 2% maximum Natural Fines N/A 0% 10% maximum C. Meet the gradation requirements in Table 6. (AASHTO T 11, AASHTO T 27) Table 6 Aggregate Gradations (Percent Passing by Dry Weight of Aggregate) Sieve Size ½ inch Ǫ inch Control Sieves ¾ inch 100.0 ½ inch 90.0 – 100.0 100.0 ǪLQFK < 90 90.0 - 100.0 No. 4 < 90 No. 8 28.0 - 58.0 32.0 - 67.0 No. 200 2.0 – 10.0 2.0 – 10.0 Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 13 of 20 2.3 ADDITIVES / STABILIZERS A. Hydrated Lime: Meet the requirements of Section 02746. B. Warm Mix Additive: Meet all the mix design requirements for Hot Mix Asphalt when used. 1. Notify the engineer of all warm mix additives used on the project. 2.4 RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) (OPTIONAL) A. Do not adjust the asphalt binder grade. B. Do not adjust the asphalt binder grade when RAP content is not more than 15 percent by total weight of the hot mix and RAP asphalt binder content is not more than 15 percent of the total asphalt binder content by weight. C. Do not use more than 15 percent RAP. D. RAP aggregate is required to meet Table 5 with exception of Sand Equivalent. Refer to AASHTO T 176. 2.5 VOLUMETRIC MIX DESIGN A. Perform Superpave Volumetric Mix Design according to UDOT Materials Manual of Instruction Section 960 and the following: 1. Incorporate hydrated lime into all designs. Refer to Section 02746. 2. Comply with Table 7 and Table 8. B. Obtain Department approval for the mix design. Refer to the UDOT Materials Manual of Instruction Section 960. 1. Submit for verification at least 10 working days before beginning paving. 2. Do not begin paving until verification is complete. Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 14 of 20 Table 7 Superpave Volumetric Mix Design Compaction Stage Number of Gyrations (N) % of Gmm (AASHTO T 209) Voids Filled with Asphalt (VFA) (%) Initial 5 91.5 Design 50 98.5 90-95 Maximum 75 100.0 Table 8 Mix Design Requirements HMA design mixing and compaction temperatures Provided by the approved mix design Dust Proportion Range 0.6 - 1.40 Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA) at Ndesign AASHTO R 35.9.2 using Gsb Oven Dry. Equation based on percent of total mix. 15.0% - 17.0% for ½ inch 16.0% - 18IRUǪLQFK Air voids at Ndesign 1.0 % - 1.5 % Hamburg Wheel Tracker UDOT MOI 990, Slab air voids 3.5 – 4.5% Water temp: 54๦ C 50 Design Gyrations < 7.0 mm at 20,000 Cycles < 10.0 mm at 40,000 Cycles Draindown (AASHTO T 305) 0.3 max 2.6 CONTRACTOR INITIATED CHANGES TO MIX DESIGN A. The Department may allow up to two minor target changes to the most current verified mix design per project, per mix design, without penalty to the Contractor. 1. The Department charges $1,000 for each additional minor target change. B. The Department performs up to two volumetric mix design verifications per project, per mix design, at no cost to the Contractor. 1. The Department charges $3,000 for each additional laboratory or field verification required including all laboratory or field volumetric mix design verifications required due to contractor initiated target changes. C. Submit requests in writing to the Engineer at least 12 hours before incorporating changes into production. Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 15 of 20 1. Include documentation supporting correlation between suggested minor target change and mix design volumetric requirements. 2. Acceptable documentation may include Department or Contractor testing data. 3. The Region Materials Engineer approves the target change if the mix meets the requirements. D. Do not make changes to production mix until the request is reviewed and approved. E. Submit a new laboratory volumetric mix design for any change made to mix design properties other than gradation. 1. When adding or modifying an additive/stabilizer to the mix design, only the portions of the verification affected by the addition or modification of the additive/stabilizer need to be verified. F. The Engineer may require Hamburg Wheel-Track testing after a minor target change to evaluate the performance of the mix with the target change. 2.7 TACK COAT Refer to Section 02748. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 HMA A. Dry aggregate to an average moisture content of not more than 0.2 percent by weight. 1. May be verified by AASHTO T 255. 2. Adjust burners to avoid damage or soot contamination of the aggregate. B. Treat aggregate with hydrated lime. Refer to Section 02746. 1. Method A or B 2. The Department applies a deduction for mix produced by a non- certified supplier to cover the costs of inspection. 3. The deduction is applied according to the UDOT Quality Management Plan 514 Hot-Mix Asphalt. Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 16 of 20 C. Coat with asphalt binder 100 percent of the particles passing and 98 percent of the particles retained on the No. 4 sieve. 1. May be verified by AASHTO T 195. 2. Discontinue operation and make necessary corrections if material is not properly coated. D. Maintain temperature of the HMA between the limits identified on the Volumetric Mix Design Verification Letter for mixing and compacting. 1. The Department rejects materials heated over the identified limits. 2. Remove all material rejected by the Department for overheating. 3.2 HMA PLANT A. Provide the following: 1. Positive means to determine the moisture content of aggregate on a daily basis. 2. Positive means to sample all material components. 3. Sensors to measure the temperature of the HMA at discharge. 4. The ability to maintain discharge temperature of the mix according to the mix design. B. Asphalt Binder Storage Tanks 1. Provide a positive means for separating and identifying asphalt grades when multiple products are used in mix production. 2. Provide positive means of determining the quantity of material in the tank at any time. 3. Provide a positive means of sampling the asphalt binder from the tanks. a. The Engineer determines a common sampling point where multiple products are used in mix production. 3.3 PRODUCTION CONTROL LIMITS A. Apply the production control requirements as outlined in Table 9. B. Action Limit 1. Take appropriate action when air voids or VMA at Ndes averaged for each lot are within the Action Limit. 2. Continue paving the next scheduled work day at the Contractors discretion. 3. Enter into the Cease Production Limit after three (3) consecutive production lots within the Action Limit. C. Cease Production Limit 1. Take appropriate action when air voids or VMA at Ndes averaged for each lot are within the cease Production Limit. Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 17 of 20 2. Submit a letter to the Engineer providing information on production changes to be made along with Contractor volumetric data verifying the results. 3. Suspend paving until Contractor provides test results from a minimum of two samples meeting the gradation and asphalt content requirements in Table 2 and air void and VMA requirements for the proceed limit in Table 9 a. Produce and place material for Cease Production evaluation at a location outside of the project limits. b. Allow UDOT 24 hours to review the volumetric data. c. Up to two (2) occurrences per project per year of cease production, contract time may be added for the necessary days missed to correct the cease production item(s). 1) Submit critical path information for evaluation. 2) Maximum ten (10) calendar days per project. 3) Additional cease production occurrences per project will not be provided with additional contract time. 4. The Engineer may require a new mix design after two (2) cease- production lots. Table 9 Production Control for VMA VMA (%) Range from Target Value (TV) X = Average Value (Minimum of three Samples) Air Voids (%) Range from Target Value (TV) X = Average Value (Minimum of three Samples) Action X > TV - 1.3 and X < TV + 1.3 X > TV - 1.0 and X < TV + 1.3 Proceed Limit X ื TV - 1.3 DQG;79- 1.5 or X 79+ 1.3 and X ื TV + 1.5 X ื TV - 1.0 and X > TV - 1.5 or X 79+ 1.3 and X < TV + 1.8 Action Limit This Section, Article 3.3.B X < TV - 1.5 or X > TV + 1.5 X ื TV - 1.5 RU;79 Cease Production Limit This Section, Article 3.3.C 3.4 LABORATORY CORRELATION A. Perform split-sample, paired t-testing with the Department based on project quality control testing using Department qualified lab. Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 18 of 20 1. Perform split-sample, paired t analysis on all mix acceptance tests and tests related to volumetric properties. 2. Perform paired t analysis as defined in the UDOT Materials Manual of Instruction, Appendix C. 3. Continue paired t-testing until at least two consecutive production GD\VPHHWĮ = 0.05 for a two tailed distribution. 4. Resolve discrepancies in lab results within the first five production days. a. Cease production if the requirements for two consecutive days of the first five days cannot be met. b. Submit a corrective action plan to the Engineer before production continues indicating the changes in procedures that will be implemented to correct the deficiencies. c. Both Contractor and Department labs must make paired t test results available within 24 hours of sampling. 3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Locate, reference, and protect all utility covers, monuments, curb and gutter, and other components affected by the paving operations. B. Remove all moisture, dirt, sand, leaves, and other objectionable material from the prepared surface before placing the tack coat and mix. C. Complete spot leveling, lane-leveling or profile leveling before placing pavement courses. 1. Place, spread, and compact leveling mix on portions of the existing surface. 2. Fill and compact any localized potholes more than 1 inch deep. 3. Allow compacted mix to cool sufficiently to below 150 degrees F to provide a stable structural platform before placing additional lifts of HMA. D. Apply tack coat to all paved surfaces and longitudinal and transverse joints before applying a leveling course or pavement lift as required in Section 02748. E. Allow sufficient cure time for prime coat/tack coat before placing HMA. Refer to Section 02748. Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 19 of 20 3.6 SURFACE PLACEMENT A. Adjust the production of the mixing plant and material delivery until a steady paver speed is maintained. B. Refer to Section 01554, Project Plans, and TC Series Standard Drawings for pavement edge slope required to safely maintain traffic. C. Do not allow construction vehicles, general traffic, or rollers to pass over the uncompacted end or edge of freshly placed mix until the mat temperature drops to a point where damage or differential compaction will not occur D. Echelon paving is the preferred method for constructing a longitudinal joint. When full-width or Echelon paving is impractical and more than one pass is required, provide a compactable sloped edge adjacent to the next lane. 1. Coat edge with tack coat according to Section 02748 at the same application rate as the surface placement. a. Angle nozzle to allow for proper application on the vertical edge. b. Provide a 6 inch overlap of tack coat beyond the longitudinal and transverse joints. E. Construct the longitudinal joint to within 6 inches of the centerline, the lane lines or at the center of the lane but never in a wheel path. Offset longitudinal joints 6 to 12 inches in succeeding courses. 1. Core and test all longitudinal joints for compaction according to the specification if the lift is 2 or more inches thick. 2. Verify all edges of the adjacent areas to through lanes have straight and uniform longitudinal lines and neat vertical edges. 3. Fill core holes with HMA, SMA, or high AC content cold mix and compact. F. Offset transverse construction joints at least 6 ft longitudinally. G. Taper the end of a course subjected to traffic at approximately 50:1 (horizontal to vertical). 1. Make a transverse joint by saw or wheel cutting and remove the portion of the pass that contains the tapered end before placing fresh mix. 2. Tack the contact surfaces before fresh mix is placed against the compacted mix. Highly Modified Hot Mix Asphalt (HMHMA) 02741S – 20 of 20 H. Use a motor grader, spreader box, or other approved spreading methods for projects under 180 yd2, irregular areas, or for miscellaneous construction such as detours and sidewalks. I. Use a laydown machine for all lane-leveling and profile leveling activities. 1. Place and drag the screed of the paving machine along the high portions of the roadway when lane-leveling to correct, rutting, minor variations and covering roadway crack seal material. 2. Use a string line or follow a given profile when profile leveling to establish a best fit profile from high point to high point. 3.7 COMPACTION A. Do not use vibratory rolling at structures. 1. Use a small compactor in addition to static rolling at structures. B. Operate in a transverse direction next to the back wall and approach slab. 3.8 LIMITATIONS A. Do not place HMA on frozen base or subbase or during adverse climatic conditions such as precipitation or when roadway surface is icy or wet. B. Use a release agent that does not dissolve asphalt and is satisfactory to the Engineer for all equipment and hand tools used to mix, haul, and place the HMA. C. Place HMA from April 15 through October 15, and when the air temperature in the shade and the roadway surface temperature are above 50 degrees F. 1. The Department determines if it is feasible to place HMA outside these dates and temperature limits. 2. Obtain authorization from the Engineer before paving outside these requirements. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Surface Restoration Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 11 00-1 SECTION 32 11 00 SURFACE RESTORATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for final grading, topsoil placement, and miscellaneous site work not included under other Sections but required to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork B. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control C. Section 32 90 00 – Final Grading and Landscaping PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil shall meet the requirements of Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. FINAL GRADING 1. Following approval of rough grading the subgrade shall be prepared as follows: a. For riprap, bare soil 24 inches below finish grade or as directed by Engineer. b. For topsoil, scarify 2-inches deep at 4 inches below finish grade. B. TOPSOIL PLACEMENT 1. Topsoil shall be placed over all areas disturbed during construction under any contract except those areas which will be paved, graveled or rip rapped. 2. Topsoil shall be spread in place for lawn and road shoulder seed areas at a 4-inch consolidated depth and at a sufficient quantity for plant beds and backfill for shrubs and trees. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Surface Restoration Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 11 00-2 3. Topsoil shall not be placed in a frozen or muddy condition. 4. Final surface shall be hand or mechanically raked to an even finished surface to finish grade as shown on Drawings. 5. All stones, roots over 4-inches, rubbish, and other deleterious materials shall be removed and disposed of. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Steel Fencing Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 31 13-1 SECTION 32 31 13 STEEL FENCING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish and install steel fencing, posts, gates, etc., where shown on the Drawings and in compliance with these Specifications. Reference Detail C-32-0500. B. Fencing shall be of the chain link type topped with barbed wire. The 6-foot high fabric shall clear the final grade by 3 inches and shall be topped with three strands of barbed wire. The barbed wire shall be angled outward at the top. All components which are to be galvanized shall be hot dipped galvanized, coating to be 1.8 ounces per square foot of surface. Alternate coatings which employ a zinc coating of less than 1.8 ounces per square foot are not acceptable. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete C. Section 05 53 00 - Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CHAIN LINK FABRIC A. Fabric shall be 9-gauge aluminum coated wire woven in a 2-inch diamond mesh conforming to ASTM A491. Top and bottom selvage to have a barbed finish. Minimum weight of coating shall be 0.40 ounce per square foot of wire surface. The coated wire shall have a minimum tensile strength of 80,000 lbs. per square inch. B. Install fabric 3 inches above ground level. Fence shall be stretched tight and securely fastened to posts at points spaced 12 inches apart maximum. 2.02 POSTS A. Posts and rails shall be galvanized standard weight pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM F1083. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Steel Fencing Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 31 13-2 1. Line Posts: Line posts shall be Schedule 40, 2-7/8 inch O.D. galvanized pipe with minimum bending strength of 201 pounds under a 6-foot cantilever load. Line posts shall be spaced at a maximum 10-foot O.C. 2. Terminal Posts: All end, corner, intermediate, and pull posts and gate leaves 6'0" wide and less shall be 3-½ inch O.D. galvanized Schedule 40 pipe with minimum bending strength of 381 pounds on 6-foot cantilever load. Gate posts for gate leaves shall be Schedule 40 pipe complying with ASTM F1083 of diameters as follows: Gate Leaf Width Pipe O.D.Weight per Ft. 0' to 6'3-1/2"9.11 lbs. Over 6' to 13'4"10.79 lbs. Over 13' to 18'6-5/8"18.97 lbs. Over 18'8-5/8"24.7 lbs. 2.03 TENSION WIRE A. Top and bottom tension wire shall be No. 7 gauge aluminum coated steel wire. Fabric shall be securely tied to tension wire at intervals not to exceed 24-inches. 2.04 POST TOPS AND BARBED WIRE SUPPORTS A. Gate, end, corner and line post tops shall be malleable iron or pressed steel and shall be hot dipped galvanized conforming to ASTM A153. B. Extension arms for supporting the three (3) strands of barbed wire for line posts shall be of pressed steel with malleable iron base, or solid aluminum alloy castings. C. Angles for line post extension arms shall be approximately 45 degrees from the vertical and the top slot for barbed wire shall be a minimum of 12 inches above the fabric and a minimum of 10 inches from the fence line. 2.05 BARBED WIRE A. Barbed wire shall consist of three strands of 12-1/2 gauge aluminum coated steel wire with 4-point barbs of 14 gauge aluminum wire spaced 5 inches apart, conforming to ASTM A585. B. Additional strands of barbed wire shall be added beneath the chain link fabric at all ditch crossings to maintain the security of the fence installation. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Steel Fencing Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 31 13-3 2.06 BRACES AND TOP RAILS A. Braces and top rails (where shown on the Drawings) shall be 1.66-inch O.D., Schedule 40 galvanized pipe with minimum vertical bending strength of 202 pounds on 10-foot span. B. Top rails shall be continuous and shall pass through the post tops. The coupling used to join the top rail lengths shall allow for expansion. Brace rails shall be provided at all terminal posts, located between the top and grade lines and extend from the terminal post to the first adjacent post. Braces shall be securely fastened at both ends. Brace ends for receiving brace rails shall be malleable iron or castings of 356.0 (formerly SG70A) alloy, or equivalent of ASTM B26 or B108. C. Truss and stretcher bands shall be 1/8-inch x 7/8-inch pressed steel, supplied with carriage bolts and nuts. Bolts shall be 5/16-inch by 1 1/4-inch. Truss rods shall be 3/8-inch nominal diameter. 2.07 FABRIC TIES A. Wire ties shall be pre-formed 0.148-inch diameter (9 gauge) aluminum. Flat band type ties shall be 1100-H18 or 3003-H14, .064-inch thick by 1/2-inch wide. B. Hog rings for attaching tension wire to fabric shall be 0.105-inch diameter, Alloy 1100-H14. 2.08 GATES A. Gate frames shall be made of 2-inch O.D. ASTM F1083 pipe, 2.72 lbs. per foot hot dipped galvanized. Fabric shall match fence. Gate frames shall be welded or assembled with riveted corner castings. Gate frames shall be equipped with 3/8-inch diameter adjustable truss bars. Hinges shall be ball and socket. B. Gate shall be equipped with positive latching device with provision for padlocking. Personnel gates shall be minimum 36-inch clear opening. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. LAYOUT AND BRACING 1. All line posts shall be spaced equidistant in the fence line on a maximum of 10-foot centers. Posts shall be set plumb in concrete bases as detailed on Drawings. The top of the posts shall be brought to a smooth grade line. The wire fence shall be set accurately to line and grade and shall be plumb. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Steel Fencing Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 31 13-4 2. End, corner, pull or intermediate posts shall be placed in the following locations: corners; changes in direction; abrupt changes in grade; intervals no greater than 500 feet in the fence line. Each end or gate post shall have one brace assembly and each corner or intermediate post shall have two brace assemblies. 3. Horizontal braces shall be provided at all terminal posts, corner posts, and intermediate posts between top rail and ground and shall extend from the above-mentioned posts to the first adjacent line posts. Braces shall be securely fastened to the line posts by brace ends and brace bands and to the terminal posts by approved rail end connectors. Diagonal brace rods shall be trussed from the brace end on the line post back to the terminal post, corner post or intermediate post and fastened to it by an approved connector. B. POST FOUNDATIONS 1. Post holes shall be in true alignment and of sufficient size to provide a permanent foundation of concrete. Holes shall be well centered on the posts. A minimum diameter of 12 inches shall be required for all posts. 2. Post foundations shall be carefully rodded or tamped into place. The top of concrete shall extend 2 inches above ground line and shall be neatly troweled and leveled up from edges to the posts so as to have a pitch outward in all directions. 3. No materials shall be installed on the posts, nor shall any load be applied to the posts within 3 days after the individual post foundation is completed. 4. All concrete shall be Class "B" in conformance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in- Place Concrete. C. RESETTING OF EXISTING FENCE 1. Where shown on the Drawings that resetting of existing fence is required, the fence, after resetting, shall be in a condition that is equal to or better than before the fence was removed. 2. The Contractor shall replace any of the fence components which have been unnecessarily damaged by him. D. PADLOCK AND KEYS 1. One solid brass padlock shall be furnished with each gate. Padlocks shall be master keyed to the system in coordination with Section 05 53 00 - Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors. E. TEMPORARY FENCING Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Steel Fencing Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 31 13-5 1. The Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary fencing and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings or as required during construction to adequately secure the site prior to installation of the permanent fence. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Grading and Landscaping Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 90 00-1 SECTION 32 90 00 FINAL GRADING AND LANDSCAPING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for final grading, topsoiling, seeding, and miscellaneous site work not included under other Sections, but required to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Under this Section, all areas of the project site disturbed by excavation, materials storage, temporary roads, etc., shall be reseeded as specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control B. Section 32 11 00 – Surface Restoration 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Utah Fertilizer Act (Utah Code Annotated: Title 4, Chapter 13) B. Utah Fertilizer Act Governing Fertilizers and Soil Amendments (R68-3) C. Utah Seed Act D. UDOT Standard Specification Section 02922 – Seed, Turf Seed, and Turf Sod 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data 2. Certification of all materials 3. Three (3) copies of composition and germination certification and of test results for grass seed. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Grading and Landscaping Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 90 00-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Upon completion and approval of the rough grading, the Contractor shall place the topsoil over all areas disturbed during construction under any contract except those areas which will be paved, graveled or rip rapped. Topsoil shall not be placed in a frozen or muddy condition and shall contain no toxic materials harmful to grass growth. Topsoil shall be as defined under Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork. 2.02 WATER A. Water will not be provided by the Owner for construction, landscaping, irrigation, or other uses. The contractor shall procure any water necessary to complete the landscaping work. Once final landscaping has been completed and approved the contractor shall coordinate with individual property owners to take over watering and maintenance of newly installed landscaping. 2.03 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEMS A. Contractor shall be responsible to repair or replace any landscape irrigation systems that are damaged during construction. Coordinate with Owner to replace damaged components with materials that match the original condition and that will maintain existing functionality. 2.04 FERTILIZER A. Fertilizer shall be a complete commercial fertilizer with components derived from commercial sources. Fertilizer analysis shall be determined from field soil sampling in appropriate number taken by the Contractor and analyzed by the Utah Department of Agriculture Fertilizer Lab or other independent laboratory. Contractor shall furnish fertilizer in accordance with the requirements and recommendations of the Utah Department of Agriculture. B. One-quarter of the Nitrogen shall be in the form of nitrates, one-quarter in the form of ammonia salts, and one-half in the form of natural organic Nitrogen. Available Phosphoric Acid shall be free from superphosphate, bone, or tankage. Potash shall be Sulphate of Potash. Elements shall conform to the standards of Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. C. Fertilizer shall be delivered in standard size bags marked with the weight, analysis of contents, and the name of the manufacturer. Fertilizer shall be stored in weatherproof storage areas and in such a manner that its effectiveness will not be impaired.06 1 5 1 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Grading and Landscaping Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 90 00-3 2.05 LIME A. At least 50% shall pass a No. 200 U.S.S. mesh sieve. At least 90% shall pass a No. 100 U.S.S. mesh sieve and 100% shall pass a No. 10 U.S.S. mesh sieve. Total carbonates shall not be less than 80% or 44.8% Calcium Oxide equivalent. For the purpose of calculation, total carbonates shall be considered as Calcium Carbonate. 2.06 SOD A. Contractor to install sod in residential properties where turf has been disturbed. Coordinate with property owner to match grass type that was removed. 2.07 GRASS SEED A. The Contractor shall furnish the kinds and amounts of seed to be seeded in all areas disturbed by the construction work. All seed shall be labeled to show that it meets the requirements of the Utah Seed Act. All seed must have been tested within six (6) months immediately preceding the planting of such material on the job. B. The inoculant for treating legume seed shall be a pure culture of nitrogen-fixing bacteria prepared specifically for the species. Inoculants shall not be used later than the date indicated on the container. The quality of the seed shall conform to the following: Type Minimum Seed Purity (%) Minimum Germination (%) Maximum Weed Seed (%) Fescue (fungus free)98 90 1.00 Hybrid Rye 98 85 0.10 German Millet 98 85 0.50 Browntop Millet 98 85 0.50 C. All seed shall be in conformance with Utah Seed Act for restricted noxious weeds. D. Seed mixtures to be used on the project shall be as follows: Permanent Seeding 150#/acre Kentucky 31 Tall Fescue (Add 25#/acre German Millet (Setaria Italica) in May. Add 25#/acre Hybrid Rye (Secale cereale) during Nov. Temporary Winter Seeding 120#/acre Hybrid Rye (Lolium multifloruml) and 50#/acre German Millet (Secale cereale) Temporary Summer Seeding 40#/acre Browntop Millet (Urochloa ramose) or 50#/acre German Millet (Setaria Italica) Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Grading and Landscaping Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 90 00-4 E. On cut and fill slopes 2:1 or steeper add 30#/acre of German Millet or Browntop Millet to the P seed mixture. 2.08 WOOD CELLULOSE FIBER MULCH A. For use in hydroseeding grass seed in combination with fertilizers and other approved additions, shall consist of especially prepared wood cellulose fibers such as "Wood-Lok 300" manufactured by Applegate Mulch, "Enviro-Mix" manufactured by Profile, or equal, and have no growth or germination inhibiting factors, and be dyed green. B. The wood cellulose fiber shall have the additional characteristic of dispersing rapidly in water to form a homogeneous slurry and remain in such state when agitated in the hydraulic mulching unit, or adequate equal, with the specified materials. C. When applied, the wood cellulose fiber with additives will form an absorptive mat but not a plant inhibiting membrane, which will allow moisture, natural or mechanical, to percolate into underlying soil. D. The mulch shall be supplied, compressed in packages containing 50 pounds of material having an equilibrium air dry moisture content at time of manufacture of 12% plus or minus 3%. Wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be stored in a weatherproof storage area and in such a manner that effectiveness will not be impaired. 2.09 STRAW MULCH A. Straw mulch shall be spread manually or by use of a straw blower. Straw used for mulch shall be small grain hay. Hay shall be undamaged, air dry, threshed straw, free of undesirable weed seed. Straw mulch is not required for seeded areas treated by hydroseeding or with a temporary soil stabilizer. B. Tackifier for securing straw mulch shall be Contact AT manufactured by Profile Products, M-Binder manufactured by Granite Seed, or Lawn Tack as manufactured by Rhino, or approved equal. 2.10 TEMPORARY SOIL STABILIZER A. Temporary soil stabilizers may be used in place of temporary seeding, as approved by the Owner or Engineer. The temporary agent for soil erosion control shall consist of an especially prepared plant-based or cementitious highly concentrated powder which, when mixed with water, forms a thick liquid such as "DustOut” manufactured by DustOutTM, "Stabilizer” manufactured by Stabilizer Solutions, or "SoiLokTM” as manufactured by Prime Resins, or equal, and having no growth or germination inhibiting factors. The agent shall be used for bare soil stabilization or hydroseeding grass seed in combination with other approved amendments resulting in a highly viscous slurry which, when sprayed directly on the soil, forms a wind and rain resistant crust. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Grading and Landscaping Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 90 00-5 2.11 ROLLED EROSION CONTROL MATTINGS A. The rolled erosion control products (RECMs) shall be as specified in Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 2.12 RIPRAP AND HERBICIDES A. Furnish and install sufficient quantity of landscape gravel or riprap to cover over the ground to a minimum 4-inch depth for gravel and 24-inch depth for riprap, unless otherwise noted, or indicated on the Drawings. Also furnish and apply an approved herbicide to the subgrade surface just prior to installing the landscape gravel or riprap. B. During placing, the stone shall be graded so that the smaller stones are uniformly distributed through the mass. The Contractor may place the stone by mechanical methods, augmented by hand placing where necessary or ordered by the Engineer. The placed riprap shall form a properly graded, dense, neat layer of stone. C. All topsoil and vegetative matter shall be removed from the subgrade surfaces prior to the application of the weed killer (herbicide) and to the placement of landscape gravel or riprap. Apply commercial-type herbicide as preemergence control of miscellaneous grasses and broadleaf weeds in granular or liquid form such as "Treflan", "Dymid", or equal. Methods and rates of application shall be in strict compliance to manufacturer's directions and acceptable to the Engineer. D. The herbicide selected shall be safe for use around ornamental plantings, have long-lasting weed control, and shall be resistant to leaching away under excessive rainfall. E. A second application of the herbicide shall be made on the surface of the landscape gravel or riprap sometime after the first six (6) months, but not later than 12-months. Same methods and rates apply as specified previously. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GRADING 1. After approval of the rough grading, the Contractor shall commence his preparations of the subgrade for the various major conditions of the work as follows: a. Bare soil for riprap area at subgrade (24-inches below final grade, or as directed by the Engineer). Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Grading and Landscaping Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 90 00-6 b. Topsoil for lawn and road shoulder seed area - scarify 2-inch depth of subgrade (4-inches below final grade) prior to placing topsoil. 2. Final surface grading of the top-soiled, landscape graveled, and riprapped areas shall be mechanically raked or hand raked to an even finished surface alignment. B. TOPSOIL 1. Topsoil shall be spread in place for quantity required for lawn and road shoulder seed areas at 4-inch consolidated depth, and sufficient quantity for certain plant beds and backfill for shrubs and trees as specified. C. SEEDBED PREPARATION 1. Prepare all areas to receive temporary or permanent seeding measures prior to planting. 2. Topsoil shall be placed in areas to be seeded and roughened with tracked equipment or other suitable measures. Slopes steeper than 3:1 may be roughened by grooving, furrowing, tracking, or stairstep grading. Slopes flatter than 3:1 should be grooved by disking, harrowing, raking, operating planting equipment on the contour. 3. Soil amendments including, but not limited to, lime and fertilizer shall be spread as necessary, and at the rates specified in this Section. Seeding shall be as per the type and rates specified in this Section. Seed shall be broadcast as soon as possible following roughening, before surface has been sealed by rainfall. D. HYDROSEEDING AND GRASS 1. The Contractor shall grow a stand of temporary or permanent grass by hydroseeding method on all disturbed areas. The Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory growth of grass throughout the period of the one year guarantee. 2. The Contractor's work shall include the preparation of the topsoil and bare soil seed bed, application of fertilizer, limestone, mulching, inoculant, temporary soil stabilizer, watering, and all other operations necessary to provide a satisfactory growth of sod at the end of the one-year maintenance period. Areas without satisfactory sod at the end of one (1) year shall be replanted until satisfactory growth is obtained and acceptable to the Engineer. 3. All areas to be seeded shall be done by the hydraulic seeding method including all additives and amendments required. A "Reinco", "Finn", or "Bowie" type hydromulcher with adjustable nozzles and extension hoses, or equal, shall be utilized. General capacity of tank should range from 500 to 2,500 gallons, or as approved by the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Grading and Landscaping Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 90 00-7 4. Hydraulic seeding shall be carried out in three steps. Step one shall consist of the application of lime. In step two the seed mixture shall be mixed with the fertilizer, wood cellulose fiber mulch, and any required inoculants and applied to the seed bed. Step three shall consist of application of top dressing during the first spring or fall, whichever comes first, after step two. 5. Top dressing shall consist of a commercial grade fertilizer plus Nitrogen or other analysis as may be recommended by soil testing. Types and application rates of seed mixtures, lime, fertilizer, and wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be as shown in the Seeding Schedule. 6. Ingredients for the mixture and steps should be dumped into a tank of water and thoroughly mixed to a homogeneous slurry and sprayed out under a minimum of 300-350 pounds pressure, in suitable proportions to accommodate the type and capacity of the hydraulic machine to be used. Applications shall be evenly sprayed over the ground surface. The Contractor shall free the topsoil of stones, roots, rubbish, and other deleterious materials and dispose of same off the site. The bare soil, except existing steep embankment area, shall be rough raked to remove stones, roots, and rubbish over 4-inches in size, and other deleterious materials and dispose of same off the site. 7. No seeding should be undertaken in windy or unfavorable weather, when the ground is too wet to rake easily, when it is in a frozen condition, or too dry. Any bare spots shown in two to three weeks shall be recultivated, fertilized at half the rate, raked, seeded, and mulched again by mechanical or hand broadcast method acceptable to the Engineer. 8. Areas that have been manually seeded or hydroseeded with a temporary seed mixture shall be mowed to a height of less than 2inches and scarified prior to hydroseeding with the permanent seed mixture. 9. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, protection for all seeded areas against trespassing and damage at all times until acceptance of the work. Slopes shall be protected from damage due to erosion, settlement, and other causes and shall be repaired promptly at the Contractor's expense. 10. The Contractor shall water newly seeded areas of the lawn and road shoulder mix once a week until the grasses have germinated sufficiently to produce a healthy turf, or unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Each watering shall provide three (3) gallons per square yard. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary hoses, sprinklers, and connections. 11. The first and second cutting of the lawn grasses only shall be done by the Contractor. All subsequent cuttings will be done by the Owner's forces in a manner specified by the Contractor. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Grading and Landscaping Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 90 00-8 E. DITCH AND SWALE EROSION PROTECTION 1. All ditches and swales indicated on the Drawings shall be lined with a rolled erosion control matting (RECM). The area to be covered shall be properly graded and hydroseeded before the RECM is installed. Installation shall be in accordance with Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control. F. MAINTENANCE 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all seeded areas through the end of a one-year warranty period, beginning from the date of acceptance of final seeding and landscaping as determined by the Engineer. Maintenance shall include but not be limited to, annual fertilization, mowing, repair of seeded areas, irrigation, and weed control. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, protection for all seeded areas against trespassing and damage at all times until acceptance of the work. Slopes shall be protected from damage due to erosion, settlement, and other causes and shall be repaired promptly at the Contractor's expense. 2. Annual fertilization shall consist of an application of 500#/acre of 10-10-10 commercial grade fertilizer, or its equivalent and 60#/acre of nitrogen in early fall, or other analysis as may be determined by soil test. Annual fertilization shall be in addition to top dressing and shall be performed by the Contractor each fall season after planting until the work is substantially complete. 3. Mowing shall be scheduled so as to maintain a minimum stand height of 4-inches or as directed by the Engineer. Stand height shall be allowed to reach 8 to 10-inches prior to mowing. 4. All seeded areas shall be inspected on a regular basis and any necessary repairs or reseedings made within the planting season, if possible. If the stand should be over 60% damaged, it shall be re-established following the original seeding recommendations. 5. Weed growth shall be maintained mechanically and/or with herbicides. When chemicals are used, the Contractor shall follow the current Utah Agricultural Experiment Stations' weed control recommendations and adhere strictly to the instructions on the label of the herbicide. No herbicide shall be used without prior approval of the Engineer. G. CLEANUP 1. The Contractor shall remove from the site all subsoil excavated from his work and all other debris including, but not limited to, branches, paper, and rubbish in all landscape areas, and remove temporary barricades as the work proceeds. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Grading and Landscaping Cottonwoods Connection Page 32 90 00-9 2. All areas shall be kept in a neat, orderly condition at all times. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall clean up the entire landscaped area to the satisfaction of the Engineer. H. SEEDING SCHEDULE 1. Seeding shall comply with UDOT Standard Specification Section 02922 – Seed, Turf Seed, and Turf Sod. 2. All seeding and mulching to be completed by the Contractor shall conform to the following schedule. No permanent seeding shall be performed from December 1 – September 15. A late winter exception to the seeding window may be obtained from the Engineer if suitable weather and soil conditions exist. Temporary seed mixtures will be used during these times if seeding is necessary. Areas seeded with temporary seed mixtures shall be reseeded by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner with permanent seed as directed by the Engineer. 3. Application rates of seed mixtures, lime, fertilizer, mulch and top dressing are shown in the schedule. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 39.23-1 SECTION 33 05 39.23 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials in connection with the installation of exterior underground reinforced concrete pipe for sewer, low-head pressure piping, and concrete culverts and storm drains as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. B. Special care shall be exercised during delivery, distribution and storage of the pipe and fittings to prevent damage. Damaged pipe will be rejected and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Storage of pipe and fittings, prior to use, shall be in such a manner as to keep the materials clean and dry. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work B. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork C. Section 33 05 61 – Utility Structures D. Section 40 05 00  Basic Mechanical Requirements. E. Section 40 06 20  Schedules 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. ASTM C 76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. B. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement C. ASTM C 361 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head Pressure Pipe D. ASTM C 443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets E. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) F. ASTM C 990 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants 09 2 3 2 0 2 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 39.23-2 G.ASTM C 1479 - Standard Practice for Installation of Precast Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe Using Standard Installations H.ASTM C 1628 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Gravity Flow Sewer Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets I.ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) J.ASTM D 4253 - Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table K.ASTM D 4254 - Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density L.AASHTO M 43 - Standard Specification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Shop drawings and certificates for the piping work as outlined in the General Conditions and Division 1. 2. Product Data - Complete reinforced concrete pipe product data showing conformance to the Contract Drawings and these specifications, including, but not limited to materials used and conformance to the noted standards and specifications. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCED CONCRETE SEWER PIPE A. Reinforced concrete sewer pipe (RCP) shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C 76, Wall Type B or C, unless otherwise specified herein; and shall be of the class that equals or exceeds the pipe class as specified in Section 40 06 20  Schedules. Minimum pipe laying lengths shall be four (4) feet. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type II. B. Pipe shall have bell and spigot ends with O-ring rubber gaskets. The spigot end of the pipe shall contain a special groove or slot to receive and hold the gasket in position during the joint assembly. The complete joint shall be subjected to hydrostatic tests conforming to ASTM C 443. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 39.23-3 C. All pipe and specials shall be aged at the manufacturing plant for at least fourteen (14) days before delivery to the job site. 2.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE CULVERT AND STORM DRAIN PIPE A. All reinforced concrete culvert and drain pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C76, Wall Type B or C, and shall be of the class that equals or exceeds the pipe class as specified herein or as shown on the Contract Drawings. Minimum pipe laying length shall be four (4) feet. B. Joints for the reinforced concrete culvert and storm drain pipe shall have bell and spigot ends with preformed flexible joint sealants meeting the requirements of ASTM C 990. C. All pipe shall be aged at the manufacturing plant for at least fourteen (14) days before delivery to the job site. 2.03 BACKFILL MATERIAL A. The material obtained from excavation of the pipe trench or elsewhere on site with a particle size not greater than 3 inches shall be used for pipe backfill if they conform with the soil classes given in Table 1. Imported materials meeting the criteria of Table 1 may also be used. Table 1: Acceptable Backfill Material and Compaction Requirements Soil Classifications Description ASTM D 1479 ASTM D 2487 AASHTO M 43 Minimum Standard Proctor Density % Graded or crushed, crushed stone, gravel Class I -- 5 56 Dumped Well-graded sand, gravels and gravel/sand mixtures, poorly graded sand, gravels and gravel/sand mixtures; little or no fines Class II GW GP SW SP 57 6 95% Silty or clayey gravels, gravel/sand/silt or gravel and clay mixtures; silty or clayey sands, sand/clay or sand/silt mixtures Class III GM GC SM SC Gravel and Sand (<10% fines) 95% PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The laying of reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to the applicable sections of the Concrete Pipe Handbook as published by the American Concrete Pipe Association. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 39.23-4 B. Trenching, bedding and backfilling shall be as specified in Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork of these Specifications and Paragraph 2.04 - Backfill Material of this Specification. Under no condition shall pipe be laid in water or when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. C. All pipes and fittings shall be handled carefully in loading and unloading. They shall be lifted by hoists or lowered on skidways in such a manner as to avoid shock. Derricks, ropes or other suitable equipment shall be used for lowering the pipe into the trench. Pipe and fittings shall not be dropped or dumped. D. Each pipe and fitting shall be inspected before it is lowered into the trench. The interior of the pipe and all joint surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall thereafter be maintained clean. The open ends of pipe shall be securely plugged whenever pipe laying is not in progress. E. Pipe and fittings shall be selected so that there will be as small a deviation as possible at the joints and so that inverts present a smooth surface. All joints shall be installed, made up and inspected in accordance with approved printed instructions of the manufacturer. Pipe and fittings which do not fit together to form a tight joint will be rejected. F. Cutting of reinforced concrete pipe will be permitted only at connections to structures and be accomplished by abrasive saws. Cutting of other pipe materials shall be done only with mechanical cutters and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. G. Pipe shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. H. If an adequate foundation for the pipe is not available at the desired depth, additional excavation shall be required, and the foundation brought to desired grade with suitable granular material. I. Rock outcroppings, very soft soils such as muck, and other similar materials not providing proper foundation support shall be removed/replaced with suitable granular material. J. Bedding material directly under the pipe invert shall be left in native condition and not compacted. Pipe shall be placed on the bedding, then backfilled under the pipe haunches before further backfill is placed. K. Class I materials may be dumped around pipe. Voids shall be eliminated by knifing under and around the pipe or by other approved technique. L. Inorganic silts, and gravelly, sandy, or silty clays, and other Class IV materials (not shown in Table 1) shall not be used for pipe backfill. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 39.23-5 M. Any section of the pipe that is found defective in material, alignment, grade, joints, or otherwise, shall be satisfactorily corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. N. Compaction 1. Place and assure backfill and fill materials achieve an equal or higher degree of compaction than undisturbed materials adjacent to the work. 2. In no case shall degree of compaction below “Minimum Compactions” specified be accepted. 3. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or more stringently by other Sections of these Specifications, comply with following trench compaction criteria: Table 2: Minimum Compactions Location Soil Type Density Compacted Select Backfill Cohesive soil 95 percent of maximum dry density by ASTM D698 All applicable areas Cohesionless soils 75 percent of maximum relative density by ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254 Common Trench Backfill Cohesive soils 95 percent of maximum dry density by ASTM D698 Under pavements roadways surfaces, D698 within highway rights-of-way, adjacent to retaining walls Cohesionless soils 75 percent of maximum relative density by ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254 Cohesive soils 95 percent of maximum dry density by ASTM D698 Under turfed, sodded plant seeded, non- traffic areas Cohesionless soils 75 percent of maximum relative density by ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254 4. Ensure backfill materials have moisture content within three (3) percent of optimum moisture content at the time of placement. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Each length of pipe and fittings delivered to the property shall be inspected by the Contractor, in the presence of the Engineer, for flaws, cracks, dimensional tolerances and compliance with the referenced Standards. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with suitable templates or calipers for checking pipe dimensions. Only lengths of pipe and fittings accepted by the Engineer and so marked may be installed in the work. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 39.23-6 3.05 TESTING A. The Contractor shall provide at his own expense, all labor, material, video and measuring devices, water, plugs, or other equipment necessary to perform the required tests on installed reinforced concrete pipe. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. Disposal of water shall be in accordance with Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work.  B. Field Test - Visual Inspection  1. Examine structures and pipes for: a. Physical damage. b. Indication of displacement of pipes or structures, reinforcement, forms, or bedding.   c. Porous areas or voids.  d. Proper placement of seals, gaskets, and embedments. e. Visible infiltration.   2. Verify structures and pipes are set to proper line, grade as per the Contract Drawings, and are plumb.   3. Verify structure and pipe dimensions and thickness match Contract Drawings.  4. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide video recording of all installed storm sewer systems at least 30 days after completion of backfill and one month before Owner or Engineer gives final acceptance for the two-year warranty. The recording shall be made using a color camera, self-propelled or other, having sufficient light to show detail of problem areas and joints. Camera speed shall not exceed 3 feet per second. If problems or concerns are seen by the operator, then the camera shall be reversed and an extended look at the area will be recorded. All recordings will have time, date, and footage displayed. Supplement the video recording with a written log or orally recorded tape log noting observations, findings, and deficiencies shown on the video tape.   a. The video recording inspection shall be performed by an outside independent testing agency acceptable to the Owner or Engineer. b. The video tape and log will be given to the Engineer for review. If the Engineer finds any problems with the storm sewer, the Contractor will repair the problem and re-camera the repaired area before final acceptance will be given, at no added cost to the Owner.   Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 39.23-7 c. Video recording of storm sewer may be waived if pipe diameter is sufficient for human access, as determined by the Engineer. A log shall be developed for such inspection.   d. One copy of the video tape and log will become permanent property of the Engineer and Owner as record.   C. Repair 1. Repair or replace any damaged pipe or work found unacceptable by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Repair all visible leaks.  3. Remove any concrete webs or protrusions.  4. Remove form ties and repair tie holes. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-1 SECTION 33 05 61 UTILITY STRUCTURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and tools required for the design, fabrication, delivery and installment of utility structures and appurtenances in accordance with the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel C. Section 03 15 00 – Concrete Accessories D. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete E. Section 03 40 00 – Precast Concrete F. Section 05 53 00 – Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors G. Section 03 60 00 – Grout H. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork I. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. ASTM C32 - Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale) 2. ASTM C139 - Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes 3. ASTM C478 – Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 04 - 0 6 - 2 2 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-2 4. ASTM C857 – Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures 5. ASTM C923 – Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals 6. ASTM C990 – Specifications for Joints in Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants 7. ASTM C1244 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test Prior to Backfill 8. ASTM C1478 - Standard Specification for Storm Drain Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Structures, Pipes, and Laterals 9. ASTM C1802 - Standard Specification for Design, Testing, Manufacture, Selection, and Installation of Horizontal Fabricated Metal Access Hatches for Utility, Water, and Wastewater Structures 10. ASTM F2510 – Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Corrugated Dual- and Triple-Wall Polyethylene and Polypropylene Pipes 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum structural design loading for underground precast concrete vaults shall be as indicated in ASTM C857, unless otherwise noted herein. Precast items subjected to vehicular traffic shall be designed for H-20 traffic loading. Other precast items shall be designed for a vertical live load of 300 psf. B. Walls of precast items shall be designed for a vertical surcharge resulting in a 100 psf horizontal load. C. Precast manholes and vaults shall be designed to resist flotation when totally empty and subjected to groundwater full height of the manhole/vault. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples and/or Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. In addition to items listed in Section 03 40 00 – Precast Concrete, Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Complete layout and installation Drawings and schedules with clearly marked dimensions. 2. Material certificates on all piping materials. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-3 3. Structural design calculations sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Utah. Design calculations for precast manholes and vaults shall include confirmation structures adequately resist flotation when they are totally empty and subjected to groundwater full height of structure. 4. Results of leakage test. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECAST MANHOLES, VAULTS, AND METER BOXES A. Precast utility structures shall be furnished with water-stops, sleeves and openings as noted on the Drawings. Box out for wall pipes shall conform accurately to the sizes and elevations of the adjoining pipes. Precast utility structures shall be watertight and conform to the requirements of ASTM C 478 and ASTM C857 with the following modifications there to: 1. Materials shall conform to Section 03 40 00 – Precast Concrete. 2. Manholes shall meet the following: a. Manhole section shall have an internal diameter of 4'-0", unless noted otherwise. Clear lid openings shall be 24-inch diameter. b. Minimum manhole wall thicknesses shall be 5 inches for 4-foot and 5-foot diameter manholes, 6 inches for 6-foot diameter manholes and 7 inches for 7-foot diameter manholes. c. Manholes and utility structures shall include ballast concrete and/or other means necessary to ensure manholes resist flotation when empty and subjected to groundwater full height of structure. d. Precast manholes and utility structures shall be as manufactured by Oldcastle, Tindall Corporation, or equal. 3. The date and name of manufacturer shall be marked inside each precast section. 4. No more than two lift holes may be cast or drilled in each section. 5. Dimensions shall be as shown on the Drawings. 6. Covers and frames shall be as specified in Paragraph 2.12. 7. Mechanical Details such as piping, electrical, and other details shall be as shown on the Drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-4 B. Joints between manhole and utility structures riser sections and at base slabs shall be groove type. 2.02 BRICK A. Brick shall be sound, hard-burned common brick conforming to ASTM C32, Grade MS. 2.03 GROUT A. Grout and mortar shall conform to Section 03 60 00 – Grout. 2.04 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall conform to Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.05 REINFORCING A. Reinforcing shall conform to Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel. 2.06 PRECAST CONCRETE A. Precast concrete shall conform to Section 03 40 00 – Precast Concrete. 2.07 CONCRETE BLOCK A. Concrete block shall be solid, rectangular concrete masonry units conforming to ASTM C139. 2.08 CASTINGS A. Casting shall be of the type and size indicated on the Drawings. 2.09 STEPS A. Steps shall be constructed of Grade 60 steel reinforcing rod (min. 1/2-inch) and completely encapsulated with a wear resistant and chemical resistant rubber. B. Each step shall have a minimum vertical load resistance of 800 pounds and a minimum pull-out resistance of 400 pounds. C. The steps shall have 11-inch minimum tread width and shall be placed at 16-inches on center, as shown on the Drawings. D. Steps shall be cast in place with the concrete. E. Steps shall only be installed as shown on the Drawings or required in the Specifications. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-5 2.10 JOINT SEALANT A. Joint sealant shall be a preformed flexible sealant conforming to the requirements of ASTM C990, paragraph 6.2, Butyl Rubber Sealant. Joint sealant shall be Pro-Stik Butyl Sealant by Press-Seal Corporation, Butyl-Nek Join Sealant by Henry Company, CS-102 Butyl Rubber Sealant for all Precast Structures by ConSeal Concrete Sealants, Inc., or equal. 2.11 PIPE TO MANHOLE CONNECTIONS A. The spring set type shall have a stainless-steel interior power sleeve or expander and shall be the PSX assembly by Press-Seal Gasket Corporation, the Kor-N-Seal® | 106- 406 Series assembly by National Pollution Control Systems, or QUIK-LOK Boot Connector by A-LOK Products, Inc, or equal. B. The cast-in-place type shall conform to ASTM C923-18 for sanitary sewer connections between reinforced concrete manhole structures, pipes, and laterals, ASTM C1478-19 for storm drain connections between pipes, and laterals, and ASTM F2510 for storm drain connections between reinforced concrete manhole structures, and dual and triple- wall polyethylene and polypropylene pipes. Sleeves shall include stainless steel take up clamps. C. Flexible seal assemblies shall permit at least an eight (8) degree deflection from the center line of the opening in any direction while maintaining a watertight connection. 2.12 COVERS AND FRAMES A. Covers and frames shall be provided by the utility structure manufacturer. B. Manhole covers and frames shall meet the following requirements: 1. Locate so that there is ready access to the manhole steps 2. Clear opening shall be a minimum of 22 inches, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Watertight manhole frames and covers shall be suitable for 20 psi internal pressure and shall be Neenah Model R-1915, Type E or equal, cast in place. 4. Non-watertight manhole covers shall be perforated and shall be Neenah Model R- 1668, or equal. 5. Storm drain grated inlet frames and grates shall be Neenah R-1878-B7G, East Jordan Iron Works V5660, or equal. 6. Curb inlet frames and grates shall be Neenah R-3067, East Jordan Iron Works EJ 7030, or equal, and shall include frame, grate, and hood. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-6 C. Vault covers shall have lifting handles and shall be bolted with stainless steel bolts complying with Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening. D. The Load Level capacity of fabricated metal access hatches as noted on the Contract Drawings shall be in conformance with the requirements of ASTM C1802. E. Frames and covers for each utility shall be identical throughout the Contract. 2.13 CONCRETE BALLAST A. Concrete ballast shall be Class B concrete in conformance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast- in-Place Concrete. Ballast shall be provided as necessary to ensure manhole resists flotation when empty and subjected to full height groundwater conditions. 2.14 FLEXIBLE JOINT SEALER A. Flexible joint sealer shall be a rubber ring waterstop as manufactured by Fernco Joint Sealer Co., or equal. 2.15 EPOXY BONDING AGENT A. Epoxy bonding agent shall conform to Section 03 15 00 – Concrete Accessories. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling, transporting, and storing of precast items shall comply with Section 03 40 00 – Precast Concrete. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall conform with Section 03 40 00 – Precast Concrete and with the manufacturer's recommendations or to Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Frames and covers or grates shall be set so that tops are at elevations indicated on the Drawings or flush with finished grade where no elevation is indicated. C. Joints between riser sections shall be sealed with joint sealant. D. All openings in utility structures shall have flexible rubber sleeves sized to fit the connecting pipe and installed to provide watertight joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The interior of the sleeve shall be filled with Class B concrete. E. Openings that are too large for flexible rubber sleeves shall utilize rubber bladder seals which are expanded by water injected using a pressure pump. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-7 F. All units shall be installed plumb and level. G. All lift holes and joints shall be filled with non-shrink grout conforming to Section 03 60 00 – Grout, grout inside and out. H. The manhole frames shall be set to their required elevations either with grade rings or with two or three courses of brick masonry laid around the top of the upper wall section. Such brick work shall be given a 1-inch mortar coat on the inside and out. I. Concrete ballast shall be placed so that it bears directly on the utility structure base against the outer wall monolithically encircling the structure for the full height indicated on the Drawings. Additional ballast may be required where the depth or elevation of the structure varies from the Drawings. J. Brick or Concrete Block 1. Brick or concrete block shall be laid with broken joints and all horizontal and vertical joints filled with cement-sand mortar. Outside of walls shall be plastered with a minimum 1-inch thick coat of cement-sand mortar troweled smooth. K. Connection to Existing Pipe 1. Verify the diameter and invert elevation of existing pipe to be connected to new utility structures prior to beginning work on the structures. 2. Provide adequate protection to prevent damage to the existing pipe. 3. Provide adequate means for plugging and/or transferring the existing flow in the pipe to allow for the construction of inverts and grouting. 4. Cut off the existing pipe sufficiently for connection to the new structure and remove. 5. Thoroughly clean all foreign matter and coat the pipe surface with epoxy adhesive where the pipe joins the new structure. 6. Install a flexible joint sealer around the pipe. 7. Grout inside and outside of wall penetration with non-shrink grout. L. Excavation shall conform to Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork. M. Structure bases shall bear on a minimum of 8-inches of compacted stone unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. N. Backfill structures in accordance with Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-8 O. Clean all structures of any accumulation of silt, debris, or foreign matter and keep clean until final acceptance of the work. P. Channel Inverts 1. Inverts shall be placed using Class B concrete with forms sufficient to provide a smooth half-round shape as shown on the Drawings. Manhole bases employing full depth precast inverts are acceptable. 2. Where the slope of the line does not change through a manhole, a constant slope shall be maintained in the invert. Where slope changes occur within a given manhole, the transition shall be smooth and shall occur at the approximate center of the manhole. 3. Inverts shown on the Drawings are taken at the center of the manhole unless otherwise noted. Q. FABRICATION AND CASTING 1. Fabrication and casting shall conform to Section 03 40 00 – Precast Concrete and Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. All base sections designated to receive concrete ballast and all electrical manholes shall extend monolithically a minimum of 6 inches beyond the outside face of the wall for the entire periphery. All other utility structures shall have a standard base. 3. Utility structures built around existing pipe shall have a cast-in-place base slab. R. ADJUSTMENTS TO EXISTING UTILITY STRUCTURES 1. Adjust structures as indicated on the Drawings using concrete or cast iron adjustment rings by approved methods. 2. Clean covers and inlet castings of all foreign material. S. ADJUSTING COLLARS AND FINAL ADJUSTMENTS 1. Adjusting collars shall be as shown on the Drawings, or as necessary meet final grade. Final adjustments shall be made so that the manhole ring and cover will be smooth and flush with the finished grade of the adjacent surface, or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings for manholes shown above grade. 3.03 LEAKAGE TESTING FOR MANHOLES A. All manholes shall be vacuum tested as specified below. Refer to Section 40 05 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements for pipe testing methods and requirements. B. Manhole vacuum testing shall include the following minimum requirements: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-9 1. Testing shall be done in accordance with ASTM C1244 (latest revision). 2. Prior to testing all pipes, holes, and vents entering manhole shall be plugged and braced. 3. Contractor shall have an approved test head and copy of instructions for use by the manufacturer. 4. Contractor shall furnish two (2) certified and calibrated vacuum test gauges for the test. a. A vacuum of 10-inch hg shall be drawn on the manhole, the valve on the vacuum line of the test head closed, and the vacuum pump shut off. The time for the vacuum pressure to drop to 9-inch hg shall be measured. If the test time meets or exceeds the test time as specified in Table 1, the manhole is acceptable; otherwise, the test has failed and the manhole should be checked for leaks, repaired, and re-tested. Table 1 Minimum Vacuum Test Times (Seconds) for Various Manhole Diameters and Depths Manholes Ø (inches) Depth (ft)48 60 72 84 96 108 120 6’15 20 25 29 34 38 43 8 20 26 33 38 45 51 57 10 25 33 41 48 56 63 71 12 30 39 49 57 67 76 85 14 35 46 57 67 78 89 100 16 40 52 67 76 89 101 114 18 45 59 73 86 100 114 128 20 50 65 81 95 111 126 142 22 55 72 89 105 122 139 156 24 59 78 97 114 133 152 170 26 64 85 105 124 144 164 185 28 69 91 113 133 155 177 199 30 74 98 121 143 166 189 213 Add. VF +2.5 +3.25 +4.0 +4.75 +5.5 +6.5 +7.0 3.04 FLUSHING AND TESTING OF SEWERS A. After backfilling, all sewers shall be inspected for obstructions and shall be flushed with water. Flushing shall be a minimum velocity of 2.5 feet per second for a duration acceptable to the Engineer. Flushing shall remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood and other debris which accumulated in the sewer during construction. The Contractor shall provide a means acceptable to the Engineer for removal of debris flushed from each section of sewer. If after flushing, any obstructions remain, they shall be removed at the Contractor's expense. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-10 B. Visual Inspection – Sewer lines shall be visually inspected from every manhole by use of mirrors, television cameras, or other devices for visual inspection, and the lines shall all exhibit a fully circular pattern when viewed from one manhole to the next. Lines which do not exhibit a true line and grade or have structural defects shall be corrected to meet these qualifications. Any visual water infiltration of water into the manhole shall be repaired using hydraulic cement or other approved materials. C. Leakage – Sewers shall be tested for leakage. The program of testing shall fit the conditions as mutually determined by the Engineer and the Contractor. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent any joints from drawing while the sewers or their appurtenances are being tested. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, correct any excess leakage and repair any damage to the pipe and their appurtenances, or to any structures resulting from or caused by these tests. D. Leakage Test Procedure – Each section of sewer shall be tested by closing the lower end of the sewer to be tested and the inlet sewer of the upper manhole with stoppers and filling the pipe and manhole with water to a point 6 feet above the crown of the open sewer in the upper manhole, or, if ground water is present, 6 feet above the sections average adjacent ground water level as indicated by a monitor well installed adjacent to each manhole. The line shall be filled with water prior to testing and allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption, but not less than two (2) hours. After maximum absorption has been reached, the head shall be reestablished and tested for at least six (6) hours maintaining the head specified above by measured additions of water. The sum of these additions shall be the leakage for the test period. 1. If ground water is present to a height of at least 6 feet above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the pipe section to be tested, the leakage test may be made by measuring the rate of infiltration using a suitable weir or other measuring device approved by the Engineer. Whether the test is made by infiltration or exfiltration, the allowable leakage shall not exceed 100 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of sewer being tested. 2. Where the actual leakage exceeds the allowable, the Contractor shall discover the cause and correct it before the sewer will be accepted. For the purpose of this subsection, a section of sewer is defined as that length of sewer between successive manholes or special structures or stub-outs for future connections. E. Low Pressure Compressed Air Test – If the leakage cannot be located by infiltration or exfiltration testing, this type test may be used. The pipeline shall be considered acceptable, when tested at an average pressure of 3.0 psi greater than the average back pressure of any groundwater that may submerge the pipe, if the section under test does not lose air at a rate greater than 0.0030 cfm per sq. ft. of internal pipe surface. F. Deflection Test – No sooner than thirty (30) days after final backfill installation, each section of PVC pipe shall be checked for vertical deflection using an electronic deflectometer or a rigid "GoNoGo" device. Vertical deflection shall not exceed five (5) percent of the inside pipe diameter for PVC pipe. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Structures Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 05 61-11 1. Where the actual deflection exceeds the allowable, the Contractor shall discover the cause and correct it before the pipe will be acceptable. For the purpose of this subsection, a section of sewer is defined as that length of sewer between successive manholes or special structures or stubouts for future connections. G. Cost of Testing and Repairs – Any and all work necessary to bring the line into conformance with the infiltration and deflection specifications shall be performed by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner. All apparent sources of infiltration and excessive deflection shall be repaired by the Contractor. 1. The Contractor shall provide all water, plugs, hoses, pumps, equipment, etc. necessary for the proper flushing and testing of the sewers. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Underground Electrical Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 71 19-1 SECTION 33 71 19 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install underground duct systems, electric manholes, and electric handholes as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. The work shall be complete and shall include excavation, concrete construction, backfilling, and all materials, items, and components required for a complete system. B. The provisions of this Section are applicable to all underground conduit work. All work shall be coordinated with that of the various utility companies and other Contractors. The Contractor shall adhere to all utility company requirements including the serving electric utility. C. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements; Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduit for Electrical Systems; Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems; the applicable sections of Division 31, Earthwork; Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel; 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete; and Section 33 05 61 – Utility Structures. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Products specified herein shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. AASHTO H20 2. ANSI/SCTE 77-2010 – Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit Shop Drawings. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. 12 1 9 2 2 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Underground Electrical Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 71 19-2 B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to, the following: 1. Product data sheets. 2. Outline and dimensional drawings including detailed sections of the manholes and/or handholes. 3. Materials specifications and structural calculations for the manholes sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. 1.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Each electric manhole and handhole cover shall be lettered with the word “Electric”, the manhole or handhole identification number (e.g. UMH-1, EMH-1, EHH-1, etc.), manufacturer's name or trademark, and such other information as the manufacturer may consider necessary, or as specified, for complete identification. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The material covered by this Specification is intended to be standard material of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Material shall be fabricated, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. 2.02 DUCT SYSTEM A. The underground duct system shall be comprised of conduits, conduit bends, and conduit fittings as specified in Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduit for Electrical Systems. Conduits shall be encased in reinforced concrete envelopes, unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. B. Base and intermediate conduit spacers shall be furnished to provide a minimum of two- inch (2”) separation between conduits. Conduit spacers shall be provided in the proper size as required for the conduit that they secure. For example, a 4” conduit spacer shall not be used to secure a 2” conduit. Conduit spacers shall be as manufactured by Carlon Electrical Products Company, Aeroquip Corporation, Underground Devices, Incorporated, or equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Underground Electrical Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 71 19-3 2.03 ELECTRIC MANHOLES A. The concrete manholes shall be complete with metal frames and covers of size and location as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Manhole frames and covers shall be Neenah R-1640C1, or equal, with Type A anchor ring. Entire manhole assembly shall be AASHTO H20 heavy duty rated. Precast manholes shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 33 05 61, Utility Structures. Covers shall be furnished with drop handles. C. All electric manholes shall be provided with non-metallic cable racks. Cable racks shall be rated for the application, with a minimum loading capacity of 450lbs per rack arm. Cable rack system shall be Heavy Duty type as manufactured by Underground Devices, Incorporated or equal. 2.04 ELECTRIC HANDHOLES A. The electric handholes shall be a precast polymer concrete enclosure suitable for use as part of an underground electric raceway system. The enclosure shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI/SCTE 77-2010. B. The enclosure and cover design and test load rating shall be Tier 15. Covers shall be provided with cover hooks. C. The enclosure shall be the straight side design to allow easy adjustment of box to grade. The box shall be stackable for increased depth. D. Handhole opening size shall be as required to suit the application, 6” X 8”, minimum. E. The electric handholes shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Pencell Plastics equivalent, Highline Products equivalent, or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The underground duct system, manholes, and handholes shall be installed as specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions. 3.02 DUCT SYSTEM A. All underground conduit shall be encased in concrete and shall be reinforced. Encasement and reinforcement shall be as indicated in the standard details. Concrete shall be furnished and installed in accordance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. Reinforcing steel shall be furnished and installed in accordance with Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Underground Electrical Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 71 19-4 B. Concrete pours shall be complete from handhole to handhole and from manhole to manhole where practicable. Partial pours in general shall not be permitted. Where a complete pour is impractical, written authorization shall be obtained from the Engineer for the partial pour. C. Conduit ductbank elevations at the manholes and handholes shall be based on minimum ductbank cover as indicated in the standard details, or deeper to avoid conflicts with other obstacles. Where deviation is necessary to clear unforeseen obstacles, the elevations may be changed after authorization by the Engineer. D. Slope all conduits continuously away from structures and buildings with a minimum slope of 3” per 100’ unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. E. The minimum clearance from the top of the concrete encasement and finished grade shall be as indicated in the standard details, except where otherwise accepted in writing by the Engineer or shown on the Drawings. F. Care shall be exercised during excavation for the duct banks to prevent digging too deep. Backfilling of low spots with earth fill will not be permitted unless thoroughly compacted and acceptable to the Engineer. G. If a specific ductbank arrangement is shown on the Drawings, the conduits in that ductbank shall be arranged as shown. Where no specific ductbank arrangement is shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall arrange conduits within each ductbank based on field conditions. Spare conduits shown going from ductbanks into buildings or structures shall be stubbed up in the location(s) as indicated on the Drawings. H. The ends of the bare copper cables embedded in the concrete ductbank shall be connected to structure and/or building ground rings where the ductbanks terminate, and to each other in manholes and handholes as specified herein. I. Care shall be exercised and temporary plugs shall be installed during installation to prevent the entrance of concrete, mortar, or other foreign matter into the conduit system. Conduit spacers shall be utilized to support conduit during the pouring of concrete to prevent movement and misalignment of the conduits. Conduit spacers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions unless otherwise noted. Horizontal spacing of conduit spacers along ductbank shall be as indicated on the Standard Details. J. Where connections to existing underground conduits are indicated, excavate to the maximum depth necessary. After addressing the existing conductors, cut the conduits and remove loose concrete from the conduits before installing new concrete encased ducts. Provide a reinforced concrete collar, poured monolithically with the new duct line, to take the shear at the joint of the duct lines. K. Construct concrete-encased conduits connecting to underground structures to have a flared section adjacent to the manhole to provide shear strength. Construct underground structures to provide shear strength. Construct underground structures to provide for Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Underground Electrical Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 71 19-5 keying the concrete encasement of the duct line into the wall of the structure. Use vibrators when this portion of the encasement is poured to ensure a seal between the encasement and the wall of the structure. L. Six (6) inches above all duct banks, the Contractor shall furnish and install a two (2) inch wide red plastic electrical hazard tape. Tapes shall be metallic detectable type and shall have a continuous message in bold black letters: “ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW.” Tape shall be Detectable Identoline by Brady, or equal. M. The Contractor shall perform all earthwork including excavation, backfill, bedding, compaction, shoring and bracing, grading and restoration of surfaces and seeded areas disturbed during the execution of the work. N. All conduit joints in the duct system shall be staggered such that adjacent conduits do not have joints in the same location. 3.03 ELECTRIC MANHOLES A. Electric manholes shall be installed to a sufficient depth to accommodate the required grading of ducts as well as maintaining a minimum distance of 14” from the bottom of the lowest duct centerline entrances to finished floor line and/or highest duct centerline entrance to the roof. All manholes shall be built on or placed over a 6” layer of well- tamped gravel. B. Duct envelopes and conduit with bell ends shall enter at approximately right angles to the walls, except as may otherwise be shown on the Drawings. C. All concrete work and fully assembled manholes shall be completely watertight and shall be furnished with sloped floors that pitch towards a sump pit or drain if included. The outside surfaces shall be coated with an approved asphaltic waterproofing compound (all sides, bottom, and roof). Precast concrete manholes may be installed; however, all requirements of this Section and other Divisions of the Specifications and the details shown on the Drawings shall apply. D. Install pulling eye irons imbedded in walls opposite each duct entrance securely fastened to manhole reinforcing rods. All hardware shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel. E. A ground rod and a ground bar, furnished in accordance with Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems, shall installed at each manhole. Ground rod shall be driven within each manhole. The ground bar shall be installed inside each manhole. A No. 4/0 AWG bare copper ground cable shall be connected between the ground rod and the ground bar. The bare copper ground cable located within each duct bank shall also be connected to the ground bar. No. 6 AWG bare copper cables shall be connected from all non-current carrying metal parts in the manhole to the ground bar. All cable connections at the ground bar shall be NEMA 2-hole style lugs with irreversible compression style barrel made of copper or aluminum. Aluminum lugs shall be marked with an AL/CU rating for use on copper conductors. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Underground Electrical Cottonwoods Connection Page 33 71 19-6 F. All cables shall be well supported on walls by nonmetallic cable racks. The cable racks shall be heavy-duty type for medium and low voltage power cables and light duty type for control, signal, communications and similar small conductors. All racks shall be rigidly attached to the wall and equipped with adjustable rack arms. 3.04 ELECTRIC HANDHOLES A. Electric handholes shall be installed to a sufficient depth to accommodate the required grading of ducts as well as maintaining a minimum distance of 9” from the bottom of the lowest duct centerline entrances to finished floor line and/or highest duct centerline entrance to roof. B. Duct envelopes and conduit with bell ends shall enter at approximately right angles to the walls, except as may otherwise be shown on the Drawings. C. All individual cables and/or bundles of conductors shall be identified and “dressed” along the wall of the enclosure. Cable racks as specified herein shall be provided if any handhole dimension exceeds 24 inches. 3.05 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: 1. Field tests a. Field tests for all completed duct systems shall consist of pulling a swab through each conduit followed by a mandrel equal in size to 85% of the conduit inside diameter. b. After testing, all conduits shall be capped after installation of a suitable pull rope. All field tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-1 SECTION 40 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install to the required line and grade, all piping together with all fittings and appurtenances, required for a complete installation. Piping to be backfilled and/or encased in concrete is considered to be buried piping. Piping that is not buried is considered to be exposed. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install fittings, couplings, connections, sleeves, adapters, harness rods and closure pieces as required to connect pipelines of dissimilar materials and/or sizes herein included under this Section and other concurrent Contracts for a complete installation. C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services required for the furnishing, installation and testing of all piping as shown on the Drawings, specified in this Section and required for the Work. Piping shall be furnished and installed of the material, sizes, classes, and at the locations shown on the Drawings, in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedules and/or designated in this Section. Piping shall include all fittings, adapter pieces, couplings, closure pieces, harnessing rods, hardware, bolts, gaskets, wall sleeves, wall pipes, hangers, supports, and other associated appurtenances for required connections to equipment, valves, or structures for a complete installation. D. In accordance with the most current version of AWWA C651 and these specifications, furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services required for the disinfection, sampling, re-disinfection as necessary, and disposal of chlorinated water of all finished water pipelines and appurtenances taken out of service, all new water mains and temporary pipelines, and components incorporated into a connection to any existing finished water system prior. Submit Field Disinfection Plan at least 15 days prior to starting the work. Submit chlorination and dechlorination sampling results before piping is approved for use. E. Piping assemblies under 4-inch size shall be generally supported on walls and ceilings, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer, being kept clear of openings and positioned above "headroom" space. Where practical, such piping shall be run in neat clusters, plumb and level along walls, and parallel to overhead beams. F. The Contractor shall provide taps on piping where required or shown on the Drawings. Where pipe or fitting wall thicknesses are insufficient to provide the required number of threads, a boss or pipe saddle shall be installed. G. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-2 1. Connections to existing pipelines. 2. Test excavations necessary to locate or verify existing pipe and appurtenances. 3. Installation of all new pipe and materials required for a complete installation. 4. Cleaning, testing, and disinfecting as required. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 09 90 00 – Painting C. Section 23 31 16 − Nonmetal Ducts and Duct Accessories D. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork E. Section 31 23 33 – Trenching and Backfill F. Section 32 10 00 – Paving and Surfacing G. Section 33 05 61 − Utility Structures H. Section 40 06 20 − Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C604, Installation of Buried Steel Water Pipe — 4 In. (100 mm) and Larger 2. C651, Disinfecting Water Mains 3. C655, Field Dechlorination B. NSF International (NSF) 1. NSF/ANSI 61,Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner (through the Engineer) a Material Certification stating that the pipe materials and specials furnished under this Section conform to all applicable provisions of the corresponding Specifications. Specifically, the Certification shall state compliance with the applicable standards (ASTM, AWWA, etc.) for fabrication and testing. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-3 B. Shop Drawings for major piping (2-inches in diameter and greater) shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. In addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit laying schedules and detailed Drawings in plan and profile for all piping as specified and shown on the Drawings. C. Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, complete piping layout, pipe material, sizes, class, locations, necessary dimensions, elevations, supports, hanger details, pipe joints, and the details of fittings including methods of joint restraint. No fabrication or installation shall begin until Shop Drawings are approved by the Engineer. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Contractor shall submit construction sequencing plan for approval. Plan shall include all planned service outages with associated valves and backup valves to be operated. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All specials and every length of pipe shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, size, class, and the date of manufacture. Special care in handling shall be exercised during delivery, distribution, and storage of pipe to avoid damage and unnecessary stresses. Damaged pipe will be rejected and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Pipe and specials stored prior to use shall be stored in such a manner as to keep the interior free from dirt and foreign matter. B. Testing of pipe before installation shall be as described in the corresponding ASTM or AWWA Specifications and in the applicable standard specifications listed in the following sections. Testing after the pipe is installed shall be as specified in Part 3. C. Joints in piping shall be of the type as specified in the appropriate Piping System Schedule in Section 40 06 20 − Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. D. All buried piping shall have restrained joints for thrust protection unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. All exposed piping shall have flanged joints, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. E. The Drawings indicate work affecting existing piping and appurtenances. The Contractor shall excavate test pits as required of all connections and crossings which may affect the Contractor's work prior to ordering pipe and fittings to determine sufficient information for ordering materials. The Contractor shall take whatever measurements that are required to complete the work as shown or specified. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-4 2.02 WALL PIPES A. Where wall sleeves or wall pipes occur in walls that are continuously wet on one or both sides, they shall have waterstop flanges at the center of the casting or as shown on the Drawings. Ends of wall pipes shall be flange, grooved end, mechanical joint, plain end, or bell as shown on the Drawings, or as required for connection to the piping. Wall pipes shall be of the same material as the piping that they are connected to. If welded waterstop flanges are employed, welds shall be 360 degree continuous on both sides of flange. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, waterstop flanges shall conform to the minimum dimensions shown below: Pipe Size Waterstop Flange Diameter Waterstop Flange Thickness 4" - 12" OD + 3.10" 0.50" 14" - 24" OD + 4.15" 0.75" 30" - 36" OD + 4.50" 1.00" 42" - 48" OD + 5.00" 1.25" 54" OD + 5.90" 1.50" 2.03 SLEEVES A. Unless shown otherwise, all piping passing through walls and floors shall be installed in sleeves or wall castings accurately located before concrete is poured or placed in position during construction of masonry walls. Sleeves passing through floors shall extend from the bottom of the floor to a point 3 inches above the finished floor, unless shown otherwise. Waterstop flanges are required on all sleeves located in floors or walls which are continually wet or under hydrostatic pressure on one or both sides of the floor or wall. B. Sleeves shall be fabricated steel in accordance with details shown on the Drawings. If not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the details of sleeves they propose to install; and no fabrication or installation thereof shall take place until the Engineer's approval is obtained. Steel sleeves shall be fabricated of structural steel plate in accordance with the standards and procedures of AISC and AWS. Steel sleeve surfaces shall receive a commercial sandblast cleaning and then be shop painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting. C. When shown on the Drawings or otherwise required, the annular space between the installed piping and sleeve shall be completely sealed against a maximum hydrostatic pressure of 20 psig. Seals shall be mechanically interlocked, solid rubber links, trade name "LinkSeal", as manufactured by Garlock Pipeline Technologies (GPT) or equal. Rubber link, seal type, size, and installation thereof, shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. For non-fire rated walls and floors, pressure plate shall be glass reinforced nylon plastic with EPDM rubber seal and 316 stainless steel Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-5 bolts and nuts. For fire rated walls and floors, two independent seals shall be provided consisting of low carbon steel, zinc galvanized pressure plates, silicon rubber seals and 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. D. Cast iron mechanical joint adapter sleeves shall be Clow # 1429, as manufactured by the Clow Corp., or equal. Mechanical joint adapter sleeves shall be provided with suitable gasket, follower ring, and bolts to affect a proper seal. In general, sleeves installed in walls, floors, or roofs against one side of which will develop a hydrostatic pressure, or through which leakage of liquid will occur, shall be so sealed. If welded waterstop flanges are employed, welds shall be 360 degree continuous on both sides of flange. 2.04 SLEEVE TYPE COUPLINGS (FOR EXPOSED SERVICE AND BURIED SERVICE ABOVE 54-INCH) A. Sleeve type, flexible couplings shall be furnished and installed where shown on the Drawings or otherwise required to resist internal operating pressures. In addition to that specified herein, harnessed, sleeve type flexible couplings shall be provided on all exposed pipe 3 inches and larger in diameter that spans any expansion joint in a building or structure. B. Materials shall be of high strength steel and couplings shall be rated for the same pressures as the connecting piping. C. Gaskets shall be rubber. Bolts and nuts shall be alloy steel, corrosion resistant and prime coated. D. Harnessing for exposed applications shall be by rodding across the sleeve type coupling to the nearest pipe joint on either side of the coupling using threaded rods and rod tabs unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. E. Couplings shall be as manufactured by Smith-Blair Model 411, Romac Industries Model 400, Dresser Industries Style 38, or equal as required and shown on the Drawings. All couplings shall be provided without interior pipe stop. F. 2.05 FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS A. Flanged coupling adapters shall be furnished as required and as shown on the Drawings. B. Flanged coupling adapters shall be of carbon steel construction and shall be rated for the same pressure as the connected piping. Couplings shall be provided with manufacturer’s fusion bonded epoxy painting system. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-6 C. All flanged coupling adapters shall be harnessed by tying the adapter to the nearest pipe joint flange using threaded rods and rod tabs unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. D. Flanged coupling adapters shall be manufactured by Smith-Blair Model 912 or 913, Romac Industries Model FCG or FC 400, Dresser Industries Model 128-W, or equal. E. Flanged coupling adapters shall be provided with manufacturer’s fusion bonded epoxy painting system. 2.06 DISMANTLING JOINTS A. Dismantling joints shall be furnished at locations shown on the Drawings. B. Dismantling joints for sizes less than 12-inch shall be of or carbon steel construction and shall be rated for the same pressure as the connected piping. Dismantling joints for sizes greater than 12-inches shall be of carbon steel construction and shall be rated for the same pressure as the connected piping. C. Flanges for dismantling joints shall match the bolt pattern and pressure rating of the flanges for the connected piping. D. All dismantling joints shall be restrained utilizing restraining rods provided by the manufacturer. Restraining rods shall be constructed from ASTM A193 Grade B7 steel. Restraining rods and restraint system shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Dismantling joints shall be provided with manufacturer’s fusion bonded epoxy painting system. F. Dismantling joints shall be manufactured by Smith Blair Model 975, Romac Industries Model DJ400, or equal. 2.07 GROOVED COUPLINGS A. Grooved end pipe couplings shall be furnished as specified or shown on the Drawings. B. Materials shall be of malleable iron and couplings shall be rated for the same pressures as the connecting piping. C. Gaskets shall be rubber. Bolts and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel track bolts and shall be plated. D. After installation, buried couplings shall receive two heavy coats of an approved coal tar which is compatible with the finish of the coupling. Exposed couplings shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 − Painting. E. Couplings shall be manufactured by Victaulic Company of America Style 31 or equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-7 2.08 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING SADDLES A. Tapping sleeves shall be similar to Mueller Outlet Seal, American Uniseal or Kennedy Square Seal. All sleeves shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psi. All sleeves larger than twelve (12) inches shall be ductile iron. All taps shall be machine drilled; no burned taps will be allowed. B. Tapping saddles may be used on mains sixteen (16) inches and larger where the required tap size does not exceed onehalf the size of the main (i.e. 8inch tapping saddle for use on a 16inch main). Tapping saddles shall be manufactured of ductile iron providing a factor of safety of at least 2.5 at a working pressure of 250 psi. Saddles shall be equipped with a standard AWWA C11077 flange connection on the branch. Sealing gaskets shall be "O" ring type, high quality molded rubber having an approximate seventy durometer hardness, placed into a groove on the curved surface of the tapping saddles. Straps shall be of alloy steel. The tapping saddle shall be the American tapping saddle, U.S. Pipe tapping saddle, or equal. All taps shall be machine cut, no burned taps will be allowed. 2.09 UNIONS A. For ductile iron and carbon steel pipes assembled with threaded joints and malleable iron fittings, unions shall conform to ANSI B16.39. B. For PVC and CPVC piping, unions shall be socket weld type with Viton Oring. 2.10 THERMOPLASTIC TUBING AND FITTINGS A. Thermoplastic tubing shall be manufactured from polyallomor tubing. Tubing shall be protected from ultraviolet radiation degradation with a black coating or integral color conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 3. Fittings and connectors used with thermoplastic tubing shall be the flareless tube type constructed of brass conforming to SAE CA377, SAE CA360 or equal. Brass sleeves shall be used. B. Assembly of the thermoplastic tubing shall consist of pushing the tubing into the fitting and hand tightening the nut with final tightening with a wrench. Care shall be taken not to overtighten the nut. Plastic tube racks and bend holders shall be provided for holding the tubing in position. Needle valves used with thermoplastic tubing shall be the globe type constructed with a brass body, stem and seat and Buna-N "O"-ring seals. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Thermoplastic tubing, shall be the Impolene (polyallomor) system and needle valves, fittings and connectors shall be the PolyFlo with 261 UB Universal Nut and Sleeve system as manufactured by Imperial Eastman, or equal. 2.11 HEAT TRACED PIPING A. Exposed pipes to be insulated shall also be protected from freezing by heat tracing. Freeze protection heat tracing shall consist of twin 16 AWG copper brass wires with a Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-8 semiconductor polymer core where electrical resistance varies with temperature. The heat tracing shall have a fluoropolymer outer jacket for corrosion resistance. The heat tracing shall be rated for three (3) watts per foot output, self-regulating with a maximum temperature of 150°F, equal to a Chromalox No. SRL31CT383400. Maximum length for tape shall be 300 feet for each circuit. Temperature controller shall be provided to sense pipe temperature to determine on or off condition of the heat tracing. Temperature control shall be equal to a Chromalox No. RTBC2384729. The heat tracing system shall operate on 120 VAC. See Drawings for installation detail. Heat tracing of piping shall be provided as specified in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedules. 2.12 FLEXIBLE RESTRAINED EXPANSION JOINTS A. Restrained expansion joints shall be manufactured of 60-42-10 ductile iron conforming to material and other applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. B. Each pressure containing component shall be lined with a minimum of 15 mils of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the materials requirements of, and tested in accordance with, ANSI/AWWA C213 and shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C550. C. Seals shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. D. All bolts used in the assemblies shall be stainless steel and shall be coated with a premium quality epoxy. E. Flanged ends shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10, with the addition of O-ring groove and O-ring. F. Mechanical joint ends shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. G. Restrained expansion joints shall have a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi with a minimum safety factor of 3:1. Each assembly shall be tested at 350 psi before shipment. H. Restrained expansion joints shall provide for self-restraint without tie rods and shall provide for expansion and contraction capabilities cast as an integral part of the end connection. I. Flexible restrained expansion joints shall allow for 8-inches (+6"-2") minimum expansion. J. Flexible restrained expansion joints shall consist of an expansion joint designed and cast as an integral part of a ball and socket type flexible joint having a minimum of 15 degree deflection per ball. K. Flexible restrained expansion joints shall be the Single Ball or Double Ball FLEX-TEND Expansion Joint as manufactured by EBAA Iron Inc., or equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-9 2.13 FLANGE BOLTS F. Ductile Iron pipe: 1. Bolts and nuts for ductile iron pipe flanges located indoors, outdoors above ground, or in dry vaults and structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade. a. Flange bolts, nuts, and washers shall be coated with Tripac 2000 Blue coating System. 2. Bolts and nuts for ductile iron pipe flanges submerged in water, buried, in wet vaults or structures, adjacent to wet walls, or above open water- containing structures shall be Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 193, Grade B8M for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A 194, Grade 8M for nuts. 3. Provide a washer for each nut. Washer shall be of the same material as the nut. 4. Nuts shall be Heavy hex-head, Type 2H. 5. Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond outside face of nut after assembly. 6. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used. G. Lubricant for stainless steel bolts and nuts: 1. Chloride-free. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Huskey FG-1800. H. Plastic Pipe: 1. Bolts and nuts for flanges on plastic pipe located indoors, outdoors above ground, or in dry vaults and structures shall be carbon steel, in accordance with ASTM A 307, Grade B. Flange bolts, nuts, and washers shall be coated with Tripac 2000 Blue coating System. 2. Bolts and nuts for flanges on plastic pipe submerged in water or wastewater, buried, in wet vaults or structures, adjacent to wet walls, or above open water- containing structures and plastic pipe carrying corrosive chemicals shall be Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 193, Grade B8M for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A 194, Grade 8M for nuts. 3. Provide a washer for each nut. Washer shall be of the same material as the nut. 4. Nuts shall be Heavy hex-head. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-10 5. Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond outside face of nut after assembly. 6. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used. I. Steel Pipe: 1. Bolts and nuts for ASME B16.5 Class 150 flanges and AWWA C207 Class D flanges located indoors, outdoors above ground, or in dry vaults and structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B. Flange bolts, nuts, and washers shall be coated with Tripac 2000 Blue coating System. 2. Bolts and nuts for ASME B16.5 and B16.47 Class 300 flanges and AWWA C207 Class E and F flanges located indoors, outdoors above ground, or in dry vaults and structures in accordance with ASTM A 193, Grade B7 for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A 194, Grade 7 for nuts. Flange bolts, nuts, and washers shall be coated with Tripac 2000 Blue coating System. 3. Bolts and nuts for flanges submerged in water or wastewater, buried, in wet vaults or structures, adjacent to wet walls, or above open water-containing structures shall be Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 193, Grade B8M for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A 194, Grade 8M for nuts. 4. Provide a washer for each nut. Washer shall be of the same material as the nut. 5. Nuts shall be Heavy hex-head, Type 2H. 6. Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond outside face of nut after assembly. 7. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used. 2.14 GASKETS A. Gaskets for flanged joints in polyvinyl chloride and polyethylene piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, with low flange bolt loadings, temperatures equal and less than 120 degrees Fahrenheit, and polymer, chlorine, caustic solutions, and other chemicals, except chemicals which liberate free fluorine including fluorochemicals and gaseous fluorine. 2. Material: 0.125-inch thick Viton rubber. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, b. John Crane, similar product. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-11 B. Gaskets for flanged joints in gas or liquefied petroleum gas piping: 1. Chlorine gas application in black steel piping: Suitable for pressures equal to or less than 300 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal to or less than 100 degrees Fahrenheit, and chlorine gas application. 2. Liquefied petroleum, propane, and natural gas applications in black steel piping: Suitable for pressures equal to or less than 250 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal to or less than 100 degrees Fahrenheit, and liquefied petroleum gas, propane gas, and natural gas application. 3. Material: a. Microcellular Teflon outer layers with rigid center layer. b. Sealability in accordance with ASTM F 37, less than 0.55 millimeters per hour leakage of iso-octane at 1,000 pounds per square inch gasket load and 9.8 pounds per square inch fluid pressure. 4. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, 3545, b. John Crane, similar product. C. Gaskets for flanged joints in low pressure air piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal to or less than 300 degrees Fahrenheit, and compressed air service. 2. Material: EPDM elastomer, 1/8 inch thick, 60 Shore hardness, smooth surface. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, Style 8314. b. John Crane, similar product. D. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron or steel water piping: 1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, and temperatures equal to or less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Material: a. Neoprene elastomer, compressed, with non-asbestos fiber reinforcement. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-12 b. Teflon ring; or Teflon envelope with non-asbestos filler. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, Bluegard 3300, b. John Crane, similar product. E. Provide gaskets suitable for the specific fluids and pressure and temperature conditions. F. Provide new gaskets for re-assembling any flanged joint that must be dis- assembled. 2.15 LEAD-FREE MATERIALS A. Pipe, plumbing fittings or fixtures, solder, or flux used to convey water for human consumption shall be Lead-free as defined in Section R309-210 of the Utah Health and Safety Code PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Painting and Color-coding System 1. All exposed piping specified shall be color coded in accordance with the Owner's standard color designation system for pipe recognition and in accordance with Section 40 05 97 – Piping and Equipment Identification Systems. In the absence of a standard color designation system, the Engineer will establish a standard color designation for each piping service category from color charts submitted by the Contractor in compliance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 2. All piping specified in this Section shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting, except as follows: a. Copper pipe b. Stainless steel pipe, flange and supports or hangers 3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage, and handling of pipe and appurtenances shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified in these specifications. B. Pipe, specials, and fittings received at Project Site in damaged condition will not be accepted. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-13 C. Store rubber gaskets in a cool, well-ventilated place and do not allow exposure to direct sunlight. Do not allow contact with oils, fuels, petroleum or solvents. D. Store and support pipe securely to prevent accidental rolling. Avoid pipe contact with mud, water and other harmful materials. Pipe shall not be stored on rocks or gravel larger than 1-inch in diameter at any time. E. Pipe shall be handled with proper equipment in a manner to prevent damage. Use heavy canvas or nylon slings of adequate strength to lift and support materials. Do not use chains, hooks, wire ropes, forks, or clamps that could damage the pipe, damage the coating or lining, or bend pipe ends. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be installed by skilled workmen and in accordance with the best standard practice for piping installation as shown on the Drawings, specified or recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Proper tools and appliances for the safe and convenient handling and installing of the pipe and fittings shall be used. Great care shall be taken to prevent any pipe coating from being damaged on the inside or outside of the pipe and fittings. All pieces shall be carefully examined for defects, and no piece shall be installed which is known to be cracked, damaged, or otherwise defective. If any defective pieces should be discovered after having been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound one in a satisfactory manner by the Contractor and at his own expense. Pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before they are installed and shall be kept clean until they are accepted in the complete work. All piping connections to equipment shall be provided with unions or coupling flanges located so that piping may be readily dismantled from the equipment. At certain applications, Dresser, Victaulic, or equal, couplings may also be used. All piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will be free to expand and contract without injury to itself or to structures and equipment to which it is connected. All piping shall be erected to accurate lines and grades with no abrupt changes in line or grade and shall be supported and braced against movement, temporary, or permanent. All exposed piping shall be installed with vertical and horizontal angles properly related to adjoining surfaces or pipes to give the appearance of good workmanship. Unless otherwise shown or approved, provided a minimum headroom clearance under all piping of 7 feet 6 inches. B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all waste and vent piping shall pitch uniformly at a 1/4inch per foot grade and accessible cleanouts shall be furnished and installed as shown and as required by local building codes. Installed length of waste and vent piping shall be determined from field measurements in lieu of the Drawings. C. Prepare trench as specified in Section 31 23 33 – TRENCHING AND BACKFILL. All excavation shall be made in such a manner and to such widths as will provide ample room for properly installing the pipe and permit thorough compaction of backfill around the pipe. The minimum trench widths shall be in strict accordance with the "Trench Width Excavation Limits" as shown on the Drawings. All excavation and trenching shall be Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-14 done in strict accordance with these specifications and all applicable parts of the OSHA Regulations, 29CFR 1926, Subpart P. D. The length of open trench shall not exceed 100 feet beyond the end of the installed pipeline, the length necessary to accommodate production in an 8-hour workday, or any limitations set by local jurisdiction, whichever is less. All open trench within 25 feet of a traveled way or occupied structure shall be fully backfilled or covered with AASHTO HS- 20 rated steel plates at the end of each day. Length of plated trench shall not exceed 30 feet. All other open trench shall be completely fenced with a 6-foot high chain link fence and properly signed. In the event of any construction delay exceeding 5 calendar days, regardless of cause, the contractor shall backfill all open trench, install temporary paving and traffic markings, and restore traffic to preconstruction conditions. E. ALL EXCAVATION REQUIRED BY THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE UNCLASSIFIED. NO ADDITIONAL PAYMENT WILL BE MADE FOR ROCK EXCAVATION REQUIRED FOR THE INSTALLATION OF PIPE OR STRUCTURES SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. F. Enlargements of the trench shall be made as needed to give ample space for operations at pipe joints. The width of the trench shall be limited to the maximum dimensions shown on the Drawings, except where a wider trench is needed for the installation of and work within sheeting and bracing. Except where otherwise specified, excavation slopes shall be flat enough to avoid slides which will cause disturbance of the subgrade, damage to adjacent areas, or endanger the lives or safety of persons in the vicinity. G. Hand excavation shall be employed wherever, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary for the protection of existing utilities, poles, trees, pavements, or obstructions. H. No greater length of trench in any location shall be left open, in advance of pipe laying, than shall be authorized or directed by the Engineer and, in general, such length shall be limited to approximately one hundred (100) feet. The Contractor shall excavate the trenches to the full depth, width and grade indicated on the Drawings including the relevant requirements for bedding. The trench bottoms shall then be examined by the Engineer as to the condition and bearing value before any pipe is laid or bedding is placed. I. No pressure testing shall be performed until the pipe has been properly backfilled in place. All pipe passing through walls and/or floors shall be provided with wall pipes or sleeves in accordance with the specifications and the details shown on the Drawings. All wall pipes shall have a waterstop located in the center of the wall. Each wall pipe shall be of the same class, thickness, and interior coating as the piping to which it is joined. All buried wall pipes shall have a coal tar outside coating on exposed surfaces. J. JOINT DEFLECTION SHALL NOT EXCEED 75 PERCENT OF THE MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDED DEFLECTION. Excavation and backfilling shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 00 01 − Earthwork, and as specified herein. Maximum trench widths shall conform to the Trench Width Excavation Limits shown on the Drawings. All exposed, submerged, and buried piping shall be adequately supported Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-15 and braced by means of hangers, concrete piers, pipe supports, or otherwise as may be required by the location. K. Following proper preparation of the trench subgrade, pipe and fittings shall be carefully lowered into the trench so as to prevent dirt and other foreign substances from gaining entrance into the pipe and fittings. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL ANY OF THE MATERIALS BE DROPPED OR DUMPED INTO THE TRENCH. L. Water shall be kept out of the trench until jointing and backfilling are completed. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe, fittings, and valves shall be securely closed so that no water, earth, or other substance will enter the pipes, fitting, or valves. Pipe ends left for future connections shall be valved, plugged, or capped, and anchored as required. M. All piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will be free to expand and/or contract without injury to itself or to structures and equipment to which it is connected. All piping shall be erected to accurate lines and grades with no abrupt changes in line or grade and shall be supported and braced against movement, temporary, or permanent. All exposed piping shall be installed with vertical and horizontal angles properly related to adjoining surfaces or pipes to give the appearance of good workmanship. Pipes crossing within a vertical distance of less than or equal to one (1) foot shall be encased and supported with concrete at the point of crossing to prevent damage to the adjacent pipes as shown on the Drawings. N. The full length of each section of pipe shall rest solidly upon the bed of the trench, with recesses excavated to accommodate bells, couplings, joints, and fittings. Before joints are made, each pipe shall be well bedded on a solid foundation; and no pipe shall be brought into position until the preceding length has been thoroughly bedded and secured in place. Pipe that has the grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relaid by the Contractor at his own expense. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are unsuitable for work. O. Proper and suitable tools and appliances for the safe convenient handling and laying of pipe shall be used and shall in general agree with manufacturer's recommendations. P. AT THE CLOSE OF EACH WORK DAY, THE END OF THE PIPELINE SHALL BE TIGHTLY SEALED WITH A CAP OR PLUG SO THAT NO WATER, DIRT, OR OTHER FOREIGN SUBSTANCE MAY ENTER THE PIPELINE, AND THIS PLUG SHALL BE KEPT IN PLACE UNTIL PIPE LAYING IS RESUMED. Q. During the laying of pipe, each pipe manufacturer shall provide his own supervisor to instruct the Contractor's pipe laying personnel in the correct procedure to be followed. R. Ordinarily only full lengths of pipe (as furnished by the pipe manufacturer) shall be used exceptions: closure pieces at manholes and areas where joint deflection is required. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-16 S. For gravity sewer installations, the Contractor shall use a laser device to maintain the trench and pipe alignment. The laser device shall be re-checked for correct elevation and pipe alignment prior to pipe installation if the device is left in the pipe overnight. Corrected invert elevations at each manhole and any adjustments will be coordinated and approved by the Engineer. T. ALL PIPING SHALL HAVE TYPE "A" BEDDING AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED HEREIN OR INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. U. Marking tape shall be installed per drawings. The tape shall be blue and silver and shall be clearly and permanently labeled "Water". Metallic and plastic marking tape shall be as manufactured by Seton, or equal. V. Carbon and Stainless Steel Pipe 1. Installation of steel pipe shall be by skilled workmen and shall conform to the applicable sections of AWWA Manual M-11. Joints for steel piping shall be either screwed, welded, or flanged as shown on the Drawings or as specified. 2. Welding in the field shall be performed only when requested on the shop drawings and permitted by the Engineer for carbon steel pipe. No welding of stainless steel pipe shall be allowed in the field. All field welds shall be radiographically inspected. 3. Installation of the steel casing pipe shall be by skilled workmen and in accordance with the best standard practice for steel pipe installation. Joints for steel casing pipe shall be butt welded. a. The boring equipment to be used for installing the jacked casing shall be of such size and capacity to allow the boring to proceed in a safe and expeditious manner. The installation of the casing and boring of the hole shall be done simultaneously to avoid cave ins or settlement and for safety of traffic above. b. The Contractor shall check the vertical and horizontal alignment of the casing by survey instrument at least once during each four feet of advance, or as directed by the Engineer. Pits shall be well sheeted and braced as necessary for safe and adequate access for workmen, inspectors and materials and shall be of a size suitable to equipment and material handling requirements. c. Under no conditions shall jetting or wet boring of encasement under pavement be allowed. d. After installation of the carrier pipe, each end of the casing pipe shall be made watertight with a brick masonry bulkhead. In addition, a Class B concrete cradle shall be provided from each end of the bulkhead to the first pipe joint outside of the bulkhead. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-17 W. Joints in Piping 1. Restrained joints shall be provided on all pipe joints as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Restrained joints shall be made up similar to that for push on joints or mechanical joints. 2. Push-on joints include a single rubber gasket which fits into the bell end of the pipe. The gasket shall be wiped clean, flexed and then placed in the socket. Any bulges in the gasket which might interfere with the entry of the plain end of the pipe shall be removed. A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the gasket surface which will come into contact with the spigot end of the pipe. The lubricant shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer. The plain end of the pipe, which is tapered for ease of assembly, shall be wiped clean and a thick film of lubricant applied to the outside. The pipe shall be aligned and carefully entered into the socket until it just makes contact with the gasket. The joint assembly shall be completed by entering the pipe past the gasket until it makes contact with the bottom of the socket. The pipe shall be pulled "home" with an approved jack assembly as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. If assembly is not accomplished by reasonable force, the plain end shall be removed, and the condition corrected. 3. Flanged joints shall be brought to exact alignment and all gaskets and bolts or studs inserted in their proper places. Bolts or studs shall be uniformly tightened around the joints. Where stud bolts are used, the bolts shall be uniformly centered in the connections and equal pressure applied to each nut on the stud. Pipes in all lines subject to temperature changes shall be cut short and cold sprung into place to compensate for expansion when hot. 4. Mechanical joints shall be made up with gaskets, glands and bolts. When a joint is to be made up, the bell or socket and plain end shall be cleaned and washed with a solution of mild soap in water; the gland and gasket shall be slid onto the plain end and the end then entered into the socket until it is fully "home" on the centering ring. The gasket shall then be painted with soapy water and slid into position, followed by the gland. All bolts shall be inserted and made up hand tight and then tightened alternately to bring the gland into position evenly. Excessive tightening of the bolts shall be avoided. All nuts shall be pulled up using a torque wrench which will not permit unequal stresses in the bolts. Torque shall not exceed the recommendations of the manufacturer of the pipe and bolts for the various sizes. Care shall be taken to assure that the pipe remains fully "home" while the joint is being made. Joints shall conform to the applicable AWWA Specifications. 5. Threaded and/or screwed joints shall have long tapered full depth threads to be made with the appropriate paste or jointing compound, depending on the type of fluid to be processed through the pipe. All pipe up to, and including 11/2inches, shall be reamed to remove burr and stood on end and well pounded to remove scale and dirt. Wrenches on valves and fittings shall be applied directly over the joint being tightened. Not more than three pipe threads shall be exposed at each Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-18 connection. Pipe, in all lines subject to temperature changes shall be cut short and cold sprung into place to compensate for expansion when hot. Joints in all piping used for chlorine gas lines shall be made up with a glycerine and litharge cement. Joints in plastic piping (PVC/CPVC) shall be laid and joints made with compounds recommended by the manufacturer. Installation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2774 and ASTM D2855. Unions required adjacent to valves and equipment. 6. Soldered joints shall have the burrs removed and both the outside of pipe and the inside of fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned by proper tools recommended for that purpose. Flux shall be applied to both pipe and inside of fittings and the pipe placed into fittings and rotated to insure equal distribution of flux. Joints shall be heated and solder applied until it shows uniformly around the end of joints between fitting and pipe. All joints shall be allowed to selfcool to prevent the chilling of solder. Combination flux and solder paste manufactured by a reputable manufacturer is acceptable. Unions required adjacent to valves and equipment. 7. Welded joints shall be made by competent operators in a first class workmanlike manner, in complete accordance with ANSI B31.1 and AWWA C206. Welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM A233, and welding rod shall conform to ASTM A251. Only skilled welders capable of meeting the qualification tests for the type of welding which they are performing shall be employed. Tests, if so required, shall be made at the expense of the Contractor, if so ordered by the Engineer. Unions shall be required adjacent to valves and equipment. 8. Copper joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and the end of pipes uniformly flared by a suitable tool to the bevels of the fittings used. Wrenches shall be applied to the bodies of fittings where the joint is being made and in no case to a joint previously made. Dimensions of tubing and copper piping shall be in complete accordance with the fittings used. No flare joints shall be made on piping not suited for flare joints. Installations for propane gas shall be in accordance with NFPA 54 and/or 58. 9. Solvent or adhesive welded joints in plastic piping shall be accomplished in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations, including necessary field cuttings, sanding of pipe ends, joint support during setting period, etc. Care shall be taken that no droppings or deposits of adhesive or material remain inside the assembled piping. Solvent or adhesive material shall be compatible with the pipe itself, being a product approved by the pipe manufacturer. Unions are required adjacent to valves and equipment. Sleeve-type expansion joints shall be supplied in exposed piping to permit 1-inch minimum of expansion per 100 feet of pipe length. 10. Dielectric isolation such as flange isolation kits, dielectric unions, or similar, shall be installed wherever dissimilar metals are connected according to the following table. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-19 Zi n c Ga l v a n i z e d S t e e l Al u m i n u m Ca s t I r o n Du c t i l e I r o n Mi l d S t e e l / Ca r b o n S t e e l Co p p e r Br a s s St a i n l e s s S t e e l Zinc ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Galvanized Steel ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Aluminum ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Cast Iron ● ● ● ● ● ● Ductile Iron ● ● ● ● ● ● Mild Steel/ Carbon Steel ● ● ● ● ● ● Copper ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Brass ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Stainless Steel ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Notes: ● signifies dielectric isolation is required between the two materials noted. Consult Engineer for items not listed in table. Provide flange isolation kits for all flanged connections of dissimilar metals and hardware including connections to equipment. Contractor shall include all isolation descriptions with piping submittals. 11. Eccentric reducers shall be installed where air or water pockets would otherwise occur in mains because of a reduction in pipe size. 12. Joints in polypropylene and polyvinylidelene fluoride pipe shall be butt fusion weld. All butt welding shall follow the requirements of ASTM D-2657 and the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 DISINFECTION A. All pipe and fitting connected to and forming a part of a potable water supply shall be disinfected in accordance with the procedures described in AWWA C 651. Disinfection shall also be in accordance with the requirements of the Utah County Health Department (UCHD) and the Owner. B. Disinfection shall be accomplished after the pipe has been flushed, if applicable, and passed the hydrostatic test. Such piping shall be filled with 50 parts per million (PPM) of chlorine and held in contact for not less than 24 hours. Final tests after 24 hours contact time shall show a minimum residual chlorine content of 10 ppm in all parts of the system. Disinfection shall be repeated as often as necessary, and as directed by the Engineer and/or UCHD and/or the Owner until the minimum residual chlorine content of 10 ppm Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-20 has been reached. The Contractor shall obtain certificates of satisfactory bacteriological tests and furnish them to the Owner before the request is made for acceptance of the work. The Contractor shall furnish and install, at his own expense, all means and apparatus necessary for performing the disinfection. The chlorine solution shall be thoroughly flushed out prior to placing the new sections of pipe in service. The Contractor is cautioned that the spent chlorine solution must be disposed of in such a way as not to be detrimental to animal, plant, or fish life. Chlorine residual tests will be made after flushing to assure that residual is not in excess of 1 ppm at any point in system. 3.05 FLUSHING AND TESTING A. All piping shall be properly flushed and tested unless specifically exempted elsewhere in the Specifications or otherwise approved by the Engineer. Air and gas pipelines shall be flushed and tested with compressed air. Gravity sewer piping shall be flushed and tested as specified in Section 33 05 61 − Utility Structures. All other liquid conveying pipelines shall be flushed and tested with water. The Contractor shall furnish and install all means and apparatus necessary for getting the air or water into the pipeline for flushing and testing including pumps, compressors, gauges, and meters, any necessary plugs and caps, and any required blow-off piping and fittings, etc., complete with any necessary reaction blocking to prevent pipe movement during the flushing and testing. All pipelines shall be flushed and tested in such lengths or sections as agreed upon among the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor. Test pressures shall be as specified in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedules and shall be measured at the lowest point of the pipe segment being tested. The Contractor shall give the Owner and Engineer reasonable notice of the time when he intends to test portions of the pipelines. The Engineer reserves the right, within reason, to request flushing and testing of any section or portion of a pipeline. B. The Contractor shall provide water for all flushing and testing of liquid conveying pipelines. Raw water or non-potable water may be used for flushing and testing liquid pipelines not connected to the potable water system. Only potable water shall be used for flushing and testing the potable water system. C. At the conclusion of the installation work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all new liquid conveying pipe by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, etc., which may have entered the pipe during the construction period. If after this cleaning any obstructions remain, they shall be corrected by the Contractor, at his own expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Liquid conveying pipelines shall be flushed at the rate of at least 2.5 feet per second for a duration suitable to the Engineer or shall be flushed by other methods approved by the Engineer. If the minimum flushing velocity of 2.5 fps is not feasible, clean pipe in-place by brushing and sweeping the inside of the pipe, then flush or blow the pipe at a lower velocity. D. After flushing, all liquid conveying pipelines shall be hydrostatically tested at the test pressure specified in the appropriate Piping System Schedule in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedules. The procedure used for the hydrostatic test Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Basic Mechanical Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 00-21 shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600. Each pipeline shall be filled with water for a period of no less than 24 hours and then subjected to the specified test pressure for 2 hours. During this test, exposed piping shall show no leakage. Allowable leakage in buried piping shall be in accordance with AWWA C600. E. Any leaks or defective pipe disclosed by the hydrostatic test shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at his own expense, and the test repeated until all such piping shows tight. F. Air and gas piping shall be completely and thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter, scale, and dirt prior to startup of the air or gas system. G. Compressed/service air and gas piping shall be flushed by removing end caps from the distribution lines and operating one (1) compressor, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. H. After flushing, all air piping shall be pressure and leak tested prior to coating and wrapping of welded joints. Immediately upon successful completion of the pressure and leak test, welded joints shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter, scale, rust, and discoloration and coated in accordance with the Specifications. I. All process air piping shall be leak tested by applying a soap solution to each joint. Leak tests shall be conducted with one (1) blower in service at normal operating pressure. J. During testing the piping shall show no leakage. Any leaks or defective piping disclosed by the leakage test shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at his own expense, and the test repeated until all such piping shows tight. K. All buried process air piping shall be pressurized to 25 psig and tested for leaks by applying a soap solution to each joint. The air supply shall be stopped and the pipe pressure monitored. System pressure shall not fall by more than 0.5% of the 25 psig test pressure over a one hour test period. Should the system fail to hold the required pressure for one hour, the cause shall be determined and corrected and the test repeated until a successful test of the entire system is obtained. L. Field leakage tests shall be performed for all submerged process air piping. The procedure shall consist of operating the system under clear nonpotable water for visual identification of all leaks. All field leakage tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. All submerged piping shall be installed free of any leaks. M. After flushing, all gas piping shall be leak tested in accordance with all local codes and regulations and in conformance with the recommendations or requirements of any National Institute or Association for the specific service application. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Piping, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 05-1 SECTION 40 05 05 PIPING, GENERAL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish and install to the required line and grade, all piping together with all fittings and appurtenances, required for a complete installation. B. Furnish and install fittings, couplings, connections, sleeves, adapters, harness rods and closure pieces as required to connect pipelines of dissimilar materials and/or sizes herein included under this Section and other concurrent Contracts for a complete installation. C. In accordance with the most current version of AWWA C651 and these specifications, furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services required for the disinfection, sampling, re-disinfection as necessary, and disposal of chlorinated water of all finished water pipelines and appurtenances taken out of service, all new water mains and temporary pipelines, and components incorporated into a connection to any existing finished water system prior. Submit Field Disinfection Plan at least 15 days prior to starting the work. Submit chlorination and dechlorination sampling results before piping is approved for use. D. Owner will provide water for initial hydrostatic testing of pipeline, however if the first test fails Contractor will be responsible to pay for any required water for subsequent tests. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 26 42 00 – Impressed Current Cathodic Protections C. Section 31 23 33 – Trenching and Backfill D. Section 40 05 19 – Ductile Iron Pipe E. Section 40 05 24.23 – Steel Pipe for Water and Wastewater Service F. Section 40 05 31 – PVC Pipe 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. C604, Installation of Buried Steel Water Pipe—4 In. (100 mm) and Larger 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Piping, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 05-2 2. C651, Disinfecting Water Mains 3. C655, Field Dechlorination B. NSF International (NSF) 1. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action 1. Layout drawing showing location of each pipe section and each special length. 2. Field Disinfection Plan 3. Hydrostatic Testing Plan 4. Construction Sequencing Schedule B. Informational 1. Hydrostatic Testing Report 2. Chlorination Sampling Results 3. Dechlorination Sampling Results 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Contractor shall submit construction sequencing plan for approval. Plan shall include all planned service outages with associated valves and backup valves to be operated. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE A. As specified in Section 40 05 19 – Ductile Iron Pipe, Section 40 05 24.23 – Steel Pipe for Water Service, Section 40 05 31 – PVC Pipe, and Section 40 05 33 – High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Furnish feeler gauges of proper size, type, and shape for use during installation for each type of pipe furnished with rubber gasket joints. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Piping, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 05-3 B. Place materials along trench only as will be used each day, unless otherwise approved by Project Representative. Placement of materials shall not obstruct access to adjacent property or create a hazard to traffic. 3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage, and handling of pipe and appurtenances shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified in these specifications. B. Pipe, specials, and fittings received at Project Site in damaged condition will not be accepted. C. Store rubber gaskets in a cool, well-ventilated place and do not allow exposure to direct sunlight. Do not allow contact with oils, fuels, petroleum or solvents. D. Store and support pipe securely to prevent accidental rolling. Avoid pipe contact with mud, water and other harmful materials. Pipe shall not be stored on rocks or gravel larger than 1-inch in diameter at any time. E. Pipe shall be handled with proper equipment in a manner to prevent damage. Use heavy canvas or nylon slings of adequate strength to lift and support materials. Do not use chains, hooks, wire ropes, forks, or clamps that could damage the pipe, damage the coating or lining, or bend pipe ends. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Preparation of Trench 1. Prepare trench as specified in Section 31 23 33 – TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 2. The length of open trench shall not exceed 500 feet beyond the end of the installed pipeline, the length necessary to accommodate production in an 8-hour workday, or any limitations set by local jurisdiction, whichever is less. 3. All open trench within 25 feet of a traveled way or occupied structure shall be fully backfilled or covered with AASHTO HS-20 rated steel plates at the end of each day. Length of plated trench shall not exceed 30 feet. All other open trench shall be completely fenced with a 6-foot high chain link fence and properly signed. 4. In the event of any construction delay exceeding 5 calendar days, regardless of cause, the contractor shall backfill all open trench, install temporary paving and traffic markings, and restore traffic to preconstruction conditions. B. Pipeline Markers 1. Place pipeline markers or monuments directly over the pipeline centerline at the following locations: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Piping, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 05-4 a. Section line crossings b. Blowoff valves c. Both sides of road crossings d. Direction changes e. Turnouts f. Maximum spacing of 1,000 feet C. Tracer Wire 1. Tracer wire shall 14 gauge solid insulated copper wire and is to be installed along all water pipelines. Placement of wire shall generally be beneath (preferred), or above the pipeline and secured to the pipeline to avoid displacement. Tracer wire shall be brought to the surface of the ground at all access manways, valve vaults, hydrants, and vaults. 2. A continuity test shall be performed on all wire installed and Contractor is responsible to replace any wire that does not provide a continuous signal. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify size, material, joint type, horizontal location, and elevation of existing pipes to be connected to. B. Repair any damaged coatings or linings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Pipe segments that have damage to the pipe end or barrel shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 3.05 CLEANING A. After pipeline installation, flush pipeline with water at a minimum flushing velocity of 2.5 feet per second (fps) until all foreign matter is removed. B. If the minimum flushing velocity of 2.5 fps is not feasible, clean pipe in-place by brushing and sweeping the inside of the pipe, then flush or blow the pipe at a lower velocity. C. Remove debris through access manways or through blowoffs 2 inches in diameter and larger. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pipe Supports Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 07-1 SECTION 40 05 07 PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and design calculations required to provide pipe supports in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 73 23 – Anchorage and Bracing of Non-Structural Components B. Division 03 – Concrete C. Section 40 05 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements D. Section 05 05 13 – Galvanizing E. Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening F. Section 05 10 00 – Metal Materials G. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel H. Section 05 13 00 – Stainless Steel I. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Not Applicable. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. ASTM International (ASTM) a. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Pipe support submittals will not be reviewed prior to review and acceptance of pipe layout submittal. Pipe support submittal shall be fully coordinated with approved pipe layout submittal. Contractor shall use approved piping layout submittal drawings to show 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pipe Supports Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 07-2 proposed pipe support type and location with accurate dimensions to demonstrate that supports meet all specified requirements. B. Applicable and associated cut sheets and drawings for materials and support components shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings in accordance with or in addition to the submittal requirements specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittals, Section 40 05 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements and other referenced Sections above. 1. Catalog cut information on all system components such as pipe supports, hangers, guides, anchors, and channel-type supports. 2. Drawings of the piping support systems, locating each support, brace, hanger, guide, component and anchor. Identify support, hanger, guide and anchor type by catalog number and Shop Drawing detail number. 3. With each piping support system Shop Drawing, the Contractor shall attach calculations prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Utah in which the project is located, showing that the piping support system complies with the specified requirements, including all building code and seismic code requirements pertaining to support of piping and other non-structural components. See Section 01 73 23 – Anchorage and Bracing of Non-Structural Components. 4. Table showing the manufacturer’s recommended hanger support spacing for PVC, CPVC, and FRP pipe for the services listed in Section 40 06 20  Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedules. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all piping support systems unless noted otherwise herein. The absence of pipe supports and details on the Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of providing a pipe support design sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Utah. Standard details for common types of pipe supports have been included on the Drawings to define minimum requirements as to the types of Contractor designed pipe supports that will be acceptable. B. Where a specific location or type of support is shown on the Drawings, the location and type shall be incorporated in the Contractor’s pipe support design. C. Where special pipe support fabrications are required, products and execution shall be as specified in Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications and other related and referenced Sections of the Specifications. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pipe Supports Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 07-3 D. Existing piping support systems to support new piping shall only be used if the Contractor can show and demonstrate by submitting supporting calculations that they are adequate for the additional load imposed by the new piping, or if they are strengthened to support the additional load. E. Contractor’s pipe support design should include, but not be limited to, the following criteria and loads imposed on the piping system: 1. Thrust Loads based on the design pressures as specified in Piping Schedules in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedules. Pipe support design shall not utilize process equipment for thrust restraint or support of piping loads. 2. Dead loads and live loads per the latest version of ASCE/SEI 7 or the local building code if more stringent. Loads shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Weight of pipe b. Weight of pipe contents c. Weight of insulation d. Ice loads (If applicable by location, ice loads per code shall be applied as indicated in the governing building code) e. Seismic loading requirements and conditions as specified in the governing building code and referenced seismic design codes. Refer to Section 01 73 23 – Anchorage and Bracing of Non-Structural Components and the structural code drawing for project specific seismic design criteria. Seismic and sway bracing shall be provided at maximum 10-foot centers. f. Wind loads 3. Loads associated with thermal expansion and contraction of the piping system over the full range of potential temperatures the piping system could experience that should include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Ambient temperature range per local historical weather data (historic high and low obtained from NOAA) b. Process operating temperature range c. Exposure to sunlight where applicable 4. Additional pipe support design considerations shall include the following: a. A minimum safety factor of 2 or as approved by the Engineer, based upon the yield strength of the support material, shall be used for pipe supports, Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pipe Supports Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 07-4 braces, hangers, and guides as well as for beam and column members used in channel-type support systems. b. The horizontal pipe hanger and/or floor support spacing shall be as recommended by the pipe and/or hanger manufacturer but shall not exceed 10 feet on center unless indicated otherwise herein or on the Drawings. c. The design, sizing and spacing of anchor bolts, including concrete anchors, shall be based on withstanding shear and pullout loads imposed by loading at each particular support. The minimum anchor bolt size shall be ½ inches in diameter. Refer to Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening. 2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All piping shall be adequately supported and braced by means of steel hangers and/or supports, concrete piers, supplemental lateral bracing components, pre-fabricated brackets, or otherwise as may be required by the location and forces applied per governing code, including gravity and lateral forces from earthquake and/or wind (if outdoors). Generally, concrete supports shall be used where pipe centerline is less than 3 feet above floor, and hangers above 6 feet unless specified or shown otherwise. Supports shall be not more than 10 feet on center for stainless steel and cast iron, and ductile iron; 4 feet on center for thermoplastic unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or required by the specific manufacturer. All necessary inserts or appurtenances shall be furnished and installed in the concrete or structures for adequately securing hangers and supports to the structure. Refer to Standard Detail Drawings. 1.Metal pipe support materials, where exposed stainless-steel pipe is supported, shall be Type 304L stainless steel meeting the requirements of Section 05 13 00 – Stainless Steel. 2.Metal pipe support materials, where carbon steel, ductile or other ferrous pipe is supported, shall be galvanized carbon steel meeting Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel and Section 05 05 13 – Galvanizing unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings or in the Specifications or by the Engineer. 3.Metal pipe supports indicated as standard type pipe hangers are designed and detailed for gravity loading only. Resulting lateral loads from wind, earthquake, or other lateral loads per code, or special loading conditions during construction, shall be applied to the pipe in accordance with the governing building code. Supplemental lateral stiffening members (when necessary) shall be provided along pipe or at gravity supports using appropriate supplemental members and connections when required by calculations. The Contractor shall include design calculations and details with all pipe hangar and support submissions for review by the Engineer. The main structure and structural components that will support the pipe hangers and other appurtenant components of the facility have been designed to resist all resulting secondary lateral loading from pipe hangers and other non-structural members for gravity and resulting lateral loads. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pipe Supports Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 07-5 B. Hangers and supports shall conform to the following requirements: 1.All fabricated metal hangers and supports shall be capable of adjustment after installation. Different types of hangers and supports along a pipe length, including bends, shall be kept to a minimum. 2.Hanger rods shall be straight and vertical. Chain, wire, strap, or perforated bar hangers shall not be used. Hangers shall not be suspended from other piping. 3.Vertical piping shall be properly supported at each floor and between floors by stays or braces to prevent rattling and vibration. 4.Supports and hangers for thermoplastic and FRP piping shall include wide saddles or bands as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer to distribute load and thus avoid localized deformation of the pipe. 5.Hanger and supports shall prevent contact between dissimilar metals by use of copper plated, rubber, vinyl coated or stainless-steel hangers. 6.Ferrous pipes to be painted shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting. Ferrous pipes that require painting or galvanizing shall be supported by galvanized hangers and supports. Stainless steel piping shall be supported by stainless steel saddles and straps (if required). 7.Thermoplastic piping shall be supported by plastic coated steel hangers and supports. 8.Hangers and supports shall provide for thermal expansion throughout the full operating temperature range. 9.Expansion and adhesive type anchors used for pipe hangers and supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. Metallic hangers and supports may be standard make by Anvil International, Inc., "Witch" by Carpenter & Paterson, Ltd., B-Line Systems, Inc., or equal; and data on the types and sizes to be used shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval. Metallic support system brackets, rods, support clips, clevis hangers, hardware, etc. shall be cast iron or welded steel construction. All gravity type hangers and supports shall be restrained laterally to resist seismic loading and other loading as required by the governing code. D. Non-metallic support system shall be a heavy-duty channel framing system. Channel frames shall be manufactured by the pultrusion process using corrosion grade polyester or vinylester resins. All fiberglass construction shall include suitable ultraviolet inhibitors for UV exposure and shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84. Piping accessories, pipe clamps, clevis hangers, support posts, support racks, fasteners, etc., shall be constructed of vinylester or polyurethane resin. Non-metallic support systems shall be standard make Aickinstrut by Aickinstrut, Inc., Unistrut Fiberglass by Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pipe Supports Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 07-6 Unistrut, Inc., Enduro Fiberglass Systems, or equal. The Contractor shall submit data on the types and sizes of approval. Unless otherwise shown or specified the Contractor shall provide support spacings in conformance with the pipe and support system manufacturer's requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by the equipment. B. Support large or heavy valves, fittings, flow meters and appurtenances independently of the connected piping. C. Support no pipe from the pipe above it. D. Support piping at changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible joints, expansion joints, and couplings, and where shown. E. The Contractor shall not install piping supports and hangers in equipment access areas or bridge crane runs. F. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing. G. Install pipe anchors (fixed supports and/or guides) where shown and/or as may otherwise be required to withstand expansion thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion. The Contractor may install additional pipe anchors and flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, provided that complete details describing location, pipe supports and hydraulic thrust protection are submitted. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ductile Iron Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 19-1 SECTION 40 05 19 DUCTILE IRON PIPE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. All ductile iron pipe and specials shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or trademark, size, weight, thickness class, the date of manufacture and the word “Ductile”. B. Submit affidavit of compliance with AWWA and NSF 61 standards for pipe lining and seal coat specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 09 90 00 – Painting B. Section 26 42 00 – Impressed Current Cathodic Protection C. Section 26 42 10 – Galvanic Cathodic Protection D. Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements E. Section 40 06 20 - Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. C105, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe Systems 2. C110, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings 3. C111, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 4. C115, Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges 5. C150, Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe 6. C151, Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast 7. C153, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings 8. C600, Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances 9. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints B. ASTM International (ASTM) 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ductile Iron Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 19-2 1. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless-Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service 2. A194, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless-Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service or Both 3. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength C. NSF International (NSF) 1. NSF 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. The Contractor shall submit a certificate from the Manufacturer stating that all linings have been provided in accordance with the specification requirements herein. C. Product data as specified in 40 05 05 – Piping, General. D. Manufacturer’s test resports: 1. On pipe lining certifying successful performance of holiday detection tests. a. Documentation shall identify each piece by mark designation and show the actual test results during the final inspection by the manufacturer prior to shipment. b. Coating manufacturers technical representative reports. 2. Welded Outlets: a. Provide manufacturer's test results indication typical mechanical properties of the weld material used, as well as typical mechanical properties from transverse tensile and impact specimens machined from butt-weld joined ductile iron pipe coupons. b. Manufacturer’s air test logs documenting air-leakage tests on all welded outlets. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ductile Iron Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 19-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. All ductile iron pipe and specials shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, size, weight, thickness class, the date of manufacture, and the word "Ductile". B. Ductile iron pipe of the sizes shown or specified shall conform to AWWA C151/A21.51, Grade 604210 for ductile iron pipe centrifugally cast in metal molds or sandlined molds. C. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C150/A21.50 for thickness design and shall be supplied in 18-foot or 20-foot nominal lengths or as required to meet the requirements of the Drawings. D. Fittings and specials shall be ductile iron and conform to the requirements of AWWA C110 and AWWA C153 E. Fitting joint type shall be the same as that of the associated piping as indicated in Section 40 06 20 – Piping, Valve and Gate Schedule. F. Pressure class or special thickness as indicated in Section 40 06 20 – Piping, Valve and Gate Schedule. G. Minimum special thickness Class 53 pipe shall be used for flanged spools and grooved joints. 2.02 PIPE COATINGS A. Buried Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: 1. All buried ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have a zinc coating with asphaltic topcoat and installed in a polyethylene encasement. 2. Zinc Coating with Asphaltic Top Coat: a. Factory applied. b. Coat and pipe and fittings with a layer of arc-sprayed zinc per ISO 8179- 1. Zinc applied at not less than 200 g/m2 of pipe surface area. Apply a finishing layer asphaltic topcoat per AWWA C151 3. Wax Tape Coating – in accordance with Section 26 42 10 – Galvanic Cathodic Protection B. Exposed Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ductile Iron Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 19-4 1. All exposed ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have a shop-applied prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00 - Painting. 2.03 PIPE LININGS A. All pipe and fittings sleeves, with the exception of epoxy lined pipe and sleeves, shall be cement mortar lined. B. Cement Mortar Lined Pipe: 1. Shall conform to American Standard Specifications for Cement Mortar Lining for Cast Iron Pipe and Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings, AWWA C104/A21.4 and shall be standard thickness. The mortar lining shall be protected with a bituminous seal coat. 2. Factory applied. 3. Cement shall be ASTM C150, Type II or V, low alkali, containing less than 0.60 percent alkalis. 4. Patch field welds, cuts, connections, and damaged lining in accordance with AWWA C104. C. Epoxy-Lined Pipe 1. Epoxy-lined ductile iron pipe shall be furnished and installed where specified in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valves, and Gate Schedules. 2. Epoxy-linings shall be Induron Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lining, Tnemec Perma- Shield PL Series 431, or equal. 3. The finished lining shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 40 mils, except at the gasket groove and spigot end up to six inches back from the end of the spigot which shall be 6 mils dry film thickness, minimum. 4. Lining application shall be performed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions by an applicator approved by the coating manufacturer and under controlled conditions at the applicator’s shop or the pipe manufacturer’s plant. 2.04 PIPE JOINTS A. Requirements for various types of joints are described in the following paragraphs. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED HEREIN OR ON THE DRAWINGS, ALL EXPOSED DUCTILE IRON PIPING SHALL HAVE FLANGED JOINTS. B. Flanged Joints Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ductile Iron Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 19-5 1. Flanged joints and fittings shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi with 125 lb. American Standard flanges. 2. All flanges and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASME B16.1 3. Flanges shall be ductile iron and shall be of the threaded or screw on type. 4. The face of the flanges shall be machined after installation of the flange to the pipe. No raised surface shall be allowed on flanges. 5. Flanged pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C115/A21.15. 6. Bolt holes on flanges shall be 2-holed and aligned at both ends of the pipe. 7. Pipe lengths shall be fabricated to meet the requirements of the Drawings. 8. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron water piping: a. Provide new gaskets for re-assembling any flanged joint that must be disassembled. b. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, and temperatures equal to or less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Material: i. Neoprene elastomer, compressed with non-asbestos fiber reinforcement ii. Teflon ring; or Teflon envelope with non-asbestos fiber d. Manufacturers - One of the following or equal: i. Garlock, Bluegard 3300. ii. John Crane, similar product. e. Bolts and Nutes: i. B olts and nuts for ductile iron pipe flanges located indoors, outdoors above ground, or in dry vaults and structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B. Flange bolts, nuts, and washers shall be coated with Tripac 2000 Blue coating System. ii. Bolts and nuts for ductile iron pipe flanges submerged in water, buried, in wet vaults or structures, adjacent to wet walls, or above open water- containing structures shall be Type 316 stainless Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ductile Iron Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 19-6 steel in accordance with ASTM A 193, Grade B8M for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A 194, Grade 8M for nuts. iii. Provide a washer for each nut. Washer shall be of the same material as the nut. iv. Nuts shall be Heavy hex-head, Type 2H. v. Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond outside face of nut after assembly. vi. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used. vii. Lubricant for stainless steel bolts and nuts: 1. Chloride-Free, 2. Manufacturers – One of the following or equal: a. Huskey FG-1800 C. Unrestrained Push-on Joints (PO) a. Not allowed D. Restrained Push-On Joints (RPO) a. Restrained, rubber ring compression gasket, push-on joints conforming to AWWA C111 b. Restrained by the interference of metallic rings, bolts, locking segments or other interlocking components with flanges, lugs, beads, grooves or retainer rings that are integrally cast into or welded onto both ends of the joint. Restrained joints with gripping wedges, or gripping gaskets, radial pads, or other devices that penetrate, grip, or embed in the pipe material to resist axial thrust loads are not acceptable. c. Candidate manufacturers: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company, Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring b. U.S. Pipe, TR Flex or HP LOK c. Approved Equal E. Mechanical Joints (MJ) F. Restrained Mechanical Joints Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ductile Iron Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 19-7 a. Restrained by tie-rods/bolts tying the gasket gland to a second retainer/follower gland behind a welded ring on the spigot end of the joint. Restrained joints with gripping wedges, or gripping gaskets, radial pads, or other devices that penetrate, grip, or embed in the pipe material to resist axial thrust loads are not acceptable. b. Fully restrained mechanical joints for above or below ground service conforming to AWWA C110 and AWWA C111. c. Candidate manufacturers: i. American Cast Iron Pipe Company, Mechanical Joint Coupled Joint ii. U.S. Pipe, Bolt-Lok or Mech-Lok (Mech-Lok for above ground applications only) iii. Approved Equal d. Grooved Couplings and Fittings i. In accordance with AWWA C606. When pipe wall thickness does not meet the minimum requirements of AWWA C606 for rolled or cut groove joints, provide shouldered ends per the requirements of AWWA C606. ii. Candidate manufacturers. a. Victaulic b. Gruylok c. Approved Equal iii. Grooved end flanged coupling adapters candidate manufacturer: a. Victaulic Style 341 b. Approved Equal b. Grooved end transition couplings to steel pipe candidate manufacturers: a. Victaulic Style 307 b. Approved Equal Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ductile Iron Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 19-8 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: a. Follow piping routes specified on the drawings as closely as possible. Submit proposed deviations in accordance with Section 01 30 00 – b. Install pipe in accordance with AWWA C600. c. Make connections to existing structures and manholes so that the finished work will conform as nearly as practicable to the requirements specified for new manholes, including necessary concrete work, cutting and shaping. Shape concrete mortar within any structure and manhole as specified. B. Insulating Sections: Where a metallic nonferrous pipe/appurtenance connects to ferrous pipe/appurtenance, provide an insulating section. C. Anchorage: Provide as specified on the Drawings. 3.02 TESTING A. Buried Piping: Test hydrostatic pressure in accordance with Section 5 of AWWA C600, Section 40 05 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements using the test pressures and allowable leakage specified in the Piping Schedule and Section 40 06 20 – Process Piping, Valve, and Gate Schedule. 3.03 WAX TAPE COATING A. Apply in accordance with Section 26 42 10 – Galvanic Cathodic Protection. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DUCTILE IRON PIPE Cottonwoods Connection Section 40 05 19.05-1 SECTION 40 05 19.05 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DUCTILE IRON PIPE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. This Section specifies earthquake resistant ductile iron pipe (ERDIP), joints, fittings, linings, and coatings for 20-inch to 104-inch pipe. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Protection Requirements C. Section 40 05 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements D. Section 40 05 05 – Piping, General E. Section 40 05 19 – Ductile Iron Pipe F. Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Reference Title JWWA A113 Mortar lining of ductile iron pipes for water supply JWWA G112 Epoxy-powder coating for interior of ductile iron pipes and fittings for water supply JWWA G113 Ductile iron pipe for water supply JWWA G114 Ductile iron fittings for water supply JWWA K 135 Liquid epoxy resin paints for water works and method of coating JWWA K 139 Synthetic resin paints for ductile iron pipes for water works JWWA K 156 Rubber materials for water supply JWWA K 157 Solvent-free epoxy resin paint methods of coating for water supply JDPA G 1042 NS type ductile iron pipes and fittings JDPA Z 2009 Special external coating for ductile iron pipes and fittings JIS R 5210 Portland cement ISO 16134 Earthquake- and subsidence- resistant design of ductile iron pipelines 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DUCTILE IRON PIPE Cottonwoods Connection Section 40 05 19.05-2 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Procedures: Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 2. Manufacturer’s product data, catalog cuts, dimensions and materials. Indicate each Piping System where the product will be used. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Procedures: Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATTERIALS A. All pipe system materials to be new, free from defects and conforming to the requirements and standards identified in Section 40 05 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements, 40 05 05 – Piping, General, and other related sections. 2.02 MATTERIALS B. Candidate manufacturers: 1. Kubota Corporation a. Type NS: 20 -inch to 40-inch diameter b. Type S: 44 -inch to 104 -inch diameter 2. No Approved Equal. C. Mechanical Properties 1. The mechanical properties of pipes and fittings will conform to JWWA G 113 and G 114 as shown in the following table: Description Pipe size in. [mm] Tensile strength psi [MPa] (Min.) Elongation % (Min.) Pipes and fittings 20 to 40 [500 to 1000] 60,916 [420] 10 Pipes and fittings 44 to 104 [1100 to 2600] Note. 1 MPa = 145.038 psi (The first decimal place is rounded off.) Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DUCTILE IRON PIPE Cottonwoods Connection Section 40 05 19.05-3 D. Hydrostatic Test Pressure 1. Each pipe and fitting will be subjected to a shop hydrostatic pressure test by the test pressure conforming to JWWA G 113 and G 114 as shown in the following table: Pipe size in. [mm] Pipes Fittings Test pressure psi [MPa] Duration sec. Test pressure psi [MPa] Duration sec. 20, 24 [500, 600] 725 [5.0] 15 363 [2.5] 60 28 to 40 [1100 to 1500] 580 [4.0] 15 290 [2.0] 120 44 to 60 [1100 to 1500] 435 [3.0] 15 217 [1.5] 200 64 to 104 [1600 to 2600] 362 [2.5] 280 E. Markings: The following cast-on, cold-stamped or painted marks will appear on each pipe: 1. The indication of ductile iron and class of wall thickness: “D1”, “D2”, “D3” or “DF” 2. The year of manufacture (the last two digits) 3. The manufacturer’s identification mark 4. The nominal diameter (in mm) 5. The type of joint: “NS” or “S” 6. The identification of JWWA 2.03 JOINTS F. Flanged Joint 1. Flanged joint is only allowed where connecting JWWA ERDIP to AWWA piping. 2. As specified in Section 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe. 3. Bolts, nuts, and gaskets as specified in Section 40 05 19 G. Restrained Mechanical Joint (RMJ) 1. 20-inch to 40 -inch Diameter: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DUCTILE IRON PIPE Cottonwoods Connection Section 40 05 19.05-4 a. Mechanical type joint consisting of socket, spigot, lock ring, rubber gasket, back-up ring, gland, and T-head bolts and nuts. b. Fully restrained mechanical joints for above or below ground service. c. Candidate manufacturers: 1) Kubota Corporation, Type NS mechanical joint 2) No Approved Equal d. Joint Performance (per joint) shall be as follows as shown in the table below: Pipe size in. [mm] Slip-out resistance 1) lbf [kN] Expansion and contraction 2) in. [mm] Deflection angle 2) Allowable 3) Maximum 3) 20 [500] 340,000 [1,500] ±2.36 [±60] 3°20’ 7°00’ 24 [600] 408,000 [1,800] 2°50’ 28 [700] 476,000 [2,100] 2°30’ 32 [800] 544,000 [2,400] 2°10’ 36 [900] 612,000 [2,700] 2°00’ 40 [1000] 680,000 [3,000] 1°50’ Note 1) Slip-out resistance shall be met for pipes including field cutting pieces and fittings. Note 2) Expansion and contraction and deflection angle are for pipes only. Note 3) Allowable angle is at pipe jointing and maximum at earthquake/ground subsidence. Note. Slip-out resistance conforms to Class A (i.e. 3 D kN [D; nominal diameter in mm] = 17,000 D lbf [D; in in.]) and expansion and contraction Class S -1 (i.e. ±1% of L [L; pipe length]) of ISO 16134. 2. 44-inch to 104 -inch Diameter: a. Mechanical type joint consisting of socket, spigot, lock ring, connecting piece I, II, and III, rubber gasket, back -up ring, split ring, gland, and T-head bolts and nuts. b. Fully restrained mechanical joints for above or below ground service. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DUCTILE IRON PIPE Cottonwoods Connection Section 40 05 19.05-5 c. Candidate manufacturers: 1) Kubota Corporation, Type S mechanical joint 2) No Approved Equal d. Joint Performance (per joint) shall be as follows as shown in the table below: Pipe size in. [mm] Slip-out resistance 1) lbf [kN] Expansion and contraction 2) in. [mm] Deflection angle 2) Allowable 3) Maximum 3) 44 [1100] 748,000 [3,300] ±2.36 [±60] 1°40’ 7°00’ 48 [1200] 816,000 [3,600] 1°30’ 54 [1350] 918,000 [4,050] 6°30’ 60 [1500] 1,020,000 [4,500] 5°50’ 64 [1600] 1,088,000 [4,800] ±1.57 [±40] or ±1.97 [±50] 5°00’ 66 [1650] 1,122,000 [4,950] 4°50’ 72 [1800] 1,224,000 [5,400] 4°40’ 80 [2000] 1,360,000 [6,000] 4°20’ 84 [2100] 1,428,000 [6,300] 4°10’ 88 [2200] 1,496,000 [6,600] 4°00’ 96 [2400] 1,632,000 [7,200] ±1.57 [±40] 3°50’ 104 [2600] 1,768,000 [7,800] 3°40’ Note 1) Slip-out resistance shall be met for pipes including field cutting pieces and fittings. Note 2) Expansion and contraction and deflection angle are for pipes only. Note 3) Allowable angle is at pipe jointing and maximum at earthquake/ground subsidence. Note. Slip-out resistance conforms to Class A (i.e. 3 D kN [D; nominal diameter in mm] = 17,000 D lbf [D; in in.]) and expansion and contraction Class S -1 (i.e. ±1% of L [L; pipe length]) of ISO 16134. 2.04 PIPE LINING A. Pipe linings shall be factory or shop applied. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DUCTILE IRON PIPE Cottonwoods Connection Section 40 05 19.05-6 B. Pipes will be lined internally with cement mortar in accordance with JWWA A 113. The cement used will be Portland cement conforming to JIS R 5210. The lining thickness will be as shown in the following table: Pipe size in. [mm] Nominal thickness in. [mm] 20, 24 [500, 600] 0.24 [6] 20 to 36 [700 to 900] 0.31 [8] 40 [1000] 0.39 [10] 44 and 48 [1100 and 1200] 0.39 [10] 54 and 60 [1350 and 1500] 0.47 [12] 64 to 104 [1600 to 2600] 0.59 [15] C. The lining will have acrylic resin seal coating in accordance with JWWA A 113. The inside surface of the socket will be free of mortar and coated with synthetic resin paint conforming to JWWA K 139 to the minimum mean dry film thickness of 3.1 mil [0.08 mm]. 2.05 FITTING LINING A. Fitting linings shall be factory or shop applied. B. 20-inch to 40 -inch Diameter: a. Fittings will be coated internally with fusion-bonded epoxy in accordance with JWWA G 112. The minimum film thickness of the coating will be 11.8 mil [0.3 mm]. b. The inside surface of the socket will be coated with synthetic resin paint conforming to JWWA K 139 to the minimum mean dry film thickness of 3.1 mil [0.08 mm]. C. 44-inch to 104 -inch Diameter: a. Fittings will be coated internally with fusion-bonded epoxy in accordance with JWWA G 112, liquid epoxy in accordance with JWWA K 135 or Solvent -free epoxy in accordance with JWWA K 157. The minimum film thickness of the coating will be 11.8 mil [0.3 mm]. b. The inside surface of the socket will be coated with synthetic resin paint conforming to JWWA K 139, liquid epoxy in accordance with JWWA K 135 or Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DUCTILE IRON PIPE Cottonwoods Connection Section 40 05 19.05-7 Solvent-free epoxy in accordance with JWWA K 157. The minimum mean dry film thickness of 3.1 mil [0.08 mm]. 2.06 PIPE AND FITTING COATING A. Pipe and fitting coatings shall be factory or shop applied. B. Pipes and fittings will be coated externally with zinc rich paint followed by a synthetic resin finishing coating in accordance with AA type of JDPA Z 2009. The application mass of the zinc rich paint will be 0.49 oz./ft2 (150 g/m2) which will result in a minimum mean dry film thickness 0.78 mil (0.02 mm). The synthetic resin paint will conform to JWWA K 139 and the minimum mean dry film thickness of the finishing coating will be 3.14 mil (0.08 mm). 2.07 ACCESSORIES H. 20-inch to 40 -inch Diameter: 1. Rubber gaskets shall be of synthetic rubber (SBR) conforming to JWWA K 156. 2. Lock rings shall be of ductile iron coated with fusion -bonded epoxy or synthetic resin paint. 3. Glands shall be of ductile iron coated with synthetic resin paint. 4. Tee-head bolts and hexagon nuts shall be of 316 stainless steel. 5. Back-up rings shall be of polyamide resin. I. 44-inch to 104 -inch Diameter: 1. Rubber gaskets shall be of synthetic rubber (SBR) conforming to JWWA K 156. 2. Lock rings and Connecting piece I, II and III shall be of ductile iron coated with fusion-bonded epoxy or synthetic resin paint. 3. Glands and Split rings shall be of ductile iron coated with synthetic resin paint. 4. Tee-head bolts and hexagon nuts shall be of 316 stainless steel. 5. Back-up rings shall be of polyamide resin. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DUCTILE IRON PIPE Cottonwoods Connection Section 40 05 19.05-8 1. Follow piping routes specified on the drawings as closely as possible. Submit proposed deviations in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 2. Install pipe in accordance with AWWA C600. 3. Make connections to existing structures and manholes so that the finished work will conform as nearly as practicable to the requirements specified for new manholes, including necessary concrete work, cutting and shaping. Shape concrete mortar within any structure and manhole as specified. B. Anchorage: Provide as specified on the Drawings. 3.02 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT A. Install polyethylene as specified in AWWA C105 and within this Section. B. Potable Water Pipe: Single wrap, 4 -mil high density polyethylene. C. Wrapping: a. Wrap buried pipe, fittings, valves, and couplings. b. Prior to the placing of concrete, wrap fittings that require concrete backing. c. Wrap the polyethylene tube seams and overlaps and hold in place by means of a 2-inch-wide plastic backed adhesive tape. d. The tape shall be such that the adhesive shall bond securely to both metal surfaces and polyethylene film. e. Bedding and initial backfill for polyethylene wrapped pipe shall be a well - graded granular material to avoid cutting or damaging the polyethylene tube during placement and backfilling. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-1 SECTION 40 05 24.23 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Steel piping, joints, fittings, pipe lining and coating, and fabricated steel piping fittings and specials. B. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. C. It is the Contractor’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor’s Work. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures C. Section 09 90 10 – Pipeline Coating and Linings 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. Standard H -20. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. 2. B16.3 - Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300. 3. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 4. B16.9 - Factory -Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. 5. B16.12 - Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings. C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C200 - Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-2 2. C203 - Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape-Hot Applied. 3. C205 - Standard for Cement -Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe-4 Inches and Larger-Shop Applied. 4. C206 - Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. 5. C207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service -Sizes 4 inches Through 144 inches. 6. C208 - Standard for Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings. 7. C209 - Standard for Cold-Applied Tape Coating for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines. 8. C214 - Standard for Tape -Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. 9. C602 - Standard for Cement -Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place – 4 inches and Larger. 10. C606 - Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 11. M 11 - Steel Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation. D. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 2. A3.0 - Standard Welding Terms and Definitions. 3. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code – Steel. 4. QC 1 - Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors. E. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Casting. 2. A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A 105 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. 4. A 106 - Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High - Temperature Service. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-3 5. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 6. A 183 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts. 7. A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 8. C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 9. D 297 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Products - Chemical Analysis. 10. D 395 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Compression Set. 11. D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. 12. D 429 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Adhesion to Rigid Substrates. 13. D 471 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids. 14. D 573 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber - Deterioration in an Air Oven. 15. D 2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 16. D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property -Durometer Hardness. F. NACE International (NACE): 1. RP0274-74 - Standard Recommended Practice. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Design criteria for pipe and pipe fittings: In accordance with AWWA Manual M11 with the following modifications: a. Wall thickness: As designed, as shown on the drawings, or minimum specified thickness, whichever is thicker. b. Inside diameter of unlined pipe: Nominal. c. Inside diameter of lined pipe: As measured from face to face of liner, but not less than nominal. d. Deflection of underground pipe inside diameter: Maximum 2 percent under trench load of H -20 live load in accordance with AASHTO specifications. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-4 e. Working stress of steel: Maximum 50 percent of yield stress. B. Pipe Layout: Design complete pipeline layout, in accordance with AWWA Manual M11: 1. General: a. Base stationing and elevation convention as shown on Drawings. b. Maximum Laying Lengths: 1) Maximum laying lengths shall be limited to 50 feet. 2) Select lengths to accommodate installation operation. 2. Include, as Minimum: a. Specific number, location, and direction of each pipe, joint, and fitting or special. Number each pipe in installation sequence. b. Station and centerline elevation at changes in grade or horizontal alignment. c. Station and centerline elevation to which spigot end of each pipe will be laid. d. Elements of curves and bends, both in horizontal and vertical alignment. e. Location of mitered pipe sections, beveled ends for alignment conformance, butt straps, and deep bell lap joints for temperature stress control. f. Location of closures, cutoff sections for length adjustment, temporary access manways, vents, and weld lead outlets for construction convenience. 1) Provide for adjustment in pipe laying headings and to conform to indicated stationing. 2) Changes in location or number will require Owner’s approval. g. Location of bulkheads, both those shown and as required, for hydrostatic testing of pipeline. h. Details of specials with developed plan dimensions, wall thickness, reinforcing at openings, joint welding details, etc. C. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS): 1. Qualified by testing in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX for shop welds and AWS D1.1 for field welds. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-5 2. Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs) conducted on unlisted base metal (most coil products are unlisted base metals) to be production welded as required in the referenced welding Code shall be traceable to heat lots. 3. Written WPS required for welds, both shop and field. 4. Notch-tough welding that requires heat input control shall be required: a. AWS D1.1/D1.1.M prequalified welding procedures are not allowed. b. WPS used to shop fabricate pipe shall be qualified per ASME BPVC SEC IX and shall include Supplementary Essential Variables. c. WPS used to field install pipe shall be qualified for heat input control in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. d. PQRs shall be qualified for notch tough welding with consideration for thickness of steel, test temperature, and Charpy V -notch CVN values. Refer to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Table 4.6 PQR Supplementary Essential Variable Changes for CVN Testing Applications Requiri ng WPS Requalification for SMAW, SAW, GMAW, FCAW, and GTAW and Section 4, Part D Requirements for CVN Testing, Option A (three specimens). The CVN test temperature and acceptance shall be the same as pipe base metal specified herein. D. Stulling (Strutting): 1. Design stulling for pipe, specials, and fittings such that damage is avoided during handling, storage, and installation. 2. Design such that pipe deflection is prevented and to support backfill, plus backfilling and compaction equipment loads. E. NSF Certification: All materials which may contact drinking water, including pipes, gaskets, lubricants and O -Rings, shall be ANSI-certified as meeting the requirements of NSF Standard 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. To permit field- verification of this certification, all such components shall be appropriately stamped with the NSF logo. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 00. B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check - marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviati ons from specification requirements. Check marks () denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, each deviation Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-6 shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Construction Manager is the final authority for determining ac ceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked -up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested de viations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. C. Shop drawings: Details of fittings and specials showing thickness and dimensions of plates, detail of welds, and materials; listing of proposed services and locations for use of grooved joint type piping; tabulated layout schedules for cement -mortar lined and coated steel pipe. D. Product data: Details of fittings and specials showing thickness and dimensions of plates, detail of welds, and materials; grooved joint piping fittings, gaskets, couplings, grooving of pipe and fittings, and pipe lining and coating. 1. Include manufacturing tolerances and maximum angular deflection limitations of field joints. 2. Stulling size, spacing, and layout. E. Welding Data (Shop and Field Welding): 1. Show on a weld map, location, type, size, and extent of welds with reference call out for WPS and NDE numbers in tail of weld symbol. 2. Distinguish between shop and field welds. 3. Indicate, by welding symbols or sketches, details of welded joints and preparation of base metal. 4. Welding and NDE symbols shall be in accordance with AWS A2.4. 5. Welding terms and definitions shall be in accordance with AWS A3.0. 6. Submit welding data together with shop drawings as complete package . F. Certificates of Compliance: Cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe. G. Design calculations: Wall thicknesses for external loading, special loading (transportation, handling to load/unload, etc.), and internal pressure including opening reinforcement details of collars, wrappers, and crotch plates. Crotch plates are not allowed on fittings inside vaults. Increase cylinder thickness or use pipe collars or wrappers to satisfy fitting design requirements. H. Mill certificates. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-7 I. Test reports: Rubber gaskets. J. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Manufacturers’ Services, Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance that products furnished meet requirements of this Specification. 2. Pipe Manufacturer’s written Quality Assurance/Control Plan. 3. Statements of Qualification: a. Pipe manufacturer and fittings/specials fabricator. b. Welding subcontractor qualifications and certified payrolls c. Welders or Welding Operators: 1) Name of welder and certification stamp number. 2) Welding procedures/positions for which welder is qualified. 3) Certification date and current certification status. d. Certified Welding Inspector. e. NDT Quality Control Personnel. 4. Procedures: a. Shop and field welding information: At a minimum include a complete welding code paper trail with linkage to Shop Drawings that includes the following: 1) Written WPS and PQR. a) Provide complete joint dimensions and details showing bevels, groove angles, root face, and root openings for all welds . b) Notch-tough welding shall be required. For shop welding, address supplementary essential variables in addition to essential variables as indicated in ASME Section IX, QW -251.2. c) For field welding, heat -input, control PQR essential variables as indicated in AWS D1.1 shall be included. For shop and field welding, provide heat- input table on WPS’s for welder guidance. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-8 d) PQR’s for notch -tough welding shall document heat -input control by monitoring volts, amps, and travel speed or time -rate of change of weld metal volume as calculated by measuring change in electrode length over a period of time. Charpy V - notch tests shall be conducted on weld metal and heat affected zone. Test coupons shall be oriented transverse to final direction of rolling. Full size Charpy specimen test acceptance shall be same as base metal specified herein. 2) Written NDT procedures. 3) Current WPQ. 4) Written description of proposed sequencing of events or special techniques such as: a) Controlling pipe wall temperature stress during installation. b) Minimizing distortion of steel. c) Shop-Applied Cement -Mortar Lining: Include a description of machine to be used. List similar projects where machine was used, pipe size and footage. d) Monitoring pipeline temperatures during installation. b. Written weld repair procedures for the Work. c. Field coating application and repair. d. Field lining application and repair. e. Written consumable control procedure for welding materials demonstrating: 1) How consumables will be stored to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. 2) How consumables will be dried in ovens prior to use. 3) How consumables which become wet will be reconditioned. 5. Reports: a. Source Quality Control Test Reports: 1) Hydrostatic testing. 2) Destructive weld testing. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-9 3) Nondestructive weld testing. 4) Steel impact testing using Charpy V -notch method. 5) Coating and lining factory site visit letter by qualified manufacturer’s technical representative. b. Field Quality Control Test Reports: 1) Weld tests, including re -examination of repaired welds, on each weld joint for the following tests, as applicable: a) Visual Testing (VT) b) Radiographic Testing (RT) c) Ultrasonic Testing (UT) d) Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) e) Liquid Penetrant Testing (PT) f) Leak Testing (LT) 2) Coating and lining site visit letter by qualified technical representative. c. Cement-mortar lining compressive strength testing accordance with AWWA C205. d. Cement-mortar armor coating absorption tests in accordance with AWWA C205. e. Holiday testing for epoxy and/or polyurethane. 6. Field Testing Plan: Submit at least 15 days prior to testing and include at least the following information: a. Testing dates. b. Piping system and sections to be tested. c. Method of isolation. d. Method of conveying water from source to system being tested. e. Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping sections to be tested. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-10 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards: 1. Cement-mortar lined, and coated steel pipe shall conform to the following standards, as complemented and modified in this Section: a. Steel pipe: AWWA C200. b. Cement-mortar lining and armor coating: AWWA C205. c. Fittings and specials: AWWA C208. d. Reinforcement of fittings and specials: AWWA M 11. B. Qualifications: 1. Pipe Manufacturer: a. Experienced in fabricating pipe of similar diameters, lengths, and wall thickness required for the Work. b. Steel Pipe Fabricators Association (SPFA), Lloyd’s Registry Certification, or ISO 9000 Certification. c. Demonstrate current production capability for volume of work required for this Project. d. Experience shall include successful fabrication to AWWA C200 standards of at least 50,000 linear feet of 36-inch diameter and 30,000 linear feet of 48 - inch diameter or larger pipe, with wall thickness of 1/4 inches or greater, in the United States (USA) in the past 5-years. e. Experience shall be applicable to fabrication plant facilities and personnel, not company or corporation that currently owns fabrication facility or employs personnel. 2. Fittings and Specials Fabricator: a. Experienced in fabricating fittings and specials of similar diameters and wall thickness required for the Work. b. Steel Pipe Fabricators Association (SPFA), Lloyd’s Registry Certification, or ISO 9000 Certification. c. Demonstrate current production capability for volume of work required for this Project. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-11 d. Experience shall include successful fabrication to AWWA C200/C208 standards of at least 25 fittings of 36 -inch, 48-inch, and 60-inch diameter or larger pipe, with wall thickness 3/8 inch or greater, in the United States (USA) in the past 5-years. e. Experience shall be applicable to fabrication shop facilities and personnel, not company or corporation that currently owns fabrication facility or employs personnel. 3. Field Welding Subcontractor: a. Contractor shall perform all field welding (except tack welding) through either one or maximum of two welding subcontractors. b. Welding subcontractor shall show experience successfully completing the butt-welding of over 2,000 feet of pipe (36-inch or larger) in the last 5 years. For each project referenced, submit client names, contact persons and phone number of each. c. Welding subcontractor shall show current license in state of Utah. d. Welding subcontractor shall submit with each monthly invoice: 1) Certified payrolls showing payment of employees FICA, workers compensation, and taxes. 2) Demonstrate hourly payment of employees e. Unit work payment of welders (employees) is not allowed. 4. Welders and Welding Operators: a. Shop Welders: In accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. b. Field Welders: In accordance with AWS D1.1. 5. Certified Welding Inspector (CWI): a. In accordance with AWS QC 1, with knowledge of appropriate welding code for the Work. b. After receiving CWI qualification, CWI shall have 5 years, or more, professional experience of welding inspection similar to the Work. 6. NDT Quality Control Personnel: a. In accordance with requirements of Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC- 1A, Level II. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-12 b. After receiving NDT qualification, NDT personnel shall have at least 5 years of professional experience related to NDT inspection similar to the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Pipe Marking: 1. Legibly mark installation sequence number on pipe, fittings, and specials in accordance with piping layout. 2. Special pipe sections and fittings shall be marked at each end with notation “TOP FIELD CENTERLINE”. 3. Mark/paint the word “TOP” on outside top spigot of each pipe section. 4. Mark “TOP MATCH POINT” for compound bends per AWWA C208 so end rotations can be easily oriented in field. B. Loading, transporting, unloading, and handling pipe and fittings: 1. Handle pipe in a manner and by methods that prevent damage to pipe, lining, and coatings. 2. Use padded slings and supports during handling as necessary to prevent damage. 3. Take all necessary precautions to maintain the integrity of the coating. 4. Handle pipe with proper equipment and do not push or drag along the ground. 5. Do not stack or otherwise externally-load pipe such that the dimensional integrity of the joint configuration and/or roundness of the pipe may be compromised. C. Delivery: 1. Securely bulkhead or otherwise seal ends of pipe, specials, and fittings prior to loading at manufacturing site. 2. Pipe ends shall remain sealed until installation. 3. Damage to pipe, fittings, or specials, including linings and coatings, found upon delivery to Job Site shall be repaired to Construction Manager’s satisfaction or removed from Site and replaced. D. Storage and Handling: 1. Meet requirements in Section 01 66 00. 2. Support pipe securely to prevent accidental rolling and to avoid contact with mud, water, or other deleterious materials. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-13 3. Support on sand or earth berms free of rock exceeding 1 inch in diameter. E. Inspection: 1. Inspect pipe lining and coating immediately before installation for damage and holidays. 2. Repair damaged pipe lining and coatings or reject in accordance with specified criteria for identifying and making minor repairs. 3. Remove rejected pipe from the project site. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notify Construction Manager in writing of the following: 1. Pipe Manufacturing: Not less than 14 days prior to starting. 2. Not less than 5 days prior to start of each of the following: a. Welding. b. Coating application. c. Lining application. d. Shop hydrostatic testing. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The plans call out the pipe diameter and steel thickness : 1. Do not submit or provide a steel thickness less than that shown on plans. 2. For pipes >30-inch diameter: diameter called out shall be finished inside diameter after lining, thus if a 60 -inch WSP has a ½ inch thick mortar lining it will have a steel cylinder inside diameter of 61-inches. 3. For pipes 30 -inch diameter and smaller: diameter called out shall be steel cylinder diameter per ASME B36.10. 4. Pipes within 5 diameters upstream of meters shall have the same inside diameter as the meter (within one percent). 5. Where thickness is not called out on the drawings, design pipe as described herein. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-14 B. Pipe: Manufacturing of steel pipe, fittings, and specials shall be under direction of one pipe Supplier. Responsibility shall include, at minimum, coordinating work of other suppliers for fittings and specials. C. Steel pipe, fittings, and specials shall be manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked to comply with AWWA C200 and additional requirements of these Contract Documents. In lieu of collar reinforcement, pipe, fittings, or specials with outlets may be fabri cated in their entirety of steel plate having thickness equal to sum of pipe wall plus required reinforcement. D. Contractor to supply heat shrinkable poly olefin sleeves per Exterior Joint Field Coating - heat shrink sleeves in Section 09 90 10 for all pipe joints. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Pipe Supplier: Manufacturing of steel pipe, coatings, linings, fittings, and specials shall be under direction of one pipe Supplier. Responsibility shall include, at minimum, coordinating work with a maximum of one other supplier for fittings and specials. B. Steel pipe: 1. Type, pipe 6 inches and smaller: ASTM A 53, black or galvanized, seamless or straight seam electric resistance welded. Minimum Schedule 40. 2. Type, from 6 to 12 inches: ASTM A 53, black or galvanized pipe, seamless or straight seam electric resistance welded. Minimum Schedule 20. 3. Type, larger than 12 inches: AWWA C200, without butt strap, riveted, or swaged joints; wall thickness as shown on the drawings and as follows: a. AWWA C200 under-tolerances for plate and coil are specifically disallowed on this project except for cylinder thinning incidental to expanded bell fabrication. b. Specified Minimum Yield Strength: 42,000 psi. 1) Exception: Piping between stations indicated on the Drawings shall have a Minimum Yield Strength of 50,000 psi c. Specified Minimum Tensile Strength: 60,000 psi. d. Measured Yield Strength: 85% maximum of Measured Tensile Strength e. Minimum Elongation in 2-inch Gauge Length: 21 percent. f. Weldability: Maximum carbon equivalent of 0.45, as measured using AWS D1.1, Annex XI, Guideline on Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat formula: CE=C+((Mn+Si)/6))+(Cr+Mo+V)/5+(Ni+Cu)/15. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-15 g. Pressure Vessel Quality as follows: 1) Coils: Continuous cast process, fully -killed, fine grained practice conforming to physical, manufacturing and testing requirements of ASTM A1018/A1018M, SS, Grade 40 (modified). 2) Plate: a) Fully-killed, conforming to ASTM A20, fine grained practice conforming to physical, manufacturing and testing requirements of ASTM A516/A516M, Grade 70. b) Steel Chemistry: Conform to ASTM A516/A516M, Grade 70. Steel plates that are over 1-inch thick shall be normalized. 3) Toughness: a) Charpy V-notch Acceptance Criteria: Transverse specimen orientation, full size specimens, 25 foot -pounds energy at test temperature of 30 degrees F. b) Frequency: See paragraph Steel Toughness Testing. 4. Type, 24 inches and larger, with grooved type couplings and wall thickness less than 1/2 inch: Provided with stub ends, sized as follows, for grooves. a. Thickness: As recommended by coupling manufacturer, but not less than 1/2 inch. b. Length: Width of coupling plus 1 inch, but not less than 6 inches. C. Steel pipe fittings: 1. Fabrication: Shop fabricate. No field fabrication will be allowed, unless approved by Construction Manager. 2. Crotch Plate: Fabricate from fully killed, fine grain, pressure vessel steel conforming to ASTM A516/A516M, Grade 70, and as follows: a. Crotch plates are not allowed on fittings inside vaults or the Area 30 pump station. Increase cylinder thickness or use pipe collars or wrappers to satisfy fitting design requirements. b. Plates shall be normalized. c. Sulfur content shall not exceed 0.005 percent. Carbon shall not exceed 0.20 percent. Manganese shall not exceed 1.20 percent. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-16 d. Charpy V-notch tests in direction transverse to final rolling shall be performed per ASTM A370 on full size specimens of coupons taken from each plate. Acceptance shall be 25 -foot pounds at 30 degrees F. e. Carbon equivalent shall not exceed 0.45 percent. 3. Wall Thickness: Where thickness of pipe wall (steel plate) is not shown on the drawings or specified, provide standard weight pipe and nominal pipe size. Refer to ASME B36.10M for definitions of wall thickness for standard weight pipe and nominal pipe size (NPS). 4. Reinforce to withstand either internal pressures, both circumferential and longitudinal, or external loading conditions, whichever is greater. 5. Elbows, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Minimum Radius: 2.5 times pipe diameter or as indicated on Drawings b. Complete joint penetration (CJP) welds on miter welds. c. Maximum Miter Angle: 11 .25 degrees on each section resulting in a maximum deflection angle of 22.5 degrees per miter weld as recommended in AWWA C208. d. Bevels: Vary bevels on miters to provide a constant weld groove angle. For a 11.25-degree miter, (22.5 degrees miter weld) bevels must vary from 18.75 degrees on OD of bend to 41.25 degrees on ID of bend to provide a constant 60-degree groove angle for CJP welding. e. Miter-cut angle of a weld bell shall not exceed 5 -degrees. f. For horizontal and vertical curves, miter angles shall not exceed 3 -degrees and the total deflection shall be spaced as called for on the drawings. 6. Outlets: a. 24 Inches and Smaller: Fabricate from ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B, standard weight steel pipe. b. Larger than 24 Inches: Fabricate from ASTM A106, Grade B, standard weight pipe. c. Fabricate collar or wrapper reinforcement using same steel as specified for main pipe barrel. 7. Flanged fittings: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-17 a. Type for 12 -inch and smaller pipe: ASME B16.1, cast iron or ductile iron, 125 pounds; or ASME B16.5, steel, 150 pounds, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 where used with galvanized pipe. b. Type for larger than 12-inch pipe: ASME B16.5, steel, 150 pounds; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 where used with galvanized pipe; or AWWA C207 and AWWA C208, fabricated from flanges and steel pipe, respectively. c. Companion flanges for 4 inches and smaller pipe: ASME B16.1, cast iron or ductile iron, 125 pounds; ASME B16.5, steel, 150 pounds, slip -on or welding neck; or ammonia type for use on chlorine liquid or gas piping. d. Companion flanges for larger than 4-inch to and including 12 -inch pipe: ASME B16.5, slip-on or welding neck type. e. Companion flanges for larger than 12 -inch pipe: ASME B16.5, steel,150 pounds; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 where used with galvanized pipe; or AWWA C207, steel plate or raised hub type. f. Weld flanges to pipe or fittings before applying lining. g. Machine flanges or provide tapered filler for changes in grade or to slope lines for drainage. h. Flange bolts: 1) ANSI B18.2.1 standard square or hexagon head bolts with ANSI B18.2.2 standard hexagon nuts. Threads shall be ANSI Bl.1, standard coarse thread series; bolts shall be Class 2A, nuts shall be Class 2B. Bolt length shall conform to ANSI B16.5. 2) Unless otherwise specified, bolts shall be carbon steel machined bolts with hot pressed hexagon nuts. Bolts for submerged service shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel in conformance with ASTM F593, marking F593F. Nuts for submerged service shall be made of copper- silicon alloy bronze conforming to ASTM B98, alloy C65100, designation H04 or alloy C65500, designation H04. Bolts and nuts for buried service shall be made of noncorrosive high -strength, low -alloy steel having the characteristics specified in ANSI/AWWA C111/A21, regardless of any other protective coating. Where washers are required, they shall be of the same material as the associated bolts. i. Gaskets: 1) Gasket material shall be neoprene or nitrile (Buna N). Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-18 2) Gaskets for plain faced flanges shall be the full-face type. Thickness shall be 1/16 inch for pipe 10 inches and less in diameter and 1/8 inch for pipe 12 inches and larger in diameter. Unless otherwise specified, gaskets for raised face flanges shall match the raised face and shall be 1/16 inch thick for pipe 3 -1/2 inches and less in diameter and 1/8 inch thick for pipe 4 inches and larger. Conform to ANSI B16.21. 8. Welded steel piping fittings and specials: a. General: Specified herein are the design and fabrication of fabricated steel piping fittings and specials, which include elbows, branches, nozzles, manifolds, headers, heads, collars, stiffeners, reinforcements, and other steel fabrications relating to ste el piping, but shall not include steel pipe. b. Design: 1) Supplier shall design and detail fittings and specials. a) Design: In accordance with the recommended procedures in AWWA Manual M 11, as complemented and modified in this Section. b) Nozzles: Reinforced in accordance with recommended practice in AWWA M 11, Steel Pipe Manual. c) Design reinforcing for fittings and specials for the specified test pressure indicated in the Drawings. d) Fittings shall conform in dimension to AWWA C208, complemented with the provisions specified in this Section. e) The working stress for steel used for fabrication of pipe shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield stress. 2) The thickness of pipe, large elbows, and headers, except header nozzles, shall be the thicker of: a) The thickness designed in accordance with the design methods specified in the preceding paragraph “Fabricated Steel Piping Fittings and Specials” and as specified in this section. 3) Elbows shall be of the number of pieces specified under paragraph Steel Pipe Fittings, “Welding and Fittings”, and thickness of material shall conform to thickness of pipe or manifold shells specified. 4) Ends of fittings to be welded to pipe shall be beveled for welding. c. Fabrication: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-19 1) Shop fabricate steel piping fittings and specials in units as long as practicable for safe hauling and installation. Minimize number of field welds. 2) Fabricate fittings and specials to uniform lengths with proper end clearance for the specified types of joint or attachment. 3) Fabricate fittings and specials to allow field assembly without cutting or special work. 4) Where specified indicated on the Drawings, the inside of fabricated steel manifolds and other fittings and specials shall receive a cement - mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C205. 5) Do not weld flanges to nozzles until the nozzles and reinforcements are completely welded to the header. a) Accurately space and align flanges so that when connections have been made there will be no stress on the header, piping, or equipment. Properly locate and align equipment. d. Dished heads: 1) Design: 1-piece (seamless) spherically-dished (torispherical) heads. 2) Dish radius: Same dimension as the outside diameter of the head measured at skirt. 3) Skirt face length: Not less than 3 inches. 4) Design heads in accordance with recommended practice in AWWA M 11, Steel Pipe Manual. e. Welding fittings for piping 8 inches and less in nominal diameter: Butt - welding fittings in accordance with ASME B16.9, standard wall, or standard weight. f. Welding fittings for piping larger than 8 inches in nominal diameter: Butt - welding fittings in accordance with ASME B16.9, or, at the option of the CONTRACTOR, made up out of sections of pipe welded together, except where smooth bends are indicated for ai r lines. g. Fittings made up of sections of pipe welded together shall be made of pipe of at least the same wall thickness as the pipe with which used, and bends shall be miter bends, fabricated in accordance with AWWAC208 and as supplemented by AWWA Manual M 11. Welding of these made-up fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C206. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-20 1) Design and fabricate outlets and 4 branch fittings in accordance with AWWA Manual M 11. 2) Bends may be welded to adjacent pipe sections. a) Bends shall be manufactured of the following number of pieces: b) Bends from 0 to 30 degrees angle, 2 pieces. c) Bends from 30 to 45 degrees angle, 3 pieces. d) Bends from 45 to 67-1/2 degrees angle, 4 pieces. e) Bends from 67-1/2 to 90 degrees angle, 5 pieces. h. Welded Butt joints shall be complete joint penetration (CJP). i. Steel Butt Weld Fittings: 1) In accordance with ASME B16.9 conforming to ASTM A234/A234M. 2) Standard weight. 3) Taper pipe wall at welds at 4:1 to connect pipes of different wall thickness. 4) Coordinate difference in diameter convention between specials and AWWA C200/C208 pipe and fittings to provide complete piping system as shown. 5) Miters shall be limited to 3 degrees per joint D. Steel pipe lining and coating: 1. General: a. Except where otherwise specified in the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings, lining and coating for steel pipe shall be cement mortar lining and tape-wrapped with cement mortar armor coating. Other coating systems are bid alternates or as scheduled in the Contract Documents. b. All materials used in the pipe lining for pipe used in potable water systems shall be in accordance with NSF Part 61. c. Pipe coating: 1) Extend pipe coating for underground piping 6 inches above finish grade or finish floor, and neatly terminate. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-21 2) Field paint aboveground steel pipe as specified in Execution of this Section. 2. Cement-mortar lining and coating: a. Lining: 1) Shop apply cement -mortar lining for steel pipe, interior, in accordance with AWWA C205. b. Coating: 1) Cement-mortar armor coating for steel pipe exterior: In accordance with AWWA C205, modified as follows: a) Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, low alkali. b) Sand: AWWA C205 except that the total percentage of deleterious material shall not exceed 3 percent. 3. Plastic tape wrap: a. Plastic tape wrap for exterior of steel piping shall consist of a prime coat followed with spirally-applied tape layers to a minimum system thickness of 80 mils. b. Plastic tape wrap coating: Plastic tape wrap for exterior of steel pipe, fittings and specials, in accordance with AWWA C209 and AWWA C214 as applicable. c. General: The tape coating system shall consist of primer, 1 layer of 20 mil inner wrap, 1 layer of 30 mil outer wrap and a second layer of 30 mil outer wrap, for a total coating thickness of 80 mils. All materials shall be products of the same manufacturer. d. Primer: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1) Polyken Pipeline Coatings, Number 1029 or 1039 Primer. 2) The Tapecoat Company, TC Omniprime Primer. e. Pipe wrap: 1) First wrap: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: a) Polyken Pipeline Coatings, Number 989-20 (932-50 for fittings). b) The Tapecoat Company, Tapecoat 1020B. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-22 2) Middle wrap: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: a) Polyken Pipeline Coatings, Number 955-30. b) The Tapecoat Company, Tapecoat 2030B. 3) Finish wrap: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: a) Polyken Pipeline Coatings, Number 956-30 White. b) The Tapecoat Company, Tapecoat CT 2030B. f. Filler tape: 1) Polyken 939. 2) Or equal. g. Joint wrap: 1) Polyken 932-50, white Hi-Tack Joint Wrap tape. 2) Tapecoat Company, Joint Tape. h. Application on welded joints: 1) Remove sharp edges of weld spatter and slag with a file or ball peen hammer before wrapping joints. 2) Apply plastic tape wrap in accordance with AWWA C209. a) Clean and prime all surfaces, then apply a wrap of 0.125 thick by 2-inch-wide filler tape centered on the weld. Push and knead the tape into all voids. 3) Apply 2 wraps of 50 mil joint tape; or the tape may be half -lapped to obtain double thickness. 4) Finish wrap: Apply final wrapping in same manner. 5) Wrap fittings, valves, and other odd-shaped components in the pipeline with first and finish wrapping over the prime coat, total thickness of tape 80 mils. E. Steel pipe, tape wrapped, cement-mortar lined and armor coated: 1. General: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-23 a. Applicable standards: Cement -mortar lined, and tape wrapped cement mortar armor coated steel pipe shall conform to the standards specified in General of this Section. b. Identification marks: Provide identification marks in accordance with AWWA C200. These marks shall be stenciled or otherwise shown at the top of the piping items exterior, including the following information: 1) Name or trademark of the manufacturer. 2) Date of manufacture of the item. 3) Internal diameter in inches. 4) Number of the item, sequential from initial to end station. c. Diameter designation: The pipe diameter specified in the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings shall be the clear inside diameter after application of the cement -mortar lining with a tolerance of plus 0 inch and minus 1/4 inch. 2. Design: a. Pipe and fittings shall be designed by SUPPLIER where thickness is not indicated on the drawings. b. Design: In accordance with the recommended procedures in AWWA Manual M 11, as complemented and modified in this Section. c. Design working pressure shall be the test pressure given in the Pipe Schedule in the Drawings. d. Thicknesses of Pipe, Fittings and Specials Shall Be the Thicker Of: 1) The thickness designed in accordance with the design methods specified in the subparagraph below. 2) The thickness indicated on the Drawings. 3) The following thicknesses: a) For pipes 26 inches and less in nominal diameter, not less than 1/4 inch. b) For pipes more than 26 inches and less than or equal to 38 inches in nominal diameter, not less than 5/16 inch. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-24 c) For pipes more than 38 inches in nominal diameter, not less than 3/8 inch. 4) Each continuous pipeline shall maintain the same steel thickness along the entire pipeline length for a particular diameter, with the thickest portion of the line governing. e. The working stress for steel used for fabrication of pipe shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield stress. f. Break longitudinal and girth seams for straight seam pipe shall be no greater in number than would be required for the fabrication of pipe with 96 -inch by 120- inch steel plates. 1) Break longitudinal seams at the girth seams. g. Calculate earth loads using the following formula: W = 192 x H x B wherein the various terms shall have the following meaning: W: Earth load, pounds per linear foot of pipe. H: Height of fill over the pipe, feet. B: Outside diameter of the pipe, feet. X: Mathematical symbol for multiplication. h. Add AASHTO's H-20 loading to earth loads. i. Design pipe, fittings and specials for a deflection, under external loads, not to exceed 2 percent of the diameter. 1) Stiffness computations shall not consider the effect of the cement- mortar lining and coating. 2) Calculate deflection using the Spangler formula and the following values: a) Bedding constant K = 0.100. b) Modulus of soil reaction E' = 1 000 pounds per square inch. c) Deflection lag constant D1 = 1.00. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-25 j. Where piping is designated to be flanged or welded in order to restrain thrust, the design of the cylinder and flange or welded joint shall take into account the effect of stresses caused by thrust loads. k. Steel cylinder shall be subject to no more than 50 percent of the allowable steel yield stress. 3. Materials: a. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, low alkali. b. Gaskets shall meet the following requirements: 1) Minimum tensile strength, tested in accordance with ASTM D 412, between 2,000 and 2,700 pounds per square inch. 2) Minimum elongation, tested in accordance with ASTM D 412, between 350 and 400 percent. 3) Shore A durometer hardness, tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240, between 50 and 65. 4) Specific gravity, tested in accordance with ASTM D 297, between 0.90 and 1.50. 5) Maximum compression set, tested in accordance with Method B of ASTM D 395, 20 percent. 6) Maximum tension strength loss, tested in accordance with ASTM D 573 at 96 hours, 70 degrees Centigrade, in air, 20 percent. 7) Maximum elongation loss, tested in accordance with ASTM D 573 at 96 hours, 70 degrees Centigrade, in air, 20 percent. 8) Maximum absorption, tested in accordance with ASTM D 471 at 48 hours, 70 degrees Centigrade, in air, 5 percent. 4. Fabrication: a. Joints: Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide lap welded joints prepared for electric field welding in accordance with AWWA C206. b. Joint forming: 1) Joint geometry and joint field weld will be such that no part of any field weld will be closer than 1 inch to the nearest point of tangency to the bell radius. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-26 2) Form bell ends by an expanding press or by being moved axially over a die in such a manner as to stretch the steel plate beyond its elastic limit to form a truly round bell of suitable diameter and shape. c. Use butt-strap joints only where required for closures or where indicated on the Drawings. d. Flanges: AWWA C207, Class D or E (as required to meet the test pressure listed in the Piping Schedule), steel ring, and as follows: 1) Match pipe flanges to the valve flanges. a) At flanged joints connecting to valves, provide a steel pipe section without rod reinforcing and not less than 24 inches in length. b) Apply cement -mortar lining and coating to the steel pipe section. e. Shop coat of primer: Flanges and portions of pipe not covered with cement - mortar shall be given a shop coating of primer. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Steel Toughness Testing (for plate or coil > 7/16” thick): 1. Include three impact specimens; conduct test in direction transverse to final direction of rolling. 2. Coils: a. Definitions: 1) Initial Charpy Testing requires each coil of each heat be tested to verify uniformity of steel. This test shall be done prior to Production Charpy Testing below. 2) Production Charpy Testing requires a random coil from each heat be tested to verify consistency. This test shall be done after the Initial Charpy Testing above. b. Conduct Initial Charpy Testing of 5 percent of steel for pipe and specials. Take test coupons from each coil of each heat at locations of outer, middle, and inner wrap of coil. Middle coil test coupons may be taken from ends of full-length pipes that are closest to middle of coil. c. Conduct Production Charpy Testing on random coil of each heat on 95 percent of steel for pipe and specials. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-27 d. Coils that do not qualify shall not be used in production of pipe. 3. Plate: a. Conduct Charpy Tests on each plate in accordance with ASTM A20. b. Conduct on full size (10 mm by 10 mm) specimens from each plate in accordance with ASTM A20. c. Plates that do not qualify shall not be used in production of pipe. B. Crotch Plate: 1. Submit Charpy tests for all crotch plate materials. 2. Through Thickness tension testing shall be performed with acceptance criteria per Article 5 of ASTM A770/A770M on each plate. 3. Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination shall be conducted with acceptance criteria per Article 6 of ASTM A435/A435M on each plate. 4. Plates that do not qualify shall not be used. C. Shop Hydrostatic Pressure Test: In accordance with AWWA C200 Section 5.2, except as follows: 1. General: Unless specified otherwise, testing of pipe, fittings, and specials shall be performed before lining and coating is applied. 2. Pipe: maintain test pressure for at least 1 minute and for sufficient time to observe all weld seams do not leak. 3. Fittings and Specials: a. If fabricated from untested straight pipe, test to minimum pressure equal to field test pressure indicated in the Pipe Schedule in the drawings. b. Except as otherwise specified herein, no additional shop hydrostatic test will be required on fittings and specials fabricated from successfully tested straight pipe. c. Hydrostatically test fittings and specials with crotch plates, regardless of whether or not straight pipe sections used were previously tested. D. Joints, Lap Welded: 1. Fit test minimum of 5 joints, selected by Construction Manager, of each pipe size used: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-28 a. Join pipe ends with proposed adjacent pipe end. b. Match mark pipe ends. c. Record Actual Annular Space: 1) Maximum space at any point. 2) Minimum space at any point. 3) Space at 90-degree intervals; top, bottom, and spring line on both sides. E. Shop Nondestructive Testing: 1. Welds: 100 percent visually examined by CWI to criteria in ASME BPVC SEC VIII, Division 1. 2. Butt Joint Welds (including Groove Welds): Spot radiographically examine pipe in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII, Div. 1, Par. UW 52. Ultrasonically examine welds (meaning test 100% of all welds ultrasonically per ASME BPVC SEC VIII, Division 1, UW-53), that, in opinion of Construction Manager, cannot readily be radiographed. 3. Fillet Welds: 100 percent examine using magnetic particle inspection method in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII, Division 1. 4. Air test collars and wrappers in accordance with AWWA C206. F. Inspection of Pipe Fabrication Procedure: Owner may observe pipe fabrication. Supplier’s staff shall have experience in observation of steel pipe fabrication in accordance with ASTM E329. Supplier’s representative shall be present full time while pipe is being fabricated and while protective coating and lining is applied. G. Provide a letter to Construction Manager certifying that pipe furnished meets requirements of this section. 2.04 JOINTS A. Shop Welded: 1. Fabricate in accordance with AWWA C200 as modified herein. 2. Complete joint penetration (CJP) butt joints shall be used for longitudinal, girth, and spiral welds, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Lengths of pipe shall not be shop joined using lap joints. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-29 B. Preparation of Joints for Field Welding: 1. Butt Welded Field Joints: a. Shop weld all butt joints except where the plans specify field welded butt joints. b. Field welded butt joints with backer plate. In the shop, tack weld a curved backup plate on one of the two ends of the pipe joint being butt welded to allow for field fit-up flexibility. c. Field welded butt joints without backer. Tolerances on CJP butt joint beveled ends shall permit field assembly of pipe ends within workmanship assembly tolerances per AWS D1.1/D1.1M. According to this Code, for butt joints without backing or back-gouging, the root opening tolerance is plus 1/16 inch minus 1/8 inch. d. Plain ends beveled as detailed in the drawings and required by AWWA C200 and Contractor’s field WPS. e. Provide protection for factory beveled pipe ends so that ends are not damaged during transport. 2. Double welded lap joints and butt strap joints shall be tapped and drilled for testing in accordance with AWWA C206. C. Miter-End Cuts: 1. Welded Lap Joints: a. As shown on Drawings. b. Moderate deflections and long radius curves may be made using miter end cuts. c. Maximum Total Allowable Angle: 3 degrees per pipe joint. d. Provide miter-cut that is cold expanded square with face of miter–cut on bell ends only. e. Mitering of spigot ends will not be permitted. 2. Welded Butt Joints a. Maximum Total Allowable Angle: 1) 2.5 degrees per pipe joint for field adjustment. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-30 2) 6 degrees per joint for shop mitered pipe ends for vertical and horizontal curves. b. Minimum Pipe Wall Thickness: As indicated in the Drawings. c. Welded Butt joints shall be CJP . D. Special Temperature Control Joint: 1. Provide a special longer bell end (Special Temperature Control Joint) at a maximum spacing of 500 linear feet to account for movement on the installed pipe due to temperature changes. 2.05 STULLING (STRUTTING) A. Materials: 1. Shop-Lined Pipe: Wood stulls and wedges. 2. Unlined Pipe: Steel or wood. B. Install stulling for pipe, specials, and fittings in accordance with approved submittal and as soon as practical after pipe is fabricated or, for shop -lined pipe, after lining has been applied. C. Install stulling in manner that will not harm lining. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY AND TEMPORARY STORAGE OF PIPE AT SITE A. Meet requirements of Section 01 66 00. B. Keep plastic caps placed over the ends of each pipe until immediately prior to installation. Add water to interior of pipe if plastic cap is temporarily removed and replaced or repaired. Do not remove the plastic caps placed over the ends until the pipe is ready to be placed in the trench. Plastic caps may be opened temporarily to spray water inside the pipe for moisture control. C. Transport pipe to the jobsite on padded bunks with nylon tie-down straps to protect the pipe. D. Store pipe on earth berms or timber cradles. E. Stulling: 1. Greater than 48-inch through 72-inch diameter pipe: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-31 a. Install nominal 4-inch by 4 -inch, minimum 6-point wooden stulls or equivalent with nailed wooden wedges, at the quarter points, following the cure of the lining. 2. Greater than 30-inch to 48-inch diameter pipe: a. Install nominal 3-inch by 3 -inch, 4-point wooden stulls or equivalent with nailed wooden wedges at the quarter points, following the cure of the lining. b. Install a similar single strut 2 feet from each end of the pipe. 3. 30-inch and smaller diameter pipe: Install 2 -inch by 4-inch (nominal) stulls both ways 2 feet from the end of each pipe. 3.02 HANDLING OF PIPE A. Lift pipes with spreader beams or wide belt slings or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Do not use cable slings or chains directly bearing on the pipe. Lift pipes from at least two points, at approximately 1/3 to 1/4 of the pipe lengths from the pip e ends. B. Maintain internal braces placed in pipes 24 inches and larger in diameter until pipe is placed in the trench: 1. Horizontal stulls must be removed prior to backfilling. 2. Vertical stulls shall remain in place until after the trench is backfilled. 3. Remove stulls prior to testing. 4. Temporary removal of stulls will be allowed for repairs to the lining, if required. 3.03 SANITATION OF PIPE INTERIOR A. During laying operations, do not place tools, food, clothing, trash, or other materials in the pipe. B. When pipe laying is not in progress, including the noon hour, close the ends of the pipe with vermin and child -proof plug. 3.04 PLACEMENT OF PIPE IN TRENCH A. Control water in trench; trench bottom shall be as dry as reasonably possible. B. Lay pipes uphill if the grade exceeds 10 percent. Lay pipes with bell facing uphill if the grade exceeds 30 percent. Secure pipes from sliding. Where the grade exceeds 30 percent, weld each joint sufficiently to support the next but in no case less than 3/16 - inch throat thickness around the full pipe circumference. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-32 1. Keep backfilling up with pipe laying. Where grade exceeds 30 percent, no more than three joints totaling 60 feet of pipe shall remain un -backfilled. C. Cut a depression to accommodate the pipe bell and external joint filler form and spaces to permit removal of the pipe handling slings. D. Lay each section of pipe in order and position shown on the installation schedule. Lower the pipe onto the bedding and install it to line and grade along its full length on firm bearing, except at the bell and at the sling depressions. E. Elongate the vertical diameter of welded steel pipe 1 percent. Do not remove the stulls until the backfill is complete, or for at least 3 days after completing CLSM placement, whichever is longer. F. Coat and/or wrap buried flanges, bolts, and metal as specified. Extend the coating or wrapping over the flanges and bolts and secure it around the adjacent pipe circumference. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Joints and related work for field assembly of fittings and specials shall conform to requirements for straight pipe, unless otherwise shown. 2. Make minor field adjustments by pulling standard joints. a. Maximum Allowable Angle: 75 percent of manufacturer’s recommended, or angle that results from 3/4 -inch pull out from normal joint closure, whichever is less. 3. Horizontal and vertical deflections shall be on alignment shown on plans. Fabricated horizontal and vertical elbows shall be at locations shown in plans. B. Joints: 1. Steel pipe joints shall be screwed, welded, flanged, grooved, or made with flexible joints. The type of joint for piping is specified on the Drawings. 2. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible couplings, flanged joints, and other types of joints or means necessary to allow ready assembly and disassembly of the piping. 3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, pipe joints shall be as follows: a. Pipe smaller than 2 inches in nominal diameter shall have screwed joints or flexible couplings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-33 b. Pipe 2 inches to 4 inches in nominal diameter shall have screwed joints, flanged joints, welded joints, or joints made with flexible couplings. c. Pipe larger than 4 inches in nominal diameter shall have flanged joints, welded joints, or joints made with flexible couplings. C. Screwed joints: 1. Perform threading with clean, sharp dies. a. Wavy, rough, or otherwise defective pipe threads are not acceptable. 2. Make screwed joints tight and clean with an application of Teflon tape or approved paste compound applied to the male threads only, except as follows: a. Make up liquid and dry chlorine lines, and liquefied petroleum gas lines, with litharge and glycerin. 3. Provide railroad type unions with bronze -to-iron seat, galvanized where used with galvanized pipe. a. Flanged joints may be used instead of unions. D. Flanged joints: 1. In flanged joints, flanges shall come together at the proper orientation with no air gaps between the flanges after the gaskets are in place. 2. Attach slip-on flanges to pipe by 2 fillet welds, in accordance with AWWA C207. 3. Secure welding neck flanges with full penetration butt welds without backing rings. a. After welding in place, the faces of flanges shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pipe, or, in the case of fittings, at the proper angle to each other, and bolt holes shall be in proper alignment. E. Welded joints: 1. Use lap type electric welded joints for field welded joints in accordance with AWWA C206 unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings. 2. Welders shall be qualified pursuant to the provisions of AWWA C206. Perform field welding by welders certified by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. a. Welders' testing shall be at the Contractor's expense, including cost of test nipples, welding rods, and equipment. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-34 3. Where exterior welds are performed, provide adequate space for welding and inspection of the joints. 4. During installation of welded steel pipe in either straight alignment or on curves, lay the pipe so that at any point around the circumference of the joint where is a minimum lap of 1-1/2 inch and a minimum space of 1 inch between the end of the fillet weld or the spigot end of the pipe and the nearest tangent to a bell radius. 5. Prior to the beginning of the welding procedure, remove any tack welds used to position the pipe during laying. a. Equally distribute any annular space between the faying surfaces of the bell and spigot around the circumference of the joint by shimming, jacking, or other suitable means. 6. Make weld in accordance with AWWA C206. a. Where more than 1 pass is required, peek to relieve shrinkage stresses on each pass except the first and final one; and remove all dirt, slag and flux before the succeeding bead is applied. 7. Place no more than a 1/8 inch of weld material on each weld pass using a combination of stitch and weave weld. 8. Weld inside and outside of all lap welds for pipe 24” in diameter and larger. 9. Rejectable weld defects shall be repaired or redone and retested until sound weld metal has been deposited in accordance with appropriate welding codes. 10. Do not weld galvanized pipe. 11. Butt-strap joints: a. A minimum of 10 inches wide. b. The same thickness as the pipe wall. c. Provide a minimum of 2-inch lap at each pipe joint. F. Lining and coating: 1. Field applied cement-mortar lining shall be of the same density, smoothness, and thickness as shop applied lining, and in accordance with applicable portions of AWWA C602. a. For pipe with shop-applied cement -mortar lining, place lining at joints in accordance with AWWA C205. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-35 b. Apply the lining to a mortar thickness at least equal to the adjoining standard pipe sections. c. Clean the steel with wire brushes and apply a cement and water wash coat prior to applying the cement mortar. Where more than a 6-inch joint strip of mortar is required, place welded wire mesh reinforcement of 2 -inch by 4 -inch pattern of No.13 gauge over the exposed steel. d. Install the mesh so that the wires on the 2-inch spacing run circumferentially around the pipe. Crimp the wires on the 4-inch spacing to support the mesh 3/8 inch from the metal pipe surface. Steel -trowel finish the interior mortar to match adjoining mortar lined pipe sections. 2. Coat joints on mortar -coated pipe with field placed mortar. Place mortar by: a. Placing closed-cell polyethylene strips with cloth backing around the pipe joint: 1) Using plastic bands at least 8 inches in width. 2) Centered and secured over the exterior joint recess. 3) Use box strapping or equivalent methods to bind the band to the pipe so that it encases the outside joint recess completely and snugly. 4) Provide an opening near the top of the joint. a) After the band is secure, moisten the joint recess with water. b) Mix mortar grout, consisting of 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts of sand mixed with water to the consistency of thick cream. c) Pour mortar grout into the opening to fill the joint recess. d) Fill the outside annular space between the ends of the adjacent pipes with the mortar grout for its full circumference. e) Do not bed and backfill at the joint until the top opening has been closed and the mortar allowed to take initial set, or a minimum of 24 hours. f) Provide a smooth finished joint. 3. Plastic tape wrap application procedures shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. a. Apply primer with brush, without runs and drips. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-36 b. Lap wrapping not less than 1/2 inch. A single wrap lapped 50 percent, or more will not be acceptable. c. Application on welded joints: 1) Remove sharp edges of weld spatter and slag with a file or ball peen hammer before wrapping welded joints. 2) Apply a single thickness of tape base wrap over the primer, around the weld. 3) Start first wrapping 4 inches back on the pipe wrap, spiral wrap tape over the joint holding the proper tension and overlap and finish 4 inches back on the pipe wrap on the other side of the joint. 4) Apply final wrapping in same manner. d. Wrap fittings, valves, and other odd-shaped components in the pipeline first and finish wrapping over the prime coat. e. Wrap joints, fittings, valves, and other irregular shapes of piping with extruded coatings with tape as specified in this subparagraph. 4. Protect lining of fabricated steel piping fittings and specials during hauling, installation, and operation. 5. Finish joints of fabricated steel piping fittings and specials as specified for pipe lining after field welding is done. 6. After final field welding of fabricated steel piping fittings and specials, complete the lining and exterior painting at and near the welded connections. a. Repair or replace lining damaged as a result of welding heat, handling, or other causes. 7. Exterior Joint Field Coating - Polyolefin wrap/sleeves per Section 09 90 10. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure and Leakage Tests: 1. Pressure and leakage tests shall be conducted in accordance with applicable portions of the Contract Documents. All acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Construction Manager. Evidence of successful completion of the pressure and leakage tests shall b e the Construction Manager's signature on the test forms prepared by the Contractor. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-37 2. Fabricated steel manifolds shall be field tested with the pipe to which they connect. B. Pipeline Hydrostatic Test 1. General: a. Notify Engineer in writing 5 days in advance of testing. Perform testing in presence of Engineer. b. Test newly installed pipelines. Using water as test medium, pipes shall successfully pass leakage test prior to acceptance. c. Furnish testing equipment. Testing equipment shall provide observable and accurate measurements of leakage under specified conditions. d. Isolate new pipelines that are connected to existing pipelines. e. Conduct field hydrostatic test on buried piping after trench has been completely backfilled. Testing may, as approved by Engineer, be done prior to placement of asphaltic concrete or roadway structural section. f. Contractor may, if field conditions permit and as determined by Engineer, partially backfill trench and leave joints open for inspection and conduct an initial service leak test. g. Do not conduct final field hydrostatic test until backfilling has been completed as specified above. h. Supply of temporary water shall be as stated in Section 01 51 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls. i. Dispose of water used in testing in accordance with federal, state, and local requirements. j. Owner will provide water for first test; Contractor is responsible to pay for water for any subsequent required tests. 2. Preparation: a. Install temporary thrust blocking or other restraint as necessary to prevent movement of pipe and protect adjacent piping or equipment. Make necessary taps in piping prior to testing. b. Wait 5 days minimum after concrete thrust blocking is installed to perform pressure tests. If high -early strength cement is used for thrust blocking, wait may be reduced to 2 days. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-38 c. Prior to test, remove or suitably isolate appurtenant instruments or devices that could be damaged by pressure testing. d. New Piping Connected to Existing Piping: Isolate new piping with grooved - end pipe caps, blind flanges, or other means acceptable to Engineer. 3. Procedure: a. Maximum filling velocity shall not exceed 0.25 foot per second, calculated based on full area of pipe. b. Expel air from pipe system during filling. c. Test section may be filled with water and allowed to stand under low pressure prior to testing. d. Test Pressure: 120 percent of system operating pressure based on pressure as measured at 100 psi. e. Apply and maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force pump. Valve off piping system when test pressure is reached. f. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 2 hours minimum, adding additional make-up water only as necessary to restore test pressure. g. Determine actual leakage by measuring quantity of water necessary to maintain specified test pressure for duration of test. h. If measured leakage exceeds allowable leakage or if leaks are visible, repair defective pipe section and repeat hydrostatic test. 4. Allowable Make-up Water: a. For pipe with O-ring rubber gasket joints, allowable make-up water shall not exceed 0.08 gallon(s) per inch of diameter per mile per 2 hours. b. For pipe with welded joints, no make-up water is allowed. C. Field Welding: 1. As soon as practicable after welding each joint, test all joints. 2. VT inspect (100%) all welds and all passes. CWI to mark acceptance or rejection of all passes of all welds. 3. UT inspect 100% of all butt joint field welds. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-39 4. RT Inspect 1% of length of butt joint (with backer) field welds. RT testing will not be more frequent than two 5-inch -long tests every fifth joint. 5. Air and soap test 100% of double lap welded joints. a. Test procedure: 1) Shop drill and tap one 1/4-inch NPT air test hole in the bell end of the pipe. 2) Apply 60 pounds per square inch of air, or other satisfactory gas, into the connection between the 2 fillet welds. Hold for 15 minutes. 3) Paint the welds with soap solution. Mark leaks indicated by the escaping gas bubbles. Clean soap from pipe after testing. 6. MT inspect 100% of single lap joints and butt weld joints. 7. Weld Acceptance: a. If, in the opinion of Construction Manager, inspections indicate inadequate weld quality, percentage of welds inspected shall be increased. b. If less than 100 percent of welds are specified for inspection, Construction Manager may select inspection location at random. c. VT: Perform VT per AWS D1.1 Paragraph 6.9, Visual Inspection, Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. d. UT: Perform UT of CJP groove welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Paragraph 6.13.1. e. RT: Perform RT of CJP butt joint welds (at frequency noted above) in accordance with AWS D1.1, Paragraph 6.12.1. f. PT or MT: 1) Perform on fillet and PJP groove welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Paragraph 6.10. 2) Acceptance shall be in accordance with VT standards specified above. a) Remove in manner that permits proper and complete repair by welding. b) Caulking or peening of defective welds is not permitted. c) Retest unsatisfactory welds. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-40 8. Submit test results to Construction Manager within one day after test. D. Holiday detection testing of plastic tape wrap coatings: 1. Perform a complete high voltage electrical inspection (holiday detection testing) of all steel piping systems and fittings coated with plastic tape wrap prior to burying. a. Perform high voltage electrical inspection in strict accordance with NACE RP0274-74. b. Test voltage used for the electrical inspection of the piping and fittings shall be in accordance with the recommendations given by the tape coating manufacturer in their published literature. c. Repair all holidays and defects found in the coating system through the high voltage electrical inspection in strict accordance with the tape coating manufacturer's recommendations. d. Retest repaired areas in the coating prior to burial of the piping to ensure that all holidays and defects in the coating have been properly repaired. 2. Before conducting holiday detection testing on any piping systems, submit to the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER for review and approval technical literature and data describing the testing instrumentation, equipment, electrodes, and other accessories that will be used. a. The literature and data shall include complete information covering the operation and use of the testing equipment, including operational voltage ranges. 3. All holiday detection testing and coating repair work shall be witnessed, inspected and approved by the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. 3.07 SANITATION OF PIPE INTERIOR A. Cleaning, Inspection and Pressure Testing: Sections 01 74 00, 01 75 00, and 01 77 19 . 1. Sweep the pipe clean before hydrostatic test. 2. For potable water lines to be disinfected, flush pipes with hoses and pressurized water to remove dirt and debris. Remove all foreign matter, including ponded water. 3. For pipelines 24-inches or larger in diameter, acceptable alternatives to flushing are the use of high -pressure water jet, sweeping, or scrubbing. Water, sediment, dirt, and foreign material accumulated during this cleaning operation shall be discharged, vacuumed, or otherwise removed from the pipe. B. Disinfection: Not required for raw water lines. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 STEEL PIPE FOR WATER SERVICE COTTONWOODS CONNECTION 40 05 24.23-41 END OF SECTION B. Disinfection: Not required for raw water lines. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 PVC, CPVC Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 31-1 SECTION 40 05 31 PVC, CPVC PIPE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00  Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 05 00  Basic Mechanical Requirements B. Section 40 06 20  Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. C900, Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe B. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. D1598, Standard Test Method for Time-To-Failure of Plastic Pipe Under Constant Internal Pressure 2. D1599, Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings 3. D1784, Standard Classification System and Basis for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds 4. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 5. D2241, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe 6. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 7. D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 8. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 PVC, CPVC Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 31-2 9. D2672, Standard Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement 10. D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 11. D3212, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 12. F441, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 13. F477, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe 14. F493, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ANSI B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Fittings PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D1785, D1784 and F441, "normal impact" pipe, Schedule 40 or 80 as specified. B. Fittings used with this pipe shall be socket type or flanged type as specified herein, in Section 40 06 20  Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules, or indicated on the Drawings. Plastic piping shall be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the specific installation. No field bending or distortion of the pipe will be permitted. C. PVC pipe shall be Type 1 Grade 1 conforming to ASTM D1784 and D1785. Fittings shall conform to the following standard specifications: 1. Socket Type: (Schedule 40); ASTM D2466 2. Socket Type: (Schedule 80); ASTM D2467 D. Provide flanged fittings of the same material as the specified pipe and material conforming to ANSI B16.5 at all valves and equipment except at true (double) union valves. Flange gaskets shall be natural rubber or other material fully compatible with the fluid being conveyed. Where flanged piping is used with chemical systems, the gasket material shall conform to the requirements of the following table. Flange bolts shall be Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 PVC, CPVC Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 31-3 type 316 stainless steel minimum, with higher grade materials used where necessary for fluid (chemical) compatibility. E. Acceptable materials of construction of elastomers for non-chemical service shall be as follows: Non-Chemical Service Elastomer Material Non-Potable Water EPDM Process Drain (Pressure)EPDM, FKM Potable Water EPDM Sample EPDM, FKM Sump Pump Discharge EDPM, FKM F. Solvent cement for socket type joints shall conform to ASTM D2564 for PVC pipe and fittings. Solvent cement for chemical service shall be Weld-On 724 as manufactured by IPS Corporation, or equal. G. C900-Class 200 shall be in sizes between 4 inches and 12 inches and shall meet the requirements of AWWA C900 "Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe" and shall conform to all the requirements of ASTM D1784 and ASTM D2241. The pipe shall be a minimum of DR 14 and shall be capable of withstanding the overburden pressures determined by the depth of burial in the field. 1. Pipe material shall be made from clean, virgin, NSF approved Class 12454-A PVC compound conforming to resin specification ASTM D1784. Standard laying lengths shall be 20-feet (±1 inch). Random lengths of not more than 15% of the total footage of each size may be shipped in lieu of the standard lengths. Reruns of reclaimed material shall not be accepted. 2. The pipe shall have bell and spigot ends with push-on, O-ring rubber gasket, compression type joints conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2672. Elastomeric gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477. 3. Minimum pipe stiffness (F/dY) at 5% deflection shall be 914 psi for all sizes when tested in accordance with D2241. 4. The pipe shall be designed to pass a quick burst test pressure of 985 psi applied in 60 to 70 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM D1599, as referenced in ASTM D2241. 5. Fittings for C900-Class 200, DR 14 shall be ductile iron, bolted mechanical joint. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 PVC, CPVC Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 31-4 H. C900-Class 150 shall be in sizes between 4 inches and 12 inches and shall meet the requirements of AWWA C900 "Poly Vinyl Chlorine (PVC) Pressure Pipe" and shall conform to all the requirements of ASTM D1784 and ASTM D2241. The pipe shall be a minimum of DR 18 and shall be capable of withstanding the overburden pressures determined by the depth of burial in the field. 1. Pipe material shall be made from clean, virgin, NSF approved Class 12454-A PVC compound conforming to resin specification ASTM D1784. Standard laying lengths shall be 20-feet (±1 inch). Random lengths of not more than 15% of the total footage of each size may be shipped in lieu of the standard lengths. Reruns of reclaimed material shall not be accepted. 2. The pipe shall have bell and spigot ends with push-on, O-ring rubber gasket, compression type joints conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2672. Elastomeric gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477. 3. Minimum pipe stiffness (F/dY) at 5% deflection shall be 435 psi for all sizes when tested in accordance with D2241. 4. The pipe shall be designed to pass a quick burst test pressure of 755 psi applied in 60 to 70 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM D1599, as referenced in ASTM D2241. 5. Fittings for C900-Class 150, DR 18 shall be ductile iron, bolted mechanical joint. I. PVC pressure rated pipe (PR 160) shall be in sizes between 1 1/2 inches and 12 inches and shall conform to all the requirements of ASTM D1784 and ASTM D2241 and shall be a minimum of SDR 26 and shall be capable of withstanding the overburden pressures determined by the depth of burial in the field. 1. Pipe material shall be made from clean, virgin, NSF approved Class 12454-A PVC compound conforming to resin specification ASTM D1784. Standard laying lengths shall be 20-feet (1± inch). Random lengths of not more than 15% of the total footage of each size may be shipped in lieu of the standard lengths. Reruns of reclaimed materials shall not be accepted. 2. The pipe shall have bell and spigot ends with push-on, O-ring rubber gasket, compression type joints conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2672. Elastomeric gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477. 3. Minimum pipe stiffness (F/dY) at 5% deflection shall be 135 psi for all sizes when tested in accordance with ASTM D2241. 4. The pipe shall be designed to pass a quick burst test pressure of 500 psi applied in 60 to 70 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM D1599, as referenced in ASTM D2241. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 PVC, CPVC Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 31-5 5. The pipe shall be designed to pass for 1000 hours a sustained test pressure of 340 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D1598, as referenced in ASTM D2241. J. Fittings for PR 160, SDR 26 shall be PVC and designed for the pipe being supplied. K. Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2661. Pipe and fittings shall have socket type couplings with solvent cement joints. Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D2235. L. Type PSM polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034 with a maximum SDR of 35. Pipe and fittings shall have bell and spigot ends with Oring rubber gasketed, compression type joints. Joints shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Specification D3212. Reruns of reclaimed materials shall not be accepted. Unless indicated otherwise, PVC wall pipes shall be provided for all piping passing through exterior walls. Wall pipes shall have a water stop solvent welded to the pipe. Each wall pipe shall be of the same class and type as the piping to which it is joined. M. Perforated and closed drainage pipe and fittings shall be rigid PVC pipe, Schedule 40 unless otherwise shown or specified with solvent welded type joints, or approved equal. Pipe shall be slotted or have two rows of 1/4inch diameter holes spaced 4inches apart along the circumference of the pipe. Longitudinal spacing of holes shall be 5inches maximum. 2.02 CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (CPVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS A. CPVC shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D1785, D1784 and F441, "normal impact" pipe, Schedule 40 or 80 as specified. B. Fittings used with this pipe shall be socket type or flanged type as specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. Plastic piping shall be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the specific installation. No field bending or distortion of the pipe will be permitted. C. CPVC pipe shall be Type 4, Grade 1, Schedule 80, conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM F441. CPVC fittings shall be socket type conforming to ASTM F439. D. Solvent cement for socket type joints shall conform to ASTM F493 for CPVC pipe and fittings. Solvent cement for chemical service shall be Weld-On 724 as manufactured by IPS Corporation, or equal. 2.03 POLYETHYLENE TUBING AND FITTINGS FOR WATER SERVICE A. General: 1. High density polyethylene water service pipe and tubing in accordance with ASTM D2737, AWWA C901, NSF61, AND NSF 14 for potable water service applications. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 PVC, CPVC Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 31-6 2. Pipe dimensions shall meet copper tube size (CTS) standards with a standard dimension ration (SDR) of 9 and blue in color. B. Materials: 1. Pipe and tubing material shall be high density polyethylene conforming to the requirements of ASTM D3350. The resin shall have a material designation code of PE 4719 by the Plastic Pipe Institute. C. Fittings: 3. Fittings shall be one of the following: a. CTS compression fittings with stainless steel insert and split clamp with stainless steel screw. 1) Brass fittings are to be tape wrapped after installation with polywrap prior to burial. D. Manufacturers: 1. One of the following or equal: b. Centennial Plastics, CenCore. c. ADS, PolyFlex PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) and High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe shall be laid and joints assembled according to the respective manufacturer's recommendation. PVC pipe installation shall comply with applicable sections of the Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association Recommended Standard Specifications. B. Plastic piping shall not be installed when the temperature is less than 60 degrees F except as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Piping Expansion Compensation Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 41-1 SECTION 40 05 41 PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00  Basic Mechanical Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPANSION/CONTRACTION SYSTEM FOR PROCESS AIR PIPING A. Expansion/Contraction system shall be coordinated with fixed and sliding supports per Section 40 05 07 – Pipe Supports. B. The process air pipe support and expansion/contraction system shall include fixed supports, sliding supports, and expansion compensation devices. C. Expansion compensation devices shall be installed in locations as shown on the Drawings, with one fixed support between each pair of expansion compensation devices. Additional air pipe supports shall be sliding supports. Details and locations for fixed and sliding supports shall be as indicated and/or scheduled on the Drawings. D. Expansion compensation devices include stainless-steel expansion joints, rubber expansion joints, and split sleeve expansion couplings. All expansion compensation devices shall be stainless-steel expansion joints unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. E. Stainless-steel expansion joints shall be metal bellows by DME Incorporated, Hyspan Precision Products, Inc., Style 240S by Victaulic, or equivalent coupling by U.S. Bellows, Inc., as specified and indicated on the Drawings. Laying lengths of expansion joints vary according to manufacturer. Lengths of expansion joints shown on the Drawings are approximate. Contractor shall provide dimensioned layout drawings for air piping based on the expansion joints ultimately furnished. 1. Stainless-steel expansion joints shall have fixed flanged end preparations with a stainless-steel internal flow liner. The joints shall provide for a minimum of 2 inches of axial movement in either direction for air pipe sizes 4 to 6 inches in diameter and a minimum of 3.5 inches of axial movement in either direction for all pipe sizes 8 inches and larger. Joints shall provide for a minimum lateral movement of 1/2 inch for all sizes. Number of convolutions shall be determined by the manufacturer based on movement requirements specified and a cycle life of 2,000 or more. The flanges shall meet the same thickness and class requirements as required for the joining stainless steel pipe. 03 - 2 3 - 2 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Piping Expansion Compensation Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 41-2 2. Stainless-steel expansion joints shall be suitable for a pressure of 25 psig and a temperature of 300 degrees Fahrenheit, at a minimum. The design “delta” or change in temperature shall be a minimum of 250 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Stainless-steel expansion joints and flanges shall be manufactured from Type 316L stainless steel using Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts with a minimum tensile strength of 85,000 psi and shall have an air service liner welded on the upstream side of the bellows. 4. The length of bellows, number of convolutions, and spacing between flanges shall be designed and installed accounting for the ambient temperature at the time of installation, which shall accommodate the full range of expansion and contraction movements as specified. 5. Required “cycle life” shall be a minimum of 2,000 based on “Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association” (EJMA) criteria, 10th Edition or later. 6. Stainless-steel expansion joints shall be restrained using limit rods bolted between flange tabs. All material shall be Type 316L stainless steel. The limit rods and connecting tabs, including flanges, shall be designed by the manufacturer for the maximum loading condition. F. Expansion couplings shall be bolted split-sleeve Style 231S as manufactured by Victaulic Company, or equal. Couplings shall be installed where shown on the Drawings and as specified in the following table, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for the specific application. Expansion couplings shall be provided at each insert flow tube. Initial gap width (space between plain ends of joining pipes) shall be set based on recommendations from the manufacturer. The body “type” shall be as required to meet the working pressure indicated. Nominal Pipe Size (inch)Coupling Width “W” (inch) Longitudinal Movement (C/E) (inch) 3 to 4 Type 1 Style 231 S 5.25 0.75 6 Type 1 Style 231 S 8 1.25 8 to 14 Type 1 Style 231 S 10 1.50 16 to 24 Type 2 Style 231 S 14.38 2.00 30 to 48 Type 2 Style 231 S 14.38 2.00 Greater than 48 Type 2 Style 231 S 16.38 3.00 1. Couplings shall be suitable for a pressure of 25 psig and a temperature of 300 degrees Fahrenheit, at minimum. The design “delta” or change in temperature shall be a minimum of 250 degrees Fahrenheit. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Piping Expansion Compensation Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 41-3 2. Couplings shall be bolted, split-sleeve type and shall consist of four components: one-piece housing, gasket assembly, bolts and nuts, and end rings as required for pipe restraint. Gasket material shall be Viton or silicone. 3. Couplings shall be manufactured from Type 316L stainless steel using 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts with a minimum tensile strength of 85,000 psi. End rings shall be Type 316L stainless steel. End rings shall be shop-welded to one end of one pipe installed in the coupling. 4. Couplings shall be provided and installed as specified and shown on the Drawings. 5. The gap, “G”, between ends of pipe shall be initially set and installed based on width of required clear space and the ambient temperature at the time of installation in conformance with requirements provided by manufacturer accounting for the required design movement allowance as specified for contraction and expansion of pipe. G. Expansion compensation devices required for buried pipe shall be installed within a handhole or manhole as indicated on the Drawings. No backfill of any nature or material shall be placed against, under or over the device. 2.02 EXPANSION/CONTRACTION SYSTEM FOR LIQUID SERVICE A. Rubber expansion joints shall be of the single wide arch design and shall be rated for the temperature of the process liquid. Expansion joints for hot water and other process liquids above 150-degree F shall be rated for a minimum of 250-degrees F. All other applications shall be rated for a minimum of 180-degree F. B. Non-submerged joints shall be provided with galvanized ductile iron retaining rings. Exposed expansion joints shall be fully resistant to ultraviolet degradation. Submerged expansion joints shall be fully resistant to attack from organisms or chemicals found in the associated process liquid. C. Expansion joints shall be located as shown on the Drawings and as indicated in the following table. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Piping Expansion Compensation Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 41-4 Minimum Required Movement Nominal Pipe Diameter (In) Comp. (In) Elong. (In) Lateral (In) 1-1-1/2 5/8 1/4 1/4 2-5 1-3/4 3/4 3/4 6-12 1-3/4 3/4 1 14-20 2 7/8 1-1/8 24-84 2-1/4 1 1-1/8 D. Control rods to prevent over extension shall be provided as indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required by the manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be the product of a single manufacturer. E. Expansion joints shall be Style 1015 as manufactured by General Rubber Corporation, or equal. 2.03 BURIED PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. Buried pipe expansion joints shall be installed at the locations indicated on the Contract Drawings and shall be manufactured from ductile iron, Grade 60-42-10 and conforming to ANSI A21.53 (AWWA C153). Buried pipe expansion joints shall be capable of axial expansion and contraction with a minimum of 4-inches total movement. All joint assemblies shall be furnished preset for a minimum of 2-inches expansion and 2-inches contraction. All pressure containing parts shall be lined with a minimum of 15 mils of Fusion Bonded Epoxy conforming to AWWA C213. The lining shall also conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111). All bolts used in the assembly shall be stainless steel and coated with coal tar epoxy. The buried pipe expansion joint shall be pressure rated at 350 psi with a minimum safety factor of 3:1 and shall be tested to 350 psi prior to shipment. B. Buried pipe expansion joints shall be similar to the Ex-Tend expansion joint as manufactured by EBAA Iron Inc., Eastland, Texas, or equal. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 33-1 SECTION 40 05 33 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section 40 50 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS B. Section 40 50 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. ASTM International (ASTM) a. D606, Specification for Lead Titanate b. D638, Specification Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics c. D746, Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact d. D1248, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable e. D1525, Standard Specification for Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics f. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness g. D2657, Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings h. D2837, Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products i. D3261, Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Tubing j. D3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Material k. F714, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe Based on Outside Diameter 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 33-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE A. The pipe shall be manufactured from Type III, Category 5, Class C, Grade P34 polyethylene resin in accordance with ASTM D1248 and shall be SDR11, minimum. The pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F714 and shall conform to cell classification PE 345434C for PE 3408 under ASTM D3350. Sewer pipe shall conform to high density polyethylene 4710 and cell classification 445574C/E and ASTM D3350 and shall be DR17 conforming to ASTM F714. The pipe material shall conform to the following cell classification requirements: Property Value ASTM Test Procedure Designation Density 0.955 gm/cm3 D1505 Melt Flow 0.1 gm/10 mil D1238 Flexural Modular 133,000 psi D790 Tensile Strength 3500 psi D638 ESCR Fo>5000 D1693 Hydraulic Design Basis 1600 psi D2837 UV Stabilizer 23% carbon black D160 B. The HDPE pipe shall have an elastic modulus of 100,000 psi as tested under ASTM D638. The brittleness temperature shall be not greater than –180ºF nor the Vicat Softening Temperature greater than 255ºF as tested under ASTM D746 and D1525, respectively. The coefficient of thermal expansion shall be 8 x 105 inch/ºF as tested under ASTM D606. The Shore Hardness D shall be greater than 61 as tested under ASTM D2240. The Hydrostatic Design Stress Basis (HDB) shall be 1,600 psi at 23ºC and 800 psi at 60ºC as tested under ASTM D2837. The pipe shall contain no rec ycled materials or compounds. C. HDPE pipe shall be marked either continuously or on intervals not to exceed five (5) feet by indirect printing with the following information: 1. Name and/or trademark of the manufacturer. 2. Nominal pipe size. 3. Dimension ratio. 4. The letters PE followed by the polyethylene grade per ASTM D1248, followed by the Hydrostatic Design basis in 100's of psi. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 33-3 5. Manufacturing Standard Reference. 6. Production Code from which time and date of manufacture can be determined. D. HDPE fittings shall be manufactured to the requirements of ASTM D3261 and this Specification. Fabricated fittings shall be manufactured from pipe of at least one SDR heavier pipe than the system piping and shall be pressure rated to match the system piping. The butt fusion outlets of fabricated fittings shall be machined to the same SDR as the system piping to which they are to be fused. The manufacturer shall subject samples of each production lot of molded fittings to xray inspection for voids. Voids shal l not be permitted, should voids be found in the samples, the entire production lot shall be xray inspected. If additional voids are found, the production lot shall be rejected. The xray testing shall be conducted by an independent laboratory and certified test reports made available to the Engineer upon request. Initial sampling shall be limited to not less than 5% of the production lot. E. HDPE pipes and fittings shall be joined one to another by thermal butt fusion, saddle fusion, or socket fusion in accordance with procedures recommended by the pipe manufacturer and as outlined in ASTM D2657. The manufacturer shall provide fusion training services to the Contractor upon request. F. Butt fusion joining of unlike SDR's shall not be permitted. Transition from one SDR to another shall be accomplished by the use of mechanical couplings or a transition nipple, which is a short length of the heavier SDR pipe with one end machined to the lig hter SDR. G. Mechanical connections of polyethylene pipe to systems or fittings of other materials, or to unlike SDR, shall be by means of flanged connections (flange adapters and backup rings rated for the same pressure service as the system piping), or mechanical compression couplings designed for jointing HDPE to HDPE or HDPE to another piping material. H. Flanged joints shall use compatible bolts in accordance with the American Standard Gaskets of reinforced rubber or asbestos rubber shall be required when joining to nonHDPE materials. Flanged HDPE joints shall be gasketed at all service pressures. I. Bolts in flanged joints shall be evenly torqued in a crossing pattern. Bolts shall be retorqued after one hour or more has passed. HDPE pipe adjacent to flanged joints and the joints themselves shall be rigidly supported for a distance of one (1) foot or o ne pipe diameter, whichever is greater, beyond the flange assembly. J. When mechanical compression couplings are used HDPE pipes shall be reinforced by a stiffener in the pipe bore. Stiffeners shall be properly sized from the size and SDR of pipe being joined. Mechanical couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 33-4 K. Tests for compliance with this Specification shall be made as specified herein and in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification. A certificate of compliance and a report of each test shall be furnished by the manufacturer for all material furnished under this Specification. HDPE pipe and fittings shall be rejected for failure to meet the requirements of this Specification. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install piping system in accordance with ASTM D2321, AWWA C901 or AWWA C906 and the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. The manufacturer shall provide fusion training services to the Contractor. 3.02 TESTING B. Tests for compliance with this Specification shall be made as specified herein and in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification. A certificate of compliance and a report of each test shall be furnished by the manufacturer for all material furnished under this Specification. HDPE pipe and fittings shall be rejected for failure to meet the requirements of this Specification. C. Pressure Testing: 1. Pressure test pipe per Section 40 05 00 and as specified in this Section. 2. Install pipe supports, anchors, seismic bracing, and flexibility provisions prior to pressure testing. 3. Perform pressure testing prior to encasement in concrete or backfilling buried pipe. 4. Retest following repair of leaks. 5. Apply initial pressure without makeup pressure for 1 -2 hours to allow for diametric expansion or pipe stretching to stabilize. 6. After the equilibrium period, restore the test section to the test pressure. 7. Makeup water quantities during the pressure test per the Plastic Pipe Institute Technical Report TR 31 -88. No visual leaks or pressure drops permitted during the final test period. D. Deflection Testing for Buried Pipe: 1. Perform deflection testing for the entire length of buried pipe. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 33-5 2. Deflection testing performed not less than 30 days after completion of any work adjacent to and over the pipeline, including leakage tests, backfilling, placement of fill, grading, paving, concreting, and any other superimposed loads. 3. Maximum permissible pipe deflection: 4.0 percent of the average inside diameter of the pipe. 4. Deflection testing device capable of detecting pipe internal dimensions to within 1 percent of the average internal diameter of the specified pipe dimensions. 5. Remove, replace, and retest pipe sections that fail the deflection testing END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valves, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 51-1 SECTION 40 05 51 VALVES, GENERAL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, complete with all assemblies and accessories, all valves shown on the Drawings and specified herein including all fittings, appurtenances and transition pieces required for a complete and operable installation. B. All valves shall be constructed of first quality materials which have strength, wearing, and corrosion resistance characteristics entirely suitable for the types of service for which the individual valves are designated. Except where noted otherwise, valves designated for water service shall conform to pertinent sections of the latest revision of AWWA C500 Specifications. Cast iron valve bodies and parts shall meet the requirements of the latest revision of ASTM Designation A126, "Standard Specifications for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, Class B." Ductile iron components of valves shall meet ASTM 536, Grade 65-45-12. C. All valve body castings shall be clean, sound, and without defects of any kind. No plugging, welding, or repairing of defects will be allowed. D. Valves shall have flanged ends for exposed service and mechanical joint ends for buried service, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Flanged ends shall be flat faced, 125 lb. American Standard unless otherwise shown or specified in accordance with ANSI B16.1. All bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal of American Standard size. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating connecting piping. Valves with screwed ends shall be made tight with Teflon tape. Unions are required at all screwed joint valves. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures B. Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. C500, Metal Seated Gate Valves for Water Service B. ASTM International (ASTM) 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valves, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 51-2 a. A126, Standard Specifications for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings b. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following items shall be submitted in accordance with, or in addition to the submittal requirements specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions: 1. Performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C500. 2. Shop Drawings conforming to the requirements of Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures, are required for all valves, and accessories. Submittals shall include all layout dimensions, size and materials of construction for all components, information on support and anchoring where necessary, pneumatic and hydraulic characteristics and complete descriptive information to demonstrate full compliance with the Documents. Shop Drawings for electrically operated/controlled valves shall include all details, notes, and diagrams which clearly identify required coordination with the electrical power supply and remote status and alarm indicating devices. Electrical control schematic diagrams shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings for all electrical controls. Diagrams shall be drawn using a ladder type format in accordance with JIC standards. Shop Drawings for pneumatically operated/controlled valves shall include all details, notes, and diagrams which clearly identify required coordination with the compressed air (service air) system and electrical controls. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals and installation instructions shall be submitted for all valves and accessories in accordance with the Specifications. The manufacturer(s) shall delete all information which does not apply to the equipment being furnished. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOW INDICATORS A. Flow indicators shall be the Akron ball type as manufactured by Brooks Instrument Co., Fischer and Porter, or equal, and shall have bronze bodies, glass dome, and plastic ball. 2.02 CORPORATION STOPS A. Corporation stops shall be of bronze with tapered male iron pipe threads on inlets and outlets. Terminal outlets shall have screwed bronze hex head dust plugs or caps. Unions shall be used on all corporation stop outlets with connecting piping. Corporation stops Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valves, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 51-3 shall have a minimum working pressure rating of 250 psi and shall be as manufactured by Mueller Co., Hays Mfg. Div. of Zurn Industries, or equal. 2.03 FLOOR BOXES A. Floor boxes shall be provided for all nut operated or floor accessed valves. Floor boxes shall be of the adjustable, sliding type, cast iron, suitable to withstand heavy traffic, as manufactured by James B. Clow & Sons, Kennedy Valve Mfg. Co., or equal. The covers shall be marked with appropriate designations of piping contents (i.e.: water, sewer) and bases shall be the round type. All nut operated valves in this Section shall be clearly identified by stainless steel or laminated plastic identification tags. The tags shall be permanently affixed to the inside of the floor boxes, under grating, etc. and shall bear the embossed letters which clearly identify each valve by its appropriate designation. B. Two (2) valve operating wrenches shall be supplied in 4-foot lengths with tee handles for each size nut supplied. Valve wrenches shall be Model No. F2520 as manufactured by James B. Clow & Sons, Kennedy Valve Mfg. Co., Figure No. 122, or equal. 2.04 VALVE BOXES A. The Contractor shall furnish and install valve boxes as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. All valve boxes shall be placed so as not to transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the operating nut of the valve. The ground in the trench upon which the valve boxes rest shall be thoroughly compacted to prevent settlement. The boxes shall be fitted together securely and set so that the cover is flush with the finished grade of the adjacent surface. A concrete pad as detailed on the Drawings shall be provided around the valve box, sloped outwards. C. All valve boxes shall be 2-piece cast iron, sliding type, 5-1/4" shaft, with heavy duty traffic weight collar and the lid marked with the appropriate carrier product (i.e.: WATER). Boxes shall be as manufactured by James B. Clow & Sons, Kennedy Valve Mfg. Co., Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company, or equal. 2.05 QUICK DISCONNECT COUPLINES A. Quick disconnect type coupling for compressed/service air shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Coupling shall provide for instantaneous shutoff in socket end when lines are disconnected. Couplings shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel with a BUNAN Oring and integral safety lock. Couplings shall comply with Military Specification 4109 (interchangeable with standard plug of the same size). Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valves, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 51-4 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver valves to site in accordance with Section 01 65 00 – Product Delivery Requirements and using loading methods which do not damage any valve components or coatings. B. Tag loose valves as specified in Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Protection Requirements, stating size, type, coatings and mating parts shipped loose or separate. C. Store on site until ready for incorporation in the work in accordance with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Protection Requirements using methods recommended by the manufacturer to prevent damage, undue stresses, or weathering. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Except where noted otherwise herein, all valves shall be installed and tested in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C500. Before installation, all valves shall be lubricated, manually opened and closed to check their operation and the interior of the valves shall be thoroughly cleaned. Valves shall be placed in the positions shown on the Drawings. Joints shall be made as directed under the Piping Specifications. The valves shall be so located that they are easily accessible for operating purposes and shall bear no stresses due to loads from the adjacent pipe. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating connecting piping. B. All valves shall be tested at the operating pressures at which the particular line will be used. Any leakage or "sweating" of joints shall be stopped, and all joints shall be tight. All motor operated and cylinder operated valves shall be tested for control operation as directed by the Engineer. C. Provide valves in quantity, size, and type with all required accessories as shown on the Drawings. D. Install all valves and appurtenances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install suitable corporation stops at all points shown or required where air binding of pipelines might occur. Install all valves so that operating handwheels or wrenches may be conveniently turned from operating floor but without interfering with access, and as approved by Engineer. Unless otherwise approved, install all valves plumb and level. Valves shall be installed free from distortion and strain caused by misaligned piping, equipment or other causes. E. Valve boxes shall be set plumb and centered with the bodies directly over the valves so that traffic loads are not transmitted to the valve. Earth fill shall be carefully tamped around each valve box to a distance of 4 feet on all sides of the box, or to the undisturbed trench face, if less than 4 feet. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valves, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 51-5 3.03 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified representative of the manufacturer(s) of the equipment named below to check out and certify the installation(s), to supervise the initial operation, and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel in proper operation and maintenance procedures in accordance with the following schedule: Item Valve/Operator Type Minimum On-Site Time Requirements 1 Automatic Control Check Valve One (1) 8-hour day 2 Surge Anticipators One (1) 8-hour day 3 Motor Operated Modulating Valves One (1) 8-hour day 4 Motor Operated Open-Close Valves (required only if manufacturer is other than for Item 3 above)One (1) 8-hour day 5 Pneumatic Hydraulic Cylinder Operated Valves One (1) 8-hour day B. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The manufacturer's representative shall sign in and out at the office of the Engineer's Resident Project Representative on each day he is at the project. C. A written report covering the representative's findings and installation approval shall be mailed directly to the Engineer covering all inspection and outlining in detail any deficiencies notes. D. The times specified are exclusive of travel time to and from the facility and shall not be construed as to relieve the manufacturer of any additional visits to provide sufficient service to place the equipment in satisfactory operation. 3.04 TESTING A. Shop and field testing of valves shall be as follows: 1. Certified factory testing shall be provided for all components of the valve and operator system. Valves and operators shall be shop tested in accordance with the requirements in the latest revision of AWWA C500, including performance tests, leakage test, hydrostatic tests, and proof of design tests. The manufacturer through the Contractor shall submit certified copies of the reports covering the test for acceptance by the Engineer. 2. Shop testing shall be provided for the operators consisting of a complete functional check of each unit. Any deficiencies found in shop testing shall be corrected prior to shipment. The system supplier through the Contractor shall submit written certification that shop tests for the electrical/pneumatic system and all controls Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valves, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 51-6 were successfully conducted and that these components provide the functions specified and required for proper operation of the valve operator system. 3. The Contractor shall conduct field tests to check and adjust system components, and to test and adjust operation of the overall system. Preliminary field tests shall be conducted prior to startup with final field tests conducted during startup. The factory service representative shall assist the Contractor during all field testing and prepare a written report describing test methods, and changes made during the testing, and summarizing test results. The service representative shall certify proper operation of the valve operator system upon successful completion of the final acceptance field testing. 4. Preliminary and final field tests shall be conducted at a time approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall witness all field testing. 5. All costs in connection with field testing of equipment such as energy, light, lubricants, water, instruments, labor, equipment, temporary facilities for test purposes, etc. shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. 6. Preliminary field tests shall be conducted prior to startup and shall include a functional check of the entire valve operator system and all system components. Preliminary field tests shall demonstrate that the valve operator system performs according to specifications and that all equipment, valves, controls, alarms, interlocks, etc., function properly. The preliminary field test report must be approved by the Engineer prior to conducting final field acceptance tests. Based on results of preliminary field tests, the Contractor shall make any adjustments required to settings, etc., to achieve the required valve closing time and operation specified or otherwise directed by the Engineer. 7. Final field acceptance tests shall be conducted simultaneously with the startup and field testing of the pumps, air compressors, process air blowers, etc. Field tests shall be conducted for the full range of operating modes and conditions specified and as directed by the Engineer. Each of the valves shall be tested at minimum, maximum, and normal head/flow conditions, and under all specified conditions of opening and closing. Performance of pneumatic valves and compressed air system under normal operating conditions and during simulated power failures shall be checked. 8. Field testing shall include optimization of opening and closing times of the valves. The Contractor shall provide the means for accurate measurement of pipeline pressures as directed by the Engineer. Valve opening and closing times shall be adjusted based on process requirements to optimize operation of the valves. Final Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valves, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 51-7 valve opening and closing times as determined by field tests shall be approved by the Engineer prior to final acceptance of the system. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 57-1 SECTION 40 05 57 VALVE OPERATORS AND ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions and Section 40 05 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Reference Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules for additional information on valves and operators/actuators. C. The electric valve actuators shall meet the signal requirements described in Section 40 61 23 – Signal Coordination, Section 40 61 93 – Process Control System Input/Output List, and Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions. D. Valve operators and electric valve actuators shall be designed to unseat, open or close, and seat the valve under the most adverse operating condition to which the valves will be subjected. E. Operator mounting arrangements shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the manufacturer and/or Engineer. There shall be no mounting restrictions on the electric valve actuator. F. The valve operators and electric actuators shall be the full and undivided responsibility of the valve manufacturer in order to ensure complete coordination of the components and to provide unit responsibility. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedure B. Section 40 05 00 – Basic Mechanical Requirements C. Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules D. Section 40 61 93 – Process Control System Input/Output List E. Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions F. Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 57-2 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C504-94, Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves b. C500, Metal Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following items shall be submitted in accordance with, or in addition to the submittal requirements specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions: 1. Shop Drawings a. Product data sheets for each make and model. Indicate valve Type Number, applicable Tag Number and facility name/number or service where used. b. Complete catalog information and identification of materials of construction. c. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. d. Complete motor nameplate data. e. Sizing calculations for valves. f. A Performance Affidavit shall be submitted for electric actuators in accordance with Section 46 00 00. g. Certification that the force required to operate all valves is as specified herein. 2. Informational Submittals a. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 43 33 - Manufacturers Field Services. b. Tests and Inspection data. c. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33 – Manufacturers Field Services. 3. O&M Manuals 4. Certification that the force required to operate all valves is as specified herein. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 57-3 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty and Guarantee shall be as specified in Section 46 00 00 − Equipment General Provisions with the exception that the warranty period shall be for two (2) years. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Electric actuators shall be provided where specified in the Valve Schedule in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. B. Manual operators shall be provided on all valves which do not receive electric actuators. Manual operator type shall be as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings and/or in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedule. C. Quarter turn valves 6” and greater in size shall have geared operators. Gate valves 14” and greater in size shall have geared operators. D. Operators/actuators shall be furnished with conservatively sized extension bonnets, extension stems, or torque tubes, and all required appurtenances required for a complete installation. Operators furnished with extension bonnets shall include stainless steel extension stems, or stainless steel torque tubes. 2.02 MANUAL OPERATORS A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, manual operator type shall be as follows: 1. Buried valves shall be equipped with nut operators, extended stems, and valve boxes. Where the depth of the operating nut is more than 4 feet below finish grade, a valve operator extension shall be provided to bring the operating nut to within 18 - 24 inches of the surface. 2. Exposed valves up to 4-inch shall be lever operated (except gate valves). 3. Exposed valves 6-inches and larger shall be handwheel operated. 4. Exposed gate valves shall be handwheel operated. 5. Valves with centerline of operator located more than 6 -feet above the floor or platform from which it is to be operated shall have a chainwheel operator unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. B. Manual operators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 57-4 C. All operators shall turn counterclockwise to open and shall have the open direction clearly and permanently marked. D. Valve operators shall be designed so that the force required to operate the handwheel, lever, or chain (including breakaway torque requirements) does not exceed 40 pounds applied at the extremity of handwheel or chainwheel operator. Design pressures for sizing of valve operators shall be the piping test pressure for the piping in which the valve is to be installed as shown in the Piping Schedule in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. E. Handwheels for valves operators shall not be less than 12 inches in diameter. The maximum diameter of any handwheel shall not exceed 24”. F. Nut operators shall have standard 2 -inch square AWWA operating nuts designed in accordance with AWWA C504-94. G. Geared manual operators shall be of the worm gear, traveling nut or scotch yolk type except manual operators for butterfly valves 18 -inch in diameter or larger which shall be worm gear, unless otherwise indicated in the individual valve specification. Gear operators shall be of the worm gear or bevel gear type. Gear box designs incorporating end of travel stops in the housing shall be e quipped with AWWA input stops. Each gearbox shall require a minimum of 10 turns for 90 -degree rotation or full valve stem travel and shall be equipped with a mechanical valve position indicator. H. Manual operators on below grade (and vault installed) valves shall be permanently lubricated and watertight under an external water pressure of 10 psi. 2.03 ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS A. Electric Actuators shall be open/close service as specified in the Valve Schedule in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. 1. Open/Close (non-modulating) valve actuators shall be multi-turn IQ3 series as manufactured by Rotork, SA series as manufactured by AUMA , as manufactured by Limitorque, and no or equals. B. Performance Requirements 1. The actuators shall be designed for indoor and outdoor service and shall be capable of mounting in any position. 2. Torque capacity of the actuators shall be sufficient to operate the valves with the maximum pressure differential, as indicated in the Valve Schedule in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules, with a safety factor of 1.5. 3. Operating time for full limits of travel shall be not more than 2 seconds per inch diameter of the valve, +/- 50 percent through 20 inches; +/- 30 percent for valves 24 inches and larger. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 57-5 4. Actuators shall be capable of operating in ambient temperatures ranging from 0 ° F – 160° F. 5. For open/close (non-modulating) actuators, the gearing, motor and contactor shall be capable of 60 starts per hour without overheating. C. The actuators shall include, in one integral housing, individual compartments for the motor, gearing, wiring terminals, and control circuits. The terminal compartment shall be separated from the inner electrical components of the actuator by means of a wat ertight seal. The inner seal shall protect the motor and all other internal electrical elements of the actuator from entrance of moisture and dust when the terminal cover is removed. Double cartridge shaft seals shall be provided on the hand wheel and outp ut shafts for weatherproof protection. All external fasteners shall be stainless steel. Compartments shall be provided with moisture and dustproof rigid cast covers meeting NEMA 6, certified to submergence in 6 ft of water for 30 minutes. Actuators located in classified areas shall be suitable for use in Class 1, Division 1, Group D environments. D. The actuators shall be provided with externally operable and lockable 480VAC circuit breakers integral to the control housing . E. All gearing shall be hardened alloy steel or bronze and shall be rated at twice the output torque of the operator and shall be designed to withstand the stall torque of the motor without failure. Output drive gearing shall consist of a worm shaft and worm gear pinion operating in an oil bath. The worm gear pinion shall be alloy bronze. Worm gear drive shall be self-locking to prevent creeping of the valve disc in an intermediate position. Heavy-duty grease shall protect gearing and sealed ball bearings of t he main shaft for five (5) years without changing. Motor reduction gearing shall be spur or planetary gearing and shall allow for field repair and change in gear ratio. For quarter turn applications, overtravel of the operator shall be prevented by internal mechanical stops cast into the actuator. F. A mechanical dial position indicator shall be furnished to continuously indicate the position of the valve at and between the fully open and fully closed positions. The indicator shall be driven by gearing driven off of the main worm gear pinion and shall operate when the actuator is in either the electrical mode or manual mode. G. A handwheel shall be permanently attached for manual operation. A gear assembly shall be provided between the handwheel and the worm shaft if required to reduce the force necessary to operate the handwheel to less than 40 pounds. A positive declutch mechanism shall engage the handwheel when required. When the actuator is set in the declutched position for handwheel operation, it shall return automatically to electric operation when actuator motor is energized. The handwheel shall not rotate during electric operation nor shall a fused motor prevent handwheel operation. H. The drive motor shall be specifically designed for actuator service and shall be characterized by high starting torque and low inertia. Motors shall be 460 volts, three phase (3Ø), 60 Hz AC reversible squirrel cage induction type motors. Motors shall be Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 57-6 totally enclosed, nonventilated, with NEMA Class F insulation minimum and a maximum continuous temperature rating of 120 ° C (rise plus ambient). A 120 VAC space heater shall be provided in the motor compartment. The electric motor shall have a time rating of at least 15 minutes at 104°F (40°C) or twice the valve stroking time, whichever is longer, at an average load of at least 33% of maximum valve torque. Motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated by premium lubricant. The motor shall have plug and socket electrical connection to facilitate easy removal and replacement. The actuator shall include a device to ensure that the motor runs with the correct rotation for the required direction of valve travel with either phase sequence of the three -phase (3Ø) power supply connected to the actuator. The motor shall include single phase protection. A suitable thermal protection device shall be incorporated in the motor or motor starter circuits, connected to a tripping device. Fast acting fuses shall be provided to protect solid state components. The motor shall be capable of starting against the rated load in either the open or close direction when voltage to the motor terminals is plus or minus ten (10) percent of nameplate rating. 1. Open/Close actuators shall be furnished with electro -mechanical reversing starters. I. Leads from the motor shall be brought to the control circuit (limit switch) compartment without external piping or conduit box. An adequately sized space heater shall be installed in the control circuit compartment to aid in the prevention of damage result ing in from condensation. The following items shall be located in the control circuit compartment. 1. Torque limit switches shall be provided to de -energize the motor control circuit in the event of a stall when attempting to unseat a jammed valve and when torque is exceeded during valve travel. Each actuator shall have an open direction torque switch and a close direction torque switch. The torque switches shall be mechanically operated and able to be set in torque units. Torque switches shall be calibrated prior to the actuator’s assembly to the valve. Position of torque switches shall be available digitally via communications protocols. 2. Travel limit switches shall be provided to de -energize the motor control circuit when the actuator reaches the limits of travel in the open and close directions. The limit switch drive shall be of the counter gear type and “in step’” with the actuator output drive at all times in either the electrical or manual mode of operation. A minimum of six (6) contacts, three (3) normally open and three (3) normally closed, shall be supplied at each end of valve travel. Four (4) additional contacts shall be provided to report end of travel or any desired position between ends of travel. Position of limit switches shall be available digitally via communications protocols. J. The electrical terminals shall be housed in a double sealed terminal compartment isolated from the rest of the actuator components. The actuators shall be designed to operate from a single 480VAC, 3 -phase (3Ø) source. The actuators shall be furnished with fuses inside of the terminal compartment. A quantity of two – ¾ inch NPT conduit entries shall be furnished. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 57-7 K. Actuators shall contain wiring and terminals for the following control functions. All dry contacts shall be rated for 5A at 250VAC. 1. Open, Close, and Stop commands from external dry contacts (utilizing internal 24VDC power supply) and/or from an external signal of 12V to 120V. The inputs for the open, close, stop signals shall be field selectable to be respond to either maintained or momentary remote signals. In momentary mode, the actuator shall have internal latching circuitry that causes the operator to drive the valve to its limit of travel upon receipt of the momentary contact signal unless a stop signal is received. 2. Emergency override input from a normally closed or normally open contact. The actuator shall either open or close (field selectable) upon receiving the emergency override input. 3. Remote Local-Off-Remote selector switch, Open/Close pushbuttons, and Open/Closed pilot lights for a remote manual control station (see below). The remote Local-Off-Remote selector switch and Open/Close pushbuttons shall be a dry contact input to the actuator control circuitry. The Open/Closed pilot lights shall be powered from the valve actuator control power. 4. Four (4) unpowered contacts shall be provided which can be selected to indicate valve “Opened” and “Closed” position, “Remote” status of the actuator, and fail status of the actuator. The fail status contacts shall activate upon motor overtemperature and actuator over torque as a minimum. L. Local Controls 1. Actuators shall be furnished with a Local-Off-Remote selector switch; Open, Close, and Stop pushbuttons for local control; a red lamp indicating closed and a green lamp indicating open. L-O-R switch shall be padlockable in any of the three (3) positions. a. When the LOR is in the “Local” position, open/close control shall be by the open and close pushbuttons on the actuator. The stop push button shall stop the actuator travel. b. When the LOR is in the “Off” position, the actuator shall not operate. c. When the LOR is in the “Remote” position, the actuator shall be controlled by remote inputs from the PLC or from the remote manual controls station. 2. The local controls shall be arranged so that the direction of travel can be reversed without the necessity of stopping the actuator. M. Operators shall be furnished with communication cards to receive actuator position over the network. Communication protocol shall be MODBUS /TCP per the latest MODICON standard. Two MODBUS modules shall be provided in each actuator to allow fully Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 57-8 redundant communications capability. If one module fails the system shall automatically backup to the other module. The modules shall be allowed to simultaneously communicate on two separate MODBUS networks. The following I/O shall be made available in the actuator registers for read/write access by the PLC: 1. OPEN position indication (Valve is in open position) 2. CLOSE position indication 3. Valve FAULT 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. Spare parts shall be provided in accordance with Section 46 00 00 − Equipment General Provisions and shall include the following: 1. One (1) of all recommended spare parts. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All valve actuators shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and the applicable Specification Sections for valves and motor controls. B. Valve actuators shall be factory coated in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard paint system. 3.02 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES A. The services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided in accordance with Section 46 00 00 − Equipment General Provisions and shall include the following site visits for electric actuators: Service Number of Trips Number of Days/Trip Installation and Testing 1 1 Startup and Training 1 1 Services after Startup 1 1 3.03 TESTING A. Shop Testing: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 57-9 1. Shop testing shall be in accordance with Section 46 00 00 - Equipment General Provisions and with the following additional requirements: a. Conduct a complete functional check of each unit. Correct any deficiencies found in shop testing prior to shipment. b. Submit written certification that: 1) Shop tests for the electrical system and all controls were successfully conducted; 2) Electrical system and all controls provide the functions specified and required for proper operation of the valve operator system. c. Each actuator shall be performance tested and individual test certificates shall be supplied free of charge. The test equipment shall simulate each typical valve load and the following parameters should be recorded: 1) Current at maximum torque setting 2) Torque at maximum torque setting 3) Flash Test Voltage 4) Actuator Output Speed or Operating Time 5) In addition, the test certificate should record details of specification, such as gear ratios for both manual and automatic drive, closing direction, and wiring diagram code number. 6) Verification of actuator torque rating with valve. B. Field Tests 1. Field testing shall be in accordance with Section 46 00 00 − Equipment General Provisions and with the following additional requirements: A. Valve actuators shall be field-tested together with the associated valves. B. Test all valves at the operating pressures at which the particular line will be used. C. Test all valves for control operation as directed. D. Field testing shall include optimization of opening and closing times of the valves. Valve opening and closing times shall be adjusted based on process requirements to optimize operation of the valves. Final valve opening and Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 57-10 closing times as determined by field tests shall be approved by the Engineer prior to final acceptance of the system. 2. Preliminary Field Tests A. General: Preliminary field tests shall be conducted prior to startup and shall include a functional check of the entire valve operator system and all system components B. Scope: Preliminary field tests shall demonstrate that the valve operator system performs according to specifications and that all equipment, valves, controls, alarms, interlocks, etc., function properly. C. Based on results of preliminary field tests, the Contractor shall make any adjustments required to settings, etc., to achieve the required valve closing time and operation, as specified or otherwise directed. 2. Final Field Tests a. Final field tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C500. b. Final field tests shall be conducted simultaneously with the startup and field testing of the pumps. c. Final field tests shall be conducted for the full range of operating modes and conditions specified and as directed by the Engineer. Each of the valves shall be tested at minimum, maximum, and normal head/flow conditions, and under all specified conditions of opening and closing. d. Certification of Equipment Compliance: After the final field tests are completed and passed, submit affidavit according to Section 46 00 00 − Equipment and General Provisions. 3.04 TRAINING A. Provide two hours of training to District staff for each different manufacturer of actuator provided on the project. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gate Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 61-1 SECTION 40 05 61 GATE VALVES (INCLUDING KNIFE GATE VALVES) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00  Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install, complete with all assemblies and accessories, all gate valves shown on the Drawings, specified herein and as specified in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. C. Except where noted otherwise, valves designated for water service shall conform to pertinent sections of the latest revision of AWWA C500 Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 40 05 00  Basic Mechanical Requirements C. Section 40 05 51 – Valves General D. Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. E. Section 46 00 00  Equipment General Provisions. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C500, Metal Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service b. C509, Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service c. C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. B. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings C. NSF International a. NSF 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gate Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 61-2 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As required in Section 40 05 51 – Valves General, and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, through the Engineer, a Performance Affidavit, utilizing the format specified in Section 46 00 00  Equipment General Provisions. C. Performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C500 and affidavits shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall be as specified in Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A. METAL SEATED (GV-MS) 1. Size: 2 Inch to 4 Inch (Iron Body) a. Gate valves between 2 inches and less than 4 inches shall be iron body, bronze trimmed, bolted bonnet, bolted packing gland, wedge disc, and minimum 150 psi non-shock cold water pressure rating. Meets or exceeds MSS SP-70. Exposed valves shall be of the outside screw and yoke (OS&Y), ANSI B16.1, 125-pound flanges and shall be as manufactured by the Crane Company, Jenkins Bros. Corp., or equal. 2. Size: Less than 2 Inch (Bronze Body) a. Valves less than 2 inches shall be of bronze body, threaded bonnet,[rising,, packed gland, solid wedge disc and minimum 300 psi non-shock cold water pressure rating. Valves shall have screwed ends or as specified otherwise. Manufactured by Crane Company, Jenkins Bros. Corp., or equal. B. RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (GV-RW) 1. Size: 4-Inch to 16-Inch; Cartridge Seal a. Gate valves 4 inch through 16 inch, rated for 250 psig working pressure. b. Non-rising stem (NRS) design, shall fully comply with the requirements of AWWA C509 for resilient seated gate valves and shall be the Metroseal 250 as manufactured by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co., or equal. Gate valves shall Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gate Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 61-3 be designed for a minimum working pressure of 250 psi and a test pressure of 500 psi. c. Gate valve body and bonnet shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A126, Class B with resilient seat gate and Oring seals. Upper bonnet seal shall be cartridge type. The gate shall be ductile iron with a vulcanized rubber coating with no metal-to-metal contact when in the fully closed position and a smooth unobstructed waterway when in the fully opened position. d. Stem and thrust collar shall be bronze. Low friction thermoplastic thrust washer shall be provided. e. Body and bonnet shall be shop coated inside and out with two coats (10 mils minimum dry film thickness) of a fusion bonded epoxy complying with AWWA C550 and shall be NSF-61 certified. Damage surfaces shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. f. All assembly hardware shall be minimum 304 stainless steel. g. Valves shall be flanged or mechanical joint as shown on the drawings. Provide 2-inch square standard AWWA operating nut unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Eccentric Plug Valve Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 62-1 SECTION 40 05 62 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00  Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. C. Section 40 05 51 – Valves General D. Section 46 00 00 - Equipment General Provisions. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C111, Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings b. C517, Full Port Eccentric Plug Valves B. ASTM International (ASTM) a. A240, Standard Specification for Chromium, Chromium-Nickel, and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications b. A743, Standard Specification for Coatings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium- Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application c. B30, Standard Specification for Copper Alloys in Ingot and Other Remelt Forms C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) a. B16.1125 D. NSF International a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects b. NSF/ANSI 372, Technical Requirements 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Eccentric Plug Valve Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 62-2 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Not Applicable. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. As required in Section 40 05 51 – Valves General, and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, through the Engineer, a Performance Affidavit, utilizing the format specified in Section 46 00 00  Equipment General Provisions. C. Performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C517 and affidavits shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES A. GENERAL 1. Plug valves shall be of the nonlubricated, eccentric seating plug type with synthetic rubber faced plugs as manufactured by DeZurik Company, Clow, or equal. 2. All valves shall be provided with limit stops and rotate 90º from fully-open to fully- shut. 3. The minimum working pressure for all valves shall be 150 psi, and the test pressure shall be at least 270 psi for valves up through 12-inch and at least 230 psi for valves 14-inch and larger. 4. Valve body shall be epoxy coated ductile iron, cast iron or semi steel, unless specified otherwise, and coated as specified herein. 5. Seats shall have a welded overlay of one-half inch wide 90 percent pure nickel and machined to a finish containing no stress cracks. Minimum overlay thickness shall be one-eighth inch. The plug shall contact only the raised nickel seat surface. 6. Plug facings shall be of Nitrile Butadiene or EDPM and completely suitable for use with raw water. 7. The shaft seal shall be VType with minimum four sealing rings and a follower ring. Stuffing box shall be designed with a space between the bonnet and actuator so that packing can be inspected, adjusted, and replaced without removing the valve actuator. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Eccentric Plug Valve Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 62-3 8. Bearings shall be sleeve type with the following materials. a. Sizes 4 – 18 inch: Sintered, oil impregnated, permanently lubricated type 316 stainless steel. b. Sizes 20 – 36 inch: ASTM A743 Grade CF8M. c. Greater than 36 inches: Upper and lower plug journals fitted with ASTM A240 Type 316 stainless steel, with body bearings of ASTM B30, Alloy C95400 aluminum bronze. 9. Provide PTFE ring on the shaft between plug and body to serve as a thrust bearing and grit excluder. 10. All buried valves shall have mechanical joint ends (unless otherwise shown), conforming to ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C 111), and shall be operated with a standard AWWA 2inch square nut through a totally enclosed worm gear actuator. Valve boxes shall be installed with all buried plug valves and shall be as specified herein. 11. Unless otherwise shown, all exposed valves 4-inches in diameter and larger shall have flanged ends conforming to ANSI B16.1125/150-pound standard with face-to- face dimensions of standard plug valves. Valves smaller than 4inches in diameter shall have screwed ends, unless otherwise noted. 12. Valves 8-inches in diameter and larger shall be handwheel or floorstand-operated where required or indicated on the Drawings through totally enclosed worm gear actuators, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. Valves 6-inches in diameter and smaller shall have lever operators, unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings. Manual operators for plug valves mounted above 6 feet from the operating floor shall be equipped with worm gear chainwheel actuators. 13. The manufacturer shall certify that the plug valves are capable of operating in continuous duty service under the specified pressures and flow conditions. 14. Each valve shall by hydrostatically tested and tested for bubble tightness after the operator has been mounted and adjusted. Copies of the hydrostatic and leakage test certification and certification of conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment. 15. All internal and external ferrous components and surfaces of the valves, with the exception of stainless steel and finished or bearing surfaces, shall be shop painted with two coats (10 mils min. dry film thickness) of the manufacturer's premium epoxy for corrosion resistance. Damaged surfaces shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 16. Valves installed in potable water applications and where specified shall be NSF/ANSI 372 certified lead-free and NSF/ANSI 61 certified for drinking water. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Eccentric Plug Valve Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 62-4 B. FULL PORT VALVE (PV-FP) 1. Port shall be rectangular shaped cross section designed to seat with a cylindrical plug. Port cross-sectional area shall be equal to or greater than the cross- sectional area of the upstream pipe. 2. The flow passage through the valve body shall have a cross-sectional area equal to or greater than the cross-sectional area of the upstream pipe at any point along the valve flow axis. 3. Plug shall have a cylindrical seating surface and eccentrically offset from the center of the shaft. Plug shall not contact seat until at least 90 percent closed. C. PARTIAL PORT VALVE (PV-PP) 1. Port shall be rectangular shaped cross section designed to seat with a cylindrical plug. 2. Plug shall have a cylindrical seating surface and eccentrically offset from the center of the shaft. Plug shall not contact seat until at least 90 percent closed. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. In applications with suspended solids in the liquid or for dirty gases: 1. Vertical pipelines: Install valve with the seat end at the top. 2. Horizontal pipelines: Install valve so plug rotates upwards when opening. Higher pressure side of the valve, when closed, shall be on the valve end opposite of the seat. C. In applications with clean liquids or gases install the valve with the higher-pressure side of the valve, when closed, on the opposite end of the valve from the seat. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ball Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 63-1 SECTION 40 05 63 BALL VALVES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Valves required for chemical service shall be constructed of materials suitable for the intended service. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 00 00 00 – Reference Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. C507, Standard for Ball Valves B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME/ANSI) 1. B16.1 Standards for Pipes and Fittings C. ASTM International 1. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings 2. A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 3. A322, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, and Standard Grades PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 BALL VALVES (WATER SERVICE) (BLV-MS) A.Ball valves (water service) shall be of the full port, single seated, metal to metal seated, tight closing type conforming to the latest revision of AWWA C507 Specifications. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience in manufacturing ball valves of the sizes required in accordance with AWWA C507 Specifications. All ball valves shall be the product of one manufacturer. Ball valves shall be as manufactured by Willamette Valve, Inc., or equal. B.Each valve shall be performance and leak tested as specified in AWWA C507 revised as follows: In addition to the testing requirements of AWWA C507, each ball valve shall be thoroughly cleaned and opened and closed at least three (3) times prior to testing. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ball Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 63-2 Certified copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment of the valve. C.Ball valves shall be AWWA Class 150, unless otherwise indicated in the valve schedules, design with flanged ends, and installed as shown on the Drawings. D.The valve body shall be constructed of epoxy coated cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48, Class 35, with a full, unrestricted circular inlet and outlet, with nominal opening diameter equal to the rated size of the valve. Each valve body shall be provided with flanged ends conforming in diameter and drilling to ANSI B16.1, Class 125. All flanges shall be flat faced and finished to true plan surfaces within a tolerance limit of 0.005 inch. Each flange face shall be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the valve within a maximum angular variation tolerance of 0.002 inch per foot of flange diameter. Flange faces shall have concentric or spiral serrated finish. The body trunnions shall be fitted with ample sized bronze bearings of sufficient difference in hardness from the plug bearings to eliminate seizing and galling. Bearing pressure shall not exceed 1500 psi at full differential pressure of 150 psi. Valve designs employing teflon coated or other nonmetallic material will not be acceptable. Bearings shall be machined in accurate alignment for reception of the plug trunnions. E.The body shall provide rigid means for supporting the valve operating mechanism without the necessity of additional supports and shall be of such design that it shall be capable of receiving the complete plug sub assembly. The valve body shall have integral hubs for housing shaft bearings and seals. F.The body shall have a rigidly attached metal seat. The body seat shall be Monel (Alloy 400) and shall be machined, ground, and polished for contact with the stainless steel seat mounted on the plug. G.There shall be two (2) pipe connections, one for an air vent and the other for drain. H.The plug shall be constructed of epoxy coated cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 35, with a full unobstructed, circular waterway with a diameter equal to the rated size of the valve. It shall have trunnion supports cast integral on the axis of rotation. An extension of one trunnion, called the operating shaft, shall pass through a shaft seal chamber, and connect to the valve operation mechanism. I.The plug shall have a stainless steel seat conforming to ASTM A276, Type 304, mounted thereon which shall properly align with the body seat when the valve is in the closed position. The surfaces of the seat ring shall be spherically generated and shall be machined, ground, and polished for contact with the body seat. J.The plug trunnions shall be fitted with bronze bearings of sufficient difference in hardness from the body bushings to eliminate seizing and galling. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ball Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 63-3 K.Bearing pressure shall not exceed 1500 psi at full differential pressure of 150 psi. Valve designs employing Teflon coated or other nonmetallic bearing material will not be acceptable. L.Valve shafts shall be integral with the plug and shall connect the plug to the torque unit. The shaft shall be of chrome Molybdenum Steel (ASTM A 322 Grade 4140) with hard chrome plate through the seal chamber suitably sized to transmit the torques required to operate the valves under the conditions listed in the valve schedule with appropriate safety factor. Shafts shall be securely attached to valve plug by means of conservatively sized corrosion resistant taper pins, threaded at one end and secured with lock washers and nuts (i.e.: mechanically attached). Provide Oring seal on taper pin if required to prevent leakage. Shaft key shall be constructed of corrosion resistant material. M.Shaft bearings shall be contained in the integral hubs of the valve body and shall be the permanently self lubricated, corrosion resistant, sleeve type of heavy-duty bronze. The valve assembly shall be furnished with a factory set thrust bearing designed to center the valve plug in the valve seat at all times. End cover bolts shall be of stainless steel construction. N.A shaft seal shall be provided of the type utilizing a plug shaft stuffing box, four (4) "O" ring seals, a bronze retainer, and a corrosion resistant steel lock ring. The "O" ring material shall be BUNAN rubber, as intended for use with potable water or wastewater. O.Manual operators for ball valves 18inches in diameter or larger shall be the worm gear or travelling nut type conforming to AWWA C507. Manual operators for ball valves mounted above 6 feet from the operating floor shall be equipped with worm gear chainwheel actuators. Operators shall be equipped with adjustable AWWA limit stops and shall require a minimum of 15 turns for 90 degrees or full stem valve travel. The capacity of the manual operator shall be adequate to drive the valve under the differential pressure of 150 psi and maximum anticipated flow, unless otherwise indicated in the appropriate valve schedule. Electric motor operators shall be as specified elsewhere in this Section. P. The torque unit (valve operating mechanism) shall be of the traveling nut type and shall be the product of the valve manufacturer. The assembly shall be mounted and attached to the valve body. The torque unit shall be designed to accept a manual, cylinder, or electric motor actuator. The torque unit housing shall employ the following: 1. A traveling crosshead to impart positive rotary movement to the plug which will move transversely to the valve shaft. 2. A cylinder piston rod or stainless steel Type 416 threaded leadscrew (reach rod or stem) with the crosshead directly attached thereto. 3. A rotator lever (of cast steel construction). 4. A matched set of interconnecting links (of cast steel construction) connecting the traveling crosshead to the rotator lever. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ball Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 63-4 Q.The traveling crosshead shall be confined to permit linear motion only and to prevent it from any tendency to rotate due to linkage reaction. A plug shaft support bearing shall be supplied on the cover. R.The torque unit shall be so designed that during the first 50 percent of stroke in closing the flow area is reduced by approximately 81 percent. The remaining 19 percent of flow area shall be gradually reduced to a complete shutoff throughout the last 50 percent of the closing stroke. S.The torque unit shall be totally enclosed in a suitable housing with a removable cover and shall be capable of being inspected, lubricated, adjusted, and repaired without interfering with or removing the valve from the line and shall be permanently lubricated. All parts shall be of first class workmanship, easily replaceable and manufactured of the best materials suited for the purpose. All parts subject to rubbing shall be of significantly different hardness to prevent galling and shall be sized to result in a maximum bearing stress at full load of 2,000 psi. The main shaft shall be replaceable without removing the torque unit housing and while the valve is in the line under pressure. T.The manufacturer shall certify that the ball valves are capable of operating in continuous duty service under these pressures and flow conditions. U.Each valve shall by hydrostatically tested and tested for bubble tightness after the operator has been mounted and adjusted. Copies of the hydrostatic and leakage test certification and certification of conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment. V.All internal and external ferrous components and surfaces of the valves, with the exception of stainless steel and finished or bearing surfaces, shall be shop painted with two coats (10 mils min. dry film thickness) of the manufacturer's premium epoxy for corrosion resistance. Damaged surf 2.02 BALL VALVES (THREADED STAINLESS STEEL) A. Two-Piece Stainless Steel Body (BLV-2S) 1. 3-Inch and Smaller A. Threaded ends, 2-piece, full port, stainless steel design manufactured to MSS SP-110. B. Blow-out proof stem, RPTFE stem bearing, two position locking vinyl grip stainless steel lever operator, compression controlled RPTFE body seals, and adjustable multi-piece PTFE “V” style packing. C. Rated for 1000 psi CWP. D. Manufacturer: Apollo 76F-100 Series or Approved Equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ball Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 63-5 B. Three-Piece Stainless Steel Body (BLV-3S) 1. 2-Inch and Smaller A. Threaded ends, 3-piece, full port, stainless steel design manufactured to MSS SP-110.b. Blow-out proof stem, two position locking vinyl grip stainless steel lever operator, compression controlled RPTFE gaskets, and adjustable multi- piece PTFE “V” style packing. B. Rated for 1500 psi CWP. C. Manufacturer: Apollo 86A-100 Series or Approved Equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Double Eccentric Butterfly Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 64.10-1 SECTION 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00 − Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting C. Section 40 05 00 − Basic Mechanical Requirements D. Section 40 05 51 – Valves General E. Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedule 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C504, Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves 2. C540, Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Slide Gates. 3. C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves B. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 2. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Piping 3. A564, Standard Specification for Hot Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 4. D429, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property – Adhesion to Rigid Substrates C. American Society of Engineers (ASME) 1. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Double Eccentric Butterfly Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 64.10-2 D. NSF International (NSF) 1. NSF 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects 2. NSF 372, Technical Requirements 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As required in Section 40 05 51 – Valves General, and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVES (WATER SERVICE) A. Design Requirements: 1. Design standard: Provide valves designed and manufactured in accordance with AWWA C504. 2. Butterfly valves shall be of a double offset design whereby the centerline of the disc is horizontally and vertically offset from the body seat and where the elastomeric seat releases compression only after a few degrees of opening. 3. Butterfly valves shall be certified compliant with the latest standards of NSF 61 and 372. 4. Class: Valves shall be of the size and class as indicated in the Valve Schedule in Specification 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedule. B. Usage: 1. Provide and install butterfly valve types as outlined in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedule and as indicated in the Drawings. Butterfly valves shall be Class 150B, unless otherwise indicated in the valve schedules. 2. Butterfly valves shall be of the short body design with mechanical joint or flanged ends, as shown on the Drawings. C. Design requirements for all butterfly valves with power actuating devices: 1. Design valves and actuators for maximum operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C540, using the following values: a. Maximum water velocity: 16 feet per second with valve fully open. b. Maximum pressure differential across the closed valve equal to the pressure class designation. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Double Eccentric Butterfly Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 64.10-3 c. Coefficient for seating and unseating torque, dynamic torque, and bearing friction in accordance with valve manufacturer's published recommendations. 2. Valve disc: Seat in an angular position of 90 degrees to the pipe axis and rotate an angle of 90 degrees between fully open and fully closed positions: a. Do not supply valves with stops or lugs cast with or mechanically secured to the body of the valve for limiting the disc travel. 3. Unacceptable thrust bearings: Do not provide valves with thrust bearings exposed to the fluid in the line and consisting of a metal bearing surface in rubbing contact with an opposing metal bearing surface. D. Performance requirements: 1. Leak free tight shutoff at the pressure rating of the valve with pressure applied in either direction. 2. Suitable for the following service conditions: a. Throttling. b. Frequent operation. c. Operation after long periods of inactivity. d. Installation in any position and flow in either direction. E. Manufacturers: One of the following: 1. AvTek Model DEX 2. VAG Industries Model EKN 3. No approved Equal. F. Valve body: 1. Material: Ductile iron, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. 2. Body design: a. Flanged body valves: 1) Usage: Comply with limitations specified in the Valve Schedule as indicated in Section 40 06 20 – Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedule. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Double Eccentric Butterfly Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 64.10-4 2) Flanges: In accordance with ASME B16.1 Class 125 flanges for Class 150B valves, in accordance with ASME B16.1 Class 250 flanges for Class 250B and 500B valves. 3. Disc: a. Material: Ductile iron with Type 316 stainless steel edge or Type 316 stainless steel retaining ring that matches seat in valve body. b. Secure valve disc to shaft by means of smooth-sided, taper or dowel pins, Type 316 stainless steel, or 2205 Duplex. c. Extend pins through shaft and mechanically secure in place. G. Shaft and bearings: 1. Shaft design: a. Valves shall have a: 2 piece, through disc design. b. Shaft seal: O-ring design. 2. Shaft material for Class 150B valves: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A 276, or 2205 Duplex Stainless Steel. 3. Shaft material for Class 250B and 500B valves: Type 17-4 pH stainless steel, ASTM A 564, or 2205 Duplex Stainless Steel. 4. Shaft bearings: Self-lubricating sleeve type: a. Self-lubricating lead-free bronze. H. Seats: 1. Seat materials: a. All applications: EPDM. b. Retain seats mechanically as described in this section: c. Mechanical retainage: Retain seat by a clamping ring with segmented clamping ring locks with adjusting locking screws. 1) Clamping ring, ring locks, and adjusting locking screws: Type 316 stainless steel. 2) Provide means to prevent ring locks and screws used to retain seats from loosening due to vibration or cavitation. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Double Eccentric Butterfly Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 64.10-5 d. Do not provide valves with seats retained by snap rings or spring-loaded retainer rings. e. Resilient seat: Withstand 75 pound per inch pull when tested in accordance with ASTM D 429, Method B. I. Valve packing: 1. Valve packing shall be multi-O-ring type. Pull down or braided packing is not acceptable. J. O-Rings: 1. Provide 6 EDPM O-ring seals on the shaft. 2.02 COATING A. Shop coat interior and exterior metal surfaces of valves, except as follows: 1. Interior machined surfaces. Apply rust-preventive compound to polished and machined surfaces. 2. Surfaces of gaskets and elastomeric seats and stem seals. 3. Bearing surfaces. 4. Stainless steel surfaces and components. B. Shop coating materials: 1. Butterfly valves shall be coated inside and out with a minimum 14 mil DFT fusion bonded epoxy. 2. Products: As specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting: a. Coating product in contact with potable water shall be in accordance with AWWA C550 and NSF 61. 3. Rust-preventative compound: One of the following or equal: a. Houghton, Rust Veto 344. b. Rust-Oleum, R-9. C. Coating material for potable water applications: 1. Formulate coating material from materials in accordance with CFR 21. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Double Eccentric Butterfly Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 64.10-6 D. Field applied coatings: 1. Additional coating of the valve exterior may be required to match the piping in which the valve is installed. a. When shop applied finish coating matches field applied coating on adjacent piping, touch up shop coating in damaged areas in accordance with instructions recommended by the paint manufacturer. When shop applied coating does not match field coating on adjacent piping, or when damage has occurred to the shop applied coating that requires more than touchup, blast clean valve surfaces or utilize other surface preparation recommended by the manufacturer of the coating material and apply the coating system used for coating adjacent piping. 2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVE ACTUATORS A. Manual actuators for aboveground valves and valves in vaults in nominal sizes and in- service applications, except for valves 30 inches and larger. 1. For valves operating at pressures up to and including 250 pounds per square inch, provide either a totally enclosed worm gear actuator or a totally enclosed traveling nut actuator mounted on the valve. 2. For valves operating at pressures above 250 pounds per square inch, provide totally enclosed worm gear actuator mounted on the valve. B. Manual actuators for aboveground valves and valves in vaults 30 inches in nominal size and larger, all pressures. 1. Provide totally enclosed worm gear actuator mounted on the valve. C. Position indication: 1. For all aboveground or vault enclosed worm gear or traveling nut manual actuators, provide position indication on the actuator enclosure. D. Limit switches: Provide limit switches on manually actuated valves where indicated on the Drawings: 1. For Limit switches: Heavy-duty, industrial grade, oil tight, with not less than 2 auxiliary contacts. 2. Rating: Rated for 10 amps, 120 volts alternating current. 3. Enclosure: NEMA Type 4X enclosure and with stainless steel levers and arms. Provide switch with NEMA Type 7 enclosure when switch is located within areas with NEC Class 1, Division 1 or Class 1, Division 2 designations as indicated on the Drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Double Eccentric Butterfly Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 64.10-7 E. Manual operators for butterfly valves mounted above 6 feet from the operating floor shall be equipped with worm gear chainwheel actuators. Operators shall be equipped with adjustable AWWA limit stops, shall be sized according to Table IV for Class 150B, and shall require a minimum of 15 turns for 90 degrees or full stem valve travel. The capacity of the manual operator shall be adequate to drive the valve under the differential pressure of 150 psi and maximum anticipated flow, unless otherwise indicated in the appropriate valve schedule. F. Manufacturer shall certify that butterfly valves are capable of operating in continuous duty service under these pressures and flow conditions. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Not Applicable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal, unless a vertical shaft is required to suit a particular installation, and unless a vertical shaft is indicated on the Drawings. B. Install pipe spools or valve spacers in locations where butterfly valve disc travel may be impaired by adjacent pipe lining, pipefittings, valves, or other equipment. 3.03 TESTING A. Each valve shall be hydrostatically tested and tested for bubble tightness after the operator has been mounted and adjusted. Copies of the hydrostatic and leakage test certification and certification of conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Check Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 65.23-1 SECTION 40 05 65.23 CHECK VALVES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00 − Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Valves intended for chemical service shall be constructed of materials suitable for the intended service. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 09 90 00 – Painting B. Section 40 05 00 − Basic Mechanical Requirements 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings B. ANSI 1. B16.1, Standards for Pipes and Fittings PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SWING CHECK VALVES (WATER SERVICE) A. Unless otherwise specified, check valves 3-inches and less shall be bronze, Ypattern, swing check valves of the regrinding type. Valves shall have a minimum 200 psi non - shock cold water pressure rating and shall be as manufactured by Jenkins Bros. Corp., Crane Company, or equal. B. Check valves larger than 3 -inches shall be cushioned swing check valves rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi and shall be of the "Shockless SwingCheck" type as manufactured by G.A. Industries, or equal. Valve design shall be in accordance with AWWA C508. C. Valve closure shall be controlled by an external weighted lever arm, the action of which is cushioned by a hydraulic oil or pneumatic cylinder. Counterweights and cushion cylinders shall be designed so that adjustments can be made in the field to minimize 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Check Valves Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 65.23-2 surge and to prevent backflow and hammering noises during actual service conditions. The hydraulic oil or pneumatic cushion system shall be completely self-contained . D. Valve bodies, cover discs, levers, and disc arms shall be constructed of heavy cast iron or cast steel fully conforming to the latest revision of ASTM A126 Class B or Class WCB, respectively. Valve ends shall be Standard American 125 pound flat faced flanged, in accordance with ANSI B16.1. Each valve disc shall be suspended from a noncorrosive shaft which shall pass through a stuffing box and be connected on the outside of the valve to the cushion and counterweight mechanism. E. Valve seating shall be rubber-to -metal designed for drop-tight shutoff. The body seat ring shall be made of bronze or stainless steel and the disc seat ring of 80 Durometer rubber. Body and disc seats shall be renewable. F. With the exception of the valve body and seat, all parts in contact with water shall be manufactured from noncorrosive materials. Internal corrosive surfaces shall be shop painted with two coats of epoxy for corrosion resistance. Exterior surfaces shall be painted in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 − Painting. 2.02 SPRING CHECK VALVE (WATER SERVICE) A. Inline spring check valve with lead free cast copper alloy body with threaded connection and maximum pressure rating of 150 psi. B. Manufacturer: a. Watts b. Red White Valve c. Apollo d. Zurn e. Or Equal. 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver valves in accordance with Specification 01 66 00 and using loading methods with do not damage any valve components or coatings. B. Store on site until ready for incorporation in the work using methods recommended by the manufacturer to prevent damage, undue stresses or weathering. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Air Valves For Water And Wastewater Service Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 78-1 SECTION 40 05 78 AIR VALVES FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER SERVICE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00 – Basin Mechanical Requirements. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install, complete with all assemblies and accessories, all air valves shown on the Drawings and specified herein including all fittings, appurtenances, drain connections, and transition pieces required for a complete and operable installation. C. All valves shall be constructed of materials which have strength, wearing, and corrosion resistance characteristics entirely suitable for the types of service for which the individual valves are designated. Valves shall conform to pertinent sections of the latest edition of their respective governing AWWA standards, except as may be modified to comply with pressure ratings specified herein. D. Valves intended for chemical service shall be constructed of materials suitable for the intended use. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following standards apply to the work of this section: 1. ANSI/AWWA C512 Air Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Water and Wastewater Service 2. NSF-61, NSF-372, and NSF-600 All products in contact with potable water shall be certified B. Reference Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. C. Reference Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions for additional requirements. 1.03 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in compliance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: 1. Submit an Affidavit of Compliance for each valve type indicating the valve complies with the latest edition of its governing AWWA Standard. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Air Valves For Water And Wastewater Service Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 78-2 2. Submit all catalog data information, installation drawings, specifications, layout dimensions, size and materials of construction for all components, pressure ratings, support and anchoring, complete descriptive literature to demonstrate full compliance, and manufacturer’s certification that products comply with the indicated requirements. 3. Submit operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals and installation instructions for all valves. O&M manuals shall not include information and/or details which do not apply to the equipment being furnished. O&M manuals shall include: a. Manufacturer’s catalog data. b. Manufacturer’s installation and operations instructions. c. Manufacturer’s maintenance procedures. d. List of special tools. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All valve body castings shall be clean, sound, and without defects of any kind. No plugging, welding, or repairing of defects will be allowed. B. Air valves shall be provided with appropriate materials to provide drip tight closure. C. Valves 2-inch and smaller shall have NPT threaded inlets and outlets. Valves that are 3- inch shall be either NPT threaded or flanged ANSI B16.5 Class 150. Valves 4-inch and larger shall be flanged ANSI B16.5 Class 150. D. Valves shall permit dismantling for repairs and cleaning without being removed from the line. All installations shall include a ball valve of the same diameter as the nominal valve size located on the inlet side for isolation. The exhaust from the valve shall be piped to a suitable disposal point, with the piping firmly supported and installed in such a way as to avoid splashing and wetting of floors. Exhaust piping shall be no smaller than the diameter of the air valve’s largest orifice. E. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, isolation valves shall open counterclockwise. F. For valves where insect screens are required, confirm that the open surface area between the insect screen mesh is no less than the area of the largest air valve orifice so as not to restrict air flow. G. All internal and external ferrous components and surfaces of the valves, with the exception of stainless steel and finished or bearing surfaces, shall be shop painted with two coats (10 mils min. dry film thickness) of the manufacturer's premium epoxy for Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Air Valves For Water And Wastewater Service Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 78-3 corrosion resistance. Damaged surfaces shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. H. One spare valve shall be provided for each size and type of valve specified. 2.02 AIR VALVES FOR WATER SERVICE A. The valves specified in this section shall be specifically designed for water service. B. All air valves for water service 1-inch in diameter and larger shall have a ¼-inch minimum diameter drain plug. C. Air Release Valves (ARV): ARVs for water service shall be designed to operate (open) while pressurized allowing entrained air in a water pipeline to escape through the air release orifice. After entrained air escapes through the air release orifice, the valve orifice shall close tightly. The air release orifice will then remain closed until more air accumulates and the opening cycle repeats automatically. D. Combination Air Release and Air/Vacuum Valves (CARV): CARVs for water service shall provide the same function as both ARVs and AVVs listed above. CARVs may be a single body housing specifically designed for use with water mains. In addition, the valve shall be designed to provide three-stage air venting when the pipeline is filling, or air has accumulated in the body of the valve. The first stage shall vent the pipeline rapidly as pressure is applied to the pipeline. The second stage shall have an anti-surge feature to prevent development of damaging transient forces. The assembly shall be specifically designed for pump applications conveying water. A third stage shall provide for intermittent venting of accumulated air at pressures greater than atmospheric. Designs using linkage, levers, and pilot devices will not be accepted. E. For biased (non-slam) valves, the anti-surge device is biased in its activated position and causes the main orifice to close. This shall force the exhausting air through much smaller orifices which will choke the flow resulting in a pressure independent, constant ACFM volume change inside the pipeline, thus controlling water-hammer velocities. The biased element shall be installed after the initial filling of the pipeline. F. Sealing pressure is listed in the Valve Parameters Table below. G. Acceptable manufacturers for non-surge air valve applications: Crispin, Golden Anderson, Cla-Val, Valmatic, or equal. 1. Materials of Construction Component Material Body, Cover Cast Iron ASTM A126 Class B or Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 Float 316 Stainless Steel Seat Viton, Buna-N, PVC ASTM 1784, or Bronze ASTM B62 Trim 304 or 316 Stainless Steel Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Air Valves For Water And Wastewater Service Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 78-4 O-rings Viton or EPDM Connection – 2” or smaller NPT Threaded Connection – 3” NPT Threaded or Flanged ANSI B16.5 Class 150 Connection – 4” or larger Flanged ANSI B16.5 Class 150 H. Acceptable manufacturers for surge air valve applications: A.R.I., Vent-tech International, Vent-O-Mat, or equal. 1. Materials of Construction a. Valves shall consist of a fabricated or cast tubular shaped body. The assembly shall have an inlet end suitable for connection to the pipeline specified. Component Material Body, Cover 304 Stainless Steel Float Ultra-High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (UHMW), Polypropylene, Stainless Steel, or High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Seat EPDM or Buna-N Trim 304 Stainless Steel O-rings Viton or EPDM Connection – 2” or smaller NPT Threaded Connection – 3” NPT Threaded or Flanged ANSI B16.5 Class 150 Connection – 4” or larger Flanged ANSI B16.5 Class 150 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Air Valves For Water And Wastewater Service Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 78-5 I. Valve parameters: Line Designation and Location Quantity Model (Indicate if Biased Regulated Anti- Surge Device is required with -B) Size (inch) Anti- Surge Orifice Size (inch) Normal Operating Pressures Phase 1 (psig)2 Normal Operating Pressures Phase 3 (psig)2 Intake Capacity @ ∆-5 psi (scfm) Notes SLAR 10+00 1 ARV 2 N/A 31 12 N/A SLAR/CC-2 Vault SLAR 17+84 1 CARV 8 N/A 35 15 5,706 SLAR 35+68 1 CARV 8 N/A 54 34 2,855 SLAR 50+10 1 CARV-B 8 1.32 29 8 6,278 SEE NOTE 3 SLAR 61+26 1 CARV-B 8 1.32 26 4 6,593 SEE NOTE 3 SLAR 68+63 1 CARV 8 N/A 28 6 6,363 SLAR 80+31 1 CARV-B 8 1.32 26 3 6,681 SEE NOTE 3 SLAR 93+00 1 CARV-B 8 1.32 25 1 6,758 SEE NOTE 3 SLAR 100+75 2 CARV-B 8 1.32 24 0 12,147 SLAR 109+50 1 CARV 10 N/A 33 14 8,143 SLAR 116+95 1 CARV 10 N/A 34 15 8,116 SLAR 126+50 1 CARV 8 N/A 77 59 6,314 SLAR 138+35 1 ARV 2 N/A 89 60 N/A SLAR/CC-1 Vault CC-1 244+33 1 CARV-B 8 1.32 55 33 2,859 SEE NOTE 3 CC-2 307+05 1 CARV-B 6 1.0 20 N/A 3,039 SEE NOTE 3 CC-2 310+98 1 CARV-B 6 1.0 10 N/A 3,144 SEE NOTE 3 NOTES: 1) See Drawing G-6 for Phase 1 and Phase 3 system operations. 2) The listed minimum operating pressure is the sealing pressure required to prevent air valve leakage. 3) If surge tank is included in the BCPS design, these biases are no longer required. 4) Maximum surge pressure was 130 psi. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Air Valves for Water and Wastewater Service Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 78-6 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C512. B. Minimum test pressure - air valves for water and wastewater service shall be tested at 20 psig or the minimum operating pressure, whichever is lower. C. Maximum test pressure - air valves for water and wastewater service shall be tested at 150% of the maximum design pressure. D. Before installation, all valves shall be lubricated, manually opened and closed to check their operation and the interior of the valves shall be thoroughly cleaned. 3.02 SHIPMENT A. Valves shall be complete in all details when shipped. Cavities shall be drained of water to protect from freezing. The openings shall be covered to prevent entry of foreign material, and the threads shall be protected. The manufacturer shall carefully prepare the valves for shipment. Valves shall be fully packaged or attached to pallets at the manufacturer’s option. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install all air valves in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. The biased component of the CARV shall not be installed until after the initial startup of the pipelines. Install biased components once pumping begins. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 97-1 SECTION 40 05 97 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all components of the system for identification of piping and equipment as specified hereinafter. The system shall include the application of color coding to all new and altered plant piping. The Contractor shall paint the equipment and piping of all Contracts in the colors herein specified, and in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00  Painting. B. In addition to the legends specified herein, the Engineer may order the Contractor to furnish and install additional identification legends and arrows at no additional cost to the Owner. Such additional signs may be requested near completion of the work and shall be limited to no more than five (5) signs for each type specified herein. The legends and color combinations for additional signs shall conform to the requirements specified herein. C. The Contractor shall submit a schedule of the colors and designations proposed in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures and this Section. A minimum of four (4) color charts with cross references to the colors listed herein shall be included with the Submittal. D. Reference Section 40 05 00  Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures B. Section 09 90 00 – Painting C. Section 40 05 00  Basic Mechanical Requirements PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING BAND A. All new and altered piping shall receive identification bands. Such bands shall be 6inches wide, neatly made by masking, and spaced at intervals of 30inches on centers regardless of the diameter of the pipe being painted. The Contractor may use approved precut and prefinished metal bands on piping, in lieu of the masked and painted bands, where approved by the Engineer. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 97-2 2.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION LEGEND A. The Contractor shall apply identification legends to all types and sections of piping as shown on the Drawings or as designated by the Engineer. Such legends shall be in the form of plain block lettering giving the name of the pipe content in full or abbreviated form and showing the direction of flow by arrows. All lettering and arrows shall be of the plastic snap-On type, Seton nameplate "setmarks", or equal, or they shall be formed by stenciling in an approved manner using white or black as directed and shall have an overall height in inches in accordance with the following table: Diameter of Pipe or Pipe Covering Height of Lettering 3/4 to 1-1/4 inches 1/2-inches 1-1/2 to 2-inches 3/4-inches F2-1/2 to 6-inches 1-1/4-inches 8 to 10-inches 2-1/2-inches Over 10-inches 3-1/2-inches B. Identification lettering shall be located midway between color coding bands where possible. Identification lettering and arrows shall be placed as directed by the Engineer, but shall generally be located each fifteen (15) feet in pipe length, and shall be properly inclined to the pipe axis to facilitate easy reading. In the event lettering and arrow identifications are required for piping less than 3/4inch in diameter, the Contractor shall furnish and attach approved color-coded tags where instructed. C. The colors referenced in the legend are as manufactured by KOP-COAT. They are used for convenience only. D. Piping and Equipment Identification D. Piping and Equipment Identification Service Legend Pipe Background Color Marker Color Letter Color Aqueduct Drain Piping A-DR Green Green White Drain Piping DR Green Green White Raw Water RW Blue Green White Sample Analysis Piping SA Blue Yellow Black Sanitary Sewer SS Green Yellow Black Storm Drain SD Green Green White Vent V Yellow Green White Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 05 97-3 PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Pipe, Valve, And Gate Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 06 20-1 SECTION 40 06 20 PROCESS PIPE, VALVE, AND GATE SCHEDULE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SCHEDULES A. Piping requirements for this Section are outlined on the Drawings and in the Piping Schedules. In the absence of a specified test pressure, pipe shall be tested at the greater of: 1) 150 percent of working pressure as determined by the Engineer or 2) 10 psig, unless the Schedule indicates no test is required. B. If the pipe material is not shown on the Piping Schedule or otherwise specified, the following materials shall be used. PIPE SIZE MATERIAL TYPE OF JOINT CLASS/DESIGN TEST PRESSURE FLANGED (EXPOSED)CLASS 53 4-IN AND LARGER DIP RESTRAINED (BURIED)PRESSURE CLASS 350 (1) LESS THAN 4-IN PVC/CPVC (2)SOCKET SCH 80 (1) (1) Test at 150 percent of working pressure or 10 psi, whichever is greater. (2) For all PVC / CPVC designations, if piping is exposed to direct sunlight or if heat tracing is required, CPVC shall be used. Otherwise, PVC shall be used. 2.02 VALVE SCHEDULES A. All valves shall be tagged by the manufacturer according to the control valve designations listed in this Section. B. Valves not listed in this Section shall be manually operated, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. TYPE OF JOINT CLASS/ DESIGN SPECIFICATION TYPE OF JOINT CLASS/ DESIGN SPECIFICATION HEAT TRACE2 FIELD TEST A-DR AQUEDUCT DRAIN DIP RESTRAINED PUSH ON OR MECHANICAL PRESSURE CLASS 350 40 05 19 RESTRAINED PUSH ON OR MECHANICAL PRESSURE CLASS 53 40 05 19 NO 200 PSI HDPE BUTT OR SOCKET FUSION DR 9, ASTM D3350 40 05 33 N/A N/A N/A NO 200 PSI PVC / CPVC2 SOLVENT WELDED SCH 80 40 05 31 SOCKET/ FLANGED SCH 80 40 05 31 NO PER LOCAL PLUMBING CODE RW RAW WATER CARBON STEEL WELDED PER DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 40 05 24.33 WELDED/ FLANGED3 PER DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 40 05 24.33 NO 125 PSI CTS POLY COMPRESSION ASTM D2737 40 05 31 N/A N/A N/A NO 100 PSI PVC / CPVC2 N/A N/A 40 05 31 SOCKET/ FLANGED SCH 80 40 05 31 NO 100 PSI SD STORM DRAIN RCP GASKETED ASTM C76 CLASS V N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A, GRAVITY PIPE SS SANITARY SEWER PVC GASKETED ASTM D3034-78 SDR 35 40 05 31 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A, GRAVITY PIPE V VENT DIP RESTRAINED MINIMUM PRESSURE CLASS 150 SECTION 40 05 19 FLANGED OR MECHANICAL CLASS 53 40 05 19 NO PER LOCAL PLUMBING CODE PIPING SCHEDULE PIPE DESIGNATIONS EXPOSED PIPINGBURIED PIPING MATERIAL DR DRAIN 1) Surge pressure is the maximum pressure in the system during a surge event. Field Test pressure shall be used to determine pipe joint design and if required, the size, number, material, and dimensions of tabs and threaded-rods and thrust blocking for thrust restraint of piping and piping system components specified. 2) For all PVC / CPVC designations, if piping is exposed to direct sunlight or if heat tracing is required, CPVC shall be used. Otherwise, PVC shall be used. 3) Flanges shall be provided as shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. SA SAMPLE 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cottonwoods Connection Process Pipe, Valve, And Gate Schedule 40 06 20-1 20 PER LOCAL PLUMBING CODE TYPE OF JOINT CLASS/ DESIGN SPECIFICATION TYPE OF JOINT CLASS/ DESIGN SPECIFICATION HEAT TRACE2 FIELD TEST A-DR AQUEDUCT DRAIN DIP RESTRAINED PUSH ON OR MECHANICAL PRESSURE CLASS 350 40 05 19 RESTRAINED PUSH ON OR MECHANICAL PRESSURE CLASS 53 40 05 19 NO 200 PSI HDPE BUTT OR SOCKET FUSION DR 9, ASTM D3350 40 05 33 N/A N/A N/A NO 200 PSI PVC / CPVC2 SOLVENT WELDED SCH 80 40 05 31 SOCKET/ FLANGED SCH 80 40 05 31 NO PER LOCAL PLUMBING CODE RW RAW WATER CARBON STEEL WELDED PER DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 40 05 24.33 WELDED/ FLANGED3 PER DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 40 05 24.33 NO 125 PSI CTS POLY COMPRESSION ASTM D2737 40 05 31 N/A N/A N/A NO 100 PSI PVC / CPVC2 N/A N/A 40 05 31 SOCKET/ FLANGED SCH 80 40 05 31 NO 100 PSI SD STORM DRAIN RCP GASKETED ASTM C76 CLASS V N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A PER COTTONWOOD HEIGHTS CITY CODE PVC GASKETED ASTM D3034-78 SDR 35 40 05 31 N/A N/A N/A N/A HDPE 4 BUTT OR SOCKET FUSION DR 17, ASTM D3350, PE4710 40 05 33 N/A N/A N/A NO V VENT DIP RESTRAINED MINIMUM PRESSURE CLASS 150 SECTION 40 05 19 FLANGED OR MECHANICAL CLASS 53 40 05 19 NO PER LOCAL PLUMBING CODE DR DRAIN 1) Surge pressure is the maximum pressure in the system during a surge event. Field Test pressure shall be used to determine pipe joint design and if required, the size, number, material, and dimensions of tabs and threaded-rods and thrust blocking for thrust restraint of piping and piping system components specified. 2) For all PVC / CPVC designations, if piping is exposed to direct sunlight or if heat tracing is required, CPVC shall be used. Otherwise, PVC shall be used. 3) Flanges shall be provided as shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. SA SAMPLE SS SANITARY SEWER PER COTTONWOOD IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT CODE PIPING SCHEDULE PIPE DESIGNATIONS EXPOSED PIPINGBURIED PIPING MATERIAL ng is required, CPVC shall be used. Otherwise, PVC shall be used. 4) HDPE shall only be allowed for sanitary sewer pipe where specified on the contract drawings. TAG NO. VALVE TYPE OPERATOR TYPE SIZE (in.) VALVE ENDS CLASS SERVICE LOCATION SPECIFICATION DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 36 FLANGED 150 RW CC-2 GRIT BASIN TIE IN 40 05 64.10 MOV-9500 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE OPEN/CLOSE ELECTRIC 36 FLANGED 150 RW SLAR/CC-1 VAULT 40 05 64.10 GATE VALVE HAND WHEEL 6 FLANGED 150 A-DR SLAR/CC-1 VAULT 40 05 61 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVE HAND WHEEL 6 FLANGED 150 A-DR SLAR/CC-1 VAULT 40 05 62 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 FLANGED 150 A-DR STA 40+75 BO VAULT 40 05 62 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 FLANGED 150 A-DR STA 71+10 BO VAULT 40 05 62 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 FLANGED 150 A-DR STA 107+88 BO VAULT 40 05 62 GATE VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 FLANGED 150 A-DR STA 40+75 BO VAULT 40 05 61 GATE VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 FLANGED 150 A-DR STA 71+10 BO VAULT 40 05 61 GATE VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 FLANGED 150 A-DR STA 107+88 BO VAULT 40 05 61 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 17+84 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 35+68 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 50+10 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 61+26 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 68+63 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 80+31 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 93+00 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 100+75 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 100+75 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 10 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 109+50 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 10 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 116+95 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 126+50 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT CC- 1 244+33 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 6 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT CC- 2 307+05 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 6 FLANGED 150 RW CARV VAULT AT CC- 2 310+98 40 05 64.10 VALVE SCHEDULE (4-INCHES AND LARGER) NOTES. 1. IF VALVE SUPPLIER CANNOT PROVIDE SPECIFIED VALVE, CONTRACTOR MAY PROVIDE NEXT LARGEST SIZE VALVE BUT SHALL REDUCE PIPING BACK TO SPECIFIED SIZE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. PIPING MODIFICATIONS TO ACCOMODATE LARGER VALVE SHALL BE INSTALLED SO AS TO NOT IMPACT THE VAULT STRUCTURE LAYOUT OR SIZING. 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cottonwoods Connection Process Pipe, Valve, And Gate Schedule 40 06 20-1 END OF SECTION 3 TAG NO.VALVE TYPE OPERATOR TYPE SIZE (in.)CLASS SERVICE LOCATION SPECIFICATION MOV-9500 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE OPEN/CLOSE ELECTRIC 36 150 RW SLAR/CC-1 VAULT 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 36 150 RW CC-2 GRIT BASIN TIE IN 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 17+84 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 35+68 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 50+10 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 61+26 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 68+63 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 80+31 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 93+00 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 100+75 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 100+75 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 10 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 109+50 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 10 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 116+95 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT SLAR 126+50 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 8 150 RW CARV VAULT AT CC-1 244+33 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 6 150 RW CARV VAULT AT CC-2 307+05 40 05 64.10 DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVE HAND WHEEL 6 150 RW CARV VAULT AT CC-2 310+98 40 05 64.10 GATE VALVE HAND WHEEL 6 150 A-DR SLAR/CC-1 VAULT 40 05 61 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVE HAND WHEEL 6 150 A-DR SLAR/CC-1 VAULT 40 05 62 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 150 A-DR STA 40+75 BO VAULT 40 05 62 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 150 A-DR STA 71+10 BO VAULT 40 05 62 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 150 A-DR STA 107+88 BO VAULT 40 05 62 GATE VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 150 A-DR STA 40+75 BO VAULT 40 05 61 GATE VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 150 A-DR STA 71+10 BO VAULT 40 05 61 GATE VALVE SQ NUT OPERATOR 8 150 A-DR STA 107+88 BO VAULT 40 05 61 VALVE SCHEDULE (4-INCHES AND LARGER) NOTES. 1. ALL VALVES ARE FLANGED. 2. IF VALVE SUPPLIER CANNOT PROVIDE SPECIFIED VALVE, CONTRACTOR MAY PROVIDE NEXT LARGEST SIZE VALVE BUT SHALL REDUCE PIPING BACK TO SPECIFIED SIZE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. PIPING MODIFICATIONS TO ACCOMODATE LARGER VALVE SHALL BE INSTALLED SO AS TO NOT IMPACT THE VAULT STRUCTURE LAYOUT OR SIZING. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 13-1 SECTION 40 61 13 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide, through the services of an instrumentation and control system subcontractor, components, system installation services, as well as required and specified ancillary services in connection with the Instrumentation, Control and Information System. B. The System includes materials, labor, tools, fees, charges, and documentation required to furnish, install, test and place in operation a complete and operable instrumentation, control and information system. C. The system shall include measuring elements, signal converters, transmitters, local control panels, digital hardware and software, operator workstations, remote telemetry units, signal and data transmission systems, interconnecting wiring, and pertinent accessories. D. The scope of the work to be performed under this Division includes but is not limited to the following: 1. The Contractor shall retain overall responsibility for the instrumentation and control system as specified herein. 2. Furnish and install process instrumentation and associated taps and supports as scheduled or shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise noted or supplied by equipment vendors. 3. Furnish and install local control panels, field panels and associated cabinets and panels as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 4. Furnish and install digital control system hardware and software as specified in Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 5. Final termination and testing of instrumentation and control system signal wiring and power supply wiring at equipment furnished under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 6. Furnish, install and terminate special cables for devices (e.g., instruments). Furnish and terminate control system communication network cables. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 13-2 7. Furnish and install surge protection devices for digital equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation provided under this Division, including connections to grounding system(s) provided under Division 26. 8. Coordinate grounding requirements with the electrical subcontractor for digital equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation provided under this Division. Terminate grounding system cables at equipment provided under this Division. 9. Provide system testing, calibration, training and startup services as specified herein and as required to make systems fully operational. E. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to construct a complete and working installation. Items of equipment or materials that may reasonably be assumed as necessary to accomplish this end shall be supplied whether or not they are specifically stated herein. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Solid State: Wherever the term solid state is used to describe circuitry or components in the Specifications, it is intended that the circuitry or components shall be of the type that convey electrons by means of solid materials such as crystals or that work on magnetic principles such as ferrite cores. Vacuum tubes, gas tubes, slide wires, mechanical relays, stepping motors or other devices will not be considered as satisfying the requirements for solid state components of circuitry. 2. Bit or Data Bit: Whenever the terms bit or data bit are used in the Specification, it is intended that one bit shall be equivalent to one binary digit of information. In specifying data transmission rate, the bit rate or data bit rate shall be the number of binary digits transmitted per second and shall not necessarily be equal to either the maximum pulse rate or average pulse rate. 3. Integrated Circuit: Integrated circuit shall mean the physical realization of a number of circuit elements inseparably associated on or within a continuous body to perform the function of a circuit. 4. Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF): The MTBF shall be calculated by taking the number of system operating hours logged during an arbitrary period of not less than six months and dividing by the number of failures experienced during this period plus one. 5. Mean Time to Repair (MTTR): The MTTR shall be calculated by taking the total system down time for repair over an arbitrary period of not less than six months Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 13-3 coinciding with that used for calculation of MTBF and dividing by the number of failures causing down time during the period. 6. Availability: The availability of a non-redundant device or system shall be related to its MTBF and MTTR by the following formula: a. A = 100 x (MTBF / (MTBF + MTTR)) Percent 7. The availability of a device or system provided with an automatically switched backup device or system shall be determined by the following formula: a. A = A2 + 1 - ((1 - A1) * (1 - A1)) where: 1) A1 = availability of non-redundant device or system 2) A2 = availability of device or system provided with an automatically switched backup device or system 8. Abbreviations: Specification abbreviations include the following: a. A - Availability b. ADC - Analog to Digital Converter c. AI - Analog Input d. AO - Analog Output e. AVAIL - Available f. BCD - Binary Coded Decimal g. CSMA/CD - Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect h. CPU - Central Processing Unit i. CRC - Cyclic Redundancy Check j. CS - Control Strategy k. DAC - Digital to Analog Converter l. DBMS - Data Base Management System m. DI - Discrete Input n. DMA - Direct Memory Access Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 13-4 o. DO - Discrete Output p. DPDT - Double Pole, Double Throw q. DVE - Digital to Video Electronics r. EPROM - Erasable, Programmable Read Only Memory s. FDM - Frequency Division Multiplexing t. FSK - Frequency Shift Keyed u. HMI - Human Machine Interface (Software) v. I/O - Input/Output w. LAN - Network and Communication Equipment x. LCD - Liquid Crystal Display y. LDFW - Lead Follow z. L/L - Lead/Lag aa. MCC - Motor Control Center bb. MTBF - Mean Time Between Failures cc. MTTR - Mean Time to Repair dd. NVR - Network Video Recorder ee. OIT - Operator Interface Terminal (Hardware) ff. OS - Operating System gg. PAC - Programmable Automation Controller hh. PCB - Printed Circuit Board ii. PID - Proportional Integral and Derivative Control jj. PLC - Programmable Logic Controller or Programmable Controller kk. PMPC - Panel Mounted PC ll. PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory mm. RAM - Random Access Memory Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 13-5 nn. RDY - Ready oo. RMSS - Root Mean Square Summation pp. RUN - Running qq. ROM - Read Only Memory rr. RTU - Remote Telemetry Unit ss. SPDT - Single Pole, Double Throw tt. ST/SP - Start/Stop uu. TDM - Time Division Multiplexing vv. UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply ww. VFD - Variable Frequency Drive 9. To minimize the number of characters in words used in textual descriptions on displays, printouts and nameplates, abbreviations may be used subject to the Engineer's approval. If a specified abbreviation does not exist for a particular word, an abbreviation may be generated using the principles of masking and or vowel deletion. Masking involves retaining the first and last letters in a word and deleting one or more characters (usually vowels) from the interior of the word. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Where manufacturers are named for a particular item of equipment, it is intended as a guide to acceptable quality and performance and does not exempt such equipment from the requirements of these Specifications or Drawings. B. In order to centralize responsibility, it is required that equipment (including field instrumentation and control system hardware and software) offered under this Division shall be furnished and installed by the instrumentation subcontractor, or under the supervision of the instrumentation subcontractor, who shall assume complete responsibility for proper operation of the instrumentation and control system equipment, including that of coordinating signals, and furnishing appurtenant equipment. C. The Contractor shall retain total responsibility for the proper detailed design, fabrication, inspection, test, delivery, assembly, installation, activation, checkout, adjustment and operation of the entire instrumentation and control system as well as equipment and controls furnished under other Divisions of the Specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for the delivery of detailed drawings, manuals and other documentation required for the complete coordination, installation, activation and operation of mechanical equipment, equipment control panels, local control panels, field instrumentation, control systems and related equipment/systems and shall provide for Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 13-6 the services of a qualified installation engineer to supervise activities required to place the completed facility in stable operation under full digital control. D. The instrumentation and control system shall be capable of simultaneously implementing all real time control and information system functions, and servicing all operator service requests as specified, without degrading the data handling and processing capability of other system components. E. Control system inputs and outputs are listed in Section 40 61 93 – Process Control System Input/Output List. This information, together with the functional control descriptions, process and instrumentation diagrams, and electrical control schematics, describes the real time monitoring and control functions to be performed. In addition, the system shall provide various human/machine interface and data reporting functions as specified in the software sections of this Specification. F. The mechanical, process, and electrical drawings indicate the approximate locations of field instruments, control panels, systems and equipment as well as field mounted equipment provided by others. The instrumentation subcontractor shall examine the mechanical, process and electrical drawings to determine actual size and locations of process connections and wiring requirements for instrumentation and controls furnished under this Contract. The instrumentation subcontractor shall inspect equipment, panels, instrumentation, controls, and appurtenances, either existing or furnished on the Project to determine requirements for interfacing with the control and information system. The Contractor shall coordinate the completion of required modifications with the associated supplier of the item furnished. G. The instrumentation subcontractor shall review and approve the size and routing of instrumentation and control cable and conduit systems furnished by the electrical subcontractor for suitability for use with the associated cable system. H. The Contractor shall coordinate the efforts of each supplier to aid in interfacing systems. This effort shall include, but shall not be limited to, the distribution of approved shop drawings to the electrical subcontractor and to the instrumentation subcontractor furnishing the equipment under this Division. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a signal transmission system free from electrical interference that would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the instrumentation and control system equipment. J. The Owner shall have the right of access to the subcontractor's facility and the facilities of his equipment suppliers to observe materials and parts; witness inspections, tests and work in progress; and examine applicable design documents, records, and certifications during all stages of design, fabrication, and tests. The instrumentation subcontractor and his equipment suppliers shall furnish office space, supplies, and services required for these observation activities. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 13-7 K. The terms "Instrumentation," "Instrumentation and Control System," and "Instrumentation, Control and Information System" shall hereinafter be defined as equipment, labor, services, and documents necessary to meet the intent of the Specifications. L. Field mounted switches, torque switches, limit switches, gauges, valve and gate operator position transmitters, sump pump controls, and other instrumentation and controls furnished with mechanical or electrical equipment not listed in the instrument schedule shall be furnished, installed, tested, and calibrated as specified under other Divisions unless otherwise indicated. M. Additional and related work performed under Division 26 includes the following: 1. Instrument AC power source and disconnect switch for process instrumentation, AC grounding systems, and AC power supplies for equipment, control panels and accessories furnished under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 2. Conduit and raceways for instrumentation and control system signal wiring, grounding systems, special cables and communication network cables. 3. Instrumentation and control system signal wiring. 4. Install control system communication network cables. 5. Furnish and install grounding systems for digital equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation provided under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. Grounding systems shall be complete to the equipment provided under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive, and where included, ready for termination by the instrumentation subcontractor. 6. Termination of instrumentation and control system signal wiring at equipment furnished under other Divisions of the Specifications. 7. Final wiring and termination to A.C. grounding systems and to A.C. power sources (e.g., panelboards, motor control centers, and other sources of electrical power). 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Instrumentation equipment and enclosures shall be suitable for ambient conditions specified. All system elements shall operate properly in the presence of telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment. B. Inside control rooms and climate-controlled electrical rooms, the temperature will normally be 20 to 25 degrees C; relative humidity 40 to 80 percent without condensation and the air will be essentially free of corrosive contaminants and moisture. Appropriate air filtering shall be provided to meet environmental conditions (e.g., dust). Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 13-8 C. Other indoor areas may not be air conditioned/heated; temperatures may range between 0 and 40 degrees C with relative humidity between 40 and 95 percent. D. Field equipment including instrumentation and panels may be subjected to wind, rain, lightning, and corrosives in the environment, with ambient temperatures from -20 to 40 degrees C and relative humidity from 10 to 100 percent. All supports, brackets, interconnecting hardware, and fasteners shall be aluminum, type 316 stainless steel, or metal alloy as otherwise suitable for chemical resistance within chemical feed/storage areas shown on the installation detail drawings. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Payment to the Contractor for Control and Information System materials, equipment, and labor shall be in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions. The schedule of values submitted as required by the General and Supplementary Conditions shall reflect a breakdown of the work required for completion of the Control and Information System. The breakdown shall include sufficient detail to permit the Engineer to administer payment for the Control and Information System. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final acceptance of the Instrumentation, Control and Information System will be determined complete by the Engineer, and shall be based upon the following: 1. Receipt of acceptable start up completion and availability reports and other documentation as required by the Contract Documents. 2. Completion of the Availability Demonstration. 3. Completion of control system training requirements. 4. Completion of punch-list items that are significant in the opinion of the Engineer. B. Final acceptance of the System shall mark the beginning of the warranty period. 3.02 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 13-9 B. Upon completion of the instrumentation and control work, the Contractor shall remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that has accumulated during the construction work. The entire area shall be left neat, clean, and acceptable to the Owner. 3.03 TESTING A. Refer to Specification 40 61 21 for testing requirements. 3.04 TRAINING A. Refer to Specification 40 61 26 for training requirements. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-1 SECTION 40 61 15 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall submit for review complete Shop Drawings for all equipment in accordance with the General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 01 of the Specifications. All submittal material shall be complete, legible, and reproducible, and shall apply specifically to this project. B. All submittal materials shall be tailored to this project by highlighting relevant items or crossing out non-applicable items. Generic submittals without identified options will be returned the Contractor without review. C. Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) Letter: 1. Where a named manufacturer and product is specified and a substitution or an “or equal” product is submitted, the submittal shall be accompanied by a “Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter.” If the required submittal is submitted without the letter, the submittal will be rejected. 2. The letter shall include all comments, deviations and exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by the Contractor, subcontractor (if applicable), and the equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. This letter shall include a copy of the Specification Section to which the submittal pertains. In the left margin beside each and every paragraph/item, a letter "C", "D", or "E" shall be typed or written in. a. The letter "C" shall be for full compliance with the requirement. b. The letter "D" shall be for a deviation from the requirement. c. The letter "E" shall be for taking exception to a requirement. 3. Any requirements with the letter "D" or "E" beside them shall be provided with a full typewritten explanation of the deviation/exception. Handwritten explanation of the deviations/exceptions shall not be acceptable. 4. The CD&E letter shall also address deviations, and exceptions taken to each Drawing related to this Specification Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions 02 0 1 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-2 1.3 EXISTING CONDITIONS / AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL A. Prior to modifying, demolishing, removing, or decommissioning equipment, thoroughly investigate and document the existing conditions. Please note that Owner’s record drawings alone are not sufficient for documentation. The record drawings, if present, shall be verified in the field prior to submitting. Submit drawings, markup, sketches, information, or other materials for documenting the following existing conditions: 1. All I/O on PLC modules that have its wiring modified or new I/O terminated or for any PLC that is being decommissioned/removed/demolished. Document module number, point number, wire numbers, terminal numbers, destination, and function. 2. All wiring entering or leaving a PLC that is being decommissioned, removed, or demolished that is not otherwise accounted for. B. When all information has been gathered, it shall be submitted to Engineer along with a clear and unequivocal statement that the existing conditions have been documented and understood. Contractor shall be held responsible for all issues that arise due to Contractor’s modifications, demolition, removal, or decommissioning of existing equipment, including necessary reversion back to previous conditions. 1.4 DIGITAL HARDWARE SUBMITTALS A. Submit system block diagram(s) showing: 1. All equipment to be provided. 2. All interconnecting cable. 3. Equipment names, manufacturer, and model numbers. 4. Equipment locations. B. Submit information for all digital equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Bill of materials with equipment names, manufacturers, complete model numbers and locations. 2. Catalog cuts, including complete part number breakdown information. 3. Complete technical, material and environmental specifications. 4. Assembly drawings. 5. Mounting requirements. 6. Color samples. 7. Nameplates. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-3 8. Environmental requirements during storage and operation. 1.5 SOFTWARE SUBMITTALS A. Software submittals shall include the following as a minimum: 1. Bill of materials with software names, vendors, and complete listings of included software modules. 2. Standard manufacturer's literature describing the products. 3. Description of function of software in Control and Information System. 4. Limitations or constraints of software. 5. Minimum system (processor and memory) requirements. 6. Operation and maintenance requirements. B. Submit information on the following software: 1. Third-party software, including: a. Operating system. b. Operator workstation (SCADA or HMI) software, including all add-in software provided to perform specific functions (alarm dialers, schedulers, backup creation software, etc.). c. Office-type products, such as spreadsheets, word processors, etc. d. Database management software. e. Communication software, including all applicable local and wide area network software. f. Programmable controller programming software (where applicable). 2. Software configuration, including: a. Graphic display organization. b. Database configuration for operator workstations and database management system. c. Trends. d. System security. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-4 e. Formats for all reports, including all required calculations. f. Intercommunications between software products required to implement system functions. g. Equipment backup configuration and requirements. C. Control Strategies 1. Description of automatic logic and all non-standard manual logic using plain English, for non-technical persons, and written in Contractor’s own words. The write-up shall include references to associated I/O, tag/loop numbers, alarming/interlocks. 2. Submitting language verbatim to Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions shall not be acceptable. D. Application Software 1. Provide application software documentation that contains program descriptions for the operation, modification, and maintenance of all application programs provided for the digital system. 2. Application software includes all custom routines developed specifically for this project, or pre-written routines used for accomplishing specified functions for this project. This shall include any add-in custom software. E. Graphic Displays 1. Submit all graphic displays required to perform the control and operator interface functions specified herein. Submitted graphic displays shall be for both new and modified graphics. 2. Submit the complete set of graphic displays for review by the Owner and the Engineer at least 60 days prior to commencement of factory testing. 3. Where a large number of graphic displays are required, submit an initial set of example displays for review before the complete set of displays is submitted. This initial set shall include examples of all basic graphic display design features and parameters and is intended to allow the Contractor to obtain preliminary approval of these features and parameters prior to beginning main graphic display production. 4. The Contractor shall allow for one major cycle of revisions to the displays prior to factory testing and one minor cycle of revisions following factory test. A cycle of revisions shall be defined as all revisions necessary to complete a single set of changes marked by the Engineer and the Owner. Additional corrections shall be Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-5 performed during start-up as required to accommodate changes required by actual field conditions, at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. The required submittals in each revision cycle shall be full color prints of the entire set of displays. 6. Displays shall be printouts of actual process graphics implemented in the system. 1.6 CONTROL PANEL SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided for all control panels, and shall include: 1. Exterior panel drawings with front and side views, to scale. 2. Interior layout drawings showing the locations and sizes of all equipment and wiring mounted within the cabinet, to scale. 3. Panel area reserved for cable access and conduit entry. 4. Location plans showing each panel in its assigned location. B. Submit information for all exterior and interior panel mounted equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Bill of materials with equipment names, manufacturers, complete model numbers and locations. 2. Catalog cuts, including complete part number breakdown information. 3. Complete technical, material and environmental specifications. 4. Assembly drawings. 5. Mounting requirements. 6. Color samples. 7. Nameplates. 8. Environmental requirements during storage and operation. C. Submit panel wiring diagrams showing power, signal, and control wiring, including surge protection, relays, courtesy receptacles, lighting, wire size and color coding, etc. 1.7 INSTRUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Submit information on all field instruments, including but not limited to the following: 1. Product (item) name and tag number used herein and on the Contract Drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-6 2. Catalog cuts, including complete part number breakdown information. 3. Manufacturer's complete model number. 4. Location of the device. 5. Input output characteristics. 6. Range, size, and graduations. 7. Physical size with dimensions, NEMA enclosure classification, and mounting details. 8. Communication protocols supported and what is provided where applicable. 9. Materials of construction of all enclosures, wetted parts and major components. 10. Instrument or control device sizing calculations where applicable. 11. Certified calibration data on all flow metering devices. 12. Environmental requirements during storage and operation. 13. Associated surge protection devices. 14. Installation drawings/details. B. Instrument submittals shall be provided in compliance with requirements and layout per ISA TR20 Specification Forms. 1.8 WIRING AND LOOP DIAGRAMS A. Submit interconnection wiring and loop diagrams for all panels and signals in the Control and Information System. B. Electrical interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, including terminations to equipment and controls furnished under other Divisions, complete with equipment and cable designations. Where applicable, interconnection wiring diagrams shall be organized by input/output card. Interconnecting diagrams shall be prepared in a neat and legible manner on 11 X 17-inch reproducible prints. C. Loop drawings shall conform to the latest version of ISA Standards and Recommended Practices for Instrumentation and Control. Loop Drawings shall conform to ISA S5.4, Figures 1-3, Minimum Required Items [Figures 4-6, Minimum Required Items plus Optional Items]. D. Loop drawings shall not be required as a separate document provided that the interconnecting wiring diagrams required in Paragraph B., above, contain all information required by ISA 5.4. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-7 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall deliver equipment operation and maintenance manuals in compliance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals shall consist of two basic parts: 1. Manufacturer standard O&M manuals for all equipment and software furnished under this Division. 2. Custom O&M information describing the specific configuration of equipment and software, and the operation and maintenance requirements for this particular project. B. The manuals shall contain all illustrations, detailed drawings, wiring diagrams, and instructions necessary for installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment. The illustrated parts shall be numbered for identification. All modifications to manufacturer standard equipment and/or components shall be clearly identified and shown on the drawings and schematics. All information contained therein shall apply specifically to the equipment furnished and shall only include instructions that are applicable. All such illustrations shall be incorporated within the printing of the page to form a durable and permanent reference book. C. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventive maintenance schedules. The instructions shall be bound in locking 3-D-ring binders with bindings no larger than 3.5 inches. The manuals shall include 15% spare space for the addition of future material. The instructions shall include drawings reduced or folded and shall provide the following as a minimum. 1. A comprehensive index. 2. A functional description of the entire system, with references to drawings and instructions. 3. A complete "as built" set of all approved shop drawings, which shall reflect all work required to achieve final system acceptance. 4. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges, and pertinent data. 5. Full specifications on each item. 6. Detailed service, maintenance, and operation instructions for each item supplied. 7. Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined, along with special calibration and test procedures. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-8 8. Complete parts lists with stock numbers and name, address, and telephone number of the local supplier. 9. References to manufacturers' standard literature where applicable. 10. Warning notes shall be located throughout the manual where such notes are required to prevent accidents or inadvertent misuse of equipment. D. The operating instructions shall clearly describe the step-by-step procedures that must be followed to implement all phases of all operating modes. The instructions shall be in terms understandable and usable by operating personnel and maintenance crews and shall be useful in the training of such personnel. E. The maintenance instructions shall describe the detailed preventive and corrective procedures required, including environmental requirements during equipment storage and system operation, to keep the System in good operating condition. All hardware maintenance documentation shall make reference to appropriate diagnostics, where applicable, and all necessary wiring diagrams, component drawings and PCB schematic drawings shall be included. F. The hardware maintenance documentation shall include, as a minimum, the following information: 1. Operation Information: This information shall include a detailed description of how the equipment operates and a block diagram illustrating each major assembly in the equipment. 2. Preventive Maintenance Instructions: These instructions shall include all applicable visual examinations, hardware testing and diagnostic routines, and the adjustments necessary for periodic preventive maintenance of the System. 3. Corrective Maintenance Instructions: These instructions shall include guides for locating malfunctions down to the card replacement level. These guides shall include adequate details for quickly and efficiently locating the cause of an equipment malfunction and shall state the probable source(s) of trouble, the symptoms, probable cause, and instructions for remedying the malfunction. 4. Parts Information: This information shall include the identification of each replaceable or field repairable component. All parts shall be identified on a list in a drawing; the identification shall be of a level of detail sufficient for procuring any repairable or replaceable part. Cross references between equipment numbers and manufacturer's part numbers shall be provided. G. Software documentation shall conform to a standard format and shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. A program abstract that includes: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-9 a. Program Name - The symbolic alphanumeric program name. b. Program Title - English text identification. c. Program Synopsis - A brief text shall be provided that specifies the need for the program, states when it shall be used and functionally describes all inputs, outputs and functions performed. This descriptive text shall be written in a language that is understandable by non-programming-oriented readers. 2. A program description that shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Applicable Documents - List all documents (standard manufacturer's literature, other program descriptions, etc.) by section, if practical, that apply to the program. One complete copy of all applicable reference material shall be provided. b. Input/Output - Identify each input and output parameter, variable, and software element used by the program. State the purpose of all inputs, outputs, and variables. c. Processing - This section shall contain a description of the overall structure and function of the program. Describe the program run stream and present a detailed description of how the program operates. Describe the timing and sequencing of operations of the program relative to other programs. Describe all interactions with other programs. Processing logic that is not readily described without considerable background information shall be handled as a special topic with references to an appendix or to control strategy document that details the necessary information. Reference shall also be made to an appendix or control strategy document for equation and program algorithm derivations. d. System Configuration - Describe in detail the system configuration or status required for program implementation, if appropriate. e. Limitations and Constraints - Summarize all known or anticipated limitations of the program, if appropriate. f. Storage - Define program storage requirements in terms of disk or RAM memory allocation. g. Verification - Describe, as a minimum, a test that can be used by the operator to ensure proper program operation. Define the required system configuration, input requirements and criteria for successful test completion. h. Diagnostics - Describe all program diagnostics, where applicable. Descriptions shall list each error statement, indicate clearly what it means, and specify what appropriate actions should be taken. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-10 i. Malfunction Procedures - Specify procedures to follow for recovering from a malfunction due to either operator error or other sources. 1.10 FINAL SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION A. All documentation shall be delivered to the Owner prior to final system acceptance in accordance with the Contract Documents. As a minimum, final documentation shall contain all information originally part of the control system submittals. B. Provide a complete set of detailed electrical interconnection diagrams required to define the complete instrumentation and control system. All diagrams shall be 11 x 17-inch original reproducible prints. All diagrams shall be corrected to describe final "as built" hardware configurations and to reflect the system configuration and control methodology adopted to achieve final system acceptance. C. Provide system software documentation for the operation and maintenance of all system software programs provided as a part of the digital system. All system software documentation shall be amended as required to delineate all modifications and to accurately reflect the final as-built software configurations. D. Provide application software documentation that contains program descriptions for the operation, modification, and maintenance of all application programs provided for the digital system. E. Provide control strategy documentation which shall include control strategy (block oriented or ladder logic) diagrams to describe the control of all processes. Control strategy documentation shall reflect the system configuration and control methodology adopted to achieve final system acceptance. Control strategy documentation shall conform to the submittal requirements listed hereinabove. F. O&M documentation shall be amended with all final, adjusted values for all setpoints and other operating parameters for Owner reference. G. The Owner recognizes the fact that not all possible problems related to real time events, software interlocks, and hardware maintenance and utilization can be discovered during the Acceptance Tests. Therefore, the instrumentation subcontractor through the Contractor shall investigate, diagnose, repair, update, and distribute all pertaining documentation of the deficiencies that become evident during the warranty period. All such documentation shall be submitted in writing to the Owner within 30 days of identifying and solving the problem. 1.11 PROGRAMS AND SOURCE LISTINGS A. Provide one copy of all standard, off-the-shelf system and application software (exclusive of firmware resident software) on original media furnished by the software manufacturer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Submittals Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 15-11 B. Provide one copy of source listings on digital media, acceptable to Engineer, for all custom software/logic written specifically for this facility, all database files configured for this facility, and all control strategies. All source listings shall include a program abstract, program linkage and input/output data. Comments describing the program flow shall be frequently interspersed throughout each listing. C. All software/logic shall be in both its native format and in Adobe Portable Document Format. 1.12 SUBMITTAL/DOCUMENTATION FORMAT A. All drawing-type submittals and documentation shall be rendered and submitted in the latest version of AutoCAD. B. All textual-type submittals and documentation shall be rendered and submitted in the latest version of Microsoft Word or in searchable Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). Raster scans will not be accepted. 1.13 ELECTRONIC O&M MANUALS A. Subject to acceptance by the Engineer, the O&M information may be submitted in part or in whole in an electronic format on digital media. B. Electronic O&M manuals shall contain information in standard formats (searchable Adobe PDF, Word, AutoCAD, HTML, etc.) and shall be easily accessible using standard, “off-the-shelf” software such as an Internet browser. Raster scans will not be accepted. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Testing Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21-1 SECTION 40 61 21 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall test the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21.71 – Factory Witness Test C. Section 40 61 21.72 – Field Testing D. Section 40 61 21.73 – Final Acceptance Test 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For each of the specified tests, submit a test plan to the Engineer at least one month in advance of commencement of the tests. The test plan shall contain the following at a minimum: 1. A schedule of all testing to be conducted. 2. A brief description of the testing to be performed 3. Test objectives. 4. Testing criteria per the Specifications. 5. Checklists and procedures for performing each of the specified tests. 6. Sample test result documentation. 7. Requirements for other parties. 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All system startup and test activities shall follow detailed test procedures; checklists, etc., previously approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be notified at least 21 days in advance of any system tests and reserves the right to have his and/or the Owner's representatives in attendance. 11 - 1 6 - 2 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Testing Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21-2 B. The Contractor shall provide the services of experienced factory trained technicians, tools and equipment to field calibrate, test, inspect, and adjust all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. C. The Contractor (or designee) shall maintain master logbooks for each phase of installation, startup and testing activities specified herein. Each logbook shall include signal, loop or control strategy tag number, equipment identification, description and space for signoff dates, Contractor signature and Engineer signature. Example test documentation specific to each phase of testing shall be approved prior to initiation of that testing, as specified hereinabove. D. All test data shall be recorded on test forms, previously approved by the Engineer. When each test has been successfully completed, a certified copy of all test results shall be furnished to the Engineer together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all specified test requirements have been met and that the system is operating in accordance with the Contract Documents. E. The Engineer will review test documentation in accordance with the Contract Documents and will give written notice of the acceptability of the tests within 10 days of receipt of the test results. F. All testing shall include time for unstructured testing where Owner and Engineer shall have access to the equipment for testing previously undefined normal and abnormal aspects, situations, and functions. Contractor or his/her designee shall provide assistance during this time, including but not limited to documenting the unstructured testing. Owner’s and Engineer’s unstructured testing scenarios may not be available prior to the testing period. G. If, in the Engineer’s or Owner’s opinion, Contractor is not ready for witness testing and Engineer is present, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for Engineer’s labor to attend the test. Witness testing shall then be rescheduled, with sufficient notice. In the event that Engineer has traveled, even if only to the project-site, for the testing, Engineer’s travel costs shall also be reimbursed. In the event that the Owner has traveled for the testing, Owner’s travel costs shall also be reimbursed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Factory Witness Test Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21.71-1 SECTION 40 61 21.71 FACTORY WITNESS TEST PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform a Factory Witness Test on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21 – Process Control System Testing C. Section 40 61 21.72 – Field Testing D. Section 40 61 21.73 – Final Acceptance Test 1.03 FACTORY WITNESS TEST A. The Control and Information System equipment shall not be shipped until the Contractor receives notice of acceptability of the factory tests. B. Each item of equipment shall be fully factory inspected, calibrated and tested for function, operation and continuity of circuits. Exceptions shall be approved in writing by the Engineer. C. Each subsystem shall be fully factory tested for function and operation. D. System performance shall be tested using a fully integrated system, including all software and hardware. To achieve this, the entire control system, including all peripheral devices and all interconnecting cables (field instruments are not included in this requirement), shall be assembled on the factory test floor and the complete operational program loaded and simulated inputs applied. E. All hardware and software required to perform the specified testing shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. F. The instrumentation subcontractor shall perform a 100-hour full system test, during which the entire system shall operate continuously without failure in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If a system component fails during the test, the 100-hour test period shall be restarted after its operation is restored. G. The factory testing shall demonstrate all aspects of system sizing and timing including: 02 0 1 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Factory Witness Test Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21.71-2 1. Monitoring and control scan times at the PLC level. 2. Response times at the operator workstation level. H. The overall system as well as individual component hardware shall be tested under conditions of power failure to ensure proper response as specified herein. I. Operator Workstation Operation: This demonstration shall provide proof of system operation on an individual subsystem basis first, and then in the expected operating environment. Both normal and abnormal operating modes shall be demonstrated. Operator workstation testing shall include the following: 1. Demonstrate proper operation, under both normal and abnormal conditions of the operator workstation application software (SCADA, remote alarm dial-up, etc.). This shall include demonstration of system online diagnostics, failover features, reconfiguration operations, system initialization and restart, software fault tolerance, error detection and recovery, communications, and all additional features necessary to ensure the successful operation of the system. 2. Demonstrate the standard features of the system. This shall include proof of operation of the process control database generator, the display generator, data storage and retrieval functions, data acquisition and control, trending functions, and reporting functions. 3. Demonstrate the configuration of the system to verify conformance with the Contract Documents. This shall include graphic displays and vectoring, operator interface functions, trending, reports, alarm management, security system configuration, etc. 4. The system shall be operated with data input/output with the PLCs and associated panels to prove operation of all workstation functions. 5. The testing in Items 2 and 3 above may be performed concurrently (i.e., the standard and configured features of the system may be demonstrated simultaneously). J. PLC Operation: All functions comparable to those demonstrated for the operator workstations shall be demonstrated on the PLCs. This shall include the following: 1. On-line and off-line diagnostics. 2. For redundant units, fail-over operation and reconfiguration. 3. System initialization and restart. 4. Network communications, including fieldbus communications, where required. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Factory Witness Test Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21.71-3 5. Non-volatility of memory. 6. Operation of all control logic shall be demonstrated as described herein. K. Process I/O Simulation: Process input/output simulation for PLCs shall be performed with a manual simulation control panel, a separate programmable logic controller, network-based simulation software, analog signal generators, and/or jumpering of discrete signals between outputs and associated inputs, or some combination of these. Alternate process I/O systems such as plugin circuit cards or I/O test modules may be utilized subject to approval by the Engineer to provide the specified simulation functions. The simulation system shall provide analog and discrete I/O hardware devices in sufficient quantity to allow complete and thorough testing of the control strategies and functions of the system. The process I/O simulation system shall be used in several ways as follows: 1. To provide a means of communications checkout from the operator workstations through the various levels of software in the PLCs and to the process, i.e., the simulation panel. Likewise, a discrete or analog input shall be initiated from the simulation panel and the result monitored at the workstations. 2. Alarm response to discrete status changes or analog value limits shall be verified. Database entries or attributes such as engineering units and conversion equations shall be verified by varying analog inputs. 3. To provide data for use at all levels of the control system at the time of system integration. L. Control Strategy Testing: Provision shall be made to test all control strategies to prove the integrity of each strategy and the process control language in which it is implemented. For each control strategy, all functions shall be tested individually (where possible) and collectively to verify that the control strategy performs as described herein and as required for overall functionality within the control system. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Field Testing Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21.72-1 SECTION 40 61 21.72 FIELD TESTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform field testing on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21 – Process Control System Testing C. Section 40 61 21.71 – Factory Witness Test D. Section 40 61 21.73 – Final Acceptance Test E. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Control system startup and testing shall be performed to ensure that all plant processes shall be systematically and safely placed under digital control in the following order: 1. Primary elements such as transmitters and switch devices shall be calibrated and tested as specified in Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems. 2. Each final control element shall be individually tested as specified hereinafter. 3. Each control loop shall be tested as specified hereinafter. 4. Each control strategy shall be tested under automatic digital control as specified hereinafter. 5. The entire control system shall be tested for overall monitoring, control, communication, and information management functions and demonstrated for system availability as specified hereinafter. B. System startup and test activities shall include the use of water, if necessary, to establish service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal operating conditions in terms of applied process loads, operating ranges and environmental conditions. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Field Testing Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21.72-2 C. Each phase of testing shall be fully and successfully completed and all associated documentation submitted and approved prior to the next phase being started. Specific exceptions are allowed if written approval has been obtained in advance from the Engineer. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall ensure that all mechanical equipment, equipment control panels, local control panels, field instrumentation, control system equipment and related equipment and/or systems are tested for proper installation, adjusted and calibrated on a loop-by-loop basis prior to control system startup to verify that each is ready to function as specified. Each test shall be witnessed, dated and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of meetings with all affected trades. A meeting shall be held each morning to review the day's test schedule with all affected trades. Similarly, a meeting shall be held each evening to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule as appropriate. C. The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical subcontractor conforms to the startup, test and signoff procedures specified herein to assure proper function and coordination of all motor control center control and interlock circuitry and the transmission of all discrete and/or analog signals between equipment furnished by the electrical subcontractor and the control system specified herein. 1.05 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT TESTING A. The proper control of all final control elements shall be verified by tests conducted in accordance with the requirements specified herein. B. All modulating final control elements shall be tested for appropriate speed or position response by applying power and input demand signals and observing the equipment for proper direction and level of reaction. Each final control element shall be tested at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of signal input level and the results checked against specified accuracy tolerances. Final control elements, such as VFDs, that require turndown limits shall be initially set during this test. C. All non-modulating final control elements shall be tested for appropriate position response by applying and simulating control signals and observing the equipment for proper reaction. 1.06 LOOP CHECKOUT A. Prior to control system startup and testing, each monitoring and control loop shall be tested on an individual basis from the primary element to the final element, including the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Field Testing Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21.72-3 operator workstation or loop controller level, for continuity and for proper operation and calibration. B. Loop sheets will be available for use in testing and verified as correct. C. Signals from transducers, sensors, and transmitters shall be utilized to verify control responses. Simulated input data signals may be used subject to prior written approval by the Engineer. All modes of control shall be exercised and checked for proper operation. D. The accuracy of all DACs shall be verified by manually entering engineering unit data values at the operator workstation and then reading and recording the resulting analog output data. E. The accuracy of all ADCs shall be verified using field inputs or by manually applying input signals at the final controller, and then reading and recording the resulting analog input data at the operator workstation. F. Each loop tested shall be witnessed, dated and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. 1.07 CONTROL SYSTEM STARTUP AND TESTING A. Control system startup and testing shall be performed to demonstrate complete compliance with all specified functional and operational requirements. Testing activities shall include the simulation of both normal and abnormal operating conditions. B. All digital hardware shall be fully inspected and tested for function, operation and continuity of circuits. All diagnostic programs shall be run to verify the proper operation of all digital equipment. C. Final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested under startup and steady- state operating conditions to verify that proper and stable control is achieved using local area control panels, motor control center circuits, and local field mounted control circuits. All hardwired control circuit interlocks and alarms shall be operational. The control to final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested using both manual and automatic (where provided) control circuits. D. Signals from transducers, sensors, and transmitters shall be utilized to verify control responses for final control elements. Simulated input data signals may be used subject to prior written approval by the Engineer. E. Each control strategy shall be tested to verify the proper operation of all required functions. The control system start-up and test activities shall include procedures for tuning all control loops incorporating PID control modules, and for adjusting and testing all control loops as required to verify specified performance. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Field Testing Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21.72-4 F. The control system startup and test activities shall include running tests to prove that the Instrumentation, Control and Information System is capable of continuously, safely and reliably regulating processes, as required by the Contract, under service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal plant operating ranges and environmental conditions. G. A witnessed functional acceptance test shall be performed to demonstrate satisfactory performance of individual monitoring and control loops and control strategies. At least one test shall be performed to verify that the control and instrumentation system is capable of simultaneously implementing all specified operations. H. Each loop and control strategy test shall be witnessed and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. 1.08 FACILITY STARTUP COORDINATION A. Facility startup shall comply with requirements specified in the Contract Documents and those requirements specified herein. Facility startup shall commence after all previously described startup and test activities have been successfully completed and shall demonstrate that the Instrumentation, Control and Information System can meet all Contract requirements with equipment operating over full operating ranges under actual operating conditions. B. The control system start-up period shall be coordinated with process startup activities and shall be extended as required until all plant processes are fully operational and to satisfy the Engineer that all control system Contract requirements have been fulfilled in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. The instrumentation subcontractor's personnel shall be resident at the facility to provide both full time (eight hours/day, five days/week) and 24 hours on call (seven days/week) support of operating and maintenance activities for the duration of the start-up period. D. At least one qualified control systems technician shall be provided for control system startup and test activities and at least two when loop checkout is being performed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Acceptance Test Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21.73-1 SECTION 40 61 21.73 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform the Final Acceptance Test on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21 – Process Control System Testing C. Section 40 61 21.71 – Factory Witness Test D. Section 40 61 21.72 – Field Testing 1.03 AVAILABILITY DEMONSTRATION AND FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. Upon completion of all control system startup activities and prior to final system acceptance, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the availability of the entire control system, including operation under conditions of digital equipment fail-over, initiated either automatically or manually, shall be not less than 99.8 percent during a 30-day availability test period. The Owner shall be given two (2) weeks’ notice of the starting date of the 30-day availability test. B. For purposes of determining availability figures, downtime of each system or portions of each system resulting from the causes specified hereunder will not be considered system failures. 1. Downtime of any network-connected device that is automatically backed-up upon failure shall not be considered a system failure provided that the downtime of the failed component does not exceed 24 hours. 2. Downtime of a PLC that is not automatically backed-up shall be considered a system failure if the downtime of the failed controller exceeds one (1) hour. 3. Downtime of a portion of the system resulting from failure of any field sensor shall not be considered a system failure provided that the system operates as specified under this condition. 4. Downtime of the following devices shall not be considered a system failure provided the failed device is repaired within the specified time: 02 0 1 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Final Acceptance Test Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 21.73-2 a. Communication interfaces (eight hours) b. Process control system networks (eight hours) c. UPS unit (one day) 5. Total shutdown of a single PLC resulting from a software fault shall be considered a system failure. 6. An erroneous command to the process that can be specifically related to a software fault shall be considered as one (1) hour of downtime. 7. The inoperability of any subsystem resulting from a software fault shall be considered a system failure. 8. The failure of the same component more than one time during the 30-day test shall be considered a system failure. C. If the system fails the 30-day availability test, the 30-day test period shall be restarted after the failed component or software is repaired/replaced and full operation is restored. The system shall be demonstrated for the full 30-day period following the restart. D. The Contractor shall submit an availability demonstration report that shall state that all system availability requirements have been met. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Signal Coordination Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 23-1 SECTION 40 61 23 SIGNAL COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall conform to the signal coordination requirements specified herein. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating signal types and transmission requirements between the various parties providing equipment under this Contract. This shall include, but not be limited to, distribution of appropriate shop drawings among the equipment suppliers, the electrical subcontractor, the HVAC subcontractor, and the instrumentation subcontractor. C. Analog signals shall be signals for transmitting process variables, etc. from instruments and to and from panels, equipment PLCs and Control System PLCs. D. Discrete signals shall consist of contact closures or powered signals for transmitting status/alarm information and control commands between starters, panels, equipment PLCs, the Control System, etc. 1.02 ANALOG SIGNAL TRANSMISSION A. Signal transmission between electric or electronic instruments, controllers, and all equipment and control devices shall be individually isolated, linear 4-20 milliamperes (mA) and shall operate at 24 VDC. B. Signal output from all transmitters and controllers shall be current regulated and shall not be affected by changes in load resistance within the unit's rating. C. All cable shields shall be grounded at one end only, at the control panel, with terminals bonded to the panel ground bus. D. Analog signal isolation and/or conversion shall be provided where necessary to interface with instrumentation, equipment controls, panels, and appurtenances. E. Non-standard transmission systems such as pulse duration, pulse rate, and voltage regulated shall not be permitted except where specifically noted in the Contract Documents. Where transmitters with nonstandard outputs do occur, their outputs shall be converted to an isolated, linear, 4-20 milliampere (mA)- signal. F. The Contractor shall provide 24 VDC power supplies for analog signals and instruments where applicable and as required inside panels, controls, etc. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Signal Coordination Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 23-2 G. Where two-wire instruments transmit directly to the Control System, the instrumentation subcontractor shall provide power supplies at the PLC-equipped control panels for those instruments. H. Where four-wire instruments with on-board loop power supplies transmit directly to the Control and Information System, the instrumentation subcontractor shall provide necessary signal isolators or shall otherwise isolate the input from the Control System loop power supply. Similar provisions shall be made when a third element such as a recorder, indicator, or single loop controller with integral loop power supply is included in the loop. 1.03 DISCRETE INPUTS A. All discrete inputs to equipment and Control System PLCs, from field devices, starters, panels, etc., shall be unpowered (dry) contacts in the field device or equipment, powered from the PLCs, unless specified otherwise. B. Sensing power (wetting voltage) supplied by the PLC shall be 24 VDC or 120VAC as required by the field device. 1.04 DISCRETE OUTPUTS A. All discrete outputs from local control panels and Control System PLCs to field devices, starters, panels, etc., shall be 24 VDC powered (sourced) from PLCs. B. PLC powered discrete outputs shall energize 24 VDC pilot relay coils (interposing relays) in the same panel as the PLC. C. Field devices, starters, panels, motor operated valves, etc., to supply wetting voltage. D. Labeling at interposing relay to indicate “Foreign Voltage May Be Present”. 1.05 OTHER DISCRETE SIGNALS A. Where applicable, warning signs shall be affixed inside the starter, panel, etc. stating that the panel is energized from multiple sources. B. Output contacts in the starter, panel, etc., that are powered from other locations shall be provided with special tags and/or color-coding. Disconnecting terminal strips shall be provided for such contacts. C. The above requirements shall apply to all starters and panels, regardless of supplier. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Signal Coordination Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 23-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Quality Assurance Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 24-1 SECTION 40 61 24 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. It is the intent of these Specifications and Drawings to secure high quality in materials, equipment and workmanship in order to facilitate operations and maintenance of the facility. The Contractor shall provide equipment and services to meet this intent. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. All Work shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code, OSHA, State/Commonwealth, local and other applicable codes. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE - GENERAL A. All equipment and materials shall be new and the products of reputable recognized suppliers having adequate experience in the manufacture of these particular items. B. For uniformity, only one manufacturer and model will be accepted for each type of product. Where differing models are required, equipment from a single manufacturer shall be provided. C. Equipment shall be designed for the service intended and shall be of rugged construction, of ample strength for stresses that may occur during fabrication, transportation, and erection as well as during continuous or intermittent operation. They shall be adequately stayed, braced and anchored and shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Appearance and safety, as well as utility, shall be given consideration in the design of details. D. All components and devices installed shall be standard items of industrial grade, unless otherwise noted, which shall be of sturdy and durable construction and be suitable for long, trouble-free service. E. Electronic components shall be de-rated to assure dependability and long-term stability. F. Printed circuit boards in field mounted equipment shall be suitable for the specified environmental conditions. G. Alignment and adjustments shall be non-critical, stable with temperature changes or aging and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. 09 - 0 3 - 2 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Quality Assurance Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 24-2 H. Components of specially selected values shall not be inserted into standard electronic assemblies in order to meet the performance requirements of this specification. 1.04 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT A. Optional or substituted equipment or both requiring changes in details or dimensions required to maintain structural, mechanical, electrical, control, operating, maintenance or design features incorporated in these Specifications and Drawings shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. In the event that the changes are necessary, calculations and drawings showing the proposed revisions shall be submitted for approval. The Contractor shall coordinate changes with other affected trades and contracts and pay additional charges incurred. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. The instrumentation subcontractor through the Contractor shall install, maintain and guarantee the Instrumentation, Control and Information System as specified under the General Conditions and Division 01 of the Specifications. Maintenance personnel provided by the instrumentation subcontractor shall instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation, adjustment, calibration and repair of the equipment being serviced. Preventive and corrective activities shall be documented with service reports, which shall identify the equipment being serviced, state the condition of the equipment, describe Work performed and list materials used. A copy of service reports shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the Work is performed. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide the services of factory trained service technician(s) at least twice during the guarantee period, for the purpose of performing preventive hardware maintenance. C. Corrective hardware and software maintenance during the guarantee period shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and, in addition, shall meet the following requirements: 1. Corrective hardware maintenance shall be performed by factory trained service technician(s) specifically trained to service the digital equipment provided. Technicians possessing suitable training and experience shall be provided to perform corrective maintenance on other equipment. The hardware service technician(s) shall be available onsite within 24 working hours after notification by the Owner. 2. Corrective software maintenance shall be performed for software provided by the instrumentation subcontractor and incorporated into the system prior to the completion of system commissioning. Software service programmer(s) shall be available for consultation within four business hours and, if required, on-site within 16 business hours after notification by the Owner. Corrective software Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Quality Assurance Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 24-3 maintenance shall include the supply, installation and startup of application software upgrades released during the guarantee period. 3. Corrective hardware and software maintenance performed during the guarantee period shall be performed at no cost to the Owner. 4. As used herein, the term "working hours" shall be defined as those of the treatment facility (seven days per week, 24 hours per day). The term "business hours" shall be defined as the hours between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., local time, Monday through Friday; excluding holidays. 5. The guarantee period shall commence upon final acceptance of the completed treatment facility in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. D. The instrumentation subcontractor shall submit to the Owner a proposed maintenance agreement incorporating the following features: 1. Extension of preventive hardware maintenance services as described above for a period of up to five years from the expiration of the warranty period. 2. Provisions for corrective hardware or software maintenance Work on a will-call basis for a period of up to five years from the expiration of the warranty period. Corrective maintenance Work shall be performed by properly trained personnel as described above. E. The proposed agreement shall include provisions for payment based upon an annual fee for preventive maintenance and cost-plus expenses for corrective maintenance Work. The portion dealing with corrective maintenance shall be written to include corrective maintenance caused by actions of the Owner during the warranty period and shall contain clauses for re-negotiation of contract prices based upon changes in recognized economic indicators published by the United States Department of Commerce. 1.06 SHIPPING HANDLING AND STORAGE A. In addition to shipping, handling and storage requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, air conditioning/heating shall be provided for storage of field instrumentation, panels, digital equipment and ancillary devices to maintain temperatures between 20 and 25 degrees C and relative humidity 40 to 60 percent without condensation. The air shall be filtered and free of corrosive contaminants and moisture. 1.07 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of equipment shall conform to the codes and standards outlined in this Section, and other portions of the Contract Documents. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Quality Assurance Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 24-4 B. The Engineer may inspect the fabricated equipment at the factory before shipment to the job site. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with sufficient prior notice so that an inspection can be arranged at the factory. Inspection of the equipment at the factory by the Engineer will be made after the manufacturer has performed satisfactory checks, adjustments, tests and operations. C. Equipment approval at the factory only allows the equipment to be shipped to the project site. The Contractor shall provide for the proper storage, installation and satisfactory start-up and operation of the equipment to the satisfaction of the equipment manufacturer, the instrumentation subcontractor, and the Engineer. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Instrumentation and control system installation Work, whether new construction or modifications to existing equipment/panels/structures, shall conform to the codes and standards outlined in this Section, and other portions of the Contract Documents. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall assign a competent representative who shall provide full time coordination and supervision of on-site instrumentation and control system construction Work from commencement of construction through completion and final acceptance. C. Labor shall be performed by qualified craftsmen in accordance with the standards of workmanship in their profession and shall have had a minimum of three years of documented experience on similar projects. D. Equipment and materials shall fit properly in their installations. Work required to correct improperly fit installations shall be performed at no additional expense to the Owner. E. Work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Hardware and instrumentation shall be installed in accordance with requirements specified herein, in accordance with industry best practices, in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, and in a manner suitable for ease of operation, inspection, and maintenance. Wiring shall be neatly bundled, run in wireway, and terminated. Spare wiring shall be neatly coiled and clearly labeled at both ends for future use by the Owner. Work not meeting these requirements shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner. F. Sufficient common-mode and differential-mode noise rejection shall be provided to ensure proper operation of the plant process control system. General practices shall include: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Quality Assurance Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 24-5 1. Maintaining crossings between noisy wires and signal wires at right angles. 2. Maintaining separation between noisy wires and signal wires as wide as practical. 3. Grounding all signals, shields and power supplies at the process control unit or local control panel. 4. Providing passive filters on signals with time constant compatible with scan intervals and overvoltage protection. 5. Eliminating cable splices. Splices in instrumentation and control system signal, network, and instrument manufacturer furnished cables shall be approved in advance by the Engineer. 6. Providing a floating output for transmitters that have their own power sources. G. DC and AC power grounding shall be performed in accordance with the digital hardware manufacturer's recommendations as well as all applicable code requirements. H. The case of each field instrument and control panel shall be grounded in compliance with the National Electric Code. I. Power wires shall be separated from parallel-running signal wires by the following minimum spacing: 1. 120 VAC: 12 in 2. 240 VAC: 18 in 3. 480 VAC: 18 in 4. 2000 VAC and above: 24 in J. The Contractor shall provide all required cutting, drilling, inserts, supports, bolts, and anchors, and shall securely attach all equipment and materials to their supports. Embedded supports for equipment furnished under this Division shall be provided and installed as shown specified herein and shown on the Drawings. K. Following acceptance of the factory tests by the Engineer, and in accordance with the construction schedule, the Contractor shall commence installation of the digital control system hardware. Digital system equipment items shall not be installed, however, until all architectural, mechanical, HVAC and electrical Work has been completed in the equipment rooms, MCCs, control rooms and all structural and mechanical Work has been completed within 50 feet of equipment locations. L. Upon completion of the above construction Work, the Contractor shall request an inspection of the above-named areas. The Engineer will issue a written approval to Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Quality Assurance Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 24-6 proceed with delivery and installation only after being satisfied that all Work described above has been properly performed. Digital equipment shall remain at the factory site or storage prior to approval for delivery to the project site. Partial shipments may be required to meet construction schedule requirements. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Training Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 26-1 SECTION 40 61 26 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. To familiarize the Owner's personnel with the process control system and field instrumentation, training shall be provided as detailed hereunder. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. A minimum of 14 days prior to beginning training, submit a detailed training plan describing the following: 1. A listing of all courses to be conducted. 2. Course content. 3. Applicability of each course to management, operations, maintenance, laboratory, etc., personnel. 4. Course schedules. 5. Qualifications and experience of individual(s) providing training. B. A minimum of 7 days prior to beginning each training course, submit documentation for use by the Owner's personnel during training. The training documentation shall be specific to the particular course, and shall include the following: 1. A listing of all subjects to be covered. 2. Course schedule. 3. Documentation/lesson plans covering all subjects to be covered during the course instruction. Information shall be in a "how to" format, with sufficient background documentation and references to manufacturer literature to provide a thorough and clear understanding of the materials to be covered. 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All costs of providing the training courses shall be borne by the Contractor. 02 0 1 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Training Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 26-2 B. As used herein, the term "day" shall mean an eight-hour day, and the term "week" shall mean a five-day, 40hour week. C. Training courses, especially those for operator training, may be required to be scheduled during non-standard business hours (i.e., not between the hours of 8:00 am and 5:00 pm) to accommodate the working schedule of the Owner’s personnel. No additional compensation will be awarded to the Contractor for training at non-standard hours. D. All training courses shall complement the experience and skill levels of the Owner's personnel. E. Training courses shall be structured in order of increasing capability or security levels. The purpose of this requirement is to allow personnel with lesser training requirements or security password levels to drop out of the training at certain times while the training continues for personnel with greater requirements or higher security levels. F. All training courses shall include lecture as well as "hands on" experience for each of the attending personnel. The Contractor shall provide sufficient equipment for this to be accomplished. For example, training in which the instructor uses the computer and the Owner's personnel passively observe as the instructor demonstrates system functions shall not be acceptable. G. Unless otherwise specified, all training courses shall be conducted in the Owner's facilities. H. All training shall be completed prior to system acceptance. I. Standard manufacturer training courses are acceptable pending approval by the Engineer and Owner. 1.05 OPERATOR AND SUPERVISOR TRAINING A. One two-day- course comprised of daily half-day (four-hour) sessions for up to ten persons each shall be conducted to provide instruction in the use of the Control and Information System to monitor and control the facility. B. Operator training shall include familiarization training covering the Control and Information System. Operators shall be instructed in the names, locations, functions, and basic operation of all items of digital equipment and associated software. C. Operator training shall cover process and equipment operation both individually and collectively as an operating system. Normal as well as abnormal operating conditions shall be covered, including the response to failure occurrences and system alarms. All operator/system interactions shall be described. D. Operators shall be trained to instruct other operators and shall be provided with all course materials. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Training Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 26-3 1.06 INSTRUMENT TRAINING A. A one-day course shall be provided at the Owner's facilities no more than two weeks prior to system start-up to instruct a minimum of five persons each in the calibration and preventive maintenance of the field instruments provided under this Contract. 1.07 GENERAL REFRESHER TRAINING A. A one-day general refresher training course shall be provided for up to ten persons 3-6 months after final system acceptance. Instruction shall be given in all aspects of the complete instrumentation and control system. Instructor(s) shall be capable of answering questions related to all aspects and details of the complete system. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Schedules and Control Descriptions, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 60 90-1 SECTION 40 61 90 SCHEDULES AND CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, GENERAL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all hardware and software required to provide the Control and Information System as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 91 – Process Control System Instrument List B. Section 40 61 93 – Process Control System Input/Output List C. Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions PART 2 – CONVENTIONS 2.01 PLANT NUMBERING SYSTEM A. The plant equipment numbering system is based on a 4-digit code preceded by an equipment identification prefix and followed by a parallel designation suffix. The numbering system is sequential starting with 9500. 1. Prefix letters are added as required to label a piece of equipment or describe instrumentation/control signal types. Instrumentation prefixes shall use the convention shown in the following table. 02 1 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Schedules and Control Descriptions, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 60 90-2 Instrument Prefix Letters First Letter Succeeding Letters Letter Measured or Initiating Variable Modifier Readout or Passive Function Output Function Modifier A Analysis Alarm or PLC/DCS discrete alarm input B Burner, combustion User's choice User's choice User's choice C Conductivity (electrical)Control or PLC/DCS analog output D Density (mass) or specific gravity Differential E Voltage (emf)Primary element F Flow Ratio (fraction) G User's choice Glass or viewing device H Hand (manually initiated)High I Current (electrical)Indicate or PLC/DCS analog input J Power Scan K Time or time schedule Time rate of change Control station L Level Light (pilot)Low M Moisture or humidity Momentary Middle or intermediate N User's choice Notify or PLC/DCS discrete status input User's choice User's choice O User's choice Orifice (restriction) P Pressure or vacuum Point (test connection) Q Quantity Integrate or totalize Integrate or totalize R Radiation Record or print S Speed or frequency Safety Switch T Temperature Transmit U Multivariable Multifunction Multifunction Multifunction V Vibration or mechanical analysis Valve, damper or louver W Weight or force Well X Unclassified X axis Unclassified PLC/DCS discrete output/command Unclassified Y Event, state or presence Y axis Relay, compute, or convert Z Position, dimension Z axis Drive, actuator or unclassified final control element Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Schedules and Control Descriptions, General Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 60 90-3 PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Instrument List Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 91-1 SECTION 40 61 91 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INSTRUMENT LIST PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all instrumentation as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 90 – Schedules and Control Descriptions, General B. Section 40 61 93 – Process Control System Input/Output List C. Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Items of equipment listed in the instrument schedule, control panels, and digital hardware items shall be identified with nameplates. Each nameplate shall be located so that it is readable from the normal observation position and is clearly associated with the device or devices it identifies. Nameplates shall be positioned so that removal of the device for maintenance and repair shall not disturb the nameplate. Nameplates shall include, as necessary, the equipment identification number, description, calibrated range, and set point(s). Abbreviations of the description shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. B. Nameplates shall be made of 1/16-inch thick machine engraved laminated phenolic plastic having white numbers and letters not less than 3/16-inch high on a black background. Nameplates attached to instruments may be black laser etched 1/8 -inch high text on stainless steel with sharp edges made smooth. Stamped text shall not be acceptable. C. Nameplates shall be attached to metal equipment by NEMA rated stainless steel screws and to other surfaces by an epoxy -based adhesive that is resistant to oil and moisture. In cases where the label cannot be attached by the above methods, it shall be drill ed and attached to the associated device by means of a braided stainless steel wire affixed with a permanent crimp. D. Submit sample nameplate of each type. 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Instrument List Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 91-2 PART 3 – INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE Pressure Transmitters – Section 40 73 20 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks LC-PIT-9504-01 CC-1 IN CC-1 VAULT 0-225 psig LC-PIT-9506-01 SLAR IN CC-1 VAULT 0-225 psig LC-PIT-9507-01 SLAR IN CC-2 VAULT 0-100 psig Flow Meters – Section 40 73 13.13 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks LC-FE/FIT-9509- 01 CC-2 FLOW 0-50 MGD Level Switches (Floats) – Section 40 72 76.26 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks LC-LSH-9505-01 CC-1 FLOOD SWITCH Trigger at 4” AFF LC-LSH-9519-01 CC-2 FLOOD SWITCH Trigger at 4” AFF Pressure and Differential Pressure Gauges – Section 40 73 13 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks LC-PI-9513-01 SAMPLE PUMP INTAKE PRESSURE 0-200 psig LC-PI-9513-02 SAMPLE PUMP DISCHARGE PRESSURE 0-200 psig LC-PI-9519-01 SAMPLE LINE PRESSURE 0-200 psig Temperature Transmitters – Section 40 73 20 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks LC-TIT-9503-01 CC-1 VAULT TEMP 0-100 F LC-TIT-9508-01 CC-2 VAULT TEMP 0-100 F pH Analyzers – Section 40 75 13 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks LC-AE/AIT-9514- 01 CC-2 pH 7-10 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Instrument List Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 91-3 Conductivity Analyzers – Section 40 75 16 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks LC-AE/AIT-9515- 01 CC-2 CONDUCTIVITY 1-1000 μS/cm Turbidity Analyzers – Section 40 75 53 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks LC-AE/AIT-9516- 01 CC-2 TURBIDITY 0-200 NTU Intrusion Switch - Magnetic – Section 40 77 26.26 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks LC-ZSO-9501-01 CC-1 HATCH INSTRUSION Normally Open, Held Closed LC-ZSO-9502-01 CC-1 HATCH INTRUSION Normally Open, Held Closed LC-ZSO-9510-01 CC-2 HATCH INTRUSION Normally Open, Held Closed LC-ZSO-9511-01 CC-2 HATCH INTRUSION Normally Open, Held Closed LC-ZSO-9512-01 CC-2 HATCH INTRUSION Normally Open, Held Closed Flow Switches (Thermal) – Section 40 71 79.16 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks LC-FSL-9513-01 Sample Pump Low Flow Normally Open END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Input-Output List Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 93-1 SECTION 40 61 93 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INPUT/OUTPUT LIST PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all instrumentation as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCE SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 90 – Schedules and Control Descriptions, General B. Section 40 61 91 – Process Control System Instrument List C. Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL SYSTEM INPUT/OUTPUT SCHEDULE Tag Number Service Description State/Span Type Remarks LC-YA-9500-01 MOV-9500 FAULT FAULT/OFF NDI LC-ZL-9500-01 MOV-9500 IS IN REMOTE LOCAL/REMOTE NDI LC-ZCC-9500-01 MOV-9500 CLOSE COMMAND CLOSE/OFF NDO LC-ZCO-9500-01 MOV-9500 OPEN COMMAND OPEN/OFF NDO LC-ZLC-9500-01 MOV-9500 CLOSED CLOSED/OFF NDI LC-ZLO-9500-01 MOV-9500 OPEN OPENED/OFF NDI LC-ZAO-9501-01 CC-1 HATCH INSTRUSION NO. 1 OPEN/OFF DI LC-ZAO-9502-01 CC-1 HATCH INSTRUSION NO. 2 OPEN/OFF DI LC-TAH-9503-01 CC-1 HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH/OFF Internal LC-TAL-9503-01 CC-1 LOW TEMPERATURE LOW/OFF Internal LC-TI-9503-01 CC-1 TEMPERATURE 4-20 mA AI LC-PAH-9504-01 CC-1 HIGH PRESSURE HIGH/OFF Internal LC-PAL-9504-01 CC-1 LOW PRESSURE LOW/OFF Internal LC-PI-9504-01 CC-1 PRESSURE 4-20 mA AI 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Input-Output List Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 93-2 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Type Remarks LC-YA-9500-01 MOV-9500 FAULT FAULT/OFF NDI LC-ZL-9500-01 MOV-9500 IS IN REMOTE LOCAL/REMOTE NDI LC-ZCC-9500-01 MOV-9500 CLOSE COMMAND CLOSE/OFF NDO LC-ZCO-9500-01 MOV-9500 OPEN COMMAND OPEN/OFF NDO LC-ZLC-9500-01 MOV-9500 CLOSED CLOSED/OFF NDI LC-LAH-9505-01 CC-1 FLOOD SWITCH ON/OFF DI LC-PAH-9506-01 SLAR HIGH PRESSURE HIGH/OFF Internal LC-PAL-9506-01 SLAR LOW PRESSURE LOW/OFF Internal LC-PI-9506-01 SLAR PRESSURE 4-20 mA AI LC-IA-9507-01 CC-1 CONTROL PANEL OVER- CURRENT ON/OFF DI LC-PAH-9507-01 CC-2 HIGH PRESSURE HIGH/OFF Internal LC-PAL-9507-01 CC-2 LOW PRESSURE LOW/OFF Internal LC-PI-9507-01 CC-2 PRESSURE 4-20 mA AI LC-JA-9508-01 CC-1 UTILITY POWER LOSS ON/OFF DI LC-TAH-9508-01 CC-2 HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH/OFF Internal LC-TAL-9508-01 CC-2 LOW TEMPERATURE LOW/OFF Internal LC-TI-9508-01 CC-2 TEMPERATURE 4-20 mA AI LC-FI-9509-01 CC-2 FLOW RATE 4-20 mA AI LC-FQI-9509-01 CC-2 FLOW TOTALIZER PULSE DI LC-ZAO-9510-01 CC-2 HATCH INSTRUSION OPEN/OFF DI LC-ZAO-9511-01 CC-2 HATCH INTRUSION OPEN/OFF DI LC-ZAO-9512-01 CC-2 HATCH INTRUSION OPEN/OFF DI LC-FAL-9513-01 SAMPLE PUMP LOW FLOW LOW/OFF DI LC-ZL-9513-01 SAMPLE PUMP IS IN REMOTE ON/OFF DI LC-YL-9513-01 SAMPLE PUMP RUNNING ON/OFF DI LC-YX-9513-01 SAMPLE PUMP START/STOP CMD ON/OFF DO LC-AAH-9514-01 SAMPLE LINE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH/OFF Internal LC-AAL-9514-01 SAMPLE LINE LOW TEMPERATURE LOW/OFF Internal LC-AI-9514-01 SAMPLE LINE TEMPERATURE 4-20 mA AI LC-AAH-9514-02 SAMPLE LINE HIGH pH HIGH/OFF Internal LC-AAL-9514-02 SAMPLE LINE LOW pH LOW/OFF Internal LC-AI-9514-02 SAMPLE LINE pH 4-20 mA AI Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control System Input-Output List Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 93-3 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Type Remarks LC-YA-9500-01 MOV-9500 FAULT FAULT/OFF NDI LC-ZL-9500-01 MOV-9500 IS IN REMOTE LOCAL/REMOTE NDI LC-ZCC-9500-01 MOV-9500 CLOSE COMMAND CLOSE/OFF NDO LC-ZCO-9500-01 MOV-9500 OPEN COMMAND OPEN/OFF NDO LC-ZLC-9500-01 MOV-9500 CLOSED CLOSED/OFF NDI LC-AAH-9515-01 SAMPLE LINE HIGH CONDUCTIVITY HIGH/OFF Internal LC-AI-9515-01 SAMPLE LINE CONDUCTIVITY 4-20 mA AI LC-AAH-9516-01 SAMPLE LINE HIGH TURBIDITY HIGH/OFF Internal LC-AI-9516-01 SAMPLE LINE TURBIDITY 4-20 mA AI LC-IA-9517-01 LC28 PLC OVERCUURENT ON/OFF DI LC-JA-9518-01 CC-2 UTILITY POWER LOSS ON/OFF DI LC-LAH-9519-01 CC-2 FLOOD SWITCH ON/OFF DI 1. NOTES: Input/Output types are as follows: a. DI – Discrete Input b. DO – Discrete Output c. AI – Analog Input d. AO – Analog Output e. NDI – Discrete Input that is read over the Network f. NDO – Discrete Output that is sent over the Network g. Internal – A point that is generated internally to the PLC/HMI END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control Descriptions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 96-1 SECTION 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all equipment as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING COMPLETE FUNCTIONING SYSTEMS AS DESCRIBED HEREIN. B. Together with the control system input/output schedule, the equipment specifications (including functional descriptions for local equipment control panels), and the Drawings, the functional control descriptions describe the required operation, monitoring, and control of the facilities included in this Contract. C. THE FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS CONTAIN REQUIREMENTS FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING LABOR AND MATERIALS THAT MAY NOT APPEAR ELSEWHERE IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. D. All equipment and services required in equipment local control panels provided to implement the monitoring and control functions described herein or in the process input/output schedules shall be provided by the Contractor through individual equipment suppliers. E. Unless specifically stated otherwise, all interconnected wiring between all instruments, panels, controls, and other devices listed in the functional descriptions as required to provide all functions specified herein shall be furnished by the electrical subcontractor under Division 26. The electrical subcontractor shall provide all cable and conduit required to carry all signals listed in the process input/output schedules. Special cables that are required for interconnection between sensors or probes and transmitters or signal conditioners shall be furnished with the instrumentation devices by the equipment supplier. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 14 00 – Coordination with Owner’s Operations B. Section 40 61 90 – Schedules and Control Descriptions, General C. Section 40 61 91 – Process Control System Instrument List D. Section 40 61 93 – Process Control System Input/Output List 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control Descriptions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 96-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 DEFINITIONS A. RUNNING status signals shall be from auxiliary contacts provided with the motor control equipment (i.e., starter, VFD, SCR, etc.). B. AUTO status signals shall be defined as HAND-OFF-AUTO switch in the AUTO position or process control system in AUTO (versus MANUAL). C. FAIL status signals shall be defined as motor overload and/or any other shut down mode such as over-torque, over-temperature, low oil pressure, high vibration, etc. D. READY status signal shall be defined as all conditions, including equipment control power, satisfied to permit remote control of the equipment. 2.02 CONVENTIONS A. Operator workstation graphic display symbols and indicator lights on all MCC's, control panels, starter enclosures, etc. shall conform to the following color convention: 1. Running/On/Open: Green 2. Auto/Ready: White 3. Stopped/Off/Closed: Red 4. Fail/Alarm: Amber 5. Generic Status: Blue or White 2.03 PROCESS CONTROL A. Where setpoints, operating limits, and other control settings are provided by the functional descriptions, these settings shall be initial settings only and shall be used for assistance in the initial startup of the plant. All such settings shall be fully adjustable and, based on actual operating conditions, the instrumentation subcontractor shall make all necessary adjustments to provide smooth, stable operation at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Provision shall be made in PLC logic to suppress nuisance alarms and control actions by the following means: 1. For alarms and control actions derived from analog input signals, use adjustable time delays and deadbands. 2. For alarms and control actions derived from discrete input signals, use adjustable time delays. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control Descriptions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 96-3 3. Initial settings for time delays shall be 10 seconds (range 0-120 seconds). Initial settings for deadbands shall be 5% of span (range 0-100%). 4. Equipment that is started or stopped manually by the operator shall start or stop immediately, with no time delay. C. All setpoint control shall be by PID control algorithms. Where only proportional control is specified, tuning constants shall be used to reduce the Integral and Derivative functions to zero. All setpoints, sequence times, sequence orders, dead bands, PID tuning parameters, PLC delay timers, variable speed operating range limits, and similar control constants shall be accessible and alterable from the operator workstations. D. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment shall automatically restart after a power failure utilizing adjustable start delay timers in PLC control logic. Unless otherwise specified, all PLC control strategies shall be based upon automatic restart after a power failure and shall return to a normal control mode upon restoration of power. E. The PLC shall be capable of receiving initial run-time values for existing and proposed equipment. Initial run-time shall not automatically be assumed to be zero. F. A control discrepancy alarm shall be generated through the PLC for any drive, motor, etc. for which a command has been issued, but for which the PLC is not receiving a confirming status signal (e.g., start command with no run feedback). The failure shall be logged. G. An instrument failure alarm shall be generated for any instrument which is generating a signal that is less than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA. H. Unless otherwise specified in an individual control description, an instrument failure or control discrepancy alarm shall cause the control strategy to maintain last values and to generate an alarm. Manual initiation of the automatic control strategy shall be required. I. A control program that controls multiple pieces of equipment shall not be prevented from running because not all of the equipment is in AUTO. If equipment within an equipment chain is required to be running for program operation and it is running in HAND or MANUAL, then the program shall run and control the other equipment that is in AUTO. J. All PLC wait states (internal time delays, etc.) after an operator action shall be displayed on the operator workstation. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control Descriptions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 96-4 PART 3 – FUNCTIONAL CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS 3.01 SLAR/CC-1 VAULT A. Process Overview Water will be conveyed from Big Cottonwood Treatment Plant (BCWTP, BCPS) pump station and directed to CC-1 connection vault via the CC-1 pipe. CC-1 connects into the Salt Lake Aqueduct Replacement (SLAR) towards the 10 MG Reservoir. In the vault, the flow shall be controlled via a control valve in the interconnect pipe. The flow pressure shall be monitored in both CC-1 and SLAR. B. Reference Documents 1. O-02A: Communications Block Diagram - 1 2. CC-1-O-03: CC-1 Process and Instrumentation Diagram C. Associated Equipment 1. PIT 9504: CC-1 pressure, Entering CC-1 vault 2. MOV-9500: Interconnect Valve 3. PIT 9506: SLAR pressure, Leaving CC-1 vault 4. ZSC 9501: CC-1 Vault Hatch 1 Intrusion Switch 5. ZSC 9502: CC-1 Vault Hatch 2 Intrusion Switch 6. TIT 9503: CC-1 Vault Temperature 7. LSH 9505: CC-1 Vault Flood Switch 8. CC-1 Control Panel D. Control Equipment 1. MOV-9500: Interconnect Valve E. Control Operation 1. Local control a. When the control valve is in the LOCAL position the valve shall be operated using the open close selector switch located on the valve actuator. 2. Remote control Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control Descriptions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 96-5 a. There shall be no remote control for the valve, only position monitoring. F. Interlocks 1. None G. Monitoring 1. ZLO 9500: CC-1 Valve Opened 2. ZLC 9500: CC-1 Valve Closed 3. TI 9503: CC-1 Temperature 4. PI 9504: CC-1 Pressure Entering CC-1 Vault 5. PI 9506: SLAR Pressure Leaving CC-1 Vault H. Alarms 1. YA 9500: Interconnect Valve Fault 2. ZA 9501: Hatch 1 Intrusion 3. ZA 9502: Hatch 2 Intrusion 4. TAL 9503: CC-1 Vault High Temperature 5. TAH 9503: CC-1 Vault High Temperature 6. LAH 9505: CC-1 Vault Flood 7. IA 9507: CC-1 Control Panel Overcurrent 8. JA 9508: CC-1 Control Panel Power Loss I. Trending 1. PI 9504: CC-1 Pressure entering vault 2. PI 9506: SLAR Pressure leaving vault Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control Descriptions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 96-6 3.02 SLAR/CC-2 VAULT A. Process Overview 1. Water flows from SLAR into the CC-2 connection vault where it continues into the CC-2 connection pipe. The pressure shall be monitored in the SLAR and the CC-2 flow rate shall be monitored. 2. A sample pump shall pull a sample from the SLAR and send it to the analyzer panel located in the FW pump building where pH, temperature, conductivity, and turbidity shall be monitored. B. Reference Documents 1. O-02A: Communications Block Diagram - 1 2. CC-1-O-04: CC-2 Process and Instrumentation Diagram C. Associated Equipment 1. PIT 9507: SLAR Water Pressure Entering CC-2 Vault 2. TIT 9508: CC-2 Vault Temperature 3. FIT 9509: CC-2 Flow Exiting Vault 4. ZSC 9510: CC-2 Vault Hatch 1 Intrusion Switch 5. ZSC 9111: CC-2 Vault Hatch 2 Intrusion Switch 6. LSH 9512: CC-2 Vault Flood Switch 7. FSL 9513: Sample Line Low Flow Switch 8. AE 9514: pH/Temperature Probe 9. AE 9515: Conductivity Probe 10. AE 9516: Turbidity Probe 11. AIT 9515: Multi-Parameter Analysis Transmitters D. Control Equipment 1. P-9513: Sample Pump E. Control Operation Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control Descriptions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 96-7 1. Sample pump P-9513 shall be a fixed speed pump with a manual control ON/OFF switch and no remote control. When the ON/OFF switch is placed into the ON position, the pump shall begin to operate to convey water to the analyzer panel. 2. After a time delay, a low flow switch on the discharge side of the pump shall act as an interlock and prevent the pump from running when activated and held open for a time delay. F. Interlocks 1. Low flow switch shall inhibit the sampling pump from operating. G. Monitoring 1. AI 9514A: CC-2 water temperature 2. AI 9514B: CC-2 pH 3. AI 9516: CC-2 Turbidity 4. AI 9515: CC-2 Conductivity 5. TI 9508: CC-2 Temperature 6. FI 9509: CC-2 Flow 7. PI 9507: SLAR Pressure H. Alarms 1. PAH 9507: SLAR High Pressure (Derived from PI-9507) 2. PAL 9507: SLAR Low Pressure (Derived from PI-9507) 3. TAH 9508: CC-2 Vault High Temperature Alarm (Derived from TI-9508) 4. TAL 9508: CC-2 Vault Low Temperature Alarm (Derived from TI-9508) 5. ZAO 9510: CC-2 Hatch 1 Intrusion 6. ZAO 9511: CC-2 Hatch 2 Intrusion 7. LAH 9512: CC-2 Vault Flood 8. IA 9517: LC28-PLC overcurrent and power loss 9. JA 9518: LC28-PLC Utility Power Loss 10. AAH 9514A: CC-2 water temperature high Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control Descriptions Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 61 96-8 11. AAL 9514A: CC-2 water temperature low 12. AAH 9514B: CC-2 pH high 13. AAL 9514B: CC-2 pH low 14. AAH 9516: CC-2 Turbidity High 15. AAH 9515: CC-2 Conductivity High I. Trending 1. FQI 9509: CC-2 Flow 2. AI 9514A: CC-2 water temperature 3. AI 9514B: CC-2 pH 4. AI 9516: CC-2 Turbidity 5. AI 9515: CC-2 Conductivity END OF SECTION SECTION 40 62 00 COMPUTER SYSTEM HARDWARE AND ANCILLARIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The process control system is physically and functionally distributed between PLC equipped control panels, motor control panels, field panels, operator workstations and appurtenances. B. Although manual control facilities shall be provided adjacent to each final control element or in local control panels, such facilities are for testing, maintenance and local monitoring purposes only and shall not be regarded as backup to the PLC-based control system. C. PLCs may be categorized as either “process PLCs” or “integration PLCs” that are provided by the instrumentation subcontractor or “equipment control PLCs” or “vendor PLCs” or “packaged PLCs” provided by equipment manufacturers for the operation of their equipment (blowers, centrifuges, chemical systems, filters, etc.). Unless otherwise specified, all PLCs provided under this Contract shall conform to the requirements specified in this Division. D. Major plant control system digital equipment items are described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 63 43 – Programmable Logic Controllers B. Section 40 66 00 – Network and Communication Equipment 1.03 DIGITAL HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS A. The digital hardware configuration shown on the Control System Architecture Drawing / Communication Block Diagram depicts overall system configuration requirements. System design shall be based upon this concept and shall provide an overall digital system availability of 99.8 percent under the conditions specified in Section 40 61 21.73 – Final Acceptance Test. Unless otherwise specified, designs that vary from this concept will be rejected. B. All discrete and analog data acquisition, pre-processing, storage and process control functions shall be performed at the PLC level. Run time and flow accumulations shall be performed at the PLC level. Except for minimal calculations related to report-specific functions such as minimum, maximum, average, etc., operator workstations shall not be used to perform calculation for the process control system. Operator workstations shall 02 0 1 1 9 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Computer System Hardware and Ancillaries Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 62 00-1 be fully independent devices, individually connected to the plant control system networks. C. No other exceptions will be considered. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL SYSTEM HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise specified, all hardware shall be rated for industrial use, resistant to shock, vibration, electromagnetic interference, static discharge, and suitable for the environmental conditions described elsewhere in this Division. Commercial or office grade equipment shall not be accepted. B. Unless otherwise specified, modular construction shall be employed to simplify maintenance and to provide for future hardware expansion. Plug-in, modular PCB's or modules shall be employed for easy removal to permit exposure of circuit wiring, components and test points. Extender boards shall be provided, if necessary, to permit PCB's to be completely exposed for testing purposes. C. Keying schemes shall be used to prevent PCB misplacement. D. The temperature inside each enclosure containing digital hardware (i.e., cabinet, panel or console) shall be continuously monitored and shall generate an alarm to the nearest PLC if the temperature rises to an adjustable, preset high temperature. 2.02 DIGITAL SYSTEM FAILURE DETECTION AND FAIL-OVER REQUIREMENTS A. No degradation in control system performance shall occur when the system is operating in a partial failure or an equipment fail-over mode. Likewise, no degradation of system performance shall occur while a backed up system component is undergoing preventive or corrective maintenance. B. All devices connected to the plant control system (PCS) network shall be self-checking and shall report their operational status to the operator workstations as either "normal" or "failed". A graphic display based on the system architecture drawing shall be furnished with the control and information system showing this information along with current communication status of each device. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions, Part 3. 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Computer System Hardware and Ancillaries Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 62 00-2 END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 63 43-1 SECTION 40 63 43 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC) - ALLEN BRADLEY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all programmable logic controllers (PLC), with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions Section 40 61 23 – Signal Coordination Requirements Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions Section 40 62 00 – Control and Information System Hardware - General Section 40 62 16 – Operator Workstation Computers Section 40 62 26 – Laptop Computers Section 40 62 63 – Operator Interface Terminals Section 40 66 00 – Network and Communication Equipment Section 40 67 63 – Uninterruptible Power Systems Section 40 67 00 – Control System Equipment Panels and Racks K. Section 40 78 56 – Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS A. The instrumentation subcontractor shall furnish programmable controllers (PLCs) as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. PLCs shall be provided complete with backplane, power supply, I/O cards, special function cards, instructions, memory, input/output capacity, and appurtenances to provide all features and functions as described herein. No substitutions will be permitted. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 63 43-2 B. All components of the PLC system shall be of the same manufacturer; who shall have fully tested units similar to those being furnished in an industrial environment with associated electrical noise. The PLC system shall have been tested to meet the requirements of NEMA Standard ICS 2-230 (Arc Test) and IEEE C37.90.1 (SWC). The processing unit shall perform the operations functionally described herein based on the program stored in memory and the status of the inputs and outputs. C. Programmable controllers shall be designed to operate in an industrial environment. The PLC shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0-60C and a relative humidity of 5-95 percent, non-condensing. The PLC shall operate on supply voltages of 90-132 VAC at 4763 Hz or +24 VDC if provided with a battery backup system. An integral fuse shall be provided on the power supply for short circuit protection and shall be front panel accessible. Integral overcurrent and undervoltage protection shall be provided on the power supply. D. Where applicable, the minimum PLC backplane size shall be 7 slots, not including power supply slots. E. System configuration shall be as shown on the Control System Architecture Drawing/Communications Block Diagram. PLC types shall be designated on the Control System Architecture Drawing and correspond to the specifications herein. Only a single type of processor shall be supplied for all PLCs of a designated type. Memory and processor shall be adequate for all control functions specified. PLCs shall be as manufactured: 1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 5570 Series – 1756-L71 (in Plant) 2. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix L30ER (at remote sites) 2.02 PROCESSORS A. The processor and its associated memory shall be enclosed in a modular enclosure. A multiple-position selector switch or equivalent shall be used to select processor operating mode. LED-type indicating lights shall be provided to indicate processor, memory, and battery status. Errors in memory shall be recognized and shall activate the memory error indicating lights. The PLC processor shall monitor the internal operation of the PLC for failure and provide an alarm output. Nonvolatile memory in the form of a manufacturer supplied industrial CompactFlash card or equivalent technology shall be required to maintain the entire current program and firmware of the controller in the event of power loss. The program shall be updated onto the flash memory each time a program change such as an online edit or tag value is changed. When nonvolatile memory (flash memory) is not available for certain controller models as offered by the PLC manufacturer, lithium batteries shall be used to maintain process RAM memory for at least one year in the event of power loss. The lithium battery unit shall be an externally mounted battery assembly with the highest available capacity. The PLC shall send an alarm to the plant control system if battery level is low. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 63 43-3 B. The instruction set for the PLC shall conform to the requirements of IEC 61131-3. Each PLC shall have the capability to run all five of the standard IEC 61131-3 languages simultaneously. These five languages shall be: 1. Ladder Diagram 2. Structured Text 3. Instruction List 4. Function Block Diagram 5. Sequential Function Chart C. Additional co-processors or modules may be necessary and shall be furnished as required to meet the functions specified herein and in Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions. D. PLC processors shall be provided with substantial user program, data and logic memory to allow for future expansion of the overall system. The total memory used on each processor shall be less than 60% of available memory at project completion. 2.03 COMMUNICATIONS A. PLC communications shall be provided as specified as shown on the Control System Architecture Drawing/Communications Block Diagram. B. In addition to a communications port for the control system network, communication ports shall be provided for any other devices required (i.e., operator interface unit) plus an additional communication port for connection to a notebook computer. C. The PLC shall be able to support various types of fieldbus communication systems for data links to field instruments (where specified) in addition to connected equipment such as power monitors, VFDs, motor protection monitors, etc. As a minimum, Profibus DP, Foundation Fieldbus, Modbus RTU Master and Slave, Modbus/TCP, Ethernet/IP shall be supported. D. The Contractor shall coordinate the efforts of the necessary parties (instrumentation subcontractor and equipment suppliers) to accomplish the required device and data table addressing between each PLC and the associated connected equipment. E. Additional communication modules or protocol gateways may be required to support specific communication protocols required under this Contract and shall be supplied at no extra cost to the Owner. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 63 43-4 2.04 INPUT/OUTPUT SUBSYSTEMS A. Input/output hardware shall be plug-in modules in associated I/O backplane/chassis or DIN-rail mounting assemblies. Each unit shall handle the required number of process inputs and outputs plus a minimum of 10 percent active pre-wired spares for each I/O type furnished, plus a minimum of 20 percent spare I/O module space for the addition of future circuit cards or modules. B. Discrete inputs shall be +24 VDC or 120 VAC signals (integral to the PLC) from dry field contacts. Discrete outputs shall be +24 VDC or 120 VAC outputs sourced from the PLC, or dry relay contacts (2A minimum) as required. Refer to Section 40 61 23 – Signal Coordination Requirements for further details of discrete signal type and voltage requirements. The PLC shall provide momentary and latched outputs as required to interface with motor controls and external devices. Interposing relays shall be provided where required to interface with field equipment. Interposing relays shall be as specified in Section 40 78 00 – Panel Mounted Instruments. Electrical isolation shall be provided where required. Maximum density for discrete I/O modules shall be 32 per input module and 16 per output module. C. Analog input circuits shall be isolated, minimum 16-bit resolution type. Analog input hardware shall be provided as required for all types of analog inputs being transmitted to the PLC. In general, analog input modules shall be capable of receiving 4-20 mA signals. Where required, RTD input modules shall have a minimum resolution of 0.15C and be capable of accepting signals from 100-ohm Platinum RTDs. Analog outputs shall be coordinated with the receivers but shall generally be isolated +24 VDC 4-20 mA outputs powered from the PLC. Each input/output circuit shall have optical isolation to protect the equipment against high voltage transients. Optical isolation shall be rated at not less than 1500 V RMS. Lightning/surge protection shall be provided as specified in Section 40 78 56 – Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors. Maximum density for analog I/O modules shall be 8 per module. D. Input/output modules shall be configured for ease of wiring and maintenance. The modules shall be connected to wiring arms that can be disconnected to permit removal of a module without disturbing field wiring. Covers shall be provided to prevent operator personnel from inadvertently touching the terminals. The process interface modules shall be provided with screw-type terminal blocks with barriers between adjacent terminals for connection of field inputs. Terminals shall be suitable for accepting up to and including No. 14 AWG wire. All DC output circuits to the field shall include fuses, either integral or at the terminal strip. Output failure mode shall be selectable so that upon station or communication system failure all outputs shall be placed either in the non-conducting mode or remain as were prior to failure. Light-emitting diodes shall be provided for status indication for each input and output point. E. If available for use with the above specified PLC, use that manufacturers' digital pre- wired cables with interface modules (IFM) with removeable field terminal block (RTB), screw type, if available. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 63 43-5 F. External power supplies shall be provided with the PLC as required to meet specified installed I/O power requirements plus spares. Power supplies shall be modular units, shall be fully redundant and shall alarm the PLC upon failure. Power supplies shall have a line regulation of 0.05% and meet the environmental and power requirements specified herein for the PLC. 2.05 INPUT/OUTPUT CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT A. Signal and control circuitry to individual input/output boards shall be arranged such that board failure shall not disable more than one half of the control loops within any group of controlled equipment (e.g., one pump out of a group of three pumps, two pumps out of four, etc.). Where possible, individual control loops and equipment shall be assigned to individual boards such that failure of the board will disable only one loop or piece of equipment. 2.06 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE A. The PLC programming and configuration software shall be the manufacturer's latest, full- featured version, Windows-based, and shall be fully compliant with IEC 61131-3 standards. The software package shall consist of all programming, configuration, and documentation software needed to place the control and information system in satisfactory operation. The software shall allow on-line and off-line program development and documentation. PLC programming software shall include documentation on optical media. B. A minimum of one copy of the PLC programming software shall be purchased by the instrumentation subcontractor and registered to the Owner. C. All configuration and programming software necessary shall be provided on the computer specified in Section 40 62 26 – Laptop Computers for connection to the PLC processor via a communications port. All necessary hardware required to allow the laptop computer to perform PLC configuration and programming shall be provided. D. If available, the configuration and programming software shall support communication over the network specified in Section 40 66 00 – Network and Communication Equipment to implement its functions remotely from an operator workstation. All configuration and programming software necessary to implement this functionality shall be provided on the HMI Server operator workstations specified in Section 40 62 16 – Operator Workstation Computers. All necessary hardware required to have the operator workstation perform PLC configuration and programming shall be provided. 2.07 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. The following specific spare parts items shall be provided: 1. One of each type and size of module for PLC equipment furnished under this Contract. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 63 43-6 2. One of each type and size of PLC and equipment power supply furnished under this Contract. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. PLC programming shall be furnished to perform all functions described in Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions, including global functions. In addition, PLCs shall be programmed to provide additional functions described in other Sections of this Division. B. PLC programming shall make use of the various IEC languages as appropriate to the specific task and shall be performed in a modular style making extensive use of program blocks (subroutines) and program variables to be passed to the program blocks for specific equipment. It is the intent of this requirement to allow for enhanced readability and ease of modification of the program code through the elimination of multiple instances of repeated code for the same function in a “hard-coded” style. C. Extensive comments shall be placed in the program code to describe the functions of all elements of the program code. PLC code that does not contain comments shall be rejected. D. Refer to Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions, Part 3 for additional requirements. 3.02 TESTING . The Contractor, equipment supplier and instrumentation subcontractor shall coordinate testing and startup of the equipment provided by the equipment supplier with the plant control system, including but not limited to the following tasks: 1. Provide assistance with control system testing of inputs, outputs, and control strategies as needed. 2. Provide support or interface work necessary to perform physical checkout and field testing to the final field devices. The schedule may require the instrumentation subcontractor and equipment manufacturer personnel to perform loop checks simultaneously, as directed by the Engineer. 3. Coordinate and assist as needed to maintain I/O connectivity throughout the system. 4. Ensure personnel safety while equipment is exercised via the plant control system. 5. Ensure that process, instrumentation, and control equipment are not damaged while equipment is exercised via the plant control system. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 63 43-7 6. Provide temporary modifications to field devices and their terminations, if needed. 7. Providing labor and supervision, which may include, but is not limited to, the following: electricians, instrument technicians, manufacturer’s representatives, and individual(s) knowledgeable about process startup and operation. 8. Operation of process equipment for verification of each plant control system input and output. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Network and Communication Equipment Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 66 00-1 SECTION 40 66 00 NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT - MWDSLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation IEEE 802.3 ethernet local area network(s) for communications among plant devices. B. Local area network shall be provided with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS . Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions A. Section 40 63 43 – Programmable Logic Controllers B. Section 40 66 33 – Fiber Optic Systems PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) A. An IEEE 802.3 Ethernet local area network shall be used for communications between plant devices. B. Network wiring shall be unshielded, twisted-pair copper cables for connections within buildings. Fiber optic media shall be used for all inter -device communication links extended outside of a building, unless specifically noted. Cables shall be as specified herein. C. The Contractor may provide a network configuration different from that shown in the Contract Drawings with written approval of the Engineer, but the Contractor shall coordinate with all affected trades and pay for all additional charges incurred. D. The Contractor shall provide appurtenances, including but not limited to, all hardware, cables, connectors, adapters, modules, and software, to implement a network as required for a fully functional system even if not explicitly specified or shown. 2.02 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET NETWORK SWITCHES A. Except where specifically allowed on the Control System Architecture Drawing / Communications Block Diagram, industrial Ethernet network switches shall be provided for each device connected to the process control system network. The switches shall 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Network and Communication Equipment Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 66 00-2 create switched Ethernet networks that conform to the IEEE 802.3 and 802.3u standards using copper wires or optical fibers in a bus, tree or ring network topology as shown on the Drawings. Ethernet network switches shall be modular, rack mounted within the PLC cabinet or in an adjacent communication cabinet, as shown on the Drawings. B. Ethernet network switches shall support ring, bus, star, or point -to -point network topologies. On-line signal monitoring shall be provided to detect and locate impending faults. The Ethernet network switches shall be integrated into the in-plant Ethernet network. Switches shall support the non-proprietary Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) in addition to the switch manufacturer’s standard redundant ring network protocol, all of which shall provide self -healing communication recovery. C. Ethernet network switches shall meet the following minimum performance requirements: 1. Functions: Modular managed switch with store and forward switching mode, 10 Mbps ethernet, or 100 Mbps Fast-Ethernet, or gigabit Ethernet support, multi - address capability, auto-crossing, auto -negotiation, auto -polarity. Port speed and duplex auto-negotiation shall be configurable. 2. Management: Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) (v1/v2/v3) and Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) support; IGMP filtering and snooping. 3. Power Requirements: Redundant +24 VDC power supply 4. Operating Temperature: 0 to 60 degrees C 5. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95% 6. Network Size: Up to 50 nodes in ring structure; otherwise, unlimited 7. Port Type & Quantity (at each PLC location): minimum of four (4) 10/100Base-TX, twisted pair cable, RJ-45 sockets, 0-100 meters LAN segment and two (2) SPF+ ports whose pluggable module can communicate on, single -mode fiber optic cables (9/125 μm), LC sockets, 0-10 km LAN segment 8. Fiber specifications: See Section 40 66 33 – Fiber Optic Systems D. Acceptable industrial Ethernet network switches shall match the owner's existing hardware, which is the Ubiquiti brand. E. Ethernet network switches shall have separate power supplies that match owner's existing hardware, which is the Ubiquiti EdgePower brand. These power supplies shall output 150W of 54VDC. They shall have redundant inputs to the power supplies that depending on the useable are capable of inputting 120VAC and/or 12 VDC. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Network and Communication Equipment Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 66 00-3 2.03 UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE (UTP) A. Unshielded twisted pair cable for drops within buildings shall consist of 4 pair (8 conductors) of 24 AWG copper conductors in a flame -retardant jacket. Cable shall be plenum rated (UL 910) and meet EIA/TIA -568 Category 6 (i.e., Cat6) specifications. Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be Enhanced High Speed cable as manufactured by Belden, or equal. Connectors shall be modular RJ -45 plug. B. Solid conductors shall be used for all field wiring and punch -down applications. For patch cable applications and where installed-flexibility is necessary, such as for movable equipment or across enclosure door hinges, conductors shall be stranded. C. For use as Ethernet, Contractor’s conduit/cable routing shall be limited to the maximum Ethernet length of 295 ft (90m). Capable of 10 GbE speeds at 90m. If this cannot be accomplished, Contractor shall use Shielded Twisted Pair Cable (STP) or design and provide a system utilizing fiber with media conversion or similar to overcome distance and speed limitations, subject to Engineer’s approval. D. Provide copper patch panels where more than one copper communication cable leaves the enclosure. 2.04 SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE (STP, F/UTP, S/UTP, SF/UTP, FTP, F/FTP, S/FTP, SF/FTP) A. To be used when in close proximity to AC wiring , in high noise and EMI environments and/or when 10 GbE speeds not capable with UTP cabling because of EMI interference. B. Shielded twisted pair cable shall consist of 4 pair (8 conductors) of 24 AWG copper conductors with overall aluminum foil with drain wire sheathed in a PVC jacket. Cable shall meet EIA/TIA-568C.2 Category 6 (i.e., Cat6) specifications. Shielded twisted pair cable as manufactured by Belden, or equal. Connectors shall be modular RJ -45 plug. C. Solid conductors shall be used for all field wiring and punch -down applications. D. For use as Ethernet, Contractor’s conduit/cable routing shall be limited to the maximum Ethernet length of 295 ft (90m). Capable of 10 GbE speeds at 90m. If this cannot be accomplished, Contractor shall design and provide a system utilizing fiber with media conversion or similar to overcome distance or speed limitations, subject to Engineer’s approval. E. Provide copper patch panels where more than one copper communication cable leaves the enclosure. F. RJ-45 connectors to be metal strain relief and ground bonding. STP RJ-45 shielded plugs. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Network and Communication Equipment Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 66 00-4 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The destination of all network data cables (both copper and fiber) leaving an enclosure, patch panel, or building shall be labeled at each end using industry -standard wire markers. B. Refer to Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions for additional requirements. C. There shall be up to five (5 ) separate networks as defined by Owner. Enterprise, Voice over IP (VoIP), Security Control System (SCS), Process Control System (PCS)/SCADA, and I/O network (I/O). See Control System Architecture Drawing / Communications Block Diagram for locations, quantities, and design. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-1 SECTION 40 66 33 FIBER OPTIC SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnishing, installing, testing the fiber optic (FO) system. System components include conduit, pull-boxes/handholes/vaults, splice cases, patch panel, and fiber optic cable. B. Provide all tools, supplies, materials, equipment, and all labor necessary for furnishing, constructing, and installing a complete FO system. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 31 00 01 Earthwork. B. Section 31 23 33, Trenching and Backfill 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. ASTM A53 - Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. b. ASTM D1248 - Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials. c. ASTM D1603 - Test Method for Carbon Black in Olefin Plastics. d. ASTM D3035 - Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter. e. ASTM D3349 - Test Method for Absorption Coefficient of Carbon Black Pigmented Ethylene Plastic Film. 2. Electronic Components, Assemblies, and Materials Association (ECA): 310-E, Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment. 3. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 4. S-83-596, Optical Fiber Premises Distribution Cable. 5. S-87-640, Optical Fiber Outside Plant Communications Cable. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-2 6. S-104-696, Indoor-Outdoor Optical Fiber Cable. 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 802.3 -2012, IEEE Standard for Ethernet. 8. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 9001, Quality Management Systems—Requirements. 9. International Telecommunication Union (ITU): T G.652, Characteristics of a Single-mode Optical Fibre and Cable. 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 11. QuEST Forum (QF): TL 9000, Quality Management Systems. 12. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): a. 526-7, OFSTP-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant. b. 568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards. c. 568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. d. 598, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding. e. 606, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure. f. 942, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers B. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Association (TIA/EIA): a. 455-78, FOTP-78 - IEC 60793-1-40 Optical Fibres Part 1-40: Measurement Methods and Text Procedures – Attenuation. b. 455-133, FOTP-133 IEC-60793-1-22 Optical Fibres Part 1-22: Measurement Methods and Test Procedures Length Measurement. c. 492CAAA, Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion -Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers. d. 492CAAB, Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion -Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers with Low Water Peak. e. 604-3, FOCIS-3 Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard, Type SC and SC-APC. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-3 f. TSB-140, Additional Guidelines for Field -Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems-Contains Color. g. UL: 94, Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode. B. dB: Decibel. C. EMB: Effective Modal Bandwidth. D. ETL: Electrical Test Laboratories. E. Flux Budget: Difference between transmitter output power and receiver input power required for signal discrimination when both are expressed in dBm. F. FOS: Fiber Optic System. G. Fusion Splice: Connecting ends of two fibers together by aligning fiber ends and applying electric arc to fuse ends together. H. Hybrid Cable: Cable containing more than one type of fiber. I. LAN: Local Area Network. J. m: Micrometer. K. Mbps: Megabits per Second. L. Mechanical Splice: Connecting ends of two fibers together by means other than fusion. M. Megahertz (MHz): One million cycles per second. N. micro: x 10-6. O. Micron: Micrometer or one millionth meter. P. n, nano: x 10-9. Q. N: Newton. R. nm: Nanometer - unit of measure equal to one billionth meter. S. OFNP: Nonconductive Optical Fiber Plenum Cable. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-4 T. OFNR: Nonconductive Optical Fiber Riser Cable. U. OLTS: Optical Loss Test Sets. V. OTDR: Optical Time Domain Reflectometer. W. Plenum: Air return path of central air handling system, such as open space above suspended ceiling. X. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply. Y. V ac: Volts Alternating Current. Z. VAC: Volts Alternating Current. AA. WAN: Wide Area Network. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Site Layout Diagrams Showing: a. Location of all splices and pull boxes with references to pipeline station numbers. b. Log of duct markings, pull box locations and duct splices. The log will be used to calculate distances between pull boxes. c. Belowgrade conduit routings between access holes and buildings, with conduit counts and identification. d. Belowgrade innerduct routings through conduits, with innerduct counts and identification. 2. Cable Schedule Showing: a. Cable identification. b. Fiber counts for each cable. c. Cable length and attenuation, with two connector pairs and planned number of splice(s), based on TIA 568-C.3, Annex H. 3. Component Data: a. Manufacturer and model number. b. General data and description. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-5 c. Engineering specifications and data sheet. d. Catalog data on: 1) Fiber optic cable. 2) Pull boxes/vaults. 3) Duct, connectors. 4) Duct sealing devices. 5) Duct sealants. 6) Closures. 7) Pull rope. 8) Cable lubricant. 9) Enclosures. 10) Mounting hardware. 11) Identification tape. 12) Pulling equipment. 13) Testing equipment. 14) Splicing hardware and equipment. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Testing and acceptance plan, 30 days prior to beginning of testing. 2. Fiber test results. Documentation covering fiber facility testing, not later than 2 days after testing, showing: a. Manufacturer’s tag of attenuation per fiber as recorded from OTDR reading before shipment. b. Attenuation of each fiber upon delivery to Site. c. Attenuation of each fiber plus connector after installation as recorded from OTDR with tracing. d. Flux Budget calculations with comparison to measured attenuation for each run verifying adequate optical signal strength. 3. Written procedure on the splice method for cable, duct, and cable pull rope. 4. Provide details indicating the method to install conduit and cable. 5. Written procedure on the installation methods that will be used when pulling the fiber optic cable through duct as applicable to this installation. Include a reference to each pull box station where cable, figure eighting and pulling equipment will be stag ed during each pull. 6. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-6 8. Complete manufacturer test results for each cable reel stating conformance to the requirements specified herein. Manufacturer test data shall include Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) traces for each fiber of each reel taken at 1,300 and 1,550 nm wavelengths. Submit OTDR test results on a disc along with the OTDR manufacturer application software for reading the data. 9. Cable pull calculations for each duct run. 10. Plans indicating the location of all splices and pull boxes with references to station numbers. 11. Fiber optic cable and installation qualifications as specified herein. Written statements of compatibility from all manufacturers that state that their product is compatible with the other manufacturer’s products used to furnish and install the fiber optic cable system, i.e., duct manufacturer’s compatibility with pull rope, cable manufacturer’s compatibility with splice trays. 12. Provide a log of duct markings, pull box locations and duct splices. The log will be used to calculate distances between pull boxes. 13. The contractor is required to submit two sets of “Contract Record Drawings” of the completed project. 14. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 15. Operation and Maintenance Data 1.06 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Use qualified personnel, possessing the necessary equipment and having experience in similar installations. Evidence of qualification shall include the following: 1. Written evidence that the Contractor has a minimum of three (3) consecutive years’ recent experience with all aspects of the fiber optic cable system as specified, including the installation of conduit and pull boxes, pulling of fiber optic cable in conduit, splicing and testing of fiber optics, and the installation and testing of all other components of the fiber optic system. Such experience shall include a minimum of three projects with installation and testing of no less than 5,000 feet of continuous fiber optic cable. Retain specialty workers or subcontractors meeting this experience requirement. 2. Written evidence that the proposed fiber optic cable is compliant with all requirements of both Bellcore TR-TSY- 000020 and REA PE-90 certifications. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-7 3. The contractor shall be a qualified Fiber Optics Contractor and must be certified by an approved certification course and have at least two years of experience working with fiber. 4. Provide a list of completed installations similar to this Project including the name, address, and phone number of the owner, the name of the project, type of cable with model number, and the date of completion. Provide separate lists for the contractor, supplier, and cable manufacturer. 5. The name and qualifications of the supervisory personnel that will be directly responsible for the installation of the fiber optic duct system. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING A. Quality assurance testing will be performed by the Contractor. B. Field tests will be performed on each fiber. All fibers will be tested for breaks, abnormalities, and overall attenuation characteristics to be sure that the d B loss at each splice point and test location is in conformance with the requirements specified herein. C. After delivery to the site, and before the cable is installed, an end-to-end OTDR trace for each fiber at both 1,300 and 1,550 nm wavelengths, using the proper index of refraction for that fiber will be performed. These traces shall identify the total optical length. An average optical attenuation measurement (dB/km) shall be made for each fiber at both 1,300 and 1,550 nm wavelengths with an OTDR. Each measurement will be captured on a trace. Any cable delivered containing fiber which does not meet the minimum dB/km loss specified herein or shows macro or micro bend damage shall be rejected. D. A test will be performed of each optical fiber end -to-end for each installed span after cable installation and after any intermediate (non - terminating) splicing is completed. For each fiber, an end to end OTDR trace shall be made at both 1,300 and 1,550 n m wavelengths and shall show total optical length. Testing will be conducted from both ends of the fiber. E. For each installed optical fiber, the following measurements shall not be exceeded: Measured loss less than: (0.0004)L + (0.15)N + 1.0dB (for 1300nm) Measured loss less than: (0.0003)L + (0.15)N + 1.0dB (for 1550nm) Where: L = Optical length of the fiber in meters N = Number of non-terminating splices in the cable F. Any installed fiber optic cables containing one or more fibers not meeting the specified insertion loss above will not be accepted and shall be repaired or replaced. G. Splice testing for each fiber splice will be conducted. The splice test will include bi -directional measurement using an OTDR, operating in the Least Square Approximation (LSA) mode. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-8 Remake and retest splices which exceeds the specified 0.15dB loss figure until compliance is achieved. H. Any test failing to meet the specified requirements shall be deemed non -compliant with the specifications. The Contractor shall repair or replace all deficient materials and equipment. The Contractor shall be backcharged the cost of retesting failing test. Such backcharges shall be deducted from the Contractor’s progress payments. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBER OPTIC CABLE - OUTDOOR A. Provide single-mode fiber optic cable containing the number of strands shown on drawings. B. Single-Mode (OS2): 8.3/125-micron Class IVa dispersion-unshifted optical fibers for use in the backbone distribution subsystem shall meet or exceed requirements of TIA 568-C.3, including the following specifications: 1. Chromatic Dispersion: a. Zero-Dispersion Wavelength: Between 1,302 nm and 1,322 nm. b. Maximum value of dispersion slope at zero dispersion wavelength shall be no greater than 0.093 ps per km-nm2. 2. Mode Field Diameter: Nominal 8.7 microns to 10 microns, with a tolerance of plus or minus 0.5 micron at 1,300 nm. 3. Maximum Attenuation: a. Outdoor and Indoor-Outdoor Optical Fiber Cable: 1) 0.4 dB per km at 1,310 nm. 2) 0.3 dB per km at 1,550 nm. 4. Cutoff Wavelength of Cabled Fiber: Less than 1,260 nm. 5. TIA 492 CAAB (OS2) low water peak and complies with ITU T G.652 (A to D). 6. Individual Fibers: single mode, 9/125 microns. 7. Assembly: a. Nonmetallic, gel-free, dry water blocked, loose-tube fiber core with dielectric strength member enclosed by nonmetallic cross-ply sheath; requires buffer tubing. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-9 b. Cable: Comply with ICEA S-104-696 and RDUP 7 CFR 1755.902. 8. NEC/UL Listing: OFNR. 9. Protective Covering: Black, antifungus, UV -resistant, polyethylene jacket with ripcord. 10. Each fiber shall be individually color coded. Color coding which uses only the color of tube or buffer as a designation is unacceptable. 11. Crush resistance shall be 220 N/cm minimum. 12. Minimum Short Term Pull Strength: 600 lbf. 13. Number of strands: As shown on drawings 14. Intended use (Indoor, Outdoor, Armored): As shown on drawings. 15. Manufacturers and Products: a. Corning Cabling Systems, FREEDM LST Cable 600 lbs – Indoor; FREEDM cable. xxx-EUF-T4101D20 b. Corning Cabling Systems, Altos Loose Tube, Gel-Free, FastAccess – Outdoor, Duct & Aerial, xxxEU4-T4100D20 c. Corning Cabling Systems, Altos Lite Loose Tube, Gel-Free – Outdoor, Armored, xxxEUC-T4100D20 d. Mohawk; RiserLite loose-tube cable. e. Or equal. C. Multi-mode (OM4+): 50/125 microns. 1. None used on this project. 2.02 FIBER OPTIC CABLE DUCT OR CONDUIT A. Conduit and Fittings: 1. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) SDR11 rated as specified in ASTM F 2160. a. HDPE conduit with smooth outer wall and ribbed interior wall. b. Fittings and couplers rated for a minimum of 130 psi. c. Mechanical type couplers when joining HDPE. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-10 d. Color: Orange, unless specified elsewhere. If within a multi-conduit duct bank, colors shall be in order: blue, orange, green, brown, slate, white, red, black. e. When referenced as a 4-pack, it means provide 4 of these conduits at 1.25” each in a bundle. f. Provide a single No. 12 black conductor, stranded copper, UF 600V wire (tracer wire) secured to outside of HDPE. Provide 3 feet of cable coiled inside pull boxes clearly labeled as tracer wire and direction of travel of cable. g. Manufactured by: 1) Integral Corp. 2) Dura-line 3) or equal. 2. Innerduct - HDPE a. HDPE microduct with an outside/inside diameter of 0.500/0.394 inch (12.7/10 mm) or 0.630/0.512 inch (16/13 mm) or 0.709/0.551 (18/14 mm), as shown. b. Microduct having a ribbed interior. c. Watertight couplers rated for a minimum of 200 psi. d. Microduct bundle within a single 0.100 inch thick polyethylene oversheath. e. Microduct bundles must contain a factory installed #16 AWG solid, insulated locate wire and a minimum of two rip cords for removal of oversheath. 3. Innerduct – Fabric a. Installed using a ball-bearing installation swivel(s) as per manufacturer’s instructions. b. Pull rope in each cell. c. Use manufacturer's cable lubricant. d. Manufacturer: 1) Maxcell. 4. Where shown Schedule 40 PVC rated at 194° F as specified in NEMA TC -2, NEMA TC-3, ASTM D 2241 and UL listed. 5. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS) Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-11 a. Meet requirements of ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. b. Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated protective layer. c. If installed below ground, conduit to be wrapped in 3M Scotchrap Vinyl Corrosion Protection Tape 51, 20 mil. 6. Flexible watertight conduit and fittings as specified. 7. All conduits used for communications to be proofed before installation proceeds. Proofed as per manufacturer. If not provided, then per industry standard. 8. The ducts shall be kept sealed at all times to prevent water and foreign material from entering the ducts. 9. For duct that will not be immediately used, seal duct at both ends to prevent moisture from entering. Repair any damaged duct immediately to keep water from entering duct. 10. At duct splicing locations provide sufficient cable pull rope beyond the ends of the duct to allow for splicing of cable pull rope. 11. Use manufacturer approved methods and materials to splice the cable pull rope and duct. Spliced sections of rope are to withstand the maximum pull tension available by the pulling equipment used without damaging the integrity of the duct while pulling. 2.03 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE CLOSURE ASSEMBLY A. If there are mid-span splices, the splices shall be in a re -enterable splice closure assembly with removable splice organizer trays. The splice closure assembly shall consist of individually accessible splice trays and an inner and outer closure. Fill the outer closure with an encapsulant to provide a moisture -proof seal. Splice closure assemblies shall have an external grounding lug and be grounded to ground rods installed in the pull box. All required accessories to complete the splice. B. Manufacturers: 1. 1-144 strands, Tyco #FOSC450-B6-6-24-1-V3B 2. 144-576 strands, Tyco #FOSC450-D6-6-72-1-V3D 3. AT&T UCB1 with a Type 2000 outer closure 4. Siecor SC5 5. Or equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-12 2.04 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE TRAYS A. Fiber optic splices shall be made by the fusion process with a loss no greater than 0.15 d B per splice. The splice trays shall be consistent and suitable for use with the type of cable provided. 1. One buffer/loose-tube per splice tray. 2. Splice protection sleeves to be used. 3. Cover to protect the terminations and splices stored within Splice Closure. 4. Quantity as required. 2.05 SEALED BUSHINGS A. Furnish and install sealing devices at the ends of all conduits or ducts. Duct or conduit ends shall be covered at all times to prevent water and debris from entering duct. Blank duct plugs shall be attached to the pull rope or tape previously installed in any empty conduit and the conduit sealed. Sealing bushings shall be sealed in duct around cable and shall be mechanically tightened. Provide split inner-duct plug. 1. Manufactured by: a. Jack Moon Ltd. b. Arnco c. Tyco d. or equal. B. Furnish and install sealed bushings (installed from exterior side of box) for conduit entering pull boxes. Seal around all ducts penetrations entering or exiting pull boxes. Use mechanically expanding bushings. 2. Manufactured by: a. Jack Moon Ltd. b. George Ingraham c. Tyco d. or equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-13 2.06 CABLE LUBRICANT A. Furnish cable lubricant in an amount necessary to meet a minimum application rate of 3 gallons per 1000 feet. The cable lubricant shall be compatible for use within the duct and shall facilitate fiber optic cable pulling. The cable lubricant shall be Integ ral LUBADUK, or equal. 2.07 FIBER OPTIC PULL BOXES A. All hand-holes designed Pull Boxes shall be pre-cast polymer concrete. B. Fiber optic cable pull box sizing is dependent on their use as follows: 1. Box Type I-PC, 13” width, 24” long, 24” deep. (Type 1) 2. Box Type II-PC, 24” width, 36” long, 36” deep. (Type 2) 3. Box Type III-PC, 30” width, 48” long, 36” deep. (Type 3) 4. On this project Type III-PC will be used in all locations designed as Pull Box. Other hand-hole designated types specified herein. C. Terminal duct entrances in the walls shall permit underground conduit penetrations. D. The lid integral name plate shall read "COMMUNICATIONS" with square block capital letters. The letters shall be a minimum of 1 -1/4" tall, raised 1/16", with spacing between letters at 1/2". A blank space shall be left at both ends of the square block lette r wording. 2-piece lid. E. If drawings call out a traffic rated pull box, provide traffic bearing precast concrete pull boxes designed for HS-20 loading as located on drawings. 1. Manufacturer: a. Oldcastle Polymer 3048-36 b. Or equal. 2.08 FIBER OPTIC (COMMUNICATIONS) VAULTS A. Vault Base, Concrete pre-cast 1. Provide 4’x4’x3’ inside dimensions with knock-outs. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-14 2. Integral floor (body slab) 3. Include mastic designed for this vault and correct lid. 4. Provide with grade rings & risers, lifters, pulling irons, drainage sumps, term -a-duct, knockouts, and racking. 5. Terminal duct entrances in the walls shall permit underground conduit penetrations. 6. Manufacturer: a. Oldcastle Precast 504-B-PCORP b. Or equal. B. Vault Top with Locking Galvanized Steel Frame and Cover 1. Standard use case, incidental traffic rated. 2. Non-Slip 3. Cast-in flush. 4. Integral name plate in lid shall read "COMMUNICATIONS" with square block capital letters. The letters shall be a minimum of 1 -1/4" tall, raised 1/16", with spacing between letters at 1/2". A blank space shall be left at both ends of the square block letter wording. 5. Manufacturer: a. Oldcastle Precast 55-332P-PCORP b. Or equal. C. Vault Top with Manhole Lid 1. For use when a vault is to be full traffic rated . 2. Integral name plate in lid shall read "COMMUNICATIONS" 3. Manufacturer: a. Oldcastle Precast 55-38C-PCORP b. Or equal. 2.09 CABLE IDENTIFICATION TAPE A. Cable identification tape shall be a plastic-coated orange tape not less than 6 inches in width. The tape shall have a continuous legend reading "FIBER OPTIC CABLE" in black lettering. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-15 Tape splices shall be per tape manufacturer’s recommendations. The tape shall be Panduit, Terra Tape, Brady and Blackburns, or equal. B. Install the cable identification tape, one (1) foot above the conduit. 2.10 LOCATING WIRE A. 12-gauge, copper, stranded UF, black coated, 600V tracing wire installed beside and loosely attached to the fiber optic conduit with at least 3 feet on each end coiled inside pull boxes clearly labeled as tracer wire and direction of travel of cable. B. Terminal test stations located in pull boxes attached to a short RGS conduit and mounted on inside of pull box: Three-Terminal test station, Manufactured by Farr West Corrosion Control, Model T2, or equal. 2.11 CABLE PULL ROPE A. The cable pull rope shall be constructed of a solid braid polyethylene jacket with a polyester core. The duct manufacturer shall certify that the cable pull rope is compatible for use with pulling fiber optic cable and fiber optic cable with extruded high tensile strength duct. B. If innerduct is installed that provides from the manufacturer pre -installed pull rope, additional rope not needed. 2.12 GROUND ROD A. The contractor shall use a 10 foot by 5/8 inch copper clad ground rod. B. Installed within pull box/vault in corner. C. An 8 foot by 5/8 inch is permitted by the NEC, if the rod is completely buried and the ground has 8 feet contact with the soil (Article 250.53(G)). D. Resistance to ground shall be 25 Ohms or less to ground. E. Cable connections to ground rob shall use a compression fitting. 1. Manufacturer: a. Harger CGCX series, b. Panduit, c. or equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-16 2.13 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS A. Provide fiber optic patch panels, all required mounting plates, adapter plates and hardware. All fibers of the fiber optic cables shall be terminated in this patch panel. The location of the patch panel is as per drawings and shall be approved by the Engineer. B. Wall mounted or Rack mounted as per drawings. C. Each patch panel shall be sized to accommodate all fiber strands of the fiber cables and the required patch cords. Provide patch panels, adapter plates, and SC connectors as required. D. Shall accommodate pre-terminated splice cassettes in subclause 2.14 CONNECTORS of this document. E. Manufacturer: 1. Leviton 2. Panduit Opti-Com 3. Corning CCH-0xU 4. Or Equal. 2.14 CONNECTORS A. General: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA 604-2, TIA/EIA 604-3, TIA/EIA 604-12, and TIA 568-C.3. 2. SC connectors. 3. Pull Strength: 0.2 N minimum. 4. Durability: Sustain minimum 500 mating cycles without violating other requirements. 5. Ferrules: Free-floating low loss ceramic. 6. Polarizing key on duplex connector systems. 7. Attenuation: a. In accordance with TIA 568-C.3. b. Maximum of 0.5 dB per connector pair. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-17 8. Connectors are to be pre-terminated fiber optic cassette with pigtails to be fusion spliced to the fiber cable. 9. Manufacturer: a. Panduit Opti-Com FCS9N-12-03P b. Corning CCH-CS12-59-P00RE c. AFL Poli-MOD PM-L-12-USC-0-S-01 d. Or equal. 2.15 FIBER OPTIC JUMPER/PATCH CORDS A. Jumper/Patch Cords that are: 1. Factory made. 2. Buffered 3. Duplex 4. Strengthened with aramid yarn 5. Contain no splices or mid-length couplers 6. Outer jacket color a. Orange for multimode OM1 & OM2 jumpers b. Aqua for multimode OM4 jumpers c. Yellow for single mode jumpers 7. When connection to devices, utilize SC connectors on one end and LC on the other. When making pass-through connections both sides will be SC connectors. B. Clean all connectors utilizing an alcohol-free wipe. C. Provide to owner, fiber optics connector tip cleaners. Push motion and ‘click’. One (1) each of 1.25mm, for LC connectors, and 2.5mm, for SC connectors, cleaners. Fluke QuickClean -1.25- 5P and Fluke QuickClean-2.5-5P, or equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-18 2.16 DUCT SPACER A. The Contractor shall use duct spacers (Duct Donut Spacer) to bundle the 1 -1/4-inch fiber optic conduits, including the tracer wire conduit, into a multi -duct system while maintaining proper spacing. 2.17 FIBER OTPICS MARK POST A. Fiber Optic Cable Marking Line Post. 3”x6’ Black on Orange. Bendable, impact resistant. Reflective marking stating Buried Fiber Optic Cable. Contact information for Owner to also be on each marker post. Fiber Instrument Sales F1FLEX, or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. The duct system shall be installed in the trench as shown on Drawings and backfilled bedding material and material that was removed from trench. Encase conduits with a minimum of 3” of concrete cover all around for all in street or street crossings, also an additional 15’ on either side of the crossing. All other locations are to be covered with 3” of CLSM. 1. On this project an additional requirement of fully concrete encased communications and power conduits that are located on the LCWTP site. Minimum 3” of concrete cover. B. Manufactured sweeps shall be used to limit bending of the conduits to a minimum radius of 10 feet. C. For change in direction exceeding 45 degrees in either the horizontal or vertical direction, use a duct bend radius of at least 10 feet, or install a pull box if bend radius must be less than 10 feet. D. The tracer wires are for exclusive use of the District and care shall be taken to be sure the tracer wire conduits begin and end at the correct pull boxes. Marking or coloring shall be required to maintain accurate identification. Place the identification tape and tracer wire or identification tape/tracer wire above the top of the duct. E. The multi-duct system shall be anchored in the trench to prevent displacement of the ducts during the placement of the flowable fill. F. The tracer wires and the pulling tapes, shall be installed after the conduits are secured and have been proofed with an approved mandrel. G. The ducts shall be kept sealed at all times to prevent water and foreign material from enter the ducts. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-19 H. For duct that will not be immediately used, seal duct at both ends to prevent moisture from entering. Repair any damaged duct immediately to keep water from entering duct. I. At duct splicing locations provide sufficient cable pull rope beyond the ends of the duct to allow for splicing of cable pull rope. J. Use manufacturer approved methods and materials to splice the cable pull rope and duct. Spliced sections of rope are to withstand the maximum pull tension available by the pulling equipment used without damaging the integrity of the duct while pulling. 3.02 LOCATION OF FACILITIES A. The Plans diagrammatically indicate the desired location and arrangement of pull boxes, cable runs, and other elements of the fiber optic cable system. Determine exact locations in the field based on the size and arrangement of specified materials, capabil ities of installation equipment, finished elevations, allowable cable pulling tensions and obstructions. 3.03 FIBER OPTIC CABLE PULL ROPE INSTALLATION A. Install cable pull rope in all fiber optic conduits in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. All installation equipment and methods shall be reviewed and allowed by the Construction Manager prior to installation. All installation of cable pul l rope shall be witnessed by the Construction Manager’s field representative. B. Clean and test the duct prior to installing the cable pull rope. As a clearance test, pass through the duct a rigid mandrel with a length not less than 12 inches and a diameter 1/4-inch less than the inside diameter of the duct. Remove foreign materials, e arth, sand, and gravel from the duct. The Construction Manager’s field representative shall be present to observe and approve duct testing. 3.04 SWIVEL AND GRIPS A. Insert a reliable nonfreezing type of swivel between the pulling line and the cable pulling grip to prevent twisting under strain. Equip the swivel with shear or tension pins with a breaking strength of 600 pounds. Do not pull cable without a breakaway swi vel. Each cable to have its own swivel. B. Use woven wire grips to pull the cable. The grips shall have a minimum length of 18 inches, and shall be applied to the cable in conformance to the cable manufacturer’s standard recommendations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-20 3.05 MARKER POST A. Install a utility marker post at buried terminal locations (or at offsets of the terminal location) of the fiber optic conduit. Submit for approval a post that is at least 5 feet tall (at least 2 foot burial), heavy duty plastic, be a safety yellow color, high-gloss, and shall attach an underground utility warning tape. 3.06 WARNING TAPE A. Install warning tape 6 inches above top of fiber system. Provide separate warning tape for each conduit or duct unless they are installed side by side in same trench. 3.07 PREPARATION A. Conduit: 1. Ensure installed conduit system conforms to fiber optic system requirements, including: a. Conduits and Innerducts: Size and number. b. Access Holes, Handholes, Pull Boxes, and Vaults: Location and size, to ensure cables and innerducts may be installed without exceeding manufacturer’s limitations. c. Outlet Boxes: Size to coordinate with outlet cover plates for adequate volume and bend radius. 2. Spare Conduit: No cables shall be pulled into spare conduit. 3. Expansion Plugs: Seal conduit to stop ingress of water and grit with fabricated expansion plugs. 4. Ensure duct bank, conduit, and other confined routing is free and clear of debris before cable placement. B. Innerduct: 1. In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Identify innerducts at both ends by methods such as color-coding or waterproof tags wired through innerduct wall. 3. Sealing: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-21 a. Cabled Innerducts: Seal cables into innerducts to stop ingress of water and grit with fabricated expansion seals that have separate seals for each cable. b. Innerduct to Conduit: Seal gaps between innerducts and conduit with sealing compound such as 3M Ductseal. c. Empty Innerducts: After installation, seal with fabricated expansion plugs to stop ingress of water and grit. Remove plugs as required to install cables. 3.08 INSTALLATION A. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Specified fiber counts, routing, origination, and terminating points are indicated on Drawings. 2. Installation by manufacturer’s certified installer. 3. Install cables in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. 4. Install cable directly from shipping reels. Ensure that cable is: a. Not dented, nicked, or kinked. b. Not subjected to pull stress greater than manufacturer’s specification. c. Not bent to a radius below manufacturer’s minimum bend radius. d. Not subjected to treatment that may damage fiber strands during installation. 5. Cables per Conduit or Innerduct: As indicated on Drawings. 6. If calculation indicates cable will attenuate signals more than 8 dB, reroute may be allowed if approved by Engineer. 7. Splices: Install fiber optic cables in unspliced lengths from fiber source to destination as indicated on Drawings. 8. Connector: Insertion loss on multimode connections exceeding 0.5 dB and 0.4 dB on single-mode connections not permitted. 9. Identification: a. Identify cable on both ends, in access holes, and pull points. b. In accordance with TIA 606. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-22 10. Arrange cable, equipment, and hardware to provide neat appearance and accessibility for servicing. 11. Access Holes: a. While maintaining minimum bend radius, lace cables neatly to supports to keep them out of way of personnel. B. Fiber Center, Fiber Distribution Frame, Housing, Panel, Splice Tray: Install securely in field panels or enclosures as shown on Drawings. C. Cable Terminations: 1. In accordance with TIA 568-C.3. 2. Use factory terminate connectors that are fusion spliced to fiber cable . 3. If approved by Engineer, fan out fiber cable to allow direct connectorization of connectors. a. Sleeve over individual fibers with transparent furcation tubes. b. At point of convergence of furcation tubes, provide strain relief with metal or high density plastic fan-out collar. 4. Break-out Kits: a. Terminate cables using manufacturer-supplied break-out kits. b. Terminate in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 5. Slack: a. Fiber Centers, Hubs, and Switches: Minimum, 3 -meter slack fiber at each end, coiled neatly in cable management equipment. b. Communications Management Outlets: Minimum, 1 -meter slack fiber, coiled neatly in outlet box. 6. Connectors: a. Terminate 100 percent of fibers in each cable to specified connector. b. Connectors to be installed/connected into adapter plates within fiber management system. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-23 D. Conduit: Install in accordance with Section 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfill and as shown on Drawings. E. Fiber optic marker posts, to be driven in every 250’ along buried fiber optic conduits. F. GPS location of conduit, every 100’ for long straight runs, every 20’ in congested areas which include around pull boxes/vaults. All pull boxes/vaults GPS points must be provided in format that allows for import into District’s GIS software. 3.09 LABELING CONVENTIONS A. Conform to TIA 606 or to requirements specified by Construction Manager. B. Backbone (Riser) Cables: Coordinate labeling conventions with Construction Manager. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Advise Construction Manager at least 24 hours in advance of each test. Construction Manager shall have option to witness and participate actively in tests. 2. Provide equipment, instrumentation, supplies, and skilled certified staff necessary to perform testing. 3. Outlets, cables, patch panels, and associated components shall be fully assembled and labeled prior to field testing. 4. Testing performed on incomplete systems shall be redone on completion of the Work. 5. Document Test Results: Confirm each cable has at least specified number of fibers that meet standards. 6. Confirm quantities and sizes of conduit and innerduct, in accordance with As -Built Conduit/Innerduct Installation form included as Supplement to this section. B. Test Equipment: 1. Field test instruments shall have latest software and firmware installed. 2. Optical Fiber Cable Testers: a. Field test instrument shall be within calibration period recommended by manufacturer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-24 b. Optical Loss Test Set (OLTS): 1) Single-mode Optical Fiber Light Source: i. Provide dual laser light sources with central wavelengths of 1,310 nm plus or minus 20 nm) and 1,550 nm (plus or minus 20 nm). ii. Output Power: Minus 10 dBm, minimum. iii. Manufacturer: Fluke Networks. 2) Power Meter: i. Provide 850 nm, 1,300/1,310 nm, and 1,550 nm wavelength test capability. ii. Power Measurement Uncertainty: Plus or minus 0.25 dB. iii. Store reference power measurement. iv. Save at least 100 results in internal memory. v. PC interface (USB). vi. Manufacturer: Fluke Networks. 3) Optional Length Measurement: Capable of measuring optical length of fiber using time-of-flight techniques. 3. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR): a. Bright, color transmissive LCD display with backlight. b. Rechargeable for 8 hours of normal operation. c. Weight with battery and module of not more than 4.5 pounds and volume of not more 200 cubic inches. d. Internal nonvolatile memory and removable memory device with at least 16 MB capacity for results storage. e. USB port to transfer data to PC. f. Single-mode OTDR: 1) Wavelengths: 1,310 nm (plus or minus 20 nm) and 1,550 nm (plus or minus 20 nm). Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-25 2) Event Dead Zone: 2 meters maximum at 1,310 nm and 2 meters maximum at 1,550 nm. 3) Attenuation Dead Zone: 15 meters maximum at 1,310 nm and 15 meters maximum at 1,550 nm. 4) Distance Range: Minimum 10,000 meters. 5) Dynamic Range: Minimum 10 dB at 1,310 nm and 1,550 nm. 4. Fiber Microscope: a. Magnification: 250X or 400X for end -face inspection. b. Manufacturer: Fluke Networks. 5. Integrated OLTS, OTDR, and Fiber Microscope: a. Test equipment that combines into one instrument such as OLTS, OTDR, and fiber microscope may be used. b. Manufacturer: Fluke Networks. C. Conduit Test: 1. Test and seal spare conduits. 2. Conduit and Innerduct Testing: a. Blow full-diameter mouse through each spare conduit and innerduct to verify they are unrestricted over full length. b. If conduit is restricted over full length, advise Engineer. 3. Documentation: Confirm conduit test As-Built Conduit/Innerduct Installation form documentation includes details of innerducts. D. Cable Testing: 1. Test procedures and field test instruments shall comply with applicable requirements of: a. LIA Z136.2. b. TIA/EIA 455-78. c. TIA/EAI 455-133. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-26 d. TIA 526-7. e. TIA 526-14. f. TIA 568-C.1. g. TIA 568-C.3. h. TIA TSB 140. 2. Test attenuation and polarity of installed cable plant with OLTS and installed condition of cabling system and its components with OTDR. 3. Verify condition of fiber end face. 4. Perform on each cabling link (connector to connector). 5. Perform on each cabling channel (equipment to equipment). 6. Do not include active devices or passive devices within link or channel other than cable, connectors, and splices. For example, link attenuation does not include such devices as optical bypass switches, couplers, repeaters, or optical amplifiers. 7. Document Tests: a. OLTS dual wavelength attenuation measurements for single -mode links and channels. b. OTDR traces and event tables for single -mode links and channels. E. Fiber Testing Parameters: 1. Each cabling link shall be in compliance with the following test limits: a. Optical Loss Testing: 1) Backbone (single-mode) Link: i. Calculate link attenuation by the formulas specified in TIA 568-C.1. ii. Values for Attenuation Coefficient (dB/km) are listed in the table below: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-27 Attenuation Coefficient Type of Optical Fiber Wavelength (nm) Attenuation Coefficient (dB/km) Wavelength (nm) Attenuation Coefficient (dB/km) Single-mode (Inside plant) 1,310 0.5 1,550 0.5 Single-mode (Outside plant) 1,310 0.5 1,550 0.5 b. OTDR Testing: 1) Reflective Events: Maximum 0.75 dB. 2) Nonreflective Events: Maximum 0.3 dB. c. Magnified Endface Inspection: 1) Visually inspect fiber connections for end -face quality. 2) Scratched, pitted, or dirty connectors shall be diagnosed and corrected. F. Diagnosis and Correction: 1. Installed cabling links and channels shall be field tested and pass test requirements and analysis as described herein. 2. Link or channel that fails these requirements shall be diagnosed and corrected. 3. Document corrective action and follow with new test to prove corrected link or channel meets performance requirements. 4. Provide final and passing result of tests for links and channels. G. Acceptance: Acceptance of test results shall be given in writing after Project is tested and completed in accordance with Contract Documents and satisfaction of Construction Manager. H. Test Execution: 1. Optical Fiber Cable Testing: a. Tests performed that use laser or LED in test set shall be carried out with safety precautions in accordance with LIA Z136.2. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-28 b. Link and channel test results from OLTS and OTDR shall be recorded in test instrument upon completion of each test for subsequent uploading to a PC in which administrative documentation may be generated. 1) Record end-face images in memory of test instrument for subsequent uploading to a PC and reporting. c. Perform Testing: 1) On each cabling segment (connector to connector). 2) On each cabling channel (equipment to equipment). 3) Using high-quality test cords of same fiber type as cabling under test. i. Test cords for OLTS testing shall be between 1 meter and 5 meters in length. ii. Test cords for OTDR testing shall be approximately 100 meter for launch cable and at least 25 meters for receive cable. 2. Optical Loss Testing (OLTS): a. Backbone Link: 1) Test single-mode at 1,310 nm and 1,550 nm in accordance with TIA 526-7, Method A.1, One Reference Jumper or equivalent method. 2) Perform tests in both directions. 3. OTDR Testing: a. Test backbone, horizontal, and centralized links at appropriate operating wavelengths for anomalies and to ensure uniformity of cable attenuation and connector insertion loss. 1) Single-mode: 1,310 nm and 1,550 nm. 2) Multi-mode: 850 nm and 1,300 nm. b. Test each fiber link and channel in one direction. c. Install launch cable between OTDR and first link connection. d. Install receive cable after last link connection. 4. Length Measurement: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-29 a. Record length of each fiber. b. Measure optical length using OLTS or OTDR. 5. Polarity Testing: a. Test paired duplex fibers in multifiber cables to verify polarity in accordance with subclause 10.3 of TIA/EIA 568-C.1. b. Verify polarity of paired duplex fibers using OLTS. 6. Test Results Documentation: a. Test results saved within field-test instrument shall be transferred into Windows- based database utility that allows for maintenance, inspection, and archiving of test records. These test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered. For example, “as saved in the field-test instrument.” The file format, CSV (comma separated value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and shall not be used. Test results to be provided as PDF documents including any applicable graphs. b. Available for inspection by Construction Manager representative during installation period. Submit within 5 working days of completion of tests on cabling served by a telecommunications room or of backbone cabling. c. Database for Project, including twisted -pair copper cabling links, if applicable, shall be stored and delivered on CD-ROM prior to Owner acceptance of building. CD-ROM shall include software tools required to view, inspect, and print test reports. d. Circuit IDs reported by test instrument shall match specified label identification. e. Provide in electronic database for each tested optical fiber with the following information: 1) Identification of Site. 2) Name of test limit selected to execute stored test results. 3) Name of personnel performing test. 4) Date and time test results were saved in memory of tester. 5) Manufacturer, model, and serial number of field test instrument. 6) Version of test software and version of test limit database held within test instrument. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-30 7) Fiber identification number. 8) Length for Each Optical Fiber: Optionally the index of refraction used for length calculation when using a length capable OLTS. 9) Test results to include OLTS attenuation link and channel measurements at appropriate wavelength and margin; difference between measured attenuation and test limit value. 10) Test results to include OTDR link and channel traces, and event tables at appropriate wavelength. 11) Length for each optical fiber as calculated by the OTDR. 12) Overall pass/fail evaluation of link-under-test for OLTS and OTDR measurements. I. Drawings: 1. Record Copy: Provide at end of Project on CD-ROM. a. CAD format and include notations reflecting as-built conditions of additions and variations from Drawings provided, such as to cable path and termination point. b. CAD drawings are to incorporate test data imported from test instruments. 2. As-built Drawings: a. Include, but not limited to block diagrams, frame and cable labeling, and cable termination points. b. Include field changes made up to construction completion: 1) Field directed changes to pull schedule. 2) Backbone cable routing or location changes. 3) Associated detail drawings. 3.11 TRAINING A. Train Construction Manager staff in the following skills: 1. Splicing fibers. 2. Testing quality of connectors, splices and fibers. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/5/2023 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Fiber Optic System Cottonwoods Connection 40 66 33-31 B. Schedule: Provide one 8-hour training session on a weekday, to suit Construction Manager’s schedule. C. Materials: Provide hardware for training, including fibers, connectors, and splice kits. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 00-1 SECTION 40 67 00 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT, PANELS, AND RACKS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place, in satisfactory operation the control enclosures, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. B. Control enclosures shall be assembled, wired, and tested in the instrumentation subcontractor's own facilities, unless specified otherwise. All components and all necessary accessories such as power supplies, conditioning equipment, mounting hardware, sign al input and output terminal blocks, and plug strips that may be required to complete the system shall be provided. C. Either manufacturer’s standard or custom enclosures may be furnished subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents and favorable review by the Owner. D. Due consideration shall be given to installation requirements for enclosures in new and existing structures. The Contractor shall examine plans and field inspect new and existing structures as required to determine installation requirements and shall coordinate the installation of all enclosures with the Owner and all affected contractors. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with installation of enclosures, including repair of damage to structures (incidental, accidental or unavoida ble). E. The terms enclosure, cabinet, and panel shall be considered the same product and are used interchangeably. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 62 00 – Computer System Hardware and Ancillaries C. Section 40 78 00 – Panel Mounted Instruments D. Section 40 78 56 – Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors E. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems F. Refer to Division 26 for additional requirements for conductors, circuit breakers, disconnect switches, etc. 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 00-2 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Thermal calculations. B. Proof of circuit breaker selective coordination. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. For locations inside buildings in areas other than climate controlled (i.e., heated and air conditioned) electrical or control rooms, panel shall be Type 316 stainless steel NEMA 4X construction, or as indicated for hazardous area classification (Class, Di vision, at a minimum), or submersible, NEMA 6, applications. Epoxy coated cast copper -free aluminum construction shall also be acceptable for NEMA 4, 6 and 7 applications. B. For locations in storage/feed areas for chlorine or other applicable corrosive chemicals, panel shall be of non-metallic construction, rated NEMA 4X, and be fully compatible with the associated chemical. C. For locations within climate controlled (i.e., heated and air -conditioned) electrical or control rooms, panel shall be a painted steel fully enclosed NEMA 12 units with gasketed doors. D. For outdoor locations, panel shall be Type 316L stainless steel NEMA 4X construction unless located in chlorine environments. Chlorine environment shall be nonmetallic NEMA 4X construction. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINET AND PANELS A. Cabinets and panels shall be formed or welded construction, reinforced with Unistrut, Powerstrut, or equal to facilitate mounting of internal components or equipment. Sufficient access plates and doors shall be provided to facilitate maintenance and testin g of the cabinet's equipment. Doors shall be removable. Cabinets and panels with any dimension 36 inches or greater shall be provided with removable lifting lugs designed to facilitate safe moving and lifting of the panel during installation. All doors sha ll be fitted with common-keyed locks. B. Cabinets and panels shall be minimum 14 USS gauge. Cabinets and panels with any dimension greater than 36 inches shall be 12 USS gauge. C. Cabinets and panels shall have doors on the front and shall be designed for front access. NEMA 12 cabinets shall be fitted with three-point door latch. Doors for NEMA 4X cabinets shall be all stainless steel with three-point latches. Door hardware on NEMA 4X cabinets located in chemical storage/feed areas shall be non -corrosive in that environment. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 00-3 D. Panels and cabinets located outside fence -secured areas shall be fitted with padlockable latch kits. Coordinate keying with Owner. E. All cabinets and panels shall be provided with drawing pockets for as -built panel drawings. One copy of the appropriate panel as -built drawings shall be furnished and left in the pocket of each panel. F. Panels with any dimension greater than 36 inches that contain a programmable controller (PLC) shall be provided with a folding laptop programmer shelf on the inside of the door. When deployed, the laptop shelf shall not be greater than 48 inches above finished floor. Laptop shelf shall be fitted to door with factory applied weld -studs or with factory provided hardware. Weld discoloration will not be accepted. Enclosure penetrations must maintain UL Listing. G. Unless otherwise noted, panel-mounted control devices (OIUs, hand switches, etc.) requiring operator access shall be mounted between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or work platform. H. Cabinets and panels shall be prefabricated cabinets and panels by Hoffman or Saginaw Control and Engineering (SCE). The Contractor may optionally provide cabinets that are custom-fabricated by the instrumentation subcontractor or by a reputable panel fabrication shop acceptable to the Engineer. 2.02 FIELD PANELS A. Field panels for outdoor service shall be suitable for wall or pipe mounting. Panels shall have the following features: 1. Hinged and foamed-in-place continuous gasketed door(s). Door material shall match enclosure and shall have piano hinge(s) and three -point latches. 2. Field panels located outside fence-secured areas shall be fitted with staple and hasp or other padlockable factory hardware. Provide padlock and coordinate keying with Owner. 3. Thermal insulation and thermostatically controlled space heaters where required to prevent condensation or maintain environmental conditions for installed components. 4. External sun shields or shades constructed of the same materials as the associated enclosure, unless otherwise specified. Sun shield or shade shall be fitted to enclosure supports and not to enclosure. Sun shield or shade shall have a slightly sloped top to shed water and shall extend past the front of the enclosure by at least 6 inches and extend down the side and back of enclosure. B. All external sample/process piping, including valves and appurtenances, shall be insulated with weather-proof insulation and heat-taped to prevent freezing. Heat taping shall be thermostatically controlled and self -regulating, and shall adjust its heat output to Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 00-4 the temperature of the lines. Heat tape shall be powered from an equipment -safety GFCI circuit from within panel, unless otherwise shown or specified. C. Field panels shall be adequately sized to house instruments, power supplies, surge protection, and appurtenant equipment required for operation. Sufficient space shall be provided for servicing instruments without removal of equipment from the enclosure. D. Field panels shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, Saginaw Control & Engineering (SCE), or equal. 2.03 CABINET AIR CONDITIONING UNITS & HEATER A. Where indicated or required due to ambient conditions and panel component ratings, panel-mounted closed loop air conditioning units and thermostatically controlled space heaters shall be provided. B. Air conditioning units shall both cool and dehumidify the cabinet's internal air. Each air conditioner shall be sized to handle current and future (with specified spare capacity filled) heat loadings from all equipment mounted inside the cabinet. C. Air conditioners shall be provided with thermostats which operate the centrifugal evaporator blowers continuously to prevent stratification of air within the cabinet. Compressors shall operate as needed to maintain the temperature set at the thermostat. Compressors shall be provided with space heaters to maintain the compressor at a minimum temperature during cold ambient temperatures. D. Ambient air shall be completely separated from the air inside the cabinet. All air conditioner components exposed to the atmosphere outside the cabinets shall be coated to prevent corrosion. E. Power supply shall be 115VAC, 60 Hz. Units shall be provided with EMI/RFI noise suppressors. F. Air conditioner enclosures shall be constructed of stainless steel or cold rolled steel which is phosphatized and finished in baked enamel. G. Cabinet air conditioners shall be ProAir CR Series as manufactured by McLean Midwest of Brooklyn Park, MN, or equal. 2.04 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Terminal blocks shall be assembled on non-current carrying galvanized steel DIN mounting rails securely bolted to the cabinet subpanel. Terminals shall be of the screw down pressure plate type as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, Weidmuller, Wieland, Square D, or equal. B. Power terminal blocks for both 120 VAC and 24 VDC power shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts, 30 amps. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 00-5 C. Signal terminal blocks shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts, 20 amps. 2.05 NAMEPLATES A. Items of equipment installed in control panels shall be identified with nameplates. Each nameplate shall be located so that it is readable from the normal observation position and is clearly associated with the device or devices it identifies. Nameplates shall be positioned so that removal of the device for maintenance and rep air shall not disturb the nameplate. Nameplates shall include, as necessary, the equipment identification number, description, calibrated range, and set point(s). Abbreviations of the description shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. B. Nameplates shall be made of 1/16-inch thick machine engraved laminated phenolic plastic having white numbers and letters not less than 3/16-inch high on a black background. Nameplates attached to instruments may be black laser etched 1/8 -inch high text on stainless steel with sharp edges made smooth. Stamped text shall not be acceptable. C. Nameplates shall be attached to metal equipment by NEMA rated stainless steel screws and to other surfaces by an epoxy -based adhesive that is resistant to oil and moisture. In cases where the label cannot be attached by the above methods, it shall be drill ed and attached to the associated device by means of a braided stainless steel wire affixed with a permanent crimp. Attachment by stainless steel screws shall not derate NEMA rating. D. Submit sample nameplate of each type. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. The cabinet itself and all interior and exterior equipment shall be identified with nameplates. The equipment shall be mounted such that service can occur without removal of other equipment. Face mounted equipment shall be flush or semi -flush mounted with flat black escutcheons. All equipment shall be accessible such that adjustments can be made while the equipment is in service and operating. All enclosures shall fit within the all ocated space as shown on the Drawings. B. Enclosures shall provide mounting for power supplies, control equipment, input/output subsystems, panel -mounted equipment and appurtenances. Ample space shall be provided between equipment to facilitate servicing and cooling. C. Enclosures shall be sized to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted inside the panel. If required, one or more of the following shall be provided to facilitate cooling: 1. For NEMA 12 cabinets only, louvered openings near the bottom and top or thermostatically controlled, low-noise cooling fans to circulate outside air into the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 00-6 enclosure, exhausting through louvers near the top of the cabinet. Air velocities through the enclosure shall be minimized to assure quiet operation. 2. Thermostatically controlled, low noise internal air blowers to circulate air within the enclosure, maintaining a uniform internal temperature. Initial setpoint shall be 75 degrees F. 3. All intake openings in cabinets and panels shall be fitted with dust filters. D. Enclosures shall be constructed so that no screws or bolt heads are visible when viewed from the front. Punch cutouts for instruments and other devices shall be cut, punched, or drilled and smoothly finished with rounded edges. E. The temperature inside each enclosure containing digital hardware (e.g., PLC, computer, Ethernet switch) shall be continuously monitored and shall generate an alarm to the nearest PLC if the temperature rises to an adjustable, preset high temperature. This thermostat shall be independent and separate from the thermostat used to control the temperature in the enclosure described above. Enclosure “high interior tempera ture” alarm shall be displayed on the HMI and/or OIT. F. Intrusion alarm switches shall be provided on all enclosures containing digital hardware and shall generate an alarm to the nearest PLC when any enclosure door is opened. If panel contains a service light, alarm switch shall also be wired to turn light on when door is opened. G. Terminals shall be marked with a permanent, continuous marking strip. One side of each terminal shall be reserved exclusively for field incoming conductors. Common connections and jumpers required for internal wiring shall not be made on the field side of the terminal. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, a ven dor's pre-engineered and prefabricated wiring termination system will be acceptable. H. Wiring within cabinets, panels, and consoles shall be installed neatly and shall comply with accepted standard instrumentation and electrical practices. Power, control and signal wiring shall comply with Division 26 of the Specifications, except that the m inimum wire size for discrete signal wiring may be 16 AWG, and for analog wiring may be 18 AWG. For each pair of parallel terminal blocks, the field wiring shall be between the blocks. I. Separate terminal strips shall be provided for different functional grouping (each type of power, signal, module). Terminal strips shall be labeled as to voltage and function. AC power in a group and labeled “AC”, UPS power labeled “UPS”, +24VDC power labe led “+24VDC”, each I/O module to have its I/O in a group and labeled the type and slot, i.e., “DI4”, “DO6”, “AI8”, etc. J. Spare field wiring shall be bundled, tied, and labeled as specified above, and shall be neatly coiled in the bottom of the cabinet. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 00-7 K. All wiring shall be bundled and enclosed in WHITE vented plastic wireway as required. Wireways shall be oversized by a minimum of 10%; overfilled wireways shall not be acceptable. All conductors shall be bundled and bound at regular intervals, not exceeding 12 inches, with nylon cable ties. Care shall be taken to separate electronic signal, discrete signal, and power wiring when operating at differing voltages. L. All installed spare I/O hardware shall be wired along with live I/O wiring to the field wiring terminal blocks within the cabinet. Where space for spare I/O modules has been provided with the PLC backplane or DIN -rail mounting system, corresponding space for wiring, surge protection, and terminations shall be furnished within the cabinet. M. A copper ground bus shall be installed in each cabinet and shall be connected to the building power ground. N. Interior panel wiring shall be tagged at all terminations with machine -printed self - laminating labels. Labeling system shall be Brady TLS 2200 Printer with TLS 2200®/TLS PC Link™ labels, or equivalent system by Seton or Panduit. The wire numbering system and identification tags shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19 – Low -Voltage Conductors and Cables. Field wiring terminating in panels shall be labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Conductors and Cables. Where applicable, the wire number shall be the ID number listed in the input/output schedules. O. Wires shall be color coded as follows: 1. Equipment Ground – GREEN 2. 120 VAC Power – BLACK 3. 120 VAC Power Neutral – WHITE 4. 120 VAC Control (Internally Powered) – RED 5. 120 VAC Control (Externally Powered) – YELLOW 6. 24 VAC Control – ORANGE 7. DC Power (+) – RED 8. DC Power (-) – BLACK 9. DC Control – BLUE 10. Analog Signal – BLACK/WHITE or BLACK/RED 11. DC Power 54 V (+) – PURPLE 12. DC Power 54 V (-) – WHITE Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 00-8 P. Enclosures shall be provided with a main circuit breaker and a circuit breaker on each individual branch circuit distributed from the panel. Main breaker and branch breaker sizes shall be coordinated such that an overload in a circuit will trip only its imm ediate breaker and not the upstream breaker. Q. Enclosures with any dimension larger than 36 inches shall be provided with 120 -volt duplex receptacles for service equipment and LED service lights. Power to these devices shall be independent from the PLC power supply and its associated uninterruptible power system. R. Where applicable, enclosures shall be furnished with red laminated plastic warning signs in each section. The sign shall be inscribed "WARNING - This Device Is Connected to Multiple Sources of Power." Letters in the word "WARNING" shall be 0.75 inch high, white. S. The interconnection between equipment and panel shall be by means of flexible cables provided to permit withdrawal of the equipment from the cabinet without disconnecting the plugs. 3.02 PAINTING/FINISHING A. All steel enclosures shall be free from dirt, grease, and burrs and shall be treated with a phosphatizing metal conditioner before painting. All surfaces shall be filled, sanded, and finish coated by spraying a 1-2 mil epoxy prime coat and smooth, level, high grade textured finish between flat and semi-gloss shine. The colors shall be selected by the Owner from a minimum of six color samples provided. Refer to Division 09 for additional requirements. B. Materials and techniques shall be of types specifically designed to produce a finish of superior quality with respect to adherence, as well as impact and corrosion resistance. C. Panels fabricated from stainless steel shall not be painted. D. Panels fabricated from non-metallic materials (e.g., FRP) shall be gel -coated and shall not be otherwise painted. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions for additional requirements. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Uninterruptible Power Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 63-1 SECTION 40 67 63 UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all uninterruptible power systems, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. One UPS shall be provided for each operator workstation and its peripherals (i.e. printer, network equipment, radio, etc.) provided under this Contract. C. One UPS shall be provided for each programmable logic controller (PLC) panel or remote telemetry unit (RTU) and its appurtenant equipment provided under this Contract. However, courtesy receptacles in PLC and RTU cabinets shall not be powered by the UPS. D. UPS units shall be mounted in or near enclosures containing digital hardware, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, as follows: 1. units for operator’s consoles shall be mounted within the consoles. 2. UPS units for control panels containing PLCs shall be mounted either within the cabinet or in an adjacent cabinet of suitable environmental rating. 3. UPS units for RTUs shall be mounted within the RTU cabinet. E. Where the UPS is mounted within a dedicated enclosure, that enclosure shall be properly sized for heat dissipation and all other applicable requirements as specified in Section 40 67 00 – Control System Equipment Panels and Racks and its subordinate Sections. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 62 00 – Computer System Hardware and Ancillaries C. Section 40 63 43 – Programmable Logic Controllers 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Sizing calculations, in Watts (W) or Volt-Amps (VA), for all UPS units. B. Heat dissipation calculations for all enclosures that contain a UPS unit. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Uninterruptible Power Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 63-2 C. Run time calculation. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS A. Each UPS shall consist of a freestanding UPS module and battery modules as required to meet backup run time requirements. B. UPS units shall be true on-line type. Each UPS shall be sized to match the maximum power requirements of the associated digital equipment, control panel power supplies and accessories. Under normal operation, the AC power shall be converted to DC. The DC power from the battery charger shall supply an inverter and maintain the battery module at full charge. The AC output from the inverter shall be fed to the associated digital equipment power supply unit and/or other equipment power supplies as appropriate. Upon loss of the AC supply, the inverter shall continue to supply normal power to the device, drawing DC from the batteries. C. An automatic bypass switch shall be provided with UPS units of greater than 2 kVA capacity. The transfer switch shall be of the solid state, make-before-break type and shall automatically transfer load from the inverter to the AC line in the event of an inverter malfunction. The total transfer time shall be 5 milliseconds or less. The transfer switch shall be provided with a manual override. D. A manually operated maintenance bypass switch shall be provided for each UPS installation, other than for computers, to allow the hardware to be powered while the UPS is removed for maintenance. The bypass switch shall be the make-before-break type to ensure continuous power to the load. E. Loss of AC power shall be monitored on the line side of the UPS and reported via normally closed (fail safe) unpowered contacts to the associated PLC/RTU. F. Each UPS shall meet the following requirements: 1. Input voltage shall be 117 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Voltage regulation shall be +/-5 percent for line and load changes. 3. The output frequency shall be phase-locked to the input AC line on AC operation and shall be 60 hertz +/-0.5 percent when on battery operation. 4. The batteries shall be of the sealed, lead acid or lead calcium gelled electrolyte type, or VRLA absorbed glass mat (AGM) type. The battery modules shall have a minimum full load backup time of 30 minutes for PLC-based control panels, and 45 minutes for remote telemetry units. 5. The UPS capacity shall be sized for 150% of the connected load. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Uninterruptible Power Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 67 63-3 6. A status monitoring and control panel shall be provided and shall include the following: a. Status indicating lights for both normal and abnormal conditions. b. Individual alarm contacts that shall close upon: c. Loss of the AC line d. Low battery level e. Fault condition. 7. Sound absorbing enclosure. 8. EMI/RF noise filtering. 9. Surge protection shall be provided on the AC input circuit, which shall have a UL TVSS clamping voltage rating of 400 V with a <5 ns response time. G. UPS systems shall be the 9PX series by Eaton, Smart-UPS On-line series by APC/Schneider-Electric, or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Where the UPS is mounted within the PLC or RTU cabinet, it shall not interfere with access to other equipment or wiring within the panel (i.e., it shall not be necessary to move or remove the UPS to remove or service other panel-mounted equipment). For floor-mounted PLC cabinets with bottom wiring access (including those cabinets with legs), the UPS shall be placed on a dedicated shelf within the cabinet. B. Refer to Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions for additional requirements. END OF SECTION SECTION 40 68 00.13 PROCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE (MODIFY EXISTING) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install, and place in satisfactory operation all control and information system software with all required programming and software appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 93 – Control System Input/Output List C. Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions PART 2 – PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 OVERALL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A. The Owner’s existing Human-Machine Interface (HMI) software, including but not limited to all relevant displays, alarm summary pages, data collection, and historical trending/reporting, shall be modified to include all work performed under this Contract. B. The Owner’s existing control system shall be modified to include the inputs and outputs specified in the Input/Output Schedule and in other Sections of this Division. 3.02 SOFTWARE MODIFICATIONS A. All HMI software configuration performed under this Contract shall be coordinated with the Owner and shall match in all possible respects the “look and feel,” in the opinion of the Engineer, of the existing SCADA System. Specified features and functions of this Contract that do not already exist, even if only for “look and feel,” shall be provided. Details on how to best implement these features and functions shall be discussed with Owner and Engineer. B. Major HMI software scope of work shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: 1. Create new graphic displays showing the new facilities and functions described herein complete with all associated equipment and instrumentation. 03 1 5 1 9 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control Software (Modify Existing) Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 68 00.13-1 2. Modify the existing plant overview display(s) for the SCADA system to include the new facilities and equipment, and create links to the new screens. 3. Modify existing alarm summary pages to incorporate new monitoring data into the alarm displays. 4. Modify existing reports to include the additional monitoring points specified under this Contract. 5. Create new real-time and historical trends, and coordinate with the Owner appropriate grouping of the trend charts. 6. Update the system status display to include new hardware provided under this Contract. C. Ladder logic resident in existing PLCs shall be modified to perform the functions described as specified herein and in Section 40 61 96 – Process Control Descriptions. Specifically, the existing PLCs shall be programmed to accept the I/O specified in Section 40 61 93 – Control System Input/Output List and to make this data readily available on the plant network and shall be programmed to execute the logic necessary to implement all control functions associated with the scope of work specified under this Contract. D. All discrete and analog data acquisition, pre-processing, storage and process control functions shall be performed at the PLC level. The HMI software shall not be used for this purpose. END OF SECTION 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Process Control Software (Modify Existing) Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 68 00.13-2 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Instrumentation for Process Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 70 00-1 SECTION 40 70 00 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The instrumentation subcontractor shall furnish, install, test and place in operation instruments as scheduled together with all signal converters, transmitters, isolators, amplifiers, etc. to interface with the process control system as shown on the Drawings and as specified. The Contractor may elect to install sensors on process lines provided that the instrumentation subcontractor provides full on-site supervision during installation. Mounting of associated indicators, sensors, sampling pumps, power supplies, brackets and appurtenances shall be provided as indicated. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all process taps, isolation valves, nipples, penetrations, embedded instrumentation supports, conduit, wiring, terminations, and the installation of process instrumentation on process lines shall be provided under this Contract. The Instrumentation Subcontractor shall supervise installation of equipment provided where installation is by other Subcontractors or Contractors. C. Tapping and connections for primary process sensors shall be sized to suit each individual installation and the requirements of the instrument served. The Contractor shall ensure that the location, supports, orientation and dimensions of the connections and tapping for instruments are such as to provide the proper bracing, the required accuracy of measurement, protection of the sensor from accidental damage and accessibility for maintenance while the plant is in operation. Isolation valves shall be provided at all process taps. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 91 – Process Control System Instrument List C. Section 40 67 00 – Control System Equipment Panels and Racks D. Section 40 79 00 – Miscellaneous Instruments, Valves, and Fittings E. Instruments furnished with mechanical equipment shall be furnished, installed, tested and calibrated as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Instrumentation for Process Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 70 00-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All instrumentation supplied shall be the manufacturer's latest design. Unless otherwise specified, instruments shall be solid state, electronic, using enclosures to suit specified environmental conditions. Microprocessor-based equipment shall be supplied unless otherwise specified. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks as shown on the Drawings, or as required. B. All field instrumentation for outdoor service shall be provided with enclosures that are suitable for outdoor service, as follows: 1. Where the manufacturer's enclosures are suitable for outdoor service, they shall be provided with instrument sunshades. Sunshades shall be Style E as manufactured by O'Brien Corporation, or equal. Where possible, these instruments shall be mounted in a north facing direction. 2. Where the manufacturer's standard enclosures are not suitable for outdoor service, instruments shall be mounted in Field Panels in accordance with Section 40 67 00 – Control System Equipment Panels and Racks, or may be furnished with Vipak instrument field enclosures as manufactured by O'Brien Corporation, equivalent by Intertec, or equal. It shall not be necessary to provide the manufacturer's NEMA 4 or 4X enclosures for instruments that will be subsequently mounted in separate field panels. C. All instruments shall return to accurate measurement without manual resetting upon restoration of power after a power failure. D. Unless otherwise shown or specified, local indicators shall be provided for all instruments. Where instruments are located in inaccessible locations, local indicators shall be provided and shall be mounted as specified in Paragraph 3.01 B herein. All indicator readouts shall be linear in process units. Readouts of 0 to 100% shall not be acceptable (except for speed and valve position). Isolated outputs shall be provided for all transmitters. E. Unless otherwise specified, field instrument and power supply enclosures shall be Type 316 stainless steel, fiberglass (or similar, per Engineer’s judgement) or PVC coated copper-free cast aluminum NEMA 4X construction. F. Where separate elements and transmitters are required, they shall be fully matched, and unless otherwise noted, installed adjacent to the sensor. Special cables or equipment shall be supplied by the associated equipment manufacturer. G. Electronic equipment shall utilize printed circuitry and shall be coated (tropicalized) to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. Solid state components shall be conservatively rated for long term performance and dependability over ambient Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Instrumentation for Process Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 70 00-3 atmosphere fluctuations. Ambient conditions shall be -20 to 50 degrees C and 20 to 100 percent relative humidity, unless otherwise specified. Field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and corrosive service conditions. H. All devices furnished hereunder shall be heavy duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as possible, and shall consist of equipment models that are currently in production. All equipment provided, where applicable, shall be of modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion. I. All non-loop-powered instruments and equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 Hz AC power source at a nominal 117 V, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted. All regulators and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be provided. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be supplied. J. All analog transmitter and controller outputs shall be isolated, 4 to 20 milliamps into a load of 0 to 750 ohms, unless specifically noted otherwise. All switches shall have double pole, double throw contacts rated at a minimum of 600 VA, unless specified otherwise. K. Materials and equipment used shall be UL approved wherever such approved equipment and materials are available. 2.02 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION A. Liquid samples shall not pass through housings containing analyzer electronics. Process fluid temperature will be within a range of 40 to 90 degrees F. B. Where ambient temperatures will affect accuracy by more than 1 percent of span, a suitable isothermal enclosure with thermostatically controlled space heater shall be provided. C. Sample assemblies shall be suitable for submersion or flow-through service as noted and shall be chemically inert to constituents of raw wastewater solids or other chemical environment, as scheduled. Where the sample is drawn prior to filtration, the sample assemblies shall be capable of handling solids and grease. D. Each analyzer requiring reagents or other replaceable parts shall be furnished with sufficient chemicals and replaceable parts for startup and acceptance tests and the specified warranty period. E. Contractor's submittals on these analyzers shall include information on monthly reagent consumption and a list of replaceable parts required for periodic maintenance and the recommended operating periods between replacements. Installation of analyzers and Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Instrumentation for Process Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 70 00-4 sample preparation shall be in accordance with the analyzer manufacturer's instructions. F. Analysis instrumentation performance, accuracy and reproducibility shall be as prescribed in APHA/AWWA/WEF "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater", latest edition. For those measurements specified herein, for which performance characteristics are not listed in the above, the supplier shall state instrument performance characteristics. The "referee" method shall be as prescribed in EPA Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes (1971). PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Equipment shall be located so that it is accessible for operation and maintenance. The instrumentation subcontractor shall examine the Drawings and shop drawings for various items of equipment in order to determine the best arrangement for the work as a whole and shall supervise the installation of process instrumentation supplied under this Division. 2. Work shall be performed in compliance with all applicable local codes and practices. Where the Contract Documents do not delineate precise installation procedures, the latest version of the American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practice 551 manual (API RP 551) shall be used as a guide to installation procedures. B. Equipment Mounting and Support 1. Field equipment shall be wall mounted or mounted on two inch diameter pipe stands welded to a 10 inch square by 1/2 inch thick base plate unless shown adjacent to a wall or otherwise noted. Materials of construction shall be aluminum or 316 stainless steel. Instruments attached directly to concrete shall be spaced out from the mounting surface not less than 1/2 inch by use of phenolic spacers. Expansion anchors in walls shall be used for securing equipment or wall supports to concrete surfaces. Unless otherwise noted, field instruments shall be mounted between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or work platform. 2. Embedded pipe supports and sleeves shall be Schedule 40, Type 316 stainless steel pipe, ASA B 36.19, with stainless steel blind flange for equipment mounting, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Materials for miscellaneous mounting brackets and supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel construction. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Instrumentation for Process Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 70 00-5 4. Pipe stands, miscellaneous mounting brackets and supports shall comply with the requirements of Division 05 of the specifications. 5. Transmitters shall be oriented such that output indicators are readily visible. C. Control and Signal Wiring 1. Electrical, control and signal wiring connections to transmitters and elements mounted on process piping or equipment shall be made through liquid tight flexible conduit. Conduit seals shall be provided where conduits enter all field instrument enclosures and all cabinetry housing electrical or electronic equipment. 3.02 CLEANING A. The instrumentation subcontractor shall comply with the requirements of Division 01 of these Specifications and all instrumentation and control system tests, inspection, and calibration requirements for all instrumentation and controls provided under this Contract and specified herein. The Engineer, or his/her designated representative(s), reserves the right to witness any test, inspection, calibration or start up activity. Acceptance by the Engineer of plans, reports, or documentation relating to testing or commissioning activity shall not relieve the Contractor of his/her responsibility for meeting all specified requirements. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide the services of factory trained technicians, tools and equipment to field calibrate, test, inspect and adjust each instrument to its specified performance requirement in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Instruments which fails to meet Contract requirements, or published manufacturer performance specification for functional and operational parameters, shall be repaired or replaced, at the discretion of the Engineer, at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear all costs and provide all personnel, equipment and materials necessary to implement all installation tests and inspection activities for equipment specified herein. C. At least 60 days before the anticipated initiation of installation testing, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed description of the installation test(s) to be conducted to demonstrate the correct operation of the instrumentation supplied hereunder. D. Field instrument calibration shall conform to the following requirements: 1. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide the services of factory trained instrumentation technicians, tools and equipment to field calibrate or verify factory calibration of each instrument supplied under this Contract and existing instruments shown to its specified accuracy in accordance with the manufacturer's specification and instructions for calibration. Calibration and verification shall take place under actual process conditions. Forcing outputs shall not be acceptable. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/31/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Instrumentation for Process Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 70 00-6 2. Each instrument shall be calibrated/verified at 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent of span using test instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs. Test instruments shall be rated to an accuracy of at least five (5) times greater than the specified accuracy of the instrument being calibrated. Where applicable, such test instruments shall have accuracy’s as set forth by the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST). 3. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide a written calibration/verification sheet to the Engineer for each instrument, certifying that it has been calibrated to its published specified accuracy. The Contractor shall submit proposed calibration sheets for various types of instruments for Engineer approval prior to the start of calibration. This sheet shall include but not be limited to date, instrument tag numbers, brief description of how the calibration process was performed, calibration data for the various procedures described herein, name of person performing the calibration, a listing of the published specified accuracy, permissible tolerance at each point of calibration, calibration reading as finally adjusted within tolerance, defect noted, corrective action required and corrections made. For electronic or powered instruments, the calibration/verification sheet shall also list all configurable parameters that have been modified from their default factory setting. 4. If doubt exists as to the correct method for calibrating or checking the calibration/verification of an instrument, the manufacturer's printed recommendations shall be used as an acceptable standard, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 5. Upon completion of calibration, devices calibrated hereunder shall not be subjected to adjustments, sudden movements, accelerations, or shocks, and shall be installed in permanent protected positions not subject to moisture, dirt, and excessive temperature variations. Caution shall be exercised to prevent such devices from being subjected to over-voltages, incorrect voltages, overpressure or incorrect air. Damaged equipment shall be replaced and re-calibrated/verified at no cost to the Owner. Equipment that has been adjusted, modified, or moved or there is evidence of such activity shall be re-calibrated/verified at no cost to the Owner. 6. After completion of instrumentation installation, the instrumentation subcontractor shall perform a loop check. The Contractor shall submit final loop test results with all instruments listed in the loop. Loop test results shall be signed by all representatives involved for each loop test. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Inline Magnetic Flow Meters Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 71 13.13-1 SECTION 40 71 13.13 INLINE MAGNETIC FLOW METERS – E+H PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the magnetic flow meters, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MAGNETIC FLOW METER A. Magnetic flow meter systems shall include a magnetic flow tube and a microprocessor- based "smart" transmitter that is capable of converting and transmitting a signal from the flow tube. Magnetic flow meters shall utilize the characterized field principle of electromagnetic induction and shall produce DC signals directly proportional to the liquid flow rate. B. Each meter shall be furnished with a 316 stainless steel or carbon steel metering tube and carbon steel flanges with a polyurethane, ceramic, neoprene, hard rubber, or Teflon liner as required by the application and/or as specified herein. Liner shall have a minimum thickness of 0.125 inches. The inside diameter of the liner shall be within 0.125 inches of the inside diameter of the adjoining pipe. Liner protectors shall be provided on all flow tubes. C. The flow tube shall be provided with flush mounted electrodes. D. Grounding rings shall be provided for both ends of all meters. E. All materials of construction for metallic wetted parts (electrodes, grounding rings, etc.) shall be minimum 316 stainless steel, but shall be compatible with the process fluid for each meter in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. F. Flow tube shall be rated for pressures up to 1.1 times the flange rating of adjacent piping. System shall be rated for ambient temperatures of 30 to +65°C. Meter and transmitter housings shall meet NEMA 4X/IP66 requirements as a minimum. When meter and transmitter are located in classified explosion hazard areas, the meter and 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Inline Magnetic Flow Meters Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 71 13.13-2 transmitter housings shall be selected with rating to meet the requirements for use in those areas. Where the flow tube is subject to submergence through installation in a meter vault or similar location, the flow tube assembly shall be rated NEMA 6P/IP68 and electronics shall be factory sealed against moisture intrusion. The use of field kits for modifying NEMA 4/4X/IP66 flow tubes to submergence duty shall not be acceptable. The associated transmitter shall be located in an area not subject to submergence. G. The transmitter shall provide pulsed DC coil drive current to the flow tube and shall convert the returning signal to a linear, isolated 4-20 mA DC signal. The transmitter shall utilize "smart" electronics and shall contain automatic, continuous zero correction, signal processing routines for noise rejection, and an integral LCD readout capable of displaying flow rate and totalized flow. The transmitter shall continuously run self- diagnostic routines and report errors via English language messages. H. The transmitter's preamplifier input impedance shall be a minimum of 109-1011 ohms which shall make the system suited for the amplification of low-level input signals and capable of operation with a material build up on the electrodes. I. The transmitter shall provide an automatic low flow cutoff below a user configurable low flow condition (0-10%). The transmitter's outputs shall also be capable of being forced to zero by an external contact operation. J. The transmitter shall provide a totalizer pulse output with programmable volumes per pulse. A volume totalizer shall be displayed on flow meter display. K. Each flow tube shall be factory calibrated and assigned a calibration constant or factor to be entered into the associated transmitter as part of the meter configuration parameters. Manual calibration of the flow meter shall not be required. Meter configuration parameters shall be stored in nonvolatile memory in the transmitter. An output hold feature shall be provided to maintain a constant output during configuration changes. L. The transmitter shall be capable of communicating digitally using Ethernet. Either Modbus/TCP or Ethernet/IP process protocols will be available. Ethernet communications will not interfere with the 4-20mA DC signal or the pulse totalizer output. M. Accuracy shall be 0.30% of rate over the flow velocity range of 1.0 to 10.0 m/s (3.0 to 33 ft/sec) and 0.5% between 0.1 m/s and 1.0 m/s (1-3 ft/s). Repeatability shall be + 0.1% of rate; minimum turndown shall be 100:1. Minimum required liquid conductivity shall not be greater than 5 uS/cm. Maximum response time shall be adjustable between 1 and 100 seconds as a minimum. Transmitter ambient temperature operating limits shall be 10 to +50°C. Power supply shall be 115 VAC, 60 Hz. N. Flow tubes shall be 150-lb flange mounted unless otherwise noted. The cables for interconnecting the meter and transmitter shall be furnished by the manufacturer. Transmitter shall be mounted integrally on flow tube, wall, or 2-inch pipe mounted as shown in the Drawings and/or as specified. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Inline Magnetic Flow Meters Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 71 13.13-3 O. Must not require any upstream or downstream diameters of pipe for proper operation. P. Magnetic flow meter systems shall be ProMag W 500 (remote head unit) by Endress + Hauser, or approved equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Ground magnetic flow meter flow tubes and grounding rings in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Refer to Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Flow Switches Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 71 79.16-1 SECTION 40 71 79.16 FLOW SWITCHES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the thermal dispersion flow switches, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating process line size to match capabilities of the selected instrument. In consultation with Engineer, small diameter line sizes shall be increased in size as required to meet velocity requirements of the instrument. At no additional cost, provide reducers and increase process line size in the same material in a straight segment of pipe for a length no less than manufacturer’s recommended length of straight run. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 THERMAL DISPERSION FLOW SWITCHES – INSERTION TYPE A. Each flow switch shall utilize a thermal dispersion type, Type 316 stainless steel sensing element (probe), unless otherwise indicated, installed in the process piping as indicated on the Drawings. Probe style shall be as determined by the manufacturer and based on the specific application. B. Unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the manufacturer, the element insertion length shall be approximately one-third to one-half of the pipe diameter plus allowance for mounting accessories. All mounting accessories shall be provided. C. The electronics shall be mounted to the sensor, unless otherwise indicated. Power supply to the unit shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. Where remote mounted, manufacturer shall furnish a continuous length of cable between the sensor and the electronics. D. The instrument shall be housed in a NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure and shall be rated for a Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 environment, per the Area Classification Drawings, when located in a hazardous area. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Flow Switches Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 71 79.16-2 E. The unit shall have field configurable dual SPDT or single DPDT relay contacts rated 6 amps at 115 VAC for remote alarming. F. Flow repeatability shall be +/-1 percent of setpoint range. G. Flow response time shall be as low as 3 seconds. H. The thermal dispersion flow switch shall be Fluid Components Model (FCI) FLT93 series, Sierra InnovaSwitch, Magnetrol Thermatel TD2 series, or equal. 2.02 THERMAL DISPERSION FLOW SWITCHES – INLINE TYPE A. Each flow switch shall utilize a thermal dispersion type, Type 316 stainless steel sensing element (probe), unless otherwise indicated, factory installed in a 1-inch NPT Type 316 stainless steel tee, unless otherwise indicated. Probe style shall be as determined by the manufacturer and based on the specific application. B. Unions shall be installed as required to permit removal of the flow switch without dismantling the piping system. Unions shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, unless mounted in nonmetallic pipe. For nonmetallic pipe, union material shall match the nonmetallic pipe. C. The electronics shall be mounted to the sensor, unless otherwise indicated. Power supply to the unit shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. Where remote mounted, manufacturer shall furnish a continuous length of cable between the sensor and the electronics. D. The instrument shall be housed in a NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure and shall be rated for a Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 environment, per the Area Classification Drawings, when located in a hazardous area E. The unit shall have field configurable dual SPDT or single DPDT relay contacts rated 6 amps at 115 VAC for remote alarming. F. Flow repeatability shall be +/-1 percent of setpoint range. G. Flow response time shall be as low as 3 seconds. H. The thermal dispersion flow switch shall be Fluid Components Model FLT-93L series, Sierra InnovaSwitch, Magnetrol Thermatel TD2 with Mini-Sensor Probe, or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All threaded connections between stainless steel components shall be installed with process compatible anti-seize lubricant to prevent galling. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Flow Switches Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 71 79.16-3 B. Refer to Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems, for additional information END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Level Switches (Floats) Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 72 76.26-1 SECTION 40 72 76.26 LEVEL SWITCHES (FLOATS) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the float level switches, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 LEVEL SWITCHES (FLOATS) A. Level switches of the direct acting float operated design shall be comprised of a hermetically sealed, approximately 5-inch diameter plastic casing float, containing microswitches and flexibly supported by means of a heavy neoprene or PVC jacket, with three-conductor cable a minimum of 20 feet in length. Unless otherwise specified, media specific gravity is 0.95 to 1.05. Microswitches shall be one normally open and one normally closed, 5A115V AC capacity. Float hangers and supports shall be provided as shown on the installation detail drawings. B. Float switches shall be Model ENM as manufactured by Flygt, or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION 02 0 1 1 9 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pressure and Differential Pressure Gauges Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 73 13-1 SECTION 40 73 13 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the pressure gauges, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems C. Section 40 79 00 – Instrumentation Accessories PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PRESSURE GAUGES A. All gauges shall be designed in accordance with the ASME B40.1 entitled, “Gauges, Pressure, Indicating Dial Type – Elastic Element.” B. All gauges shall be direct reading type. Snubbers shall be provided on all gauges. Gauge full-scale pressure range shall be selected such that the maximum operating pressure shall not exceed approximately 75% of the full-scale range. C. Features 1. Mounting: ½” NPT, lower stem mount type 2. Accuracy: 0.5% full scale 3. Case: Solid front, black phenolic material 4. Dial: White background and black letters 5. Glass: Shatterproof 6. Blow-out protection: Back 7. Pressure element: stainless steel bourdon tube 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pressure and Differential Pressure Gauges Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 73 13-2 8. Movement: Stainless steel, Teflon coated pinion gear and segment 9. Gaskets: Buna-N D. Liquid-filled or equivalent mechanically damped gauges shall be used if the gauges are installed with pumps, or where gauges are subjected to vibrations or pulsation. Filling fluid shall be silicone unless oxidizing agents such as sodium hypochlorite are present, where halocarbon shall be used. E. Guage size shall be 4-1/2” F. Diaphragm seals and isolating ring seals shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements specified under Section 40 79 00 – Miscellaneous Instruments, Valves, and Fittings. G. The complete gauge assembly and appurtenances shall be fully assembled and tested prior to field mounting. A ½” isolation stainless steel ball valve shall be provided for each gauge assembly. H. Pressure and vacuum gauges shall be Ashcroft Duragauge Model 1279, Ametek-U.S. Gauge Division, H.O. Trerice Co., WIKA Instrument Corporation, or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pressure Transmitters Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 73 20-1 SECTION 40 73 20 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the pressure transmitters, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems C. Section 40 79 00 – Miscellaneous Instruments, Valves, and Fittings PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GAUGE PRESSURE INDICATING TRANSMITTERS A. Gauge pressure transmitters shall have piezoresistive measuring cells with a metallic or ceramic process isolating diaphragm directly in contact with the process liquid. Silicone oil fill fluid shall be used to transfer the pressure from the process isolating diaphragm to the measuring cell. Calibrated span and zero shall be continuously adjustable externally over the entire range. Span and zero adjustments shall be capable of being disabled internally. The maximum zero elevation and maximum zero suppression shall be adjustable to anywhere within sensor limits. Factory set correction coefficients shall be stored in the sensor's nonvolatile memory for correction and linearization of the sensor output in the electronics section. B. Transmitters shall meet the following requirements: 1. Housing: NEMA 4X with low copper, die-cast aluminum body, epoxy coated 2. Wetted Materials: Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise indicated or required for process fluid compatibility 3. Accuracy: +/- 0.04% of calibrated span 4. Rangeability: 100:1 5. Damping: 0 to 100 seconds, adjustable 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pressure Transmitters Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 73 20-2 6. Output: Linear and isolated 4-20 mA with HART communication protocol 7. Power Supply: 24 VDC, 2-wire loop powered 8. Display: 4-digit (minimum) LCD 9. Overpressure Protection: Yes 10. Ambient Conditions: -40 to 85 degrees C; 0 – 100% relative humidity 11. Operating Temperature: -40 to 100 degrees C 12. Process Connection: 1/2" FNPT C. All mounting flanges, diaphragms, O-rings and materials used in construction shall be non-corroding and compatible with each other and compatible with the liquid being measured. D. The piezoresistive silicon pressure sensor shall be mechanically, electrically, and thermally isolated from the process and the environment. Factory set correction coefficients shall be stored in the sensor's nonvolatile memory for correction and linearization of the sensor output in the electronics section. The electronics section shall correct the digital signal from the sensor and convert it into a 4-20 mA analog signal for transmission to receiving devices. The electronics section shall contain configuration parameters and diagnostic data in nonvolatile EEPROM memory and shall be capable of communicating, via a digital signal superimposed on the 4-20 mA output signal, with a remote interface device. E. Gauge pressure indicating transmitters shall be furnished with 316 stainless steel two- valve manifold assembly where a block valve provides instrument isolation and a drain/vent valve allows venting, draining, or calibration. Two-valve manifold assembly (Block and Bleed) shall be Model 306 Series as manufactured by Rosemount, or equivalent by instrument manufacturer. F. Gauge pressure indicating transmitters shall be Model 3051S as manufactured by Emerson Process Management (Rosemount), Siemens Sitrans P410, Endress+Hauser Model Cerabar S PMP71 Platinum, or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temperature Transmitters Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 74 63-1 SECTION 40 74 63 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS – AMBIENT AIR PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the temperature indicating transmitters, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPERATURE INDICATING TRANSMITTERS A. Temperature indicating transmitters shall be microprocessor based with "smart" electronics, capable of accepting direct inputs from 2-, 3-, or 4-wire, platinum, copper, or nickel resistance temperature detectors (RTD) from 10 to 1000 ohms, thermocouple inputs, direct millivolt sources, and resistance/potentiometer devices. The indicating transmitter shall be a true 2-wire device capable of operating on voltages up to 45 VDC. B. The accuracy of the transmitter's Digital-to-Analog converter shall be within 0.02 percent of span. An LCD digital display shall be provided, capable of displaying mA, degrees in any units, ohms, or mV. Digital accuracy (Pt 100 RTD) shall be 0.10 degrees C. The indicator transmitter shall contain an analog to digital converter which shall convert the RTD input to a digital signal and send it to the transmitter's electronics for further processing. Factory set correction coefficients shall be stored in the sensor's nonvolatile memory for correction and linearization of the sensor output in the electronics section. The electronics section shall correct the digital signal from the sensor and convert it into a 4-20 mA analog signal for transmission to receiving devices. The electronics section shall contain configuration parameters and diagnostic data in nonvolatile EEPROM memory and shall be capable of communicating, via a digital signal superimposed on the 4-20 mA output signal, with a remote interface device. Output signal damping shall be provided, with an adjustable time constant of 036 seconds. Long term stability (frequency of calibration) shall be not less than 0.25% of reading or 0.25 degrees C for five years. C. The transmitter assembly shall be furnished with all necessary hardware for proper mounting as recommended by the manufacturer. Indicating transmitter shall be housed 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temperature Transmitters Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 74 63-2 in a watertight enclosure meeting NEMA 4X requirements. Enclosure shall be suitable for wall or 2-inch pipe stand mounting. D. The transmitter shall provide a linear isolated 4-20 mA DC output proportional to temperature. E. The transmitter shall constantly monitor all aspects of the input circuitry and diagnose any system failures. If self-diagnostics detect a sensor burnout or transmitter failure, the analog output signal shall be driven either upscale or downscale to alert the user. Upscale and downscale burnout features shall be user-selectable. F. Temperature measurement system shall be Rosemount Model 3144P, manufactured by Emerson Process Management, or approved equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 PH-ORP Analyzers Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 75 13-1 SECTION 40 75 13 PH-ORP ANALYZERS - HACH PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the pH/ORP analyzers, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS . Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions A. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS . Provide ISA-TR20 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PH SENSORS A. pH sensors shall be digital sensors encapsulated in liquid crystal polymer thermoplastic and utilize the differential electrode measurement technique to measure the negative of the base 10 logarithm of the activity of the hydrogen ion. The sensors shall include an integral digital shielded cable for connection to the associated controller. The sensors shall have the following features and minimum performance requirements: 1. Glass process electrode in buffered pH 7 solution 2. Integral preamplifier 3. Integral temperature compensation sensor 4. Measuring range: 2.5 - 12.5 pH 5. Maximum pressure: 100 psig at 70 degrees C 6. Accuracy: +/- 0.02 pH 7. Repeatability: +/- 0.05 pH 8. Sensitivity: +/- 0.01 pH 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 PH-ORP Analyzers Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 75 13-2 9. Drift: 0.03 pH per 24 hours, non-cumulative 10. Operating temperature: -5 to 70 degrees C 11. Housing Material: Ryton (PVDF) material for clean water applications; PEEK for all other applications; however, material shall be compatible with process fluid 12. Other Wetted Materials: Kynar junction, glass process electrode, titanium ground electrode, Viton O-ring seals, or as required for the process fluid 13. Sensor cable length: minimum of 10 feet or as required to accommodate locations indicated 14. Digital sensor with integrated temperature sensor B. Sensors shall be Hach DPD1P1, or approved equal. 2.02 CONTROLLERS A. The microprocessor-based controller shall be from the same manufacturer as the sensor and shall be compatible with the sensor. The controller shall receive digital signals from the sensor for display and transmission. B. Controllers shall meet the following minimum functional requirements: 1. Housing: NEMA 4X 2. Power Supply: 115 VAC, 60 Hz 3. Operating Temperature: -20 to +60 degrees Celsius, 0 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing. C. The controller shall have three relay contact outputs that can be activated based on the process value. Relay outputs shall be programmable for various alarms and warning conditions that occurred internally within the system or with the process conditions. Relays shall be Form-C SPDT contacts rated at 5A, 115/230 VAC. The control and alarm setpoints for the relays shall be adjustable across the full operating range. LED lights at the controller shall indicate that the relay is energized. The controller shall have four linear, isolated 4-20mA assignable outputs. D. The analyzer shall have four linear, isolated 4 - 20mA assignable outputs. E. Hach SC4500sc, or approved equal. Reference Drawings for quantity of controller(s) to be provided. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 PH-ORP Analyzers Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 75 13-3 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conductivity Analyzers Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 75 16-1 SECTION 40 75 16 CONDUCTIVITY ANALYZERS – HACH PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the conductivity analyzers, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS B. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions C. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTIVITY SENSORS A. Conductivity sensors shall have the following features and minimum performance requirements: 1. Integral Pt RTD temperature compensation sensor 2. Measuring range: 1 uS/cm – 1000 mS/cm 3. Accuracy: ±4% of reading 4. Operating process temperature: -5ºC to 120ºC 5. Material: Stainless steel process with platinum and ceramic process sensor 6. Sensor cable length: minimum of 6 m or as shown on the Drawings B. Sensors shall be pipe mounted and provided with all necessary mounting hardware. C. Hach D3422D2, or approved equal. 2.02 CONDUCTIVITY CONTROLLERS A. The microprocessor-based conductivity controller shall be compatible with the conductivity sensor. The controller shall receive a signal from the sensor, condition it, and amplify the signal for display and transmission. 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Conductivity Analyzers Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 75 16-2 B. Controllers shall meet the following minimum functional requirements: 1. Housing: NEMA 4X 2. Power Supply: 115 VAC, 60 Hz 3. Operating Temperature: -20 - +60ºC, 0-95% relative humidity, non-condensing C. The controller shall have three relay contact outputs that can be activated based on the nitrate level. Relay outputs shall be programmable for various alarms and warning conditions that occurred internally within the system or with the process conditions. Relays shall be Form-C SPDT contacts rated at 5A, 115/230 VAC. The control and alarm setpoints for the relays shall be adjustable across the full operating range. LED lights at the controller shall indicate that the relay is energized. The analyzer shall have two linear, isolated 4-20mA assignable outputs. D. The analyzer shall have four linear, isolated 4 - 20mA assignable outputs. E. Hach SC4500sc, or approved equal. Reference Drawings for quantity of controller(s) to be provided. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. For more information, refer to Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Turbidity Analyzers Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 75 53-1 SECTION 40 75 53 TURBIDITY ANALYZERS - HACH PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install, and place in satisfactory operation the low range turbidity monitoring systems, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS B. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions C. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems 1.02 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. ISO 7027:1 – Water Quality – Determination of Turbidity – Part 1: Quantitative Methods PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 TURBIDITY MONITORS A. Sensor 1. Turbidity sensors and controllers shall be microprocessor-based and provide continuous monitoring. 2. The sensor shall be designed to measure low range turbidity in water by collecting scattered light from a laser light source at an angle of 90 degrees in a 360-degree radius around the axis of the incident light beam. 3. Features: a. Range: 0 - 1000 NTU b. Accuracy: 1) The larger of +/ - 2 % of reading or 0.01 NTU c. Resolution: 0.001 NTU d. Repeatability: +/ - 0.5% of measured value 70 088 -001 03 1 8 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Turbidity Analyzers Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 75 53-2 e. Sample Pressure Range: 7.3 to 145 psi f. Sample Temperature Range: -20 to 85 degrees C g. Enclosure: Sensor shall be constructed of stainless steel with IP68 ingress protection 4. Turbidity sensors shall be Hach TU5300, or approved equal. B. Ancillary Equipment 1. Flow Sensor a. Hach TU5 series, or approved equal. 2. Automatic Cleaning Module a. Hach TU5 Series, or approved equal. 2.02 CONTROLLERS A. The microprocessor-based turbidimeter controller shall be fully compatible with the turbidity sensor and all other sensors installed on the Analysis Panel. The controller shall receive a signal from the sensor, condition it, and amplify the signal for display and transmission. B. Controllers shall meet the following minimum functional requirements: 1. Housing: NEMA 4X 2. Power Supply: 115 VAC nominal, 60 Hz 3. Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 degrees C, 5 to 95% relative humidity, non- condensing C. The controller shall have three relay contact outputs that can be activated based on the measured process value. Relay outputs shall also be programmable for various alarms and warning conditions that occurred internally within the system or with the process conditions. Relays shall be Form-C SPDT contacts rated at 5A at 115/230 VAC. The control and alarm setpoints for the relays shall be adjustable across the full operating range. LED lights at the controller shall indicate that the relay is energized. D. The analyzer shall have four linear, isolated 4 - 20mA assignable outputs. E. Hach SC4500sc, or approved equal. Reference Drawings for quantity of controller(s) to be provided. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Turbidity Analyzers Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 75 53-3 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. For more information, refer to Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Intrusion Switch - Magnetic Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 77 26.26-1 SECTION 40 77 26.26 INTRUSION SWITCH - MAGNETIC END OF SECTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the temperature indicating transmitters, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MAGNETIC INTRUSION SWITCH A. Magnetic industrial contact type with stainless steel armored cable. B. Support gaps up to 3” C. Form A contact or Form C contact D. Seal unit. E. UL Listed F. Surface mount G. Manufacturers: 1. GE Security 2505A or 2507AH 2. Interlogix 2505A-L or 2507AH-L 3. Or approved equal PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Panel Mounted Instruments Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 78 00-1 SECTION 40 78 00 PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the panel mounted instruments, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Control and Information System Scope and General Requirements  B. Section 40 62 00 – Control and Information System Hardware, General  C. Section 40 67 00 – Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment mounted on the face of a panel shall conform to the same NEMA rating specified for the panel construction. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 OPERATORS A. Control operators shall be 30.5 mm, round, heavy-duty, oil tight NEMA 4X corrosion resistant. B. Pushbuttons shall be nonilluminated, spring release type. Pushbuttons shall include a full guard. Panic stop/alarm pushbuttons shall be red mushroom type with manual-pull release. Selector switches shall be non-illuminated, maintained contact type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Pilot lights shall be of the proper control voltage, push-to-test LED type with lens and LED lamp colors as specified below. 1. Red: stopped, off, or closed 2. Green: running, on, or opened 3. Amber: fault, alarm, or warning 4. White: generic non-alarm status Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Panel Mounted Instruments Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 78 00-2 5. Blue: control power on D. Control operators shall have legend plates as specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, or otherwise directed by the Engineer. Legend plates shall be plastic, black field (background) with white lettering. Engraved nameplates shall be securely fastened above each control operator. If adequate space is not available, the nameplate shall be mounted below the operator. E. Control operators for all equipment under this Contract shall be of the same type and manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. Control operators such as pushbuttons (PB), selector switches (SS), and pilot lights (PL) shall be Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse Type E34, Square D Company Type SK, or equal. 2.02 ELECTRONIC INDICATORS A. Electronic indicators shall be 3.5 or 6 digit, as appropriate, with 0.56" high red LED display. Indicators shall be provided with nameplate and scale calibrated to match the calibration of the primary element. The unit shall be designed primarily for use with 4-20 mA current loop signal circuits. Indicator operating voltage shall be 115 VAC 10%, 60 Hz. Indicator controls shall include three (3) front-panel pushbuttons for modifying alarm values and other indicator setup. Two (2) form-C relays shall be provided for each indicator. Relay contact outputs shall be rated 5A, 120/240 VAC, resistive load. Where required, a regulated and isolated 24 V excitation power supply shall be provided. Indicators shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor service as required and shall have the same NEMA enclosure rating as the associated enclosure. B. Indicators shall be Red Lion Model IMP or APLCL, Precision Digital, or equal. 2.03 RELAYS A. Interposing control relays (CR) 1. Where required to interface between motor control centers, equipment controls, and control panels, interposing relays and associated control wiring circuitry shall be furnished and installed to provide the monitoring and/or control functions specified herein. 2. Interposing relays shall be small format type, DPDT, minimum 10 amp, 120 VAC contact rating. 3. Relay coils shall be 120 VAC or 24 VDC as required to interface with equipment. 4. Relays shall have a flag indicator to show relay status, a pushbutton to allow manual operation of the relay, and an internal pilot light to indicate power to the coil. 5. Relays shall be as manufactured by Square D, Potter & Brumfield, Allen-Bradley, Phoenix Contact, or equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Panel Mounted Instruments Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 78 00-3 B. Timing Relays (TR) 1. Timing relays shall be electronic type with 120 VAC coils unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. Timers shall be provided with a minimum of two SPDT timed output contacts and instantaneous contacts where required. Contact ratings shall be the same as for interposing relays. 2. Timing relays shall be the general purpose plug-in type, Type JCK as manufactured by Square D Company, equivalent by Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, equivalent by Allen-Bradley, Phoenix Contact, or equal. 2.04 TOTALIZERS A. Totalizing counters shall be provided for flush panel, spring clip mounting. Face dimensions of the totalizing counters shall be no larger than 11/8inches high by 2inches wide. Totalizing counters shall contain eight digits. Height of the digits shall not be less than 5/32 inch. Numerals shall be white on a black background. The counter shall be nonresettable and shall be totally compatible for operation on the pulses supplied by the associated instrument or integrator. The totalizing counter shall be capable of a maximum count rate of 25 counts/second. B. Legend plates shall be provided for each of the totalizing counters with white letters on a black background with legends as specified below. C. Totalizing counters shall be manufactured by KesslerEllis, or equal. 2.05 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. The following specific spare parts items shall be provided: B. One of each type of panel mounted equipment (i.e., indicators, signal converters, etc.) provided under this Contract. C. Five of each type of interposing control relay provided under this Contract. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 40 67 00 – Control System Equipment Panels and Racks, for additional requirements. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Power Supplies Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 78 59-1 SECTION 40 78 59 POWER SUPPLIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all power supplies, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. All power conditioners shall be mounted within consoles or control panels containing the associated digital equipment unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. C. One power conditioner shall be provided for each PLC cabinet provided under this Contract. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 62 00 – Computer System Hardware and Ancillaries C. Section 40 63 43 – Programmable Logic Controllers PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER SUPPLY A. Each power supply unit shall be sized to match the maximum power requirements of the associated digital equipment, control panel power supplies and accessories. B. Each power supply unit shall meet the following requirements: 1. Input voltage shall be 120 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz nominal. 2. Voltage regulation shall be +/- 3% for line changes of +10%/-15%. 3. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 3% of RMS. 4. Ambient operating temperature shall be from -20 to 50 degrees C. 5. Power conditioners shall be Phoenix Contact Quint4, or equal. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Power Supplies Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 78 59-2 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Miscellaneous Instruments, Valves, and Fittings Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 79 00-1 SECTION 40 79 00 MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS, VALVES, AND FITTINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation, the instrumentation and control system accessories with all spare parts, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. Accessories include various items of equipment that may be required in the system but are not scheduled. Accessories are shown on details, flow sheets or plans. Accessories are also called out in specifications for scheduled instruments and in the installation specifications. It is not intended, however, that each piece of hardware required will be specifically described herein. This Specification shall be used as a guide to qualify requirements for miscellaneous hardware whether the specific item is described or not. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 40 61 13 – Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Impulse piping layout and routing drawings B. Complete instrument assembly drawings showing orientation to installed process piping PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PROCESS TUBING A. Process, impulse, or capillary tubing shall be 1/2 x 0.065-inch seamless, annealed, ASTM A-269 Type 316L stainless steel with 37 degrees Type 316 stainless steel flared fittings or Swagelock or Parker-CPI flareless fittings. B. Piping for closely coupling instruments to process seals shall be standard stainless-steel NPT threaded piping or NPT tapped mounting blocks. C. A nickel-based lubricant shall be used on threaded stainless steel piping connections to prevent galling. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/30/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Miscellaneous Instruments, Valves, and Fittings Cottonwoods Connection Page 40 79 00-2 2.02 POWER, CONTROL, AND SIGNAL CABLE A. Power, control and signal wiring shall be provided under Division 26 of the Specifications, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 TAMPER EVIDENT PAINT A. Piping and screwed/bolted connections of instrumentation containing the filling medium shall be marked with a small continuous tick mark of tamper evident paint over each piping/instrument joint. Tamper evident paint shall be applied prior to instrument assemblies arriving on the job site. Disturbance of the joint shall break the paint. B. Instrument assemblies with broken paint or missing paint shall not be accepted and shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to Owner. Paint shall be Dykem Cross- Check or equal. 2.04 ISOLATION VALVES A. Isolation valves shall be 1/2 inch diameter ball valves, unless otherwise indicated, with a Type 316 stainless steel body, Type 316 stainless steel ball. Where 316 stainless steel is not compatible with the process fluid, materials of construction shall be suitable for the associated process fluid (e.g., PVC for chemical service). PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/2/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump Cottonwoods Connection Page 43 23 31.33-1 SECTION 43 23 31.33 VERTICAL MULTISTAGE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT Vertical multistage centrifugal pumps with drivers and components : Pump, driver, motors, and drive arrangements as scheduled with seals or packing, couplings, base plates, guards, supports, anchor bolts, necessary valves, gauges, taps, lifting eyes, stands, and other items as specified and as required for a complete and operational system. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Section 01 6 1 00 – Product Requirements and Options. C. Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data. D. Section 26 05 60 - Low Voltage Electric Motors E. Section 40 71 79.16 – Flow Switches. F. Section 40 73 13 - Pressure and Differential Pressure Gauges 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless-Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. c. A194, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both 2. Hydraulic Institute (HI): a. 1-1.2 - Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions. 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/2/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump Cottonwoods Connection Page 43 23 31.33-2 b. 1.3 - Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pumps for Design and Application. c. 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions, Application, Sound Measurement and Decontamination. d. 9.6.4 - Rotodynamic Pumps for Vibration Measurement and Allowable Values. e. 14.6 - Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. 3. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Pump performance characteristics as specified in the pump schedule in this section. B. Motor characteristics as specified in the pump schedule in this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Vendor operation and maintenance manuals: As specified in Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Submit supporting calculations and torsional analysis. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty requirements shall be as specified in Section 01 61 00 – Product Requirements and Options. Warranty requirements are supplementary to the individual equipment specifications. B. Comply with the Equipment Warranties requirements specified in Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01 75 00 – Check Out and Start Up Procedures. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/2/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump Cottonwoods Connection Page 43 23 31.33-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The following or equal: 1. Grundfos CRI-1s. 2. Goulds 1SV. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Materials in the pump schedule in this section shall be the type and grade as specified in this Section. 2. Lead limits: As specified in Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements. B. Bolts, studs, and cap screws: 1. Material: a. All wetted bolts, studs and cap screws shall be stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A193, Type 316 or 316N, Grade B8MA or B8MNA. b. Nuts shall be stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A194, Type 316 or 316N, Grade 8MA or 8MNA. 2. Lubricant: Threads shall be coated before assembly with an anti -galling lubricant certified by NSF 61 for contact with potable water. 2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Pumps shall be non -self-priming, vertical inline multistage centrifugal pumps. 1. Pumps shall consist of a base and a pump head. 2. A chamber stack and outer sleeve, containing the impellers, are secured between the pump head and the base by means of stay bolts. 3. The base has suction and discharge ports on the same level. B. Pump head: 1. Flanges: Suction and discharge flanges shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5, flat faced, 300 -pound minimum. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/2/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump Cottonwoods Connection Page 43 23 31.33-4 C. Shaft seal: 1. Flanges: Shaft seal shall be a cartridge type, balanced, mechanical seal. 2. Shafts shall be hard faced under all bearing/guide areas D. Shafts shall be hard faced under all bearing/guide areas. E. Accessories: 1. Pressure gauge: The suction and discharge of each pump shall have a pressure gauge as specified in Section 40 73 13 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement – Gauges. 2. Thermal flow switch: The discharge of each pump shall have a thermal flow switch as specified in Section 40 71 79.16 - Flow Measurement: Switches. 3. Pump check valves: The discharge of each pump shall be fitted with a check or foot valve to prevent backflow through the pump when the pump stops. 4. Pump Isolation valves: The suction and discharge of each pump shall be fitted with a ball-type isolation valve. F. Motors 1. Pressure gauge: Motors shall be as specified in Section 26 05 60 - Low Voltage Electric Motors with additional features as specified in this Section and as shown on the Data Sheets. 2. Each motor shall have a brake horsepower output equal to or greater than the horsepower required to operate the pump at any point on the head capacity curve, while pumping liquid of the specified specific gravity. The motor service factor shall not be used to meet this requirement. 3. Bearings: a. Bearings shall be conical -type and shall be adequate to withstand the maximum anticipated motor and pump radial and axial loads. b. Bearing housings shall have seals to confine the lubricant and exclude moisture and dirt. G. Nameplates: 1. Equipment identification: Each individual piece of equipment shall bear a stainless - steel nameplate attached with stainless steel screws. The nameplate shall be engraved with the following information: a. Manufacturer's name or trademark. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/2/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump Cottonwoods Connection Page 43 23 31.33-5 b. Manufacturer's serial and model numbers. c. Metropolitan's piece mark number. d. Pump rated flow, head and rpm. e. Maximum allowable working pressure and hydrotest pressure for the p ump. 2.04 DRIVERS A. Horsepower 1. As scheduled. 2. Listed driver horsepower is the minimum to be supplied. a. Increase driver horsepower if required to prevent driver overload while operating at any point of the supplied pump operating head-flow curve including runout. b. Increase motor horsepower if required to prevent operation in the service factor. c. Make all structural, mechanical, and electrical changes required to accommodate increased horsepower. B. Motors: Provide motors as specified in Section 26 05 60 – Low Voltage Electric Motors as specified in this Section: 1. Revolutions per minute: As scheduled. 2. Enclosure: As scheduled. 3. Electrical characteristics: As scheduled. 4. Efficiency, service factor, insulation, and other motor characteristics: As specified in Section 26 05 60 - Low Voltage Electric Motors 2.05 SHOP ASSEMBLY A. Pumping units including pump and motor shall be completely assembled in the manufacturer's plant, and the clearance and alignment between components shall be checked for compliance with the applicable shop drawings. B. Pump shafts shall be aligned to the motor with a maximum runout of 0.003 -inch. 2.06 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Provide one complete spare pump for each model of pump scheduled. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/2/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump Cottonwoods Connection Page 43 23 31.33-6 B. Deliver 1 set of special tools for furnished pump type and size needed to disassemble pump system. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Shipment, delivery and handling of equipment and materials shall be in accordance with Section 01 65 00 – Product Delivery Requirements. B. B. Storage of equipment shall be in accordance with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Protection Requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Pump drain pipes: 1. Connect pipe drains from drip pockets to point indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 3.03 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES . Commissioning 1. Manufacturers services: a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. b. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. 2. Manufacturer’s Representative onsite requirements: a. Installation: 1 trip, 1-day minimum. b. Function Testing: 1 trip, 1 -day minimum each. 3. Training: a. Maintenance: 4 hours per session, 2 sessions. b. Operation: 2 hours per session, 2 sessions. 4. Process operational period: a. As required by owner or Contractor. 5. Source testing: As specified in pump schedule in this section . Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/2/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump Cottonwoods Connection Page 43 23 31.33-7 6. Functional testing: As specified in pump schedule in this section. 3.04 TESTING A. Shop Testing 1. Each pump shall be performance tested at rated speed to determine the head, capacity, and brake horsepower. a. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards for Vertical Pumps and as specified in this Section and/or on the pump data sheet. b. Test data shall be sufficiently comprehensive to produce guaranteed performance curve showing head versus: 1) Capacity. 2) Efficiency. 3) Net positive suction head required, when specified. 4) Brake horsepower. 5) A minimum of 7 points shall be tested: a) 1 point shall be at shutoff. b) 1 point shall be at run out. c) 1 point shall be the rated point. d) The remaining points shall be spaced evenly between the rated point and shutoff 2. Flow rates for pumps operating in parallel shall match within 4 percent at any head throughout the operating range specified on the pump data sheet. 3. Hydrostatic testing: a. A hydrostatic test shall be performed on all process pressure containing components at the greater of: 1) 150 percent of the shut-off head plus maximum suction pressure. 2) 200 percent of the sum of rated head and maximum suction pressure. b. During the pressure test, components shall not show signs of weakness or undue deflection, as determined by the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/2/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump Cottonwoods Connection Page 43 23 31.33-8 1) The external surfaces of the casings shall not show sweating through metal or leakage through gaskets or seals. 2) The minimum hydrotest time shall be 30 minutes. 4. Testing shall be performed prior to performance testing and the application of coatings, except for heat fused epoxy. 3.05 PUMP SCHEDULE Tag Numbers P-9513 General Characteristics: Application Drinking Water Service Potable Water Quantity 1 First Named Manufacturer’s Model Number CRI 1S Maximum Noise, dBA at 3 feet 85 Torsional Analysis Not Required Minimum Pumped Fluid Temperature, degrees F 40 Normal Pumped Fluid Temperature, degrees F 65 Maximum Pumped Fluid Temperature, degrees F 80 Pump Characteristics: Pump and Driver Mounting Vertical Suction Configuration Single Impeller Type Enclosed Type Number of Impellers Per Manufacturer Bearing Lubrication Grease Shaft Seal Type Single Mechanical, Balanced Speed Control Fixed Maximum Pump rpm 3,600 Minimum Pump rpm 1,750 Rated Design Point (At Maximum Revolutions per Minute): Flow, gpm 2 Head, Feet 118-135 Minimum Efficiency, Percent 23 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/2/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump Cottonwoods Connection Page 43 23 31.33-9 Required Condition 2 (At Maximum Revolutions per Minute): Flow, gpm 3 Head Range, Feet 115-122 Minimum Efficiency, Percent 30 Required Condition 3 (At Maximum Revolutions per Minute): Flow, gpm 4 Head Range, Feet 106-109 Minimum Efficiency, Percent 34 Required Condition 4 (At Maximum Revolutions per Minute): Flow, gpm 5.5 Head Range, Feet 82-84 Minimum Efficiency, Percent 33 Other Conditions: Shutoff Head, Feet 117-141 Maximum NPSHr at Every Specified Flow, Feet 17 Minimum NPSHa at Every Specified Flow, Feet 35 Maximum Suction Static Head, Feet 25 Minimum Suction Static Head, Feet 14 Pump Materials: Pump Head Stainless Steel AISI Type 304 Impeller Stainless Steel AISI Type 304 Shaft Stainless Steel, AISI Type 316 Chamber Stainless Steel, AISI Type 304 Outer Sleeve Stainless Steel, AISI Type 304 O-Ring for Outer Sleeve EPDM or FKM Base Stainless Steel, Type CF 8M or AISI Type 304 Neck Ring PTFE Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/2/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump Cottonwoods Connection Page 43 23 31.33-10 Shaft Seal Cartridge Type Rubber Parts EPDM or FKM Driver Characteristics: Drive Arrangement Vertical, Flexibly Coupled Minimum Horsepower 0.33 hp Maximum Speed, rpm 3,600 Voltage/Phases/Hertz 120/1/60 NEMA Enclosure Type TEFC Inverter Duty Rated No Functional Testing: Performance Test Level 1 Vibration Test Level None Noise Test Level None END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-1 SECTION 46 00 00 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in acceptable operation all mechanical equipment and all accessories as specified, as shown on the Drawings, and as required for a complete and operable system. B. The mechanical equipment shall be provided complete with all accessories, special tools, spare parts, mountings, shims, sheaves, couplings, and other appurtenances as specified, and as may be required for a complete and operating installation. C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner complete and operational equipment/systems. To this end, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all interfaces related mechanical, structural, electrical, instrumentation, and control work and to provide necessary ancillary items such as controls, wiring, etc., to make each piece of equipment operational as shown and specified. D. The complete installation shall be free from excessive vibration, cavitation, noise, and oil or water leaks. E. The requirements of this section shall apply to equipment furnished under Divisions 40, 43, and 46. F. Comply with reference specifications, codes and standards as specifically modified, complimented, and supplemented herein. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. All equipment, materials, and installations shall conform to the requirements of the most recent editions with latest revisions, supplements, and amendments of the specifications, codes, and standards listed in Section 01 42 00 – References along with those identified herein this and other individual specification sections. B. Section 01 75 00 – Checkout and Startup Procedures. C. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals Procedures D. Section 03 60 00 – Grout 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Institute for Steel Construction (AISC) 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-2 B. American National Standards Institute/American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ANSI/ABMA): 1. ANSI/ABMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings 2. ANSI/ABMA 11 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings C. Acoustical Society of America (ASA) / American National Standard Institute (ANSI) S2.75, Shaft Alignment Methodology: 1. Part 1: General Principles, Methods, Practices, and Tolerances 2. Part 2: Vocabulary 3. Part 3: Alignment of Vertically Oriented Rotating Machinery 4. Guidelines and recommendations included in ASA/ANSI S2.75 shall establish and be interpreted as the minimum requirements for acceptance for leveling, grouting and alignment related work. D. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME) Standard B29.1, Heavy Duty Offset Sidebar Transmission Roller Chains and Sprocket Teeth. E. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" 2. D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" of the American Welding Society F. Electrical Apparatus Service Association, Inc. (EASA) Mechanical Reference Handbook (latest revision). G. Standard, ISO 1940 – Mechanical Vibration – Balance quality requirements for rotors balance quality grade for rotors in a constant rigid state. H. In the event of conflict between individual specifications and reference specifications, codes and standards, the more restrictive criteria shall govern. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Not Applicable. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action/Informational Submittals Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-3 1. Product Data: a. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals Procedures b. Fabrication information 2. Provide submittals identified in individual equipment specification sections in addition to the submittals identified herein. 3. Shop Drawings shall include the following information in addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and shall include the following additional information: a. Equipment name, identification number and specification number. b. Performance characteristics and descriptive data, including but not limited to capacity, power, speed, torque, and efficiency. c. Detailed equipment dimensional drawings and setting plans including but not limited to: 1) General cutaway sections 2) Materials of construction 3) Dimension of shaft projections 4) Shaft and keyway dimensions 5) Shaft diameter 6) Shaft connection details 7) Dimension between bearings 8) General dimensions of equipment 9) Anchor bolt locations 10) Forces 11) Assembly views 12) Weights: Provide weight of entire equipment assembly, including motor and base weight of individual major subassemblies. Indicate the weight of each component, and total static and dynamic loads imparted by the equipment to the supporting structure. 13) Rotating assembly technical information and illustration. 14) Drawings shall identify each component by tag number to which the catalog data and detail sheets pertain. 15) Drawings showing the location and type of all equipment, system components, supports, hangers, foundations and the required clearances to operate and maintain equipment, valves and system components in a code compliant, safe and ergonomic manner. Drawings shall show clearances reserved for walking access around all sides, for opening access doors fully, for visual inspection for condition monitoring, and for the performance of maintenance tasks including but not limited to changing filters, replacing belts, maintaining Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-4 lubrication levels, predictive maintenance and performing diagnostic functions. 4. General lifting, erection, installation, and adjustment instructions and recommendations. 5. Drive and motor data as required by Division 26 – Electrical. Complete motor data shall include but not be limited to size, make, type and characteristics along with wiring diagrams. Where equipment and motor speeds are to be regulated by variable speed drives, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate, furnish and exchange all necessary requirements with the respective equipment manufacturers to ensure compatibility and shall submit equipment, shafting, coupling, motor and variable speed drive shop drawings. 6. Bearings: a. Information on bearings including but not limited to: type, size, materials of construction. b. Bearing life calculations including but not limited to: basic dynamic load rating, static load rating, rating life, ABMA L10 reliability (expressed in hours of bearing life) and bearing system life. 7. Gear box design and performance criteria and AGMA service factor, including but not limited to the following: a. Thermal horsepower rating b. Bearing type c. Actual gear ratio d. Forced lubrication system: Provide description of equipment, system and instrumentation including but not limited to flow meter, pressure switches, etc. e. Gear tooth finish quality 8. The total uncrated weight of the equipment plus the approximate weight of the shipped materials. Support locations and loads that will be transmitted to bases and foundations. Exact size, placement, and embedment requirements of all anchor bolts. 9. Piping schematics. 10. Equipment protective device details and connection diagrams. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-5 11. Panel layout drawings, schematic wiring diagrams, and component product data sheets for control panels. 12. A list of spare parts and special tools to be provided. 13. Information on equipment appurtenances including couplings, shaft guards, v-belt drive systems, etc. 14. Any additional information required to demonstrate conformance with the equipment specifications. 15. Results of critical speed analyses, structural, lateral, and torsional dynamic analyses as required herein and in the individual specification sections. 16. Warranty documentation including statement of duration of warranty period and contact phone numbers and addresses for warranty issues. 17. Shipment, delivery, handling, and storage instructions. 18. Installation instructions. 19. Manufacturers literature and brochures. 20. Materials of construction and associated specifications (such as AISI, ASTM, SAE, etc.), including grade and type. 21. Anchor design in accordance with Section 05 04 23 – Metal Fastening. 22. Intermediate shafting design, including but not limited to general arrangement drawings, engineering data, materials of construction, recommended angular offsets (for cardan universal jointed shafts), and shaft critical speed analyses (including 1st, 2nd and 3rd critical speed analysis). 23. Coatings: Coating system data and description of coating system, surface preparation and shop painting, including certification that the shop paint is compatible with the finish paint. 24. Pre-commissioning lubrication oil flushing plan developed by a machinery lubrication specialist, specifically for each piece of lubricated equipment. Plan shall identify, describe procedure and demonstrate data-based approach to demonstrating achievement of lubricant cleanliness via flushing. Level of lubricant cleanliness shall be as required by equipment manufacturer’s written recommendations. 25. Equipment installation lists. B. Closeout Submittals Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-6 1. Submit warranty documentation in compliance with: a. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures b. Section 01 61 00 – Product Requirements and Options 2. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Maintenance Materials Submittals 1. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals shall be submitted in accordance with: a. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures b. Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data 2. Spare Parts and Extra Materials: a. For spare parts, extra stock materials, and tools, submit quantity of items specified in associated Specification Section. b. Submit complete list of spare parts, extra stock materials, maintenance supplies and special tools required for maintenance for one year with unit prices and source of supply. Indicate number/quantity specified and furnished, manufacturer, part number, description. Include a spare parts diagram. 3. O&M Manuals shall include instructions, equipment ratings, technical bullentins and any other printed matter such as wiring diagrams and schematics, prints or drawings containing the full information required for the proper operation, maintenance, and repair of the equipment. Each set of instructions shall be bound together in appropriate three-ring binders with a detailed Table of Contents. 4. Comply with Section 01 79 00 – Instructions to Owner’s Personnel. 5. Lubrication Information: a. Comply with Specification Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Complete lubrication instructions and lubricant schedule, including manufacturer’s recommended lubricant. All lubricants shall be food grade, NSF 61 approved. Schedule shall include frequency of lubricant application, type of lubricant, and instructions regarding lubricant application D. Quality Assurance Submittals Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-7 1. Factory testing plan. 2. Factory Test Results shall be submitted and approved prior to shipment of equipment. 3. Field testing plan. 4. Comply with Section 01 75 00 – Check Out and Start Up Procedures. 5. Alignment Report: a. Alignment reports shall contain numerical values to express offset and angular alignment and all other parameters documented in ANSI/ASA S2.75. b. Alignment reports shall be submitted immediately after each of the following activities have been completed: i. Preliminary Alignment ii. Final Alignment iii. Re-check of alignment 6. Preliminary field test data 7. Final field test data 8. Certified test reports E. General Information and Description 1. All parts of the equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed for the maximum stresses occurring during fabrication, transportation, installation, testing, and all conditions of operation. All materials shall be new and shall conform to all applicable Sections of these Specifications. 2. All parts of duplicate equipment shall be interchangeable without modification. Manufacturer's design shall accommodate all the requirements of these Specifications. 3. Equipment and appurtenances shall be designed in conformity with specifications, codes and reference standards. 4. All bearings and moving parts shall be protected by bushings or other Engineer approved means against wear, and provision shall be made for accessible lubrication by extending lubrication lines and fittings to approximately 30 inches above finished floor elevation. 5. Alignment Report: a. Alignment reports shall contain numerical values to express offset and angular alignment and all other parameters documented in ANSI/ASA S2.75. b. Alignment reports shall be submitted immediately after each of the following activities have been completed: i. Preliminary Alignment ii. Final Alignment iii. Re-check of alignment Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-8 5. Details shall be designed for appearance as well as utility. Protruding members, joints, corners, gear covers, etc., shall be finished in appearance. All exposed welds on machinery shall be ground smooth and the corners of structural shapes shall be rounded or chamfered. 6. Machinery parts shall conform within allowable tolerances to the dimensions shown on the working drawings. 7. All machinery and equipment shall be safeguarded in accordance with the specifications, codes, and reference standards. 8. All rotating shafts, couplings, or other moving pieces of equipment shall be provided with protective guards of sheet metal or wire mesh, neatly and rigidly supported. Guards shall be removable as required to provide access for repairs. 9. All equipment greater than 100 pounds shall have lifting lugs, eyebolts, etc., for ease of lifting, without damage or undue stress exerted on its components. 10. All manufactured items provided under this Section shall be of current manufacture and shall be the products of manufacturers specializing in the manufacture of such products. 11. Code Compliance, safety and ergonomics for operating and maintenance personnel accessing equipment shall be considered during shop drawing development, fabrication, and installation. Items to considering include but are not limited to clearances reserved for walking access around all sides, for opening access doors fully, for visual inspection for condition monitoring, and for the performance of maintenance tasks including but not limited to changing filters, replacing belts, maintaining lubrication levels, predictive maintenance and performing diagnostic functions. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty requirements shall be as specified in Section 01 61 00 – Product Requirements and Options and Section 01 75 00 – Checkout and Startup Procedures. Warranty requirements are supplementary to the individual equipment specifications. B. The equipment furnished under this Contract shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship, design, and/or materials for a period of one (1) year unless specified in the individual equipment specifications. The Equipment Supplier shall repair or replace without charge to the Owner any part of the equipment which is defective or showing undue wear within the guarantee period, or replace the equipment with new equipment if the mechanical performance is unsatisfactory; furnishing all parts, materials, labor, etc., necessary to return the equipment to its specified performance level. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Comply with specification Section 01 42 00 – References. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-9 B. Refer to the specified reference specifications, codes and standards for definitions applicable to this specification. Additional definitions are included hereafter. C. Chockplate: A solid steel (or alloy steel) plate with a machined top surface that is grouted to a concrete foundation to support and maintain alignment of a machinery structural steel base plate. D. Equipment Train: Two or more rotating equipment machinery elements consisting of at least one driver and one driven element joined together by a coupling. E. Mounting plate: A device used to attach equipment to concrete foundations; includes base plates, soleplates, and chockplates. A mounting plate is a base-support mechanism for the attached machinery and all individual pieces of machinery are expected to be removable from the mounting plate as a single assembly. F. Operating Temperature (Thermal) Alignment: A procedure to determine the actual change in relative shaft positions within a machinery train from the ambient (not running) condition and the normal operating temperature (running) condition by taking measurements from start-up to normal operating temperature while the machine(s) is (are) operating, or after the shafts have been stopped but the machines are still near operating temperature. G. Preliminary alignment: The aligning of two adjacent machinery shafts to ensure that final alignment can be achieved without being bolt bound. This is accomplished before grouting (for horizontal machines) and the measurement of piping strain on the machinery. H. Soleplate: A solid steel (or alloy steel) plate with a machined top surface that is grouted to a concrete foundation to support and maintain alignment of machinery. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All like components within a piece of equipment shall be provided by the same manufacturer. B. Base plates: 1. Top surface of mounting plates shall be machined in locations where equipment supports/feet will contact the plate. 2. Equipment contact points shall be flat and parallel within 0.002" and within related tolerances. 3. There shall be no paint where equipment supports or feet contact mounting plate. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-10 4. Mounting plate shall be sufficiently rigid to avoid bending or flexing when equipment is installed. 2.02 ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with the following Specification Sections: 1. Specification Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening. 2. Comply with individual equipment specifications. B. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and protect all necessary guides, bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, and all other appurtenances required for the installation of the devices included in the equipment specified. Working Drawings for installation shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer, and templates shall be used by the Contractor when required in the detailed equipment Specifications. C. Anchor bolts and fasteners: 1. Anchor bolts shall be designed and provided by the Contractor in accordance with Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening, and with the individual equipment Specifications. 2. All anchor bolts shall have at least the minimum diameter as required by Specification Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fasteners. 3. All anchor bolts, guard bolts, washers, clips, clamps, fasteners, and leveling plate pads, nuts, shims, and jack bolts of any type shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified the individual equipment Specifications. 4. Undercutting of anchors or fasteners shall not be permitted. 5. Pipe sleeves as a means for adjusting anchor bolts shall be provided where indicated in the contract documents or required by the equipment manufacturer. Nonshrink grout shall be as specified in Section 03 60 00 – Grout. 6. The Contractor shall provide all concrete pads or pedestals required for equipment furnished. All concrete equipment pads shall be a minimum of 4” high, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, and shall be doweled. 2.03 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Structural steel used for fabricating equipment shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. B. All materials shall conform to applicable provisions of the AISC Specifications for the design and fabrication of structural steel, and to pertinent ASTM Standard Specifications. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-11 2.04 DISSIMILAR METALS A. All dissimilar metals shall be isolated in accordance with Section 05 10 00 – Metal Materials and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2.05 GALVANIZING A. Where required by the equipment specifications, galvanizing shall be performed in accordance with Section 05 05 13 – Galvanizing. 2.06 STANDARDIZATION OF GREASE FITTINGS A. The grease fittings on all mechanical equipment shall be such that they can be serviced with a single type of grease gun. Fittings shall be “Zerk” type. 2.07 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. All electrical equipment and appurtenances, including but not limited to motors, panels, conduit, and wiring, etc., specified in the equipment specifications shall comply with the applicable requirements of the Division 26 specifications and the latest National Electrical Code. Motor starters and controls shall be furnished and installed under Division 26 and Division 40 unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications. B. In the individual equipment specifications, specified motor horsepower is intended to be the minimum size motor to be provided. If a larger motor is required to meet the specified operating conditions and performance requirements, the Contractor shall furnish the larger sized motor and shall upgrade the electrical service (conduit, wires, starters, etc.) at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Motor starters and controls shall be furnished and installed under Division 26 and Division 40 unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications. 2.08 ACCESSORIES, SPARE PARTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Accessories, spare parts, and special tools shall be provided in accordance with equipment specifications. 2.09 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. All mechanical equipment shall be provided with a substantial stainless-steel nameplate, mechanically fastened with stainless steel hardware in a conspicuous place, and clearly inscribed with: 1. The manufacturer's name 2. Year of manufacture Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-12 3. Serial number 4. Principal rating data such as (for example): a. Capacity 0) Pressure 1) Horsepower 2) Speed B. Each piece of mechanical equipment shall also be identified as to name and number by a suitable laminated plastic or stainless-steel nameplate mechanically fastened with stainless steel hardware; for example, "Raw Water Pump #1 (RWP-1)". Coordinate name and number with same on remotely located controls, control panel, and other related equipment. C. Nameplates shall not be painted over. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Painting 1. The equipment and motor shall be painted. All surface preparation, shop painting, field repairs, finish painting, and other pertinent detailed painting specifications shall conform to applicable paragraphs of Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 2. All shop coatings shall be compatible with proposed field coatings. 3. All inaccessible surfaces of the equipment, which normally require painting, shall be finished painted by the manufacturer. 4. Gears, bearing surfaces, and other unpainted surfaces shall be protected prior to shipment by a heavy covering of rust-preventive compound sprayed or hand applied which shall be maintained until the equipment is placed in operation. This coating shall be easily removable by a solvent. B. Welding 1. The Equipment Manufacturer's shop welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirement of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" or AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" of the American Welding Society, as applicable. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-13 2. The Contractor's welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" or AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" of the American Welding Society, as applicable. 3. The Contractor shall perform all field welding in conformance with the information shown on the Equipment Manufacturer's drawings regarding location, type, size, and length of all welds in accordance with "Standard Welding Symbols" AWS A2.0 of the American Welding Society, and special conditions, as shown by notes and details. 3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Shipment, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials shall be in accordance with Section 01 65 00 – Product Delivery Requirements. B. Storage of equipment and materials shall be in accordance with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Protection Requirements. C. Shipping plans shall include consideration for protecting bearings and/or other rotating equipment from chatter damage. D. Any equipment shipped to site that needs further attention shall have a WARNING tag affixed to it with indication of the action that should be taken in preparation for startup. Examples are: Final Lubrication, Mechanical Seal not in final position, etc. E. Do not store unnecessary materials or equipment on the job site and take care to prevent any structure from being loaded with a weight which will endanger its security or the safety of persons. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall obtain written installation manuals from the equipment manufacturer prior to installation. Equipment shall be installed strictly in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. A copy of all installation instructions shall be furnished to the Engineer's field representative one week prior to installation. B. The Owner’s field representative (e.g., the Engineer or similar) shall witness all activities involved with equipment installation. C. The Contractor shall have on hand personnel, construction equipment, and machinery of capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies encountered in work of this character. To minimize field erection problems, mechanical units shall be factory assembled insofar as practical. D. Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-14 E. All equipment sections and loose items shall be match-marked prior to shipping. F. The Contractor shall furnish oil and grease for initial operation and testing. The manufacturer and grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. G. Leveling and Grouting: 1. Set equipment to dimensions shown on drawings. Dimensions shall be accurate to +/- 1/16 inch except as otherwise specified, required or indicated on the drawings. 2. Rotating Equipment Shaft Alignment: Assembled equipment shafts shall be set to comply with the most stringent of the following tolerance requirements for shaft runout and shaft-to-shaft alignment tolerances expressed in angle at flex plane, in offset and angularity and/or in offset per tolerance plane separation: 3. Base plate Surface Preparation – Prior to setting equipment and grouting, inspect and clean equipment mounting base plates, pads, feet, and frames to remove all grease, rust, paint, and dirt. 4. Wedges (i.e., tapered shims) shall not be used for leveling, aligning, or supporting equipment. H. General Equipment Leveling: 1. Non-rotating Equipment: Set level to +/- 1/16 inch per 10-foot length (0.005 inch per foot) unless manufacturer’s requirements are more stringent. 2. Rotating Equipment: Install, set to the most stringent of the following requirements for levelness, plumbness, flatness, coplanarity and coplanar surface deviation: b. ASA-ANSI S2.75, Shaft Alignment Methodology. Comply with tolerance ranges scheduled at the end of this specification section. c. Individual equipment specifications d. Manufacturer’s pre-printed written requirements. e. Shims or leveling nuts shall be used unless equipment is furnished with leveling feet. Set shims flush with equipment base plate edges. When grouting is required, equipment shall be shimmed to allow a minimum of one-inch grout thickness. Grout shall cover shims at least 3 inches. Final level check shall be held for inspection and approval by Engineer before proceeding. f. Equipment shall be leveled by first using sitting nuts on the anchor bolts, and then filling the space between the equipment base and concrete pedestal with epoxy base plate grout, unless alternate methods are recommended by Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-15 the manufacturer and are acceptable to the Engineer (e.g., such as shim leveling pumps, or chemical grout). 4. Grouting a. Comply with Section 03 60 00 – Grout. b. Grout Materials: 1) Rotating Equipment: Grout for rotating equipment shall be epoxy base plate grout. Cementitious grouts shall not be accepted for rotating equipment. 2) Non-rotating Equipment: Grout shall be as per the non-rotating equipment manufacturer’s pre-printed written installation instructions and shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. c. Fill pipe sleeves with grout, after bolt alignment is proven, and prior to placing grout under equipment bases. d. Concrete Surface Preparation: Roughen concrete equipment pad surface by chipping, removing laitance, and unsound concrete. Clean area of all foreign material such as oil, grease, and scale. 1) When grouting with cementitous grouts is approved, the contact area of the concrete equipment pad shall be saturated with water at least 4 hours prior to grouting, removing excess water ponds. e. Application: 1) Place grout after the equipment base has been set and its initial alignment and level have been approved. 2) Form around the base, mix grout, and place in accordance with the grout manufacturers published instructions. 3) Grout mixture shall be flowable. Dry packing of grout shall not be permitted. 4) Eliminate all air or water pockets beneath the base using a drag chain or rope. 5) Grout voids detectable by tapping the top of the base plate with a hammer shall be grounds for removal and reinstallation of the work. f. Finishing: Point the edges of the grout to form a smooth 45-degree slope. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-16 g. After cementious grout has cured (not before 3 days after placement) paint exposed surfaces of grout with shellac. h. Level Verification. After grout has cured, and immediately prior to final drive alignment, recheck equipment for level and plumb. Re-level and square as necessary. Hold final checks for inspection and approval by Engineer. 5. Inspect for and remove all machining burrs or thread pulls in female holes on mating surfaces of mounting frame and machine feet. 3.04 ALIGNMENT A. For equipment that requires field alignment and connections, the Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's qualified mechanic, millwright, or machinist, to align the equipment and motor prior to making piping connections or anchoring the equipment base. Alignment shall be as specified herein. B. Rotating Equipment Shaft Alignment: Assembled equipment shafts shall be set to comply with the most stringent of the following tolerance requirements for shaft runout and shaft-to-shaft alignment tolerances expressed in angle at flex plane, in offset and angularity and/or in offset per tolerance plane separation: 1. SA-ANSI S2.75, Shaft Alignment Methodology. Comply with tolerance ranges scheduled at the end of this specification section. 2. Individual equipment specifications 3. Manufacturer’s pre-printed written requirements. C. Use the machined surfaces on which the equipment sets for the base/mounting frame leveling plane. Use the machined shaft surface for equipment leveling plane. D. Sprocket and Sheave Alignment: 4. Check shaft mounted components for face runout and eccentricity (outside diameter) runout by magnetically mounting a dial indicator on a stationary base and indicating over 360 degrees on a continuous machined surface at the outside diameter of the component. Maximum allowable total indicated face runout and eccentricity for sprockets and sheaves will be per ANSI Standard B29.1-1975. 5. Drive and driven sheaves shall lie in the same plane. The sum of parallel and angular sheave misalignment measured across the span length of the belt and angular misalignment perpendicular to the belt span length shall each not exceed ½ degree or the belt manufacturer’s recommendation whichever is more stringent. E. Belt tensioning: Set drive belt tension to manufacturer's specification for the belt type. Recheck alignment after drive tensioning. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-17 F. Thermal/Mechanical Growth: Thermal/mechanical growth corrections for driver and driven machines will be used in vertical and horizontal alignment where applicable. The equipment manufacturer will determine thermal/mechanical growth applicability for any machine and provide the correction offsets to be used. G. Rotating Shaft Alignment 1. Measurement devices/fixtures will be set up on the driver and driven machine, or machine shaft surfaces. Machined coupling hubs may be used only if there is no clearance to mount fixtures directly on the shafts. 2. Account for possible coupling flex by always rotating coupled machines in the same direction during alignment. 3. Final alignments shall be performed utilizing laser alignment tools unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 4. Cardan Universal Jointed Intermediate Shafting: b. Align cardan universal joints in accordance with manufacturer’s written offset recommendations. c. Offsets shall be field verified. d. Contractor shall have unit responsibility for all components of extended shaft driven equipment, including but not limited to the coordination of shaft design with equipment, variable frequency drive and control strategies. 5. Alignment Steps: Each of the following alignment steps are required in all instances, including but not limited to, all vertically and horizontally mounted drivers: a. Preliminary alignment is when uncoupled. Preliminary Alignment (at ambient temperature): 1) Perform prior to grouting and piping connections. 2) Check shaft straightness (runout). 3) Correct for soft foot. b. Final alignment method is when coupled. Final Alignment (at ambient temperature): 1) Perform after grouting and piping connections have been completed. 2) Check for pipe strain. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-18 3) Alignment shall be within tolerances. c. Final alignment method is when coupled. Final Alignment (at operating temperature after 1-hour of continuous operation): 1) Check for pipe strain. 2) Alignment shall be within tolerances (coupled). d. Re-check alignment (at operating temperature): 1) After a minimum of 24-hours of run time 2) Alignment shall be within tolerances (coupled) 6. Additional Alignment Steps for Vertical Mixers: a. Level gearbox. b. Verify vertical plumbness of shaft (while shaft is not turning). c. Grout. d. Check shaft runout. e. Install impeller blades. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00 – Checkout and Startup Procedures. B. All equipment shall be set, aligned, and assembled in conformance with the manufacturer's drawings and instructions. Provide all necessary calibrated instruments to execute performance tests. Submit report certified by the pump manufacturer’s representative. C. Preliminary Field Tests, Yellow Tag. 7. As soon as conditions permit, after the equipment has been secured in its permanent position, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the equipment is free from defects. b. Check for alignment as specified herein. c. Check for direction of rotation. d. Check motor for no load current draw. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-19 8. Contractor shall flush all bearings, gear housings, etc., in accordance with the pre- commissioning lubrication oil flushing plan and manufacturer’s pre-printed written recommendations, to remove any foreign matter accumulated during shipment, storage or erection. Lubricants shall be added as required by the manufacturer's instructions. 9. When the Contractor has demonstrated to the Engineer that the equipment is ready for operation, a yellow tag will be issued. The tag will be signed by the Engineer, or his assigned representative and attached to the equipment. The tag shall not be removed. 10. Preliminary field tests, yellow tag, must be completed before equipment is subjected to final field tests, blue tag. D. Final Field Tests, Blue Tag 1. Upon completion of the above, and at a time approved by the Engineer, the equipment will be tested by operating it as a unit with all related piping, ducting, electrical and controls, and other ancillary facilities. 2. The equipment will be placed in continuous operation as prescribed or required and witnessed by the Engineer or his assigned representative and the Owner or his assigned representative. 3. The tests shall prove that the equipment and appurtenances are properly installed, meet their operating cycles and are free from defects such as overheating, overloading, and undue vibration and noise. Operating field tests shall consist of the following: a. Check equipment for excessive vibration and noise. b. Check motor current draw under load conditions. The rated motor nameplate current shall not be exceeded. The rated motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded when a torque transducer is provided. c. Recheck alignment where applicable, after unit has run under load for a minimum of 24 hours. E. Additional field testing recommended by the manufacturer shall be performed at no cost to Owner. F. Until final field tests are acceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes, readjustments, and replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Upon acceptance of the field tests, a blue tag will be issued. The tag will be signed by the Engineer and attached to the unit. The tag shall not be removed, and no further Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-20 construction work will be performed on the unit, except as required during start-up operations and directed by the Engineer. H. Defects which cannot be corrected by installation adjustments will be sufficient grounds for rejection of any equipment. I. All costs in connection with field testing of equipment such as lubricants, temporary instruments, labor, equipment, etc., shall be borne by the Contractor. Power, fuel, chemicals, water, etc. normally consumed by specific equipment shall be supplied by the Owner unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications. J. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. K. Field testing of electric motors shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 60 – Low- Voltage Electric Motors, and Section 26 05 00, Basic Electrical Requirements. 3.06 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturer’s field services shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00 – Checkout and Startup Procedures. B. The Contractor shall arrange for a qualified factory trained Technical Representative from each manufacturer or supplier of equipment who is regularly involved in the inspection, installation, startup, troubleshooting, testing, maintenance, and operation of the specified equipment. Qualification of the Technical Representative shall be appropriate to the type of equipment furnished and subject to the approval of the Engineer and the Owner. Where equipment furnished has significant process complexity, furnish the services of engineering personnel knowledgeable in the process involved and the function of the equipment. When necessary, the Contractor shall schedule multiple Technical Representatives to be present at the same time for the purpose of coordinating the operation of multiple pieces of related equipment. C. Services of the Technical Representative will require a minimum of two (2) site visits, one for installation and testing and one for startup and training, and will be for the minimum number of days recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer but will not be less than the number of days specified in individual equipment sections. Additional site visits may be required as described below and in the equipment specifications. D. For each site visit, the Technical Representative shall submit jointly to the Owner, the Engineer, and the Contractor a complete signed report of the results of his inspection, operation, adjustments, and testing. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-21 E. The manufacturer's Technical Representative shall provide the following services. 1. Installation: The Technical Representative shall inspect the installed equipment to verify that installation is in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Where required by individual equipment specifications, the Technical Representative shall also supervise the installation of the equipment. 2. Testing: After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the Technical Representative shall inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment as required to prove that the equipment is in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. Unless otherwise noted in the signed site visit report, the report shall constitute a certification that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for startup and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. The report shall include date of final acceptance field test, as well as a listing of all persons present during tests. 3. Startup: The Technical Representative shall start up the equipment for actual service with the help of the Contractor. If equipment or installation problems are experienced, the Contractor and the representative shall provide the necessary services until the equipment is operating satisfactorily and performing according to the specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. Unless otherwise noted in the signed site visit report, the report shall constitute a certification that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. 4. Training: Training shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 79 00 –Instruction of Owner Personnel. 5. Services after Startup: Where required by the individual equipment specifications, the Technical Representative shall return to the project site thirty (30) days after the startup date to review the equipment performance, correct any equipment problems, and conduct operation and maintenance classes as required by the Owner. This follow-up trip is required in addition to the specified services of Technical Representative prior to and during equipment startup. At this time, if there are no equipment problems, each manufacturer shall certify to the Owner in writing that his equipment is fully operational and capable of meeting operating requirements. If the equipment is operating incorrectly, the Technical Representative will make no certification to the Owner until the problems are corrected and the equipment demonstrates a successful thirty (30) days operating period. F. The Contract amount shall include the cost of furnishing the Technical Representative for the minimum number of days specified, and any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation. The times specified for services by the Technical Representative in the equipment Specifications are exclusive of travel time to and from Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-22 the facility and shall not be construed as to relieve the manufacturer of any additional visits to provide sufficient service to place the equipment in satisfactory operation. G. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 14 days in advance of each equipment test or Owner training session. H. The Technical Representative shall sign in and out at the office of the Engineer's Resident Project Representative on each day the Technical Representative is at the project. 3.07 TESTING A. Shop Testing 1. All equipment shall be tested in the shop of the manufacturer in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents and that it will operate in the manner specified or implied. 2. No equipment shall be shipped to the project site until the Engineer has been furnished a certified copy of test results and has notified the Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable. 3. A certified copy of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results thereof shall be forwarded to the Engineer for review. 4. If required by the individual equipment Specifications, arrangements shall be made for the Owner/Engineer to witness performance tests in the manufacturer's shop. The Engineer shall be notified ten working days before shop testing commences. Expenses are to be paid by Owner. 5. Shop testing of electric motors shall conform to: a. Section 26 05 60 – Low-Voltage Electric Motors b. Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements B. Field Testing 1. Field testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00 – Checkout and Startup Procedures. 2. All equipment shall be set, aligned, and assembled in conformance with the manufacturer's drawings and instructions. Provide all necessary calibrated instruments to execute performance tests. Submit report certified by the pump manufacturer’s representative. 3. Preliminary Field Tests, Yellow Tag Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-23 a. A soon as conditions permit, after the equipment has been secured in its permanent position, the Contractor shall: 1) Verify that the equipment is free from defects. 2) Check for alignment as specified herein. 3) Check for direction of rotation. 4) Check motor for no load current draw. b. Contractor shall flush all bearings, gear housings, etc., in accordance with the pre-commissioning lubrication oil flushing plan and manufacturer’s pre- printed written recommendations, to remove any foreign matter accumulated during shipment, storage or erection. Lubricants shall be added as required by the manufacturer's instructions. c. When the Contractor has demonstrated to the Engineer that the equipment is ready for operation, a yellow tag will be issued. The tag will be signed by the Engineer, or his assigned representative and attached to the equipment. The tag shall not be removed. d. Preliminary field tests, yellow tag, must be completed before equipment is subjected to final field tests, blue tag. 6. Final Field Test, Blue Tag a. Upon completion of the above, and at a time approved by the Engineer, the equipment will be tested by operating it as a unit with all related piping, ducting, electrical and controls, and other ancillary facilities. b. The equipment will be placed in continuous operation as prescribed or required and witnessed by the Engineer or his assigned representative and the Owner or his assigned representative. c. The tests shall prove that the equipment and appurtenances are properly installed, meet their operating cycles and are free from defects such as overheating, overloading, and undue vibration and noise. Operating field tests shall consist of the following: 1) Check equipment for excessive vibration and noise. 2) Check motor current draw under load conditions. The rated motor nameplate current shall not be exceeded. The rated motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded when a torque transducer is provided. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-24 3) Recheck alignment where applicable, after unit has run under load for a minimum of 24 hours. 7. Additional field testing recommended by the manufacturer shall be performed at no cost to Owner. 8. Until final field tests are acceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes, readjustments, and replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. 9. Upon acceptance of the field tests, a blue tag will be issued. The tag will be signed by the Engineer and attached to the unit. The tag shall not be removed, and no further construction work will be performed on the unit, except as required during startup operations and directed by the Engineer. 10. Defects which cannot be corrected by installation adjustments will be sufficient grounds for rejection of any equipment. 11. All costs in connection with field testing of equipment such as lubricants, temporary instruments, labor, equipment, etc., shall be borne by the Contractor. Power, fuel, chemicals, water, etc. normally consumed by specific equipment shall be supplied by the Owner unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications. 12. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. 13. Field testing of electric motors shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 60 – Low- Voltage Electric Motors; , and Section 26 05 00, Basic Electrical Requirements. C. Vibration Testing 2. Vibration testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00 – Checkout and Startup Procedures. D. Failure of Equipment to Perform 1. Any defects in the equipment, or failure to meet the guarantees or performance requirements of the Specifications shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor by replacements or otherwise. 2. If the Contractor fails to make these corrections, or if the improved equipment shall fail again to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding his having made partial payment for work and materials which have entered into the manufacture of said equipment, may reject said equipment Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Equipment General Provisions Cottonwoods Connection Page 46 00 00-25 and order the Contractor to remove it from the premises at the Contractor's expense. 3. The Contractor shall then obtain specified equipment to meet the contract requirements or upon mutual agreement with the Owner, adjust the contract price to reflect not supplying the specific equipment item. 4. In case the Owner rejects said equipment, then the Contractor hereby agrees to repay to the Owner all sums of money paid to him for said rejected equipment on progress certificates or otherwise on account of the lump sum prices herein specified. 5. Upon receipt of said sums of money, the Owner will execute and deliver to the Contractor a bill of sale of all his rights, title, and interest in and to said rejected equipment; provided, however, that said equipment shall not be removed from the premises until the Owner obtains from other sources other equipment to take the place of that rejected. 6. Said bill of sale shall not abrogate Owner's right to recover damages for delays, losses, or other conditions arising out of the basic contract. END OF SECTION